(a) General information. This section provides a means for seeking waivers of the test procedure requirements of this subpart for basic models that meet the requirements of paragraph (a)(1) of this section. In granting a waiver or interim waiver, DOE will not change the energy use or efficiency metric that the manufacturer must use to certify compliance with the applicable energy conservation standard and to make representations about the energy use or efficiency of the covered product. The granting of a waiver or interim waiver by DOE does not exempt such basic models from any other regulatory requirement contained in this part or the certification and compliance requirements of 10 CFR part 429 and specifies an alternative method for testing the basic models addressed in the waiver.
(1) Any interested person may submit a petition to waive for a particular basic model any requirements of Sec. 430.23 or of any appendix to this subpart, upon the grounds that the basic model contains one or more design characteristics which either prevent testing of the basic model according to the prescribed test procedures or cause the prescribed test procedures to evaluate the basic model in a manner so unrepresentative of its true energy and/or water consumption characteristics as to provide materially inaccurate comparative data.
(2) Manufacturers of basic model(s) subject to a waiver or interim waiver are responsible for complying with the other requirements of this subpart and with the requirements of 10 CFR part 429 regardless of the person that originally submitted the petition for waiver and/or interim waiver. The filing of a petition for waiver and/or interim waiver shall not constitute grounds for noncompliance with any requirements of this subpart.
(3) All correspondence regarding waivers and interim waivers must be submitted to DOE either electronically to AS--Waiver--Requests@ee.doe.gov (preferred method of transmittal) or by mail to U.S. Department of Energy, Building Technologies Program, Test Procedure Waiver, 1000 Independence Avenue SW., Mailstop EE-5B, Washington, DC 20585-0121.
(b) Petition content and publication. (1) Each petition for waiver must:
(1) Each petition for waiver must:
(i) Identify the particular basic model(s) for which a waiver is requested, each brand name under which the identified basic model(s) will be distributed in commerce, the design characteristic(s) constituting the grounds for the petition, and the specific requirements sought to be waived, and must discuss in detail the need for the requested waiver;
(ii) Identify manufacturers of all other basic models distributed in commerce in the United States and known to the petitioner to incorporate design characteristic(s) similar to those found in the basic model that is the subject of the petition;
(iii) Include any alternate test procedures known to the petitioner to evaluate the performance of the product type in a manner representative of the energy and/or water consumption characteristics of the basic model; and
(iv) Be signed by the petitioner or an authorized representative. In accordance with the provisions set forth in 10 CFR 1004.11, any request for confidential treatment of any information contained in a petition for waiver or in supporting documentation must be accompanied by a copy of the petition, application or supporting documentation from which the information claimed to be confidential has been deleted. DOE will publish in the Federal Register the petition and supporting documents from which confidential information, as determined by DOE, has been deleted in accordance with 10 CFR 1004.11 and will solicit comments, data and information with respect to the determination of the petition.
(2) Each petition for interim waiver must reference the related petition for waiver by identifying the particular basic model(s) for which a waiver is being sought. Each petition for interim waiver must demonstrate likely success of the petition for waiver and address what economic hardship and/or competitive disadvantage is likely to result absent a favorable determination on the petition for interim waiver. Each petition for interim waiver must be signed by the petitioner or an authorized representative.
(c) Notification to other manufacturers. (1) Each petitioner for interim waiver must, upon publication of a grant of an interim waiver in the Federal Register, notify in writing all known manufacturers of domestically marketed basic models of the same product class (as specified in 10 CFR 430.32) and of other product classes known to the petitioner to use the technology or have the characteristic at issue in the waiver. The notice must include a statement that DOE has published the interim waiver and petition for waiver in the Federal Register and the date the petition for waiver was published. The notice must also include a statement that DOE will receive and consider timely written comments on the petition for waiver. Within five working days, each petitioner must file with DOE a statement certifying the names and addresses of each person to whom a notice of the petition for waiver has been sent.
(1) Each petitioner for interim waiver must, upon publication of a grant of an interim waiver in the Federal Register, notify in writing all known manufacturers of domestically marketed basic models of the same product class (as specified in 10 CFR 430.32) and of other product classes known to the petitioner to use the technology or have the characteristic at issue in the waiver. The notice must include a statement that DOE has published the interim waiver and petition for waiver in the Federal Register and the date the petition for waiver was published. The notice must also include a statement that DOE will receive and consider timely written comments on the petition for waiver. Within five working days, each petitioner must file with DOE a statement certifying the names and addresses of each person to whom a notice of the petition for waiver has been sent.
(2) If a petitioner does not request an interim waiver and notification has not been provided pursuant to paragraph (c)(1) of this section, each petitioner, after filing a petition for waiver with DOE, and after the petition for waiver has been published in the Federal Register, must, within five working days of such publication, notify in writing all known manufacturers of domestically marketed units of the same product class (as listed in 10 CFR 430.32) and of other product classes known to the petitioner to use the technology or have the characteristic at issue in the waiver. The notice must include a statement that DOE has published the petition in the Federal Register and the date the petition for waiver was published. Within five working days of the publication of the petition in the Federal Register, each petitioner must file with DOE a statement certifying the names and addresses of each person to whom a notice of the petition for waiver has been sent.
(d) Public comment and rebuttal. (1) Any person submitting written comments to DOE with respect to an interim waiver must also send a copy of the comments to the petitioner by the deadline specified in the notice.
(1) Any person submitting written comments to DOE with respect to an interim waiver must also send a copy of the comments to the petitioner by the deadline specified in the notice.
(2) Any person submitting written comments to DOE with respect to a petition for waiver must also send a copy of such comments to the petitioner.
(3) A petitioner may, within 10 working days of the close of the comment period specified in the Federal Register, submit a rebuttal statement to DOE. A petitioner may rebut more than one comment in a single rebuttal statement.
(e) Provisions specific to interim waivers--(1) Disposition of application. If administratively feasible, DOE will notify the applicant in writing of the disposition of the petition for interim waiver within 30 business days of receipt of the application. Notice of DOE's determination on the petition for interim waiver will be published in the Federal Register.
(1) Disposition of application. If administratively feasible, DOE will notify the applicant in writing of the disposition of the petition for interim waiver within 30 business days of receipt of the application. Notice of DOE's determination on the petition for interim waiver will be published in the Federal Register.
(2) Criteria for granting. DOE will grant an interim waiver from the test procedure requirements if it appears likely that the petition for waiver will be granted and/or if DOE determines that it would be desirable for public policy reasons to grant immediate relief pending a determination on the petition for waiver.
(f) Provisions specific to waivers--(1) Disposition of application. The petitioner shall be notified in writing as soon as practicable of the disposition of each petition for waiver. DOE shall issue a decision on the petition as soon as is practicable following receipt and review of the Petition for Waiver and other applicable documents, including, but not limited to, comments and rebuttal statements.
(1) Disposition of application. The petitioner shall be notified in writing as soon as practicable of the disposition of each petition for waiver. DOE shall issue a decision on the petition as soon as is practicable following receipt and review of the Petition for Waiver and other applicable documents, including, but not limited to, comments and rebuttal statements.
(2) Criteria for granting. DOE will grant a waiver from the test procedure requirements if DOE determines either that the basic model(s) for which the waiver was requested contains a design characteristic that prevents testing of the basic model according to the prescribed test procedures, or that the prescribed test procedures evaluate the basic model in a manner so unrepresentative of its true energy or water consumption characteristics as to provide materially inaccurate comparative data. Waivers may be granted subject to conditions, which may include adherence to alternate test procedures specified by DOE. DOE will consult with the Federal Trade Commission prior to granting any waiver, and will promptly publish in the Federal Register notice of each waiver granted or denied, and any limiting conditions of each waiver granted.
(g) Extension to additional basic models. A petitioner may request that DOE extend the scope of a waiver or an interim waiver to include additional basic models employing the same technology as the basic model(s) set forth in the original petition. DOE will publish any such extension in the Federal Register.
(h) Duration. (1) Within one year of issuance of an interim waiver, DOE will either:
(1) Within one year of issuance of an interim waiver, DOE will either:
(i) Publish in the Federal Register a determination on the petition for waiver; or
(ii) Publish in the Federal Register a new or amended test procedure that addresses the issues presented in the waiver.
(2) When DOE amends the test procedure to address the issues presented in a waiver, the waiver will automatically terminate on the date on which use of that test procedure is required to demonstrate compliance.
(i) Compliance certification. (1) If the alternate test procedure specified in the interim waiver differs from the alternate test procedure specified by DOE in a subsequent decision and order granting the petition for waiver, a manufacturer who has already certified basic models using the procedure permitted in DOE's grant of an interim test procedure waiver is not required to re-test and re-rate those basic models so long as: The manufacturer used that alternative procedure to certify the compliance of the basic model after DOE granted the company's interim waiver request; changes have not been made to those basic models that would cause them to use more energy or otherwise be less energy efficient; and the manufacturer does not modify the certified rating. However, if the alternate test procedure specified in the interim waiver differs from the alternate test procedure specified by DOE in a subsequent decision and order granting the petition for waiver and if specified by DOE in the decision and order, the manufacturer must re-test and re-certify compliance using the procedure specified by DOE in the decision and order by the time of the next annual certification.
(1) If the alternate test procedure specified in the interim waiver differs from the alternate test procedure specified by DOE in a subsequent decision and order granting the petition for waiver, a manufacturer who has already certified basic models using the procedure permitted in DOE's grant of an interim test procedure waiver is not required to re-test and re-rate those basic models so long as: The manufacturer used that alternative procedure to certify the compliance of the basic model after DOE granted the company's interim waiver request; changes have not been made to those basic models that would cause them to use more energy or otherwise be less energy efficient; and the manufacturer does not modify the certified rating. However, if the alternate test procedure specified in the interim waiver differs from the alternate test procedure specified by DOE in a subsequent decision and order granting the petition for waiver and if specified by DOE in the decision and order, the manufacturer must re-test and re-certify compliance using the procedure specified by DOE in the decision and order by the time of the next annual certification.
(2) After DOE publishes a decision and order in the Federal Register, a manufacturer must use the test procedure contained in that notice to rate any basic models covered by the waiver that have not yet been certified to DOE and for any future testing in support of the certification for the basic model(s) while the waiver is valid.
(j) Petition for waiver required of other manufacturers. Within 60 days after DOE issues a waiver to a manufacturer for a product employing a particular technology or having a particular characteristic, any manufacturer currently distributing in commerce in the United States a product employing a technology or characteristic that results in the same need for a waiver (as specified by DOE in the published decision and order on the petition in the Federal Register) must submit a petition for waiver pursuant to the requirements of this section. Manufacturers not currently distributing such products in commerce in the United States must petition for and be granted a waiver prior to distribution in commerce in the United States. Manufacturers may also submit a request for interim waiver pursuant to the requirements of this section.
(k) Rescission or modification. (1) DOE may rescind or modify a waiver or interim waiver at any time upon DOE's determination that the factual basis underlying the petition for waiver or interim waiver is incorrect, or upon a determination that the results from the alternate test procedure are unrepresentative of the basic model(s)' true energy consumption characteristics. Waivers and interim waivers are conditioned upon the validity of statements, representations, and documents provided by the requestor; any evidence that the original grant of a waiver or interim waiver was based upon inaccurate information will weigh against continuation of the waiver. DOE's decision will specify the basis for its determination and, in the case of a modification, will also specify the change to the authorized test procedure.
(1) DOE may rescind or modify a waiver or interim waiver at any time upon DOE's determination that the factual basis underlying the petition for waiver or interim waiver is incorrect, or upon a determination that the results from the alternate test procedure are unrepresentative of the basic model(s)' true energy consumption characteristics. Waivers and interim waivers are conditioned upon the validity of statements, representations, and documents provided by the requestor; any evidence that the original grant of a waiver or interim waiver was based upon inaccurate information will weigh against continuation of the waiver. DOE's decision will specify the basis for its determination and, in the case of a modification, will also specify the change to the authorized test procedure.
(2) A person may request that DOE rescind or modify a waiver or interim waiver issued to that person if the person discovers an error in the information provided to DOE as part of its petition, determines that the waiver is no longer needed, or for other appropriate reasons. In a request for rescission, the requestor must provide a statement explaining why it is requesting rescission. In a request for modification, the requestor must explain the need for modification to the authorized test procedure and detail the modifications needed and the corresponding impact on measured energy consumption.
(3) DOE will publish a proposed rescission or modification (DOE-initiated or at the request of the original requestor) in the Federal Register for public comment. A requestor may, within 10 working days of the close of the comment period specified in the proposed rescission or modification published in the Federal Register, submit a rebuttal statement to DOE. A requestor may rebut more than one comment in a single rebuttal statement.
(4) DOE will publish its decision in the Federal Register. DOE's determination will be based on relevant information contained in the record and any comments received.
(5) After the effective date of a rescission, any basic model(s) previously subject to a waiver must be tested and certified using the applicable DOE test procedure in 10 CFR part 430.
(l) Revision of regulation. As soon as practicable after the granting of any waiver, DOE will publish in the Federal Register a notice of proposed rulemaking to amend its regulations so as to eliminate any need for the continuation of such waiver. As soon thereafter as practicable, DOE will publish in the Federal Register a final rule.
(m) To exhaust administrative remedies, any person aggrieved by an action under this section must file an appeal with the DOE's Office of Hearings and Appeals as provided in 10 CFR part 1003, subpart C. [79 FR 26599, May 9, 2014]
Sec. Appendix A to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Electric Refrigerators and Electric
Refrigerator-Freezers
Beginning on September 15, 2014, the test procedures in appendix A must be used to determine compliance with energy conservation standards for refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers. Prior to September 15, 2014, manufacturers may continue to use appendix A1 or may elect to use appendix A early to show compliance with the September 15, 2014 energy conservation standards. Manufacturers must use a single appendix for all representations of energy use of a basic model, including certifications of compliance, and may not use appendix A1 for certain representations and appendix A for other representations.
1. Definitions
Section 3, Definitions, of HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) applies to this test procedure.
1.1 ``Adjusted total volume'' means the sum of:
(i) The fresh food compartment volume as defined in HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) in cubic feet, and
(ii) The product of an adjustment factor and the net freezer compartment volume as defined in HRF-1-2008 in cubic feet.
1.2 ``All-refrigerator'' means an electric refrigerator that does not include a compartment for the freezing and long time storage of food at temperatures below 32 [deg]F (0.0 [deg]C). It may include a compartment of 0.50 cubic-foot capacity (14.2 liters) or less for the freezing and storage of ice.
1.3 ``Anti-sweat heater'' means a device incorporated into the design of a refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer to prevent the accumulation of moisture on the exterior or interior surfaces of the cabinet.
1.4 ``Anti-sweat heater switch'' means a user-controllable switch or user interface which modifies the activation or control of anti-sweat heaters.
1.5 ``AS/NZS 4474.1:2007'' means Australian/New Zealand Standard 4474.1:2007, Performance of household electrical appliances--Refrigerating appliances, Part 1: Energy consumption and performance. Only sections of AS/NZS 4474.1:2007 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) specifically referenced in this test procedure are part of this test procedure. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over AS/NZS 4474.1:2007.
1.6 ``Automatic defrost'' means a system in which the defrost cycle is automatically initiated and terminated, with resumption of normal refrigeration at the conclusion of the defrost operation. The system automatically prevents the permanent formation of frost on all refrigerated surfaces. Nominal refrigerated food temperatures are maintained during the operation of the automatic defrost system.
1.7 ``Automatic icemaker'' means a device, that can be supplied with water without user intervention, either from a pressurized water supply system or by transfer from a water reservoir located inside the cabinet, that automatically produces, harvests, and stores ice in a storage bin, with means to automatically interrupt the harvesting operation when the ice storage bin is filled to a pre-determined level.
1.8 ``Complete temperature cycle'' means a time period defined based upon the cycling of compartment temperature that starts when the compartment temperature is at a maximum and ends when the compartment temperature returns to an equivalent maximum (within 0.5 [deg]F of the starting temperature), having in the interim fallen to a minimum and subsequently risen again to reach the second maximum. Alternatively, a complete temperature cycle can be defined to start when the compartment temperature is at a minimum and end when the compartment temperature returns to an equivalent minimum (within 0.5 [deg]F of the starting temperature), having in the interim risen to a maximum and subsequently fallen again to reach the second minimum.
1.9 ``Cycle'' means the period of 24 hours for which the energy use of an electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer is calculated as though the consumer activated compartment temperature controls were set to maintain the standardized temperatures (see section 3.2).
1.10 ``Cycle type'' means the set of test conditions having the calculated effect of operating an electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer for a period of 24 hours, with the consumer activated controls other than those that control compartment temperatures set to establish various operating characteristics.
1.11 ``Defrost cycle type'' means a distinct sequence of control whose function is to remove frost and/or ice from a refrigerated surface. There may be variations in the defrost control sequence such as the number of defrost heaters energized. Each such variation establishes a separate distinct defrost cycle type. However, defrost achieved regularly during the compressor off-cycles by warming of the evaporator without active heat addition, although a form of automatic defrost, does not constitute a unique defrost cycle type for the purposes of identifying the test period in accordance with section 4 of this appendix.
1.12 ``Externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer'' means an electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer that has an enclosed condenser or an enclosed condenser/compressor compartment and a set of air ducts for transferring the exterior air from outside the building envelope into, through, and out of the refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer cabinet; is capable of mixing exterior air with the room air before discharging into, through, and out of the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment; may include thermostatically controlled dampers or controls that mix the exterior and room air at low outdoor temperatures and exclude exterior air when the outdoor air temperature is above 80 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C) or the room air temperature; and may have a thermostatically actuated exterior air fan.
1.13 ``HRF-1-2008'' means AHAM Standard HRF-1-2008, Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers, Energy and Internal Volume of Refrigerating Appliances (2008), including Errata to Energy and Internal Volume of Refrigerating Appliances, Correction Sheet issued November 17, 2009. Only sections of HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) specifically referenced in this test procedure are part of this test procedure. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over HRF-1-2008.
1.14 ``Ice storage bin'' means a container in which ice can be stored.
1.15 ``Long-time automatic defrost'' means an automatic defrost system whose successive defrost cycles are separated by 14 hours or more of compressor operating time.
1.16 ``Multiple-compressor'' refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer means a refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer with more than one compressor.
1.17 ``Precooling'' means operating a refrigeration system before initiation of a defrost cycle to reduce one or more compartment temperatures significantly (more than 0.5 [deg]F) below its minimum during stable operation between defrosts.
1.18 ``Recovery'' means operating a refrigeration system after the conclusion of a defrost cycle to reduce the temperature of one or more compartments to the temperature range that the compartment(s) exhibited during stable operation between defrosts.
1.19 ``Separate auxiliary compartment'' means a freezer compartment or a fresh food compartment of a refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer having more than two compartments that is not the first freezer compartment or the first fresh food compartment. Access to a separate auxiliary compartment is through a separate exterior door or doors rather than through the door or doors of another compartment. Separate auxiliary compartments may be convertible (e.g., from fresh food to freezer). Separate auxiliary freezer compartments may not be larger than the first freezer compartment and separate auxiliary fresh food compartments may not be larger than the first fresh food compartment, but such size restrictions do not apply to separate auxiliary convertible compartments.
1.20 ``Special compartment'' means any compartment other than a butter conditioner, without doors directly accessible from the exterior, and with separate temperature control (such as crispers convertible to meat keepers) that is not convertible from fresh food temperature range to freezer temperature range.
1.21 ``Stabilization period'' means the total period of time during which steady-state conditions are being attained or evaluated.
1.22 ``Stable operation'' means operation after steady-state conditions have been achieved but excluding any events associated with defrost cycles. During stable operation the average rate of change of compartment temperature must not exceed 0.042 [deg]F (0.023 [deg]C) per hour for all compartment temperatures. Such a calculation performed for compartment temperatures at any two times, or for any two periods of time comprising complete cycles, during stable operation must meet this requirement.
(A) If compartment temperatures do not cycle, the relevant calculation shall be the difference between the temperatures at two points in time divided by the difference, in hours, between those points in time.
(B) If compartment temperatures cycle as a result of compressor cycling or other cycling operation of any system component (e.g., a damper, fan, or heater), the relevant calculation shall be the difference between compartment temperature averages evaluated for whole compressor cycles or complete temperature cycles divided by the difference, in hours, between either the starts, ends, or mid-times of the two cycles.
1.23 ``Standard cycle'' means the cycle type in which the anti-sweat heater control, when provided, is set in the highest energy-consuming position.
1.24 ``Through-the-door ice/water dispenser'' means a device incorporated within the cabinet, but outside the boundary of the refrigerated space, that delivers to the user on demand ice and may also deliver water from within the refrigerated space without opening an exterior door. This definition includes dispensers that are capable of dispensing ice and water or ice only.
1.25 ``Variable anti-sweat heater control'' means an anti-sweat heater control that varies the average power input of the anti-sweat heater(s) based on operating condition variable(s) and/or ambient condition variable(s).
1.26 ``Variable defrost control'' means an automatic defrost system in which successive defrost cycles are determined by an operating condition variable or variables other than solely compressor operating time. This includes any electrical or mechanical device performing this function. A control scheme that changes the defrost interval from a fixed length to an extended length (without any intermediate steps) is not considered a variable defrost control. A variable defrost control feature should predict the accumulation of frost on the evaporator and react accordingly. Therefore, the times between defrost should vary with different usage patterns and include a continuum of lengths of time between defrosts as inputs vary.
2. Test Conditions
2.1 Ambient Temperature Measurement. Temperature measuring devices shall be shielded so that indicated temperatures are not affected by the operation of the condensing unit or adjacent units.
2.1.1 Ambient Temperature. The ambient temperature shall be recorded at points located 3 feet (91.5 cm) above the floor and 10 inches (25.4 cm) from the center of the two sides of the unit under test. The ambient temperature shall be 90.0 1.0 [deg]F (32.2 0.6 [deg]C) during the stabilization period and the test period.
2.1.2 Ambient Temperature Gradient. The test room vertical ambient temperature gradient in any foot of vertical distance from 2 inches (5.1 cm) above the floor or supporting platform to a height of 1 foot (30.5 cm) above the top of the unit under test is not to exceed 0.5 [deg]F per foot (0.9 [deg]C per meter). The vertical ambient temperature gradient at locations 10 inches (25.4 cm) out from the centers of the two sides of the unit being tested is to be maintained during the test. To demonstrate that this requirement has been met, test data must include measurements taken using temperature sensors at locations 10 inches (25.4 cm) from the center of the two sides of the unit under test at heights of 2 inches (5.1 cm) and 36 inches (91.4 cm) above the floor or supporting platform and at a height of 1 foot (30.5 cm) above the unit under test.
2.1.3 Platform. A platform must be used if the floor temperature is not within 3 [deg]F (1.7 [deg]C) of the measured ambient temperature. If a platform is used, it is to have a solid top with all sides open for air circulation underneath, and its top shall extend at least 1 foot (30.5 cm) beyond each side and front of the unit under test and extend to the wall in the rear.
2.2 Operational Conditions. The unit under test shall be installed and its operating conditions maintained in accordance with HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), sections 5.3.2 through section 5.5.5.5 (excluding section 5.5.5.4). Exceptions and clarifications to the cited sections of HRF-1-2008 are noted in sections 2.3 through 2.8, and 5.1 of this appendix.
2.3 Anti-Sweat Heaters. The anti-sweat heater switch is to be on during one test and off during a second test. In the case of an electric refrigerator-freezer equipped with variable anti-sweat heater control, the standard cycle energy use shall be the result of the calculation described in 6.2.3.
2.4 Conditions for Automatic Defrost Refrigerator-Freezers. For automatic defrost refrigerator-freezers, the freezer compartments shall not be loaded with any frozen food packages during testing. Cylindrical metallic masses of dimensions 1.12 0.25 inches (2.9 0.6 cm) in diameter and height shall be attached in good thermal contact with each temperature sensor within the refrigerated compartments. All temperature measuring sensor masses shall be supported by low-thermal-conductivity supports in such a manner to ensure that there will be at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) of air space separating the thermal mass from contact with any interior surface or hardware inside the cabinet. In case of interference with hardware at the sensor locations specified in section 5.1, the sensors shall be placed at the nearest adjacent location such that there will be a 1-inch air space separating the sensor mass from the hardware.
2.5 Conditions for All-Refrigerators. There shall be no load in the freezer compartment during the test.
2.6 The cabinet and its refrigerating mechanism shall be assembled and set up in accordance with the printed consumer instructions supplied with the cabinet. Set-up of the refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer shall not deviate from these instructions, unless explicitly required or allowed by this test procedure. Specific required or allowed deviations from such set-up include the following:
(a) Connection of water lines and installation of water filters are not required;
(b) Clearance requirements from surfaces of the product shall be as described in section 2.8 of this appendix;
(c) The electric power supply shall be as described in HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), section 5.5.1;
(d) Temperature control settings for testing shall be as described in section 3 below. Settings for convertible compartments and other temperature-controllable or special compartments shall be as described in section 2.7 of this appendix;
(e) The product does not need to be anchored or otherwise secured to prevent tipping during energy testing;
(f) All the product's chutes and throats required for the delivery of ice shall be free of packing, covers, or other blockages that may be fitted for shipping or when the icemaker is not in use; and
(g) Ice storage bins shall be emptied of ice.
For cases in which set-up is not clearly defined by this test procedure, manufacturers must submit a petition for a waiver (see section 7).
2.7 Compartments that are convertible (e.g., from fresh food to freezer) shall be operated in the highest energy use position. For the special case of convertible separate auxiliary compartments, this means that the compartment shall be treated as a freezer compartment or a fresh food compartment, depending on which of these represents higher energy use. Special compartments shall be tested with controls set to provide the coldest temperature. However, for special compartments in which temperature control is achieved using the addition of heat (including resistive electric heating, refrigeration system waste heat, or heat from any other source, but excluding the transfer of air from another part of the interior of the product) for any part of the controllable temperature range of that compartment, the product energy use shall be determined by averaging two sets of tests. The first set of tests shall be conducted with such special compartments at their coldest settings, and the second set of tests shall be conducted with such special compartments at their warmest settings. The requirements for the warmest or coldest temperature settings of this section do not apply to features or functions associated with temperature control (such as fast chill compartments) that are initiated manually and terminated automatically within 168 hours.
2.8 Rear Clearance.
(a) General. The space between the lowest edge of the rear plane of the cabinet and a vertical surface (the test room wall or simulated wall) shall be the minimum distance in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, unless other provisions of this section apply. The rear plane shall be considered to be the largest flat surface at the rear of the cabinet, excluding features that protrude beyond this surface, such as brackets or compressors.
(b) Maximum clearance. The clearance shall not be greater than 2 inches (51 mm) from the lowest edge of the rear plane to the vertical surface, unless the provisions of paragraph (c) of this section apply.
(c) If permanent rear spacers or other components that protrude beyond the rear plane extend further than the 2 inch (51 mm) distance, or if the highest edge of the rear plane is in contact with the vertical surface when the unit is positioned with the lowest edge of the rear plane at or further than the 2 inch (51 mm) distance from the vertical surface, the appliance shall be located with the spacers or other components protruding beyond the rear plane, or the highest edge of the rear plane, in contact with the vertical surface.
(d) Rear-mounted condensers. If the product has a flat rear-wall-mounted condenser (i.e., a rear-wall-mounted condenser with all refrigerant tube centerlines within 0.25 inches (6.4 mm) of the condenser plane), and the area of the condenser plane represents at least 25% of the total area of the rear wall of the cabinet, then the spacing to the vertical surface may be measured from the lowest edge of the condenser plane.
2.9 Steady-State Condition. Steady-state conditions exist if the temperature measurements in all measured compartments taken at 4-minute intervals or less during a stabilization period are not changing at a rate greater than 0.042 [deg]F (0.023 [deg]C) per hour as determined by the applicable condition of A or B, described below.
A. The average of the measurements during a 2-hour period if no cycling occurs or during a number of complete repetitive compressor cycles occurring through a period of no less than 2 hours is compared to the average over an equivalent time period with 3 hours elapsing between the two measurement periods.
B. If A above cannot be used, the average of the measurements during a number of complete repetitive compressor cycles occurring through a period of no less than 2 hours and including the last complete cycle before a defrost period (or if no cycling occurs, the average of the measurements during the last 2 hours before a defrost period) are compared to the same averaging period before the following defrost period.
2.10 Exterior Air for Externally Vented Refrigerator or Refrigerator-Freezer. An exterior air source shall be provided with adjustable temperature and pressure capabilities. The exterior air temperature shall be adjustable from 30 1 [deg]F (1.7 0.6 [deg]C) to 90 1 [deg]F (32.2 0.6 [deg]C).
2.10.1 Air Duct. The exterior air shall pass from the exterior air source to the test unit through an insulated air duct.
2.10.2 Air Temperature Measurement. The air temperature entering the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment shall be maintained to 3 [deg]F (1.7 [deg]C) during the stabilization and test periods and shall be measured at the inlet point of the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment (``condenser inlet''). Temperature measurements shall be taken from at least three temperature sensors or one sensor per 4 square inches (25.8 square cm) of the air duct cross-sectional area, whichever is greater, and shall be averaged. For a unit that has a condenser air fan, a minimum of three temperature sensors at the condenser fan discharge shall be required. Temperature sensors shall be arranged to be at the centers of equally divided cross-sectional areas. The exterior air temperature, at its source, shall be measured and maintained to 1 [deg]F (0.6 [deg]C) during the test period. The temperature measuring devices shall have an error no greater than 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C). Measurements of the air temperature during the test period shall be taken at regular intervals not to exceed 4 minutes.
2.10.3 Exterior Air Static Pressure. The exterior air static pressure at the inlet point of the unit shall be adjusted to maintain a negative pressure of 0.20[sec] 0.05[sec] water column (62 Pascals 12.5 Pascals) for all air flow rates supplied to the unit. The pressure sensor shall be located on a straight duct with a distance of at least 7.5 times the diameter of the duct upstream and a distance of at least 3 times the diameter of the duct downstream. There shall be four static pressure taps at 90[deg] angles apart. The four pressures shall be averaged by interconnecting the four pressure taps. The air pressure measuring instrument shall have an error no greater than 0.01'' water column (2.5 Pascals).
2.11 Refrigerators and Refrigerator-Freezers with Demand-Response Capability. Refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers that have a communication module for demand-response functions that is located within the cabinet shall be tested with the communication module in the configuration set at the factory just before shipping.
3. Test Control Settings
3.1 Model with no User Operable Temperature Control. A test shall be performed to measure the compartment temperatures and energy use. A second test shall be performed with the temperature control electrically short circuited to cause the compressor to run continuously.
3.2 Models with User Operable Temperature Control. Testing shall be performed in accordance with one of the following sections using the following standardized temperatures:
All-Refrigerator: 39 [deg]F (3.9 [deg]C) fresh food compartment temperature;
Refrigerator: 15 [deg]F (-9.4 [deg]C) freezer compartment temperature, 39 [deg]F (3.9 [deg]C) fresh food compartment temperature;
Refrigerator-Freezer: 0 [deg]F (-17.8 [deg]C) freezer compartment temperature, 39 [deg]F (3.9 [deg]C) fresh food compartment temperature.
For the purposes of comparing compartment temperatures with standardized temperatures, as described in sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the freezer compartment temperature shall be as specified in section 5.1.4, and the fresh food compartment temperature shall be as specified in section 5.1.3.
(a) knob detents shall be mechanically defeated if necessary to attain a median setting, and (b) the warmest and coldest settings shall correspond to the positions in which the indicator is aligned with control symbols indicating the warmest and coldest settings. For electronic control systems, the test shall be performed with all compartment temperature controls set at the average of the coldest and warmest settings; if there is no setting equal to this average, the setting closest to the average shall be used. If there are two such settings equally close to the average, the higher of these temperature control settings shall be used. A second test shall be performed with all controls set at their warmest setting or all controls set at their coldest setting (not electrically or mechanically bypassed). For all-refrigerators, this setting shall be the appropriate setting that attempts to achieve compartment temperatures measured during the two tests that bound (i.e., one is above and one is below) the standardized temperature for all-refrigerators. For refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers, the second test shall be conducted with all controls at their coldest setting, unless all compartment temperatures measured during the first part of the test are lower than the standardized temperatures, in which case the second test shall be conducted with all controls at their warmest setting. Refer to Table 1 of this appendix for all-refrigerators or Table 2 of this appendix for refrigerators with freezer compartments and refrigerator-freezers to determine which test results to use in the energy consumption calculation. If any compartment is warmer than its standardized temperature for a test with all controls at their coldest position, the tested unit fails the test and cannot be rated.
Table 1--Temperature Settings for All-Refrigerators----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
First test Second test Energy calculation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- based on:
Settings Results Settings Results----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Mid............................. Low............... Warm.............. Low............... Second Test Only.
High.............. First and Second
Tests.
High.............. Cold.............. Low............... First and Second
Tests.
High.............. No Energy Use
Rating.----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table 2--Temperature Settings for Refrigerators With Freezer Compartments and Refrigerator-Freezers----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
First test Second test Energy calculation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- based on:
Settings Results Settings Results----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Fzr Mid......................... Fzr Low........... Fzr Warm.......... Fzr Low........... Second Test Only.FF Mid.......................... FF Low............ FF Warm........... FF Low.
Fzr Low........... First and Second
Tests.
FF High.
Fzr High.......... First and Second
Tests.
FF Low.
Fzr High.......... First and Second
Tests.
FF High.
Fzr Low........... Fzr Cold.......... Fzr Low........... No Energy Use
Rating.
FF High........... FF Cold........... FF High.
Fzr Low........... First and Second
Tests.
FF Low.
Fzr High.......... Fzr Cold.......... Fzr High.......... No Energy Use
Rating.
FF Low............ FF Cold........... FF Low.
Fzr Low........... First and Second
Tests.
FF Low.
Fzr High.......... Fzr Cold.......... Fzr Low........... First and Second
Tests.
FF High........... FF Cold........... FF Low.
Fzr Low........... No Energy Use
Rating.
FF High.
Fzr High.......... No Energy Use
Rating.
FF Low.
Fzr High.......... No Energy Use
Rating.
FF High.----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Notes: Fzr = Freezer Compartment, FF = Fresh Food Compartment.
3.2.2 Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all temperature controls set at their warmest setting. If all compartment temperatures are below the appropriate standardized temperatures, then the result of this test alone will be used to determine energy consumption. If this condition is not met, then the unit shall be tested in accordance with 3.2.1.
3.2.3 Temperature Settings for Separate Auxiliary Convertible Compartments. For separate auxiliary convertible compartments tested as freezer compartments, the median setting shall be within 2 [deg]F (1.1 [deg]C) of the standardized temperature, and the warmest setting shall be above 5 [deg]F (-15 [deg]C). For separate auxiliary convertible compartments tested as fresh food compartments, the median setting shall be within 2 [deg]F (1.1 [deg]C) of the standardized temperature, and the coldest setting shall be below 34 [deg]F (1.1 [deg]C). For compartments where control settings are not expressed as particular temperatures, the measured temperature of the convertible compartment rather than the settings shall meet the specified criteria.
3.3 Optional Test for Models with Two Compartments and User Operable Controls. As an alternative to section 3.2, perform three tests such that the set of tests meets the ``minimum requirements for interpolation'' of AS/NZS 4474.1:2007 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) appendix M, section M3, paragraphs (a) through (c) and as illustrated in Figure M1. The target temperatures txA and txB defined in section M4(a)(i) of AS/NZ 4474.1:2007 shall be the standardized temperatures defined in section 3.2 of this appendix.
4. Test Period
Tests shall be performed by establishing the conditions set forth in section 2, and using the control settings set forth in section 3.
4.1 Non-automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has no automatic defrost system, the test period shall start after steady-state conditions (see section 2.9 of this appendix) have been achieved and be no less than three hours in duration. During the test period, the compressor motor shall complete two or more whole compressor cycles. (A compressor cycle is a complete ``on'' and a complete ``off'' period of the motor.) If no ``off'' cycling occurs, the test period shall be three hours. If fewer than two compressor cycles occur during a 24-hour period, then a single complete compressor cycle may be used.
4.2 Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has an automatic defrost system, the test period shall start after steady-state conditions have been achieved and be from one point during a defrost period to the same point during the next defrost period. If the model being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the alternative provisions of section 4.2.1 may be used. If the model being tested has a variable defrost control, the provisions of section 4.2.2 shall apply. If the model is a multiple-compressor product with automatic defrost, the provisions of section 4.2.3 shall apply. If the model being tested has long-time automatic or variable defrost control involving multiple defrost cycle types, such as for a product with a single compressor and two or more evaporators in which the evaporators are defrosted at different frequencies, the provisions of section 4.2.4 shall apply. If the model being tested has multiple defrost cycle types for which compressor run time between defrosts is a fixed time of less than 14 hours for all such cycle types, and for which the compressor run times between defrosts for different defrost cycle types are equal to or multiples of each other, the test period shall be from one point of the defrost cycle type with the longest compressor run time between defrosts to the same point during the next occurrence of this defrost cycle type. For such products not using the procedures of section 4.2.4, energy consumption shall be calculated as described in section 5.2.1.1 of this appendix.
4.2.1 Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the two-part test described in this section may be used. The first part is a stable period of compressor operation that includes no portions of the defrost cycle, such as precooling or recovery, that is otherwise the same as the test for a unit having no defrost provisions (section 4.1). The second part is designed to capture the energy consumed during all of the events occurring with the defrost control sequence that are outside of stable operation.
4.2.1.1 Cycling Compressor System. For a system with a cycling compressor, the second part of the test starts at the termination of the last regular compressor ``on'' cycle. The average temperatures of the fresh food and freezer compartments measured from the termination of the previous compressor ``on'' cycle to the termination of the last regular compressor ``on'' cycle must both be within 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C) of their average temperatures measured for the first part of the test. If any compressor cycles occur prior to the defrost heater being energized that cause the average temperature in either compartment to deviate from its average temperature for the first part of the test by more than 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C), these compressor cycles are not considered regular compressor cycles and must be included in the second part of the test. As an example, a ``precooling'' cycle, which is an extended compressor cycle that lowers the temperature(s) of one or both compartments prior to energizing the defrost heater, must be included in the second part of the test. The test period for the second part of the test ends at the termination of the first regular compressor ``on'' cycle after both compartment temperatures have fully recovered to their stable conditions. The average temperatures of the compartments measured from this termination of the first regular compressor ``on'' cycle until the termination of the next regular compressor ``on'' cycle must both be within 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C) of their average temperatures measured for the first part of the test. See Figure 1. Note that Figure 1 illustrates the concepts of precooling and recovery but does not represent all possible defrost cycles.
4.2.1.2 Non-cycling Compressor System. For a system with a non-cycling compressor, the second part of the test starts at a time before defrost during stable operation when the temperatures of both fresh food and freezer compartments are within 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C) of their average temperatures measured for the first part of the test. The second part stops at a time after defrost during stable operation when the temperatures of both compartments are within 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C) of their average temperatures measured for the first part of the test. See Figure 2. [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR25JA12.005
4.2.2 Variable Defrost Control. If the model being tested has a variable defrost control system, the test shall consist of the same two parts as the test for long-time automatic defrost (section 4.2.1).
4.2.3 Multiple-compressor Products with Automatic Defrost.
4.2.3.1 Measurement Frequency. Measurements of power input, cumulative electric energy consumption (watt-hours or kilowatt-hours), and compartment temperature shall be taken at regular intervals not exceeding one minute.
4.2.3.2 Steady-state Condition. Steady state shall be considered to have been attained after 24 hours of operation after the last adjustment of the temperature controls.
4.2.3.3 Primary Compressor. If at least one compressor cycles, test periods shall be based on compressor cycles associated with the primary compressor system (these are referred to as ``primary compressor cycles''). If the freezer compressor cycles, it shall be the primary compressor system.
4.2.3.4 Test Periods. The two-part test described in this section shall be used. The first part is a stable continuous period of compressor operation that includes no defrost cycles or events associated with a defrost cycle, such as precooling or recovery, for any compressor system. The second part is a continuous test period designed to capture the energy consumed during all of the events occurring with the defrost control sequence that are outside of stable operation. The second part of the test shall be conducted separately for each automatic defrost system present.
4.2.3.4.1 First Part of Test. If at least one compressor cycles, the test period for the first part of the test shall include a whole number of complete primary compressor cycles comprising at least 24 hours of stable operation, unless a defrost occurs prior to completion of 24 hours of stable operation, in which case the first part of the test shall include a whole number of complete primary compressor cycles comprising at least 18 hours of stable operation. If no compressor cycles, the first part of the test shall comprise at least 24 hours of stable operation, unless a defrost occurs prior to completion of 24 hours of stable operation, in which case the first part of the test shall comprise at least 18 hours of stable operation.
(a) If at least one compressor cycles, the test period for the second part of the test starts during stable operation before all portions of the defrost cycle, at the beginning of a complete primary compressor cycle. The test period for the second part of the test ends during stable operation after all portions of the defrost cycle, including recovery, at the termination of a complete primary compressor cycle. The start and stop for the test period shall both occur either when the primary compressor starts or when the primary compressor stops. For each compressor system, the compartment temperature averages for the first and last complete compressor cycles that lie completely within the second part of the test must be within 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C) of the average compartment temperature measured for the first part of the test. If any one of the compressor systems is non-cycling, its compartment temperature averages during the first and last complete primary compressor cycles of the second part of the test must be within 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C) of the average compartment temperature measured for the first part of the test.
(b) If no compressor cycles, the test period for the second part of the test starts during stable operation before all portions of the defrost cycle, when the compartment temperatures of all compressor systems are within 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C) of their average temperatures measured for the first part of the test. The test period for the second part ends during stable operation after all portions of the defrost cycle, including recovery, when the compartment temperatures of all compressor systems are within 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C) of their average temperatures measured for the first part of the test.
4.2.4 Systems with Multiple Defrost Frequencies. This section applies to models with long-time automatic or variable defrost control with multiple defrost cycle types, such as models with single compressors and multiple evaporators in which the evaporators have different defrost frequencies. The two-part method in 4.2.1 shall be used. The second part of the method will be conducted separately for each distinct defrost cycle type.
5. Test Measurements
(a) Temperature measurements shall be made at the locations prescribed in Figures 5.1 and 5.2 of HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and shall be accurate to within 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C). No freezer temperature measurements need be taken in an all-refrigerator model.
(b) If the interior arrangements of the unit under test do not conform with those shown in Figure 5.1 and 5.2 of HRF-1-2008, the unit must be tested by relocating the temperature sensors from the locations specified in the figures to avoid interference with hardware or components within the unit, in which case the specific locations used for the temperature sensors shall be noted in the test data records maintained by the manufacturer in accordance with 10 CFR 429.71, and the certification report shall indicate that non-standard sensor locations were used. If any temperature sensor is relocated by any amount from the location prescribed in Figure 5.1 or 5.2 of HRF-1-2008 in order to maintain a minimum 1-inch air space from adjustable shelves or other components that could be relocated by the consumer, this constitutes a relocation of temperature sensors that shall be recorded in the test data and reported in the certification report as described above.
5.1.1 Measured Temperature. The measured temperature of a compartment is the average of all sensor temperature readings taken in that compartment at a particular point in time. Measurements shall be taken at regular intervals not to exceed 4 minutes. Measurements for products with multiple-compressor systems shall be taken at regular intervals not to exceed one minute.
5.1.2 Compartment Temperature. The compartment temperature for each test period shall be an average of the measured temperatures taken in a compartment during the test period as defined in section 4 of this appendix. For long-time automatic defrost models, compartment temperatures shall be those measured in the first part of the test period specified in section 4.2.1 of this appendix. For models with variable defrost controls, compartment temperatures shall be those measured in the first part of the test period specified in section 4.2.2 of this appendix. For models with automatic defrost that is neither long-time nor variable defrost, the compartment temperature shall be an average of the measured temperatures taken in a compartment during a stable period of compressor operation that (a) includes no defrost cycles or events associated with a defrost cycle, such as precooling or recovery, (b) is no less than three hours in duration, and (c) includes two or more whole compressor cycles. If the compressor does not cycle, the stable period used for the temperature average shall be three hours in duration.
5.1.3 Fresh Food Compartment Temperature. The fresh food compartment temperature shall be calculated as: [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR16DE10.007 Where: R is the total number of applicable fresh food compartments, which
include the first fresh food compartment and any number of
separate auxiliary fresh food compartments (including separate
auxiliary convertible compartments tested as fresh food
compartments in accordance with section 2.7);TRi is the compartment temperature of fresh food compartment
``i'' determined in accordance with section 5.1.2; andVRi is the volume of fresh food compartment ``i''.
5.1.4 Freezer Compartment Temperature. The freezer compartment temperature shall be calculated as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR16DE10.008 Where: F is the total number of applicable freezer compartments, which include
the first freezer compartment and any number of separate
auxiliary freezer compartments (including separate auxiliary
convertible compartments tested as freezer compartments in
accordance with section 2.7);TFi is the compartment temperature of freezer compartment
``i'' determined in accordance with section 5.1.2; andVFi is the volume of freezer compartment ``i''.
5.2 Energy Measurements
5.2.1 Per-Day Energy Consumption. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day, ET, for each test period shall be the energy expended during the test period as specified in section 4 adjusted to a 24-hour period. The adjustment shall be determined as follows.
5.2.1.1 Nonautomatic and Automatic Defrost Models. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:ET = EP x 1440/T Where: ET = test cycle energy expended in kilowatt-hours per day;EP = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the test period;T = length of time of the test period in minutes; and1440 = conversion factor to adjust to a 24-hour period in minutes per
day.
5.2.1.2 Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the two-part test method is used, the energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:ET = (1440 x EP1/T1) + (EP2 - (EP1 x T2/T1)) x (12/CT) Where: ET and 1440 are defined in 5.2.1.1;EP1 = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the first part of the
test;EP2 = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the second part of the
test;T1 and T2 = length of time in minutes of the first and second test parts
respectively;CT = defrost timer run time or compressor run time between defrosts in
hours required to cause it to go through a complete cycle,
rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour; and12 = factor to adjust for a 50-percent run time of the compressor in
hours per day.
5.2.1.3 Variable Defrost Control. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to: ET = (1440 x EP1/T1) + (EP2 - (EP1 x T2/T1)) x (12/CT), Where: 1440 is defined in 5.2.1.1 and EP1, EP2, T1, T2, and 12 are defined in
5.2.1.2;CT = (CTL x CTM)/(F x (CTM -
CTL) + CTL);CTL = the shortest compressor run time between defrosts used
in the variable defrost control algorithm (greater than or
equal to 6 but less than or equal to 12 hours), or the
shortest compressor run time between defrosts observed for the
test (if it is shorter than the shortest run time used in the
control algorithm and is greater than 6 hours), or 6 hours (if
the shortest observed run time is less than 6 hours), in hours
rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour;CTM = maximum compressor run time between defrosts in hours
rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour (greater than
CTL but not more than 96 hours);F = ratio of per day energy consumption in excess of the least energy
and the maximum difference in per-day energy consumption and
is equal to 0.20.
For variable defrost models with no values for CTL and CTM in the algorithm, the default values of 6 and 96 shall be used, respectively.
5.2.1.4 Multiple-compressor Products with Automatic Defrost. For multiple-compressor products, the two-part test method in section 4.2.3.4 of this appendix must be used. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR21AP14.014 Where: 1440, EP1, T1, and 12 are defined in 5.2.1.2;i = a variable that can equal 1, 2, or more that identifies each
individual compressor system that has automatic defrost;D = the total number of compressor systems with automatic defrost;EP2i = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the second
part of the test for compressor system i;T2i = length of time in minutes of the second part of the
test for compressor system i;CTi = the compressor run time between defrosts for compressor
system i in hours rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour, for
long-time automatic defrost control equal to a fixed time in
hours, and for variable defrost control equal to (CTLi x CTMi)/(F x (CTMi -
CTLi) + CTLi); Where:
CTLi = for compressor system i, the shortest compressor run time between defrosts used in the variable defrost control algorithm (greater than or equal to 6 but less than or equal to 12 hours), or the shortest compressor run time between defrosts observed for the test (if it is shorter than the shortest run time used in the control algorithm and is greater than 6 hours), or 6 hours (if the shortest observed run time is less than 6 hours), in hours rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour;CTMi = for compressor system i, the maximum compressor run
time between defrosts in hours rounded to the nearest tenth of
an hour (greater than CTLi but not more than 96
hours); andF = default defrost energy consumption factor, equal to 0.20.
For variable defrost models with no values for CTLi and CTMi in the algorithm, the default values of 6 and 96 shall be used, respectively.
5.2.1.5 Long-time or Variable Defrost Control for Systems with Multiple Defrost cycle Types. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR25JA12.006 Where: 1440 is defined in 5.2.1.1 and EP1, T1, and 12 are defined in 5.2.1.2;i is a variable that can equal 1, 2, or more that identifies the
distinct defrost cycle types applicable for the refrigerator
or refrigerator-freezer;EP2i = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the second
part of the test for defrost cycle type i;T2i = length of time in minutes of the second part of the
test for defrost cycle type i;CTi is the compressor run time between instances of defrost
cycle type i, for long-time automatic defrost control equal to
a fixed time in hours rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour,
and for variable defrost control equal to (CTLi x CTMi)/(F x (CTMi -
CTLi) + CTLi); CTLi = least or shortest compressor run time between
instances of defrost cycle type i in hours rounded to the
nearest tenth of an hour (CTL for the defrost cycle
type with the longest compressor run time between defrosts
must be greater than or equal to 6 but less than or equal to
12 hours);CTMi = maximum compressor run time between instances of
defrost cycle type i in hours rounded to the nearest tenth of
an
hour (greater than CTLi but not more than 96
hours);
For cases in which there are more than one fixed CT value (for long-time defrost models) or more than one CTM and/or CTL value (for variable defrost models) for a given defrost cycle type, an average fixed CT value or average CTM and CTL values shall be selected for this cycle type so that 12 divided by this value or values is the frequency of occurrence of the defrost cycle type in a 24 hour period, assuming 50% compressor run time. F = default defrost energy consumption factor, equal to 0.20.
For variable defrost models with no values for CT Li and CTMi in the algorithm, the default values of 6 and 96 shall be used, respectively. D is the total number of distinct defrost cycle types.
(a) The unit's total refrigerated volume, VT, shall be measured in accordance with HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), section 3.30 and sections 4.2 through 4.3. The measured volume shall include all spaces within the insulated volume of each compartment except for the volumes that must be deducted in accordance with section 4.2.2 of HRF-1-2008, and be calculated equivalent to: VT = VF + VFF Where: VT = total refrigerated volume in cubic feet,VF = freezer compartment volume in cubic feet, andVFF = fresh food compartment volume in cubic feet.
(b) In the case of products with automatic icemakers, the volume occupied by the automatic icemaker, including its ice storage bin, is to be included in the volume measurement.
(c) Total refrigerated volume is determined by physical measurement of the test unit. Measurements and calculations used to determine the total refrigerated volume shall be retained as part of the test records underlying the certification of the basic model in accordance with 10 CFR 429.71.
5.4 Externally Vented Refrigerator or Refrigerator-Freezer Units. All test measurements for the externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer shall be made in accordance with the requirements of other sections of this appendix, except as modified in this section or other sections expressly applicable to externally vented refrigerators or refrigerator-freezers.
5.4.1 Operability of ``Thermostatic'' and ``Mixing of Air'' Controls. Before conducting energy consumption tests, the operability of thermostatic controls that permit the mixing of exterior and ambient air when exterior air temperatures are less than 60 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C) must be verified. The operability of such controls shall be verified by operating the unit under ambient air temperature of 90 [deg]F (32.2 [deg]C) and exterior air temperature of 45 [deg]F (7.2 [deg]C). If the inlet air entering the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment is maintained at 60 3 [deg]F (15.6 1.7 [deg]C), energy consumption of the unit shall be measured under 5.4.2.2 and 5.4.2.3. If the inlet air entering the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment is not maintained at 60 3 [deg]F (15.6 1.7 [deg]C), energy consumption of the unit shall also be measured under 5.4.2.4.
5.4.2 Energy Consumption Tests.
5.4.2.1 Correction Factor Test. To enable calculation of a correction factor, K, two full cycle tests shall be conducted to measure energy consumption of the unit with air mixing controls disabled and the condenser inlet air temperatures set at 90 [deg]F (32.2 [deg]C) and 80 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C). Both tests shall be conducted with all compartment temperature controls set at the position midway between their warmest and coldest settings and the anti-sweat heater switch off. Record the energy consumptions ec90 and ec80, in kWh/day.
5.4.2.2 Energy Consumption at 90 [deg]F. The unit shall be tested at 90 [deg]F (32.2 [deg]C) exterior air temperature to record the energy consumptions (e90)i in kWh/day. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, the value i corresponds to each of the two states of the compartment temperature control positions.
5.4.2.3 Energy Consumption at 60 [deg]F. The unit shall be tested at 60 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C) exterior air temperature to record the energy consumptions (e60)i in kWh/day. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, the value i corresponds to each of the two states of the compartment temperature control positions.
5.4.2.4 Energy Consumption if Mixing Controls do not Operate Properly. If the operability of temperature and mixing controls has not been verified as required under 5.4.1, the unit shall be tested at 50 [deg]F (10.0 [deg]C) and 30 [deg]F (-1.1 [deg]C) exterior air temperatures to record the energy consumptions (e50)i and (e30)i. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, the value i corresponds to each of the two states of the compartment temperature control positions.
6. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements
6.1 Adjusted Total Volume.
6.1.1 Electric Refrigerators. The adjusted total volume, VA, for electric refrigerators under test shall be defined as: VA = (VF x CR) + VFF Where: VA = adjusted total volume in cubic feet;VF and VFF are defined in 5.3; andCR = dimensionless adjustment factor of 1.47 for refrigerators other
than all-refrigerators, or 1.0 for all-refrigerators.
6.1.2 Electric Refrigerator-Freezers. The adjusted total volume, VA, for electric refrigerator-freezers under test shall be calculated as follows: VA = (VF x CRF) + VFF Where: VF and VFF are defined in 5.3 and VA is defined in 6.1.1, andCRF = dimensionless adjustment factor of 1.76.
6.2 Average Per-Cycle Energy Consumption. The average per-cycle energy consumption for a cycle type, E, is expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle to the nearest one hundredth (0.01) kilowatt-hour and shall be calculated according to the sections below.
6.2.1 All-Refrigerator Models. The average per-cycle energy consumption shall depend upon the temperature attainable in the fresh food compartment as shown below.
6.2.1.1 If the fresh food compartment temperature is always below 39.0 [deg]F (3.9 [deg]C), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to: E = ET1 Where: ET is defined in 5.2.1; andThe number 1 indicates the test period during which the highest fresh
food compartment temperature is measured.
6.2.1.2 If one of the fresh food compartment temperatures measured for a test period is greater than 39.0 [deg]F (3.9 [deg]C), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to: E = ET1 + ((ET2 - ET1) x (39.0 - TR1)/(TR2 - TR1)) Where: ET is defined in 5.2.1;TR = fresh food compartment temperature determined according to 5.1.3 in
degrees F;The numbers 1 and 2 indicate measurements taken during the first and
second test period as appropriate; and39.0 = standardized fresh food compartment temperature in degrees F.
6.2.2 Refrigerators and Refrigerator-Freezers. The average per-cycle energy consumption shall be defined in one of the following ways as applicable.
6.2.2.1 If the fresh food compartment temperature is at or below 39 [deg]F (3.9 [deg]C) during both tests and the freezer compartment temperature is at or below 15 [deg]F (-9.4 [deg]C) during both tests of a refrigerator or at or below 0 [deg]F (-17.8 [deg]C) during both tests of a refrigerator-freezer, the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be: E = ET1 + IET Where: ET is defined in 5.2.1;IET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle, equals 0 (zero) for products
without an automatic icemaker, and equals 0.23 for products
with an automatic icemaker; andThe number 1 indicates the test period during which the highest freezer
compartment temperature was measured.
6.2.2.2 If the conditions of 6.2.2.1 do not exist, the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be defined by the higher of the two values calculated by the following two formulas: E = ET1 + ((ET2 - ET1) x (39.0 - TR1)/(TR2 - TR1)) + IETand E = ET1 + ((ET2 - ET1) x (k - TF1)/(TF2 - TF1)) + IET Where: ET is defined in 5.2.1;IET is defined in 6.2.2.1;TR and the numbers 1 and 2 are defined in 6.2.1.2;TF = freezer compartment temperature determined according to 5.1.4 in
degrees F; 39.0 is the standardized temperature for fresh food
compartments in degrees F; andk is a constant 15.0 for refrigerators or 0.0 for refrigerator-freezers,
each being standardized freezer compartment temperatures in
degrees F.
6.2.2.3 Optional Test for Models with Two Compartments and User Operable Controls. If the procedure of section 3.3 of this appendix is used for setting temperature controls, the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be defined as follows: E = EX + IETWhere: E is defined in 6.2.1.1;IET is defined in 6.2.2.1; andEX is defined and calculated as described in AS/NZS
4474.1:2007 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3)
appendix M, section M4(a). The target temperatures
txA and txB defined in section M4(a)(i)
of AS/NZS 4474.1:2007 shall be the standardized temperatures
defined in section 3.2 of this appendix.
6.2.3 Variable Anti-Sweat Heater Models. The standard cycle energy consumption of an electric refrigerator-freezer with a variable anti-sweat heater control (Estd), expressed in kilowatt-hours per day, shall be calculated equivalent to: Estd = E + (Correction Factor) where E is determined by
6.2.1.1, 6.2.1.2, 6.2.2.1, or 6.2.2.2, whichever is
appropriate, with the anti-sweat heater switch in the ``off''
position or, for a product without an anti-sweat heater
switch, the anti-sweat heater in its lowest energy use state. Correction Factor = (Anti-sweat Heater Power x System-loss Factor) x (24
hrs/1 day) x (1 kW/1000 W) Where: Anti-sweat Heater Power = 0.034 * (Heater Watts at 5%RH)+ 0.211 * (Heater Watts at 15%RH)+ 0.204 * (Heater Watts at 25%RH)+ 0.166 * (Heater Watts at 35%RH)+ 0.126 * (Heater Watts at 45%RH)+ 0.119 * (Heater Watts at 55%RH)+ 0.069 * (Heater Watts at 65%RH)+ 0.047 * (Heater Watts at 75%RH)+ 0.008 * (Heater Watts at 85%RH)+ 0.015 * (Heater Watts at 95%RH)Heater Watts at a specific relative humidity = the nominal watts used by
all heaters at that specific relative humidity, 72 [deg]F
(22.2 [deg]C) ambient, and DOE reference temperatures of fresh
food (FF) average temperature of 39 [deg]F (3.9 [deg]C) and
freezer (FZ) average temperature of 0 [deg]F (-17.8 [deg]C).System-loss Factor = 1.3.
6.3 Externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezers. Per-cycle energy consumption measurements for an externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer shall be calculated in accordance with the requirements of this appendix, as modified in sections 6.3.1-6.3.7.
6.3.1 Correction Factor. The correction factor, K, shall be calculated as: K = ec90/ec80 Where: ec90 and ec80 are measured in section 5.4.2.1.
6.3.2 Combining Test Results of Different Settings of Compartment Temperature Controls. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, follow the calculation procedures of 6.2 to combine the test results for energy consumption of the unit at different temperature control settings for each condenser inlet air temperature tested under 5.4.2.2, 5.4.2.3, and 5.4.2.4, where applicable, (e90)i, (e60)i, (e50)i, and (e30)i. The combined values, 90, 60, 50, and 30, where applicable, are expressed in kWh/day.
6.3.3 Energy Consumption Corrections. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, adjust the energy consumptions 90, 60, 50, and 30 calculated in 6.3.2 by multiplying the correction factor K to obtain the corrected energy consumptions per day in kWh/day: E90 = K x 90,E60 = K x 60,E50 = K x 50, andE30 = K x 30 Where: K is determined under section 6.3.1; and 90, 60,
50, and 30 are determined under section
6.3.2.
6.3.4 Energy Profile Equation. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the energy consumption EX, in kWh/day, at a specific exterior air temperature between 80 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C) and 60 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C) using the following equation: EX = E60 + (E90 - E60) x
(TX - 60)/30 Where: TX is the exterior air temperature in [deg]F;60 is the exterior air temperature in [deg]F for the test of section
5.4.2.3;30 is the difference between 90 and 60;E60 and E90 are determined in section 6.3.3.
6.3.5 Energy Consumption at 80 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C), 75 [deg]F (23.9 [deg]C) and 65 [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C). For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the energy consumptions at 80 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C), 75 [deg]F (23.9 [deg]C) and 65 [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C) exterior air temperatures, E80, E75 and E65, respectively, in kWh/day, using the equation in 6.3.4.
6.3.6 National Average Per-Cycle Energy Consumption. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the national average energy consumption, EN, in kWh/day, using one of the following equations: EN = 0.523 x E60 + 0.165 x E65 + 0.181
x E75 + 0.131 x E80, for units not
tested under section 5.4.2.4; andEN = 0.257 x E30 + 0.266 x E50 + 0.165
x E65 + 0.181 x E75 + 0.131 x
E80, for units tested under section 5.4.2.4 Where: E30, E50, and E60 are defined in 6.3.3;E65, E75, and E80 are defined in 6.3.5;andthe coefficients 0.523, 0.165, 0.181, 0.131, 0.257 and 0.266 are
weather-associated weighting factors.
6.3.7 Regional Average Per-Cycle Energy Consumption. If regional average per-cycle energy consumption is required to be calculated for a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the regional average per-cycle energy consumption, ER, in kWh/day, for the regions in Figure 3. Use one of the following equations and the coefficients in Table A:ER = a1 x E60 + c x E65 + d
x E75 + e x E80, for a unit that is not
required to be tested under section 5.4.2.4; orER = a x E30 + b x E50 + c x
E65 + d x E75 + e x E80, for
a unit tested under section 5.4.2.4 Where: E30, E50, and E60 are defined in
section 6.3.3;E65, E75, and E80 are defined in
section 6.3.5; anda1, a, b, c, d, and e are weather-associated weighting
factors for the regions, as specified in Table A.
Table A--Coefficients for Calculating Regional Average per-Cycle Energy Consumption
[Weighting factors]----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Regions a1 a b c d e----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------I............................................................... 0.282 0.039 0.244 0.194 0.326 0.198II.............................................................. 0.486 0.194 0.293 0.191 0.193 0.129III............................................................. 0.584 0.302 0.282 0.178 0.159 0.079IV.............................................................. 0.664 0.420 0.244 0.161 0.121 0.055----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR16DE10.010
7. Test Procedure Waivers
To the extent that the procedures contained in this appendix do not provide a means for determining the energy consumption of a refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer, a manufacturer must obtain a waiver under 10 CFR 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for each such product. Such instances could, for example, include situations where the test set-up for a particular refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer basic model is not clearly defined by the provisions of section 2. For details regarding the criteria and procedures for obtaining a waiver, please refer to 10 CFR 430.27. [75 FR 78851, Dec. 16, 2010, as amended at 76 FR 12502, Mar. 7, 2011; 76 FR 24781, May 2, 2011; 77 FR 3574, Jan. 25, 2012; 79 FR 22349, Apr. 21, 2014; 79 FR 41418, July 16, 2014]
Sec. Appendix A1 to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Electric Refrigerators and Electric
Refrigerator-Freezers
The provisions of appendix A1 shall apply to all products manufactured prior to the effective date of any amended standards promulgated by DOE pursuant to Section 325(b)(4) of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act of 1975, as amended by the Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007 (to be codified at 42 U.S.C. 6295(b)(4)).
1. Definitions
Section 3, Definitions, of HRF-1-1979 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) applies to this test procedure.
1.1 ``Adjusted total volume'' means the sum of (i) the fresh food compartment volume as defined in HRF-1-1979 in cubic feet, and (ii) the product of an adjustment factor and the net freezer compartment volume as defined in HRF-1-1979, in cubic feet.
1.2 ``All-refrigerator'' means an electric refrigerator which does not include a compartment for the freezing and long time storage of food at temperatures below 32 [deg]F (0.0 [deg]C). It may include a compartment of 0.50 cubic feet capacity (14.2 liters) or less for the freezing and storage of ice.
1.3 ``Anti-sweat heater'' means a device incorporated into the design of a refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer to prevent the accumulation of moisture on exterior or interior surfaces of the cabinet.
1.4 ``Anti-sweat heater switch'' means a user-controllable switch or user interface which modifies the activation or control of anti-sweat heaters.
1.5 ``Automatic defrost'' means a system in which the defrost cycle is automatically initiated and terminated, with resumption of normal refrigeration at the conclusion of the defrost operation. The system automatically prevents the permanent formation of frost on all refrigerated surfaces. Nominal refrigerated food temperatures are maintained during the operation of the automatic defrost system.
1.6 ``Automatic icemaker'' means a device that can be supplied with water without user intervention, either from a pressurized water supply system or by transfer from a water reservoir located inside the cabinet, that automatically produces, harvests, and stores ice in a storage bin, with means to automatically interrupt the harvesting operation when the ice storage bin is filled to a pre-determined level.
1.7 ``Cycle'' means the period of 24 hours for which the energy use of an electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer is calculated as though the consumer activated compartment temperature controls were set to maintain the standardized temperatures (see section 3.2).
1.8 ``Cycle type'' means the set of test conditions having the calculated effect of operating an electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer for a period of 24 hours, with the consumer activated controls other than those that control compartment temperatures set to establish various operating characteristics.
1.9 ``Defrost cycle type'' means a distinct sequence of control whose function is to remove frost and/or ice from a refrigerated surface. There may be variations in the defrost control sequence such as the number of defrost heaters energized. Each such variation establishes a separate distinct defrost cycle type. However, defrost achieved regularly during the compressor off-cycles by warming of the evaporator without active heat addition is not a defrost cycle type.
1.10 ``Externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer'' means an electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer that has an enclosed condenser or an enclosed condenser/compressor compartment and a set of air ducts for transferring the exterior air from outside the building envelope into, through, and out of the refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer cabinet; is capable of mixing exterior air with the room air before discharging into, through, and out of the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment; may include thermostatically controlled dampers or controls that mix the exterior and room air at low outdoor temperatures and exclude exterior air when the outdoor air temperature is above 80 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C) or the room air temperature; and may have a thermostatically actuated exterior air fan.
1.11 ``HRF-1-1979'' means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers standard for household refrigerators, combination refrigerator-freezers, and household freezers, also approved as an American National Standard as a revision of ANSI B 38.1-1970. Only sections of HRF-1-1979 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) specifically referenced in this test procedure are part of this test procedure. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over HRF-1-1979.
1.12 ``Long-time Automatic Defrost'' means an automatic defrost system where successive defrost cycles are separated by 14 hours or more of compressor-operating time.
1.13 ``Separate auxiliary compartment'' means a freezer compartment or a fresh food compartment of a refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer having more than two compartments that is not the first freezer compartment or the first fresh food compartment. Access to a separate auxiliary compartment is through a separate exterior door or doors rather than through the door or doors of another compartment. Separate auxiliary compartments may be convertible (e.g., from fresh food to freezer). Separate auxiliary freezer compartments may not be larger than the first freezer compartment and separate auxiliary fresh food compartments may not be larger than the first fresh food compartment, but such size restrictions do not apply to separate auxiliary convertible compartments.
1.14 ``Special compartment'' means any compartment other than a butter conditioner, without doors directly accessible from the exterior, and with separate temperature control (such as crispers convertible to meat keepers) that is not convertible from fresh food temperature range to freezer temperature range.
1.15 ``Stabilization Period'' means the total period of time during which steady-state conditions are being attained or evaluated.
1.16 ``Standard cycle'' means the cycle type in which the anti-sweat heater control, when provided, is set in the highest energy consuming position.
1.17 ``Variable anti-sweat heater control'' means an anti-sweat heater control that varies the average power input of the anti-sweat heater(s) based on operating condition variable(s) and/or ambient condition variable(s).
1.18 ``Variable defrost control'' means an automatic defrost system in which successive defrost cycles are determined by an operating condition variable or variables other than solely compressor operating time. This includes any electrical or mechanical device performing this function. A control scheme that changes the defrost interval from a fixed length to an extended length (without any intermediate steps) is not considered a variable defrost control. A variable defrost control feature should predict the accumulation of frost on the evaporator and react accordingly. Therefore, the times between defrost should vary with different usage patterns and include a continuum of lengths of time between defrosts as inputs vary.
2. Test Conditions
2.1 Ambient Temperature. The ambient temperature shall be 90.0 1 [deg]F (32.2 0.6 [deg]C) during the stabilization period and the test period.
2.2 Operational Conditions. The electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer shall be installed and its operating conditions maintained in accordance with HRF-1-1979, (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), section 7.2 through section 7.4.3.3, except that the vertical ambient temperature gradient at locations 10 inches (25.4 cm) out from the centers of the two sides of the unit being tested is to be maintained during the test. Unless the area is obstructed by shields or baffles, the gradient is to be maintained from 2 inches (5.1 cm) above the floor or supporting platform to a height 1 foot (30.5 cm) above the unit under test. Defrost controls are to be operative. Other exceptions and provisions to the cited sections of HRF-1-1979 are noted in sections 2.3 through 2.8, and 5.1 of this appendix.
2.3 Anti-Sweat Heaters.
The anti-sweat heater switch is to be on during one test and off during a second test. In the case of an electric refrigerator-freezer with variable anti-sweat heater control, the standard cycle energy use shall be the result of the calculation described in 6.2.3.
2.4 Conditions for Automatic Defrost Refrigerator-Freezers. For automatic defrost refrigerator-freezers, the freezer compartments shall not be loaded with any frozen food packages during testing. Cylindrical metallic masses of dimensions 1.12 0.25 inches (2.9 0.6 cm) in diameter and height shall be attached in good thermal contact with each temperature sensor within the refrigerated compartments. All temperature measuring sensor masses shall be supported by low-thermal-conductivity supports in such a manner to ensure that there will be at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) of air space separating the thermal mass from contact with any interior surface or hardware inside the cabinet. In case of interference with hardware at the sensor locations specified in section 5.1, the sensors shall be placed at the nearest adjacent location such that there will be a 1-inch air space separating the sensor mass from the hardware.
2.5 Conditions for all-refrigerators. There shall be no load in the freezer compartment during the test.
2.6 The cabinet and its refrigerating mechanism shall be assembled and set up in accordance with the printed consumer instructions supplied with the cabinet. Set-up of the refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer shall not deviate from these instructions, unless explicitly required or allowed by this test procedure. Specific required or allowed deviations from such set-up include the following:
(a) Connection of water lines and installation of water filters are not required;
(b) Clearance requirements from surfaces of the product shall be as described in section 2.8 below;
(c) The electric power supply shall be as described in HRF-1-1979 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) section 7.4.1;
(d) Temperature control settings for testing shall be as described in section 3 below. Settings for convertible compartments and other temperature-controllable or special compartments shall be as described in section 2.7 of this appendix;
(e) The product does not need to be anchored or otherwise secured to prevent tipping during energy testing; and
(f) All the product's chutes and throats required for the delivery of ice shall be free of packing, covers, or other blockages that may be fitted for shipping or when the icemaker is not in use. For cases in which set-up is not clearly defined by this test procedure, manufacturers must submit a petition for a waiver (see section 7).
2.7 Compartments that are convertible (e.g., from fresh food to freezer) shall be operated in the highest energy use position. For the special case of convertible separate auxiliary compartments, this means that the compartment shall be treated as a freezer compartment or a fresh food compartment, depending on which of these represents higher energy use. Special compartments shall be tested with controls set to provide the coldest temperature. This requirement for the coldest temperature does not apply to features or functions associated with temperature control (such as fast chill compartments) that are initiated manually and terminated automatically within 168 hours.
2.8 The space between the back of the cabinet and a vertical surface (the test room wall or simulated wall) shall be the minimum distance in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2.9 Steady State Condition. Steady state conditions exist if the temperature measurements in all measured compartments taken at four minute intervals or less during a stabilization period are not changing at a rate greater than 0.042 [deg]F. (0.023 [deg]C.) per hour as determined by the applicable condition of A or B.
A. The average of the measurements during a two hour period if no cycling occurs or during a number of complete repetitive compressor cycles through a period of no less than two hours is compared to the average over an equivalent time period with three hours elapsed between the two measurement periods.
B. If A above cannot be used, the average of the measurements during a number of complete repetitive compressor cycles through a period of no less than two hours and including the last complete cycle prior to a defrost period, or if no cycling occurs, the average of the measurements during the last two hours prior to a defrost period; are compared to the same averaging period prior to the following defrost period.
2.10 Exterior air for externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer. An exterior air source shall be provided with adjustable temperature and pressure capabilities. The exterior air temperature shall be adjustable from 35 1 [deg]F (1.7 0.6 [deg]C) to 90 1 [deg]F (32.2 0.6 [deg]C).
2.10.1 Air duct. The exterior air shall pass from the exterior air source to the test unit through an insulated air duct.
2.10.2 Air temperature measurement. The air temperature entering the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment shall be maintained to 3 [deg]F (1.7 [deg]C) during the stabilization and test periods and shall be measured at the inlet point of the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment (``condenser inlet''). Temperature measurements shall be taken from at least three temperature sensors or one sensor per 4 square inches of the air duct cross sectional area, whichever is greater, and shall be averaged. For a unit that has a condenser air fan, a minimum of three temperature sensors at the condenser fan discharge shall be required. Temperature sensors shall be arranged to be at the centers of equally divided cross sectional areas. The exterior air temperature, at its source, shall be measured and maintained to 1 [deg]F (0.6 [deg]C) during the test period. The temperature measuring devices shall have an error not greater than 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C). Measurements of the air temperature during the test period shall be taken at regular intervals not to exceed four minutes.
2.10.3 Exterior air static pressure. The exterior air static pressure at the inlet point of the unit shall be adjusted to maintain a negative pressure of 0.20 0.05 water column (62 Pa 12.5 Pa) for all air flow rates supplied to the unit. The pressure sensor shall be located on a straight duct with a distance of at least 7.5 times the diameter of the duct upstream and a distance of at least 3 times the diameter of the duct downstream. There shall be four static pressure taps at 90[deg] angles apart. The four pressures shall be averaged by interconnecting the four pressure taps. The air pressure measuring instrument shall have an error not greater than 0.01 water column (2.5 Pa).
3. Test Control Settings
3.1 Model with no user operable temperature control. A test shall be performed during which the compartment temperatures and energy use shall be measured. A second test shall be performed with the temperature control electrically short circuited to cause the compressor to run continuously.
3.2 Model with User Operable Temperature Control. Testing shall be performed in accordance with one of the following sections using the standardized temperatures of:
All-Refrigerator: 38 [deg]F (3.3 [deg]C) fresh food compartment temperature;
Refrigerator: 15 [deg]F (-9.4 [deg]C) freezer compartment temperature, 45 [deg]F (7.2 [deg]C) fresh food compartment temperature;
Refrigerator-Freezer: 5 [deg]F (-15 [deg]C) freezer compartment temperature, 45 [deg]F (7.2 [deg]C) fresh food compartment temperature. For the purposes of comparing compartment temperatures with standardized temperatures, as described in sections 3.2.1 through 3.2.3, the freezer compartment temperature shall be as specified in section 5.1.4, and the fresh food compartment temperature shall be as specified in section 5.1.3.
3.2.1 A first test shall be performed with all compartment temperature controls set at their median position midway between their warmest and coldest settings. For mechanical control systems, knob detents shall be mechanically defeated if necessary to attain a median setting. For electronic control systems, the test shall be performed with all compartment temperature controls set at the average of the coldest and warmest settings--if there is no setting equal to this average, the setting closest to the average shall be used. If there are two such settings equally close to the average, the higher of these temperature control settings shall be used. A second test shall be performed with all controls set at their warmest setting or all controls set at their coldest setting (not electrically or mechanically bypassed). For all-refrigerators, this setting shall be the appropriate setting that attempts to achieve compartment temperatures measured during the two tests which bound (i.e., one is above and one is below) the standardized temperature for all-refrigerators. For refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers, the second test shall be conducted with all controls at their coldest setting, unless all compartment temperatures measured during the first part of the test are lower than the standardized temperatures, in which case the second test shall be conducted with all controls at their warmest setting. If (a) the measured temperature of any compartment with all controls set at their coldest settings is above its standardized temperature, a third test shall be performed with all controls set at their warmest settings and the result of this test shall be used with the result of the test performed with all controls set at their coldest settings to determine energy consumption. If (b) the measured temperatures of all compartments with all controls set at their warmest settings are below their standardized temperatures then the result of this test alone will be used to determine energy consumption. If neither (a) nor (b) occur, then the results of the first two tests shall be used to determine energy consumption.
3.2.2 Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all temperature controls set at their warmest setting. If the measured temperatures of all compartments for this test are below their standardized temperatures then the result of this test alone will be used to determine energy consumption. If this condition is not met, then the unit shall be tested in accordance with 3.2.1 of this appendix.
3.2.3 Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all temperature controls set at their coldest setting. If the measured temperature of any compartment for this test is above its standardized temperature, a second test shall be performed with all controls set at their warmest settings and the result of this test shall be used with the result of the test performed with all controls set at their coldest settings to determine energy consumption. If this condition is not met, then the unit shall be tested in accordance with 3.2.1 of this appendix.
3.2.4 Temperature Settings for Separate Auxiliary Convertible Compartments. For separate auxiliary convertible compartments tested as freezer compartments, the median setting shall be within 2 [deg]F (1.1 [deg]C) of the standardized temperature, and the warmest setting shall be above 10 [deg]F (-12.2 [deg]C). For separate auxiliary convertible compartments tested as fresh food compartments, the median setting shall be within 2 [deg]F (1.1 [deg]C) of the standardized temperature, and the coldest setting shall be below 40 [deg]F (4.4 [deg]C). For compartments where control settings are not expressed as particular temperatures, the measured temperature of the convertible compartment rather than the settings shall meet the specified criteria.
4. Test Period
Tests shall be performed by establishing the conditions set forth in section 2, and using the control settings set forth in section 3.
4.1 Nonautomatic Defrost. If the model being tested has no automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady-state conditions have been achieved and be no less than 3 hours in duration. During the test period, the compressor motor shall complete two or more whole compressor cycles. (A compressor cycle is a complete ``on'' and a complete ``off'' period of the motor). If no ``off'' cycling will occur, as determined during the stabilization period, the test period shall be 3 hours. If incomplete cycling occurs (i.e. less than two compressor cycles during a 24-hour period), the results of the 24-hour period shall be used.
4.2 Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has an automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady-state conditions have been achieved and be from one point during a defrost period to the same point during the next defrost period. If the model being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the alternative provisions of 4.2.1 may be used. If the model being tested has a variable defrost control, the provisions of section 4.2.2 shall apply. If the model has a dual compressor system with automatic defrost for both systems, the provisions of 4.2.3 shall apply.
4.2.1 Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the test time period may consist of two parts. The first part would be the same as the test for a unit having no defrost provisions (section 4.1). The second part would start when a defrost cycle is initiated when the compressor ``on'' cycle is terminated prior to start of the defrost heater and terminates at the second turn ``on'' of the compressor or 4 hours from the initiation of the defrost heater, whichever comes first. See diagram in Figure 1 to this section. [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR16DE10.011
4.2.2 Variable Defrost Control. If the model being tested has a variable defrost control system, the test shall consist of the same two parts as the test for long-time automatic defrost (section 4.2.1).
4.2.3 Dual Compressor Systems with Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has separate compressor systems for the refrigerator and freezer sections, each with its own automatic defrost system, then the two-part method in 4.2.1 shall be used. The second part of the method will be conducted separately for each automatic defrost system. The components (compressor, fan motors, defrost heaters, anti-sweat heaters, etc.) associated with each system will be identified and their energy consumption will be separately measured during each test.
5. Test Measurements
5.1 Temperature Measurements. Temperature measurements shall be made at the locations prescribed in Figures 7.1 and 7.2 of HRF-1-1979 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and shall be accurate to within 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C). No freezer temperature measurements need be taken in an all-refrigerator model. If the interior arrangements of the cabinet do not conform with those shown in Figure 7.1 and 7.2 of HRF-1-1979, the product may be tested by relocating the temperature sensors from the locations specified in the figures to avoid interference with hardware or components within the cabinet, in which case the specific locations used for the temperature sensors shall be noted in the test data records maintained by the manufacturer in accordance with 10 CFR 429.14, and the certification report shall indicate that non-standard sensor locations were used.
5.1.1 Measured Temperature. The measured temperature of a compartment is to be the average of all sensor temperature readings taken in that compartment at a particular time. Measurements shall be taken at regular intervals not to exceed four minutes.
5.1.2 Compartment Temperature. The compartment temperature for each test period shall be an average of the measured temperatures taken in a compartment during one or more complete compressor cycles. One compressor cycle is one complete motor ``on'' and one complete motor ``off'' period. For long-time automatic defrost models, compartment temperatures shall be those measured in the first part of the test period specified in section 4.2.1. For models with variable defrost controls, compartment temperatures shall be those measured in the first part of the test period specified in section 4.2.2.
5.1.2.1 The number of complete compressor cycles over which the measured temperatures in a compartment are to be averaged to determine compartment temperature shall be equal to the number of minutes between measured temperature readings, rounded up to the next whole minute or a number of complete compressor cycles over a time period exceeding 1 hour, whichever is greater. One of the compressor cycles shall be the last complete compressor cycle during the test period.
5.1.2.2 If no compressor cycling occurs, the compartment temperature shall be the average of the measured temperatures taken during the last 32 minutes of the test period.
5.1.2.3 If incomplete compressor cycling occurs, the compartment temperatures shall be the average of the measured temperatures taken during the last three hours of the last complete compressor ``on'' period.
5.1.3 Fresh Food Compartment Temperature. The fresh food compartment temperature shall be calculated as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR02MY11.090 Where: R is the total number of applicable fresh food compartments, which
include the first fresh food compartment and any number of
separate auxiliary fresh food compartments (including separate
auxiliary convertible compartments tested as fresh food
compartments in accordance with section 2.7);TRi is the compartment temperature of fresh food compartment
``i'' determined in accordance with section 5.1.2; andVRi is the volume of fresh food compartment ``i''.
5.1.4 Freezer Compartment Temperature. The freezer compartmenttemperature shall be calculated as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR02MY11.091 Where: F is the total number of applicable freezer compartments, which include
the first freezer compartment and any number of separate
auxiliary freezer compartments (including separate auxiliary
convertible compartments tested as freezer compartments in
accordance with section 2.7);TFi is the compartment temperature of freezer compartment
``i'' determined in accordance with section 5.1.2; andVFi is the volume of freezer compartment ``i''.
5.2 Energy Measurements
5.2.1 Per-day Energy Consumption. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day for each test period shall be the energy expended during the test period as specified in section 4 adjusted to a 24-hour period. The adjustment shall be determined as follows:
5.2.1.1 Nonautomatic and Automatic Defrost Models. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to: ET = EP x 1440/T Where: ET = test cycle energy expended in kilowatt-hours per day;EP = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the test period;T = length of time of the test period in minutes; and1440 = conversion factor to adjust to a 24-hour period in minutes per
day.
5.2.1.2 Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the two-part test method is used, the energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to: ET = (1440 x EP1/T1) + (EP2 - (EP1 x T2/T1)) x (12/CT) Where: ET and 1440 are defined in 5.2.1.1;EP1 = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the first part of the
test;EP2 = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the second part of the
test;T1 and T2 = length of time in minutes of the first and second test parts
respectively;CT = defrost timer run time or compressor run time between defrosts in
hours required to cause it to go through a complete cycle,
rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour; and12 = factor to adjust for a 50-percent run time of the compressor in
hours per day.
5.2.1.3 Variable Defrost Control. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to: ET = (1440 x EP1/T1) + (EP2 - (EP1 x T2/T1)) x (12/CT), Where: 1440 is defined in 5.2.1.1 and EP1, EP2, T1, T2, and 12 are defined in
5.2.1.2;CT = (CTL x CTM)/(F x (CTM -
CTL) + CTL);CTL = least or shortest compressor run time between defrosts
in hours rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour (greater than
or equal to 6 but less than or equal to 12 hours);CTM = maximum compressor run time between defrosts in hours
rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour (greater than
CTL but not more than 96 hours);F = ratio of per day energy consumption in excess of the least energy
and the maximum difference in per-day energy consumption and
is equal to 0.20;For variable defrost models with no values for CTL and
CTM in the algorithm, the default values of 12 and
84 shall be used, respectively.
5.2.1.4 Dual Compressor Systems with Dual Automatic Defrost. The two-part test method in section 4.1.2.4 must be used, and the energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to: ET = (1440 x EP1/T1) + (EP2F - (EPF x T2/T1)) x
(12/CTF) + (EP2R - (EPR x T3/
T1)) x (12/CTR) Where: 1440, EP1, T1, EP2, 12, and CT are defined in 5.2.1.2;EPF = freezer system energy in kilowatt-hours expended during
the first part of the test;EP2F = freezer system energy in kilowatt-hours expended
during the second part of the test for the freezer system;EPR = refrigerator system energy in kilowatt-hours expended
during the first part of the test;EP2R = refrigerator system energy in kilowatt-hours expended
during the second part of the test for the refrigerator
system;T2 and T3 = length of time in minutes of the second test part for the
freezer and refrigerator systems respectively;CTF = compressor run time between freezer defrosts (in hours
rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour); andCTR = compressor run time between refrigerator defrosts (in
hours rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour).
5.3 Volume measurements. The electric refrigerator or electric refrigerator-freezer total refrigerated volume, VT, shall be measured in accordance with HRF-1-1979, section 3.20 and sections 4.2 through 4.3 and be calculated equivalent to: VT=VF+VFF where VT=total refrigerated volume in cubic feet,VF=freezer compartment volume in cubic feet, andVFF=fresh food compartment volume in cubic feet.
5.4 Externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer units. All test measurements for the externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer shall be made in accordance with the requirements of other sections of this appendix, except as modified in this section 5.4 or other sections expressly applicable to externally vented refrigerators or refrigerator-freezers.
5.4.1 Operability of thermostatic and mixing of air controls. Prior to conducting energy consumption tests, the operability of thermostatic controls that permit the mixing of exterior and ambient air when exterior air temperatures are less than 60 [deg]F must be verified. The operability of such controls shall be verified by operating the unit under ambient air temperature of 90 [deg]F and exterior air temperature of 45 [deg]F. If the inlet air entering the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment is maintained at 60 [deg]F, plus or minus three degrees, energy consumption of the unit shall be measured under 5.4.2.2 and 5.4.2.3. If the inlet air entering the condenser or condenser/compressor compartment is not maintained at 60 [deg]F, plus or minus three degrees, energy consumption of the unit shall also be measured under 5.4.2.4.
5.4.2 Energy consumption tests.
5.4.2.1 Correction factor test. To enable calculation of a correction factor, K, two full cycle tests shall be conducted to measure energy consumption of the unit with air mixing controls disabled and the condenser inlet air temperatures set at 90 [deg]F (32.2 [deg]C) and 80 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C). Both tests shall be conducted with all compartment temperature controls set at the position midway between their warmest and coldest settings and the anti-sweat heater switch off. Record the energy consumptions ec90 and ec80, in kWh/day.
5.4.2.2 Energy consumption at 90 [deg]F. The unit shall be tested at 90 [deg]F (32.2 [deg]C) exterior air temperature to record the energy consumptions (e90)i in kWh/day. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, i corresponds to each of the two states of the compartment temperature control positions.
5.4.2.3 Energy consumption at 60 [deg]F. The unit shall be tested at 60 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C) exterior air temperature to record the energy consumptions (e60)i in kWh/day. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, i corresponds to each of the two states of the compartment temperature control positions.
5.4.2.4 Energy consumption if mixing controls do not operate properly. If the operability of temperature and mixing controls has not been verified as required under 5.4.1, the unit shall be tested at 50 [deg]F (10.0 [deg]C) and 30 [deg]F (-1.1 [deg]C) exterior air temperatures to record the energy consumptions (e50)i and (e30)i. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, i corresponds to each of the two states of the compartment temperature control positions.
6. Calculation of Derived Results from Test Measurements
6.1 Adjusted Total Volume.
6.1.1 Electric refrigerators. The adjusted total volume, VA, for electric refrigerators under test shall be defined as: VA=(VFxCR)+VFF where VA=adjusted total volume in cubic feet,VF and VFF are defined in 5.3, andCR=adjustment factor of 1.44 for refrigerators other than all-
refrigerators, or 1.0 for all-refrigerators, dimensionless,
6.1.2 Electric refrigerator-freezers. The adjusted total volume, VA, for electric refrigerator-freezers under test shall be calculated as follows: VA=(VFxCRF)+VFF where VF and VFF are defined in 5.3 and VA is defined in 6.1.1,CRF=adjustment factor of 1.63, dimensionless,
6.2 Average Per-Cycle Energy consumption.
6.2.1 All-refrigerator Models. The average per-cycle energy consumption for a cycle type is expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle to the nearest one hundredth (0.01) kilowatt-hour and shall depend upon the temperature attainable in the fresh food compartment as shown below.
6.2.1.1 If the fresh food compartment temperature is always below 38.0 [deg]F. (3.3 [deg]C.), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to: E=ET1 where E=Total per-cycle energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day,ET is defined in 5.2.1, and Number 1 indicates the test period during
which the highest fresh food compartment temperature is
measured.
6.2.1.2 If one of the fresh food compartment temperatures measured for a test period is greater than 38.0 [deg]F (3.3 [deg]C), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to: E = ET1 + ((ET2-ET1) x (38.0 - TR1)/(TR2 - TR1)) Where: E is defined in 6.2.1.1;ET is defined in 5.2.1;TR = Fresh food compartment temperature determined according to 5.1.3 in
degrees F;The numbers 1 and 2 indicate measurements taken during the first and
second test period as appropriate; and38.0 = Standardized fresh food compartment temperature in degrees F.
6.2.2 Refrigerators and refrigerator-freezers. The average per-cycle energy consumption for a cycle type is expressed in kilowatt-hours per-cycle to the nearest one hundredth (0.01) kilowatt-hour and shall be defined in the applicable following manner.
6.2.2.1 If the fresh food compartment temperature is always at or below 45 [deg]F. (7.2 [deg]C.) in both of the tests and the freezer compartment temperature is always at or below 15 [deg]F. (-9.4 [deg]C.) in both tests of a refrigerator or at or below 5 [deg]F. (-15 [deg]C.) in both tests of a refrigerator-freezer, the per-cycle energy consumption shall be: E=ET1 where E is defined in 6.2.1.1,ET is defined in 5.2.1, andNumber 1 indicates the test period during which the highest freezer
compartment temperature was measured.
6.2.2.2 If the conditions of 6.2.2.1 do not exist, the per-cycle energy consumption shall be defined by the higher of the two values calculated by the following two formulas: E = ET1 + ((ET2-ET1) x (45.0 - TR1)/(TR2 - TR1))andE = ET1 + ((ET2 - ET1) x (k - TF1)/(TF2 - TF1)) Where: E is defined in 6.2.1.1;ET is defined in 5.2.1;TR and numbers 1 and 2 are defined in 6.2.1.2;TF = Freezer compartment temperature determined according to 5.1.4 in
degrees F;45.0 is a specified fresh food compartment temperature in degrees F; andk is a constant 15.0 for refrigerators or 5.0 for refrigerator-freezers
each being standardized freezer compartment temperature in
degrees F.
6.2.3 Variable Anti-Sweat Heater Models. The standard cycle energy consumption of an electric refrigerator-freezer with a variable anti-sweat heater control (Estd), expressed in kilowatt-hours per day, shall be calculated equivalent to: Estd = E + (Correction Factor) where E is determined by
6.2.1.1, 6.2.1.2, 6.2.2.1, or 6.2.2.2, whichever is
appropriate, with the anti-sweat heater switch in the ``off''
position or, for products without anti-sweat heater switches,
the anti-sweat heater in its lowest energy use state.Correction Factor = (Anti-sweat Heater Power x System-loss Factor) x (24
hrs/1 day) x (1 kW/1000 W) Where: Anti-sweat Heater Power = 0.034 * (Heater Watts at 5%RH)+ 0.211 * (Heater Watts at 15%RH)+ 0.204 * (Heater Watts at 25%RH)+ 0.166 * (Heater Watts at 35%RH)+ 0.126 * (Heater Watts at 45%RH)+ 0.119 * (Heater Watts at 55%RH)+ 0.069 * (Heater Watts at 65%RH)+ 0.047 * (Heater Watts at 75%RH)+ 0.008 * (Heater Watts at 85%RH)+ 0.015 * (Heater Watts at 95%RH)Heater Watts at a specific relative humidity = the nominal watts used by
all heaters at that specific relative humidity, 72 [deg]F
(22.2 [deg]C) ambient, and DOE reference temperatures of fresh
food (FF) average temperature of 45 [deg]F (7.2 [deg]C) and
freezer (FZ) average temperature of 5 [deg]F (-15 [deg]C).System-loss Factor = 1.3
6.3 Externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezers. Per-cycle energy consumption measurements for the externally vented refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer shall be calculated in accordance with the requirements of this appendix, as modified in sections 6.3.1-6.3.7.
6.3.1 Correction factor. A correction factor, K, shall be calculated as: K = ec90/ec80 where ec90 and ec80 = the energy consumption test results as determined under 5.4.2.1.
6.3.2 Combining test results of different settings of compartment temperature controls. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, follow the calculation procedures of 6.2 to combine the test results for energy consumption of the unit at different temperature control settings for each condenser inlet air temperature tested under 5.4.2.2, 5.4.2.3, and 5.4.2.4, where applicable, (e90)i, (e60)i, (e50)i, and (e30)i. The combined values are [epsi]90, [epsi]60, [epsi]50, and [epsi]30, where applicable, in kWh/day.
6.3.3 Energy consumption corrections. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, the energy consumptions [epsi]90, [epsi]60, [epsi]50, and [epsi]30 calculated in 6.3.2 shall be adjusted by multiplying the correction factor K to obtain the corrected energy consumptions per day, in kWh/day: E90 = K x [epsi]90,E60 = K x [epsi]60E50 = K x [epsi]50, andE30 = K x [epsi]30 where, K is determined under section 6.3.1, and [epsi]90,
[epsi]60, [epsi]50, and
[epsi]30 are determined under section 6.3.2.
6.3.4 Energy profile equation. For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, the energy consumption EX, in kWh/day, at a specific exterior air temperature between 80 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C) and 60 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C) shall be calculated by the following equation: EX = a + bTX, where, TX = exterior air temperature in [deg]F;a = 3E60-2E90, in kWh/day;b = (E90-E60)/30, in kWh/day per [deg]F.
6.3.5 Energy consumption at 80 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C), 75 [deg]F (23.9 [deg]C) and 65 [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C). For a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the energy consumptions at 80 [deg]F (26.7 [deg]C), 75 [deg]F (23.9 [deg]C) and 65 [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C) exterior air temperatures, E80, E75 and E65, respectively, in kWh/day, using the equation in 6.3.4.
6.3.6 National average per cycle energy consumption. For a given setting of the anti- sweat heater, calculate the national average energy consumption, EN, in kWh/day, using one of the following equations: EN = 0.523 x E60 + 0.165 x E65 + 0.181
x E75 + 0.131 x E80, for units not
tested under 5.4.2.4, EN = 0.257 x E30 + 0.266 x E50 + 0.165
x E65 + 0.181 x E75 + 0.131 x
E80, for units tested under 5.4.2.4, where, E30, E50, and E60 are defined in 6.3.3,E65, E75, and E80 are defined in 6.3.5,
andthe coefficients are weather associated weighting factors.
6.3.7 Regional average per cycle energy consumption. If regional average per cycle energy consumption is required to be calculated, for a given setting of the anti-sweat heater, calculate the regional average per cycle energy consumption, ER, in kWh/day, for the regions in figure 1 using one of the following equations and the coefficients in the table A: ER = a1 x E60 + c x E65 + d
x E75 + e x E80, for a unit that is not
required to be tested under 5.4.2.4, ER = a x E30 + b x E50 + c x
E65 + d x E75 + e x E80, for
a unit tested under 5.4.2.4, where: E30, E50, and E60 are defined in 6.3.3,E65, E75, and E80 are defined in 6.3.5,
anda1, a, b, c, d, e are weather associated weighting factors
for the Regions, as specified in Table A:
Table A--Coefficients for Calculating Regional Average per Cycle Energy Consumption
[Weighting Factors]----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Regions a1 a b c d e----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------I............................................................... 0.282 0.039 0.244 0.194 0.326 0.198II.............................................................. 0.486 0.194 0.293 0.191 0.193 0.129III............................................................. 0.584 0.302 0.282 0.178 0.159 0.079IV.............................................................. 0.664 0.420 0.244 0.161 0.121 0.055----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR16DE10.014
7. Test Procedure Waivers
To the extent that the procedures contained in this appendix do not provide a means for determining the energy consumption of a refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer, a manufacturer must obtain a waiver under 10 CFR 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for each such product. Such instances could, for example, include situations where the test set-up for a particular refrigerator or refrigerator-freezer basic model is not clearly defined by the provisions of section 2. For details regarding the criteria and procedures for obtaining a waiver, please refer to 10 CFR 430.27. [47 FR 34526, Aug. 10, 1982; 48 FR 13013, Mar. 29, 1983, as amended at 54 FR 36240, Aug. 31, 1989; 54 FR 38788, Sept. 20, 1989; 62 FR 47539, 47540, Sept. 9, 1997; 68 FR 10960, Mar. 7, 2003; 75 FR 78860, Dec. 16, 2010; 76 FR 12502, Mar. 7, 2011; 76 FR 24781, May 2, 2011]
Sec. Appendix B to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Freezers
Beginning on September 15, 2014, the test procedures in appendix B must be used to determine compliance with energy conservation standards for freezers. Prior to September 15, 2014, manufacturers may continue to use appendix B1 or may elect to use appendix B early to show compliance with the September 15, 2014 energy conservation standards. Manufacturers must use a single appendix for all representations of energy use of a basic model, including certifications of compliance, and may not use appendix B1 for certain representations and appendix B for other representations.
1. Definitions
Section 3, Definitions, of HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) applies to this test procedure.
1.1 ``Adjusted total volume'' means the product of the freezer volume as defined in HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) in cubic feet multiplied by an adjustment factor.
1.2 ``Anti-sweat heater'' means a device incorporated into the design of a freezer to prevent the accumulation of moisture on exterior or interior surfaces of the cabinet.
1.3 ``Anti-sweat heater switch'' means a user-controllable switch or user interface which modifies the activation or control of anti-sweat heaters.
1.4 ``Automatic defrost'' means a system in which the defrost cycle is automatically initiated and terminated, with resumption of normal refrigeration at the conclusion of defrost operation. The system automatically prevents the permanent formation of frost on all refrigerated surfaces. Nominal refrigerated food temperatures are maintained during the operation of the automatic defrost system.
1.5 ``Automatic icemaker'' means a device that can be supplied with water without user intervention, either from a pressurized water supply system or by transfer from a water reservoir, that automatically produces, harvests, and stores ice in a storage bin, with means to automatically interrupt the harvesting operation when the ice storage bin is filled to a pre-determined level.
1.6 ``Complete temperature cycle'' means a time period defined based upon the cycling of compartment temperature that starts when the compartment temperature is at a maximum and ends when the compartment temperature returns to an equivalent maximum (within 0.5[emsp14] [deg]F of the starting temperature), having in the interim fallen to a minimum and subsequently risen again to reach the second maximum. Alternatively, a complete temperature cycle can be defined to start when the compartment temperature is at a minimum and end when the compartment temperature returns to an equivalent minimum (within 0.5[emsp14] [deg]F of the starting temperature), having in the interim risen to a maximum and subsequently fallen again to reach the second minimum.
1.7 ``Cycle'' means the period of 24 hours for which the energy use of a freezer is calculated as though the consumer-activated compartment temperature controls were set to maintain the standardized temperature (see section 3.2).
1.8 ``Cycle type'' means the set of test conditions having the calculated effect of operating a freezer for a period of 24 hours with the consumer-activated controls other than the compartment temperature control set to establish various operating characteristics.
1.9 ``HRF-1-2008'' means AHAM Standard HRF-1-2008, Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers, Energy and Internal Volume of Refrigerating Appliances (2008), including Errata to Energy and Internal Volume of Refrigerating Appliances, Correction Sheet issued November 17, 2009. Only sections of HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) specifically referenced in this test procedure are part of this test procedure. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over HRF-1-2008.
1.10 ``Ice storage bin'' means a container in which ice can be stored.
1.11 ``Long-time automatic defrost'' means an automatic defrost system where successive defrost cycles are separated by 14 hours or more of compressor operating time.
1.12 ``Precooling'' means operating a refrigeration system before initiation of a defrost cycle to reduce one or more compartment temperatures significantly (more than 0.5 [deg]F) below its minimum during stable operation between defrosts.
1.13 ``Quick freeze'' means an optional feature on freezers that is initiated manually. It bypasses the thermostat control and operates continually until the feature is terminated either manually or automatically.
1.14 ``Recovery'' means operating a refrigeration system after the conclusion of a defrost cycle to reduce the temperature of one or more compartments to the temperature range that the compartment(s) exhibited during stable operation between defrosts.
1.15 ``Separate auxiliary compartment'' means a freezer compartment other than the first freezer compartment of a freezer having more than one compartment. Access to a separate auxiliary compartment is through a separate exterior door or doors rather than through the door or doors of another compartment. Separate auxiliary freezer compartments may not be larger than the first freezer compartment.
1.16 ``Special compartment'' means any compartment without doors directly accessible from the exterior, and with separate temperature control that is not convertible from fresh food temperature range to freezer temperature range.
1.17 ``Stabilization period'' means the total period of time during which steady-state conditions are being attained or evaluated.
1.18 ``Stable operation'' means operation after steady-state conditions have been achieved but excluding any events associated with defrost cycles. During stable operation the average rate of change of compartment temperature must not exceed 0.042 [deg]F (0.023 [deg]C) per hour. Such a calculation performed for compartment temperatures at any two times, or for any two periods of time comprising complete cycles, during stable operation must meet this requirement.
(a) If compartment temperatures do not cycle, the relevant calculation shall be the difference between the temperatures at two points in time divided by the difference, in hours, between those points in time.
(b) If compartment temperatures cycle as a result of compressor cycling or other cycling operation of any system component (e.g., a damper, fan, or heater), the relevant calculation shall be the difference between compartment temperature averages evaluated for whole compressor cycles or complete temperature cycles divided by the difference, in hours, between either the starts, ends, or mid-times of the two cycles.
1.19 ``Standard cycle'' means the cycle type in which the anti-sweat heater switch, when provided, is set in the highest energy-consuming position.
1.20 ``Through-the-door ice/water dispenser'' means a device incorporated within the cabinet, but outside the boundary of the refrigerated space, that delivers to the user on demand ice and may also deliver water from within the refrigerated space without opening an exterior door. This definition includes dispensers that are capable of dispensing ice and water or ice only.
1.21 ``Variable defrost control'' means an automatic defrost system in which successive defrost cycles are determined by an operating condition variable or variables other than solely compressor operating time. This includes any electrical or mechanical device performing this function. A control scheme that changes the defrost interval from a fixed length to an extended length (without any intermediate steps) is not considered a variable defrost control. A variable defrost control feature should predict the accumulation of frost on the evaporator and react accordingly. Therefore, the times between defrost should vary with different usage patterns and include a continuum of lengths of time between defrosts as inputs vary.
2. Test Conditions
2.1 Ambient Temperature Measurement. Temperature measuring devices shall be shielded so that indicated temperatures are not affected by the operation of the condensing unit or adjacent units.
2.1.1 Ambient Temperature. The ambient temperature shall be recorded at points located 3 feet (91.5 cm) above the floor and 10 inches (25.4 cm) from the center of the two sides of the unit under test. The ambient temperature shall be 90.0 1.0 [deg]F (32.2 0.6 [deg]C) during the stabilization period and the test period.
2.1.2 Ambient Temperature Gradient. The test room vertical ambient temperature gradient in any foot of vertical distance from 2 inches (5.1 cm) above the floor or supporting platform to a height of 1 foot (30.5 cm) above the top of the unit under test is not to exceed 0.5 [deg]F per foot (0.9 [deg]C per meter). The vertical ambient temperature gradient at locations 10 inches (25.4 cm) out from the centers of the two sides of the unit being tested is to be maintained during the test. To demonstrate that this requirement has been met, test data must include measurements taken using temperature sensors at locations 10 inches (25.4 cm) from the center of the two sides of the unit under test at heights of 2 inches (5.1 cm) and 36 inches (91.4 cm) above the floor or supporting platform and at a height of 1 foot (30.5 cm) above the unit under test.
2.1.3 Platform. A platform must be used if the floor temperature is not within 3 [deg]F (1.7 [deg]C) of the measured ambient temperature. If a platform is used, it is to have a solid top with all sides open for air circulation underneath, and its top shall extend at least 1 foot (30.5 cm) beyond each side and front of the unit under test and extend to the wall in the rear.
2.2 Operational Conditions. The freezer shall be installed and its operating conditions maintained in accordance with HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), sections 5.3.2 through section 5.5.5.5 (but excluding sections 5.5.5.2 and 5.5.5.4). The quick freeze option shall be switched off except as specified in section 3.1 of this appendix. Additional clarifications are noted in sections 2.3 through 2.9 of this appendix.
2.3 Anti-Sweat Heaters. The anti-sweat heater switch is to be on during one test and off during a second test. In the case of a freezer with variable anti-sweat heater control, the standard cycle energy use shall be the result of the calculation described in 6.2.3.
2.4 The cabinet and its refrigerating mechanism shall be assembled and set up in accordance with the printed consumer instructions supplied with the cabinet. Set-up of the freezer shall not deviate from these instructions, unless explicitly required or allowed by this test procedure. Specific required or allowed deviations from such set-up include the following:
(a) Connection of water lines and installation of water filters are not required;
(b) Clearance requirements from surfaces of the product shall be as described in section 2.6 below;
(c) The electric power supply shall be as described in HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) section 5.5.1;
(d) Temperature control settings for testing shall be as described in section 3 of this appendix. Settings for special compartments shall be as described in section 2.5 of this appendix;
(e) The product does not need to be anchored or otherwise secured to prevent tipping during energy testing;
(f) All the product's chutes and throats required for the delivery of ice shall be free of packing, covers, or other blockages that may be fitted for shipping or when the icemaker is not in use; and
(g) Ice storage bins shall be emptied of ice.
For cases in which set-up is not clearly defined by this test procedure, manufacturers must submit a petition for a waiver (see section 7).
2.5 Special compartments shall be tested with controls set to provide the coldest temperature. However, for special compartments in which temperature control is achieved using the addition of heat (including resistive electric heating, refrigeration system waste heat, or heat from any other source, but excluding the transfer of air from another part of the interior of the product) for any part of the controllable temperature range of that compartment, the product energy use shall be determined by averaging two sets of tests. The first set of tests shall be conducted with such special compartments at their coldest settings, and the second set of tests shall be conducted with such special compartments at their warmest settings. The requirements for the warmest or coldest temperature settings of this section do not apply to features or functions associated with temperature control (such as quick freeze) that are initiated manually and terminated automatically within 168 hours.
2.6 Rear Clearance.
(a) General. The space between the lowest edge of the rear plane of the cabinet and a vertical surface (the test room wall or simulated wall) shall be the minimum distance in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, unless other provisions of this section apply. The rear plane shall be considered to be the largest flat surface at the rear of the cabinet, excluding features that protrude beyond this surface, such as brackets or compressors.
(b) Maximum clearance. The clearance shall not be greater than 2 inches (51 mm) from the lowest edge of the rear plane to the vertical surface, unless the provisions of subsection (c) of this section apply.
(c) If permanent rear spacers or other components that protrude beyond the rear plane extend further than the 2 inch (51 mm) distance, or if the highest edge of the rear plane is in contact with the vertical surface when the unit is positioned with the lowest edge of the rear plane at or further than the 2 inch (51 mm) distance from the vertical surface, the appliance shall be located with the spacers or other components protruding beyond the rear plane, or the highest edge of the rear plane, in contact with the vertical surface.
(d) Rear-mounted condensers. If the product has a flat rear-wall-mounted condenser (i.e., a rear-wall-mounted condenser with all refrigerant tube centerlines within 0.25 inches (6.4 mm) of the condenser plane), and the area of the condenser plane represents at least 25% of the total area of the rear wall of the cabinet, then the spacing to the vertical surface may be measured from the lowest edge of the condenser plane.
2.7 Steady State Condition. Steady-state conditions exist if the temperature measurements taken at 4-minute intervals or less during a stabilization period are not changing at a rate greater than 0.042 [deg]F (0.023 [deg]C) per hour as determined by the applicable condition of A or B described below.
A--The average of the measurements during a 2-hour period if no cycling occurs or during a number of complete repetitive compressor cycles occurring through a period of no less than 2 hours is compared to the average over an equivalent time period with 3 hours elapsing between the two measurement periods.
B--If A above cannot be used, the average of the measurements during a number of complete repetitive compressor cycles occurring through a period of no less than 2 hours and including the last complete cycle before a defrost period (or if no cycling occurs, the average of the measurements during the last 2 hours before a defrost period) are compared to the same averaging period before the following defrost period.
2.8 Freezers with Demand-Response Capability. Freezers that have a communication module for demand-response functions that is located within the cabinet shall be tested with the communication module in the configuration set at the factory just before shipping.
2.9 For products that require the freezer compartment to be loaded with packages in accordance with section 5.5.5.3 of HRF-1-2008, the number of packages comprising the 75% load shall be determined by filling the compartment completely with the packages that are to be used for the test, such that the packages fill as much of the usable refrigerated space within the compartment as is physically possible, and then removing from the compartment a number of packages so that the compartment contains 75% of the packages that were placed in the compartment to completely fill it. If multiplying the total number of packages by 0.75 results in a fraction, the number of packages used shall be rounded to the nearest whole number, rounding up if the result ends in 0.5. For multi-shelf units, this method shall be applied to each shelf. For both single- and multi-shelf units, the remaining packages shall be arranged as necessary to provide the required air gap and thermocouple placement. The number of packages comprising the 100% and 75% loading conditions shall be recorded in the test data maintained in accordance with 10 CFR 429.71.
3. Test Control Settings
3.1 Model with No User Operable Temperature Control. A test shall be performed during which the compartment temperature and energy use shall be measured. A second test shall be performed with the temperature control electrically short circuited to cause the compressor to run continuously. If the model has the quick freeze option, this option must be used to bypass the temperature control.
3.2 Model with User Operable Temperature Control. Testing shall be performed in accordance with one of the following sections using the standardized temperature of 0.0 [deg]F (-17.8 [deg]C). For the purposes of comparing compartment temperatures with standardized temperatures, as described in sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the freezer compartment temperature shall be as specified in section 5.1.3.
(a) knob detents shall be mechanically defeated if necessary to attain a median setting, and (b) the warmest and coldest settings shall correspond to the positions in which the indicator is aligned with control symbols indicating the warmest and coldest settings. For electronic control systems, the test shall be performed with all compartment temperature controls set at the average of the coldest and warmest settings; if there is no setting equal to this average, the setting closest to the average shall be used. If there are two such settings equally close to the average, the higher of these temperature control settings shall be used. A second test shall be performed with all controls set at either their warmest or their coldest setting (not electrically or mechanically bypassed), whichever is appropriate, to attempt to achieve compartment temperatures measured during the two tests that bound (i.e., one is above and one is below) the standardized temperature. If the compartment temperatures measured during these two tests bound the standardized temperature, then these test results shall be used to determine energy consumption. If the compartment temperature measured with all controls set at their coldest setting is above the standardized temperature, the tested unit fails the test and cannot be rated. If the compartment temperature measured with all controls set at their warmest setting is below the standardized temperature, then the result of this test alone will be used to determine energy consumption. Also see Table 1 of this appendix, which summarizes these requirements.
Table 1--Temperature Settings for Freezers----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
First test Second test Energy calculation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- based on:
Settings Results Settings Results----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Mid............................. Low............... Warm.............. Low............... Second Test Only.
High.............. First and Second
Tests.
High.............. Cold.............. Low............... First and Second
Tests.
High.............. No Energy Use
Rating.----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.2 Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all temperature controls set at their warmest setting. If the compartment temperature is below the standardized temperature, then the result of this test alone will be used to determine energy consumption. If this condition is not met, then the unit shall be tested in accordance with section 3.2.1.
4. Test Period
Tests shall be performed by establishing the conditions set forth in section 2 and using the control settings as set forth in section 3 above.
4.1 Non-automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has no automatic defrost system, the test period shall start after steady-state conditions (see section 2.7 of this appendix) have been achieved and be no less than three hours in duration. During the test period, the compressor motor shall complete two or more whole compressor cycles. (A whole compressor cycle is a complete ``on'' and a complete ``off'' period of the motor.) If no ``off'' cycling occurs, the test period shall be three hours. If less than two compressor cycles occur during a 24-hour period, then a single complete compressor cycle may be used.
4.2 Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has an automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady-state conditions have been achieved and be from one point during a defrost period to the same point during the next defrost period. If the model being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the alternate provisions of 4.2.1 may be used. If the model being tested has a variable defrost control, the provisions of 4.2.2 shall apply.
4.2.1 Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the two-part test described in this section may be used. The first part is a stable period of compressor operation that includes no portions of the defrost cycle, such as precooling or recovery, that is otherwise the same as the test for a unit having no defrost provisions (section 4.1). The second part is designed to capture the energy consumed during all of the events occurring with the defrost control sequence that are outside of stable operation.
4.2.1.1 Cycling Compressor System. For a system with a cycling compressor, the second part of the test starts at the termination of the last regular compressor ``on'' cycle. The average temperature of the compartment measured from the termination of the previous compressor ``on'' cycle to the termination of the last regular compressor ``on'' cycle must be within 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C) of the average temperature of the compartment measured for the first part of the test. If any compressor cycles occur prior to the defrost heater being energized that cause the average temperature in the compartment to deviate from the average temperature for the first part of the test by more than 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C), these compressor cycles are not considered regular compressor cycles and must be included in the second part of the test. As an example, a ``precooling'' cycle, which is an extended compressor cycle that lowers the compartment temperature prior to energizing the defrost heater, must be included in the second part of the test. The test period for the second part of the test ends at the termination of the first regular compressor ``on'' cycle after the compartment temperatures have fully recovered to their stable conditions. The average temperature of the compartment measured from this termination of the first regular compressor ``on'' cycle until the termination of the next regular compressor ``on'' cycle must be within 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C) of the average temperature of the compartment measured for the first part of the test. See Figure 1. Note that Figure 1 illustrates the concepts of precooling and recovery but does not represent all possible defrost cycles. [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR25JA12.007
4.2.1.2 Non-cycling Compressor System. For a system with a non-cycling compressor, the second part of the test starts at a time before defrost during stable operation when the compartment temperature is within 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C) of the average temperature of the compartment measured for the first part of the test. The second part stops at a time after defrost during stable operation when the compartment temperature is within 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C) of the average temperature of the compartment measured for the first part of the test. See Figure 2. [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR25JA12.008
4.2.2 Variable Defrost Control. If the model being tested has a variable defrost control system, the test shall consist of the same two parts as the test for long-time automatic defrost (section 4.2.1).
5. Test Measurements
(a) Temperature measurements shall be made at the locations prescribed in Figure 5.2 of HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and shall be accurate to within 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C).
(b) If the interior arrangements of the unit under test do not conform with those shown in Figure 5.2 of HRF-1-2008, the unit may be tested by relocating the temperature sensors from the locations specified in the figures to avoid interference with hardware or components within the unit, in which case the specific locations used for the temperature sensors shall be noted in the test data records maintained by the manufacturer in accordance with 10 CFR 429.71, and the certification report shall indicate that non-standard sensor locations were used. If any temperature sensor is relocated by any amount from the location prescribed in Figure 5.2 of HRF-1-2008 in order to maintain a minimum 1-inch air space from adjustable shelves or other components that could be relocated by the consumer, this constitutes a relocation of temperature sensors that shall be recorded in the test data and reported in the certification report as described above.
5.1.1 Measured Temperature. The measured temperature is to be the average of all sensor temperature readings taken at a particular point in time. Measurements shall be taken at regular intervals not to exceed 4 minutes.
5.1.2 Compartment Temperature. The compartment temperature for each test period shall be an average of the measured temperatures taken in a compartment during the test period as defined in section 4 of this appendix. For long-time automatic defrost models, compartment temperature shall be that measured in the first part of the test period specified in section 4.2.1 of this appendix. For models with variable defrost controls, compartment temperature shall be that measured in the first part of the test period specified in section 4.2.2 of this appendix. For models with automatic defrost that is neither long-time nor variable defrost, the compartment temperature shall be an average of the measured temperatures taken in a compartment during a stable period of compressor operation that (a) includes no defrost cycles or events associated with a defrost cycle, such as precooling or recovery, (b) is no less than three hours in duration, and (c) includes two or more whole compressor cycles. If the compressor does not cycle, the stable period used for the temperature average shall be three hours in duration.
5.1.3 Freezer Compartment Temperature. The freezer compartment temperature shall be calculated as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR16DE10.017 Where:F is the total number of applicable freezer compartments, which include
the first freezer compartment and any number of separate
auxiliary freezer compartments;TFi is the compartment temperature of freezer compartment
``i'' determined in accordance with section 5.1.2; andVFi is the volume of freezer compartment ``i''.
5.2 Energy Measurements:
5.2.1 Per-Day Energy Consumption. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day for each test period shall be the energy expended during the test period as specified in section 4 adjusted to a 24-hour period. The adjustment shall be determined as follows:
5.2.1.1 Nonautomatic and Automatic Defrost Models. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to: ET = (EP x 1440 x K)/T Where: ET = test cycle energy expended in kilowatt-hours per day;EP = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the test period;T = length of time of the test period in minutes;1440 = conversion factor to adjust to a 24-hour period in minutes per
day; andK = dimensionless correction factor of 0.7 for chest freezers and 0.85
for upright freezers to adjust for average household usage.
5.2.1.2 Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the two-part test method is used, the energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to: ET = (1440 x K x EP1/T1) + (EP2-(EP1 x T2/T1)) x K x (12/CT) Where: ET, 1440, and K are defined in section 5.2.1.1;EP1 = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the first part of the
test;EP2 = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the second part of the
test;CT = defrost timer run time or compressor run time between defrosts in
hours required to cause it to go through a complete cycle,
rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour;12 = conversion factor to adjust for a 50 percent run time of the
compressor in hours per day; andT1 and T2 = length of time in minutes of the first and second test parts
respectively.
5.2.1.3 Variable Defrost Control. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to: ET = (1440 x K x EP1/T1) + (EP2-(EP1 x T2/T1)) x K x (12/CT), Where: ET, 1440, and K are defined in section 5.2.1.1 and EP1, EP2, T1, T2, and
12 are defined in section 5.2.1.2;CT = (CTL x CTM)/(F x (CTM -
CTL) + CTL);CTL = the shortest compressor run time between defrosts used
in the variable defrost control algorithm (greater than or
equal to 6 but less than or equal to 12 hours), or the
shortest compressor run time between defrosts observed for the
test (if it is shorter than the shortest run time used in the
control algorithm and is greater than 6 hours), or 6 hours (if
the shortest observed run time is less than 6 hours), in hours
rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour;CTM = maximum compressor run time between defrosts in hours
rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour (greater than
CTL but not more than 96 hours);F = ratio of per day energy consumption in excess of the least energy
and the maximum difference in per-day energy consumption and
is equal to 0.20.
For variable defrost models with no values for CTL and CTM in the algorithm, the default values of 6 and 96 shall be used, respectively.
(a) The unit's total refrigerated volume, VT, shall be measured in accordance with HRF-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), section 3.30 and sections 4.2 through 4.3. The measured volume shall include all spaces within the insulated volume of each compartment except for the volumes that must be deducted in accordance with section 4.2.2 of HRF-1-2008.
(b) In the case of freezers with automatic icemakers, the volume occupied by the automatic icemaker, including its ice storage bin, is to be included in the volume measurement.
(c) Total refrigerated volume is determined by physical measurement of the test unit. Measurements and calculations used to determine the total refrigerated volume shall be retained as part of the test records underlying the certification of the basic model in accordance with 10 CFR 429.71.
6. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements
6.1 Adjusted Total Volume. The adjusted total volume, VA, for freezers under test shall be defined as: VA = VT x CF Where: VA = adjusted total volume in cubic feet;VT = total refrigerated volume in cubic feet; andCF = dimensionless correction factor of 1.76.
6.2 Average Per-Cycle Energy Consumption. The average per-cycle energy consumption for a cycle type, E, is expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle to the nearest one hundredth (0.01) kilowatt-hour, and shall be calculated according to the sections below.
6.2.1 If the compartment temperature is always below 0.0 [deg]F (-17.8 [deg]C), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to: E = ET1 + IET Where: ET is defined in 5.2.1;The number 1 indicates the test period during which the highest
compartment temperature is measured; andIET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle, equals 0 (zero) for products
without an automatic icemaker, and equals 0.23 for products
with an automatic icemaker.
6.2.2 If one of the compartment temperatures measured for a test period is greater than 0.0 [deg]F (17.8 [deg]C), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to: E = ET1 + ((ET2 - ET1) x (0.0 - TF1)/(TF2 - TF1)) + IET Where: IET is defined in 6.2.1 and ET is defined in 5.2.1;TF = freezer compartment temperature determined according to 5.1.3 in
degrees F;The numbers 1 and 2 indicate measurements taken during the first and
second test period as appropriate; and0.0 = standardized compartment temperature in degrees F.
6.2.3 Variable Anti-Sweat Heater Models. The standard cycle energy consumption of a freezer with a variable anti-sweat heater control (Estd), expressed in kilowatt-hours per day, shall be calculated equivalent to: Estd = E + (Correction Factor) where E is determined by
6.2.1, or 6.2.2, whichever is appropriate, with the anti-sweat
heater switch in the ``off'' position or, for a product
without an anti-sweat heater switch, the anti-sweat heater in
its lowest energy use state.Correction Factor = (Anti-sweat Heater Power x System-loss Factor) x (24
hrs/1 day) x (1 kW/1000 W) Where: Anti-sweat Heater Power = 0.034 * (Heater Watts at 5%RH)+ 0.211 * (Heater Watts at 15%RH)+ 0.204 * (Heater Watts at 25%RH)+ 0.166 * (Heater Watts at 35%RH)+ 0.126 * (Heater Watts at 45%RH)+ 0.119 * (Heater Watts at 55%RH)+ 0.069 * (Heater Watts at 65%RH)+ 0.047 * (Heater Watts at 75%RH)+ 0.008 * (Heater Watts at 85%RH)+ 0.015 * (Heater Watts at 95%RH)Heater Watts at a specific relative humidity = the nominal watts used by
all heaters at that specific relative humidity, 72 [deg]F
ambient (22.2 [deg]C), and DOE reference freezer (FZ) average
temperature of 0 [deg]F (-17.8 [deg]C).System-loss Factor = 1.3
7. Test Procedure Waivers
To the extent that the procedures contained in this appendix do not provide a means for determining the energy consumption of a freezer, a manufacturer must obtain a waiver under 10 CFR 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for each such product. Such instances could, for example, include situations where the test set-up for a particular freezer basic model is not clearly defined by the provisions of section 2. For details regarding the criteria and procedures for obtaining a waiver, please refer to 10 CFR 430.27. [75 FR 78866, Dec. 16, 2010, as amended at 76 FR 12502, Mar. 7, 2011; 76 FR 24781, May 2, 2011; 77 FR 3577, Jan. 25, 2012; 79 FR 22354, Apr. 21, 2014; 79 FR 41418, July 16, 2014]
Sec. Appendix B1 to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Freezers
The provisions of appendix B1 shall apply to all products manufactured prior to the effective date of any amended standards promulgated by DOE pursuant to Section 325(b)(4) of the Energy Policy and Conservation Act of 1975, as amended by the Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007 (to be codified at 42 U.S.C. 6295(b)(4)).
1. Definitions
Section 3, Definitions, of HRF-1-1979 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) applies to this test procedure.
(1) the freezer volume as defined in HRF-1-1979 in cubic feet, times (2) an adjustment factor.
1.2 ``Anti-sweat heater'' means a device incorporated into the design of a freezer to prevent the accumulation of moisture on exterior or interior surfaces of the cabinet.
1.3 ``Anti-sweat heater switch'' means a user-controllable switch or user interface which modifies the activation or control of anti-sweat heaters.
1.4 ``Automatic Defrost'' means a system in which the defrost cycle is automatically initiated and terminated, with resumption of normal refrigeration at the conclusion of defrost operation. The system automatically prevents the permanent formation of frost on all refrigerated surfaces. Nominal refrigerated food temperatures are maintained during the operation of the automatic defrost system.
1.5 ``Cycle'' means the period of 24 hours for which the energy use of a freezer is calculated as though the consumer-activated compartment temperature controls were set to maintain the standardized temperature (see section 3.2).
1.6 ``Cycle type'' means the set of test conditions having the calculated effect of operating a freezer for a period of 24 hours with the consumer-activated controls other than the compartment temperature control set to establish various operating characteristics.
1.7 ``HRF-1-1979'' means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers standard for household refrigerators, combination refrigerator-freezers, and household freezers, also approved as an American National Standard as a revision of ANSI B 38.1-1970. Only sections of HRF-1-1979 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) specifically referenced in this test procedure are part of this test procedure. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over HRF-1-1979.
1.8 ``Long-time Automatic Defrost'' means an automatic defrost system where successive defrost cycles are separated by 14 hours or more of compressor-operating time.
1.9 ``Quick freeze'' means an optional feature on freezers that is initiated manually. It bypasses the thermostat control and operates continually until the feature is terminated either manually or automatically.
1.10 ``Separate auxiliary compartment'' means a freezer compartment other than the first freezer compartment of a freezer having more than one compartment. Access to a separate auxiliary compartment is through a separate exterior door or doors rather than through the door or doors of another compartment. Separate auxiliary freezer compartments may not be larger than the first freezer compartment.
1.11 ``Special compartment'' means any compartment without doors directly accessible from the exterior, and with separate temperature control that is not convertible from fresh food temperature range to freezer temperature range.
1.12 ``Stabilization Period'' means the total period of time during which steady-state conditions are being attained or evaluated.
1.13 ``Standard cycle'' means the cycle type in which the anti-sweat heater switch, when provided, is set in the highest energy consuming position.
1.14 ``Variable defrost control'' means an automatic defrost system in which successive defrost cycles are determined by an operating condition variable or variables other than solely compressor operating time. This includes any electrical or mechanical device performing this function. A control scheme that changes the defrost interval from a fixed length to an extended length (without any intermediate steps) is not considered a variable defrost control. A variable defrost control feature should predict the accumulation of frost on the evaporator and react accordingly. Therefore, the times between defrost should vary with different usage patterns and include a continuum of lengths of time between defrosts as inputs vary.
2. Test Conditions.
2.1 Ambient Temperature. The ambient temperature shall be 90.0 1.0 [deg]F (32.2 0.6 [deg]C) during the stabilization period and the test period.
2.2 Operational Conditions. The freezer shall be installed and its operating conditions maintained in accordance with HRF-1-1979, (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), section 7.2 through section 7.4.3.3 (but excluding section 7.4.3.2), except that the vertical ambient gradient at locations 10 inches (25.4 cm) out from the centers of the two sides of the unit being tested is to be maintained during the test. Unless the area is obstructed by shields or baffles, the gradient is to be maintained from 2 inches (5.1 cm) above the floor or supporting platform to a height 1 foot (30.5 cm) above the unit under test. Defrost controls are to be operative. The quick freeze option shall be switched off except as specified in section 3.1. Additional clarifications are noted in sections 2.3 through 2.6.
2.3 Anti-Sweat Heaters. The anti-sweat heater switch is to be on during one test and off during a second test. In the case of an electric freezer equipped with variable anti-sweat heater control, the standard cycle energy use shall be the result of the calculation described in 6.2.2.
2.4 The cabinet and its refrigerating mechanism shall be assembled and set up in accordance with the printed consumer instructions supplied with the cabinet. Set-up of the freezer shall not deviate from these instructions, unless explicitly required or allowed by this test procedure. Specific required or allowed deviations from such set-up include the following:
(a) Connection of water lines and installation of water filters are not required;
(b) Clearance requirements from surfaces of the product shall be as specified in section 2.6 below;
(c) The electric power supply shall be as described in HRF-1-1979 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) section 7.4.1;
(d) Temperature control settings for testing shall be as described in section 3 of this appendix. Settings for special compartments shall be as described in section 2.5 of this appendix;
(e) The product does not need to be anchored or otherwise secured to prevent tipping during energy testing; and
(f) All the product's chutes and throats required for the delivery of ice shall be free of packing, covers, or other blockages that may be fitted for shipping or when the icemaker is not in use.
For cases in which set-up is not clearly defined by this test procedure, manufacturers must submit a petition for a waiver (see section 7).
2.5 Special compartments shall be tested with controls set to provide the coldest temperature. This requirement for the coldest temperature does not apply to features or functions (such as quick freeze) that are initiated manually and terminated automatically within 168 hours.
2.6 The space between the back of the cabinet and a vertical surface (the test room wall or simulated wall) shall be the minimum distance in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2.7 Steady State Condition. Steady state conditions exist if the temperature measurements taken at four minute intervals or less during a stabilization period are not changing at a rate greater than 0.042 [deg]F. (0.023 [deg]C.) per hour as determined by the applicable condition of A or B.A--The average of the measurements during a two hour period if no cycling occurs or during a number of complete repetitive compressor cycles through a period of no less than two hours is compared to the average over an equivalent time period with three hours elapsed between the two measurement periods.B--If A above cannot be used, the average of the measurements during a number of complete repetitive compressor cycles through a period of no less than two hours and including the last complete cycle prior to a defrost period, or if no cycling occurs, the average of the measurements during the last two hours prior to a defrost period; are compared to the same averaging period prior to the following defrost period.
3. Test Control Settings.
3.1 Model with No User Operable Temperature Control. A test shall be performed during which the compartment temperature and energy use shall be measured. A second test shall be performed with the temperature control electrically short circuited to cause the compressor to run continuously. If the model has the quick freeze option, this option must be used to bypass the temperature control.
3.2 Model with User Operable Temperature Control. Testing shall be performed in accordance with one of the following sections using the standardized temperature of 0.0 [deg]F (-17.8 [deg]C). For the purposes of comparing compartment temperatures with standardized temperatures, as described in sections 3.2.1 through 3.2.3, the freezer compartment temperature shall be as specified in section 5.1.3.
3.2.1 A first test shall be performed with all temperature controls set at their median position midway between their warmest and coldest settings. For mechanical control systems, knob detents shall be mechanically defeated if necessary to attain a median setting. For electronic control systems, the test shall be performed with all compartment temperature controls set at the average of the coldest and warmest settings--if there is no setting equal to this average, the setting closest to the average shall be used. If there are two such settings equally close to the average, the higher of these temperature control settings shall be used. If the compartment temperature measured during the first test is higher than the standardized temperature, the second test shall be conducted with the controls set at the coldest settings. If the compartment temperature measured during the first test is lower than the standardized temperature, the second test shall be conducted with the controls set at the warmest settings. If the compartment temperatures measured during these two tests bound the standardized temperature, then these test results shall be used to determine energy consumption. If the compartment temperature measured with all controls set at their coldest settings is above the standardized temperature, a third test shall be performed with all controls set at their warmest settings and the result of this test shall be used with the result of the test performed with all controls set at their coldest settings to determine energy consumption. If the compartment temperature measured with all controls set at their warmest settings is below the standardized temperature, then the result of this test alone will be used to determine energy consumption.
3.2.2 Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all temperature controls set at their warmest setting. If the compartment temperature is below the standardized temperature, then the result of this test alone will be used to determine energy consumption. If the above condition is not met, then the unit shall be tested in accordance with 3.2.1 above.
3.2.3 Alternatively, a first test may be performed with all temperature controls set at their coldest setting. If the compartment temperature is above the standardized temperature, a second test shall be performed with all controls set at their warmest setting and the results of these two tests shall be used to determine energy consumption. If the above condition is not met, then the unit shall be tested in accordance with 3.2.1 above.
4. Test Period
Tests shall be performed by establishing the conditions set forth in section 2 and using the control settings as set forth in section 3 of this appendix.
4.1 Nonautomatic Defrost. If the model being tested has no automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady-state conditions have been achieved and be no less than 3 hours in duration. During the test period, the compressor motor shall complete two or more whole compressor cycles. A compressor cycle is a complete ``on'' and a complete ``off'' period of the motor. If no ``off'' cycling will occur, as determined during the stabilization period, the test period shall be 3 hours. If incomplete cycling occurs (less than two compressor cycles during a 24-hour period), the results of the 24-hour period shall be used.
4.2 Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has an automatic defrost system, the test time period shall start after steady-state conditions have been achieved and be from one point during a defrost period to the same point during the next defrost period. If the model being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the alternate provisions of 4.2.1 may be used. If the model being tested has a variable defrost control, the provisions of 4.2.2 shall apply.
4.2.1 Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the model being tested has a long-time automatic defrost system, the two-part test described in this section may be used. The first part is the same as the test for a unit having no defrost provisions (section 4.1). The second part would start when a defrost is initiated when the compressor ``on'' cycle is terminated prior to start of the defrost heater and terminates at the second turn ``on'' of the compressor or 4 hours from the initiation of the defrost heater, whichever comes first.
4.2.2 Variable Defrost Control. If the model being tested has a variable defrost control system, the test shall consist of the same two parts as the test for long-time automatic defrost (section 4.2.1).
5. Test Measurements
5.1 Temperature Measurements. Temperature measurements shall be made at the locations prescribed in Figure 7.2 of HRF-1-1979 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and shall be accurate to within 0.5 [deg]F (0.3 [deg]C). If the interior arrangements of the cabinet do not conform with those shown in Figure 7.2 of HRF-1-1979, the product may be tested by relocating the temperature sensors from the locations specified in the figures to avoid interference with hardware or components within the cabinet, in which case the specific locations used for the temperature sensors shall be noted in the test data records maintained by the manufacturer in accordance with 10 CFR 429.14, and the certification report shall indicate that non-standard sensor locations were used.
5.1.1 Measured Temperature. The measured temperature is to be the average of all sensor temperature readings taken at a particular time. Measurements shall be taken at regular intervals not to exceed four minutes.
5.1.2 Compartment Temperature. The compartment temperature for each test period shall be an average of the measured temperatures taken during one or more complete compressor cycles. One compressor cycle is one complete motor ``on'' and one complete motor ``off'' period. For long-time automatic defrost models, compartment temperature shall be that measured in the first part of the test period specified in 4.2.1. For models equipped with variable defrost controls, compartment temperatures shall be those measured in the first part of the test period specified in 4.2.2.
5.1.2.1 The number of complete compressor motor cycles over which the measured temperatures in a compartment are to be averaged to determine compartment temperature shall be equal to the number of minutes between measured temperature readings rounded up to the next whole minute or a number of complete cycles over a time period exceeding one hour. One of the compressor cycles shall be the last complete compressor cycle during the test period before start of the defrost control sequence for products with automatic defrost.
5.1.2.2 If no compressor motor cycling occurs, the compartment temperature shall be the average of the measured temperatures taken during the last thirty-two minutes of the test period.
5.1.2.3 If incomplete cycling occurs (less than one compressor cycle), the compartment temperature shall be the average of all readings taken during the last 3 hours of the last complete compressor ``on'' period.
5.1.3 Freezer Compartment Temperature. The freezer compartment temperature shall be calculated as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR02MY11.092 Where: F is the total number of applicable freezer compartments, which include
the first freezer compartment and any number of separate
auxiliary freezer compartments;TFi is the compartment temperature of freezer compartment
``i'' determined in accordance with section 5.1.2; andVFi is the volume of freezer compartment ``i''.
5.2 Energy Measurements:
5.2.1 Per-day Energy Consumption. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day for each test period shall be the energy expended during the test period as specified in section 4.1 adjusted to a 24 hour period.
The adjustment shall be determined as follows:
5.2.1.1 Nonautomatic and automatic defrost models. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to: ET = (EP x 1440 x K) / T where ET = test cycle energy expended in kilowatt-hours per day,EP = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the test period.T = length of time of the test period in minutes,1440 = conversion factor to adjust to a 24 hour period in minutes per
day, andK = correction factor of 0.7 for chest freezers and 0.85 for upright
freezers to adjust for average household usage, dimensionless.
5.2.1.2 Long-time Automatic Defrost. If the two part test method is used, the energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to: ET = (1440 x K x EP1/T1) + (EP2-EP1 x T2/T1)) x K x (12/CT) Where: ET, 1440, and K are defined in section 5.2.1.1;EP1 = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the first part of the
test;EP2 = energy expended in kilowatt-hours during the second part of the
test;CT = defrost timer run time or compressor run time between defrosts in
hours required to cause it to go through a complete cycle,
rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour;12 = conversion factor to adjust for a 50 percent run time of the
compressor in hours per day; andT1 and T2 = length of time in minutes of the first and second test parts
respectively.
5.2.1.3 Variable Defrost Control. The energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day shall be calculated equivalent to: ET = (1440 x K x EP1/T1) + (EP2-(EP1 x T2/T1)) x K x (12/CT), Where: ET, K, and 1440 are defined in section 5.2.1.1 and EP1, EP2, T1, T2, and
12 are defined in section 5.2.1.2. CT = (CTL x CTM)/(Fx (CTM-
CTL) + CTL) Where: CTL = least or shortest compressor run time between defrosts
in hours rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour (greater than
or equal to 6 hours but less than or equal to 12 hours);CTM = maximum compressor run time between defrosts in hours
rounded to the nearest tenth of an hour (greater than
CTL but not more than 96 hours);F = ratio of per day energy consumption in excess of the least energy
and the maximum difference in per-day energy consumption and
is equal to 0.20.For variable defrost models with no values for CTL and
CTM in the algorithm, the default values of 12 and
84 shall be used, respectively.
5.3 Volume measurements. The total refrigerated volume, VT, shall be measured in accordance with HRF-1-1979, section 3.20 and section 5.1 through 5.3.
6. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements.
6.1 Adjusted Total Volume. The adjusted total volume, VA, for freezers under test shall be defined as: VA=VTx CF where VA=adjusted total volume in cubic feet,VT=total refrigerated volume in cubic feet, andCF=Correction factor of 1.73, dimensionless.
6.2 Average Per Cycle Energy Consumption:
6.2.1 The average per-cycle energy consumption for a cycle type is expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle to the nearest one hundredth (0.01) kilowatt-hour and shall depend upon the compartment temperature attainable as shown below.
6.2.1.1 If the compartment temperature is always below 0.0 [deg]F. (-17.8 [deg]C.), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to: E=ET1 whereE=Total per-cycle energy consumption in kilowatt-hours per day.ET is defined in 5.2.1, andNumber 1 indicates the test period during which the highest compartment
temperature is measured.
6.2.1.2 If one of the compartment temperatures measured for a test period is greater than 0.0 [deg]F (17.8 [deg]C), the average per-cycle energy consumption shall be equivalent to: E = ET1 + ((ET2 - ET1) x (0.0 - TF1)/(TF2 - TF1)) Where: E is defined in 6.2.1.1;ET is defined in 5.2.1;TF = freezer compartment temperature determined according to 5.1.3 in
degrees F;The numbers 1 and 2 indicate measurements taken during the first and
second test period as appropriate; and0.0 = Standardized compartment temperature in degrees F.
6.2.2 Variable Anti-Sweat Heater Models. The standard cycle energy consumption of an electric freezer with a variable anti-sweat heater control (Estd), expressed in kilowatt-hours per day, shall be calculated equivalent to: Estd = E + (Correction Factor) where E is determined by
6.2.1.1, or 6.2.1.2, whichever is appropriate, with the anti-
sweat heater switch in the ``off'' position or, for a product
without an anti-sweat heater switch, the anti-sweat heater in
its lowest energy use state.Correction Factor = (Anti-sweat Heater Power x System-loss Factor) x (24
hrs/1 day) x (1 kW/1000 W) Where: Anti-sweat Heater Power = 0.034 * (Heater Watts at 5%RH)+ 0.211 * (Heater Watts at 15%RH)+ 0.204 * (Heater Watts at 25%RH)+ 0.166 * (Heater Watts at 35%RH)+ 0.126 * (Heater Watts at 45%RH)+ 0.119 * (Heater Watts at 55%RH)+ 0.069 * (Heater Watts at 65%RH)+ 0.047 * (Heater Watts at 75%RH)+ 0.008 * (Heater Watts at 85%RH)+ 0.015 * (Heater Watts at 95%RH) Heater Watts at a specific relative humidity = the nominal watts used by
all heaters at that specific relative humidity, 72 [deg]F
(22.2 [deg]C) ambient, and DOE reference freezer (FZ) average
temperature of 0 [deg]F (-17.8 [deg]C).System-loss Factor = 1.3.
7. Test Procedure Waivers
To the extent that the procedures contained in this appendix do not provide a means for determining the energy consumption of a freezer, a manufacturer must obtain a waiver under 10 CFR 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for each such product. Such instances could, for example, include situations where the test set-up for a particular freezer basic model is not clearly defined by the provisions of section 2. For details regarding the criteria and procedures for obtaining a waiver, please refer to 10 CFR 430.27. [47 FR 34528, Aug. 10, 1982; 48 FR 13013, Mar. 29, 1983, as amended at 54 FR 36241, Aug. 31, 1989; 54 FR 38788, Sept. 20, 1989; 75 FR 78871, Dec. 16, 2010; 76 FR 12502, Mar. 7, 2011; 76 FR 24782, May 2, 2011]
Sec. Appendix C to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Dishwashers
Note: Prior to the compliance date for any amended energy conservation standards that incorporate standby mode and off mode energy consumption (May 30, 2013 unless the direct final rule published on May 30, 2012 is withdrawn), manufacturers may use either Appendix C or Appendix C1 to certify compliance with existing DOE energy conservation standards and to make any representations related to energy and/or water consumption of dishwashers, with the following exception. If the compliance date is after April 29, 2013, manufacturers that make representations related to standby mode and off mode energy consumption must use Appendix C1 for any representations made after April 29, 2013 of the energy and/or water consumption of these products, consistent with the requirements of 42 U.S.C. 6293(c)(2).
After the compliance date for any amended energy conservation standards that incorporate standby mode and off mode energy consumption (May 30, 2013 unless the direct final rule published on May 30, 2012 is withdrawn), all dishwashers shall be tested using the provisions of Appendix C1 to certify compliance with amended energy conservation standards and to make any representations related to energy and/or water consumption, with the following exception. If the compliance date is before April 29, 2013, manufacturers may use Appendix C for any representations until April 29, 2013 of energy and/or water consumption of these products, consistent with the requirements of 42 U.S.C. 6293(c)(2).
1. Definitions
1.1 AHAM means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers.
1.2 Compact dishwasher means a dishwasher that has a capacity of less than eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in ANSI/AHAM DW-1-1992 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), using the test load specified in section 2.7.1 of this appendix.
1.3 Cycle means a sequence of operations of a dishwasher which performs a complete dishwashing function, and may include variations or combinations of washing, rinsing, and drying.
1.4 Cycle type means any complete sequence of operations capable of being preset on the dishwasher prior to the initiation of machine operation.
1.5 Non-soil-sensing dishwasher means a dishwasher that does not have the ability to adjust automatically any energy consuming aspect of a wash cycle based on the soil load of the dishes.
1.6 Normal cycle means the cycle type recommended by the manufacturer for completely washing a full load of normally soiled dishes including the power-dry feature.
1.7 Power-dry feature means the introduction of electrically generated heat into the washing chamber for the purpose of improving the drying performance of the dishwasher.
1.8 Preconditioning cycle means any cycle that includes a fill, circulation, and drain to ensure that the water lines and sump area of the pump are primed.
1.9 Sensor heavy response means, for standard dishwashers, the set of operations in a soil-sensing dishwasher for completely washing a load of dishes, four place settings of which are soiled according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1-1992 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and as additionally specified in section 2.7.2 of this appendix. For compact dishwashers, this definition is the same, except that two soiled place settings are used instead of four.
1.10 Sensor light response means, for both standard and compact dishwashers, the set of operations in a soil-sensing dishwasher for completely washing a load of dishes, one place setting of which is soiled with half of the gram weight of soils for each item specified in a single place setting according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1-1992 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and as additionally specified in section 2.7.2 of this appendix.
1.11 Sensor medium response means, for standard dishwashers, the set of operations in a soil-sensing dishwasher for completely washing a load of dishes, two place settings of which are soiled according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1-1992 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and as additionally specified in section 2.7.2 of this appendix. For compact dishwashers, this definition is the same, except that one soiled place setting is used.
1.12 Soil-sensing dishwasher means a dishwasher that has the ability to adjust any energy consuming aspect of a wash cycle based on the soil load of the dishes.
1.13 Standard dishwasher means a dishwasher that has a capacity equal to or greater than eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in ANSI/AHAM DW-1-1992 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), using the test load specified in section 2.7.1 of this appendix.
1.14 Standby mode means the lowest power consumption mode which cannot be switched off or influenced by the user and that may persist for an indefinite time when the dishwasher is connected to the main electricity supply and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.15 Truncated normal cycle means the normal cycle interrupted to eliminate the power-dry feature after the termination of the last rinse operation.
1.16 Truncated sensor heavy response means the sensor heavy response interrupted to eliminate the power-dry feature after the termination of the last rinse operation.
1.17 Truncated sensor light response means the sensor light response interrupted to eliminate the power-dry feature after the termination of the last rinse operation.
1.18 Truncated sensor medium response means the sensor medium response interrupted to eliminate the power-dry feature after the termination of the last rinse operation.
1.19 Water-heating dishwasher means a dishwasher which, as recommended by the manufacturer, is designed for heating cold inlet water (nominal 50 [deg]F) or designed for heating water with a nominal inlet temperature of 120 [deg]F. Any dishwasher designated as water-heating (50 [deg]F or 120 [deg]F inlet water) must provide internal water heating to above 120 [deg]F in at least one wash phase of the normal cycle.
2. Testing conditions:
2.1 Installation Requirements. Install the dishwasher according to the manufacturer's instructions. A standard or compact under-counter or under-sink dishwasher must be tested in a rectangular enclosure constructed of nominal 0.374 inch (9.5 mm) plywood painted black. The enclosure must consist of a top, a bottom, a back, and two sides. If the dishwasher includes a counter top as part of the appliance, omit the top of the enclosure. Bring the enclosure into the closest contact with the appliance that the configuration of the dishwasher will allow.
2.2 Electrical energy supply.
2.2.1 Dishwashers that operate with an electrical supply of 115 volts. Maintain the electrical supply to the dishwasher at 115 volts 2 percent and within 1 percent of the nameplate frequency as specified by the manufacturer.
2.2.2 Dishwashers that operate with an electrical supply of 240 volts. Maintain the electrical supply to the dishwasher at 240 volts 2 percent and within 1 percent of its nameplate frequency as specified by the manufacturer.
2.3 Water temperature. Measure the temperature of the water supplied to the dishwasher using a temperature measuring device as specified in section 3.1 of this appendix.
2.3.1 Dishwashers to be tested at a nominal 140 [deg]F inlet water temperature. Maintain the water supply temperature at 140[deg] 2 [deg]F.
2.3.2 Dishwashers to be tested at a nominal 120 [deg]F inlet water temperature. Maintain the water supply temperature at 120[deg] 2 [deg]F.
2.3.3 Dishwashers to be tested at a nominal 50 [deg]F inlet water temperature. Maintain the water supply temperature at 50[deg] 2 [deg]F.
2.4 Water pressure. Using a water pressure gauge as specified in section 3.4 of this appendix, maintain the pressure of the water supply at 35 2.5 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) when the water is flowing.
2.5 Ambient and machine temperature. Using a temperature measuring device as specified in section 3.1 of this appendix, maintain the room ambient air temperature at 75[deg] 5 [deg]F, and ensure that the dishwasher and the test load are at room ambient temperature at the start of each test cycle.
2.6 Test Cycle and Load.
2.6.1 Non-soil-sensing dishwashers to be tested at a nominal inlet temperature of 140 [deg]F. These units must be tested on the normal cycle and truncated normal cycle without a test load if the dishwasher does not heat water in the normal cycle.
2.6.2 Non-soil-sensing dishwashers to be tested at a nominal inlet temperature of 50 [deg]F or 120 [deg]F. These units must be tested on the normal cycle with a clean load of eight place settings plus six serving pieces, as specified in section 2.7.1 of this appendix. If the capacity of the dishwasher, as stated by the manufacturer, is less than eight place settings, then the test load must be the stated capacity.
2.6.3 Soil-sensing dishwashers to be tested at a nominal inlet temperature of 50 [deg]F, 120 [deg]F, or 140 [deg]F. These units must be tested first for the sensor heavy response, then tested for the sensor medium response, and finally for the sensor light response with the following combinations of soiled and clean test loads.
2.6.3.1 For tests of the sensor heavy response, as defined in section 1.9 of this appendix:
(A) For standard dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with a total of eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7.1 of this appendix. Four of the eight place settings must be soiled according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1-1992 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) and as additionally specified in section 2.7.2 of this appendix, while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all flatware are not soiled.
(B) For compact dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with four place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7.1 of this appendix. Two of the four place settings must be soiled according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1-1992 and as additionally specified in section 2.7.2 of this appendix, while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all flatware are not soiled.
2.6.3.2 For tests of the sensor medium response, as defined in section 1.11 of this appendix:
(A) For standard dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with a total of eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7.1 of this appendix. Two of the eight place settings must be soiled according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1-1992 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) and as additionally specified in section 2.7.2 of this appendix, while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all flatware are not soiled.
(B) For compact dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with four place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7.1 of this appendix. One of the four place settings must be soiled according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1-1992 and as additionally specified in section 2.7.2 of this appendix, while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all flatware are not soiled.
2.6.3.3 For tests of the sensor light response, as defined in section 1.10 of this appendix:
(A) For standard dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with a total of eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7.1 of this appendix. One of the eight place settings must be soiled with half of the soil load specified for a single place setting according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1-1992 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) and as additionally specified in section 2.7.2 of this appendix, while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all flatware are not soiled.
(B) For compact dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with four place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7.1 of this appendix. One of the four place settings must be soiled with half of the soil load specified for a single place setting according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1-1992 and as additionally specified in section 2.7.2 of this appendix, while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all flatware are not soiled.
2.7 Test load.
2.7.1 Test load items. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dishware/glassware/flatware Alternate Alternate
item Primary source Description Primary No. source source No.----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Dinner Plate................. Corning 10 inch Dinner 6003893.... ...............
Comcor[supreg]/ Plate.
Corelle[supreg].Bread and Butter Plate....... Corning 6.75 inch Bread 6003887.... Arzberg........ 8500217100 or
Comcor[supreg]/ & Butter. 2000-00001-021
Corelle[supreg]. 7-1Fruit Bowl................... Corning 10 oz. Dessert 6003899.... Arzberg........ 3820513100
Comcor[supreg]/ Bowl.
Corelle[supreg].Cup.......................... Corning 8 oz. Ceramic 6014162.... Arzberg........ 1382-00001-4732
Comcor[supreg]/ Cup.
Corelle[supreg].Saucer....................... Corning 6 inch Saucer... 6010972.... Arzberg........ 1382-00001-4731
Comcor[supreg]/
Corelle[supreg].Serving Bowl................. Corning 1 qt. Serving 6003911.... ...............
Comcor[supreg]/ Bowl.
Corelle[supreg].Platter...................... Corning 9.5 inch Oval 6011655.... ...............
Comcor[supreg]/ Platter.
Corelle[supreg].Glass--Iced Tea.............. Libbey.......... ................ 551 HT..... ...............Flatware--Knife.............. Oneida[supreg]-- ................ 2619KPVF... WMF--Gastro 12.0803.6047
Accent. 0800.Flatware--Dinner Fork........ Oneida[supreg]-- ................ 2619FRSF... WMF--Signum 12.1905.6040
Accent. 1900.Flatware--Salad Fork......... Oneida[supreg]-- ................ 2619FSLF... WMF--Signum 12.1964.6040
Accent. 1900.Flatware--Teaspoon........... Oneida[supreg]-- ................ 2619STSF... WMF--Signum 12.1910.6040
Accent. 1900.Flatware--Serving Fork....... Oneida[supreg]-- ................ 2865FCM.... WMF--Signum 12.1902.6040
Flight. 1900.Flatware--Serving Spoon...... Oneida[supreg]-- ................ 2619STBF... WMF--Signum 12.1904.6040
Accent. 1900.----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.7.2 Soils. The soils shall be as specified in ANSI/AHAM DW-1-1992 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3), except for the following substitutions.
2.7.2.1 Margarine. The margarine shall be Fleischmann's Original stick margarine.
2.7.2.2 Coffee. The coffee shall be Folgers Classic Decaf.
2.8 Detergent. Use half the quantity of detergent specified according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1-1992 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3), using Cascade with the Grease Fighting Power of Dawn powder as the detergent formulation.
2.9 Testing requirements. Provisions in this appendix pertaining to dishwashers that operate with a nominal inlet temperature of 50 [deg]F or 120 [deg]F apply only to water-heating dishwashers as defined in section 1.19 of this appendix.
2.10 Preconditioning requirements. Precondition the dishwasher by establishing the testing conditions set forth in sections 2.1 through 2.5 of this appendix. Set the dishwasher to the preconditioning cycle as defined in section 1.8 of this appendix, without using a test load, and initiate the cycle.
3. Instrumentation
Test instruments must be calibrated annually.
3.1 Temperature measuring device. The device must have an error no greater than 1 [deg]F over the range being measured.
3.2 Timer. Time measurements for each monitoring period shall be accurate to within 2 seconds.
3.3 Water meter. The water meter must have a resolution of no larger than 0.1 gallons and a maximum error no greater than 1.5 percent of the measured flow rate for all water temperatures encountered in the test cycle.
3.4 Water pressure gauge. The water pressure gauge must have a resolution of one pound per square inch (psi) and must have an error no greater than 5 percent of any measured value over the range of 35 2.5 psig.
3.5 Watt-hour meter. The watt-hour meter must have a resolution of 1 watt-hour or less and a maximum error of no more than 1 percent of the measured value for any demand greater than 50 watts.
3.6 Standby wattmeter. The standby wattmeter must have a resolution of 0.1 watt or less, a maximum error of no more than 1 percent of the measured value, and must be capable of operating within the stated tolerances for input voltages up to 5 percent total harmonic distortion. The standby wattmeter must be capable of operating at frequencies from 47 hertz through 63 hertz. Power measurements must have a crest factor of 3 or more at currents of 2 amps RMS or less.
3.7 Standby watt-hour meter. The standby watt-hour meter must meet all the requirements of the standby wattmeter and must accumulate watt-hours at a minimum power level of 20 milliwatts.
4. Test Cycle and Measurements
4.1 Test cycle. Perform a test cycle by establishing the testing conditions set forth in section 2 of this appendix, setting the dishwasher to the cycle type to be tested, initiating the cycle, and allowing the cycle to proceed to completion.
4.2 Machine electrical energy consumption. Measure the machine electrical energy consumption, M, expressed as the number of kilowatt-hours of electricity consumed by the machine during the entire test cycle, using a water supply temperature as set forth in section 2.3 of this appendix and using a watt-hour meter as specified in section 3.5 of this appendix.
4.3 Water consumption. Measure the water consumption, V, expressed as the number of gallons of water delivered to the machine during the entire test cycle, using a water meter as specified in section 3.3 of this appendix.
4.4 Standby power. Connect the dishwasher to a standby wattmeter or a standby watt-hour meter as specified in sections 3.6 and 3.7, respectively, of this appendix. Select the conditions necessary to achieve operation in the standby mode as defined in section 1.14 of this appendix. Monitor the power consumption but allow the dishwasher to stabilize for at least 5 minutes. Then monitor the power consumption for at least an additional 5 minutes. If the power level does not change by more than 5 percent from the maximum observed value during the later 5 minutes and there is no cyclic or pulsing behavior of the load, the load can be considered stable. For stable operation, standby power, Sm, can be recorded directly from the standby watt meter in watts or accumulated using the standby watt-hour meter over a period of at least 5 minutes. For unstable operation, the energy must be accumulated using the standby watt-hour meter over a period of at least 5 minutes and must capture the energy use over one or more complete cycles. Calculate the average standby power, Sm, expressed in watts by dividing the accumulated energy consumption by the duration of the measurement period.
5. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements
5.1 Machine energy consumption.
5.1.1 Machine energy consumption for non-soil-sensing electric dishwashers. Take the value recorded in section 4.2 of this appendix as the per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption. Express the value, M, in kilowatt-hours per cycle.
5.1.2 Machine energy consumption for soil-sensing electric dishwashers. The machine energy consumption for the sensor normal cycle, M, is defined as: M = (MhrxFhr) + (MmrxFmr) +
(MlrxFlr) where, Mhr = the value recorded in section 4.2 of this appendix for
the test of the sensor heavy response, expressed in kilowatt-
hours per cycle,Mmr = the value recorded in section 4.2 of this appendix for
the test of the sensor medium response, expressed in kilowatt-
hours per cycle,Mlr = the value recorded in section 4.2 of this appendix for
the test of the sensor light response, expressed in kilowatt-
hours per cycle,Fhr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of heavy
response = 0.05,Fmr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of medium
response = 0.33,Flr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of light
response = 0.62.
5.2 Drying energy.
5.2.1 Drying energy consumption for non-soil-sensing electric dishwashers. Calculate the amount of energy consumed using the power-dry feature after the termination of the last rinse option of the normal cycle. Express the value, ED, in kilowatt-hours per cycle.
5.2.2 Drying energy consumption for soil-sensing electric dishwashers. The drying energy consumption, ED, for the sensor normal cycle is defined as: ED = (EDhr + EDmr + EDlr)/3 Where, EDhr = energy consumed using the power-dry feature after the
termination of the last rinse option of the sensor heavy
response, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle,EDmr = energy consumed using the power-dry feature after the
termination of the last rinse option of the sensor medium
response, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle,EDlr = energy consumed using the power-dry feature after the
termination of the last rinse option of the sensor light
response, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle.
5.3 Water consumption.
5.3.1 Water consumption for non-soil-sensing dishwashers using electrically heated, gas-heated, or oil-heated water.
Take the value recorded in section 4.3 of this appendix as the per-cycle water energy consumption. Express the value, V, in gallons per cycle.
5.3.2 Water consumption for soil-sensing dishwashers using electrically heated, gas-heated, or oil-heated water.
The water consumption for the sensor normal cycle, V, is defined as: V = (VhrxFhr) + (VmrxFmr) +
(VlrxFlr) Where, Vhr = the value recorded in section 4.3 of this appendix for
the test of the sensor heavy response, expressed in gallons
per cycle,Vmr = the value recorded in section 4.3 of this appendix for
the test of the sensor medium response, expressed in gallons
per cycle,Vlr = the value recorded in section 4.3 of this appendix for
the test of the sensor light response, expressed in gallons
per cycle,Fhr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of heavy
response = 0.05,Fmr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of medium
response = 0.33,Flr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of light
response = 0.62.
5.4 Water energy consumption for non-soil-sensing or soil-sensing dishwashers using electrically heated water.
5.4.1 Dishwashers that operate with a nominal 140 [deg]F inlet water temperature, only. Calculate the water energy consumption, W, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: W = V x T x K where, V = water consumption in gallons per cycle, as determined in section
5.3.1 of this appendix for non-soil-sensing dishwashers and
section 5.3.2 of this appendix for soil-sensing dishwashers,T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 90 [deg]F, andK = specific heat of water in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree
Fahrenheit = 0.0024.
5.4.2 Dishwashers that operate with a nominal inlet water temperature of 120 [deg]F. Calculate the water energy consumption, W, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: W = V x T x K where, V = water consumption in gallons per cycle, as determined in section
5.3.1 of this appendix for non-soil-sensing dishwashers and
section 5.3.2 of this appendix for soil-sensing dishwashers,T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 70 [deg]F, andK = specific heat of water in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree
Fahrenheit = 0.0024,
5.5 Water energy consumption per cycle using gas-heated or oil-heated water.
5.5.1 Dishwashers that operate with a nominal 140 [deg]F inlet water temperature, only. Calculate the water energy consumption using gas-heated or oil-heated water, Wg, expressed in Btu's per cycle and defined as: Wg = V x T x C/e where, V = water consumption in gallons per cycle, as determined in section
5.3.1 of this appendix for non-soil-sensing dishwashers and
section 5.3.2 of this appendix for soil-sensing dishwashers,T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 90 [deg]F,C = specific heat of water in Btu's per gallon per degree Fahrenheit =
8.2, ande = nominal gas or oil water heater recovery efficiency = 0.75,
5.5.2 Dishwashers that operate with a nominal inlet water temperature of 120 [deg]F. Calculate the water energy consumption using gas-heated or oil-heated water, Wg, expressed in Btu's per cycle and defined as: Wg = V x T x C/e where, V = water consumption in gallons per cycle, as determined in section
5.3.1 of this appendix for non-soil-sensing dishwashers and
section 5.3.2 of this appendix for soil-sensing dishwashers,T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 70 [deg]F,C = specific heat of water in Btu's per gallon per degree Fahrenheit =
8.2, ande = nominal gas or oil water heater recovery efficiency = 0.75.
5.6 Annual standby energy consumption. Calculate the estimated annual standby energy consumption. First determine the number of standby hours per year, Hs, defined as: Hs = H-(NxL). Where, H = the total number of hours per year = 8766 hours per year,N = the representative average dishwasher use of 215 cycles per year,L = the average of the duration of the normal cycle and truncated normal
cycle, for non-soil-sensing dishwashers with a truncated
normal cycle; the duration of the normal cycle, for non-soil-
sensing dishwashers without a truncated normal cycle; the
average duration of the sensor light response, truncated
sensor light response, sensor medium response, truncated
sensor medium response, sensor heavy response, and truncated
sensor heavy response, for soil-sensing dishwashers with a
truncated cycle option; the average duration of the sensor
light response, sensor medium response, and sensor heavy
response, for soil-sensing dishwashers without a truncated
cycle option.
Then calculate the estimated annual standby power use, S, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year and defined as: S = Smx((Hs)/1000) Where, Sm = the average standby power in watts as determined in
section 4.4 of this appendix. [68 FR 51900, Aug. 29, 2003, as amended at 77 FR 65980, Oct. 31, 2012]
Sec. Appendix C1 to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Dishwashers
Note: Prior to the compliance date for any amended energy conservation standards that incorporate standby mode and off mode energy consumption (May 30, 2013 unless the direct final rule published on May 30, 2012 is withdrawn), manufacturers may use either Appendix C or Appendix C1 to certify compliance with existing DOE energy conservation standards and to make any representations related to energy and/or water consumption of dishwashers, with the following exception. If the compliance date is after April 29, 2013, manufacturers that make representations related to standby mode and off mode energy consumption must use Appendix C1 for any representations made after April 29, 2013 of the energy and/or water consumption of these products, consistent with the requirements of 42 U.S.C. 6293(c)(2).
After the compliance date for any amended energy conservation standards that incorporate standby mode and off mode energy consumption (May 30, 2013 unless the direct final rule published on May 30, 2012 is withdrawn), all dishwashers shall be tested using the provisions of Appendix C1 to certify compliance with amended energy conservation standards and to make any representations related to energy and/or water consumption, with the following exception. If the compliance date is before April 29, 2013, manufacturers may use Appendix C for any representations until April 29, 2013 of energy and/or water consumption of these products, consistent with the requirements of 42 U.S.C. 6293(c)(2).
1. Definitions
1.1 Active mode means a mode in which the dishwasher is connected to a mains power source, has been activated, and is performing one of the main functions of washing, rinsing, or drying (when a drying process is included) dishware, glassware, eating utensils, and most cooking utensils by chemical, mechanical, and/or electrical means, or is involved in functions necessary for these main functions, such as admitting water into the dishwasher, pumping water out of the dishwasher, circulating air, or regenerating an internal water softener.
1.2 AHAM means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers.
1.3 Combined low-power mode means the aggregate of available modes other than active mode.
1.4 Compact dishwasher means a dishwasher that has a capacity of less than eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), using the test load specified in section 2.7 of this appendix.
1.5 Cycle means a sequence of operations of a dishwasher which performs a complete dishwashing function, and may include variations or combinations of washing, rinsing, and drying.
1.6 Cycle finished mode means a standby mode which provides continuous status display following operation in active mode.
1.7 Cycle type means any complete sequence of operations capable of being preset on the dishwasher prior to the initiation of machine operation.
1.8 Fan-only mode means an active mode that is not user-selectable, and in which a fan circulates air for a finite period of time after the end of the cycle, where the end of the cycle is indicated to the consumer by means of a display, indicator light, or audible signal.
1.9 IEC 62301 means the standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, titled ``Household electrical appliances-Measurement of standby power,'' Publication 62301 (Edition 2.0, 2011-01) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.10 Inactive mode means a standby mode that facilitates the activation of active mode by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer, or that provides continuous status display.
1.11 Non-soil-sensing dishwasher means a dishwasher that does not have the ability to adjust automatically any energy consuming aspect of the normal cycle based on the soil load of the dishes.
1.12 Normal cycle means the cycle type, including washing and drying temperature options, recommended in the manufacturer's instructions for daily, regular, or typical use to completely wash a full load of normally soiled dishes including the power-dry feature. If no cycle or more than one cycle is recommended in the manufacturer's instructions for daily, regular, or typical use to completely wash a full load of normally soiled dishes, the most energy intensive of these cycles shall be considered the normal cycle. In the absence of a manufacturer recommendation on washing and drying temperature options, the highest energy consumption options must be selected.
1.13 Off mode means a mode in which the dishwasher is connected to a mains power source and is not providing any active mode or standby mode function, and where the mode may persist for an indefinite time. An indicator that only shows the user that the product is in the off position is included within the classification of an off mode.
1.14 Power-dry feature means the introduction of electrically-generated heat into the washing chamber for the purpose of improving the drying performance of the dishwasher.
1.15 Preconditioning cycle means a normal cycle run with no test load to ensure that the water lines and sump area of the pump are primed.
1.16 Sensor heavy response means, for standard dishwashers, the set of operations in a soil-sensing dishwasher for completely washing a load of dishes, four place settings of which are soiled according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and as additionally specified in section 2.7 of this appendix. For compact dishwashers, this definition is the same, except that two soiled place settings are used instead of four.
1.17 Sensor light response means, for both standard and compact dishwashers, the set of operations in a soil-sensing dishwasher for completely washing a load of dishes, one place setting of which is soiled with half of the gram weight of soils for each item specified in a single place setting according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and as additionally specified in section 2.7 of this appendix.
1.18 Sensor medium response means, for standard dishwashers, the set of operations in a soil-sensing dishwasher for completely washing a load of dishes, two place settings of which are soiled according to ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and as additionally specified in section 2.7 of this appendix. For compact dishwashers, this definition is the same, except that one soiled place setting is used instead of two.
1.19 Soil-sensing dishwasher means a dishwasher that has the ability to adjust any energy-consuming aspect of the normal cycle based on the soil load of the dishes.
1.20 Standard dishwasher means a dishwasher that has a capacity equal to or greater than eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), using the test load specified in section 2.7 of this appendix.
1.21 Standby mode means a mode in which the dishwasher is connected to a mains power source and offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions which may persist for an indefinite time: (a) To facilitate the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer; (b) continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that provides regular scheduled tasks (e.g., switching) and that operates on a continuous basis.
1.22 Truncated normal cycle means the normal cycle interrupted to eliminate the power-dry feature after the termination of the last rinse operation.
1.23 Truncated sensor heavy response means the sensor heavy response interrupted to eliminate the power-dry feature after the termination of the last rinse operation.
1.24 Truncated sensor light response means the sensor light response interrupted to eliminate the power-dry feature after the termination of the last rinse operation.
1.25 Truncated sensor medium response means the sensor medium response interrupted to eliminate the power-dry feature after the termination of the last rinse operation.
1.26 Water-heating dishwasher means a dishwasher which, as recommended by the manufacturer, is designed for heating cold inlet water (nominal 50 [deg]F) or designed for heating water with a nominal inlet temperature of 120 [deg]F. Any dishwasher designated as water-heating (50 [deg]F or 120 [deg]F inlet water) must provide internal water heating to above 120 [deg]F in a least one wash phase of the normal cycle.
1.27 Water-softening dishwasher means a dishwasher which incorporates a water softening system that periodically consumes additional water and energy during the cycle to regenerate.
2. Testing Conditions
2.1 Installation requirements. Install the dishwasher according to the manufacturer's instructions, including drain height. If the manufacture does not provide instructions for a specific drain height, the drain height shall be 20 inches. The racks shall be positioned according to the manufacturer recommendation for washing a full load of normally soiled dishes, or in the absence of a recommendation, the racks shall be maintained in the as-shipped position. The rinse aid container shall remain empty. A standard or compact under-counter or under-sink dishwasher must be tested in a rectangular enclosure constructed of nominal 0.374 inch (9.5 mm) plywood painted black. The enclosure must consist of a top, a bottom, a back, and two sides. If the dishwasher includes a counter top as part of the appliance, omit the top of the enclosure. Bring the enclosure into the closest contact with the appliance that the configuration of the dishwasher will allow. For standby mode and off mode testing, these products shall also be installed in accordance with Section 5, Paragraph 5.2 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), disregarding the provisions regarding batteries and the determination, classification, and testing of relevant modes.
2.2 Electrical energy supply.
2.2.1 Dishwashers that operate with an electrical supply of 115 volts. Maintain the electrical supply to the dishwasher at 115 volts 2 percent and within 1 percent of the nameplate frequency as specified by the manufacturer. Maintain a continuous electrical supply to the unit throughout testing, including the preconditioning cycles, specified in section 2.9 of this appendix, and in between all test cycles.
2.2.2 Dishwashers that operate with an electrical supply of 240 volts. Maintain the electrical supply to the dishwasher at 240 volts 2 percent and within 1 percent of the nameplate frequency as specified by the manufacturer. Maintain a continuous electrical supply to the unit throughout testing, including the preconditioning cycles, specified in section 2.9 of this appendix, and in between all test cycles.
2.2.3 Supply voltage waveform. For the standby mode and off mode testing, maintain the electrical supply voltage waveform indicated in Section 4, Paragraph 4.3.2 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
2.3 Water temperature. Measure the temperature of the water supplied to the dishwasher using a temperature measuring device as specified in section 3.1 of this appendix.
2.3.1 Dishwashers to be tested at a nominal 140 [deg]F inlet water temperature. Maintain the water supply temperature at 140[deg] 2 [deg]F.
2.3.2 Dishwashers to be tested at a nominal 120 [deg]F inlet water temperature. Maintain the water supply temperature at 120[deg] 2 [deg]F.
2.3.3 Dishwashers to be tested at a nominal 50 [deg]F inlet water temperature. Maintain the water supply temperature at 50[deg] 2 [deg]F.
2.4 Water pressure. Using a water pressure gauge as specified in section 3.4 of this appendix, maintain the pressure of the water supply at 35 2.5 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) when the water is flowing. The pressure shall be achieved within 2 seconds of opening the water supply valve.
2.5 Ambient temperature.
2.5.1 Active mode ambient and machine temperature. Using a temperature measuring device as specified in section 3.1 of this appendix, maintain the room ambient air temperature at 75[deg] 5 [deg]F and ensure that the dishwasher and the test load are at room ambient temperature at the start of each test cycle.
2.5.2 Standby mode and off mode ambient temperature. For standby mode and off mode testing, maintain room ambient air temperature conditions as specified in Section 4, Paragraph 4.2 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
2.6 Test cycle and load.
2.6.1 Non-soil-sensing dishwashers to be tested at a nominal inlet temperature of 140 [deg]F. All non-soil-sensing dishwashers to be tested according to section 4.1 of this appendix at a nominal inlet temperature of 140 [deg]F must be tested on the normal cycle and truncated normal cycle without a test load if the dishwasher does not heat water in the normal cycle.
2.6.2 Non-soil-sensing dishwashers to be tested at a nominal inlet temperature of 50 [deg]F or 120 [deg]F. All non-soil-sensing dishwashers to be tested according to section 4.1 of this appendix at a nominal inlet temperature of 50 [deg]F or 120 [deg]F must be tested on the normal cycle with a clean load of eight place settings plus six serving pieces, as specified in section 2.7 of this appendix. If the capacity of the dishwasher, as stated by the manufacturer, is less than eight place settings, then the test load must be the stated capacity.
2.6.3 Soil-sensing dishwashers to be tested at a nominal inlet temperature of 50 [deg]F, 120 [deg]F, or 140 [deg]F. All soil-sensing dishwashers shall be tested according to section 4.1 of this appendix on the normal cycle. The dishwasher shall be tested first for the sensor heavy response, then tested for the sensor medium response, and finally for the sensor light response with the following combinations of soiled and clean test loads.
2.6.3.1 For tests of the sensor heavy response, as defined in section 1.16 of this appendix:
(A) For standard dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with a total of eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of this appendix. Four of the eight place settings, except for the flatware, must be soiled according to sections 5.3 through 5.7 of ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) and as additionally specified in sections 2.7.4 and 2.7.5 of this appendix, while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all flatware are not soiled. The test load is to be loaded in the dishwasher according to section 5.8 of ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010.
(B) For compact dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with four place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of this appendix. Two of the four place settings, except for the flatware, must be soiled according to sections 5.3 through 5.7 of ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010 and as additionally specified in sections 2.7.4 and 2.7.5 of this appendix, while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all flatware are not soiled. The test load is to be loaded in the dishwasher according to section 5.8 of ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010.
2.6.3.2 For tests of the sensor medium response, as defined in section 1.18 of this appendix:
(A) For standard dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with a total of eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of this appendix. Two of the eight place settings, except for the flatware, must be soiled according to sections 5.3 through 5.7 of ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) and as additionally specified in sections 2.7.4 and 2.7.5 of this appendix, while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all flatware are not soiled. The test load is to be loaded in the dishwasher according to section 5.8 of ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010.
(B) For compact dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with four place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of this appendix. One of the four place settings, except for the flatware, must be soiled according to sections 5.3 through 5.7 of ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010 and as additionally specified in sections 2.7.4 and 2.7.5 of this appendix, while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all flatware are not soiled. The test load is to be loaded in the dishwasher according to section 5.8 of ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010.
2.6.3.3 For tests of the sensor light response, as defined in section 1.17 of this appendix:
(A) For standard dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with a total of eight place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of this appendix. One of the eight place settings, except for the flatware, must be soiled with half of the soil load specified for a single place setting according to sections 5.3 through 5.7 of ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) and as additionally specified in sections 2.7.4 and 2.7.5 of this appendix, while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all flatware are not soiled. The test load is to be loaded in the dishwasher according to section 5.8 of ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010.
(B) For compact dishwashers, the test unit is to be loaded with four place settings plus six serving pieces as specified in section 2.7 of this appendix. One of the four place settings, except for the flatware, must be soiled with half of the soil load specified for a single place setting according to sections 5.3 through 5.7 of ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010 and as additionally specified in sections 2.7.4 and 2.7.5 of this appendix, while the remaining place settings, serving pieces, and all flatware are not soiled. The test load is to be loaded in the dishwasher according to section 5.8 of ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010.
2.7 Test load.
2.7.1 Test load items. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dishware/glassware/flatware Alternate Alternate
item Primary source Description Primary No. source source No.----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Dinner Plate................. Corning 10 inch Dinner 6003893.... ...............
Comcor[supreg]/ Plate.
Corelle[supreg].Bread and Butter Plate....... Corning 6.75 inch Bread 6003887.... Arzberg........ 8500217100 or
Comcor[supreg]/ & Butter. 2000-00001-021
Corelle[supreg]. 7-1Fruit Bowl................... Corning 10 oz. Dessert 6003899.... Arzberg........ 3820513100
Comcor[supreg]/ Bowl.
Corelle[supreg].Cup.......................... Corning 8 oz. Ceramic 6014162.... Arzberg........ 1382-00001-4732
Comcor[supreg]/ Cup.
Corelle[supreg].Saucer....................... Corning 6 inch Saucer... 6010972.... Arzberg........ 1382-00001-4731
Comcor[supreg]/
Corelle[supreg].Serving Bowl................. Corning 1 qt. Serving 6003911.... ...............
Comcor[supreg]/ Bowl.
Corelle[supreg].Platter...................... Corning 9.5 inch Oval 6011655.... ...............
Comcor[supreg]/ Platter.
Corelle[supreg].Glass--Iced Tea.............. Libbey.......... ................ 551 HT..... ...............Flatware--Knife.............. Oneida[supreg]-- ................ 2619KPVF... WMF--Gastro 12.0803.6047
Accent. 0800.Flatware--Dinner Fork........ Oneida[supreg]-- ................ 2619FRSF... WMF--Signum 12.1905.6040
Accent. 1900.Flatware--Salad Fork......... Oneida[supreg]-- ................ 2619FSLF... WMF--Signum 12.1964.6040
Accent. 1900.Flatware--Teaspoon........... Oneida[supreg]-- ................ 2619STSF... WMF--Signum 12.1910.6040
Accent. 1900.Flatware--Serving Fork....... Oneida[supreg]-- ................ 2865FCM.... WMF--Signum 12.1902.6040
Flight. 1900.Flatware--Serving Spoon...... Oneida[supreg]-- ................ 2619STBF... WMF--Signum 12.1904.6040
Accent. 1900.----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.7.2 Place setting. A place setting shall consist of one cup, one saucer, one dinner plate, one bread and butter plate, one fruit bowl, one iced tea glass, one dinner fork, one salad fork, one knife, and two teaspoons.
2.7.3 Serving pieces. Serving pieces shall consist of two serving bowls, one platter, one serving fork, and two serving spoons.
2.7.4 Soils. The soils shall be as specified in section 5.4 of ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3), except for the following substitutions.
2.7.4.1 Margarine. The margarine shall be Fleischmann's Original stick margarine.
2.7.4.2 Coffee. The coffee shall be Folgers Classic Decaf.
2.7.5 Soil Preparation. Soils shall be prepared according to section 5.5 of ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3), with the following additional specifications.
2.7.5.1 Milk. The nonfat dry milk shall be reconstituted before mixing with the oatmeal and potatoes. It shall be reconstituted with water by mixing \2/3\ cup of nonfat dry milk with 2 cups of water until well mixed. The reconstituted milk may be stored for use over the course of 1 day.
2.7.5.2 Instant mashed potatoes. The potato mixture shall be applied within 30 minutes of preparation.
2.7.5.3 Ground beef. The 1-pound packages of ground beef shall be stored frozen for no more than 6 months.
2.8 Testing requirements. Provisions in this appendix pertaining to dishwashers that operate with a nominal inlet temperature of 50 [deg]F or 120 [deg]F apply only to water-heating dishwashers as defined in section 1.26 of this appendix.
2.9 Preconditioning requirements. Precondition the dishwasher twice by establishing the testing conditions set forth in sections 2.1 through 2.5 of this appendix. For each preconditioning, set the dishwasher to the preconditioning cycle as defined in section 1.15 of this appendix, without using a test load, and initiate the cycle. During the second preconditioning, measure the prewash fill water volume, Vpw, if any, and the main wash fill water volume, Vmw.
2.10 Detergent. Use half the quantity of detergent specified according to section 4.1 of ANSI/AHAM DW-1-2010 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3), using Cascade with the Grease Fighting Power of Dawn powder as the detergent formulation. Determine the amount of detergent (in grams) to be added to the prewash compartment (if provided) or elsewhere in the dishwasher (if recommended by the manufacturer) and the main wash compartment according to sections 2.10.1 and 2.10.2 of this appendix.
2.10.1 Prewash Detergent Dosing. If the cycle setting for the test cycle includes prewash, determine the quantity of dry prewash detergent, Dpw, in grams (g) that results in 0.25 percent concentration by mass in the prewash fill water as: Dpw = Vpw x [rho] x k x 0.25/100
where, Vpw = the prewash fill volume of water in gallons,[rho] = water density = 8.343 pounds (lb)/gallon for dishwashers to be
tested at a nominal inlet water temperature of 50 [deg]F (10
[deg]C), 8.250 lb/gallon for dishwashers to be tested at a
nominal inlet water temperature of 120 [deg]F (49 [deg]C), and
8.205 lb/gallon for dishwashers to be tested at a nominal
inlet water temperature of 140 [deg]F (60 [deg]C), andk = conversion factor from lb to g = 453.6 g/lb.
2.10.2 Main Wash Detergent Dosing. Determine the quantity of dry main wash detergent, Dmw, in grams (g) that results in 0.25 percent concentration by mass in the main wash fill water as: Dmw = Vmw x [rho] x k x 0.25/100 where, Vmw = the main wash fill volume of water in gallons, and[rho], and k are defined in section 2.10.1 of this appendix.
3. Instrumentation
Test instruments must be calibrated annually.
3.1 Temperature measuring device. The device must have an error no greater than 1 [deg]F over the range being measured.
3.2 Timer. Time measurements for each monitoring period shall be accurate to within 2 seconds.
3.3 Water meter. The water meter must have a resolution of no larger than 0.1 gallons and a maximum error no greater than 1.5 percent of the measured flow rate for all water temperatures encountered in the test cycle.
3.4 Water pressure gauge. The water pressure gauge must have a resolution of one pound per square inch (psi) and must have an error no greater than 5 percent of any measured value over the range of 35 2.5 psig.
3.5 Watt-hour meter. The watt-hour meter must have a resolution of .1 watt-hour or less and a maximum error of no more than 1 percent of the measured value for any demand greater than 5 watts.
3.6 Standby mode and off mode watt meter. The watt meter used to measure standby mode and off mode power consumption shall meet the requirements specified in Section 4, Paragraph 4.4 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3).
4. Test Cycle and Measurements
4.1 Active mode cycle. Perform a test cycle by establishing the testing conditions set forth in section 2 of this appendix, setting the dishwasher to the cycle type to be tested according to section 2.6.1, 2.6.2, or 2.6.3 of this appendix, initiating the cycle, and allowing the cycle to proceed to completion.
4.1.1 Machine electrical energy consumption. Measure the machine electrical energy consumption, M, expressed as the number of kilowatt-hours of electricity consumed by the machine during the entire test cycle, using a water supply temperature as set forth in section 2.3 of this appendix and using a watt- hour meter as specified in section 3.5 of this appendix.
4.1.2 Fan electrical energy consumption. If the dishwasher is capable of operation in fan-only mode, measure the fan electrical energy consumption, MF, expressed as the number of kilowatt-hours of electricity consumed by the machine for the duration of fan-only mode, using a watt-hour meter as specified in section 3.5 of this appendix. Alternatively, if the duration of fan-only mode is known, the watt-hours consumed may be measured for a period of 10 minutes in fan-only mode, using a watt-hour meter as specified in section 3.5 of this appendix. Multiply this value by the time in minutes that the dishwasher remains in fan-only mode, LF, and divide by 10,000 to obtain MF. The alternative approach may be used only if the resulting MF is representative of energy use during the entire fan-only mode.
4.1.3 Water consumption. Measure the water consumption, V, expressed as the number of gallons of water delivered to the machine during the entire test cycle, using a water meter specified in section 3.3 of this appendix.
4.2 Standby mode and off mode power. Connect the dishwasher to a standby mode and off mode watt meter as specified in section 3.6 of this appendix. Establish the testing conditions set forth in sections 2.1, 2.2, and 2.5.2 of this appendix. For dishwashers that take some time to enter a stable state from a higher power state as discussed in Section 5, Paragraph 5.1, note 1 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), allow sufficient time for the dishwasher to reach the lower power state before proceeding with the test measurement. Follow the test procedure specified in Section 5, Paragraph 5.3.2 of IEC 62301 for testing in each possible mode as described in sections 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 of this appendix.
4.2.1 If the dishwasher has an inactive mode, as defined in section 1.10 of this appendix, measure and record the average inactive mode power of the dishwasher, PIA, in watts.
4.2.2 If the dishwasher has an off mode, as defined in section 1.13 of this appendix, measure and record the average off mode power, POM, in watts.
5. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements
5.1 Machine energy consumption.
5.1.1 Machine energy consumption for non-soil-sensing electric dishwashers. Take the value recorded in section 4.1.1 of this appendix as the per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption. Express the value, M, in kilowatt-hours per cycle.
5.1.2 Machine energy consumption for soil-sensing electric dishwashers. The machine energy consumption for the sensor normal cycle, M, is defined as: M = (Mhr x Fhr) + (Mmr x
Fmr) + (Mlr x Flr) where, Mhr = the value recorded in section 4.1.1 of this appendix
for the test of the sensor heavy response, expressed in
kilowatt-hours per cycle,Mmr = the value recorded in section 4.1.1 of this appendix
for the test of the sensor medium response, expressed in
kilowatt-hours per cycle,Mlr = the value recorded in section 4.1.1 of this appendix
for the test of the sensor light response, expressed in
kilowatt-hours per cycle,Fhr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of heavy
response = 0.05,Fmr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of medium
response = 0.33, andFlr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of light
response = 0.62.
5.1.3 Machine energy consumption during water softener regeneration for water-softening dishwashers. The machine energy consumption for water softener regeneration, MWS, is defined as: MWS = MWScycle x NWS/N where, MWScycle = the reported value of the additional machine
electrical energy consumption required for water softener
regeneration during a cycle including water softener
regeneration, expressed in kilowatt-hours,NWS = the reported representative average number of water
softener regeneration cycles per year, andN = the representative average dishwasher use of 215 cycles per year.
5.2 Fan-only mode energy consumption.
5.2.1 Electrical energy consumption for fan-only mode for non-soil-sensing electric dishwashers. Take the value recorded in section 4.1.2 of this appendix as the per-cycle electrical energy consumption for fan-only mode. Express the value, EF, in kilowatt-hours per cycle. If the dishwasher is not capable of operation in fan-only mode, EF = 0.
5.2.2 Electrical energy consumption for fan-only mode for soil-sensing electric dishwashers. The fan-only mode electrical energy consumption, EF, for the sensor normal cycle is defined as: EF = (EFhr + EFmr + EFlr)/3 where, EFhr = the value recorded in section 4.1.2 of this appendix
for the test of the sensor heavy response, expressed in
kilowatt-hours per cycle,EFmr = the value recorded in section 4.1.2 of this appendix
for the test of the sensor medium response, expressed in
kilowatt-hours per cycle,EFlr = the value recorded in section 4.1.2 of this appendix
for the test of the sensor
light response, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle,
If the dishwasher is not capable of operation in fan-only mode, EF = 0.
5.3 Drying energy.
5.3.1 Drying energy consumption for non-soil-sensing electric dishwashers. Calculate the amount of energy consumed using the power-dry feature after the termination of the last rinse option of the normal cycle. Express the value, ED, in kilowatt-hours per cycle.
5.3.2 Drying energy consumption for soil-sensing electric dishwashers. The drying energy consumption, ED, for the sensor normal cycle is defined as: ED = (EDhr + EDmr + EDlr)/3 where, EDhr = energy consumed using the power-dry feature after the
termination of the last rinse option of the sensor heavy
response, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle,EDmr = energy consumed using the power-dry feature after the
termination of the last rinse option of the sensor medium
response, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle,EDlr = energy consumed using the power-dry feature after the
termination of the last rinse option of the sensor light
response, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle,
5.4 Water consumption.
5.4.1 Water consumption for non-soil-sensing electric dishwashers using electrically heated, gas-heated, or oil-heated water. Take the value recorded in section 4.1.3 of this appendix as the per-cycle water consumption. Express the value, V, in gallons per cycle.
5.4.2 Water consumption for soil-sensing electric dishwashers using electrically heated, gas-heated, or oil-heated water. The water consumption for the sensor normal cycle, V, is defined as: V = (Vhr x Fhr) + (Vmr x
Fmr) + (Vlr x Flr) where, Vhr = the value recorded in section 4.1.3 of this appendix
for the test of the sensor heavy response, expressed in
gallons per cycle,Vmr = the value recorded in section 4.1.3 of this appendix
for the test of the sensor medium response, expressed in
gallons per cycle,Vlr = the value recorded in section 4.1.3 of this appendix
for the test of the sensor light response, expressed in
gallons per cycle,Fhr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of heavy
response = 0.05,Fmr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of medium
response = 0.33, andFlr = the weighting factor based on consumer use of light
response = 0.62.
5.4.3 Water consumption during water softener regeneration for water-softening dishwashers using electrically heated, gas-heated, or oil-heated water. The water consumption for water softener regeneration, VWS, is defined as: VWS = VWScycle x NWS/N where, VWScycle = the reported value of the additional water
consumption required for water softener regeneration during a
cycle including water softener regeneration, expressed in
gallons per cycle,NWS = the reported representative average number of water
softener regeneration cycles per year, andN = the representative average dishwasher use of 215 cycles per year.
5.5 Water energy consumption for non-soil-sensing or soil-sensing dishwashers using electrically heated water.
5.5.1 Dishwashers that operate with a nominal 140 [deg]F inlet water temperature, only.
5.5.1.1 Calculate the water energy consumption, W, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: W = V x T x K where, V = water consumption in gallons per cycle, as determined in section
5.4.1 of this appendix for non-soil-sensing dishwashers and
section 5.4.2 of this appendix for soil-sensing dishwashers,T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 90 [deg]F, andK = specific heat of water in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree
Fahrenheit = 0.0024.
5.5.1.2 For water-softening dishwashers, calculate the water softener regeneration water energy consumption, WWS, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: WWS = VWS x T x K where, VWS = water consumption during water softener regeneration in
gallons per cycle which includes regeneration, as determined
in section 5.4.3 of this appendix,T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 90 [deg]F, andK = specific heat of water in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree
Fahrenheit = 0.0024.
5.5.2 Dishwashers that operate with a nominal inlet water temperature of 120 [deg]F.
5.5.2.1 Calculate the water energy consumption, W, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: W = V x T x K where, V = water consumption in gallons per cycle, as determined in section
5.4.1 of this appendix for non-soil-sensing dishwashers and
section 5.4.2 of this appendix for soil-sensing dishwashers,T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 70 [deg]F, and K = specific heat of water in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree
Fahrenheit = 0.0024,
5.5.2.2 For water-softening dishwashers, calculate the water softener regeneration water energy consumption, WWS, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: WWS = VWS x T x K where, VWS = water consumption during water softener regeneration in
gallons per cycle which includes regeneration, as determined
in section 5.4.3 of this appendix,T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 70 [deg]F, andK = specific heat of water in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree
Fahrenheit = 0.0024.
5.6 Water energy consumption per cycle using gas-heated or oil-heated water.
5.6.1 Dishwashers that operate with a nominal 140 [deg]F inlet water temperature, only.
5.6.1.1 Calculate the water energy consumption using gas-heated or oil-heated water, Wg, expressed in Btu's per cycle and defined as: Wg = V x T x C / e where, V = water consumption in gallons per cycle, as determined in section
5.4.1 of this appendix for non-soil-sensing dishwashers and
section 5.4.2 of this appendix for soil-sensing dishwashers,T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 90 [deg]F,C = specific heat of water in Btu's per gallon per degree Fahrenheit =
8.2, ande = nominal gas or oil water heater recovery efficiency = 0.75,
5.6.1.2 For water-softening dishwashers, calculate the water softener regeneration water energy consumption, WWSg, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: WWSg = VWS x T x C/e where, VWS = water consumption during water softener regeneration in
gallons per cycle which includes regeneration, as determined
in section 5.4.3 of this appendix,T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 90 [deg]F,C = specific heat of water in Btu's per gallon per degree Fahrenheit =
8.2, ande = nominal gas or oil water heater recovery efficiency = 0.75.
5.6.2 Dishwashers that operate with a nominal 120 [deg]F inlet water temperature, only.
5.6.2.1 Calculate the water energy consumption using gas-heated or oil-heated water, Wg, expressed in Btu's per cycle and defined as:Wg = V x T x C/e where, V = water consumption in gallons per cycle, as determined in section
5.4.1 of this appendix for non-soil-sensing dishwashers and
section 5.4.2 of this appendix for soil-sensing dishwashers,T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 70 [deg]F,C = specific heat of water in Btu's per gallon per degree Fahrenheit =
8.2, ande = nominal gas or oil water heater recovery efficiency = 0.75.
5.6.2.2 For water-softening dishwashers, calculate the water softener regeneration water energy consumption, WWSg, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: WWSg = VWS x T x C/e where, VWS = water consumption during water softener regeneration in
gallons per cycle which includes regeneration, as determined
in section 5.4.3 of this appendix,T = nominal water heater temperature rise = 70 [deg]F,C = specific heat of water in Btu's per gallon per degree Fahrenheit =
8.2, ande = nominal gas or oil water heater recovery efficiency = 0.75.
5.7 Annual combined low-power mode energy consumption. Calculate the annual combined low-power mode energy consumption for dishwashers, ETLP, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year, according to the following: ETLP = [(PIA x SIA) + (POM x
SOM)] x K where: PIA = dishwasher inactive mode power, in watts, as measured
in section 4.2.1 of this appendix for dishwashers capable of
operating in inactive mode; otherwise, PIA = 0,POM = dishwasher off mode power, in watts, as measured in
section 4.2.2 of this appendix for dishwashers capable of
operating in off mode; otherwise, POM = 0,SIA = annual hours in inactive mode as defined as
SLP if no off mode is possible, [SLP/2]
if both inactive mode and off mode are possible, and 0 if no
inactive mode is possible,SOM = annual hours in off mode as defined as SLP
if no inactive mode is possible, [SLP/2] if both
inactive mode and off mode are possible, and 0 if no off mode
is possible,SLP = combined low-power annual hours for all available modes
other than active mode as defined as [H - (N x (L +
LF))] for dishwashers capable of operating in fan-
only mode; otherwise, SLP = 8,465,H = the total number of hours per year = 8766 hours per year,N = the representative average dishwasher use of 215 cycles per year,L = the average of the duration of the normal cycle and truncated normal
cycle, for non-soil-sensing dishwashers with a truncated
normal cycle; the duration of the normal cycle, for non-soil-
sensing dishwashers without a truncated normal
cycle; the average duration of the sensor light response,
truncated sensor light response, sensor medium response,
truncated sensor medium response, sensor heavy response, and
truncated sensor heavy response, for soil-sensing dishwashers
with a truncated cycle option; the average duration of the
sensor light response, sensor medium response, and sensor
heavy response, for soil-sensing dishwashers without a
truncated cycle option,LF = the duration of the fan-only mode for the normal cycle
for non-soil-sensing dishwashers; the average duration of the
fan-only mode for sensor light response, sensor medium
response, and sensor heavy response for soil-sensing
dishwashers, andK = 0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours. [77 FR 65982, Oct. 31, 2012]
Sec. Appendix D to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Clothes Dryers
Note: Effective February 10, 2014, manufacturers must make representations of energy efficiency, including certifications of compliance, using appendix D. Compliance with DOE's amended standards for clothes dryers, and corresponding use of the test procedures at appendix D1 for all representations, including certifications of compliance, is required as of January 1, 2015. Manufacturers must use a single appendix for all representations, including certifications of compliance, and may not use appendix D for certain representations and appendix D1 for other representations. The procedures in appendix D2 need not be performed to determine compliance with energy conservation standards for clothes dryers at this time. However, manufacturers may elect to use the amended appendix D, D1 or D2 early.
1. Definitions
1.1 ``AHAM'' means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers.
1.2 ``Bone dry'' means a condition of a load of test clothes which has been dried in a dryer at maximum temperature for a minimum of 10 minutes, removed and weighed before cool down, and then dried again for 10-minute periods until the final weight change of the load is 1 percent or less.
1.3 ``Compact'' or compact size'' means a clothes dryer with a drum capacity of less than 4.4 cubic feet.
1.4 ``Cool down'' means that portion of the clothes drying cycle when the added gas or electric heat is terminated and the clothes continue to tumble and dry within the drum.
1.5 ``Cycle'' means a sequence of operation of a clothes dryer which performs a clothes drying operation, and may include variations or combinations of the functions of heating, tumbling and drying.
1.6 ``Drum capacity'' means the volume of the drying drum in cubic feet.
1.7 ``HLD-1'' means the test standard promulgated by AHAM and titled ``AHAM Performance Evaluation Procedure for Household Tumble Type Clothes Dryers'', June 1974, and designated as HLD-1.
1.8 ``HLD-2EC'' means the test standard promulgated by AHAM and titled ``Test Method for Measuring Energy Consumption of Household Tumble Type Clothes Dryers,'' December 1975, and designated as HLD-2EC.
1.9 ``Standard size'' means a clothes dryer with a drum capacity of 4.4 cubic feet or greater.
1.10 ``Moisture content'' means the ratio of the weight of water contained by the test load to the bone-dry weight of the test load, expressed as a percent.
1.11 ``Automatic termination control'' means a dryer control system with a sensor which monitors either the dryer load temperature or its moisture content and with a controller which automatically terminates the drying process. A mark or detent which indicates a preferred automatic termination control setting must be present if the dryer is to be classified as having an ``automatic termination control.'' A mark is a visible single control setting on one or more dryer controls.
1.12 ``Temperature sensing control'' means a system which monitors dryer exhaust air temperature and automatically terminates the dryer cycle.
1.13 ``Moisture sensing control'' means a system which utilizes a moisture sensing element within the dryer drum that monitors the amount of moisture in the clothes and automatically terminates the dryer cycle.
2. Testing Conditions
2.1 Installation. Install the clothes dryer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as shipped with the unit. If the manufacturer's instructions do not specify the installation requirements for a certain component, it shall be tested in the as-shipped condition. The dryer exhaust shall be restricted by adding the AHAM exhaust simulator described in 3.3.5 of HLD-1. All external joints should be taped to avoid air leakage. Disconnect all lights, such as task lights, that do not provide any information related to the drying process on the clothes dryer and that do not consume more than 10 watts during the clothes dryer test cycle. Control setting indicator lights showing the cycle progression, temperature or dryness settings, or other cycle functions that cannot be turned off during the test cycle shall not be disconnected during the active mode test cycle.
2.2 Ambient temperature and humidity. Maintain the room ambient air temperature at 75 3 [deg]F and the room relative humidity at 5010 percent relative humidity.
2.3 Energy supply.
2.3.1 Electrical supply. Maintain the electrical supply at the clothes dryer terminal block within 1 percent of 120/240 or 120/208Y or 120 volts as applicable to the particular terminal block wiring system and within 1 percent of the nameplate frequency as specified by the manufacturer. If the dryer has a dual voltage conversion capability, conduct test at the highest voltage specified by the manufacturer.
2.3.2 Gas supply.
2.3.2.1 Natural gas. Maintain the gas supply to the clothes dryer at a normal inlet test pressure immediately ahead of all controls at 7 to 10 inches of water column. If the clothes dryer is equipped with a gas appliance pressure regulator, the regulator outlet pressure at the normal test pressure shall be within 10 percent of the value recommended by the manufacturer in the installation manual, on the nameplate sticker, or wherever the manufacturer makes such a recommendation for the basic model. The hourly Btu rating of the burner shall be maintained within 5 percent of the rating specified by the manufacturer. If the requirement to maintain the hourly Btu rating of the burner within 5 percent of the rating specified by the manufacturer cannot be achieved under the allowable range in gas inlet test pressure, the orifice of the gas burner should be modified as necessary to achieve the required Btu rating. The natural gas supplied should have a heating value of approximately 1,025 Btus per standard cubic foot. The actual heating value, Hn2, in Btus per standard cubic foot, for the natural gas to be used in the test shall be obtained either from measurements made by the manufacturer conducting the test using a standard continuous flow calorimeter as described in section 2.4.6 or by the purchase of bottled natural gas whose Btu rating is certified to be at least as accurate a rating as could be obtained from measurements with a standard continuous flow calorimeter as described in section 2.4.6.
2.3.2.2 Propane gas. Maintain the gas supply to the clothes dryer at a normal inlet test pressure immediately ahead of all controls at 11 to 13 inches of water column. If the clothes dryer is equipped with a gas appliance pressure regulator, the regulator outlet pressure at the normal test pressure shall be within 10 percent of the value recommended by the manufacturer in the installation manual, on the nameplate sticker, or wherever the manufacturer makes such a recommendation for the basic model. The hourly Btu rating of the burner shall be maintained within 5 percent of the rating specified by the manufacturer. If the requirement to maintain the hourly Btu rating of the burner within 5 percent of the rating specified by the manufacturer cannot be achieved under the allowable range in gas inlet test pressure, the orifice of the gas burner should be modified as necessary to achieve the required Btu rating. The propane gas supplied should have a heating value of approximately 2,500 Btus per standard cubic foot. The actual heating value, Hp, in Btus per standard cubic foot, for the propane gas to be used in the test shall be obtained either from measurements made by the manufacturer conducting the test using a standard continuous flow calorimeter as described in section 2.4.6 or by the purchase of bottled gas whose Btu rating is certified to be at least as accurate a rating as could be obtained from measurement with a standard continuous calorimeter as described in section 2.4.6.
2.4 Instrumentation. Perform all test measurements using the following instruments as appropriate.
2.4.1 Weighing scale for test cloth. The scale shall have a range of 0 to a maximum of 60 pounds with a resolution of at least 0.2 ounces and a maximum error no greater than 0.3 percent of any measured value within the range of 3 to 15 pounds.
2.4.1.2 Weighing scale for drum capacity measurements. The scale should have a range of 0 to a maximum of 600 pounds with resolution of 0.50 pounds and a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value.
2.4.2 Kilowatt-hour meter. The kilowatt-hour meter shall have a resolution of 0.001 kilowatt-hours and a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value.
2.4.3 Gas meter. The gas meter shall have a resolution of 0.001 cubic feet and a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value.
2.4.4 Dry and wet bulb psychrometer. The dry and wet bulb psychrometer shall have an error no greater than 1 [deg]F. A relative humidity meter with a maximum error tolerance expressed in [deg]F equivalent to the requirements for the dry and wet bulb psychrometer or with a maximum error tolerance of 2 percent relative humidity would be acceptable for measuring the ambient humidity.
2.4.5 Temperature. The temperature sensor shall have an error no greater than 1 [deg]F.
2.4.6 Standard Continuous Flow Calorimeter. The Calorimeter shall have an operating range of 750 to 3,500 Btu per cubic feet. The maximum error of the basic calorimeter shall be no greater than 0.2 percent of the actual heating value of the gas used in the test. The indicator readout shall have a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value within the operating range and a resolution of 0.2 percent of the full scale reading of the indicator instrument.
2.5 Lint trap. Clean the lint trap thoroughly before each test run.
2.6 Test cloths.
2.6.1 Energy test cloth. The energy test cloth shall be clean and consist of the following:
(a) Pure finished bleached cloth, made with a momie or granite weave, which is a blended fabric of 50 percent cotton and 50 percent polyester and weighs within +10 percent of 5.75 ounces per square yard after test cloth preconditioning and has 65 ends on the warp and 57 picks on the fill. The individual warp and fill yarns are a blend of 50 percent cotton and 50 percent polyester fibers.
(b) Cloth material that is 24 inches by 36 inches and has been hemmed to 22 inches by 34 inches before washing. The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not be more than four percent on the length and width.
(c) The number of test runs on the same energy test cloth shall not exceed 25 runs.
2.6.2 Energy stuffer cloths. The energy stuffer cloths shall be made from energy test cloth material and shall consist of pieces of material that are 12 inches by 12 inches and have been hemmed to 10 inches by 10 inches before washing. The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not be more than four percent on the length and width. The number of test runs on the same energy stuffer cloth shall not exceed 25 runs after test cloth preconditioning.
2.6.3 Test Cloth Preconditioning.
A new test cloth load and energy stuffer cloths shall be treated as follows:
(1) Bone dry the load to a weight change of 1 percent, or less, as prescribed in Section 1.2.
(2) Place test cloth load in a standard clothes washer set at the maximum water fill level. Wash the load for 10 minutes in soft water (17 parts per million hardness or less), using 6.0 grams of AHAM Standard Test Detergent, IIA, per gallon of water. Wash water temperature is to controlled at 140[deg]5 [deg]F (60[deg] 2.7 [deg]C). Rinse water temperature is to be controlled at 100[deg] 5 [deg]F (37.7 2.7 [deg]C).
(3) Rinse the load again at the same water temperature.
(4) Bone dry the load as prescribed in Section 1.2 and weigh the load.
(5) This procedure is repeated until there is a weight change of one percent or less.
(6) A final cycle is to be a hot water wash with no detergent, followed by two warm water rinses.
2.7 Test loads.
2.7.1 Compact size dryer load. Prepare a bone-dry test load of energy cloths which weighs 3.00 pounds .03 pounds. Adjustments to the test load to achieve the proper weight can be made by the use of energy stuffer cloths, with no more than five stuffer cloths per load. Dampen the load by agitating it in water whose temperature is 100[deg] 5 [deg]F and consists of 0 to 17 parts per million hardness for approximately two minutes in order to saturate the fabric. Then, extract water from the wet test load by spinning the load until the moisture content of the load is between 66.5 percent to 73.5 percent of the bone-dry weight of the test load.
2.7.2 Standard size dryer load. Prepare a bone-dry test load of energy cloths which weighs 7.00 pounds .07 pounds. Adjustments to the test load to achieve the proper weight can be made by the use of energy stuffer cloths, with no more than five stuffer cloths per load. Dampen the load by agitating it in water whose temperature is 100[deg] 5 [deg]F and consists of 0 to 17 parts per million hardness for approximately two minutes in order to saturate the fabric. Then, extract water from the wet test load by spinning the load until the moisture content of the load is between 66.5 percent to 73.5 percent of the bone-dry weight of the test load.
2.7.3 Method of loading. Load the energy test cloths by grasping them in the center, shaking them to hang loosely and then dropping them in the dryer at random.
2.8 Clothes dryer preconditioning. Before any test cycle, operate the dryer without a test load in the non-heat mode for 15 minutes or until the discharge air temperature is varying less than 1 [deg]F for 10 minutes, which ever is longer, in the test installation location with the ambient conditions within the specified rest condition tolerances of 2.2.
3. Test Procedures and Measurements
3.1 Drum Capacity. Measure the drum capacity by sealing all openings in the drum except the loading port with a plastic bag, and ensure that all corners and depressions are filled and that there are no extrusions of the plastic bag through any openings in the interior of the drum. Support the dryer's rear drum surface on a platform scale to prevent deflection of the dryer, and record the weight of the empty dryer. Fill the drum with water to a level determined by the intersection of the door plane and the loading port (i.e., the uppermost edge of the drum that is in contact with the door seal). Record the temperature of the water and then the weight of the dryer with the added water and then determine the mass of the water in pounds. Add the appropriate volume to account for any space in the drum interior not measured by water fill (e.g., the space above the uppermost edge of the drum within a curved door) and subtract the appropriate volume to account for space that is measured by water fill but cannot be used when the door is closed (e.g., space occupied by the door when closed). The drum capacity is calculated as follows:C = w/d volume adjustmentC = capacity in cubic feet.w = mass of water in pounds.d = density of water at the measured temperature in pounds per cubic
foot.
3.2 Dryer loading. Load the dryer as specified in 2.7.
3.3 Test cycle. Operate the clothes dryer at the maximum temperature setting and, if equipped with a timer, at the maximum time setting. Any other optional cycle settings that do not affect the temperature or time settings shall be tested in the as-shipped position. If the clothes dryer does not have a separate temperature setting selection on the control panel, the maximum time setting should be used for the drying test cycle. Dry the test load until the moisture content of the test load is between 2.5 percent and 5.0 percent of the bone-dry weight of the test load, but do not permit the dryer to advance into cool down. If required, reset the timer or automatic dry control.
3.4 Data recording. Record for each test cycle:
3.4.1 Bone-dry weight of the test load described in 2.7.
3.4.2 Moisture content of the wet test load before the test, as described in 2.7.
3.4.3 Moisture content of the dry test load obtained after the test described in 3.3.
3.4.4 Test room conditions, temperature and percent relative humidity described in 2.2.
3.4.5 For electric dryers--the total kilowatt-hours of electric energy, Et, consumed during the test described in 3.3.
3.4.6 For gas dryers:
3.4.6.1 Total kilowatt-hours of electrical energy, Ete, consumed during the test described in 3.3.
3.4.6.2 Cubic feet of gas per cycle, Etg, consumed during the test described in 3.3.
3.4.6.3 On gas dryers using a continuously burning pilot light--the cubic feet of gas, Epg, consumed by the gas pilot light in one hour.
3.4.6.4 Correct the gas heating value, GEF, as measured in 2.3.2.1 and 2.3.2.2, to standard pressure and temperature conditions in accordance with U.S. Bureau of Standards, circular C417, 1938. A sample calculation is illustrated in appendix E of HLD-1.
3.5 Test for automatic termination field use factor credits. Credit for automatic termination can be claimed for those dryers which meet the requirements for either temperature-sensing control, 1.12, or moisture sensing control, 1.13, and having present the appropriate mark or detent feed defined in 1.11.
4. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements
4.1 Total per-cycle electric dryer energy consumption. Calculate the total electric dryer energy consumption per cycle, Ece expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: Ece = [66/Ww-Wd)]xEttxFU
Et = the energy recorded in 3.4.5.
66=an experimentally established value for the percent reduction in the moisture content of the test load during a laboratory test cycle expressed as a percent.
FU=Field use factor.
=1.18 for time termination control systems.
=1.04 for automatic control systems which meet the requirements of the definitions for automatic termination controls in 1.11.1, 1.12 and 1.13.
Ww = the moisture content of the wet test load as recorded in 3.4.2.
Wd = the moisture content of the dry test load as recorded in 3.4.3.
4.2 Per-cycle gas dryer electrical energy consumption. Calculate the gas dryer electrical energy consumption per cycle, Ege, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: Ege = [66/(Ww-Wd)]xEtexFU
Ete = the energy recorded in 3.4.6.1 FU, 66, Ww, Wd as defined in 4.1
4.3 Per-cycle gas dryer gas energy consumption. Calculate the gas dryer gas energy consumption per cycle, Ege, expressed in Btu's per cycle as defined as: Egg = [66/(Ww-Wd)]xEtgxFUxGEF
Etg = the energy recorded in 3.4.6.2
GEF = corrected gas heat value (Btu per cubic feet) as defined in 3.4.6.4
FU, 66, Ww Wd as defined in 4.1
4.4 Per-cycle gas dryer continuously burning pilot light gas energy consumption. Calculate the gas dryer continuously burning pilot light gas energy consumption per cycle, Eup expressed in Btu's per cycle and defined as: Eup = Epgx(8760-140/416)xGEF
Epg = the energy recorded in 3.4.6.3
8760=number of hours in a year
416=representative average number of clothes dryer cycles in a year
140=estimated number of hours that the continuously burning pilot light is on during the operation of the clothes dryer for the representative average use cycle for clothes dryers (416 cycles per year)
GEF as defined in 4.3
4.5 Total per-cycle gas dryer gas energy consumption expressed in Btu's. Calculate the total gas dryer energy consumption per cycle, Eg, expressed in Btu's per cycle and defined as: Eg = Egg+Eup
Egg as defined in 4.3
Eup as defined in 4.4
4.6 Total per-cycle gas dryer energy consumption expressed in kilowatt-hours. Calculate the total gas dryer energy consumption per cycle, Ecg, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: Ecg = Ege+(Eg/3412 Btu/k Wh)
Ege as defined in 4.2
Eg as defined in 4.5 [46 FR 27326, May 19, 1981, as amended at 76 FR 1032, Jan. 6, 2011; 78 FR 49644, Aug. 14, 2013]
Sec. Appendix D1 to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Clothes Dryers
Note: Effective February 10, 2014, manufacturers must make representations of energy efficiency, including certifications of compliance, using appendix D. Compliance with DOE's amended standards for clothes dryers, and corresponding use of the test procedures at appendix D1 for all representations, including certifications of compliance, is required as of January 1, 2015. Manufacturers must use a single appendix for all representations, including certifications of compliance, and may not use appendix D for certain representations and appendix D1 for other representations. The procedures in appendix D2 need not be performed to determine compliance with energy conservation standards for clothes dryers at this time. However, manufacturers may elect to use the amended appendix D, D1, or D2 early.
1. Definitions
1.1 ``Active mode'' means a mode in which the clothes dryer is connected to a main power source, has been activated and is performing the main function of tumbling the clothing with or without heated or unheated forced air circulation to remove moisture from the clothing, remove wrinkles or prevent wrinkling of the clothing, or both.
1.2 ``AHAM'' means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers.
1.3 ``AHAM HLD-1'' means the test standard published by the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers, titled ``Household Tumble Type Clothes Dryers'' (2009), AHAM HLD-1-2009 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.4 ``Automatic termination control'' means a dryer control system with a sensor which monitors either the dryer load temperature or its moisture content and with a controller which automatically terminates the drying process. A mark, detent, or other visual indicator or detent which indicates a preferred automatic termination control setting must be present if the dryer is to be classified as having an ``automatic termination control.'' A mark is a visible single control setting on one or more dryer controls.
1.5 ``Bone dry'' means a condition of a load of test clothes which has been dried in a dryer at maximum temperature for a minimum of 10 minutes, removed, and weighed before cool down, and then dried again for 10-minute periods until the final weight change of the load is 1 percent or less.
1.6 ``Compact'' or ``compact size'' means a clothes dryer with a drum capacity of less than 4.4 cubic feet.
1.7 ``Conventional clothes dryer'' means a clothes dryer that exhausts the evaporated moisture from the cabinet.
1.8 ``Cool down'' means that portion of the clothes drying cycle when the added gas or electric heat is terminated and the clothes continue to tumble and dry within the drum.
1.9 ``Cycle'' means a sequence of operation of a clothes dryer which performs a clothes drying operation, and may include variations or combinations of the functions of heating, tumbling, and drying.
1.10 ``Drum capacity'' means the volume of the drying drum in cubic feet.
1.11 ``IEC 62301'' (Second Edition) means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission (``IEC'') titled ``Household electrical appliances--Measurement of standby power,'' Publication 62301 (Edition 2.0 2011-01) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.12 ``Inactive mode'' means a standby mode that facilitates the activation of active mode by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer, or that provides continuous status display.
1.13 ``Moisture content'' means the ratio of the weight of water contained by the test load to the bone-dry weight of the test load, expressed as a percent.
1.14 ``Moisture sensing control'' means a system which utilizes a moisture sensing element within the dryer drum that monitors the amount of moisture in the clothes and automatically terminates the dryer cycle.
1.15 ``Off mode'' means a mode in which the clothes dryer is connected to a main power source and is not providing any active or standby mode function, and where the mode may persist for an indefinite time. An indicator that only shows the user that the product is in the off position is included within the classification of an off mode.
1.16 ``Standard size'' means a clothes dryer with a drum capacity of 4.4 cubic feet or greater.
1.17 ``Standby mode'' means any product modes where the energy using product is connected to a main power source and offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions which may persist for an indefinite time:
(a) To facilitate the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer.
(b) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that provides regular scheduled tasks (e.g., switching) and that operates on a continuous basis.
1.18 ``Temperature sensing control'' means a system which monitors dryer exhaust air temperature and automatically terminates the dryer cycle.
1.19 ``Ventless clothes dryer'' means a clothes dryer that uses a closed-loop system with an internal condenser to remove the evaporated moisture from the heated air. The moist air is not discharged from the cabinet.
2. Testing Conditions
2.1 Installation.
2.1.1 All clothes dryers. For both conventional clothes dryers and ventless clothes dryers, as defined in sections 1.7 and 1.19 of this appendix, install the clothes dryer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as shipped with the unit. If the manufacturer's instructions do not specify the installation requirements for a certain component, it shall be tested in the as-shipped condition. Where the manufacturer gives the option to use the dryer both with and without a duct, the dryer shall be tested without the exhaust simulator described in section 3.3.5.1 of AHAM HLD-1 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). All external joints should be taped to avoid air leakage. For drying testing, disconnect all lights, such as task lights, that do not provide any information related to the drying process on the clothes dryer and that do not consume more than 10 watts during the clothes dryer test cycle. Control setting indicator lights showing the cycle progression, temperature or dryness settings, or other cycle functions that cannot be turned off during the test cycle shall not be disconnected during the active mode test cycle. For standby and off mode testing, the clothes dryer shall also be installed in accordance with section 5, paragraph 5.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), disregarding the provisions regarding batteries and the determination, classification, and testing of relevant modes. For standby and off mode testing, all lighting systems shall remain connected.
2.1.2 Conventional clothes dryers. For conventional clothes dryers, as defined in section 1.7 of this appendix, the dryer exhaust shall be restricted by adding the AHAM exhaust simulator described in section 3.3.5.1 of AHAM HLD-1 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
2.1.3 Ventless clothes dryers. For ventless clothes dryers, as defined in section 1.19, the dryer shall be tested without the AHAM exhaust simulator. If the manufacturer gives the option to use a ventless clothes dryer, with or without a condensation box, the dryer shall be tested with the condensation box installed. For ventless clothes dryers, the condenser unit of the dryer must remain in place and not be taken out of the dryer for any reason between tests.
2.2 Ambient temperature and humidity.
2.2.1 For drying testing, maintain the room ambient air temperature at 75 3 [deg]F and the room relative humidity at 50 10 percent relative humidity.
2.2.2 For standby and off mode testing, maintain room ambient air temperature conditions as specified in section 4, paragraph 4.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3)
2.3 Energy supply.
2.3.1 Electrical supply. Maintain the electrical supply at the clothes dryer terminal block within 1 percent of 120/240 or 120/208Y or 120 volts as applicable to the particular terminal block wiring system and within 1 percent of the nameplate frequency as specified by the manufacturer. If the dryer has a dual voltage conversion capability, conduct the test at the highest voltage specified by the manufacturer.
2.3.1.1 Supply voltage waveform. For the clothes dryer standby mode and off mode testing, maintain the electrical supply voltage waveform indicated in section 4, paragraph 4.3.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). If the power measuring instrument used for testing is unable to measure and record the total harmonic content during the test measurement period, it is acceptable to measure and record the total harmonic content immediately before and after the test measurement period.
2.3.2 Gas supply.
2.3.2.1 Natural gas. Maintain the gas supply to the clothes dryer immediately ahead of all controls at a pressure of 7 to 10 inches of water column. If the clothes dryer is equipped with a gas appliance pressure regulator for which the manufacturer specifies an outlet pressure, the regulator outlet pressure shall be within 10 percent of the value recommended by the manufacturer in the installation manual, on the nameplate sticker, or wherever the manufacturer makes such a recommendation for the basic model. The hourly Btu rating of the burner shall be maintained within 5 percent of the rating specified by the manufacturer. If the requirement to maintain the hourly Btu rating of the burner within 5 percent of the rating specified by the manufacturer cannot be achieved under the allowable range in gas inlet test pressure, the orifice of the gas burner should be modified as necessary to achieve the required Btu rating. The natural gas supplied should have a heating value of approximately 1,025 Btus per standard cubic foot. The actual heating value, Hn2, in Btus per standard cubic foot, for the natural gas to be used in the test shall be obtained either from measurements made by the manufacturer conducting the test using a standard continuous flow calorimeter as described in section 2.4.6 or by the purchase of bottled natural gas whose Btu rating is certified to be at least as accurate a rating as could be obtained from measurements with a standard continuous flow calorimeter as described in section 2.4.6.
2.3.2.2 Propane gas. Maintain the gas supply to the clothes dryer immediately ahead of all controls at a pressure of 11 to 13 inches of water column. If the clothes dryer is equipped with a gas appliance pressure regulator for which the manufacturer specifies an outlet pressure, the regulator outlet pressure shall be within 10 percent of the value recommended by the manufacturer in the installation manual, on the nameplate sticker, or wherever the manufacturer makes such a recommendation for the basic model. The hourly Btu rating of the burner shall be maintained within 5 percent of the rating specified by the manufacturer. If the requirement to maintain the hourly Btu rating of the burner within 5 percent of the rating specified by the manufacturer cannot be achieved under the allowable range in gas inlet test pressure, the orifice of the gas burner should be modified as necessary to achieve the required Btu rating. The propane gas supplied should have a heating value of approximately 2,500 Btus per standard cubic foot. The actual heating value, Hp, in Btus per standard cubic foot, for the propane gas to be used in the test shall be obtained either from measurements made by the manufacturer conducting the test using a standard continuous flow calorimeter as described in section 2.4.6 or by the purchase of bottled gas whose Btu rating is certified to be at least as accurate a rating as could be obtained from measurement with a standard continuous calorimeter as described in section 2.4.6.
2.4 Instrumentation. Perform all test measurements using the following instruments as appropriate.
2.4.1 Weighing scale for test cloth. The scale shall have a range of 0 to a maximum of 60 pounds with a resolution of at least 0.2 ounces and a maximum error no greater than 0.3 percent of any measured value within the range of 3 to 15 pounds.
2.4.1.2 Weighing scale for drum capacity measurements. The scale should have a range of 0 to a maximum of 600 pounds with resolution of 0.50 pounds and a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value.
2.4.2 Kilowatt-hour meter. The kilowatt-hour meter shall have a resolution of 0.001 kilowatt-hours and a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value.
2.4.3 Gas meter. The gas meter shall have a resolution of 0.001 cubic feet and a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value.
2.4.4 Dry and wet bulb psychrometer. The dry and wet bulb psychrometer shall have an error no greater than 1 [deg]F. A relative humidity meter with a maximum error tolerance expressed in [deg]F equivalent to the requirements for the dry and wet bulb psychrometer or with a maximum error tolerance of 2 percent relative humidity would be acceptable for measuring the ambient humidity.
2.4.5 Temperature. The temperature sensor shall have an error no greater than 1 [deg]F.
2.4.6 Standard Continuous Flow Calorimeter. The calorimeter shall have an operating range of 750 to 3,500 Btu per cubic feet. The maximum error of the basic calorimeter shall be no greater than 0.2 percent of the actual heating value of the gas used in the test. The indicator readout shall have a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value within the operating range and a resolution of 0.2 percent of the full-scale reading of the indicator instrument.
2.4.7 Standby mode and off mode watt meter. The watt meter used to measure standby mode and off mode power consumption shall meet the requirements specified in section 4, paragraph 4.4 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). If the power measuring instrument used for testing is unable to measure and record the crest factor, power factor, or maximum current ratio during the test measurement period, it is acceptable to measure the crest factor, power factor, and maximum current ratio immediately before and after the test measurement period.
2.5 Lint trap. Clean the lint trap thoroughly before each test run.
2.6 Test Clothes.
2.6.1 Energy test cloth. The energy test cloth shall be clean and consist of the following:
(a) Pure finished bleached cloth, made with a momie or granite weave, which is a blended fabric of 50-percent cotton and 50-percent polyester and weighs within +10 percent of 5.75 ounces per square yard after test cloth preconditioning, and has 65 ends on the warp and 57 picks on the fill. The individual warp and fill yarns are a blend of 50-percent cotton and 50-percent polyester fibers.
(b) Cloth material that is 24 inches by 36 inches and has been hemmed to 22 inches by 34 inches before washing. The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not be more than 4 percent on the length and width.
(c) The number of test runs on the same energy test cloth shall not exceed 25 runs.
2.6.2 Energy stuffer cloths. The energy stuffer cloths shall be made from energy test cloth material, and shall consist of pieces of material that are 12 inches by 12 inches and have been hemmed to 10 inches by 10 inches before washing. The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not be more than 4 percent on the length and width. The number of test runs on the same energy stuffer cloth shall not exceed 25 runs after test cloth preconditioning.
2.6.3 Test Cloth Preconditioning.
A new test cloth load and energy stuffer cloths shall be treated as follows:
(1) Bone dry the load to a weight change of 1 percent, or less, as prescribed in section 1.5.
(2) Place the test cloth load in a standard clothes washer set at the maximum water fill level. Wash the load for 10 minutes in soft water (17 parts per million hardness or less), using 60.8 grams of AHAM standard test detergent Formula 3. Wash water temperature is to be controlled at 140 [deg] 5 [deg]F (60 [deg] 2.7 [deg]C). Rinse water temperature is to be controlled at 100 [deg] 5 [deg]F (37.7 2.7 [deg]C).
(3) Rinse the load again at the same water temperature.
(4) Bone dry the load as prescribed in section 1.5 and weigh the load.
(5) This procedure is repeated until there is a weight change of 1 percent or less.
(6) A final cycle is to be a hot water wash with no detergent, followed by two warm water rinses.
2.7 Test loads.
2.7.1 Compact size dryer load. Prepare a bone-dry test load of energy cloths which weighs 3.00 pounds .03 pounds. Adjustments to the test load to achieve the proper weight can be made by the use of energy stuffer cloths, with no more than five stuffer cloths per load. Dampen the load by agitating it in water whose temperature is 60 [deg]F 5 [deg]F and consists of 0 to 17 parts per million hardness for approximately 2 minutes in order to saturate the fabric. Then, extract water from the wet test load by spinning the load until the moisture content of the load is between 54.0-61.0 percent of the bone-dry weight of the test load.
2.7.2 Standard size dryer load. Prepare a bone-dry test load of energy cloths which weighs 8.45 pounds .085 pounds. Adjustments to the test load to achieve the proper weight can be made by the use of energy stuffer cloths, with no more than five stuffer cloths per load. Dampen the load by agitating it in water whose temperature is 60 [deg]F 5 [deg]F and consists of 0 to 17 parts per million hardness for approximately 2 minutes in order to saturate the fabric. Then, extract water from the wet test load by spinning the load until the moisture content of the load is between 54.0-61.0 percent of the bone-dry weight of the test load.
2.7.3 Method of loading. Load the energy test cloths by grasping them in the center, shaking them to hang loosely, and then dropping them in the dryer at random.
2.8 Clothes dryer preconditioning.
2.8.1 Conventional clothes dryers. For conventional clothes dryers, before any test cycle, operate the dryer without a test load in the non-heat mode for 15 minutes or until the discharge air temperature is varying less than 1 [deg]F for 10 minutes--whichever is longer--in the test installation location with the ambient conditions within the specified test condition tolerances of 2.2.
2.8.2 Ventless clothes dryers. For ventless clothes dryers, before any test cycle, the steady-state machine temperature must be equal to ambient room temperature described in 2.2.1. This may be done by leaving the machine at ambient room conditions for at least 12 hours between tests.
3. Test Procedures and Measurements
3.1 Drum Capacity. Measure the drum capacity by sealing all openings in the drum except the loading port with a plastic bag, and ensuring that all corners and depressions are filled and that there are no extrusions of the plastic bag through any openings in the interior of the drum. Support the dryer's rear drum surface on a platform scale to prevent deflection of the drum surface, and record the weight of the empty dryer. Fill the drum with water to a level determined by the intersection of the door plane and the loading port (i.e., the uppermost edge of the drum that is in contact with the door seal). Record the temperature of the water and then the weight of the dryer with the added water and then determine the mass of the water in pounds. Add the appropriate volume to account for any space in the drum interior not measured by water fill (e.g., the space above the uppermost edge of the drum within a curved door) and subtract the appropriate volume to account for space that is measured by water fill but cannot be used when the door is closed (e.g., space occupied by the door when closed). The drum capacity is calculated as follows: C = w/d volume adjustmentC = capacity in cubic feet.w = mass of water in pounds.d = density of water at the measured temperature in pounds per cubic
foot.
3.2 Dryer Loading. Load the dryer as specified in 2.7.
3.3 Test cycle. Operate the clothes dryer at the maximum temperature setting and, if equipped with a timer, at the maximum time setting. Any other optional cycle settings that do not affect the temperature or time settings shall be tested in the as-shipped position. If the clothes dryer does not have a separate temperature setting selection on the control panel, the maximum time setting should be used for the drying test cycle. Dry the load until the moisture content of the test load is between 2.5 and 5.0 percent of the bone-dry weight of the test load, at which point the test cycle is stopped, but do not permit the dryer to advance into cool down. If required, reset the timer to increase the length of the drying cycle. After stopping the test cycle, remove and weigh the test load. The clothes dryer shall not be stopped intermittently in the middle of the test cycle for any reason. Record the data specified by section 3.4 of this appendix. If the dryer automatically stops during a cycle because the condensation box is full of water, the test is stopped, and the test run is invalid, in which case the condensation box shall be emptied and the test re-run from the beginning. For ventless dryers, as defined in section 1.19 of this appendix, during the time between two cycles, the door of the dryer shall be closed except for loading (and unloading).
3.4 Data recording. Record for each test cycle:
3.4.1 Bone-dry weight of the test load described in 2.7.
3.4.2 Moisture content of the wet test load before the test, as described in 2.7.
3.4.3 Moisture content of the dry test load obtained after the test described in 3.3.
3.4.4 Test room conditions, temperature, and percent relative humidity described in 2.2.1.
3.4.5 For electric dryers--the total kilowatt-hours of electric energy, Et, consumed during the test described in 3.3.
3.4.6 For gas dryers:
3.4.6.1 Total kilowatt-hours of electrical energy, Ete, consumed during the test described in 3.3.
3.4.6.2 Cubic feet of gas per cycle, Etg, consumed during the test described in 3.3.
3.4.6.3 Correct the gas heating value, GEF, as measured in 2.3.2.1 and 2.3.2.2, to standard pressure and temperature conditions in accordance with U.S. Bureau of Standards, circular C417, 1938.
3.5 Test for automatic termination field use factor. The field use factor for automatic termination can be claimed for those dryers which meet the requirements for automatic termination control, defined in 1.4.
3.6 Standby mode and off mode power. Establish the testing conditions set forth in Section 2 ``Testing Conditions'' of this appendix. For clothes dryers that take some time to enter a stable state from a higher power state as discussed in Section 5, Paragraph 5.1, Note 1 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), allow sufficient time for the clothes dryer to reach the lower power state before proceeding with the test measurement. Follow the test procedure specified in section 5, paragraph 5.3.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) for testing in each possible mode as described in sections 3.6.1 and 3.6.2 of this appendix.
3.6.1 If a clothes dryer has an inactive mode, as defined in 1.12, measure and record the average inactive mode power of the clothes dryer, PIA, in watts.
3.6.2 If a clothes dryer has an off mode, as defined in 1.15, measure and record the average off mode power of the clothes dryer, POFF, in watts.
4. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements
4.1 Total Per-cycle electric dryer energy consumption. Calculate the total electric dryer energy consumption per cycle, Ece, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: Ece = [53.5/(Ww-Wd)] x Ett x field use, Where: 53.5 = an experimentally established value for the percent reduction in
the moisture content of the test load during a laboratory test
cycle expressed as a percent.field use = field use factor.
= 1.18 for clothes dryers with time termination control systems only
without any automatic termination control functions.
= 1.04 clothes dryers with automatic control systems that meet the
requirements of the definition for automatic control systems
in 1.4, 1.14 and 1.18, including those that also have a
supplementary timer control, or that may also be manually
controlled. Ww = the moisture content of the wet test load as recorded in
3.4.2. Wd = the moisture content of the dry test load as recorded in
3.4.3.
4.2 Per-cycle gas dryer electrical energy consumption. Calculate the gas dryer electrical energy consumption per cycle, Ege, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: Ege = [53.5/(Ww-Wd)] x Ete x field use, Where: Ete = the energy recorded in 3.4.6.1 field use, 53.5,
Ww, Wd as defined in 4.1.
4.3 Per-cycle gas dryer gas energy consumption. Calculate the gas dryer gas energy consumption per cycle, Ege, expressed in Btus per cycle as defined as: Egg = [53.5/(Ww - Wd)] x Etg x field use x GEF Where: Etg = the energy recorded in 3.4.6.2GEF = corrected gas heat value (Btu per cubic feet) as defined in
3.4.6.3, field use, 53.5, Ww, Wd as
defined in 4.1.
4.4 Total per-cycle gas dryer energy consumption expressed in kilowatt-hours. Calculate the total gas dryer energy consumption per cycle, Ecg, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: Ecg = Ege + (Egg/3412 Btu/kWh) Where: Ege as defined in 4.2Egg as defined in 4.3
4.5 Per-cycle standby mode and off mode energy consumption. Calculate the dryer inactive mode and off mode energy consumption per cycle, ETSO, expressed in kWh per cycle and defined as: ETSO = [(PIA x SIA) + (POFF x SOFF)] x K/283 Where: PIA = dryer inactive mode power, in watts, as measured in
section 3.6.1;POFF = dryer off mode power, in watts, as measured in section
3.6.2. If the clothes dryer has both inactive mode and off mode, SIA
and SOFF both equal 8,620 / 2 = 4,310, where 8,620
is the total inactive and off mode annual hours; If the clothes dryer has an inactive mode but no off mode, the inactive
mode annual hours, SIA, is equal to 8,620 and the
off mode annual hours, SOFF, is equal to 0; If the clothes dryer has an off mode but no inactive mode,
SIA is equal to 0 and SOFF is equal to
8,620 Where: K = 0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours; and283 = representative average number of clothes dryer cycles in a year.
4.6 Per-cycle combined total energy consumption expressed in kilowatt-hours. Calculate the per-cycle combined total energy consumption, ECC, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined for an electric clothes dryer as: ECC = Ece + ETSO Where: Ece = the energy recorded in section 4.1 of this appendix,
andETSO = the energy recorded in section 4.5 of this appendix,
and defined for a gas clothes dryer as:ECC = Ecg + ETSO Where: Ecg = the energy recorded in section 4.4 of this appendix,
andETSO = the energy recorded in section 4.5 of this appendix.
4.7 Energy Factor in pounds per kilowatt-hour. Calculate the energy factor, EF, expressed in pounds per kilowatt-hour and defined for an electric clothes dryer as: EF = Wbonedry/Ece Where: Wbonedry = the bone dry test load weight recorded in 3.4.1,
andEce = the energy recorded in 4.1, and and defined for a gas clothes dryer as: EF = Wbonedry/Ecg Where: Wbonedry = the bone dry test load weight recorded in 3.4.1,
andEcg = the energy recorded in 4.4,
4.8 Combined Energy Factor in pounds per kilowatt-hour. Calculate the combined energy factor, CEF, expressed in pounds per kilowatt-hour and defined as: CEF = Wbonedry/ECC Where: Wbonedry = the bone dry test load weight 3.4.1, andECC = the energy recorded in 4.6 [76 FR 1032, Jan. 6, 2011, as amended at 78 FR 49645, Aug. 14, 2013]
Sec. Appendix D2 to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Clothes Dryers
Note: The procedures in appendix D2 need not be performed to determine compliance with energy conservation standards for clothes dryers at this time. Manufacturers may elect to use the amended appendix D2 early to show compliance with the January 1, 2015 energy conservation standards. Manufacturers must use a single appendix for all representations, including certifications of compliance, and may not use appendix D1 for certain representations and appendix D2 for other representations.
1. Definitions
1.1 ``Active mode'' means a mode in which the clothes dryer is connected to a main power source, has been activated and is performing the main function of tumbling the clothing with or without heated or unheated forced air circulation to remove moisture from the clothing, remove wrinkles or prevent wrinkling of the clothing, or both.
1.2 ``AHAM'' means the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers.
1.3 ``AHAM HLD-1'' means the test standard published by the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers, titled ``Household Tumble Type Clothes Dryers,'' (2009), AHAM HLD-1-2009 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.4 ``Automatic termination control'' means a dryer control system with a sensor which monitors either the dryer load temperature or its moisture content and with a controller which automatically terminates the drying process. A mark, detent, or other visual indicator or detent which indicates a preferred automatic termination control setting must be present if the dryer is to be classified as having an ``automatic termination control.'' A mark is a visible single control setting on one or more dryer controls.
1.5 ``Automatic termination control dryer'' means a clothes dryer which can be preset to carry out at least one sequence of operations to be terminated by means of a system assessing, directly or indirectly, the moisture content of the load. An automatic termination control dryer with supplementary timer or that may also be manually controlled shall be tested as an automatic termination control dryer.
1.6 ``Bone dry'' means a condition of a load of test clothes which has been dried in a dryer at maximum temperature for a minimum of 10 minutes, removed, and weighed before cool down, and then dried again for 10-minute periods until the final weight change of the load is 1 percent or less.
1.7 ``Compact'' or ``compact size'' means a clothes dryer with a drum capacity of less than 4.4 cubic feet.
1.8 ``Conventional clothes dryer'' means a clothes dryer that exhausts the evaporated moisture from the cabinet.
1.9 ``Cool down'' means that portion of the clothes drying cycle when the added gas or electric heat is terminated and the clothes continue to tumble and dry within the drum.
1.10 ``Cycle'' means a sequence of operation of a clothes dryer which performs a clothes drying operation, and may include variations or combinations of the functions of heating, tumbling, and drying.
1.11 ``Drum capacity'' means the volume of the drying drum in cubic feet.
1.12 ``IEC 62301'' (Second Edition) means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission (``IEC'') titled ``Household electrical appliances--Measurement of standby power,'' Publication 62301 (Edition 2.0 2011-01) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.13 ``Inactive mode'' means a standby mode that facilitates the activation of active mode by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer, or that provides continuous status display.
1.14 ``Moisture content'' means the ratio of the weight of water contained by the test load to the bone-dry weight of the test load, expressed as a percent.
1.15 ``Moisture sensing control'' means a system which utilizes a moisture sensing element within the dryer drum that monitors the amount of moisture in the clothes and automatically terminates the dryer cycle.
1.16 ``Off mode'' means a mode in which the clothes dryer is connected to a main power source and is not providing any active or standby mode function, and where the mode may persist for an indefinite time. An indicator that only shows the user that the product is in the off position is included within the clasification of an off mode.
1.17 ``Standard size'' means a clothes dryer with a drum capacity of 4.4 cubic feet or greater.
1.18 ``Standby mode'' means any product modes where the energy using product is connected to a mains power source and offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions which may persist for an indefinite time:
(a) To facilitate the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer.
(b) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that provides regular scheduled tasks (e.g., switching) and that operates on a continuous basis.
1.19 ``Temperature sensing control'' means a system which monitors dryer exhaust air temperature and automatically terminates the dryer cycle.
1.20 ``Timer dryer'' means a clothes dryer that can be preset to carry out at least one operation to be terminated by a timer, but may also be manually controlled, and does not include any automatic termination function.
1.21 ``Ventless clothes dryer'' means a clothes dryer that uses a closed-loop system with an internal condenser to remove the evaporated moisture from the heated air. The moist air is not discharged from the cabinet.
2. Testing Conditions
2.1 Installation.
2.1.1 All clothes dryers. For both conventional clothes dryers and ventless clothes dryers, as defined in sections 1.8 and 1.21 of this appendix, install the clothes dryer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as shipped with the unit. If the manufacturer's instructions do not specify the installation requirements for a certain component, it shall be tested in the as-shipped condition. Where the manufacturer gives the option to use the dryer both with and without a duct, the dryer shall be tested without the exhaust simulator described in section 3.3.5.1 of AHAM HLD-1 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). All external joints should be taped to avoid air leakage. For drying testing, disconnect all lights, such as task lights, that do not provide any information related to the drying process on the clothes dryer and that do not consume more than 10 watts during the clothes dryer test cycle. Control setting indicator lights showing the cycle progression, temperature or dryness settings, or other cycle functions that cannot be turned off during the test cycle shall not be disconnected during the active mode test cycle. For standby and off mode testing, the clothes dryer shall also be installed in accordance with section 5, paragraph 5.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), disregarding the provisions regarding batteries and the determination, classification, and testing of relevant modes. For standby and off mode testing, all lighting systems shall remain connected.
2.1.2 Conventional clothes dryers. For conventional clothes dryers, as defined in section 1.8 of this appendix, the dryer exhaust shall be restricted by adding the AHAM exhaust simulator described in section 3.3.5.1 of AHAM HLD-1 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
2.1.3 Ventless clothes dryers. For ventless clothes dryers, as defined in section 1.21, the dryer shall be tested without the AHAM exhaust simulator. If the manufacturer gives the option to use a ventless clothes dryer, with or without a condensation box, the dryer shall be tested with the condensation box installed. For ventless clothes dryers, the condenser unit of the dryer must remain in place and not be taken out of the dryer for any reason between tests.
2.2 Ambient temperature and humidity.
2.2.1 For drying testing, maintain the room ambient air temperature at 75 3 F and the room relative humidity at 50 10 percent relative humidity.
2.2.2 For standby and off mode testing, maintain room ambient air temperature conditions as specified in section 4, paragraph 4.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
2.3 Energy supply.
2.3.1 Electrical supply. Maintain the electrical supply at the clothes dryer terminal block within 1 percent of 120/240 or 120/208Y or 120 volts as applicable to the particular terminal block wiring system and within 1 percent of the nameplate frequency as specified by the manufacturer. If the dryer has a dual voltage conversion capability, conduct the test at the highest voltage specified by the manufacturer.
2.3.1.1 Supply voltage waveform. For the clothes dryer standby mode and off mode testing, maintain the electrical supply voltage waveform indicated in section 4, paragraph 4.3.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). If the power measuring instrument used for testing is unable to measure and record the total harmonic content during the test measurement period, it is acceptable to measure and record the total harmonic content immediately before and after the test measurement period.
2.3.2 Gas supply.
2.3.2.1 Natural gas. Maintain the gas supply to the clothes dryer immediately ahead of all controls at a pressure of 7 to 10 inches of water column. If the clothes dryer is equipped with a gas appliance pressure regulator for which the manufacturer specifies an outlet pressure, the regulator outlet pressure shall be within 10 percent of the value recommended by the manufacturer in the installation manual, on the nameplate sticker, or wherever the manufacturer makes such a recommendation for the basic model. The hourly Btu rating of the burner shall be maintained within 5 percent of the rating specified by the manufacturer. If the requirement to maintain the hourly Btu rating of the burner within 5 percent of the rating specified by the manufacturer cannot be achieved under the allowable range in gas inlet test pressure, the orifice of the gas burner should be modified as necessary to achieve the required Btu rating. The natural gas supplied should have a heating value of approximately 1,025 Btus per standard cubic foot. The actual heating value, Hn2, in Btus per standard cubic foot, for the natural gas to be used in the test shall be obtained either from measurements made by the manufacturer conducting the test using a standard continuous flow calorimeter as described in section 2.4.6 or by the purchase of bottled natural gas whose Btu rating is certified to be at least as accurate a rating as could be obtained from measurements with a standard continuous flow calorimeter as described in section 2.4.6.
2.3.2.2 Propane gas. Maintain the gas supply to the clothes dryer immediately ahead of all controls at a pressure of 11 to 13 inches of water column. If the clothes dryer is equipped with a gas appliance pressure regulator for which the manufacturer specifies an outlet pressure, the regulator outlet pressure shall be within 10 percent of the value recommended by the manufacturer in the installation manual, on the nameplate sticker, or wherever the manufacturer makes such a recommendation for the basic model. The hourly Btu rating of the burner shall be maintained within 5 percent of the rating specified by the manufacturer. If the requirement to maintain the hourly Btu rating of the burner within 5 percent of the rating specified by the manufacturer cannot be achieved under the allowable range in gas inlet test pressure, the orifice of the gas burner should be modified as necessary to achieve the required Btu rating. The propane gas supplied should have a heating value of approximately 2,500 Btus per standard cubic foot. The actual heating value, Hp, in Btus per standard cubic foot, for the propane gas to be used in the test shall be obtained either from measurements made by the manufacturer conducting the test using a standard continuous flow calorimeter as described in section 2.4.6 or by the purchase of bottled gas whose Btu rating is certified to be at least as accurate a rating as could be obtained from measurement with a standard continuous calorimeter as described in section 2.4.6.
2.4 Instrumentation. Perform all test measurements using the following instruments as appropriate.
2.4.1 Weighing scale for test cloth. The scale shall have a range of 0 to a maximum of 60 pounds with a resolution of at least 0.2 ounces and a maximum error no greater than 0.3 percent of any measured value within the range of 3 to 15 pounds.
2.4.1.2 Weighing scale for drum capacity measurements. The scale should have a range of 0 to a maximum of 600 pounds with resolution of 0.50 pounds and a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value.
2.4.2 Kilowatt-hour meter. The kilowatt-hour meter shall have a resolution of 0.001 kilowatt-hours and a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value.
2.4.3 Gas meter. The gas meter shall have a resolution of 0.001 cubic feet and a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value.
2.4.4 Dry and wet bulb psychrometer. The dry and wet bulb psychrometer shall have an error no greater than 1 [deg]F. A relative humidity meter with a maximum error tolerance expressed in [deg]F equivalent to the requirements for the dry and wet bulb psychrometer or with a maximum error tolerance of 2 percent relative humidity would be acceptable for measuring the ambient humidity.
2.4.5 Temperature. The temperature sensor shall have an error no greater than 1 [deg]F.
2.4.6 Standard Continuous Flow Calorimeter. The calorimeter shall have an operating range of 750 to 3,500 Btu per cubic foot. The maximum error of the basic calorimeter shall be no greater than 0.2 percent of the actual heating value of the gas used in the test. The indicator readout shall have a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value within the operating range and a resolution of 0.2 percent of the full-scale reading of the indicator instrument.
2.4.7 Standby mode and off mode watt meter. The watt meter used to measure standby mode and off mode power consumption shall meet the requirements specified in section 4, paragraph 4.4 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). If the power measuring instrument used for testing is unable to measure and record the crest factor, power factor, or maximum current ratio during the test measurement period, it is acceptable to measure the crest factor, power factor, and maximum current ratio immediately before and after the test measurement period.
2.5 Lint trap. Clean the lint trap thoroughly before each test run.
2.6 Test Cloths.
2.6.1 Energy test cloth. The energy test cloth shall be clean and consist of the following:
(a) Pure finished bleached cloth, made with a momie or granite weave, which is a blended fabric of 50-percent cotton and 50-percent polyester and weighs within +10 percent of 5.75 ounces per square yard after test cloth preconditioning, and has 65 ends on the warp and 57 picks on the fill. The individual warp and fill yarns are a blend of 50-percent cotton and 50-percent polyester fibers.
(b) Cloth material that is 24 inches by 36 inches and has been hemmed to 22 inches by 34 inches before washing. The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not be more than 4 percent on the length and width.
(c) The number of test runs on the same energy test cloth shall not exceed 25 runs.
2.6.2 Energy stuffer cloths. The energy stuffer cloths shall be made from energy test cloth material, and shall consist of pieces of material that are 12 inches by 12 inches and have been hemmed to 10 inches by 10 inches before washing. The maximum shrinkage after five washes shall not be more than 4 percent on the length and width. The number of test runs on the same energy stuffer cloth shall not exceed 25 runs after test cloth preconditioning.
2.6.3 Test Cloth Preconditioning.
A new test cloth load and energy stuffer cloths shall be treated as follows:
(1) Bone dry the load to a weight change of 1 percent, or less, as prescribed in section 1.6 of this appendix.
(2) Place the test cloth load in a standard clothes washer set at the maximum water fill level. Wash the load for 10 minutes in soft water (17 parts per million hardness or less), using 60.8 grams of AHAM standard test detergent Formula 3. Wash water temperature should be maintained at 140 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (60 [deg]C 2.7 [deg]C). Rinse water temperature is to be controlled at 100 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (37.7 [deg]C 2.7 [deg]C).
(3) Rinse the load again at the same water temperature.
(4) Bone dry the load as prescribed in section 1.6 of this appendix and weigh the load.
(5) This procedure is repeated until there is a weight change of 1 percent or less.
(6) A final cycle is to be a hot water wash with no detergent, followed by two warm water rinses.
2.7 Test loads.
2.7.1 Compact size dryer load. Prepare a bone-dry test load of energy cloths that weighs 3.00 pounds .03 pounds. The test load can be adjusted to achieve proper weight by adding energy stuffer cloths, but no more than five stuffer cloths may be added per load. Dampen the load by agitating it in water whose temperature is 60 [deg]F 5 [deg]F and consists of 0 to 17 parts per million hardness for approximately 2 minutes to saturate the fabric. Then, extract water from the wet test load by spinning the load until the moisture content of the load is between 52.5 and 57.5 percent of the bone-dry weight of the test load. Make a final mass adjustment, such that the moisture content is 57.5 percent 0.33 percent by adding water uniformly distributed among all of the test clothes in a very fine spray using a spray bottle.
2.7.2 Standard size dryer load. Prepare a bone-dry test load of energy cloths that weighs 8.45 pounds .085 pounds. The test load can be adjusted to achieve proper weight by adding stuffer cloths, but no more than five stuffer cloths may be added per load. Dampen the load by agitating it in water whose temperature is 60 [deg]F 5 [deg]F and consists of 0 to 17 parts per million hardness for approximately 2 minutes to saturate the fabric. Then, extract water from the wet test load by spinning the load until the moisture content of the load is between 52.5 and 57.5 percent of the bone-dry weight of the test load. Make a final mass adjustment, such that the moisture content is 57.5 percent 0.33 percent by adding water uniformly distributed among all of the test clothes in a very fine spray using a spray bottle.
2.7.3 Method of loading. Load the energy test cloths by grasping them in the center, shaking them to hang loosely, and then dropping them in the dryer at random.
2.8 Clothes dryer preconditioning.
2.8.1 Conventional clothes dryers. For conventional clothes dryers, before any test cycle, operate the dryer without a test load in the non-heat mode for 15 minutes or until the discharge air temperature is varying less than 1 [deg]F for 10 minutes--whichever is longer--in the test installation location with the ambient conditions within the specified test condition tolerances of 2.2.
2.8.2 Ventless clothes dryers. For ventless clothes dryers, before any test cycle, the steady-state machine temperature must be equal to ambient room temperature described in 2.2.1. This may be done by leaving the machine at ambient room conditions for at least 12 hours between tests.
3. Test Procedures and Measurements
3.1 Drum Capacity. Measure the drum capacity by sealing all openings in the drum except the loading port with a plastic bag, and ensuring that all corners and depressions are filled and that there are no extrusions of the plastic bag through any openings in the interior of the drum. Support the dryer's rear drum surface on a platform scale to prevent deflection of the drum surface, and record the weight of the empty dryer. Fill the drum with water to a level determined by the intersection of the door plane and the loading port (i.e., the uppermost edge of the drum that is in contact with the door seal). Record the temperature of the water and then the weight of the dryer with the added water and then determine the mass of the water in pounds. Add the appropriate volume to account for any space in the drum interior not measured by water fill (e.g., the space above the uppermost edge of the drum within a curved door) and subtract the appropriate volume to account for the space that is measured by water fill but cannot be used when the door is closed (e.g., space occupied by the door when closed). The drum capacity is calculated as follows: C= w/d volume adjustmentC = capacity in cubic feet.w = mass of water in pounds.d = density of water at the measured temperature in pounds per cubic
foot.
3.2 Dryer Loading. Load the dryer as specified in 2.7.
3.3 Test cycle.
3.3.1 Timer dryers. For timer dryers, as defined in section 1.20 of this appendix, operate the clothes dryer at the maximum temperature setting and, if equipped with a timer, at the maximum time setting. Any other optional cycle settings that do not affect the temperature or time settings shall be tested in the as-shipped position. If the clothes dryer does not have a separate temperature setting selection on the control panel, the maximum time setting should be used for the drying test cycle. Dry the load until the moisture content of the test load is between 1 and 2.5 percent of the bone-dry weight of the test load, at which point the test cycle is stopped, but do not permit the dryer to advance into cool down. If required, reset the timer to increase the length of the drying cycle. After stopping the test cycle, remove and weigh the test load. The clothes dryer shall not be stopped intermittently in the middle of the test cycle for any reason. Record the data specified by section 3.4 of this appendix. If the dryer automatically stops during a cycle because the condensation box is full of water, the test is stopped, and the test run is invalid, in which case the condensation box shall be emptied and the test re-run from the beginning. For ventless dryers, as defined in section 1.21 of this appendix, during the time between two cycles, the door of the dryer shall be closed except for loading (and unloading).
3.3.2 Automatic termination control dryers. For automatic termination control dryers, as defined in section 1.5 of this appendix, a ``normal'' program shall be selected for the test cycle. For dryers that do not have a ``normal'' program, the cycle recommended by the manufacturer for drying cotton or linen clothes shall be selected. Where the drying temperature setting can be chosen independently of the program, it shall be set to the maximum. Where the dryness level setting can be chosen independently of the program, it shall be set to the ``normal'' or ``medium'' dryness level setting. If such designation is not provided, then the dryness level shall be set at the mid-point between the minimum and maximum settings. Any other optional cycle settings that do not affect the program, temperature or dryness settings shall be tested in the as-shipped position. Operate the clothes dryer until the completion of the programmed cycle, including the cool down period. The cycle shall be considered complete when the dryer indicates to the user that the cycle has finished (by means of a display, indicator light, audible signal, or other signal) and the heater and drum/fan motor shuts off for the final time. If the clothes dryer is equipped with a wrinkle prevention mode (i.e., that continuously or intermittently tumbles the clothes dryer drum after the clothes dryer indicates to the user that the cycle has finished) that is activated by default in the as-shipped position or if manufacturers' instructions specify that the feature is recommended to be activated for normal use, the cycle shall be considered complete after the end of the wrinkle prevention mode. After the completion of the test cycle, remove and weigh the test load. Record the data specified in section 3.4 of this appendix. If the final moisture content is greater than 2 percent, the test shall be invalid and a new run shall be conducted using the highest dryness level setting. If the dryer automatically stops during a cycle because the condensation box is full of water, the test is stopped, and the test run is invalid, in which case the condensation box shall be emptied and the test re-run from the beginning. For ventless dryers, during the time between two cycles, the door of the dryer shall be closed except for loading (and unloading).
3.4 Data recording. Record for each test cycle:
3.4.1 Bone-dry weight of the test load described in 2.7.
3.4.2 Moisture content of the wet test load before the test, as described in 2.7.
3.4.3 Moisture content of the dry test load obtained after the test described in 3.3.
3.4.4 Test room conditions, temperature, and percent relative humidity described in 2.2.1.
3.4.5 For electric dryers--the total kilowatt-hours of electric energy, Et, consumed during the test described in 3.3.
3.4.6 For gas dryers:
3.4.6.1 Total kilowatt-hours of electrical energy, Ete, consumed during the test described in 3.3.
3.4.6.2 Cubic feet of gas per cycle, Etg, consumed during the test described in 3.3.
3.4.6.3 Correct the gas heating value, GEF, as measured in 2.3.2.1 and 2.3.2.2, to standard pressure and temperature conditions in accordance with U.S. Bureau of Standards, circular C417, 1938.
3.4.7 The cycle settings selected, in accordance with section 3.3.2 of this appendix, for the automatic termination control dryer test.
3.5 Test for automatic termination field use factor. The field use factor for automatic termination can be claimed for those dryers which meet the requirements for automatic termination control, defined in 1.4.
3.6 Standby mode and off mode power. Establish the testing conditions set forth in Section 2 ``Testing Conditions'' of this appendix. For clothes dryers that take some time to enter a stable state from a higher power state as discussed in Section 5, Paragraph 5.1, Note 1 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), allow sufficient time for the clothes dryer to reach the lower power state before proceeding with the test measurement. Follow the test procedure specified in section 5, paragraph 5.3.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) for testing in each possible mode as described in sections 3.6.1 and 3.6.2 of this appendix.
3.6.1 If a clothes dryer has an inactive mode, as defined in section 1.13 of this appendix, measure and record the average inactive mode power of the clothes dryer, PIA, in watts.
3.6.2 If a clothes dryer has an off mode, as defined in section 1.16 of this appendix, measure and record the average off mode power of the clothes dryer, POFF, in watts.
4. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements
4.1 Total per-cycle electric dryer energy consumption. Calculate the total electric dryer energy consumption per cycle, Ece, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:Ece = Et,for automatic termination control dryers, and,Ece = [55.5/(Ww- Wd)] x Et x
field use,for timer dryers Where: 55.5 = an experimentally established value for the percent reduction in
the moisture content of the test load during a laboratory test
cycle expressed as a percent.Et = the energy recorded in section 3.4.5 of this appendixfield use = 1.18, the field use factor for clothes dryers with time
termination control systems only without any automatic
termination control functions.Ww = the moisture content of the wet test load as recorded in
section 3.4.2 of this appendix.Wd = the moisture content of the dry test load as recorded in
section 3.4.3 of this appendix.
4.2 Per-cycle gas dryer electrical energy consumption. Calculate the gas dryer electrical energy consumption per cycle, Ege, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:Ege = Ete,for automatic termination control dryers, and,Ege = [55.5/(Ww -Wd)] x Ete
x field use,for timer dryers Where: Ete = the energy recorded in section 3.4.6.1 of this
appendix.field use, 55.5, Ww, Wd as defined in section 4.1
of this appendix.4.3 Per-cycle gas dryer gas energy consumption. Calculate the gas dryer
gas energy consumption per cycle, Ege, expressed in
Btus per cycle and defined as:Egg = Etg x GEFfor automatic termination control dryers, and,Egg = [55.5/(Ww -Wd)] x Etg
x field use x GEFfor timer dryers Where: Etg = the energy recorded in section 3.4.6.2 of this
appendix.GEF = corrected gas heat value (Btu per cubic foot) as defined in
section 3.4.6.3 of this appendix, field use, 55.5, Ww, Wd as defined in section 4.1
of this appendix.
4.4 Total per-cycle gas dryer energy consumption expressed in kilowatt-hours. Calculate the total gas dryer energy consumption per cycle, Ecg, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as:Ecg = Ege + (Egg/3412 Btu/kWh) Where: Ege = the energy calculated in section 4.2 of this appendixEgg = the energy calculated in section 4.3 of this appendix
4.5 Per-cycle standby mode and off mode energy consumption. Calculate the dryer inactive mode and off mode energy consumption per cycle, ETSO, expressed in kWh per cycle and defined as:ETSO = [(PIA x SIA) + (POFF
x SOFF)] x K/283 Where: PIA = dryer inactive mode power, in watts, as measured in
section 3.6.1;POFF = dryer off mode power, in watts, as measured in section
3.6.2.If the clothes dryer has both inactive mode and off mode, SIA
and SOFF both equal 8,620 / 2 = 4,310, where 8,620
is the total inactive and off mode annual hours;If the clothes dryer has an inactive mode but no off mode, the inactive
mode annual hours, SIA, is equal to 8,620 and the
off mode annual hours, SOFF, is equal to 0;If the clothes dryer has an off mode but no inactive mode,
SIA is equal to 0 and SOFF is equal to
8,620 Where: K = 0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours; and283 = representative average number of clothes dryer cycles in a year.
4.6 Per-cycle combined total energy consumption expressed in kilowatt-hours. Calculate the per-cycle combined total energy consumption, ECC, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined for an electric clothes dryer as:ECC = Ece + ETSO Where: Ece = the energy calculated in section 4.1 of this appendix,
andETSO = the energy calculated in section 4.5 of this appendix,
and defined for a gas clothes dryer as:ECC = Ecg + ETSO Where: Ecg = the energy calculated in section 4.4 of this appendix,
andETSO = the energy calculated in section 4.5 of this appendix.
4.7 Energy Factor in pounds per kilowatt-hour. Calculate the energy factor, EF, expressed in pounds per kilowatt-hour and defined for an electric clothes dryer as:EF = Wbonedry/Ece Where: Wbonedry = the bone dry test load weight recorded in section
3.4.1 of this appendix, andEce = the energy calculated in section 4.1 of this appendix,
and and defined for a gas clothes dryer as:EF = Wbonedry/Ecg Where: Wbonedry = the bone dry test load weight recorded in section
3.4.1 of this appendix, andEcg = the energy calculated in section 4.4 of this appendix,
4.8 Combined Energy Factor in pounds per kilowatt-hour. Calculate the combined energy factor, CEF, expressed in pounds per kilowatt-hour and defined as:CEF = Wbonedry/ECC Where: Wbonedry = the bone dry test load weight recorded in section
3.4.1 of this appendix, andECC = the energy calculated in section 4.6 of this appendix. [78 FR 49647, Aug. 14, 2013]
Sec. Appendix E to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Water Heaters
1. Definitions
1.1 Cut-in means the time when or water temperature at which a water heater control or thermostat acts to increase the energy or fuel input to the heating elements, compressor, or burner.
1.2 Cut-out means the time when or water temperature at which a water heater control or thermostat acts to reduce to a minimum the energy or fuel input to the heating elements, compressor, or burner.
1.3 Design Power Rating means the nominal power rating that a water heater manufacturer assigns to a particular design of water heater, expressed in kilowatts or Btu (kJ) per hour as appropriate.
1.4 Energy Factor means a measure of water heater overall efficiency.
1.5 First-Hour Rating means an estimate of the maximum volume of ``hot'' water that a storage-type water heater can supply within an hour that begins with the water heater fully heated (i.e., with all thermostats satisfied). It is a function of both the storage volume and the recovery rate.
1.6 Heat Trap means a device which can be integrally connected or independently attached to the hot and/or cold water pipe connections of a water heater such that the device will develop a thermal or mechanical seal to minimize the recirculation of water due to thermal convection between the water heater tank and its connecting pipes.
1.7 Instantaneous Water Heaters
1.7.1 Electric Instantaneous Water Heater Reserved.
1.7.2 Gas Instantaneous Water Heater means a water heater that uses gas as the energy source, initiates heating based on sensing water flow, is designed to deliver water at a controlled temperature of less than 180 [deg]F (82 [deg]C), has an input greater than 50,000 Btu/h (53 MJ/h) but less than 200,000 Btu/h (210 MJ/h), and has a manufacturer's specified storage capacity of less than 2 gallons (7.6 liters). The unit may use a fixed or variable burner input.
1.8 Maximum gpm (L/min) Rating means the maximum gallons per minute (liters per minute) of hot water that can be supplied by an instantaneous water heater while maintaining a nominal temperature rise of 77 [deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) during steady state operation.
1.9 Rated Storage Volume means the water storage capacity of a water heater, in gallons (liters), as specified by the manufacturer.
1.10 Recovery Efficiency means the ratio of energy delivered to the water to the energy content of the fuel consumed by the water heater.
1.11 Standby means the time during which water is not being withdrawn from the water heater. There are two standby time intervals used within this test procedure: [tau]stby,1 represents the elapsed time between the time at which the maximum mean tank temperature is observed after the sixth draw and subsequent recovery and the end of the 24-hour test; [tau]stby,2 represents the total time during the 24-hour simulated use test when water is not being withdrawn from the water heater.
1.12 Storage-type Water Heaters
1.12.1 Electric Storage-type Water Heater means a water heater that uses electricity as the energy source, is designed to heat and store water at a thermostatically controlled temperature of less than 180 [deg]F (82 [deg]C), has a nominal input of 12 kilowatts (40,956 Btu/h) or less, and has a rated storage capacity of not less than 20 gallons (76 liters) nor more than 120 gallons (450 liters).
1.12.2 Gas Storage-type Water Heater means a water heater that uses gas as the energy source, is designed to heat and store water at a thermostatically controlled temperature of less than 180 [deg]F (82 [deg]C), has a nominal input of 75,000 Btu (79 MJ) per hour or less, and has a rated storage capacity of not less than 20 gallons (76 liters) nor more than 100 gallons (380 liters).
1.12.3 Heat Pump Water Heater means a water heater that uses electricity as the energy source, is designed to heat and store water at a thermostatically controlled temperature of less than 180 [deg]F (82 [deg]C), has a maximum current rating of 24 amperes (including the compressor and all auxiliary equipment such as fans, pumps, controls, and, if on the same circuit, any resistive elements) for an input voltage of 250 volts or less, and, if the tank is supplied, has a manufacturer's rated storage capacity of 120 gallons (450 liters) or less. Resistive elements used to provide supplemental heating may use the same circuit as the compressor if (1) an interlocking mechanism prevents concurrent compressor operation and resistive heating or (2) concurrent operation does not result in the maximum current rating of 24 amperes being exceeded. Otherwise, the resistive elements and the heat pump components must use separate circuits. A heat pump water heater may be sold by the manufacturer with or without a storage tank.
a. Heat Pump Water Heater with Storage Tank means an air-to-water heat pump sold by the manufacturer with an insulated storage tank as a packaged unit. The tank and heat pump can be an integral unit or they can be separated.
b. Heat Pump Water Heater without Storage Tank (also called Add-on Heat Pump Water Heater) means an air-to-water heat pump designed for use with a storage-type water heater or a storage tank that is not specified or supplied by the manufacturer.
1.12.4 Oil Storage-type Water Heater means a water heater that uses oil as the energy source, is designed to heat and store water at a thermostatically controlled temperature of less than 180 [deg]F (82 [deg]C), has a nominal energy input of 105,000 Btu/h (110 MJ/h) or less, and has a manufacturer's rated storage capacity of 50 gallons (190 liters) or less.
1.12.5 Storage-type Water Heater of More than 2 Gallons (7.6 Liters) and Less than 20 Gallons (76 Liters). Reserved.
1.13 ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 means the standard published in 1986 by the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc., and titled Standard Measurement Guide: Section on Temperature Measurements.
1.14 ASTM-D-2156-80 means the test standard published in 1980 by the American Society for Testing and Measurements and titled ``Smoke Density in Flue Gases from Burning Distillate Fuels, Test Method for''.
1.15 Symbol Usage The following identity relationships are provided to help clarify the symbology used throughout this procedure: Cp specific heat capacity of waterEannual annual energy consumption of a water heaterEf energy factor of a water heaterFhr first-hour rating of a storage-type water heaterFmax maximum gpm (L/min) rating of an instantaneous water heater rated at a temperature rise of 77 [deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) across the heateri a subscript to indicate an ith draw during a testMi mass of water removed during the ith draw (i=1 to 6) of the 24-hr simulated use test M*i for storage-type water heaters, mass of water removed during the ith draw (i=1 to n) during the first-hour rating testM10m for instantaneous water heaters, mass of water removed continuously during a 10-minute interval in the maximum gpm (L/min) rating testn for storage-type water heaters, total number of draws during the first-hour rating testQ total fossil fuel and/or electric energy consumed during the entire 24-hr simulated use testQd daily water heating energy consumption adjusted for net change in internal energyQda adjusted daily water heating energy consumption with adjustment for variation of tank to ambient air temperature difference from nominal valueQdm overall adjusted daily water heating energy consumption including Qda and QHWDQhr hourly standby lossesQHW daily energy consumption to heat water over the measured average temperature rise across the water heaterQHWD adjustment to daily energy consumption, Qhw, due to variation of the temperature rise across the water heater not equal to the nominal value of 77 [deg]F (42.8 [deg]C)Qr energy consumption of fossil fuel or heat pump water heaters between thermostat (or burner) cut-out prior to the first draw and cut-out following the first draw of the 24-hr simulated use testQr, max energy consumption of a modulating instantaneous water heater between cut-out (burner) prior to the first draw and cut-out following the first draw of the 24-hr simulated use testQr, min energy consumption of a modulating instantaneous water heater from immediately prior to the fourth draw to burner cut-out following the fourth draw of the 24-hr simulated use testQstby total energy consumed by the water heater during the standby time interval [tau]stby, 1Qsu total fossil fueled and/or electric energy consumed from the beginning of the first draw to the thermostat (or burner) cut-out following the completion of the sixth draw during the 24-hr simulated use testTmin for modulating instantaneous water heaters, steady state outlet water temperature at the minimum fuel input rateTT0 mean tank temperature at the beginning of the 24-hr simulated use testTT24 mean tank temperature at the end of the 24-hr simulated use testTTa, stby average ambient air temperature during standby periods of the 24-hr use testTTdel for instantaneous water heaters, average outlet water temperature during a 10-minute continuous draw interval in the maximum gpm (L/min) rating testTTdel, i average outlet water temperature during the ith draw of the 24-hr simulated use testTTin for instantaneous water heaters, average inlet water temperature during a 10-minute continuous draw interval in the maximum gpm (L/min) rating testTTin, i average inlet water temperature during the ith draw of the 24-hr simulated use testTTmax, 1 maximum measured mean tank temperature after cut-out following the first draw of the 24-hr simulated use testTTstby average storage tank temperature during the standby period [tau]stby, 2 of the 24-hr use testTTsu maximum measured mean tank temperature after cut-out following the sixth draw of the 24-hr simulated use testTTt, stby average storage tank temperature during the standby period [tau]stby, 1 of the 24-hr use testTT*del, i for storage-type water heaters, average outlet water temperature during the ith draw (i=1 to n) of the first-hour rating testT*max, i for storage-type water heaters, maximum outlet water temperature observed during the ith draw (i=1 to n) of the first-hour rating testT*min, i for storage-type water heaters, minimum outlet water temperature to terminate the ith draw during the first-hour rating testUA standby loss coefficient of a storage-type water heaterVi volume of water removed during the ith draw (i=1 to 6) of the 24-hr simulated use testV*i volume of water removed during the ith draw (i=1 to n) during the first-hour rating testV10m for instantaneous water heaters, volume of water removed continuously during a 10-minute interval in the maximum gpm (L/min) rating testVmax steady state water flow rate of an instantaneous water heater at the rated input to give a discharge temperature of 135 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C)Vmin steady state water flow rate of a modulating instantaneous water heater at the minimum input to give a discharge temperature of Tmin up to 135 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C)Vst measured storage volume of the storage tankWf weight of storage tank when completely filled with waterWt tare weight of storage tank when completely empty of waternr recovery efficiencyp density of water[tau]stby, 1 elapsed time between the time the maximum mean tank temperature is observed after the sixth draw and the end of the 24-hr simulated use test [tau]stby, 2 overall standby periods when no water is withdrawn during the 24-hr simulated use test
1.16 Tabletop water heater means a water heater in a rectangular box enclosure designed to slide into a kitchen countertop space with typical dimensions of 36 inches high, 25 inches deep and 24 inches wide.
2. Test Conditions
2.1 Installation Requirements. Tests shall be performed with the water heater and instrumentation installed in accordance with Section 4 of this appendix.
2.2 Ambient Air Temperature. The ambient air temperature shall be maintained between 65.0 [deg]F and 70.0 [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C and 21.1 [deg]C) on a continuous basis. For heat pump water heaters, the dry bulb temperature shall be maintained at 67.5 [deg]F 1 [deg]F (19.7 [deg]C 0.6 [deg]C) and, in addition, the relative humidity shall be maintained between 49% and 51%.
2.3 Supply Water Temperature. The temperature of the water being supplied to the water heater shall be maintained at 58 [deg]F 2 [deg]F (14.4 [deg]C 1.1 [deg]C) throughout the test.
2.4 Storage Tank Temperature. The average temperature of the water within the storage tank shall be set to 135 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C).
2.5 Supply Water Pressure. During the test when water is not being withdrawn, the supply pressure shall be maintained between 40 psig (275 kPa) and the maximum allowable pressure specified by the water heater manufacturer.
2.6 Electrical and/or Fossil Fuel Supply.
2.6.1 Electrical. Maintain the electrical supply voltage to within 1% of the center of the voltage range specified by the water heater and/or heat pump manufacturer.
2.6.2 Natural Gas. Maintain the supply pressure in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. If the supply pressure is not specified, maintain a supply pressure of 7-10 inches of water column (1.7-2.5 kPa). If the water heater is equipped with a gas appliance pressure regulator, the regulator outlet pressure shall be within 10% of the manufacturer's specified manifold pressure. For all tests, use natural gas having a heating value of approximately 1,025 Btu per standard cubic foot (38,190 kJ per standard cubic meter).
2.6.3 Propane Gas. Maintain the supply pressure in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. If the supply pressure is not specified, maintain a supply pressure of 11-13 inches of water column (2.7-3.2 kPa). If the water heater is equipped with a gas appliance pressure regulator, the regulator outlet pressure shall be within 10% of the manufacturer's specified manifold pressure. For all tests, use propane gas with a heating value of approximately 2,500 Btu per standard cubic foot (93,147 kJ per standard cubic meter).
2.6.4 Fuel Oil Supply. Maintain an uninterrupted supply of fuel oil. Use fuel oil having a heating value of approximately 138,700 Btu per gallon (38,660 kJ per liter).
3. Instrumentation
3.1 Pressure Measurements. Pressure-measuring instruments shall have an error no greater than the following values: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item measured Instrument accuracy Instrument precision----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Gas pressure............................ 0.1 inch 0.05 inch of
of water column (0.025 kPa). eq>0.012 kPa).Atmospheric pressure.................... 0.1 inch 0.05 inch of
of mercury column (0.34 kPa). eq>0.17 kPa).Water pressure.......................... 1.0 pounds 0.50 pounds
per square inch (6.9 kPa). eq>3.45 kPa).----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 Temperature Measurement
3.2.1 Measurement. Temperature measurements shall be made in accordance with the Standard Measurement Guide: Section on Temperature Measurements, ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86.
3.2.2 Accuracy and Precision. The accuracy and precision of the instruments, including their associated readout devices, shall be within the following limits: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item measured Instrument accuracy Instrument precision----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Air dry bulb temperature............. 0.2 0.1 [deg]F (0.06 [deg]C)
eq>0.1 [deg]C).Air wet bulb temperature............. 0.2 0.1 [deg]F (0.06 [deg]C)
eq>0.1 [deg]C).Inlet and outlet water temperatures.. 0.2 0.1 [deg]F (0.06 [deg]C)
eq>0.1 [deg]C).Storage tank temperatures............ 0.5 0.25 [deg]F (0.14 [deg]C)
eq>0.3 [deg]C).----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.3 Scale Division. In no case shall the smallest scale division of the instrument or instrument system exceed 2 times the specified precision.
3.2.4 Temperature Difference. Temperature difference between the entering and leaving water may be measured with any of the following: a. A thermopileb. Calibrated resistance thermometersc. Precision thermometersd. Calibrated thermistorse. Calibrated thermocouplesf. Quartz thermometers
3.2.5 Thermopile Construction. If a thermopile is used, it shall be made from calibrated thermocouple wire taken from a single spool. Extension wires to the recording device shall also be made from that same spool.
3.2.6 Time Constant. The time constant of the instruments used to measure the inlet and outlet water temperatures shall be no greater than 5 seconds.
3.3 Liquid Flow Rate Measurement. The accuracy of the liquid flow rate measurement, using the calibration if furnished, shall be equal to or less than 1% of the measured value in mass units per unit time.
3.4 Electric Energy. The electrical energy used shall be measured with an instrument and associated readout device that is accurate within 1% of the reading.
3.5 Fossil Fuels. The quantity of fuel used by the water heater shall be measured with an instrument and associated readout device that is accurate within 1% of the reading.
3.6 Mass Measurements. For mass measurements greater than or equal to 10 pounds (4.5 kg), a scale that is accurate within 1% of the reading shall be used to make the measurement. For mass measurements less than 10 pounds (4.5 kg), the scale shall provide a measurement that is accurate within 0.1 pound (0.045 kg).
3.7 Heating Value. The higher heating value of the natural gas, propane, or fuel oil shall be measured with an instrument and associated readout device that is accurate within 1% of the reading. The heating value of natural gas and propane must be corrected for local temperature and pressure conditions.
3.8 Time. The elapsed time measurements shall be measured with an instrument that is accurate within 0.5 seconds per hour.
3.9 Volume. Volume measurements shall be measured with an accuracy of 2% of the total volume.
4. Installation
4.1 Water Heater Mounting. A water heater designed to be freestanding shall be placed on a \3/4\ inch (2 cm) thick plywood platform supported by three 2 x 4 inch (5 cm x 10 cm) runners. If the water heater is not approved for installation on combustible flooring, suitable non-combustible material shall be placed between the water heater and the platform. Counter-top water heaters shall be placed against a simulated wall section. Wall-mounted water heaters shall be supported on a simulated wall in accordance with the manufacturer-published installation instructions. When a simulated wall is used, the recommended construction is 2 x 4 inch (5 cm x 10 cm) studs, faced with \3/4\ inch (2 cm) plywood. For heat pump water heaters that are supplied with a storage tank, the two components, if not delivered as a single package, shall be connected in accordance with the manufacturer-published installation instructions and the overall system shall be placed on the above-described plywood platform. If installation instructions are not provided by the heat pump manufacturer, uninsulated 8 foot (2.4 m) long connecting hoses having an inside diameter of \5/8\ inch (1.6 cm) shall be used to connect the storage tank and the heat pump water heater. With the exception of using the storage tank described in 4.10, the same requirements shall apply for heat pump water heaters that are supplied without a storage tank from the manufacturer. The testing of the water heater shall occur in an area that is protected from drafts.
4.2 Water Supply. Connect the water heater to a water supply capable of delivering water at conditions as specified in Sections 2.3 and 2.5 of this appendix.
4.3 Water Inlet and Outlet Configuration. For freestanding water heaters that are taller than 36 inches (91.4 cm), inlet and outlet piping connections shall be configured in a manner consistent with Figures 1 and 2. Inlet and outlet piping connections for wall-mounted water heaters shall be consistent with Figure 3. For freestanding water heaters that are 36 inches or less in height and not supplied as part of a counter-top enclosure (commonly referred to as an under-the-counter model), inlet and outlet piping shall be installed in a manner consistent with Figures 4, 5, and 6. For water heaters that are supplied with a counter-top enclosure, inlet and outlet piping shall be made in a manner consistent with Figures 7A and 7B, respectively. The vertical piping noted in Figures 7A and 7B shall be located (whether inside the enclosure or along the outside in a recessed channel) in accordance with the manufacturer-published installation instructions.
All dimensions noted in Figures 1 through 7 shall be achieved. All piping between the water heater and the inlet and outlet temperature sensors, noted as TIN and TOUT in the figures, shall be Type ``L'' hard copper having the same diameter as the connections on the water heater. Unions may be used to facilitate installation and removal of the piping arrangements. A pressure gauge and diaphragm expansion tank shall be installed in the supply water piping at a location upstream of the inlet temperature sensor. An appropriately rated pressure and temperature relief valve shall be installed on all water heaters at the port specified by the manufacturer. Discharge piping for the relief valve shall be non-metallic. If heat traps, piping insulation, or pressure relief valve insulation are supplied with the water heater, they shall be installed for testing. Except when using a simulated wall, clearance shall be provided such that none of the piping contacts other surfaces in the test room.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20JY98.005 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20JY98.006 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20JY98.007 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20JY98.008
4.4 Fuel and/or Electrical Power and Energy Consumption. Install one or more instruments which measure, as appropriate, the quantity and rate of electrical energy and/or fossil fuel consumption in accordance with Section 3. For heat pump water heaters that use supplemental resistive heating, the electrical energy supplied to the resistive element(s) shall be metered separately from the electrical energy supplied to the entire appliance or to the remaining components (e.g., compressor, fans, pumps, controls).
4.5 Internal Storage Tank Temperature Measurements. Install six temperature measurement sensors inside the water heater tank with a vertical distance of at least 4 inches (100 mm) between successive sensors. A temperature sensor shall be positioned at the vertical midpoint of each of the six equal volume nodes within the tank. Nodes designate the equal volumes used to evenly partition the total volume of the tank. As much as is possible, the temperature sensor should be positioned away from any heating elements, anodic protective devices, tank walls, and flue pipe walls. If the tank cannot accommodate six temperature sensors and meet the installation requirements specified above, install the maximum number of sensors which comply with the installation requirements. The temperature sensors shall be installed either through (1) the anodic device opening; (2) the relief valve opening; or (3) the hot water outlet. If installed through the relief valve opening or the hot water outlet, a tee fitting or outlet piping, as applicable, shall be installed as close as possible to its original location. If the relief valve temperature sensor is relocated, and it no longer extends into the top of the tank, a substitute relief valve that has a sensing element that can reach into the tank shall be installed. If the hot water outlet includes a heat trap, the heat trap shall be installed on top of the tee fitting. Added fittings shall be covered with thermal insulation having an R value between 4 and 8 h/ft2/ [deg]F/Btu (0.7 and 1.4 m2/ [deg]C/W).
4.6 Ambient Air Temperature Measurement. Install an ambient air temperature sensor at the vertical mid-point of the water heater and approximately 2 feet (610 mm) from the surface of the water heater. The sensor shall be shielded against radiation.
4.7 Inlet and Outlet Water Temperature Measurements. Install temperature sensors in the cold-water inlet pipe and hot-water outlet pipe as shown in Figures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7a and 7b, as applicable.
4.8 Flow Control. A valve shall be installed to provide flow as specified in sections 5.1.4.1 for storage tank water heaters and 5.2.1 for instantaneous water heaters.
4.9 Flue Requirements.
4.9.1 Gas-Fired Water Heaters. Establish a natural draft in the following manner. For gas-fired water heaters with a vertically discharging draft hood outlet, a 5-foot (1.5-meter) vertical vent pipe extension with a diameter equal to the largest flue collar size of the draft hood shall be connected to the draft hood outlet. For gas-fired water heaters with a horizontally discharging draft hood outlet, a 90-degree elbow with a diameter equal to the largest flue collar size of the draft hood shall be connected to the draft hood outlet. A 5-foot (1.5-meter) length of vent pipe shall be connected to the elbow and oriented to discharge vertically upward. Direct vent gas-fired water heaters shall be installed with venting equipment specified in the manufacturer's instructions using the minimum vertical and horizontal lengths of vent pipe recommended by the manufacturer.
4.9.2 Oil-Fired Water Heaters. Establish a draft at the flue collar at the value specified in the manufacturer's instructions. Establish the draft by using a sufficient length of vent pipe connected to the water heater flue outlet, and directed vertically upward. For an oil-fired water heater with a horizontally discharging draft hood outlet, a 90-degree elbow with a diameter equal to the largest flue collar size of the draft hood shall be connected to the draft hood outlet. A length of vent pipe sufficient to establish the draft shall be connected to the elbow fitting and oriented to discharge vertically upward. Direct-vent oil-fired water heaters should be installed with venting equipment as specified in the manufacturer's instructions, using the minimum vertical and horizontal lengths of vent pipe recommended by the manufacturer.
4.10 Heat Pump Water Heater Storage Tank. The tank to be used for testing a heat pump water heater without a tank supplied by the manufacturer (see Section 1.12.3b) shall be an electric storage-type water heater having a measured volume of 47.0 gallons 1.0 gallon (178 liters 3.8 liters); two 4.5 kW heating elements controlled in such a manner as to prevent both elements from operating simultaneously; and an energy factor greater than or equal to the minimum energy conservation standard (as determined in accordance with Section 6.1.7) and less than or equal to the sum of the minimum energy conservation standard and 0.02.
5. Test Procedures
5.1 Storage-type Water Heaters, Including Heat Pump Water Heaters.
5.1.1 Determination of Storage Tank Volume. Determine the storage capacity, Vst, of the water heater under test, in gallons (liters), by subtracting the tare weight--measured while the tank is empty--from the gross weight of the storage tank when completely filled with water (with all air eliminated and line pressure applied as described in section 2.5) and dividing the resulting net weight by the density of water at the measured temperature.
5.1.2 Setting the Thermostat.
5.1.2.1 Single Thermostat Tanks. Starting with a tank at the supply water temperature, initiate normal operation of the water heater. After cut-out, determine the mean tank temperature every minute until the maximum value is observed. Determine whether this maximum value for the mean tank temperature is within the range of 135 [deg]F5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C). If not, turn off the water heater, adjust the thermostat, drain and refill the tank with supply water. Then, once again, initiate normal operation of the water heater, and determine the maximum mean tank temperature after cut-out. Repeat this sequence until the maximum mean tank temperature after cut-out is 135 [deg]F5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C).
5.1.2.2 Tanks with Two or More Thermostats. Follow the same sequence as for a single thermostat tank, i.e. start at the supply water temperature, operate normally until cutout. Determine if the thermostat that controls the uppermost heating element yields a maximum water temperature of 135 [deg]F5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C), as measured by the in-tank sensors that are positioned above the uppermost heating element. If the tank temperature at the thermostat is not within 135 [deg]F5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C), turn off the water heater, adjust the thermostat, drain and refill the tank with supply water. The thermostat that controls the heating element positioned next highest in the tank shall then be set to yield a maximum water temperature of 135 [deg]F5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C). This process shall be repeated until the thermostat controlling the lowest element is correctly adjusted. When adjusting the thermostat that controls the lowest element, the maximum mean tank temperature after cut-out, as determined using all the in-tank sensors, shall be 135 [deg]F5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C). When adjusting all other thermostats, use only the in-tank temperature sensors positioned above the heating element in question to evaluate the maximum water temperature after cut-out.
For heat pump water heaters that control an auxiliary resistive element, the thermostat shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
5.1.3 Power Input Determination. For all water heaters except electric types having immersed heating elements, initiate normal operation and determine the power input, P, to the main burners (including pilot light power, if any) after 15 minutes of operation. If the water heater is equipped with a gas appliance pressure regulator, the regulator outlet pressure shall be set within 10% of that recommended by the manufacturer. For oil-fired water heaters the fuel pump pressure shall be within 10% of the manufacturer's specified pump pressure. All burners shall be adjusted to achieve an hourly Btu (kJ) rating that is within 2% of the value specified by the manufacturer. For an oil-fired water heater, adjust the burner to give a CO2 reading recommended by the manufacturer and an hourly Btu (kJ) rating that is within 2% of that specified by the manufacturer. Smoke in the flue may not exceed No. 1 smoke as measured by the procedure in ASTM-D-2156-80.
5.1.4 First-Hour Rating Test.
5.1.4.1 General. During hot water draws, remove water at a rate of 3.00.25 gallons per minute (11.40.95 liters per minute). Collect the water in a container that is large enough to hold the volume removed during an individual draw and suitable for weighing at the termination of each draw. Alternatively, a water meter may be used to directly measure the water volume(s) withdrawn.
5.1.4.2 Draw Initiation Criteria. Begin the first-hour rating test by imposing a draw on the storage-type water heater. After completion of this first draw, initiate successive draws based on the following criteria. For gas-and oil-fired water heaters, initiate successive draws when the thermostat acts to reduce the supply of fuel to the main burner. For electric water heaters having a single element or multiple elements that all operate simultaneously, initiate successive draws when the thermostat acts to reduce the electrical input supplied to the element(s). For electric water heaters having two or more elements that do not operate simultaneously, initiate successive draws when the applicable thermostat acts to reduce the electrical input to the element located vertically highest in the storage tank. For heat pump waters heaters that do not use supplemental resistive heating, initiate successive draws immediately after the electrical input to the compressor is reduced by the action of the water heater's thermostat. For heat pump waters heaters that use supplemental resistive heating, initiate successive draws immediately after the electrical input to the compressor or the uppermost resistive element is reduced by the action of the applicable water heater thermostat. This draw initiation criterion for heat pump water heaters that use supplemental resistive heating, however, shall only apply when the water located above the thermostat at cut-out is heated to 135 [deg]F5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C).
5.1.4.3 Test Sequence. Establish normal water heater operation. If the water heater is not presently operating, initiate a draw. The draw may be terminated anytime after cut-in occurs. After cut-out occurs (i.e., all thermostats are satisfied), monitor the internal storage tank temperature sensors described in section 4.5 every minute.
Initiate a draw after a maximum mean tank temperature has been observed following cut-out. Record the time when the draw is initiated and designate it as an elapsed time of zero ([tau]* = 0). (The superscript * is used to denote variables pertaining to the first-hour rating test.) Record the outlet water temperature beginning 15 seconds after the draw is initiated and at 5-second intervals thereafter until the draw is terminated. Determine the maximum outlet temperature that occurs during this first draw and record it as T*max, 1. For the duration of this first draw and all successive draws, in addition, monitor the inlet temperature to the water heater to ensure that the required 58 [deg]F2 [deg]F (14.4 [deg]C1.1 [deg]C) test condition is met. Terminate the hot water draw when the outlet temperature decreases to T*max,1-25 [deg]F (T*max,1-13.9 [deg]C). Record this temperature as T*min,1. Following draw termination, determine the average outlet water temperature and the mass or volume removed during this first draw and record them as TT*del,1 and M*1 or V*1, respectively.
Initiate a second and, if applicable, successive draw each time the applicable draw initiation criteria described in section 5.1.4.2 are satisfied. As required for the first draw, record the outlet water temperature 15 seconds after initiating each draw and at 5-second intervals thereafter until the draw is terminated. Determine the maximum outlet temperature that occurs during each draw and record it as T*max, i, where the subscript i refers to the draw number. Terminate each hot water draw when the outlet temperature decreases to T*max, i-25 [deg]F (T*max, i-13.9 [deg]C). Record this temperature as T*min, i. Calculate and record the average outlet temperature and the mass or volume removed during each draw (TT*del, i and M*i or V*i, respectively). Continue this sequence of draw and recovery until one hour has elapsed, then shut off the electrical power and/or fuel supplied to the water heater.
If a draw is occurring at an elapsed time of one hour, continue this draw until the outlet temperature decreases to T*max, n-25 [deg]F (T*max, n -13.9 [deg]C), at which time the draw shall be immediately terminated. (The subscript n shall be used to denote quantities associated with the final draw.) If a draw is not occurring at an elapsed time of one hour, a final draw shall be imposed at one hour. This draw shall be immediately terminated when the outlet temperature first indicates a value less than or equal to the cut-off temperature used for the previous draw (T*min, n-1). For cases where the outlet temperature is close to T*min, n-1, the final draw shall proceed for a minimum of 30 seconds. If an outlet temperature greater than T*min, n-1 is not measured within 30 seconds, the draw shall be immediately terminated and zero additional credit shall be given towards first-hour rating (i.e., M*n = 0 or V*n = 0). After the final draw is terminated, calculate and record the average outlet temperature and the mass or volume removed during the draw (TT*del, n and M*n or V*n, respectively).
5.1.5 24-Hour Simulated Use Test. During the simulated use test, a total of 64.3 1.0 gallons (2433.8 liters) shall be removed. This value is referred to as the daily hot water usage in the following text.
With the water heater turned off, fill the water heater with supply water and apply pressure as described in section 2.5. Turn on the water heater and associated heat pump unit, if present. After the cut-out occurs, the water heater may be operated for up to three cycles of drawing until cut-in, and then operating until cut-out, prior to the start of the test.
At this time, record the mean tank temperature (TTo), and the electrical and/or fuel measurement readings, as appropriate. Begin the 24-hour simulated use test by withdrawing a volume from the water heater that equals one-sixth of the daily hot water usage. Record the time when this first draw is initiated and assign it as the test elapsed time ([tau]) of zero (0). Record the average storage tank and ambient temperature every 15 minutes throughout the 24-hour simulated use test unless a recovery or a draw is occurring. At elapsed time intervals of one, two, three, four, and five hours from [tau] = 0, initiate additional draws, removing an amount of water equivalent to one-sixth of the daily hot water usage with the maximum allowable deviation for any single draw being 0.5 gallons (1.9 liters). The quantity of water withdrawn during the sixth draw shall be increased or decreased as necessary such that the total volume of water withdrawn equals 64.3 gallons 1.0 gallon (243.4 liters 3.8 liters).
All draws during the simulated use test shall be made at flow rates of 3.0 gallons 0.25 gallons per minute (11.4 liters 0.95 liters per minute). Measurements of the inlet and outlet temperatures shall be made 15 seconds after the draw is initiated and at every subsequent 5-second interval throughout the duration of each draw. The arithmetic mean of the hot water discharge temperature and the cold water inlet temperature shall be determined for each draw (TTdel, i and TTin, i). Determine and record the net mass or volume removed (Mi or Vi), as appropriate, after each draw.
At the end of the recovery period following the first draw, record the maximum mean tank temperature observed after cut-out, TTmax, 1, and the energy consumed by an electric resistance, gas or oil-fired water heater, Qr. For heat pump water heaters, the total electrical energy consumed during the first recovery by the heat pump (including compressor, fan, controls, pump, etc.) and, if applicable, by the resistive element(s) shall be recorded as Qr.
At the end of the recovery period that follows the sixth draw, determine and record the total electrical energy and/or fossil fuel consumed since the beginning of the test, Qsu, In preparation for determining the energy consumed during standby, record the reading given on the electrical energy (watt-hour) meter, the gas meter, and/or the scale used to determine oil consumption, as appropriate. Record the maximum value of the mean tank temperature after cut-out as TTsu. Except as noted below, allow the water heater to remain in the standby mode until 24 hours have elapsed from the start of the test (i.e., since = 0). Prevent the water heater from beginning a recovery cycle during the last hour of the test by turning off the electric power to the electrical heating elements and heat pump, if present, or by turning down the fuel supply to the main burner at an elapsed time of 23 hours. If a recovery is taking place at an elapsed time of 23 hours, wait until the recovery is complete before reducing the electrical and/or fuel supply to the water heater. At 24 hours, record the mean tank temperature, TT24, and the electric and/or fuel instrument readings. Determine the total fossil fuel or electrical energy consumption, as appropriate, for the entire 24-hour simulated use test, Q. Record the time interval between the time at which the maximum mean tank temperature is observed after the sixth draw and the end of the 24-hour test as stby, 1. Record the time during which water is not being withdrawn from the water heater during the entire 24-hour period as stby, 2.
5.2 Instantaneous Gas and Electric Water Heaters
5.2.1 Setting the Outlet Discharge Temperature. Initiate normal operation of the water heater at the full input rating for electric instantaneous water heaters and at the maximum firing rate specified by the manufacturer for gas instantaneous water heaters. Monitor the discharge water temperature and set to a value of 135 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C) in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. If the water heater is not capable of providing this discharge temperature when the flow rate is 3.0 gallons 0.25 gallons per minute (11.4 liters 0.95 liters per minute), then adjust the flow rate as necessary to achieve the specified discharge water temperature. Record the corresponding flow rate as Vmax.
5.2.2 Additional Requirements for Variable Input Instantaneous Gas Water Heaters. If the instantaneous water heater incorporates a controller that permits operation at a reduced input rate, adjust the flow rate as necessary to achieve a discharge water temperature of 135 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C) while maintaining the minimum input rate. Record the corresponding flow rate as Vmin. If an outlet temperature of 135 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C) cannot be achieved at the minimum flow rate permitted by the instantaneous water heater, record the flow rate as Vmin and the corresponding outlet temperature as Tmin.
5.2.3 Maximum GPM Rating Test for Instantaneous Water Heaters. Establish normal water heater operation at the full input rate for electric instantaneous water heaters and at the maximum firing rate for gas instantaneous water heaters with the discharge water temperature set in accordance with Section 5.2.1. During the 10-minute test, either collect the withdrawn water for later measurement of the total mass removed, or alternatively, use a water meter to directly measure the water volume removed.
After recording the scale or water meter reading, initiate water flow throughout the water heater, record the inlet and outlet water temperatures beginning 15 seconds after the start of the test and at subsequent 5-second intervals throughout the duration of the test. At the end of 10 minutes, turn off the water. Determine the mass of water collected, M10m, in pounds (kilograms), or the volume of water, V10m, in gallons (liters).
5.2.4 24-hour Simulated Use Test for Gas Instantaneous Water Heaters.
5.2.4.1 Fixed Input Instantaneous Water Heaters. Establish normal operation with the discharge water temperature and flow rate set to values of 135 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C) and Vmax per Section 5.2.1, respectively. With no draw occurring, record the reading given by the gas meter and/or the electrical energy meter as appropriate. Begin the 24-hour simulated use test by drawing an amount of water out of the water heater equivalent to one-sixth of the daily hot water usage. Record the time when this first draw is initiated and designate it as an elapsed time, [tau], of 0. At elapsed time intervals of one, two, three, four, and five hours from [tau] = 0, initiate additional draws, removing an amount of water equivalent to one-sixth of the daily hot water usage, with the maximum allowable deviation for any single draw being 0.5 gallons (1.9 liters). The quantity of water drawn during the sixth draw shall be increased or decreased as necessary such that the total volume of water withdrawn equals 64.3 gallons 1.0 gallons (243.4 liters 3.8 liters).
Measurements of the inlet and outlet water temperatures shall be made 15 seconds after the draw is initiated and at every 5-second interval thereafter throughout the duration of the draw. The arithmetic mean of the hot water discharge temperature and the cold water inlet temperature shall be determined for each draw. Record the scale used to measure the mass of the withdrawn water or the water meter reading, as appropriate, after each draw. At the end of the recovery period following the first draw, determine and record the fossil fuel or electrical energy consumed, Qr. Following the sixth draw and subsequent recovery, allow the water heater to remain in the standby mode until exactly 24 hours have elapsed since the start of the test (i.e., since [tau] = 0). At 24 hours, record the reading given by the gas meter and/or the electrical energy meter as appropriate. Determine the fossil fuel or electrical energy consumed during the entire 24-hour simulated use test and designate the quantity as Q.
5.2.4.2 Variable Input Instantaneous Water Heaters. If the instantaneous water heater incorporates a controller that permits continuous operation at a reduced input rate, the first three draws shall be conducted using the maximum flow rate, Vmax, while removing an amount of water equivalent to one-sixth of the daily hot water usage, with the maximum allowable deviation for any one of the three draws being 0.5 gallons (1.9 liters). The second three draws shall be conducted at Vmin. If an outlet temperature of 135 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C) could not be achieved at the minimum flow rate permitted by the instantaneous water heater, the last three draws should be lengthened such that the volume removed is: [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.001 or[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.002 where Tmin is the outlet water temperature at the flow rate
Vmin as determined in Section 5.2.1, and where the
maximum allowable variation for any one of the three draws is
0.5 gallons (1.9 liters). The quantity
of water withdrawn during the sixth draw shall be increased or
decreased as necessary such that the total volume of water
withdrawn equals (32.15 + 3/V4,5,6)
1.0 gallons ((121.7 + 3 / V4,5,6) 3.8 liters).
Measurements of the inlet and outlet water temperatures shall be made 5 seconds after a draw is initiated and at every 5-second interval thereafter throughout the duration of the draw. Determine the arithmetic mean of the hot water discharge temperature and the cold water inlet temperature for each draw. Record the scale used to measure the mass of the withdrawn water or the water meter reading, as appropriate, after each draw. At the end of the recovery period following the first draw, determine and record the fossil fuel or electrical energy consumed, Qr, max. Likewise, record the reading of the meter used to measure fossil fuel or electrical energy consumption prior to the fourth draw and at the end of the recovery period following the fourth draw, and designate the difference as Qr,min. Following the sixth draw and subsequent recovery, allow the water heater to remain in the standby mode until exactly 24 hours have elapsed since the start of the test (i.e., since [tau]=0). At 24 hours, record the reading given by the gas meter and/or the electrical energy meter, as appropriate. Determine the fossil fuel or electrical energy consumed during the entire 24-hour simulated use test and designate the quantity as Q.
6. Computations
6.1 Storage Tank and Heat Pump Water Heaters.
6.1.1 Storage Tank Capacity. The storage tank capacity is computed using the following:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.003 Where: Vst = the storage capacity of the water heater, gal (L).Wf = the weight of the storage tank when completely filled
with water, lb (kg).Wt = the (tare) weight of the storage tank when completely
empty, lb (kg).[rho] = the density of water used to fill the tank measured at the
temperature of the water, lb/gal (kg/L).
6.1.2. First-Hour Rating Computation. For the case in which the final draw is initiated at or prior to an elapsed time of one hour, the first-hour rating shall be computed using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.004 Where: n = the number of draws that are completed during the first-hour rating
test.V*i = the volume of water removed during the ith draw of the
first-hour rating test, gal (L)or, if the mass of water is being measured,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.005 Where: M*i = the mass of water removed during the ith draw of the
first-hour rating test, lb (kg).[rho] = the water density corresponding to the average outlet
temperature measured during the ith draw,
(TT*del, I), lb/gal (kg/L).
For the case in which a draw is not in progress at the elapsed time of one hour and a final draw is imposed at the elapsed time of one hour, the first-hour rating shall be calculated using[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.006 where n and V*i are the same quantities as defined above, and V*n = the volume of water drawn during the nth (final) draw
of the first-hour rating test, gal (L)TT*del,n-1 = the average water outlet temperature measured
during the (n-1)th draw of the first-hour rating test, [deg]F
([deg]C).TT*del,n = the average water outlet temperature measured
during the nth (final) draw of the first-hour rating test,
[deg]F ([deg]C). TT*min,n-1 = the minimum water outlet temperature measured
during the (n-1)th draw of the first-hour rating test, [deg]F
([deg]C).
6.1.3 Recovery Efficiency. The recovery efficiency for gas, oil, and heat pump storage-type water heaters is computed as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.007 Where: M1 = total mass removed during the first draw of the 24-hour
simulated use test, lb (kg), or, if the volume of water is
being measured,M1 = V1 [rho]1 Where: V1 = total volume removed during the first draw of the 24-
hour simulated use test, gal (L).[rho]1 = density of the water at the water temperature
measured at the point where the flow volume is measured, lb/
gal (kg/L).Cp1 = specific heat of the withdrawn water,
(TTdel,1 + TTin,1) 2, Btu/lb [deg]F (kJ/
kg [deg]C).TTdel,1 = average water outlet temperature measured during
the first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F
([deg]C).TTin,1 = average water inlet temperature measured during the
first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).Vst = as defined in section 6.1.1.[rho]2 = density of stored hot water, (TTmax,1 +
TTo)/2, lb/gal (kg/L).Cp2 = specific heat of stored hot water evaluated at
(TTmax,1 + TTo) / 2, Btu/lb [deg]F (kJ/
kg2 [deg]C).TTmax,1 = maximum mean tank temperature recorded after cut-
out following the first draw of the 24-hour simulated use
test, [deg]F ([deg]C).TTo = maximum mean tank temperature recorded prior to the
first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).Qr = the total energy used by the water heater between cut-
out prior to the first draw and cut-out following the first
draw, including auxiliary energy such as pilot lights, pumps,
fans, etc., Btu (kJ). (Electrical auxiliary energy shall be
converted to thermal energy using the following conversion: 1
kWh = 3,412 Btu.)
The recovery efficiency for electric water heaters with immersed heating elements is assumed to be 98%.
6.1.4 Hourly Standby Losses. The hourly standby energy losses are computed as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.008 Where:
Qhr = the hourly standby energy losses of the water heater, Btu/h (kJ/h). Qstby = the total energy consumed by the water heater between
the time at which the maximum mean tank temperature is
observed after the sixth draw and the end of the 24-hour test
period, Btu (kJ).Vst = as defined in section 6.1.1.[rho] = density of stored hot water, (TT24 + TTsu)
/ 2, lb/gal (kg/L).Cp = specific heat of the stored water, (TT24 +
TTsu) / 2, Btu/lb/[deg]F (kJ/kg/[deg]C).TT24 = the mean tank temperature at the end of the 24-hour
simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).TTsu = the maximum mean tank temperature observed after the
sixth draw, [deg]F ([deg]C).[eta]r = as defined in section 6.1.3.[tau]stby, 1 = elapsed time between the time at which the
maximum mean tank temperature is observed after the sixth draw
and the end of the 24-hour simulated use test, h.
The standby heat loss coefficient for the tank is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.009
Where: UA = standby heat loss coefficient of the storage tank, Btu/h/[deg]F
(kJ/h/[deg]C).Qhr = as defined in this section.TTt, stby,1 = overall average storage tank temperature
between the time when the maximum mean tank temperature is
observed after the sixth draw and the end of the 24-hour
simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).TTa, stby,1 = overall average ambient temperature between the
time when the maximum mean tank temperature is observed after
the sixth draw and the end of the 24-hour simulated use test,
[deg]F ([deg]C).
6.1.5 Daily Water Heating Energy Consumption. The daily water heating energy consumption, Qd, is computed as: [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.010 Where: Q = total energy used by the water heater during the 24-hour simulated
use test including auxiliary energy such as pilot lights,
pumps, fans, etc., Btu (kJ). (Electrical auxiliary energy
shall be converted to thermal energy using the following
conversion: 1 kWh = 3,412 Btu.)Vst = as defined in section 6.1.1.[rho]= density of the stored hot water, (TT24 +
TTo) / 2, lb/gal (kg/L).Cp = specific heat of the stored water, (TT24 +
TTo) / 2, Btu/lb/[deg]F (kJ/kg/[deg]C).TT24 = mean tank temperature at the end of the 24-hour
simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).TTo = mean tank temperature at the beginning of the 24-hour
simulated use test, recorded one minute before the first draw
is initiated, [deg]F ([deg]C).[eta]r = as defined in section 6.1.3.
6.1.6 Adjusted Daily Water Heating Energy Consumption. The adjusted daily water heating energy consumption, Qda, takes into account that the temperature difference between the storage tank and surrounding ambient air may not be the nominal value of 67.5 [deg]F (135 [deg]F-67.5 [deg]F) or 37.5 [deg]C (57.2 [deg]C-19.7 [deg]C) due to the 10 [deg]F (5.6 [deg]C) allowable variation in storage tank temperature, 135 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C), and the 5 [deg]F (2.8 [deg]C) allowable variation in surrounding ambient temperature 65 [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C) to 70 [deg]F (21.1 [deg]C). The adjusted daily water heating energy consumption is computed as: Qda = QD - [(TTstby, 2 - TTa, stby,2) - (135 [deg]F - 67.5 [deg]F)]
UA[tau]stby, 2or Qda = QD - [(TTstby, 2 - TTa, stby, 2) - (57.2 [deg]C - 19.7 [deg]C)]
UA[tau]stby, 2Where: Qda = the adjusted daily water heating energy consumption,
Btu (kJ).Qd = as defined in section 6.1.5.TTstby, 2 = the mean tank temperature during the total
standby portion, [tau]stby, 2, of the 24-hour test,
[deg]F ([deg]C).TTa, stby, 2 = the average ambient temperature during the
total standby portion, [tau]stby, 2, of the 24-hour test,
[deg]F ([deg]C).UA = as defined in section 6.1.4.[tau]stby, 2 = the number of hours during the 24-hour
simulated test when water is not being withdrawn from the
water heater.
A modification is also needed to take into account that the temperature difference between the outlet water temperature and supply water temperature may not be equivalent to the nominal value of 77 [deg]F (135 [deg]F-58 [deg]F) or 42.8 [deg]C (57.2 [deg]C-14.4 [deg]C). The following equations adjust the experimental data to a nominal 77 [deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) temperature rise.
The energy used to heat water, Btu/day (kJ/day), may be computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.011
Where: Mi = the mass withdrawn for the ith draw (i = 1 to 6), lb
(kg).Cpi = the specific heat of the water of the ith draw, Btu/lb/
[deg]F (kJ/kg/ [deg]C).TTdel, i = the average water outlet temperature measured
during the ith draw (i=1 to 6), [deg]F ([deg]C).TTin, i = the average water inlet temperature measured during
the ith draw (i=1 to 6), [deg]F ([deg]C).[eta]r = as defined in section 6.1.3.
The energy required to heat the same quantity of water over a 77 [deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) temperature rise, Btu/day (kJ/day), is:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.012
The difference between these two values is: QHWD = QHW, 77[deg]-F -QHWor QHWD = QHW,42.8[deg]-F -QHWwhich must be added to the adjusted daily water heating energy consumption value. Thus, the daily energy consumption value which takes into account that the temperature difference between the storage tank and ambient temperature may not be 67.5 [deg]F (37.5 [deg]C) and that the temperature rise across the storage tank may not be 77 [deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) is: Qdm = Qda + QHWD
6.1.7 Energy Factor. The energy factor, Ef, is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.013
or[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.014 Where: Qdm = the modified daily water heating energy consumption as
computed in accordance with section 6.1.6, Btu (kJ).Mi = the mass withdrawn for the ith draw (i = 1 to 6), lb
(kg).Cpi = the specific heat of the water of the ith draw, Btu/lb
[deg]F (kJ/kg [deg]C).
6.1.8 Annual Energy Consumption. The annual energy consumption for storage-type and heat pump water heaters is computed as: Eannual = 365 x Qdm Where: Qdm = the modified daily water heating energy consumption as
computed in accordance with section 6.1.6, Btu (kJ).365 = the number of days in a year.
6.2 Instantaneous Water Heaters.
6.2.1 Maximum GPM (L/min) Rating Computation. Compute the maximum gpm (L/min) rating as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.015 which may be expressed as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.016 Where: M10m = the mass of water collected during the 10-minute test,
lb (kg).TTdel = the average delivery temperature, [deg]F ([deg]C).TTin = the average inlet temperature, [deg]F ([deg]C).[rho] = the density of water at the average delivery temperature, lb/gal
(kg/L).
If a water meter is used the maximum gpm (L/min) rating is computed as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.017 Where: V10m = the volume of water measured during the 10-minute
test, gal (L).TTdel = as defined in this section.TTin = as defined in this section.
6.2.2 Recovery Efficiency
6.2.2.1 Fixed Input Instantaneous Water Heaters. The recovery efficiency is computed as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.018 Where: M1 = total mass removed during the first draw of the 24-hour
simulated use test, lb (kg), or, if the volume of water is
being measured,M1 = V1. [rho] Where: V1 = total volume removed during the first draw of the 24-
hour simulated use test, gal (L).[rho]= density of the water at the water temperature measured at the
point where the flow volume is measured, lb/gal (kg/L).Cp1 = specific heat of the withdrawn water,
(TTdel,1 + Tin,1) / 2, Btu/lb [deg]F
(kJ/kg [deg]C).TTdel, 1 = average water outlet temperature measured during
the first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F
([deg]C).TTin, 1 = average water inlet temperature measured during the
first draw of the 24-hour simulated use test, [deg]F ([deg]C).Qr = the total energy used by the water heater between cut-
out prior to the first draw and cut-out following the first
draw, including auxiliary energy such as pilot lights, pumps,
fans, etc., Btu (kJ). (Electrical auxiliary energy shall be
converted to thermal energy using the following conversion: 1
kWh = 3,412 Btu.)
6.2.2.2 Variable Input Instantaneous Water Heaters. For instantaneous water heaters that have a variable firing rate, two recovery efficiency values are computed, one at the maximum input rate and one at the minimum input rate. The recovery efficiency used in subsequent computations is taken as the average of these two values. The maximum recovery efficiency is computed as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.019 Where: M1 = as defined in section 6.2.2.1.Cp1 = as defined in section 6.2.2.1.TTdel, 1 = as defined in section 6.2.2.1.TTin, 1 = as defined in section 6.2.2.1.Qr, max = the total energy used by the water heater between
burner cut-out prior to the first draw and burner cut-out
following the first draw, including auxiliary energy such as
pilot lights, Btu (kJ).
The minimum recovery efficiency is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.020
Where: M4 = the mass withdrawn during the fourth draw, lb (kg), or,
if the volume of water is being measured,M4 = V4 [rho] Where: V4 = total volume removed during the first draw of the 24-
hour simulated use test, gal (L).[rho] = as defined in 6.2.2.1Cp4 = the specific heat of water, Btu/lb [deg]F (kJ/kg
[deg]C).TTdel, 4 = the average delivery temperature for the fourth
draw, [deg]F ([deg]C).TTin, 4 = the average inlet temperature for the fourth draw,
[deg]F ([deg]C).Qr, min = the total energy consumed between the beginning of
the fourth draw and burner cut-out following the fourth draw,
including auxiliary energy such as pilot lights, Btu (kJ).
The recovery efficiency is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.021
Where: [eta]r,max = as calculated above.[eta]r,min = as calculated above.
6.2.3 Daily Water Heating Energy Consumption. The daily water heating energy consumption, Qd, is computed as: Qd = Q Where: Q = the energy used by the instantaneous water heater during the 24-hr
simulated use test.
A modification is needed to take into account that the temperature difference between the outlet water temperature and supply water temperature may not be equivalent to the nominal value of 77 [deg]F (135 [deg]F-58 [deg]F) or 42.8 [deg]C (57.2 [deg]C-14.4 [deg]C). The following equations adjust the experimental data to a nominal 77 [deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) temperature rise.
The energy used to heat water may be computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.022
Where: Mi = the mass withdrawn during the ith draw, lb (kg).Cpi = the specific heat of water of the ith draw, Btu/lb
[deg]F (kJ/kg ([deg]C).TTdel,i = the average delivery temperature of the ith draw,
[deg]F ([deg]C).TTin,i = the average inlet temperature of the ith draw,
[deg]F ([deg]C).[eta]r = as calculated in section 6.2.2.2.
The energy required to heat the same quantity of water over a 77 [deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) temperature rise is:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.023 Where: Mi = the mass withdrawn during the ith draw, lb (kg).Cpi = the specific heat of water of the ith draw, Btu/lb
[deg]F (kJ/kg ([deg]C).[eta]r = as calculated above.
The difference between these two values is: QHWD = QHW, 77 [deg]F - QHWor QHWD = QHW, 42.8 [deg]C - QHW which much be added to the daily water heating energy consumption value. Thus, the daily energy consumption value which takes into account that the temperature rise across the storage tank may not be 77 [deg]F (42.8 [deg]C) is: Qdm = Qd + QHWD
6.2.4 Energy Factor. The energy factor, Ef, is computed as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11MY98.024 Where: Qdm = the daily water heating energy consumption as computed
in accordance with section 6.2.3, Btu (kJ).Mi = the mass associated with the ith draw, lb (kg).Cpi = the specific heat of water computed at a temperature of
(58 [deg]F + 135 [deg]F) / 2, Btu/lb [deg]F [(14.4 [deg]C +
57.2 [deg]C) / 2, kJ/kg [deg]C].
6.2.5 Annual Energy Consumption. The annual energy consumption for instantaneous type water heaters is computed as: Eannual = 365 x Qdm Where: Qdm = the modified daily energy consumption, Btu/day (kJ/
day).365 = the number of days in a year.
7. Ratings for Untested Models
In order to relieve the test burden on manufacturers who offer water heaters which differ only in fuel type or power input, ratings for untested models may be established in accordance with the following procedures. In lieu of the following procedures a manufacturer may elect to test the unit for which a rating is sought.
7.1 Gas Water Heaters. Ratings obtained for gas water heaters using natural gas can be used for an identical water heater which utilizes propane gas if the input ratings are within 10%.
7.2 Electric Water Heaters
7.2.1 First-Hour Rating. If an electric storage-type water heater is available with more than one input rating, the manufacturer shall designate the standard input rating, and the water heater need only be tested with heating elements at the designated standard input ratings. The first-hour ratings for units having power input rating less than the designated standard input rating shall be assigned a first-hour rating equivalent to the first draw of the first-hour rating for the electric water heater with the standard input rating. For units having power inputs greater than the designated standard input rating, the first-hour rating shall be equivalent to that measured for the water heater with the standard input rating.
7.2.2 Energy Factor. The energy factor for identical electric storage-type water heaters, with the exception of heating element wattage, may use the energy factor obtained during testing of the water heater with the designated standard input rating. [63 FR 26008, May 11, 1998; 63 FR 38738, July 20, 1998, as amended at 66 FR 4497, Jan. 17, 2001]
Effective Date Note: At 79 FR 40567, July 11, 2014, appendix E to subpart B of part 430 was revised, effective July 13, 2015. For the convenience of the user, the revised text is set forth as follows:
Sec. Appendix E to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Water Heaters
Note: After December 31, 2015, any representations made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of residential water heaters and commercial water heaters covered by this test method must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. (Because the statute permits use of a conversion factor until the later of December 31, 2015 or one year after publication of a conversion factor final rule, DOE may amend the mandatory compliance date for use of this amended test procedure, as necessary.)
Manufacturers conducting tests of residential water heaters and commercial water heaters covered by this test method after July 13, 2015, and prior to December 31, 2015, must conduct such test in accordance with either this appendix or the previous test method. For residential water heaters, the previous test method is appendix E as it appeared at 10 CFR part 430, subpart B, appendix E, in the 10 CFR parts 200 to 499 edition revised as of January 1, 2014. For commercial water heaters, the previous test method is 10 CFR 431.106 in the 10 CFR parts 200 to 499 edition revised as of January 1, 2014. Any representations made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of such water heaters must be in accordance with whichever version is selected.
1. Definitions.
1.1. Cut-in means the time when or water temperature at which a water heater control or thermostat acts to increase the energy or fuel input to the heating elements, compressor, or burner.
1.2. Cut-out means the time when or water temperature at which a water heater control or thermostat acts to reduce to a minimum the energy or fuel input to the heating elements, compressor, or burner.
1.3. Design Power Rating means the nominal power rating that a water heater manufacturer assigns to a particular design of water heater, expressed in kilowatts or Btu (kJ) per hour as appropriate.
1.4. Draw Cluster means a collection of water draws initiated during the simulated-use test during which no successive draws are separated by more than 2 hours.
1.5. First-Hour Rating means an estimate of the maximum volume of ``hot'' water that a storage-type water heater can supply within an hour that begins with the water heater fully heated (i.e., with all thermostats satisfied). It is a function of both the storage volume and the recovery rate.
1.6. Flow-activated describes an operational scheme in which a water heater initiates and terminates heating based on sensing flow.
1.7. Heat Trap means a device that can be integrally connected or independently attached to the hot and/or cold water pipe connections of a water heater such that the device will develop a thermal or mechanical seal to minimize the recirculation of water due to thermal convection between the water heater tank and its connecting pipes.
1.8. Maximum GPM (L/min) Rating means the maximum gallons per minute (liters per minute) of hot water that can be supplied by an instantaneous water heater while maintaining a nominal temperature rise of 67[emsp14] [deg]F (37.3 [deg]C) during steady-state operation, as determined by testing in accordance with section 5.3.2 of this appendix.
1.9. Rated Storage Volume means the water storage capacity of a water heater, in gallons (liters), as certified by the manufacturer pursuant to 10 CFR part 429.
1.10. Recovery Efficiency means the ratio of energy delivered to the water to the energy content of the fuel consumed by the water heater.
1.11. Recovery Period means the time when the main burner of a storage water heater is raising the temperature of the stored water.
1.12. Standby means the time, in hours, during which water is not being withdrawn from the water heater. There are two standby time intervals used within this test procedure: [tau]stby,1 represents the elapsed time between the time at which the maximum mean tank temperature is observed after the first draw cluster and the minute prior to the start of the first draw following the end of the first draw cluster of the 24-hour simulated-use test; [tau]stby,2 represents the total time during the 24-hour simulated-use test when water is not being withdrawn from the water heater.
1.13. Symbol Usage. The following identity relationships are provided to help clarify the symbology used throughout this procedure: Cp--specific heat of waterEannual--annual energy consumption of a water heaterEannual,e--annual electrical energy consumption of a water heaterEannual,f--annual fossil-fuel energy consumption of a water heaterFhr--first-hour rating of a storage-type water heaterFmax--maximum GPM (L/min) rating of an instantaneous water heater rated
at a temperature rise of 67[emsp14] [deg]F (37.3 [deg]C)i--a subscript to indicate the draw number during a testMi--mass of water removed during the ith draw of the 24-hour simulated-
use testM*i--for storage-type water heaters, mass of water removed during the
ith draw during the first-hour rating testM10m--for instantaneous water heaters, mass of water removed
continuously during a 10-minute interval in the maximum GPM
(L/min) rating testn--for storage-type water heaters, total number of draws during the
first-hour rating testN--total number of draws during the 24-hour simulated-use testQ--total fossil fuel and/or electric energy consumed during the entire
24-hour simulated-use testQd--daily water heating energy consumption adjusted for net change in
internal energyQda--Qd with adjustment for variation of tank to ambient air temperature
difference from nominal valueQdm--overall adjusted daily water heating energy consumption including
Qda and QHWDQe--total electrical energy used during the 24-hour simulated-use testQf--total fossil fuel energy used by the water heater during the 24-hour
simulated-use testQhr--hourly standby lossesQHW--daily energy consumption to heat water at the measured average
temperature rise across the water heaterQHW,67[emsp14] [deg]F--daily energy consumption to heat quantity of
water removed during test over a temperature rise of
67[emsp14] [deg]F (37.3 [deg]C)QHWD--adjustment to daily energy consumption, QHW, due to
variation of the temperature rise across the water heater not
equal to the nominal value of 67[emsp14] [deg]FQr--energy consumption of water heater from the beginning of the test to
the end of the first recovery period following the first draw,
which may extend beyond subsequent drawsQstby--total energy consumed by the water heater during the standby time
interval [tau]stby,1Qsu,0--total fossil fuel and/or electric energy consumed from the
beginning of the test to the end of the cutout following the
first draw clusterQsu,f--total fossil fuel and/or electric energy consumed from the
beginning of the test to the initiation of the first draw
following the first draw clusterTT0--mean tank temperature at the beginning of the 24-hour simulated-use
testTT24--mean tank temperature at the end of the 24-hour simulated-use testTTa,stby--average ambient air temperature during standby periods of the
24-hour simulated-use testTTdel--for flow-activated water heaters, average outlet water
temperature during a 10-minute continuous draw interval in the
maximum GPM (L/min) rating testTTdel,i--average outlet water temperature during the ith draw of the 24-
hour simulated-use testTTin--for flow-activated water heaters, average inlet water temperature
during a 10-minute continuous draw interval in the maximum GPM
(L/min) rating testTTin,i--average inlet water temperature during the ith draw of the 24-
hour simulated-use testTTmax,1--maximum measured mean tank temperature after cut-out following
the first draw of the 24-hour simulated-use testTTsu,0--maximum measured mean tank temperature at the beginning of the
standby period which occurs after cut-out following the final
draw of the first draw clusterTTsu,f--measured mean tank temperature at the end of the standby period
which occurs at the minute prior to commencement of the first
draw that follows the end of the first draw clusterTT*del,i--for storage-type water heaters, average outlet water
temperature during the ith draw (i = 1 to n) of the first-hour
rating testTT*max,i--for storage-type water heaters, maximum outlet water
temperature observed during the ith draw (i = 1 to n) of the
first-hour rating test TT*min,i--for storage-type water heaters, minimum outlet water
temperature to terminate the ith draw (i = 1 to n) of the
first-hour rating testUA--standby loss coefficient of a storage-type water heaterUEF--uniform energy factor of a water heaterVi--volume of water removed during the ith draw (i = 1 to N) of the 24-
hour simulated-use testV*i--volume of water removed during the ith draw (i = 1 to n) of the
first-hour rating testV10m--for flow-activated water heaters, volume of water removed
continuously during a 10-minute interval in the maximum GPM
(L/min) rating testVst--measured storage volume of the storage tankWf--weight of storage tank when completely filled with waterWt--tare weight of storage tank when completely empty of water[eta]r--recovery efficiency[rho]--density of water[tau]stby,1--elapsed time between the time the maximum mean tank
temperature is observed after the first draw cluster and the
minute prior to the start of the first draw following the
first draw cluster[tau]stby,2--overall time of standby periods when no water is withdrawn
during the 24-hour simulated-use test
1.14. Temperature controller means a device that is available to the user to adjust the temperature of the water inside a storage-type water heater or the outlet water temperature.
1.15. Uniform Energy Factor means the measure of water heater overall efficiency.
2. Test Conditions.
2.1 Installation Requirements. Tests shall be performed with the water heater and instrumentation installed in accordance with section 4 of this appendix.
2.2 Ambient Air Temperature. The ambient air temperature shall be maintained between 65.0[emsp14] [deg]F and 70.0[emsp14] [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C and 21.1 [deg]C) on a continuous basis. For heat pump water heaters, the dry bulb temperature shall be maintained at 67.5[emsp14] [deg]F 1[emsp14] [deg]F (19.7 [deg]C 0.6 [deg]C) and the relative humidity shall be maintained at 50% 2% throughout the test.
2.3 Supply Water Temperature. The temperature of the water being supplied to the water heater shall be maintained at 58[emsp14] [deg]F
2[emsp14] [deg]F (14.4 [deg]C 1.1 [deg]C) throughout the test.
2.4 Outlet Water Temperature. The temperature controllers of a storage-type water heater shall be set so that water is delivered at a temperature of 125[emsp14] [deg]F 5[emsp14] [deg]F (51.7 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C).
2.5 Set Point Temperature. The temperature controller of instantaneous water heaters shall be set to deliver water at a temperature of 125[emsp14] [deg]F 5[emsp14] [deg]F (51.7 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C).
2.6 Supply Water Pressure. During the test when water is not being withdrawn, the supply pressure shall be maintained between 40 psig (275 kPa) and the maximum allowable pressure specified by the water heater manufacturer.
2.7 Electrical and/or Fossil Fuel Supply.
2.7.1 Electrical. Maintain the electrical supply voltage to within 1% of the center of the voltage range specified by the water heater and/or heat pump manufacturer.
2.7.2 Natural Gas. Maintain the supply pressure in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. If the supply pressure is not specified, maintain a supply pressure of 7-10 inches of water column (1.7-2.5 kPa). If the water heater is equipped with a gas appliance pressure regulator, the regulator outlet pressure shall be within 10% of the manufacturer's specified manifold pressure. For all tests, use natural gas having a heating value of approximately 1,025 Btu per standard cubic foot (38,190 kJ per standard cubic meter).
2.7.3 Propane Gas. Maintain the supply pressure in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. If the supply pressure is not specified, maintain a supply pressure of 11-13 inches of water column (2.7-3.2 kPa). If the water heater is equipped with a gas appliance pressure regulator, the regulator outlet pressure shall be within 10% of the manufacturer's specified manifold pressure. For all tests, use propane gas with a heating value of approximately 2,500 Btu per standard cubic foot (93,147 kJ per standard cubic meter).
2.7.4 Fuel Oil Supply. Maintain an uninterrupted supply of fuel oil. Use fuel oil having a heating value of approximately 138,700 Btu per gallon (38,660 kJ per liter).
3. Instrumentation
3.1 Pressure Measurements. Pressure-measuring instruments shall have an error no greater than the following values: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Instrument Instrument
Item measured accuracy precision------------------------------------------------------------------------Gas pressure.................... 0.1 inch of eq>0.05 inch of
water column water column
(0.025 kPa). thn-eq>0.012
kPa).Atmospheric pressure............ 0.1 inch of eq>0.05 inch of
mercury column mercury column
(0.34 kPa). thn-eq>0.17 kPa).Water pressure.................. 1.0 pounds per eq>0.50 pounds
square inch per square inch
(6.9 kPa). thn-eq>3.45 kPa).------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 Temperature Measurement
3.2.1 Measurement. Temperature measurements shall be made in accordance with the Standard Method for Temperature Measurement, ASHRAE 41.1-1986 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3).
3.2.2 Accuracy and Precision. The accuracy and precision of the instruments, including their associated readout devices, shall be within the following limits: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Instrument Instrument
Item measured accuracy precision------------------------------------------------------------------------Air dry bulb temperature........ 0.2 [deg]F eq>0.1 [deg]F
(0.1 thn-eq>0.06
[deg]C). [deg]C).Air wet bulb temperature........ 0.2 [deg]F eq>0.1 [deg]F
(0.1 thn-eq>0.06
[deg]C). [deg]C).Inlet and outlet water 0.2 [deg]F eq>0.1 [deg]F
(0.1 thn-eq>0.06
[deg]C). [deg]C).Storage tank temperatures....... 0.5 [deg]F eq>0.25 [deg]F
(0.3 thn-eq>0.14
[deg]C). [deg]C).------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.3 Scale Division. In no case shall the smallest scale division of the instrument or instrument system exceed 2 times the specified precision.
3.2.4 Temperature Difference Temperature difference between the entering and leaving water may be measured with any of the following: a. A thermopileb. Calibrated resistance thermometersc. Precision thermometersd. Calibrated thermistorse. Calibrated thermocouplesf. Quartz thermometers
3.2.5 Thermopile Construction. If a thermopile is used, it shall be made from calibrated thermocouple wire taken from a single spool. Extension wires to the recording device shall also be made from that same spool.
3.2.6 Time Constant. The time constant of the instruments used to measure the inlet and outlet water temperatures shall be no greater than 2 seconds.
3.3 Liquid Flow Rate Measurement. The accuracy of the liquid flow rate measurement, using the calibration if furnished, shall be equal to or less than 1% of the measured value in mass units per unit time.
3.4 Electrical Energy. The electrical energy used shall be measured with an instrument and associated readout device that is accurate within 0.5% of the reading.
3.5 Fossil Fuels. The quantity of fuel used by the water heater shall be measured with an instrument and associated readout device that is accurate within 1% of the reading.
3.6 Mass Measurements. For mass measurements greater than or equal to 10 pounds (4.5 kg), a scale that is accurate within 0.5% of the reading shall be used to make the measurement. For mass measurements less than 10 pounds (4.5 kg), the scale shall provide a measurement that is accurate within 0.1 pound (0.045 kg).
3.7 Heating Value. The higher heating value of the natural gas, propane, or fuel oil shall be measured with an instrument and associated readout device that is accurate within 1% of the reading. The heating values of natural gas and propane must be corrected from those reported at standard temperature and pressure conditions to provide the heating value at the temperature and pressure measured at the fuel meter.
3.8 Time. The elapsed time measurements shall be measured with an instrument that is accurate within 0.5 seconds per hour.
3.9 Volume. Volume measurements shall be measured with an accuracy of 2% of the total volume.
3.10 Relative Humidity. If a relative humidity (RH) transducer is used to measure the relative humidity of the surrounding air while testing heat pump water heaters, the relative humidity shall be measured with an accuracy of 1.5% RH.
4. Installation
4.1 Water Heater Mounting. A water heater designed to be freestanding shall be placed on a \3/4\ inch (2 cm) thick plywood platform supported by three 2 x 4 inch (5 cm x 10 cm) runners. If the water heater is not approved for installation on combustible flooring, suitable non-combustible material shall be placed between the water heater and the platform. Counter-top water heaters shall be placed against a simulated wall section. Wall-mounted water heaters shall be supported on a simulated wall in accordance with the manufacturer-published installation instructions. When a simulated wall is used, the construction shall be 2 x 4 inch (5 cm x 10 cm) studs, faced with \3/4\ inch (2 cm) plywood. For heat pump water heaters not delivered as a single package, the units shall be connected in accordance with the manufacturer-published installation instructions and the overall system shall be placed on the above-described plywood platform. If installation instructions are not provided by the heat pump manufacturer, uninsulated 8 foot (2.4 m) long connecting hoses having an inside diameter of 5/8 inch (1.6 cm) shall be used to connect the storage tank and the heat pump water heater. The testing of the water heater shall occur in an area that is protected from drafts of more than 50 ft/min (0.25 m/s) from room ventilation registers, windows, or other external sources of air movement.
4.2 Water Supply. Connect the water heater to a water supply capable of delivering water at conditions as specified in sections 2.3 and 2.6 of this appendix.
4.3 Water Inlet and Outlet Configuration. For freestanding water heaters that are taller than 36 inches (91.4 cm), inlet and outlet piping connections shall be configured in a manner consistent with Figures 1 and 2 of section 6.4.6 of this appendix. Inlet and outlet piping connections for wall-mounted water heaters shall be consistent with Figure 3 of section 6.4.6 of this appendix. For freestanding water heaters that are 36 inches or less in height and not supplied as part of a counter-top enclosure (commonly referred to as an under-the-counter model), inlet and outlet piping shall be installed in a manner consistent with Figures 4, 5, or 6 of section 6.4.6 of this appendix. For water heaters that are supplied with a counter-top enclosure, inlet and outlet piping shall be made in a manner consistent with Figures 7a and 7b of section 6.4.6 of this appendix, respectively. The vertical piping noted in Figures 7a and 7b shall be located (whether inside the enclosure or along the outside in a recessed channel) in accordance with the manufacturer-published installation instructions.
All dimensions noted in Figures 1 through 7 of section 6.4.6 of this appendix must be achieved. All piping between the water heater and inlet and outlet temperature sensors, noted as TIN and TOUT in the figures, shall be Type ``L'' hard copper having the same diameter as the connections on the water heater. Unions may be used to facilitate installation and removal of the piping arrangements. Install a pressure gauge and diaphragm expansion tank in the supply water piping at a location upstream of the inlet temperature sensor. Install an appropriately rated pressure and temperature relief valve on all water heaters at the port specified by the manufacturer. Discharge piping for the relief valve must be non-metallic. If heat traps, piping insulation, or pressure relief valve insulation are supplied with the water heater, they must be installed for testing. Except when using a simulated wall, provide sufficient clearance such that none of the piping contacts other surfaces in the test room.
4.4 Fuel and/or Electrical Power and Energy Consumption. Install one or more instruments that measure, as appropriate, the quantity and rate of electrical energy and/or fossil fuel consumption in accordance with section 3 of this appendix.
4.5 Internal Storage Tank Temperature Measurements. For water heaters with rated storage volumes greater than or equal to 20 gallons, install six temperature measurement sensors inside the water heater tank with a vertical distance of at least 4 inches (100 mm) between successive sensors. For water heaters with rated storage volumes between 2 and 20 gallons, install three temperature measurement sensors inside the water heater tank. Position a temperature sensor at the vertical midpoint of each of the six equal volume nodes within a tank larger than 20 gallons or the three equal volume nodes within a tank between 2 and 20 gallons. Nodes designate the equal volumes used to evenly partition the total volume of the tank. As much as is possible, the temperature sensor should be positioned away from any heating elements, anodic protective devices, tank walls, and flue pipe walls. If the tank cannot accommodate six temperature sensors and meet the installation requirements specified above, install the maximum number of sensors that comply with the installation requirements. Install the temperature sensors through: (1) The anodic device opening; (2) the relief valve opening; or (3) the hot water outlet. If installed through the relief valve opening or the hot water outlet, a tee fitting or outlet piping, as applicable, must be installed as close as possible to its original location. If the relief valve temperature sensor is relocated, and it no longer extends into the top of the tank, install a substitute relief valve that has a sensing element that can reach into the tank. If the hot water outlet includes a heat trap, install the heat trap on top of the tee fitting. Cover any added fittings with thermal insulation having an R value between 4 and 8 h[middot]ft\2\[middot] [deg]F/Btu (0.7 and 1.4 m\2\[middot] [deg]C/W).
4.6 Ambient Air Temperature Measurement. Install an ambient air temperature sensor at the vertical mid-point of the water heater and approximately 2 feet (610 mm) from the surface of the water heater. Shield the sensor against radiation.
4.7 Inlet and Outlet Water Temperature Measurements. Install temperature sensors in the cold-water inlet pipe and hot-water outlet pipe as shown in Figures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7a, and 7b of section 6.4.6 of this appendix, as applicable.
4.8 Flow Control. Install a valve or valves to provide flow as specified in sections 5.3 and 5.4 of this appendix.
4.9 Flue Requirements.
4.9.1 Gas-Fired Water Heaters. Establish a natural draft in the following manner. For gas-fired water heaters with a vertically discharging draft hood outlet, connect to the draft hood outlet a 5-foot (1.5-meter) vertical vent pipe extension with a diameter equal to the largest flue collar size of the draft hood. For gas-fired water heaters with a horizontally discharging draft hood outlet, connect to the draft hood outlet a 90-degree elbow with a diameter equal to the largest flue collar size of the draft hood, connect a 5-foot (1.5-meter) length of vent pipe to that elbow, and orient the vent pipe to discharge vertically upward. Install direct-vent gas-fired water heaters with venting equipment specified in the manufacturer's instructions using the minimum vertical and horizontal lengths of vent pipe recommended by the manufacturer.
4.9.2 Oil-Fired Water Heaters. Establish a draft at the flue collar at the value specified in the manufacturer's instructions. Establish the draft by using a sufficient length of vent pipe connected to the water heater flue outlet, and directed vertically upward. For an oil-fired water heater with a horizontally discharging draft hood outlet, connect to the draft hood outlet a 90-degree elbow with a diameter equal to the largest flue collar size of the draft hood, connect to the elbow fitting a length of vent pipe sufficient to establish the draft, and orient the vent pipe to discharge vertically upward. Direct-vent oil-fired water heaters should be installed with venting equipment as specified in the manufacturer's instructions, using the minimum vertical and horizontal lengths of vent pipe recommended by the manufacturer.
5. Test Procedures
5.1 Operational Mode Selection. For water heaters that allow for multiple user-selected operational modes, all procedures specified in this appendix shall be carried out with the water heater in the same operational mode (i.e., only one mode). This operational mode shall be the default mode (or similarly-named, suggested mode for normal operation) as defined by the manufacturer in its product literature for giving selection guidance to the consumer. For heat pump water heaters, if a default mode is not defined in the product literature, each test shall be conducted under an operational mode in which both the heat pump and any electric resistance backup heating element(s) are activated by the unit's control scheme, and which can achieve the internal storage tank temperature specified in this test procedure; if multiple operational modes meet these criteria, the water heater shall be tested under the most energy-intensive mode. If no default mode is specified and the unit does not offer an operational mode that utilizes both the heat pump and the electric resistance backup heating element(s), the first-hour rating test and the simulated-use test shall be tested in heat-pump-only mode. For other types of water heaters where a default mode is not specified, test the unit in all modes and rate the unit using the results of the most energy-intensive mode.
5.2 Water Heater Preparation.
5.2.1 Determination of Storage Tank Volume. For water heaters with a rated storage volume greater than or equal to 2 gallons, determine the storage capacity, Vst, of the water heater under test, in gallons (liters), by subtracting the tare weight--measured while the tank is empty--from the gross weight of the storage tank when completely filled with water (with all air eliminated and line pressure applied as described in section 2.5 of this appendix) and dividing the resulting net weight by the density of water at the measured temperature.
5.2.2 Setting the Outlet Discharge Temperature.
5.2.2.1 Flow-Activated Water Heaters, including certain instantaneous water heaters and certain storage-type water heaters. Initiate normal operation of the water heater at the full input rating for electric water heaters and at the maximum firing rate specified by the manufacturer for gas or oil water heaters. Monitor the discharge water temperature and set to a value of 125 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (51.7 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C) in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. If the water heater is not capable of providing this discharge temperature when the flow rate is 1.7 gallons 0.25 gallons per minute (6.4 liters 0.95 liters per minute), then adjust the flow rate as necessary to achieve the specified discharge water temperature. Once the proper temperature control setting is achieved, the setting must remain fixed for the duration of the maximum GPM test and the simulated-use test.
5.2.2.2 Storage-Type Water Heaters that Are Not Flow-Activated.
5.2.2.2.1 Tanks with a Single Temperature Controller.
5.2.2.2.1.1 Water Heaters with Rated Volumes Less than 20 Gallons. Starting with a tank at the supply water temperature, initiate normal operation of the water heater. After cut-out, initiate a draw from the water heater at a flow rate of 1.0 gallon 0.25 gallons per minute (3.8 liters 0.95 liters per minute) for 2 minutes. Starting 15 seconds after commencement of draw, record the outlet temperature at 15-second intervals until the end of the 2-minute period. Determine whether the maximum outlet temperature is within the range of 125[emsp14] [deg]F 5[emsp14] [deg]F (51.7 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C). If not, turn off the water heater, adjust the temperature controller, and then drain and refill the tank with supply water. Then, once again, initiate normal operation of the water heater, and repeat the 2-minute outlet temperature test following cut-out. Repeat this sequence until the maximum outlet temperature during the 2-minute test is within 125[emsp14] [deg]F 5[emsp14] [deg]F (51.7 [deg]C
2.8 [deg]C). Once the proper temperature control setting is achieved, the setting must remain fixed for the duration of the first-hour rating test and the simulated-use test such that a second identical simulated-use test run immediately following the one specified in section 5.4 would result in average delivered water temperatures that are within the bounds specified in section 2.4 of this appendix.
5.2.2.2.1.2 Water Heaters with Rated Volumes Greater than or Equal to 20 Gallons. Starting with a tank at the supply water temperature, initiate normal operation of the water heater. After cut-out, initiate a draw from the water heater at a flow rate of 1.7 gallons
0.25 gallons per minute (6.4 liters 0.95 liters per minute) for 5 minutes. Starting 15 seconds after commencement of draw, record the outlet temperature at 15-second intervals until the end of the 5-minute period. Determine whether the maximum outlet temperature is within the range of 125[emsp14] [deg]F
5[emsp14] [deg]F (51.7 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C). If not, turn off the water heater, adjust the temperature controller, and then drain and refill the tank with supply water. Then, once again, initiate normal operation of the water heater, and repeat the 5-minute outlet temperature test following cut-out. Repeat this sequence until the maximum outlet temperature during the 5-minute test is within of 125[emsp14] [deg]F 5[emsp14] [deg]F (51.7 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C). Once the proper temperature control setting is achieved, the setting must remain fixed for the duration of the first-hour rating test and the simulated-use test such that a second identical simulated-use test run immediately following the one specified in section 5.4 would result in average delivered water temperatures that are within the bounds specified in section 2.4 of this appendix.
5.2.2.2.2 Tanks with Two or More Temperature Controllers. Verify the temperature controller set-point while removing water in accordance with the procedure set forth for the first-hour rating test in section 5.3.3 of this appendix. The following criteria must be met to ensure that all temperature controllers are set to deliver water at 125[emsp14] [deg]F
5[emsp14] [deg]F (51.7 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C):
(a) At least 50 percent of the water drawn during the first draw of the first-hour rating test procedure shall be delivered at a temperature of 125 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (51.7 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C).
(b) No water is delivered above 130 [deg]F (54.4 [deg]C) during first-hour rating test.
(c) The delivery temperature measured 15 seconds after commencement of each draw begun prior to an elapsed time of 60 minutes from the start of the test shall be at 125[emsp14] [deg]F 5[emsp14] [deg]F (51.7 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C).
If these conditions are not met, turn off the water heater, adjust the temperature controllers, and then drain and refill the tank with supply water. Repeat the procedure described at the start of section 5.2.2.2.2 until the criteria for setting the temperature controllers is met.
If the conditions stated above are met, the data obtained during the process of verifying the temperature control set-points may be used in determining the first-hour rating provided that all other conditions and methods required in sections 2 and 5.2.4 in preparing the water heater were followed.
5.2.3 Power Input Determination. For all water heaters except electric types, initiate normal operation (as described in section 5.1) and determine the power input, P, to the main burners (including pilot light power, if any) after 15 minutes of operation. If the water heater is equipped with a gas appliance pressure regulator, the regulator outlet pressure shall be set within 10% of that recommended by the manufacturer. For oil-fired water heaters, the fuel pump pressure shall be within 10% of the manufacturer's specified pump pressure. Adjust all burners to achieve an hourly Btu (kJ) rating that is within 2% of the value specified by the manufacturer. For an oil-fired water heater, adjust the burner to give a CO2 reading recommended by the manufacturer and an hourly Btu (kJ) rating that is within 2% of that specified by the manufacturer. Smoke in the flue may not exceed No. 1 smoke as measured by the procedure in ASTM D2156 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3).
5.2.4 Soak-In Period for Water Heaters with Rated Storage Volumes Greater than or Equal to 2 Gallons. For storage-type water heaters and instantaneous water heaters having greater than 2 gallons (7.6 liters) of storage (including heat pump water heaters having greater than 2 gallons of storage), the water heater must sit filled with water and without any draws taking place for at least 12 hours after initially being energized so as to achieve the nominal temperature set-point within the tank and with the unit connected to a power source.
5.3 Delivery Capacity Tests.
5.3.1 General. For flow-activated water heaters, conduct the maximum GPM test, as described in section 5.3.2, Maximum GPM Rating Test for Flow-Activated Water Heaters, of this appendix. For all other water heaters, conduct the first-hour rating test as described in section 5.3.3 of this appendix.
5.3.2 Maximum GPM Rating Test for Flow-Activated Water Heaters. Establish normal water heater operation at the full input rate for electric water heaters and at the maximum firing rate for gas or oil water heaters with the discharge water temperature set in accordance with section 5.2.2.1 of this appendix.
For this 10-minute test, either collect the withdrawn water for later measurement of the total mass removed or use a water meter to directly measure the water volume removed. Initiate water flow through the water heater and record the inlet and outlet water temperatures beginning 15 seconds after the start of the test and at subsequent 5-second intervals throughout the duration of the test. At the end of 10 minutes, turn off the water. Determine and record the mass of water collected, M10m, in pounds (kilograms), or the volume of water, V10m, in gallons (liters).
5.3.3 First-Hour Rating Test.
5.3.3.1 General. During hot water draws for water heaters with rated storage volumes greater than or equal to 20 gallons, remove water at a rate of 3.0 0.25 gallons per minute (11.4 0.95 liters per minute). During hot water draws for storage-type water heaters with rated storage volumes below 20 gallons, remove water at a rate of 1.0 0.25 gallon per minute (3.8 0.95 liters per minute). Collect the water in a container that is large enough to hold the volume removed during an individual draw and is suitable for weighing at the termination of each draw to determine the total volume of water withdrawn. As an alternative to collecting the water, a water meter may be used to directly measure the water volume(s) withdrawn.
5.3.3.2 Draw Initiation Criteria. Begin the first-hour rating test by starting a draw on the storage-type water heater. After completion of this first draw, initiate successive draws based on the following criteria. For gas-fired and oil-fired water heaters, initiate successive draws when the temperature controller acts to reduce the supply of fuel to the main burner. For electric water heaters having a single element or multiple elements that all operate simultaneously, initiate successive draws when the temperature controller acts to reduce the electrical input supplied to the element(s). For electric water heaters having two or more elements that do not operate simultaneously, initiate successive draws when the applicable temperature controller acts to reduce the electrical input to the energized element located vertically highest in the storage tank. For heat pump water heaters that do not use supplemental, resistive heating, initiate successive draws immediately after the electrical input to the compressor is reduced by the action of the water heater's temperature controller. For heat pump water heaters that use supplemental resistive heating, initiate successive draws immediately after the electrical input to the first of either the compressor or the vertically highest resistive element is reduced by the action of the applicable water heater temperature controller. This draw initiation criterion for heat pump water heaters that use supplemental resistive heating, however, shall only apply when the water located above the thermostat at cut-out is heated to 125[emsp14] [deg]F 5[emsp14] [deg]F (51.7 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C). If this criterion is not met, then the next draw should be initiated once the heat pump compressor cuts out.
5.3.3.3 Test Sequence. Establish normal water heater operation. If the water heater is not presently operating, initiate a draw. The draw may be terminated any time after cut-in occurs. After cut-out occurs (i.e., all temperature controllers are satisfied), record the internal storage tank temperature at each sensor described in section 4.5 of this appendix every one minute, and determine the mean tank temperature by averaging the values from these sensors.
Initiate a draw after a maximum mean tank temperature (the maximum of the mean temperatures of the individual sensors) has been observed following a cut-out. Record the time when the draw is initiated and designate it as an elapsed time of zero ([tau]* = 0). (The superscript * is used to denote variables pertaining to the first-hour rating test). Record the outlet water temperature beginning 15 seconds after the draw is initiated and at 5-second intervals thereafter until the draw is terminated. Determine the maximum outlet temperature that occurs during this first draw and record it as T*max,1. For the duration of this first draw and all successive draws, in addition, monitor the inlet temperature to the water heater to ensure that the required 58[emsp14] [deg]F 2[emsp14] [deg]F (14.4 [deg]C 1.1 [deg]C) test condition is met. Terminate the hot water draw when the outlet temperature decreases to T*max,1 - 15 [deg]F (T*max,1 - 8.3 [deg]C). (Note, if the outlet temperature does not decrease to T*max,1 - 15 [deg]F (T*max,1 - 8.3 [deg]C) during the draw, then hot water would be drawn continuously for the duration of the test. In this instance, the test would end when the temperature decreases to T*max,1- 15 [deg]F (T*max,1 - 8.3 [deg]C) after the electrical power and/or fuel supplied to the water heater is shut off, as described in the following paragraphs.) Record this temperature as T*min,1. Following draw termination, determine the average outlet water temperature and the mass or volume removed during this first draw and record them as TT*del,i and M*1 or V*1, respectively.
Initiate a second and, if applicable, successive draw(s) each time the applicable draw initiation criteria described in section 5.3.3.2 are satisfied. As required for the first draw, record the outlet water temperature 15 seconds after initiating each draw and at 5-second intervals thereafter until the draw is terminated. Determine the maximum outlet temperature that occurs during each draw and record it as T*max,i, where the subscript i refers to the draw number. Terminate each hot water draw when the outlet temperature decreases to T*max,i - 15 [deg]F (T*max,i - 8.3 [deg]C). Record this temperature as T*min,i. Calculate and record the average outlet temperature and the mass or volume removed during each draw (TT*del,i and M*i or V*i, respectively). Continue this sequence of draw and recovery until one hour after the start of the test, then shut off the electrical power and/or fuel supplied to the water heater.
If a draw is occurring at one hour from the start of the test, continue this draw until the outlet temperature decreases to T*max,n - 15 [deg]F (T*max,n - 8.3 [deg]C), at which time the draw shall be immediately terminated. (The subscript n shall be used to denote measurements associated with the final draw.) If a draw is not occurring one hour after the start of the test, initiate a final draw at one hour, regardless of whether the criteria described in section 5.3.3.2 of this appendix are satisfied. This draw shall proceed for a minimum of 30 seconds and shall terminate when the outlet temperature first indicates a value less than or equal to the cut-off temperature used for the previous draw (T*min,n-1). If an outlet temperature greater than T*min,n-1 is not measured within 30 seconds of initiation of the draw, zero additional credit shall be given towards first-hour rating (i.e., M*n = 0 or V*n = 0) based on the final draw. After the final draw is terminated, calculate and record the average outlet temperature and the mass or volume removed during the final draw (TT*del,n and M*n or V*n, respectively).
5.4 24-Hour Simulated Use Test.
5.4.1 Selection of Draw Pattern. The water heater will be tested under a draw profile that depends upon the first-hour rating obtained following the test prescribed in section 5.3.3 of this appendix, or the maximum GPM rating obtained following the test prescribed in section 5.3.2 of this appendix, whichever is applicable. For water heaters that have been tested according to the first-hour rating procedure, one of four different patterns shall be applied based on the measured first-hour rating, as shown in Table I of this section. For water heater that have been tested according to the maximum GPM rating procedure, one of four different patterns shall be applied based on the maximum GPM, as shown in Table II of this section.
Table I--Draw Pattern To Be Used Based on First-Hour Rating----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
First-hour rating greater than or ... and first-hour
equal to: rating less than: Draw pattern to be used in simulated-use test----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 gallons........................... 18 gallons............ Very-Small-Usage (Table III.1).18 gallons.......................... 51 gallons............ Low-Usage (Table III.2).51 gallons.......................... 75 gallons............ Medium-Usage (Table III.3).75 gallons.......................... No upper limit........ High-Usage (Table III.4).----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table II--Draw Pattern To Be Used Based on Maximum GPM Rating----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum GPM rating greater than or and maximum GPM rating
equal to: less than: Draw pattern to be used in simulated-use test----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 gallons/minute.................... 1.7 gallons/minute.... Very-Small-Usage (Table III.1).1.7 gallons/minute.................. 2.8 gallons/minute.... Low-Usage (Table III.2).2.8 gallons/minute.................. 4 gallons/minute...... Medium-Usage (Table III.3).4 gallons/minute.................... No upper limit........ High-Usage (Table III.4).----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The draw patterns are provided in Tables III.1 through III.4 in section 5.5 of this appendix. Use the appropriate draw pattern when conducting the test sequence provided in section 5.4.2 of this appendix for water heaters with rated storage volumes greater than or equal to 2 gallons or section 5.4.3 of this appendix for water heaters with rated storage volumes less than 2 gallons.
5.4.2 Test Sequence for Water Heaters with Rated Storage Volumes Greater Than or Equal to 2 Gallons. If the water heater is turned off, fill the water heater with supply water and maintain supply water pressure as described in section 2.6 of this appendix. Turn on the water heater and associated heat pump unit, if present. If turned on in this fashion, the soak-in period described in section 5.2.4 of this appendix shall be implemented. If the water heater has undergone a first-hour rating test prior to conduct of the simulated-use test, allow the water heater to fully recover after completion of that test such that the main burner, heating elements, or heat pump compressor of the water heater are no longer raising the temperature of the stored water. In all cases, the water heater shall sit idle for 1 hour prior to the start of the 24-hour test; during which time no water is drawn from the unit and there is no energy input to the main heating elements, heat pump compressor, and/or burners. At the end of this period, the 24-hour simulated-use test will begin.
At the start of the 24-hour test, record the mean tank temperature (TT0), and the electrical and/or fuel measurement readings, as appropriate. Begin the 24-hour simulated use test by withdrawing the volume specified in the appropriate table in section 5.5 of this appendix (i.e., Table III.1, Table III.2, Table III.3, or Table III.4, depending on the first-hour rating or maximum GPM rating) for the first draw at the flow rate specified in the applicable table. Record the time when this first draw is initiated and assign it as the test elapsed time ([tau]) of zero (0). Record the average storage tank and ambient temperature every minute throughout the 24-hour simulated-use test. At the elapsed times specified in the applicable draw pattern table in section 5.5 of this appendix for a particular draw pattern, initiate additional draws pursuant to the draw pattern, removing the volume of hot water at the prescribed flow rate specified by the table. The maximum allowable deviation from the specified volume of water removed for any single draw taken at a nominal flow rate of 1 GPM or 1.7 GPM is 0.1 gallons (0.4 liters). The maximum allowable deviation from the specified volume of water removed for any single draw taken at a nominal flow rate of 3 GPM is 0.25 gallons (0.9 liters). The quantity of water withdrawn during the last draw shall be increased or decreased as necessary such that the total volume of water withdrawn equals the prescribed daily amount for that draw pattern 1.0 gallon (3.8 liters). If this adjustment to the volume drawn during the last draw results in no draw taking place, the test is considered invalid.
All draws during the 24-hour simulated-use test shall be made at the flow rates specified in the applicable draw pattern table in section 5.5 of this appendix, within a tolerance of 0.25 gallons per minute (0. 9 liters per minute). Measurements of the inlet and outlet temperatures shall be made 5 seconds after the draw is initiated and at every subsequent 3-second interval throughout the duration of each draw. Calculate and record the mean of the hot water discharge temperature and the cold water inlet temperature for each draw TTdel,i and TTin,i). Determine and record the net mass or volume removed (Mi or Vi), as appropriate, after each draw.
At the end of the first recovery period following the first draw, which may extend beyond subsequent draws, record the maximum mean tank temperature observed after cut-out, TTmax,1, and the energy consumed by an electric resistance, gas, or oil-fired water heater (including electrical energy), from the beginning of the test, Qr. For heat pump water heaters, the total energy consumed during the first recovery by the heat pump (including compressor, fan, controls, pump, etc.) and, if applicable, by the resistive element(s) shall be recorded as Qr.
The start of the portion of the test during which the standby loss coefficient is determined depends upon whether the unit has fully recovered from the first draw cluster. If a recovery is occurring at or within five minutes of the end of the final draw in the first draw cluster, as identified in the applicable draw pattern table in section 5.5 of this appendix, then the standby period starts when a maximum average tank temperature is observed starting five minutes after the end of the recovery period that follows that draw. If a recovery does not occur at or within five minutes of the end of the final draw in the first draw cluster, as identified in the applicable draw pattern table in section 5.5 of this appendix, then the standby period starts five minutes after the end of that draw. Determine and record the total electrical energy and/or fossil fuel consumed from the beginning of the test to the start of the standby period, Qsu,0.
In preparation for determining the energy consumed during standby, record the reading given on the electrical energy (watt-hour) meter, the gas meter, and/or the scale used to determine oil consumption, as appropriate. Record the mean tank temperature at the start of the standby period as TTsu,0. At 1-minute intervals, record the mean tank temperature and the electric and/or fuel instrument readings until the next draw is initiated. Just prior to initiation of the next draw, record the mean tank temperature as TTsu,f. If the water heater is undergoing recovery when the next draw is initiated, record the mean tank temperature TTsu,f at the minute prior to the start of the recovery. The time at which this value occurs is the end of the standby period. Determine the total electrical energy and/or fossil fuel energy consumption from the beginning of the test to this time and record as Qsu,f. Record the time interval between the start of the standby period and the end of the standby period as [tau]stby,1. Record the time during which water is not being withdrawn from the water heater during the entire 24-hour period as [tau]stby,2.
In the event that the recovery period continues from the end of the last draw of the first draw cluster until the subsequent draw, the standby period will start after the end of the first recovery period after the last draw of the simulated-use test, when the temperature reaches the maximum average tank temperature, though no sooner than five minutes after the end of this recovery period. The standby period shall last eight hours, so testing will extend beyond the 24-hour duration of the simulated-use test. Determine and record the total electrical energy and/or fossil fuel consumed from the beginning of the simulated-use test to the start of the 8-hour standby period, Qsu,0. In preparation for determining the energy consumed during standby, record the reading(s) given on the electrical energy (watt-hour) meter, the gas meter, and/or the scale used to determine oil consumption, as appropriate. Record the mean tank temperature at the start of the standby period as TTsu,0. Record the mean tank temperature, the ambient temperature, and the electric and/or fuel instrument readings until the end of the 8 hour period. Record the mean tank temperature at the end of the 8 hour standby period as TTsu,f. If the water heater is undergoing recovery at the end of the standby period, record the mean tank temperature TTsu,f at the minute prior to the start of the recovery, which will mark the end of the standby period. Determine the total electrical energy and/or fossil fuel energy consumption from the beginning of the test to the end of the standby period and record this value as Qsu,f. Record the time interval between the start of the standby period and the end of the standby period as [tau]stby,1.
Following the final draw of the prescribed draw pattern and subsequent recovery, allow the water heater to remain in the standby mode until exactly 24 hours have elapsed since the start of the simulated-use test (i.e., since [tau] = 0). During the last hour of the simulated-use test, power to the main burner, heating element, or compressor shall be disabled. At 24 hours, record the reading given by the gas meter, oil meter, and/or the electrical energy meter as appropriate. Determine the fossil fuel and/or electrical energy consumed during the entire 24-hour simulated-use test and designate the quantity as Q.
5.4.3 Test Sequence for Water Heaters With Rated Storage Volume Less Than 2 Gallons.
Establish normal operation with the discharge water temperature at 125 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (51.7 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C) and set the flow rate as determined in section 5.2 of this appendix. Prior to commencement of the 24-hour simulated-use test, the unit shall remain in an idle state in which controls are active but no water is drawn through the unit for a period of one hour. With no draw occurring, record the reading given by the gas meter and/or the electrical energy meter as appropriate. Begin the 24-hour simulated-use test by withdrawing the volume specified in Tables III.1 through III.4 of section 5.5 of this appendix for the first draw at the flow rate specified. Record the time when this first draw is initiated and designate it as an elapsed time, [tau], of 0. At the elapsed times specified in Tables III.1 through III.4 for a particular draw pattern, initiate additional draws, removing the volume of hot water at the prescribed flow rate specified in Tables III.1 through III.4. The maximum allowable deviation from the specified volume of water removed for any single draw taken at a nominal flow rate less than or equal to 1.7 GPM (6.4 L/min) is 0.1 gallons (0.4 liters). The maximum allowable deviation from the specified volume of water removed for any single draw taken at a nominal flow rate of 3 GPM (11.4 L/min) is 0.25 gallons (0.9 liters). The quantity of water drawn during the final draw shall be increased or decreased as necessary such that the total volume of water withdrawn equals the prescribed daily amount for that draw pattern 1.0 gallon (3.8 liters). If this adjustment to the volume drawn in the last draw results in no draw taking place, the test is considered invalid.
Measurements of the inlet and outlet water temperatures shall be made 5 seconds after the draw is initiated and at every 3-second interval thereafter throughout the duration of the draw. Calculate the mean of the hot water discharge temperature and the cold water inlet temperature for each draw. Record the mass of the withdrawn water or the water meter reading, as appropriate, after each draw. At the end of the recovery period following the first draw, determine and record the fossil fuel and/or electrical energy consumed, Qr. Following the final draw and subsequent recovery, allow the water heater to remain in the standby mode until exactly 24 hours have elapsed since the start of the test (i.e., since [tau] = 0). At 24 hours, record the reading given by the gas meter, oil meter, and/or the electrical energy meter, as appropriate. Determine the fossil fuel and/or electrical energy consumed during the entire 24-hour simulated-use test and designate the quantity as Q.
5.5 Draw Patterns. The draw patterns to be imposed during 24-hour simulated-use tests are provided in Tables III.1 through III.4. Subject each water heater under test to one of these draw patterns based on its first-hour rating or maximum GPM rating, as discussed in section 5.4.1 of this appendix. Each draw pattern specifies the elapsed time in hours and minutes during the 24-hour test when a draw is to commence, the total volume of water in gallons (liters) that is to be removed during each draw, and the flow rate at which each draw is to be taken, in gallons (liters) per minute.
Table III.1--Very-Small-Usage Draw Pattern----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time during test Volume [gallons Flow Rate ** [GPM
Draw No. [hh:mm] (L)] (L/min)]----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 *................................................. 0:00 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8)2 *................................................. 1:00 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8)3 *................................................. 1:05 0.5 (1.9) 1 (3.8)4 *................................................. 1:10 0.5 (1.9) 1 (3.8)5 *................................................. 1:15 0.5 (1.9) 1 (3.8)6................................................... 8:00 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8)7................................................... 8:15 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8)8................................................... 9:00 1.5 (5.7) 1 (3.8)9................................................... 9:15 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Volume Drawn Per Day: 10 gallons (38 L)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------* Denotes draws in first draw cluster.** Should the water heater have a maximum GPM rating less than 1 GPM (3.8 L/min), then all draws shall be
implemented at a flow rate equal to the rated maximum GPM.
Table III.2--Low-Usage Draw Pattern----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time during test Volume [gallons Flow rate [GPM (L/
Draw No. [hh:mm] (liters)] min)]----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 *................................................. 0:00 15.0 (56.8) 1.7 (6.4)
2 *................................................. 0:30 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8)3 *................................................. 1:00 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8)4................................................... 10:30 6.0 (22.7) 1.7 (6.4)5................................................... 11:30 4.0 (15.1) 1.7 (6.4)6................................................... 12:00 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8)7................................................... 12:45 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8)8................................................... 12:50 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8)9................................................... 16:15 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8)10.................................................. 16:45 2.0 (7.6) 1.7 (6.4)11.................................................. 17:00 3.0 (11.4) 1.7 (6.4)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Volume Drawn Per Day: 38 gallons (144 L)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------* Denotes draws in first draw cluster.
Table III.3--Medium-Usage Draw Pattern----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time during test Volume [gallons Flow rate [GPM (L/
Draw No. [hh:mm] (liters)] min)]----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 *................................................. 0:00 15.0 (56.8) 1.7 (6.4)2 *................................................. 0:30 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8)3 *................................................. 1:40 9.0 (34.1) 1.7 (6.4)4................................................... 10:30 9.0 (34.1) 1.7 (6.4)5................................................... 11:30 5.0 (18.9) 1.7 (6.4)6................................................... 12:00 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8)7................................................... 12:45 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8)8................................................... 12:50 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8)9................................................... 16:00 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8)10.................................................. 16:15 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8)11.................................................. 16:45 2.0 (7.6) 1.7 (6.4)12.................................................. 17:00 7.0 (26.5) 1.7 (6.4)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Volume Drawn Per Day: 55 gallons (208 L)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------* Denotes draws in first draw cluster.
Table III.4--High-Usage Draw Pattern----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time during test Volume [gallons Flow rate [GPM (L/
Draw No. [hh:mm] (liters)] min)]----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 *................................................. 0:00 27.0 (102) 3 (11.4)2 *................................................. 0:30 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8)3 *................................................. 0:40 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8)4 *................................................. 1:40 9.0 (34.1) 1.7 (6.4)5................................................... 10:30 15.0 (56.8) 3 (11.4)6................................................... 11:30 5.0 (18.9) 1.7 (6.4)7................................................... 12:00 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8)8................................................... 12:45 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8)9................................................... 12:50 1.0 (3.8) 1 (3.8)10.................................................. 16:00 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8)11.................................................. 16:15 2.0 (7.6) 1 (3.8)12.................................................. 16:30 2.0 (7.6) 1.7 (6.4)13.................................................. 16:45 2.0 (7.6) 1.7 (6.4)14.................................................. 17:00 14.0 (53.0) 3 (11.4)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Volume Drawn Per Day: 84 gallons (318 L)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------* Denotes draws in first draw cluster.
6. Computations
6.1 First-Hour Rating Computation. For the case in which the final draw is initiated at or prior to one hour from the start of the test, the first-hour rating, Fhr, shall be computed using, [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.067 Where: n = the number of draws that are completed during the first-hour rating
test.V*i = the volume of water removed during the ith draw of the
first-hour rating test, gal (L) or, if the mass of water is
being measured,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.068
Where: M*i = the mass of water removed during the ith draw of the
first-hour rating test, lb (kg).[rho] = the water density corresponding to the average outlet
temperature measured during the ith draw, (T**del,i), lb/gal
(kg/L).
For the case in which a draw is not in progress at one hour from the start of the test and a final draw is imposed at the elapsed time of one hour, the first-hour rating shall be calculated using[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.069 where n and V*i are the same quantities as defined above, andV*n = the volume of water drawn during the nth (final) draw
of the first-hour rating test, gal (L).TT*del,n-1 = the average water outlet temperature measured
during the (n-1)th draw of the first-hour rating test, [deg]F
( [deg]C).TT*del,n = the average water outlet temperature measured
during the nth (final) draw of the first-hour rating test,
[deg]F ( [deg]C).T*min,n-1 = the minimum water outlet temperature measured
during the (n-1)th draw of the first-hour rating test, [deg]F
( [deg]C).
6.2 Maximum GPM (L/min) Rating Computation. Compute the maximum GPM (L/min) rating, Fmax, as: [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.070 Where: M10m = the mass of water collected during the 10-minute test,
lb (kg).TTdel = the average delivery temperature, [deg]F ( [deg]C).TTin = the average inlet temperature, [deg]F ( [deg]C).[rho] = the density of water at the average delivery temperature, lb/gal
(kg/L).
If a water meter is used, the maximum GPM (L/min) rating is computed as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.071 Where: V10m = the volume of water measured during the 10-minute
test, gal (L).TTdel = as defined in this section.TTin = as defined in this section.
6.3 Computations for Water Heaters with a Rated Storage Volume Greater Than or Equal to 2 Gallons.
6.3.1 Storage Tank Capacity. The storage tank capacity, Vst, is computed as follows: [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.072 Where: Vst = the storage capacity of the water heater, gal (L)Wf = the weight of the storage tank when completely filled
with water, lb (kg)Wt = the (tare) weight of the storage tank when completely
empty, lb (kg)[rho] = the density of water used to fill the tank measured at the
temperature of the water, lb/gal (kg/L)
6.3.2 Recovery Efficiency. The recovery efficiency for gas, oil, and heat pump storage-type water heaters, [eta]r, is computed as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.073 Where: M1 = total mass removed from the start of the 24-hour
simulated-use test to the end of the first recovery period, lb
(kg), or, if the volume of water is being measured,M1 = V1[rho]1 Where: V1 = total volume removed from the start of the 24-hour
simulated-use test to the end of the first recovery period,
gal (L).[rho]1 = density of the water at the water temperature
measured at the point where the flow volume is measured, lb/
gal (kg/L).Cp1 = specific heat of the withdrawn water evaluated at
(TTdel,1 + TTin,1)/2, Btu/(lb[middot]
[deg]F) (kJ/(kg[middot] [deg]C))TTdel,1 = average water outlet temperature measured during
the draws from the start of the 24-hour simulated-use test to
the end of the first recovery period, [deg]F ( [deg]C).TTin,1 = average water inlet temperature measured during the
draws from the start of the 24-hour simulated-use test to the
end of the first recovery period, [deg]F ( [deg]C).Vst = as defined in section 6.3.1.[rho]2 = density of stored hot water evaluated at
(TTmax,1 + TTo)/2, lb/gal (kg/L).Cp2 = specific heat of stored hot water evaluated at
(TTmax,1 + TTo)/2, Btu/(lb[middot]
[deg]F) (kJ/(kg[middot] [deg]C).TTmax,1 = maximum mean tank temperature recorded after cut-
out following the first recovery of the 24-hour simulated use
test, [deg]F ( [deg]C).TTo = maximum mean tank temperature recorded prior to the
first draw of the 24-hour simulated-use test, [deg]F (
[deg]C).Qr = the total energy used by the water heater between cut-
out prior to the first draw and cut-out following the first
recovery period, including auxiliary energy such as pilot
lights, pumps, fans, etc., Btu (kJ). (Electrical auxiliary
energy shall be converted to thermal energy using the
following conversion: 1 kWh = 3412 Btu).
The recovery efficiency for electric water heaters with immersed heating elements is assumed to be 98 percent.
6.3.3 Hourly Standby Losses. The energy consumed as part of the standby loss test of the 24-hour simulated-use test, Qstby, is computed as: Qstby = Qsu,f - Qsu,o Where:
Qsu,0 = cumulative energy consumption of the water heater from the start of the 24-hour simulated-use test to the time at which the maximum mean tank temperature is attained starting five minutes after the recovery following the end of the first draw cluster, Btu (kJ).
Qsu,f = cumulative energy consumption of the water heater from the start of the 24-hour simulated-use test to the minute prior to the start of the draw following the end of the first draw cluster or the minute prior to a recovery occurring at the start of the draw following the end of the first draw cluster, Btu (kJ).
The hourly standby energy losses are computed as: [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.075 Where: Qhr = the hourly standby energy losses of the water heater,
Btu/h (kJ/h).Vst = as defined in section 6.3.1 of this appendix.[rho] = density of stored hot water, (TTsu,f +
TTsu,0)/2, lb/gal (kg/L).Cp = specific heat of the stored water, (TTsu,f +
TTsu,0)/2, Btu/(lb[middot]F), (kJ/(kg[middot]K))TTsu,f = the mean tank temperature observed at the minute
prior to the start of the draw following the first draw
cluster or the minute prior to a recovery occurring at the
start of the draw following the end of the first draw cluster,
[deg]F ( [deg]C).TTsu,0 = the maximum mean tank temperature observed starting
five minutes after the first recovery following the final draw
of the first draw cluster, [deg]F ( [deg]C).[eta]r = as defined in section 6.3.2 of this appendix.[tau]stby,1 = elapsed time between the time at which the
maximum mean tank temperature is observed starting five
minutes after recovery from the first draw cluster and the
minute prior to the start of the first draw following the end
of the first draw cluster of the 24-hour simulated-use test or
the minute prior to a recovery occurring at the start of the
draw following the end of the first draw cluster, h.
The standby heat loss coefficient for the tank is computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.076
Where: UA = standby heat loss coefficient of the storage tank, Btu/(h[middot]
[deg]F), (kJ/(h[middot] [deg]C).TTt,stby,1 = overall average storage tank temperature between
the time when the maximum mean tank temperature is observed
starting five minutes after cut-out following the first draw
cluster and the minute prior to commencement of the next draw
following the first draw cluster of the 24-hour simulated-use
test or the minute prior to a recovery occurring at the start
of the draw following the end of the first draw cluster,
[deg]F ( [deg]C).TTa,stby,1 = overall average ambient temperature between the
time when the maximum mean tank temperature is observed
starting five minutes after cut-out following the first draw
cluster and the minute prior to commencement of the next draw
following the first draw cluster of the 24-hour simulated-use
test or the minute prior to a recovery occurring at the start
of the draw following the end of the first draw cluster,
[deg]F ( [deg]C).
6.3.4 Daily Water Heating Energy Consumption. The daily water heating energy consumption, Qd, is computed as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.077 Where: Q = Qf + Qe = total energy used by the water
heater during the 24-hour simulated-use test, including
auxiliary energy such as pilot lights, pumps, fans, etc., Btu
(kJ). (Electrical energy shall be converted to thermal energy
using the following conversion: 1kWh = 3412 Btu.)Qf = total fossil fuel energy used by the water heater during
the 24-hour simulated-use test, Btu (kJ).Qe = total electrical energy used during the 24-hour
simulated-use test, Btu (kJ).Vst = as defined in section 6.3.1 of this appendix.[rho] = density of the stored hot water, evaluated at (TT24 +
TT0)/2, lb/gal (kg/L)Cp = specific heat of the stored water, evaluated at
(TT24 + TT0)/2, Btu/(lb[middot]F), (kJ/
(kg[middot]K)).TT24 = mean tank temperature at the end of the 24-hour
simulated-use test, [deg]F ( [deg]C).TT0 = mean tank temperature at the beginning of the 24-hour
simulated-use test, recorded one minute before the first draw
is initiated, [deg]F ( [deg]C).[eta]r = as defined in section 6.3.2 of this appendix.
6.3.5 Adjusted Daily Water Heating Energy Consumption. The adjusted daily water heating energy consumption, Qda, takes into account that the ambient temperature may differ from the nominal value of 67.5[emsp14] [deg]F (19.7 [deg]C) due to the allowable variation in surrounding ambient temperature of 65[emsp14] [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C) to 70 [deg]C (21.1 [deg]C). The adjusted daily water heating energy consumption is computed as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.078 Where: Qda = the adjusted daily water heating energy consumption,
Btu (kJ).Qd = as defined in section 6.3.4 of this appendix.TTa,stby,2 = the average ambient temperature during the total
standby portion, [tau]stby,2, of the 24-hour
simulated-use test, [deg]F ( [deg]C).UA = as defined in section 6.3.3 of this appendix.[tau]stby,2 = the number of hours during the 24-hour
simulated-use test when water is not being withdrawn from the
water heater.
A modification is also needed to take into account that the temperature difference between the outlet water temperature and supply water temperature may not be equivalent to the nominal value of 67[emsp14] [deg]F (125[emsp14] [deg]F-58[emsp14] [deg]F) or 37.3 [deg]C (51.7 [deg]C-14.4 [deg]C). The following equations adjust the experimental data to a nominal 67 [deg]F(37.3 [deg]C) temperature rise.
The energy used to heat water, Btu/day (kJ/day), may be computed as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.079
Where: N = total number of draws in the draw pattern.Mi = the mass withdrawn for the ith draw (i = 1 to N), lb
(kg)Cpi = the specific heat of the water of the ith draw
evaluated at (TTdel,i + TTin,i)/2, Btu/
(lb[middot] [deg]F) (kJ/(kg[middot] [deg]C)).TTdel,i = the average water outlet temperature measured
during the ith draw (i = 1 to N), [deg]F ( [deg]C).TTin,i = the average water inlet temperature measured during
the ith draw (i = 1 to N), [deg]F ( [deg]C).[eta]r = as defined in section 6.3.2 of this appendix.
The energy required to heat the same quantity of water over a 67[emsp14] [deg]F (37.3 [deg]C) temperature rise, Btu/day (kJ/day), is: [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.080
The difference between these two values is: QHWD = QHW,67 [deg]F - QHWor QHWD = QHW,37.3 [deg]C - QHW This difference (QHWD) must be added to the adjusted daily water heating energy consumption value. Thus, the daily energy consumption value which takes into account that the ambient temperature may not be 67.5 [deg]F (19.7 [deg]C) and that the temperature rise across the storage tank may not be 67 [deg]F (37.3 [deg]C) is: Qdm = Qda + QHWD
6.3.6 Uniform Energy Factor. The uniform energy factor, UEF, is computed as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.082 Where: N = total number of draws in the draw patternQdm = the modified daily water heating energy consumption as
computed in accordance with section 6.3.5 of this appendix,
Btu (kJ)Mi = the mass withdrawn for the ith draw (i = 1 to N), lb
(kg)Cpi = the specific heat of the water of the ith draw,
evaluated at (125[emsp14] [deg]F + 58[emsp14] [deg]F)/2 =
91.5[emsp14] [deg]F ((51.7[emsp14] [deg]C + 14.4[emsp14]
[deg]C)/2 = 33 [deg]C), Btu/(lb[middot] [deg]F) (kJ/
(kg[middot] [deg]C)).
6.3.7 Annual Energy Consumption. The annual energy consumption for water heaters with rated storage volumes greater than or equal to 2 gallons is computed as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.083 Where: UEF = the uniform energy factor as computed in accordance with section
6.3.6 of this appendix 365 = the number of days in a yearV = the volume of hot water drawn during the applicable draw pattern,
gallons= 10 for the very-small-usage draw pattern= 38 for the low-usage draw pattern= 55 for the medium-usage draw pattern= 84 for high-usage draw pattern[rho] = 8.24 lbm/gallon, the density of water at 125[emsp14]
[deg]FCP = 1.00 Btu/lbm[emsp14] [deg]F, the specific
heat of water at 91.5[emsp14] [deg]F67 = the nominal temperature difference between inlet and outlet water
6.3.8 Annual Electrical Energy Consumption. The annual electrical energy consumption in kilowatt-hours for water heaters with rated storage volumes greater than or equal to 2 gallons, Eannual,e, is computed as: Eannual,e = Eannual*(Qe/Q)/3412 Where: Eannual = the annual energy consumption as determined in
accordance with section 6.3.7, Btu (kJ)Qe = the daily electrical energy consumption as defined in
section 6.3.4 of this appendix, Btu (kJ).Q = total energy used by the water heater during the 24-hour simulated-
use test in accordance with section 6.3.4 of this appendix,
Btu (kJ)3412 = conversion factor from Btu to kWh
6.3.9 Annual Fossil Fuel Energy Consumption. The annual fossil fuel energy consumption for water heaters with rated storage volumes greater than or equal to 2 gallons, Eannual,f, is computed as: Eannual,f = Eannual - (Eannual,e x
3412) Where: Eannual = the annual energy consumption as determined in
accordance with section 6.3.7 of this appendix, Btu (kJ)Eannual,e = the annual electrical energy consumption as
determined in accordance with section 6.3.8 of this appendix,
kWh3412 = conversion factor from kWh to Btu
6.4 Computations for Water Heaters With Rated Storage Volume Less Than 2 Gallons.
6.4.1 Recovery Efficiency. The recovery efficiency, [eta]r, is computed as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.084 Where: M1 = total mass removed during the first draw of the 24-hour
simulated-use test, lb (kg), or, if the volume of water is
being measured, M1 = V1 [middot] [rho]Where: V1 = total volume removed during the first draw of the 24-
hour simulated-use test, gal (L).[rho] = density of the water at the water temperature measured at the
point where the flow volume is measured, lb/gal(kg/L).Cp1 = specific heat of the withdrawn water,
(TTdel,1 [mnplus] TTin,1)/2, Btu/(lb
[middot] [deg]F) (kJ/(kg [middot] [deg]C)).TTdel,1 = average water outlet temperature measured during
the first draw of the 24-hour simulated-use test, [deg]F (
[deg]C).TTin,1 = average water inlet temperature measured during the
first draw of the 24-hour simulated-use test, [deg]F (
[deg]C).Qr = the total energy used by the water heater between cut-
out prior to the first draw and cut-out following the first
draw, including auxiliary energy such as pilot lights, pumps,
fans, etc., Btu (kJ). (Electrical auxiliary energy shall be
converted to thermal energy using the following conversion: 1
kWh = 3412 Btu.)
6.4.2 Daily Water Heating Energy Consumption. The daily water heating energy consumption, Qd, is computed as: Qd = Q Where: Q = Qf + Qe = the energy used by the water heater
during the 24-hour simulated-use test.Qf = total fossil fuel energy used by the water heater during
the 24-hour simulated-use test, Btu (kJ).Qe = total electrical energy used during the 24-hour
simulated-use test, Btu (kJ).
A modification is needed to take into account that the temperature difference between the outlet water temperature and supply water temperature may not be equivalent to the nominal value of 67 [deg]F (125 [deg]F-58 [deg]F) or 37.3 [deg]C (51.7 [deg]C-14.4 [deg]C). The following equations adjust the experimental data to a nominal 67 [deg]F (37.3 [deg]C) temperature rise.
The energy used to heat water may be computed as: [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.085 Where: N = total number of draws in the draw patternMi = the mass withdrawn for the ith draw(i = 1 to N), lb (kg)Cpi = the specific heat of the water of the ith draw
evaluated at (TTdel,i + TTin,i)/2, Btu/
(lb [middot] [deg]F) (kJ/(kg [middot] [deg]C)).TTdel,i = the average water outlet temperature measured
during the ith draw (i = 1 to N), [deg]F ( [deg]C).TTin,i = the average water inlet temperature measured during
the ith draw (i = 1 to N), [deg]F ( [deg]C).[eta]r = as defined in section 6.4.1 of this appendix.
The energy required to heat the same quantity of water over a 67 [deg]F (37.3 [deg]C) temperature rise is:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.086 Where: N = total number of draws in the draw patternMi = the mass withdrawn during the ith draw, lb (kg)Cpi = the specific heat of water of the ith draw, Btu/(lb
[middot] [deg]F) (kJ/(kg [middot] [deg]C))[eta]r = as defined in section 6.4.1 of this appendix.
The difference between these two values is:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.095
This difference (QHWD) must be added to the daily water heating energy consumption value. Thus, the daily energy consumption value, which takes into account that the temperature rise across the water heater may not be 67 [deg]F (37.3 [deg]C), is: Qdm = Qd + QHWD
6.4.3 Uniform Energy Factor. The uniform energy factor, UEF, is computed as: [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.087 Where: N = total number of draws in the draw patternQdm = the modified daily water heating energy consumption as
computed in accordance with section 6.4.2 of this appendix,
Btu (kJ)Mi = the mass withdrawn for the ith draw(i = 1 to N), lb (kg)Cpi = the specific heat of the water at the ith draw,
evaluated at (125 [deg]F + 58 [deg]F)/2 = 91.5 [deg]F ((51.7
[deg]C + 14.4 [deg]C)/2 = 33.1 [deg]C), Btu/(lb [middot]
[deg]F) (kJ/(kg [middot] [deg]C)).
6.4.4 Annual Energy Consumption. The annual energy consumption for water heaters with rated storage volumes less than 2 gallons, Eannual, is computed as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.088 Where: UEF = the uniform energy factor as computed in accordance with section
6.4.3 of this appendix365 = the number of days in a year.V = the volume of hot water drawn during the applicable draw pattern,
gallons= 10 for the very-small-usage draw pattern= 38 for the low-usage draw pattern= 55 for the medium-usage draw pattern= 84 for high-usage draw pattern[rho] = 8.24 lbm/gallon, the density of water at 125[emsp14]
[deg]FCP = 1.00 Btu/lbm [deg]F, the specific heat of
water at 91.5[emsp14] [deg]F67 = the nominal temperature difference between inlet and outlet water
6.4.5 Annual Electrical Energy Consumption. The annual electrical energy consumption in kilowatt-hours for water heaters with rated storage volumes less than 2 gallons, Eannual, e, is computed as: Eannual,e = Eannual*(Qe/Q)/3412 Where: Qe = the daily electrical energy consumption as defined in
section 6.4.2 of this appendix, Btu (kJ)Eannual = the annual energy consumption as determined in
accordance with section 6.4.4 of this appendix, Btu (kJ)Q = total energy used by the water heater during the 24-hour simulated-
use test in accordance with section 6.4.2 of this appendix,
Btu (kJ)Qdm = the modified daily water heating energy consumption as
computed in accordance with section 6.4.2 of this appendix,
Btu (kJ)3412 = conversion factor from Btu to kWh
6.4.6 Annual Fossil Fuel Energy Consumption. The annual fossil fuel energy consumption for water heaters with rated storage volumes less than 2 gallons, Eannual,f, is computed as: Eannual,f = Eannual-(Eannual,e x 3412) Where: Eannual,e = the annual electrical energy consumption as
defined in section 6.4.5 of this appendix, kWh.Eannual = the annual energy consumption as defined in section
6.4.4 of this appendix, Btu (kJ)3412 = conversion factor from kWh to Btu [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.089 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.090 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.091 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.092 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.093 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11JY14.094
Sec. Appendix F to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Room Air Conditioners
Note: Manufacturers are not required to use the test procedures and calculations that refer to standby mode and off mode energy consumption, (specifically, sections 2.2, 3.2, 4.2, and 5.3 of this appendix F) until the compliance date of any amended energy conservation standards for room air conditioners at 10 CFR 430.32(b).
1. Definitions.
1.1 ``Active mode'' means a mode in which the room air conditioner is connected to a mains power source, has been activated and is performing the main function of cooling or heating the conditioned space, or circulating air through activation of its fan or blower, with or without energizing active air-cleaning components or devices such as ultraviolet (UV) radiation, electrostatic filters, ozone generators, or other air-cleaning devices.
1.2 ``ANSI/AHAM RAC-1'' means the test standard published jointly by the American National Standards Institute and the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers, titled ``Room Air Conditioners,'' Standard RAC-1-2008 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.3 ``ANSI/ASHRAE 16'' means the test standard published jointly by the American National Standards Institute and the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers titled ``Method of Testing for Rating Room Air Conditioners and Packaged Terminal Air Conditioners,'' Standard 16-1983 (RA 2009) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.4 ``IEC 62301'' means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, (``IEC''), titled ``Household electrical appliances--Measurement of standby power,'' Publication 62301 (first edition June 2005), (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.5 ``Inactive mode'' means a standby mode that facilitates the activation of active mode by remote switch (including remote control) or internal sensor or which provides continuous status display.
1.6 ``Off mode'' means a mode in which a room air conditioner is connected to a mains power source and is not providing any active or standby mode function and where the mode may persist for an indefinite time. An indicator that only shows the user that the product is in the off position is included within the clasification of an off mode.
1.7 ``Standby mode'' means any product modes where the where the energy using product is connected to a mains power source and offers one or more of the following user oriented or protective functions which may persist for an indefinite time:
(a) To facilitate the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer.
(b) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that provides regular scheduled tasks (e.g., switching) and that operates on a continuous basis.
2. Test methods.
2.1 Cooling. The test method for testing room air conditioners in cooling mode shall consist of application of the methods and conditions in ANSI/AHAM RAC-1 sections 4, 5, 6.1, and 6.5 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), and in ANSI/ASHRAE 16 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
2.2 Standby and off modes. The method for testing room air conditioners in standby and off modes shall consist of application of the methods and conditions in IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), as modified by the requirements of this standard. The testing may be conducted in test facilities used for testing cooling performance. If testing is not conducted in such a facility, the test facility shall comply with IEC 62301 section 4.2.
3. Test conditions.
3.1 Cooling mode. Establish the test conditions described in sections 4 and 5 of ANSI/AHAM RAC-1 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 16 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
3.2 Standby and off modes.
3.2.1 Test room conditions. Maintain the indoor test conditions as required by section 4.2 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). If the standby and off mode testing is conducted in a facility that is also used for testing cooling performance, maintain the outdoor test conditions either as required by section 4.2 of IEC 62301 or as described in section 3.1. If the unit is equipped with an outdoor air ventilation damper, close this damper during testing.
3.2.2 Power supply. Maintain power supply conditions specified in section 4.3 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). Use room air conditioner nameplate voltage and frequency as the basis for power supply conditions. Maintain power supply voltage waveform according to the requirements of section 4.4 of IEC 62301.
3.2.3 Watt meter. The watt meter used to measure standby mode and off mode power consumption of the room air conditioner shall have the resolution specified in section 4, paragraph 4.5 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). The watt meter shall also be able to record a ``true'' average power specified in section 5, paragraph 5.3.2(a) of IEC 62301.
4. Measurements.
4.1 Cooling mode. Measure the quantities delineated in section 5 of ANSI/AHAM RAC-1 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
4.2 Standby and off modes. Establish the testing conditions set forth in section 3.2. Prior to the initiation of the test measurements, the room air conditioner shall also be installed in accordance with section 5, paragraph 5.2 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). For room air conditioners that drop from a higher power state to a lower power state as discussed in section 5, paragraph 5.1, note 1 of IEC 62301, allow sufficient time for the room air conditioner to reach the lower power state before proceeding with the test measurement. Follow the test procedure specified in section 5, paragraph 5.3 of IEC 62301 for testing in each possible mode as described in 4.2.1 and 4.2.2, except allow the product to stabilize for 5 to 10 minutes and use an energy use measurement period of 5 minutes. For units in which power varies over a cycle, as described in section 5, paragraph 5.3.2 of IEC 62301, use the average power approach in paragraph 5.3.2(a).
4.2.1 If a room air conditioner has an inactive mode, as defined in 1.5, measure and record the average inactive mode power of the room air conditioner, PIA, in watts.
4.2.2 If a room air conditioner has an off mode, as defined in 1.6, measure and record the average off mode power of the room air conditioner, POFF, in watts.
5. Calculations.
5.1 Calculate the cooling capacity (expressed in Btu/hr) as required in section 6.1 of ANSI/AHAM RAC-1 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 16 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
5.2 Determine the electrical power input (expressed in watts) as required by section 6.5 of ANSI/AHAM RAC-1 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 16 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
5.3 Standby mode and off mode annual energy consumption. Calculate the standby mode and off mode annual energy consumption for room air conditioners, ETSO, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year, according to the following: ETSO = [(PIA x SIA) + (POFF x SOFF)] x K Where: PIA = room air conditioner inactive mode power, in watts, as
measured in section 4.2.1POFF = room air conditioner off mode power, in watts, as
measured in section 4.2.2.If the room air conditioner has both inactive mode and off mode,
SIA and SOFF both equal 5,115 / 2 =
2,557.5, where 5,115 is the total inactive and off mode annual
hours;If the room air conditioner has an inactive mode but no off mode, the
inactive mode annual hours, SIA, is equal to 5,115
and the off mode annual hours, SOFF, is equal to 0;If the room air conditioner has an off mode but no inactive mode,
SIA is equal to 0 and SOFF is equal to
STOT;K = 0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours. [76 FR 1035, Jan. 6, 2011]
Sec. Appendix G to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Unvented Home Heating Equipment
1. Testing conditions.
1.1 Installation.
1.1.1 Electric heater. Install heater according to manufacturer's instructions. Heaters shall be connected to an electrical supply circuit of nameplate voltage with a wattmeter installed in the circuit. The wattmeter shall have a maximum error not greater than one percent.
1.1.2 Unvented gas heater. Install heater according to manufacturer's instructions. Heaters shall be connected to a gas supply line with a gas displacement meter installed between the supply line and the heater according to manufacturer's specifications. The gas displacement meter shall have a maximum error not greater than one percent. Gas heaters with electrical auxiliaries shall be connected to an electrical supply circuit of nameplate voltage with a wattmeter installed in the circuit. The wattmeter shall have a maximum error not greater than one percent.
1.1.3 Unvented oil heater. Install heater according to manufacturer's instructions. Oil heaters with electric auxiliaries shall be connected to an electrical supply circuit of nameplate voltage with a wattmeter installed in the circuit. The wattmeter shall have a maximum error not greater than one percent.
1.2 Temperature regulating controls. All temperature regulating controls shall be shorted out of the circuit or adjusted so that they will not operate during the test period.
1.3 Fan controls. All fan controls shall be set at the highest fan speed setting.
1.4 Energy supply.
1.4.1 Electrical supply. Supply power to the heater within one percent of the nameplate voltage.
1.4.2 Natural gas supply. For an unvented gas heater utilizing natural gas, maintain the gas supply to the heater with a normal inlet test pressure immediately ahead of all controls at 7 to 10 inches of water column. The regulator outlet pressure at normal supply test pressure shall be approximately that recommended by the manufacturer. The natural gas supplied should have a higher heating value within 5 percent of 1,025 Btu's per standard cubic foot. Determine the higher heating value, in Btu's per standard cubic foot, for the natural gas to be used in the test, with an error no greater than one percent. Alternatively, the test can be conducted using ``bottled'' natural gas of a higher heating value within 5 percent of 1,025 Btu's per standard cubic foot as long as the actual higher heating value of the bottled natural gas has been determined with an error no greater than one percent as certified by the supplier.
1.4.3 Propane gas supply. For an unvented gas heater utilizing propane, maintain the gas supply to the heater with a normal inlet test pressure immediately ahead of all controls at 11 to 13 inches of water column. The regulator outlet pressure at normal supply test pressure shall be that recommended by the manufacturer. The propane supplied should have a higher heating value of within5 percent of 2,500 Btu's per standard cubic foot. Determine the higher heating value in Btu's per standard foot, for the propane to be used in the test, with an error no greater than one percent. Alternatively, the test can be conducted using ``bottled'' propane of a higher heating value within 5 percent of 2,500 Btu's per standard cubic foot as long as the actual higher heating value of the bottled propane has been determined with an error no greater than one percent as certified by the supplier.
1.4.4 Oil supply. For an unvented oil heater utilizing kerosene, determine the higher heating value in Btu's per gallon with an error no greater than one percent. Alternatively, the test can be conducted using a tested fuel of a higher heating value within 5 percent of 137,400 Btu's per gallon as long as the actual higher heating value of the tested fuel has been determined with an error no greater than one percent as certified by the supplier.
1.5 Energy flow instrumentation. Install one or more energy flow instruments which measure, as appropriate and with an error no greater than one percent, the quantity of electrical energy, natural gas, propane gas, or oil supplied to the heater.
2. Testing and measurements.
2.1 Electric power measurement. Establish the test conditions set forth in section 1 of this appendix. Allow an electric heater to warm up for at least five minutes before recording the maximum electric power measurement from the wattmeter. Record the maximum electric power (PE) expressed in kilowatts.
Allow the auxiliary electrical system of a forced air unvented gas, propane, or oil heater to operate for at least five minutes before recording the maximum auxiliary electric power measurement from the wattmeter. Record the maximum auxiliary electric power (PA) expressed in kilowatts.
2.2 Natural gas, propane, and oil measurement. Establish the test conditions as set forth in section 1 of this appendix. A natural gas, propane, or oil heater shall be operated for one hour. Using either the nameplate rating or the energy flow instrumentation set forth in section 1.5 of this appendix and the fuel supply rating set forth in sections 1.4.2, 1.4.3, or 1.4.4 of this appendix, as appropriate, determine the maximum fuel input (PF) of the heater under test in Btu's per hour. The energy flow instrumentation shall measure the maximum fuel input with an error no greater than one percent.
2.3 Pilot light measurement. Except as provided in section 2.3.1 of this appendix, measure the energy input rate to the pilot light (Qp), with an error no greater than 3 percent, for unvented heaters so equipped.
2.3.1 The measurement of Qp is not required for unvented heaters where the pilot light is designed to be turned off by the user when the heater is not in use (i.e., for units where turning the control to the OFF position will shut off the gas supply to the burner(s) and the pilot light). This provision applies only if an instruction to turn off the unit is provided on the heater near the gas control value (e.g., by label) by the manufacturer.
2.4 Electrical standby mode power measurement. Except as provided in section 2.4.1 of this appendix, for all electric heaters and unvented heaters with electrical auxiliaries, measure the standby power (PW,SB) in accordance with the procedures in IEC 62301 Second Edition (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), with all electrical auxiliaries not activated. Voltage shall be as specified in section 1.4.1 Electrical supply of this appendix. The recorded standby power (PW,SB) shall be rounded to the second decimal place, and for loads greater than or equal to 10W, at least three significant figures shall be reported.
2.4.1 The measurement of PW,SB is not required for heaters designed to be turned off by the user when the heater is not in use (i.e., for units where turning the control to the OFF position will shut off the electrical supply to the heater). This provision applies only if an instruction to turn off the unit is provided on the heater (e.g., by label) by the manufacturer.
3. Calculations.
3.1 Annual energy consumption for primary electric heaters. For primary electric heaters, calculate the annual energy consumption (EE) expressed in kilowatt-hours per year and defined as: EE = 2080(0.77)DHR where: 2080 = national average annual heating load hours0.77 = adjustment factorDHR = design heating requirement and is equal to PE /1.2 in
kilowatts.PE = as defined in 2.1 of this appendix1.2 = typical oversizing factor for primary electric heaters
3.2 Annual energy consumption for primary electric heaters by geographic region of the United States. For primary electric heaters, calculate the annual energy consumption by geographic region of the United States (ER) expressed in kilowatt-hours per year and defined as: ER = HLH(0.77) (DHR) where: HLH = heating load hours for a specific region determined from Figure 1
of this appendix in hours 0.77 = as defined in 3.1 of this appendixDHR = as defined in 3.1 of this appendix
3.3 Rated output for electric heaters. Calculate the rated output (Qout) for electric heaters, expressed in Btu's per hour, and defined as: Qout = PE (3,412 Btu/kWh) where: PE = as defined in 2.1 of this appendix
3.4 Rated output for unvented heaters using either natural gas, propane, or oil. For unvented heaters using either natural gas, propane, or oil equipped without auxiliary electrical systems, the rated output (Qout), expressed in Btu's per hour, is equal to PF, as determined in section 2.2 of this appendix.
For unvented heaters using either natural gas, propane, or oil equipped with auxiliary electrical systems, calculate the rated output (Qout), expressed in Btu's per hour, and defined as: Qout = PF + PA (3,412 Btu/kWh) where: PF = as defined in 2.2 of this appendix in Btu/hrPA = as defined in 2.1 of this appendix in Btu/hr[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.002 (Energy Policy and Conservation Act, Pub. L. 94-163, as amended by Pub. L. 94-385; Federal Energy Administration Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93-275, as amended by Pub. L. 94-385; Department of Energy Organization Act, Pub. L. 95-91; E.O. 11790, 39 FR 23185) [43 FR 20132, May 10, 1978. Redesignated and amended at 44 FR 37938, June 29, 1979; 49 FR 12157, Mar. 28, 1984; 77 FR 74571, Dec. 17, 2012]
Sec. Appendix H to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Power Consumption of Television Sets
Note: After April 23, 2014, any representations made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of televisions must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. Given that after April 23, 2014 representations with respect to the energy use or efficiency of televisions must be made in accordance with tests conducted pursuant to this appendix, manufacturers may wish to begin using this test procedure as soon as possible.
1. Scope
This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure the energy and power consumption of television sets that:
(i) Have a diagonal screen size of at least fifteen inches; and
(ii) Are powered by mains power (including TVs with auxiliary batteries but not TVs with main batteries).
2. Definitions and Symbols
2.1. Additional functions shall be defined using the additional functions definition in section 3.1.1 of IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3).
2.2. Auxiliary Battery means a battery capable of powering a clock or retaining TV settings but is incapable of powering the TV to produce dynamic video.
2.3. Brightest selectable preset picture setting means the preset picture setting in which the television produces the highest screen luminance within either the home or retail configuration.
2.4. Default picture setting means the preset picture setting that the TV enters into immediately after making a selection from the forced menu. If the TV does not have a forced menu, this is the as-shipped preset picture setting.
2.5. Forced menu means a series of menus which require the selection of initial settings before allowing the user to utilize primary functions. Within these menus contains an option to choose the viewing environment between retail and home configurations.
2.6. Home configuration means the TV configuration selected from the forced menu which is designed for typical consumer viewing and is recommended by the manufacturer for home environments.
2.7. IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, entitled ``Methods of measurement of the power consumption of audio, video, and related equipment,'' IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3).
2.8. IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 Blu-ray Disc\TM\ Dynamic Broadcast-Content Video Signal means the test video content published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, entitled ``IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0, video content--BD, video content for IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 on Blu-rayTM Disc,'' IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3).
2.9. IEC 62301 Ed. 2.0 means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, entitled ``Household electrical appliances--Measurement of standby power,'' IEC 62301 Ed. 2.0 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3).
2.10. Illuminance means the luminous flux per unit area of light illuminating a given surface, expressed in units of lux (lx).
2.11. Luminance means the photometric measure of the luminous intensity per unit area of light traveling in a given direction, expressed in units of candelas per square meter (cd/m\2\).
2.12. Main battery means a battery capable of powering the TV to produce dynamic video without the support of mains power.
2.13. Off mode means the mode of operation in which the TV is connected to mains power, produces neither sound nor picture, and cannot be switched into any other mode of operation with the remote control unit, an internal signal, or external signal.
2.14. On mode means the mode of operation in which the TV is connected to mains power, and is capable of producing dynamic video.
2.15. Preset picture setting means a preprogrammed factory setting obtained from the TV menu with pre-determined picture parameters such as brightness, contrast, color, sharpness, etc. Preset picture settings can be selected within the home or retail mode.
2.16. Retail configuration means the TV configuration selected from the forced menu which is designed to highlight the TV's features in a retail environment. This configuration may display demos, disable configurable settings, or increase screen brightness in a manner which is not desirable for typical consumer viewing.
2.17. Special functions shall be defined using the definition in section 3.1.18 of IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3).
2.18. Standby-passive mode means the mode of operation in which the TV is connected to mains power, produces neither sound nor picture, and can be switched into another mode with only the remote control unit or an internal signal.
2.19. Standby-active, high mode means the mode of operation in which the TV is connected to mains power, produces neither sound nor picture, is exchanging/receiving data with/from an external source, and can be switched into another mode of operation with the remote control unit, an internal signal, or an external signal.
2.20. Standby-active, low mode means the mode of operation in which the TV is connected to mains power, produces neither sound nor picture, can be switched into another mode with the remote control unit or an internal signal, and can additionally be switched into another mode with an external signal.
2.21. Symbol usage. The following identity relationships are provided to help clarify the symbols used throughout this test procedure.ABC--Automatic Brightness ControlAEC--Annual Energy ConsumptionBD--Blu-ray Disc\TM\DVD--Digital Versatile Disc\TM\DVI--Digital Visual InterfaceHDMI[supreg]--High Definition Multimedia InterfaceLbrightest--Screen luminance in brightest selectable preset picture setting within the home configurationLdefault--Screen luminance in default picture setting within the home configurationLdefault--retail--Screen luminance in default picture setting within the retail configurationLAN--Local Area NetworkPon--Power consumed in on modeP3--Average power consumed in on mode, ABC enabled, 3 lxP12--Average power consumed in on mode, ABC enabled, 12 lxP35--Average power consumed in on mode, ABC enabled, 35 lxP100--Average power consumed in on mode, ABC enabled, 100 lxPstandby-passive--Power consumption in standby-passive modePstandby-active, low--Power consumption in standby-active, low modePoff--Power consumption in off modeSTB--Set-top BoxTHD--Total Harmonic DistortionTV--Television SetUSB--Universal Serial BusW3--Percent weighting for on mode, ABC enabled, 3 lxW12--Percent weighting for on mode, ABC enabled, 12 lxW35--Percent weighting for on mode, ABC enabled, 35 lxW100--Percent weighting for on mode, ABC enabled, 100 lxWAN--Wide Area Network
3. Accuracy and Precision of Measurement Equipment
3.1. Voltage and Frequency. Set the test voltage and frequency to the rated electrical supply values of the region in accordance with Table 1 in section 4.3.1 of IEC 62301 Ed. 2.0
3.2. Power Supply Requirements. The TV power use shall be measured using a power supply that meets the specifications found in section 4.3.1 of IEC 62301 Ed. 2.0 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). The THD of the supply voltage shall not exceed 5%, inclusive to the 13th order harmonic, when the unit is under test.
3.3. Power Meter Requirements. The power measurement shall be carried out directly by means of a wattmeter, a wattmeter with averaging function, or a watt-hour meter by dividing the reading by the measuring time. For TVs where the input video signal varies over time, use a wattmeter with an averaging function to carry out the measurement.
3.3.1. The sampling rate of the watt-hour meter or wattmeter with averaging function shall be one measurement per second or more frequent.
3.3.2. The power measurement instrument shall measure and record the power factor and the real power consumed during all on mode tests at the same sampling rate.
3.3.3. Power measurements of 0.5 W or greater shall be made with an uncertainty of less than or equal to 2 percent (at the 95 percent confidence level). Measurements of power of less than 0.5 W shall be made with an uncertainty of less than or equal to 0.01 W (at the 95 percent confidence level). The power measurement instrument shall have a resolution of:
0.01 W or better for power measurements of 10 W or less;
0.1 W or better for power measurements of greater than 10 W up to 100 W;
1 W or better for power measurements of greater than 100 W.
3.4. Luminance Meter Requirements. Contact or non-contact luminance meters shall have an accuracy of 2 percent 2 digits of the digitally displayed value. Non-contact meters are also required to have an acceptance angle of 3 degrees or less.
3.5. Illuminance Meter Requirements. All illuminance meters shall have an accuracy of 2 percent 2 digits of the digitally displayed value.
3.6. Video Input Device. The video input device (i.e. BD player) shall be capable of decoding a BD signal. The video input device manufacturer shall be different from the manufacturer of the TV under test to prevent device interaction.
4. Test Room Set-Up
4.1. Ambient Temperature Conditions. For all testing, maintain ambient temperature conditions in accordance with in section 11.4.1 of IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3).
4.2. Ambient Relative Humidity Conditions. For all testing, maintain the ambient relative humidity between 10 and 80 percent.
4.3. Room Illuminance Level. All luminance testing (with a non-contact meter) and on mode testing (with ABC enabled by default) shall be performed in a room which measures less than or equal to 1.0 lx measured at the ABC sensor while the TV is in off or a standby mode. If the TV does not have an ABC sensor, measure at the bottom center of the TV bezel.
4.4. Installation. Install the TV in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4.5. TV Placement. TVs which have an ABC sensor enabled by default shall be placed at least 0.5 meters away from any wall surface (i.e. wall, ceiling, and floor). This does not include the furnishings which the TV may be placed on or the wall which the back of the TV faces. All four corners of the face of the TV shall be placed equidistant from a vertical reference plane (e.g. wall).
5. TV and Video Signal Configuration
5.1. Additional Functions. The TV shall be set up according to the requirements in section 11.4.5 of IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3).
5.2. Video Connection Priority. The TV and the video input device shall be connected using an HDMI input cable. If the TV does not have an HDMI input terminal, the specified input terminals shall be used in the following order: Component video, S-video, and Composite video.
5.3. Input Terminal. If the TV has multiple input terminals of the same type (i.e. HDMI 1, HDMI 2), testing shall only be performed using any input terminal designed for viewing live TV or dynamic content from a BD player or STB, not from an input designed for an alternative purpose. Examples 1 and 2 provide visual explanations of this requirement.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR25OC13.010
5.4. Special Functions. The TV shall be set up according to the requirements in section 11.4.6 of IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3).
5.5. Special Function Configuration. If at any time during on mode operation a message prompt is displayed requesting the configuration of special functions, the most power consumptive configuration shall be selected. If it is unknown which configuration yields the most power consumptive state, verify the selection by measuring the power consumption of each possible configuration.
Note: The selection of the home or retail configuration within the forced menu is not considered the configuration of a special function, and is therefore exempt from this requirement.
5.6. On Mode Picture Setting. Ensure that the TV is in the default picture setting within the home configuration for all on mode tests. This picture setting shall only be changed as instructed by the luminance test.
5.7. Video Aspect Ratio. The input video signal shall be configured in accordance with section 11.4.9 of IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3)
5.8. Frame Rate. The video frame rate shall be selected in accordance with section 11.4.10 of IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3)
5.9. Sound level. The TV sound level shall be configured in accordance with section 11.4.11 of IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3)
5.10. Network Connection Configuration.
5.10.1. Network Connections and Capabilities. Network connections should be listed in the user manual. If no connections are specified in the user manual, verify that the TV does not have network capabilities by checking for the absence of physical connections and the absence of network settings in the menu. If the TV has the capability to be connected to a network but was not shipped with a required piece of hardware (e.g. wireless adapter), that connection type shall not be tested.
5.10.2. Network Configuration. If the TV is network enabled, connect it to a LAN in on mode and prior to being placed into standby mode. The LAN shall allow devices to ping other devices on the network but will not allow access to a WAN. If the TV has multiple network connections (e.g., Wi-Fi and Ethernet), the TV shall be configured and connected to a single network source in accordance with the hierarchy of connections listed in Table 1 of this section.
Table 1--Network Connection Hierarchy------------------------------------------------------------------------
Priority Network connection type------------------------------------------------------------------------1......................................... Wi-Fi (Institution of
Electrical and Electronics
Engineers--IEEE 802.11-
20072)2......................................... Ethernet (IEEE 802.3). If
the TV supports Energy
Efficient Ethernet (IEEE
802.3az-20103), then it
shall be connected to a
device that also supports
IEEE 802.3az.------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Calculation of Average Power Consumption
6.1. Average Power Calculation. For all tests in the on, standby-active, low, and standby-passive modes, the average power shall be calculated using one of the following two methods:
6.1.1. Record the accumulated energy (Ei) in kilo-watt hours (kWh) consumed over the time period specified for each test (Ti). The average power consumption is calculated as Pi = Ei/Ti.
6.1.2. Record the average power consumption (Pi) by sampling the power at a rate of at least 1 sample per second and computing the arithmetic mean of all samples over the time period specified for each test (Ti).
The resulting average power consumption value for each mode of operation shall be rounded according to the accurary requirements specified in section 3.3.3 of this section.
7. Test Measurements.
7.1. On Mode Test.
7.1.1. On Mode Stabilization. If the TV has an ABC sensor enabled by default, direct at least 300 lx into the ABC sensor. The TV shall be stabilized prior to testing on mode using the IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 Blu-ray Disc\TM\ dynamic broadcast-content video signal in accordance with section 11.4.2 of IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3).
7.1.2. On Mode Test for TVs without ABC Enabled by Default. The following test shall be performed if the TV is shipped with ABC disabled by default or the ABC function is unavailable. Display the IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 Blu-ray Disc\TM\ dynamic broadcast-content video signal for one 10-minute period (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). Measure and record the average power consumption value over the test duration as Pon.
7.1.3. On Mode Test for TVs with ABC Enabled by Default. The following test shall be performed if the TV is shipped with ABC enabled by default:
7.1.3.1. Illuminance Values. Display the IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 Blu-ray Disc\TM\ dynamic broadcast-content video signal for one 10-minute period (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) with 100 lx ( 5 lx) entering the ABC sensor. Measure and record the average power consumption value over the test duration as P100. Repeat the measurements with 35 lx ( 2 lx), 12 lx ( 1 lx), and 3 lux ( 1 lx) entering the ABC sensor and record the values as P35, P12, and P3 respectively. Testing shall be performed from the brightest to dimmest illuminance value and the values shall be changed by varying the input voltage to the light source.
Note: The 3 lx illuminance value shall be simulated using a 67 mm 2 F-stop neutral density filter. 12 lx is measured at the ABC sensor prior to the application of the neutral density filter.
7.1.3.2. On Mode Power Calculation. All illuminance values shall be weighted equally when calculating the on mode power for a TV with ABC enabled by default and shall be determined by the following equation: Pon = P100 * W100 + P35 *
W35 + P12 * W12 +
P3 * W3Where:
W100 = W35 = W12 = W3 = 0.25
7.1.3.3. Lamp Requirements. A standard spectrum, halogen incandescent aluminized reflector lamp with a lamp diameter of 95 mm (10 mm), a beam angle of 30 degrees ( 10 degrees), and a center beam candlepower of 1500 cd ( 500 cd) shall be positioned in front of the ABC sensor so that the light is directed into the sensor.
Note: Lamps with spectrum modifying qualities, such as an IR coating, are not considered to meet a standard spectrum.
7.1.3.4. Light Source Set-up. The center of the lamp shall measure 1.5 m (0.1 m) from the center of the ABC sensor. The light source shall be aligned ensuring that the center focal point of the lamp is perpendicular to the center of the ABC sensor.
7.1.3.5. Illuminance Measurement. The room illuminance shall be measured at the sensor in the direction of the light source while the TV is on and displaying the first menu from the IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 Blu-ray Disc\TM\ dynamic broadcast-content video signal.
7.2. Luminance Test.
7.2.1. Luminance Test Set-up.
7.2.1.1. Picture Setting Set-up. When transitioning from the on mode power consumption test to the luminance test, the TV shall remain in the default picture setting within the home configuration for the first luminance measurement.
7.2.1.2. ABC Configuration. The ABC sensor shall be disabled at all times during the luminance test. If the ABC sensor is incapable of being disabled through the TV settings menu, direct at least 300 lx of light into the ABC sensor.
7.2.1.3. Stabilization. Prior to the first luminance measurement, the TV must undergo a 10-minute re-stabilization period using the IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 Blu-ray DiscTM dynamic broadcast-content video signal.
7.2.2. Luminance Meter Set-up. Align the luminance meter perpendicular to the center of the TV screen. If a non-contact luminance meter is used to measure the screen luminance, the luminance measurement shall be taken at a distance capable of meeting the meter specifications outlined in section 3.1.3, and in accordance with the meter's user manual.
7.2.3. Three Vertical Bar Signal Measurement. The IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 three vertical bar signal found in section 11.5.5 of IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) shall be displayed for no more than 5 seconds when each luminance measurement is taken. The luminance measurement taken in the default picture setting within the home configuration shall be recorded as LDefault--Home.
7.2.4. Luminance in the Brightest Selectable Preset Picture Setting. Using the IEC 62087 Ed. 3.0 three vertical bar signal, determine the brightest selectable preset picture setting within the home configuration. Measure and record the screen luminance in the brightest selectable preset picture setting as LBrightest--Home.
7.2.5. Retail Configuration Luminance Measurement. If the TV has a retail configuration and the retail configuration is acceptable for making a luminance measurement, measure and record the screen luminance in the default picture setting within the retail configuration as LDefault--Retail. A retail configuration is considered acceptable for a luminance measurement if the TV does not display a demo or ticker which alters the screen content, or if such features are present, they must be capable of being disabled for the entire re-stabilization period and measurement.
7.3. Standby Mode Test.
7.3.1. Video Input Device. The video input device shall be disconnected from the TV for all testing in standby mode.
7.3.2. Standby-Passive Mode. The standby-passive mode test shall be performed according to section 5.3.1 of IEC 62301 Ed. 2.0 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). Measure and record the average power consumption value over the test duration as Pstandby-passive.
7.3.3. Standby-Active, Low Mode. The standby-active, low mode shall only be tested if the TV is capable of connecting to a network and is capable of entering this mode of operation. The standby-active, low mode test shall be performed according to section 5.3.1 of IEC 62301 Ed. 2.0 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). Measure and record the average power consumption value over the test duration as Pstandby-active,low.
7.4. Off Mode Test.
7.4.1. The off mode test shall be performed according to section 5.3.1 of IEC 62301 Ed. 2.0 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). Measure and record the average power consumption value over the test duration as Poff.
8. Annual Energy Consumption
8.1. Input Value. The annual energy consumption (AEC) of the TV shall be calculated using on mode, standby mode, and off mode power consumption values as measured pursuant to section 7.1, 7.3, and 7.4 respectively.
8.2. Rounding. Calculate the AEC of the TV using the equation below. The calculated AEC value shall be rounded as follows:
If the calculated AEC value is 100 kWh or less, the rated value shall be rounded to the nearest tenth of a kWh;
If the calculated AEC value is greater than 100 kWh, the rated value shall be rounded to the nearest kWh.
8.3. Calculations. Express the AEC in kWh per year, according to the following:AEC = 365 * (Pon * Hon +
Pstandby-active, low *
Hstandby-active, low + Pstandby-passive
* Hstandby-passive + Poff *
Hoff)/1000Where:
Pm = power measured in a given mode m (in Watts)
Hm = hours per day spent in mode m
365 = conversion factor from daily to yearly
1000 = conversion factor from watts to kilowatts
Values for Hm (in hours/day) are specified in Table 2 of this section:
Table 2--Hourly Weightings----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hstandby- Hstandby-
Standby-active, low mode Hon active, low passive Hoff----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Yes................................................................ 5 19 0 0No................................................................. 5 0 19 0---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- [78 FR 63841, Oct. 25, 2013]
Sec. Appendix I to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Conventional Ranges, Conventional
Cooking Tops, Conventional Ovens, and Microwave Ovens
Note: Any representation made after April 29, 2013 related to standby mode and off mode energy consumption of conventional ranges, conventional cooking tops, and conventional ovens, or after July 17, 2013 for standby and off mode energy consumption of microwave ovens, must be based upon results generated under this test procedure.
Any representation related to standby mode and off mode energy consumption of microwave ovens made between February 19, 2013 and July 17, 2013 may be based upon results generated under this test procedure or upon the test procedure as it appeared at 10 CFR part 430, subpart B, appendix I as contained in the 10 CFR parts 200 to 499 edition revised as of January 1, 2012.
Upon the compliance date(s) of any energy conservation standard(s) for conventional ranges, conventional cooking tops, conventional ovens, and microwave ovens that incorporates standby mode and off mode energy consumption, use of the applicable provisions of this test procedure to demonstrate compliance with the energy conservation standard will also be required.
1. Definitions
1.1 Active mode means a mode in which the product is connected to a mains power source, has been activated, and is performing the main functions of producing heat by means of a gas flame, electric resistance heating, or microwave energy, or circulating air internally or externally to the cooking product. Delay start mode is a one-off, user-initiated, short-duration function that is associated with an active mode.
1.2 Built-in means the product is supported by surrounding cabinetry, walls, or other similar structures.
1.3 Combined low-power mode means the aggregate of available modes other than active mode, but including the delay start mode portion of active mode.
1.4 Cycle finished mode means a standby mode in which a conventional cooking top, conventional oven, or conventional range provides continuous status display following operation in active mode.
1.5 Drop-in means the product is supported by horizontal surface cabinetry.
1.6 Fan-only mode means an active mode that is not user-selectable and in which a fan circulates air internally or externally to the cooking product for a finite period of time after the end of the heating function, where the end of the heating function is indicated to the consumer by means of a display, indicator light, or audible signal.
1.7 Forced convection means a mode of conventional oven operation in which a fan is used to circulate the heated air within the oven compartment during cooking.
1.8 Freestanding means the product is not supported by surrounding cabinetry, walls, or other similar structures.
1.9 IEC 62301 (First Edition) means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, titled ``Household electrical appliances--Measurement of standby power,'' Publication 62301 (First Edition 2005-06) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.10 IEC 62301 (Second Edition) means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, titled ``Household electrical appliances--Measurement of standby power,'' Publication 62301 (Edition 2.0 2011-01) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.11 Inactive mode means a standby mode that facilitates the activation of active mode by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer, or that provides continuous status display.
1.12 Normal non-operating temperature means the temperature of all areas of an appliance to be tested are within 5 [deg]F (2.8 [deg]C) of the temperature that the identical areas of the same basic model of the appliance would attain if it remained in the test room for 24 hours while not operating with all oven doors closed.
1.13 Off mode means a mode in which the product is connected to a mains power source and is not providing any active mode or standby mode function, and where the mode may persist for an indefinite time. An indicator that only shows the user that the product is in the off position is included within the classification of an off mode.
1.14 Primary energy consumption means either the electrical energy consumption of a conventional electric oven or the gas energy consumption of a conventional gas oven.
1.15 Secondary energy consumption means any electrical energy consumption of a conventional gas oven.
1.16 Standard cubic foot (or liter (L)) of gas means that quantity of gas that occupies 1 cubic foot (or alternatively expressed in L) when saturated with water vapor at a temperature of 60 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C) and a pressure of 30 inches of mercury (101.6 kPa) (density of mercury equals 13.595 grams per cubic centimeter).
1.17 Standby mode means any mode in which a conventional cooking top, conventional oven, conventional range, or microwave oven is connected to a main power source and offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions which may persist for an indefinite time: (a) facilitation of the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer; (b) provision of continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that allows for regularly scheduled tasks and that operates on a continuous basis.
1.18 Thermocouple means a device consisting of two dissimilar metals which are joined together and, with their associated wires, are used to measure temperature by means of electromotive force.
1.19 Symbol usage. The following identity relationships are provided to help clarify the symbology used throughout this procedure. A--Number of Hours in a YearC--Specific HeatE--Energy ConsumedEff--Cooking EfficiencyH--Heating Value of GasK--Conversion for Watt-hours to Kilowatt-hoursKe--3.412 Btu/Wh, Conversion for Watt-hours to Btu'sM--Massn--Number of UnitsO--Annual Useful Cooking Energy OutputP--PowerQ--Gas Flow RateR--Energy Factor, Ratio of Useful Cooking Energy Output to Total Energy InputS--Number of Self-Cleaning Operations per YearT--Temperaturet--TimeV--Volume of Gas ConsumedW--Weight of Test Block
2. Test Conditions
2.1 Installation. A free standing kitchen range shall be installed with the back directly against, or as near as possible to, a vertical wall which extends at least 1 foot above and on either side of the appliance. There shall be no side walls. A drop-in, built-in, or wall-mounted appliance shall be installed in an enclosure in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. These appliances are to be completely assembled with all handles, knobs, guards, and the like mounted in place. Any electric resistance heaters, gas burners, baking racks, and baffles shall be in place in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions; however, broiler pans are to be removed from the oven's baking compartment.
2.1.1 Conventional electric ranges, ovens, and cooking tops. These products shall be connected to an electrical supply circuit with voltage as specified in section 2.2.1 of this appendix with a watt-hour meter installed in the circuit. The watt-hour meter shall be as described in section 2.9.1.1 of this appendix. For standby mode and off mode testing, these products shall also be installed in accordance with Section 5, Paragraph 5.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), disregarding the provisions regarding batteries and the determination, classification, and testing of relevant modes.
2.1.2 Conventional gas ranges, ovens, and cooking tops. These products shall be connected to a gas supply line with a gas meter installed between the supply line and the appliance being tested, according to manufacturer's specifications. The gas meter shall be as described in section 2.9.2 of this appendix. Conventional gas ranges, ovens, and cooking tops with electrical ignition devices or other electrical components shall be connected to an electrical supply circuit of nameplate voltage with a watt-hour meter installed in the circuit. The watt-hour meter shall be as described in section 2.9.1.1 of this appendix. For standby mode and off mode testing, these products shall also be installed in accordance with Section 5, Paragraph 5.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), disregarding the provisions regarding batteries and the determination, classification, and testing of relevant modes.
2.1.3 Microwave ovens. Install the microwave oven in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and connect to an electrical supply circuit with voltage as specified in section 2.2.1 of this appendix. The microwave oven shall also be installed in accordance with Section 5, Paragraph 5.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), disregarding the provisions regarding batteries and the determination, classification, and testing of relevant modes. A watt meter shall be installed in the circuit and shall be as described in section 2.9.1.3 of this appendix.
2.2 Energy supply.
2.2.1 Electrical supply.
2.2.1.1 Voltage. Maintain the electrical supply to the conventional range, conventional cooking top, and conventional oven being tested at 240/120 volts 2 percent except that basic models rated only at 208/120 volts shall be tested at that rating 2 percent. For microwave oven testing, maintain the electrical supply to the unit at 240/120 volts 1 percent. Maintain the electrical supply frequency for all products at 60 hertz 1 percent.
2.2.1.2 Supply voltage waveform. For the standby mode and off mode testing, maintain the electrical supply voltage waveform as indicated in Section 4, Paragraph 4.3.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). For microwave oven standby mode and off mode testing, if the power measuring instrument used for testing is unable to measure and record the total harmonic content during the test measurement period, it is acceptable to measure and record the total harmonic content immediately before and after the test measurement period.
2.2.2.1 Gas burner adjustments. Conventional gas ranges, ovens, and cooking tops shall be tested with all of the gas burners adjusted in accordance with the installation or operation instructions provided by the manufacturer. In every case, the burner must be adjusted with sufficient air flow to prevent a yellow flame or a flame with yellow tips.
2.2.2.2 Natural gas. For testing convertible cooking appliances or appliances which are designed to operate using only natural gas, maintain the natural gas pressure immediately ahead of all controls of the unit under test at 7 to 10 inches of water column (1743.6 to 2490.8 Pa). The regulator outlet pressure shall equal the manufacturer's recommendation. The natural gas supplied should have a heating value of approximately 1,025 Btu's per standard cubic foot (38.2 kJ/L). The actual gross heating value, Hn, in Btu's per standard cubic foot (kJ/L), for the natural gas to be used in the test shall be obtained either from measurements made by the manufacturer conducting the test using equipment that meets the requirements described in Section 2.9.4 or by the use of bottled natural gas whose gross heating value is certified to be at least as accurate a value that meets the requirements in Section 2.9.4.
2.2.2.3 Propane. For testing convertible cooking appliances with propane or for testing appliances which are designed to operate using only LP-gas, maintain the propane pressure immediately ahead of all controls of the unit under test at 11 to 13 inches of water column (2740 to 3238 Pa). The regulator outlet pressure shall equal the manufacturer's recommendation. The propane supplied should have a heating value of approximately 2,500 Btu's per standard cubic foot (93.2 kJ/L). The actual gross heating value, Hp, in Btu's per standard cubic foot (kJ/L), for the propane to be used in the test shall be obtained either from measurements made by the manufacturer conducting the test using equipment that meets the requirements described in Section 2.9.4 or by the use of bottled propane whose gross heating value is certified to be at least as accurate a value that meets the requirements described in Section 2.9.4.
2.2.2.4 Test gas. A basic model of a convertible cooking appliance shall be tested with natural gas, but may also be tested with propane. Any basic model of a conventional range, conventional cooking top, or conventional oven which is designed to operate using only natural gas as the energy source must be tested with natural gas. Any basic model of a conventional range, conventional cooking top, or conventional oven which is designed to operate using only LP gas as the gas energy source must be tested with propane gas.
2.3 Air circulation. Maintain air circulation in the room sufficient to secure a reasonably uniform temperature distribution, but do not cause a direct draft on the unit under test.
2.4 Setting the conventional oven thermostat.
2.4.1 Conventional electric oven. Install a thermocouple approximately in the center of the usable baking space. Provide a temperature indicator system for measuring the oven's temperature with an accuracy as indicated in Section 2.9.3.2. If the oven thermostat does not cycle on and off, adjust or determine the conventional electric oven thermostat setting to provide an average internal temperature which is 325[deg] 5 [deg]F (180.6[deg] 2.8 [deg]C) higher than the room ambient air temperature. If the oven thermostat operates by cycling on and off, adjust or determine the conventional electric oven thermostat setting to provide an average internal temperature which is 325[deg] 5 [deg]F (180.6[deg] 2.8 [deg]C) higher than the room ambient air temperature. This shall be done by measuring the maximum and minimum temperatures in any three consecutive cut-off/cut-on actions of the electric resistance heaters, excluding the initial cut-off/cut-on action, by the thermostat after the temperature rise of 325[deg] 5 [deg]F (180.6[deg] 2.8 [deg]C) has been attained by the conventional electric oven. Remove the thermocouple after the thermostat has been set.
2.4.2 Conventional gas oven. Install five parallel-connected weighted thermocouples, one located at the center of the conventional gas oven's usable baking space and the other four equally spaced between the center and the corners of the conventional gas oven on the diagonals of a horizontal plane through the center of the conventional gas oven. Each weighted thermocouple shall be constructed of a copper disc that is 1-inch (25.4 mm) in diameter and \1/8\-inch (3.2 mm) thick. The two thermocouple wires shall be located in two holes in the disc spaced \1/2\-inch (12.7 mm) apart, with each hole being located \1/4\-inch (6.4 mm) from the center of the disc. Both thermocouple wires shall be silver-soldered to the copper disc. Provide a temperature indicator system for measuring the oven's temperature with an accuracy as indicated in Section 2.9.3.2. If the oven thermostat does not cycle on or off, adjust or determine the conventional gas oven thermostat setting to provide an average internal temperature which is 325 [deg]5 [deg]F (180.6 [deg]2.8 [deg]C) higher than the room ambient air temperature. If the oven thermostat operates by cycling on and off, adjust or determine the conventional gas oven thermostat setting to provide an average internal temperature which is 325[deg] 5 [deg]F (180.6 2.8 [deg]C) higher than the room ambient air temperature. This shall be done by measuring the maximum and minimum temperatures in any three consecutive cut-off/cut-on actions of the gas burners, excluding the initial cut-off/cut-on action, by the thermostat after the temperature rise of 325[deg] 5 [deg]F (180.6[deg] 2.8 [deg]C) has been attained by the conventional gas oven. Remove the thermocouples after the thermostat has been set.
2.5 Ambient room air temperature.
2.5.1 Active mode ambient room air temperature. During the active mode test, maintain an ambient room air temperature, TR, of 77[deg] 9 [deg]F (25[deg] 5 [deg]C) for conventional ovens and cooking tops, as measured at least 5 feet (1.5 m) and not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) from the nearest surface of the unit under test and approximately 3 feet (0.9 m) above the floor. The temperature shall be measured with a thermometer or temperature indicating system with an accuracy as specified in section 2.9.3.1.
2.5.2 Standby mode and off mode ambient temperature. For standby mode and off mode testing, maintain room ambient air temperature conditions as specified in Section 4, Paragraph 4.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
2.6 Normal nonoperating temperature. All areas of the appliance to be tested shall attain the normal nonoperating temperature, as defined in section 1.12 of this appendix, before any testing begins. The equipment for measuring the applicable normal nonoperating temperature shall be as described in sections 2.9.3.1, 2.9.3.2, 2.9.3.3, and 2.9.3.4 of this appendix, as applicable.
2.7 Test blocks for conventional oven and cooking top. The test blocks shall be made of aluminum alloy No. 6061, with a specific heat of 0.23 Btu/lb- [deg]F (0.96 kJ/[kg / [deg]C]) and with any temper that will give a czoefficient of thermal conductivity of 1073.3 to 1189.1 Btu-in/h-ft\2\- [deg]F (154.8 to 171.5 W/[m / [deg]C]). Each block shall have a hole at its top. The hole shall be 0.08 inch (2.03 mm) in diameter and 0.80 inch (20.3 mm) deep. The manufacturer conducting the test may provide other means which will ensure that the thermocouple junction is installed at this same position and depth.
The bottom of each block shall be flat to within 0.002 inch (0.051 mm) TIR (total indicator reading). Determine the actual weight of each test block with a scale with an accuracy as indicated in Section 2.9.5.
2.7.1 Conventional oven test block. The test block for the conventional oven, W1, shall be 6.250.05 inches (158.81.3 mm) in diameter, approximately 2.8 inches (71 mm) high and shall weigh 8.50.1 lbs (3.860.05 kg). The block shall be finished with an anodic black coating which has a minimum thickness of 0.001 inch (0.025 mm) or with a finish having the equivalent absorptivity.
2.7.2 Small test block for conventional cooking top. The small test block, W2, shall be 6.250.05 inches (158.81.3 mm) in diameter, approximately 2.8 inches (71 mm) high and shall weigh 8.50.1 lbs (3.860.05 kg).
2.7.3 Large test block for conventional cooking top. The large test block for the conventional cooking top, W3, shall be 90.05 inches (228.61.3 mm) in diameter, approximately 3.0 inches (76 mm) high and shall weigh 190.1 lbs (8.620.05 kg).
2.7.4 Thermocouple installation. Install the thermocouple such that the thermocouple junction (where the thermocouple contacts the test block) is at the bottom of the hole provided in the test block and that the thermocouple junction makes good thermal contact with the aluminum block. If the test blocks are to be water cooled between tests the thermocouple hole should be sealed, or other steps taken, to insure that the thermocouple hole is completely dry at the start of the next test. Provide a temperature indicator system for measuring the test block temperature with an accuracy as indicated in Section 2.9.3.3.
2.7.5 Initial test block temperature. Maintain the initial temperature of the test blocks, TI, within 4 [deg]F (2.2 [deg]C) of the ambient room air temperature as specified in Section 2.5. If the test block has been cooled (or heated) to bring it to room temperature, allow the block to stabilize for at least 2 minutes after removal from the cooling (or heating) source, before measuring its initial temperature.
2.8 [Reserved]
2.9 Instrumentation. Perform all test measurements using the following instruments, as appropriate:
2.9.1 Electrical Measurements.
2.9.1.1 Watt-hour meter. The watt-hour meter for measuring the electrical energy consumption of conventional ovens and cooking tops shall have a resolution of 1 watt-hour (3.6 kJ) or less and a maximum error no greater than 1.5 percent of the measured value for any demand greater than 5 watts. The watt-hour meter for measuring the energy consumption of microwave ovens shall have a resolution of 0.1 watt-hour (0.36 kJ) or less and a maximum error no greater than 1.5 percent of the measured value.
2.9.1.2 Watt meter. The watt meter used to measure the conventional oven, conventional range, or range clock power shall have a resolution of 0.2 watt (0.2 J/s) or less and a maximum error no greater than 5 percent of the measured value.
2.9.1.3 Standby mode and off mode watt meter. The watt meter used to measure standby mode and off mode shall meet the requirements specified in Section 4, Paragraph 4.4 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). For microwave oven standby mode and off mode testing, if the power measuring instrument used for testing is unable to measure and record the crest factor, power factor, or maximum current ratio during the test measurement period, it is acceptable to measure the crest factor, power factor, and maximum current ratio immediately before and after the test measurement period.
2.9.2 Gas Measurements.
2.9.2.1 Positive displacement meters. The gas meter to be used for measuring the gas consumed by the gas burners of the oven or cooking top shall have a resolution of 0.01 cubic foot (0.28 L) or less and a maximum error no greater than 1 percent of the measured valued for any demand greater than 2.2 cubic feet per hour (62.3 L/h).
2.9.3 Temperature measurement equipment.
2.9.3.1 Room temperature indicating system. The room temperature indicating system shall be as specified in Section 2.9.3.4 for ranges, ovens and cooktops.
2.9.3.2 Temperature indicator system for measuring conventional oven temperature. The equipment for measuring the conventional oven temperature shall have an error no greater than 4 [deg]F (2.2 [deg]C) over the range of 65[deg] to 500 [deg]F (18 [deg]C to 260 [deg]C).
2.9.3.3 Temperature indicator system for measuring test block temperature. The system shall have an error no greater than 2 [deg]F (1.1 [deg]C) when measuring specific temperatures over the range of 65[deg] to 330 [deg]F (18.3 [deg]C to 165.6 [deg]C). It shall also have an error no greater than 2 [deg]F (1.1 [deg]C) when measuring any temperature difference up to 240 [deg]F (133.3 [deg]C) within the above range.
2.9.3.4 Temperature indicator system for measuring surface temperatures. The temperature of any surface of an appliance shall be measured by means of a thermocouple in firm contact with the surface. The temperature indicating system shall have an error no greater than 1 [deg]F (0.6 [deg]C) over the range 65[deg] to 90 [deg]F (18 [deg]C to 32 [deg]C).
2.9.4 Heating Value. The heating value of the natural gas or propane shall be measured with an instrument and associated readout device that has a maximum error no greater than 0.5% of the measured value and a resolution of 0.2% or less of the full scale reading of the indicator instrument. The heating value of natural gas or propane must be corrected for local temperature and pressure conditions.
2.9.5 Scale. The scale used for weighing the test blocks shall have a maximum error no greater than 1 ounce (28.4 g).
3. Test Methods and Measurements
3.1. Test methods.
3.1.1 Conventional oven. Perform a test by establishing the testing conditions set forth in section 2, Test Conditions, of this appendix and turn off the gas flow to the conventional cooking top, if so equipped. Before beginning the test, the conventional oven shall be at its normal non-operating temperature as defined in section 1.12 and described in section 2.6 of this appendix. Set the conventional oven test block W1 approximately in the center of the usable baking space. If there is a selector switch for selecting the mode of operation of the oven, set it for normal baking. If an oven permits baking by either forced convection by using a fan, or without forced convection, the oven is to be tested in each of those two modes. The oven shall remain on for one complete thermostat ``cut-off/cut-on'' of the electrical resistance heaters or gas burners after the test block temperature has increased 234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C) above its initial temperature.
3.1.1.1 Self-cleaning operation of a conventional oven. Establish the test conditions set forth in section 2, Test Conditions, of this appendix. Turn off the gas flow to the conventional cooking top. The temperature of the conventional oven shall be its normal non-operating temperature as defined in section 1.12 and described in section 2.6 of this appendix. Then set the conventional oven's self-cleaning process in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. If the self-cleaning process is adjustable, use the average time recommended by the manufacturer for a moderately soiled oven.
3.1.1.2 Conventional oven standby mode and off mode power. Establish the standby mode and off mode testing conditions set forth in section 2, Test Conditions, of this appendix. For conventional ovens that take some time to enter a stable state from a higher power state as discussed in Section 5, Paragraph 5.1, Note 1 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), allow sufficient time for the conventional oven to reach the lower power state before proceeding with the test measurement. Follow the test procedure as specified in Section 5, Paragraph 5.3.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) for testing in each possible mode as described in 3.1.1.2.1 and 3.1.1.2.2 of this appendix. For units in which power varies as a function of displayed time in standby mode, set the clock time to 3:23 at the end of the stabilization period specified in Section 5, Paragraph 5.3 of IEC 62301 (First Edition), and use the average power approach described in Section 5, Paragraph 5.3.2(a) of IEC 62301 (First Edition), but with a single test period of 10 minutes +0/-2 sec after an additional stabilization period until the clock time reaches 3:33.
3.1.1.2.1 If the conventional oven has an inactive mode, as defined in section 1.11 of this appendix, measure and record the average inactive mode power of the conventional oven, PIA, in watts.
3.1.1.2.2 If the conventional oven has an off mode, as defined in section 1.13 of this appendix, measure and record the average off mode power of the conventional oven, POM, in watts.
3.1.2 Conventional cooking top. Establish the test conditions set forth in section 2, Test Conditions, of this appendix. Turn off the gas flow to the conventional oven(s), if so equipped. The temperature of the conventional cooking top shall be its normal nonoperating temperature as defined in section 1.12 and described in section 2.6 of this appendix. Set the test block in the center of the surface unit under test. The small test block, W2, shall be used on electric surface units of 7 inches (178 mm) or less in diameter. The large test block, W3, shall be used on electric surface units over 7 inches (178 mm) in diameter and on all gas surface units. Turn on the surface unit under test and set its energy input rate to the maximum setting. When the test block reaches 144 [deg]F (80 [deg]C) above its initial test block temperature, immediately reduce the energy input rate to 255 percent of the maximum energy input rate. After 150.1 minutes at the reduced energy setting, turn off the surface unit under test.
3.1.2.1 Conventional cooking top standby mode and off mode power. Establish the standby mode and off mode testing conditions set forth in section 2, Test Conditions, of this appendix. For conventional cooktops that take some time to enter a stable state from a higher power state as discussed in Section 5, Paragraph 5.1, Note 1 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), allow sufficient time for the conventional cooking top to reach the lower power state before proceeding with the test measurement. Follow the test procedure as specified in Section 5, Paragraph 5.3.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) for testing in each possible mode as described in sections 3.1.2.1.1 and 3.1.2.1.2 of this appendix. For units in which power varies as a function of displayed time in standby mode, set the clock time to 3:23 at the end of the stabilization period specified in Section 5, Paragraph 5.3 of IEC 62301 (First Edition), and use the average power approach described in Section 5, Paragraph 5.3.2(a) of IEC 62301 (First Edition), but with a single test period of 10 minutes +0/-2 sec after an additional stabilization period until the clock time reaches 3:33.
3.1.2.1.1 If the conventional cooking top has an inactive mode, as defined in section 1.11 of this appendix, measure and record the average inactive mode power of the conventional cooking top, PIA, in watts.
3.1.2.1.2 If the conventional cooking top has an off mode, as defined in section 1.13 of this appendix, measure and record the average off mode power of the conventional cooking top, POM, in watts.
3.1.3 Conventional range standby mode and off mode power. Establish the standby mode and off mode testing conditions set forth in section 2, Test Conditions, of this appendix. For conventional ranges that take some time to enter a stable state from a higher power state as discussed in Section 5, Paragraph 5.1, Note 1 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), allow sufficient time for the conventional range to reach the lower power state before proceeding with the test measurement. Follow the test procedure as specified in Section 5, Paragraph 5.3.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) for testing in each possible mode as described in sections 3.1.3.1 and 3.1.3.2 of this appendix. For units in which power varies as a function of displayed time in standby mode, set the clock time to 3:23 at the end of the stabilization period specified in Section 5, Paragraph 5.3 of IEC 62301 (First Edition), and use the average power approach described in Section 5, Paragraph 5.3.2(a) of IEC 62301 (First Edition), but with a single test period of 10 minutes +0/-2 sec after an additional stabilization period until the clock time reaches 3:33.
3.1.3.1 If the conventional range has an inactive mode, as defined in section 1.11 of this appendix, measure and record the average inactive mode power of the conventional range, PIA, in watts.
3.1.3.2 If the conventional range has an off mode, as defined in section 1.13 of this appendix, measure and record the average off mode power of the conventional range, POM, in watts.
3.1.4 Microwave oven.
3.1.4.1 Microwave oven test standby mode and off mode power. Establish the testing conditions set forth in section 2, Test Conditions, of this appendix. For microwave ovens that drop from a higher power state to a lower power state as discussed in Section 5, Paragraph 5.1, Note 1 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), allow sufficient time for the microwave oven to reach the lower power state before proceeding with the test measurement. Follow the test procedure as specified in Section 5, Paragraph 5.3.2 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition). For units in which power varies as a function of displayed time in standby mode, set the clock time to 3:23 and use the average power approach described in Section 5, Paragraph 5.3.2(a) of IEC 62301 (First Edition), but with a single test period of 10 minutes +0/-2 sec after an additional stabilization period until the clock time reaches 3:33. If a microwave oven is capable of operation in either standby mode or off mode, as defined in sections 1.17 and 1.13 of this appendix, respectively, or both, test the microwave oven in each mode in which it can operate.
3.2 Test measurements.
3.2.1 Conventional oven test energy consumption. If the oven thermostat controls the oven temperature without cycling on and off, measure the energy consumed, EO, when the temperature of the block reaches TO (TO is 234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C) above the initial block temperature, TI). If the oven thermostat operates by cycling on and off, make the following series of measurements: Measure the block temperature, TA, and the energy consumed, EA, or volume of gas consumed, VA, at the end of the last ``ON'' period of the conventional oven before the block reaches TO. Measure the block temperature, TB, and the energy consumed, EB, or volume of gas consumed, VB, at the beginning of the next ``ON'' period. Measure the block temperature, TC, and the energy consumed, EC, or volume of gas consumed, VC, at the end of that ``ON'' period. Measure the block temperature, TD, and the energy consumed, ED, or volume of gas consumed, VD, at the beginning of the following ``ON'' period. Energy measurements for EO, EA, EB, EC, and ED should be expressed in watt-hours (kJ) for conventional electric ovens, and volume measurements for VA, VB, VC, and VD should be expressed in standard cubic feet (L) of gas for conventional gas ovens. For a gas oven, measure in watt-hours (kJ) any electrical energy, EIO, consumed by an ignition device or other electrical components required for the operation of a conventional gas oven while heating the test block to TO.
3.2.1.1 Conventional oven average test energy consumption. If the conventional oven permits baking by either forced convection or without forced convection and the oven thermostat does not cycle on and off, measure the energy consumed with the forced convection mode, (EO)1, and without the forced convection mode, (EO)2, when the temperature of the block reaches TO (TO is 234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C) above the initial block temperature, TI). If the conventional oven permits baking by either forced convection or without forced convection and the oven thermostat operates by cycling on and off, make the following series of measurements with and without the forced convection mode: Measure the block temperature, TA, and the energy consumed, EA, or volume of gas consumed, VA, at the end of the last ``ON'' period of the conventional oven before the block reaches TO. Measure the block temperature, TB, and the energy consumed, EB, or volume of gas consumed, VB, at the beginning of the next ``ON'' period. Measure the block temperature, TC, and the energy consumed, EC, or volume of gas consumed, VC, at the end of that ``ON'' period. Measure the block temperature, TD, and the energy consumed, ED, or volume of gas consumed, VD, at the beginning of the following ``ON'' period. Energy measurements for EO, EA, EB, EC, and ED should be expressed in watt-hours (kJ) for conventional electric ovens, and volume measurements for VA, VB, VC, and VD should be expressed in standard cubic feet (L) of gas for conventional gas ovens. For a gas oven that can be operated with or without forced convection, measure in watt-hours (kJ) any electrical energy consumed by an ignition device or other electrical components required for the operation of a conventional gas oven while heating the test block to TO using the forced convection mode, (EIO)1, and without using the forced convection mode, (EIO)2.
3.2.1.2 Conventional oven fan-only mode energy consumption. If the conventional oven is capable of operation in fan-only mode, measure the fan-only mode energy consumption, EOF, expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) of electricity consumed by the conventional oven for the duration of fan-only mode, using a watt-hour meter as specified in section 2.9.1.1 of this appendix. Alternatively, if the duration of fan-only mode is known, the watt-hours consumed may be measured for a period of 10 minutes in fan-only mode, using a watt-hour meter as specified in section 2.9.1.1 of this appendix. Multiply this value by the time in minutes that the conventional oven remains in fan-only mode, tOF, and divide by 10,000 to obtain EOF. The alternative approach may be used only if the resulting EOF is representative of energy use during the entire fan-only mode.
3.2.1.3 Energy consumption of self-cleaning operation. Measure the energy consumption, ES, in watt-hours (kJ) of electricity or the volume of gas consumption, VS, in standard cubic feet (L) during the self-cleaning test set forth in section 3.1.1.1 of this appendix. For a gas oven, also measure in watt-hours (kJ) any electrical energy, EIS, consumed by ignition devices or other electrical components required during the self-cleaning test.
3.2.1.4 Standby mode and off mode energy consumption. Make measurements as specified in section 3.1.1.2 of this appendix. If the conventional oven is capable of operating in inactive mode, as defined in section 1.11 of this appendix, measure the average inactive mode power of the conventional oven, PIA, in watts as specified in section 3.1.1.2.1 of this appendix. If the conventional oven is capable of operating in off mode, as defined in section 1.13 of this appendix, measure the average off mode power of the conventional oven, POM, in watts as specified in section 3.1.1.2.2 of this appendix.
3.2.2 Conventional surface unit test energy consumption.
3.2.2.1 Conventional surface unit average test energy consumption. For the surface unit under test, measure the energy consumption, ECT, in watt-hours (kJ) of electricity or the volume of gas consumption, VCT, in standard cubic feet (L) of gas and the test block temperature, TCT, at the end of the 15 minute (reduced input setting) test interval for the test specified in section 3.1.2 of this appendix and the total time, tCT, in hours, that the unit is under test. Measure any electrical energy, EIC, consumed by an ignition device of a gas heating element or other electrical components required for the operation of the conventional gas cooking top in watt-hours (kJ).
3.2.2.2 Conventional surface unit standby mode and off mode energy consumption. Make measurements as specified in section 3.1.2.1 of this appendix. If the conventional surface unit is capable of operating in inactive mode, as defined in section 1.11 of this appendix, measure the average inactive mode power of the conventional surface unit, PIA, in watts as specified in section 3.1.2.1.1 of this appendix. If the conventional surface unit is capable of operating in off mode, as defined in section 1.13 of this appendix, measure the average off mode power of the conventional surface unit, POM, in watts as specified in section 3.1.2.1.2 of this appendix.
3.2.3 Conventional range standby mode and off mode energy consumption. Make measurements as specified in section 3.1.3 of this appendix. If the conventional range is capable of operating in inactive mode, as defined in section 1.11 of this appendix, measure the average inactive mode power of the conventional range, PIA, in watts as specified in section 3.1.3.1 of this appendix. If the conventional range is capable of operating in off mode, as defined in section 1.13 of this appendix, measure the average off mode power of the conventional range, POM, in watts as specified in section 3.1.3.2 of this appendix.
3.2.4 Microwave oven test standby mode and off mode power. Make measurements as specified in Section 5, Paragraph 5.3 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). If the microwave oven is capable of operating in standby mode, as defined in section 1.17 of this appendix, measure the average standby mode power of the microwave oven, PSB, in watts as specified in section 3.1.4.1 of this appendix. If the microwave oven is capable of operating in off mode, as defined in section 1.13 of this appendix, measure the average off mode power of the microwave oven, POM, as specified in section 3.1.4.1.
3.3 Recorded values.
3.3.1 Record the test room temperature, TR, at the start and end of each range, oven or cooktop test, as determined in Section 2.5.
3.3.2 Record measured test block weights W1, W2, and W3 in pounds (kg).
3.3.3 Record the initial temperature, T1, of the test block under test.
3.3.4 For a conventional oven with a thermostat which operates by cycling on and off, record the conventional oven test measurements TA, EA, TB, EB, TC, EC, TD, and ED for conventional electric ovens or TA, VA, TB, VB, TC, VC, TD, and VD for conventional gas ovens. If the thermostat controls the oven temperature without cycling on and off, record EO. For a gas oven which also uses electrical energy for the ignition or operation of the oven, also record EIO.
3.3.5 For a conventional oven that can be operated with or without forced convection and the oven thermostat controls the oven temperature without cycling on and off, measure the energy consumed with the forced convection mode, (EO)1, and without the forced convection mode, (EO)2. If the conventional oven operates with or without forced convection and the thermostat controls the oven temperature by cycling on and off, record the conventional oven test measurements TA, EA, TB, EB, TC, EC, TD, and ED for conventional electric ovens or TA, VA, TB, VB, TC, VC, TD, and VD for conventional gas ovens. For a gas oven that can be operated with or without forced convection, measure any electrical energy consumed by an ignition device or other electrical components used during the forced convection mode, (EIO)1, and without using the forced convection mode, (EIO)2.
3.3.6 Record the measured energy consumption, ES, or gas consumption, VS, and for a gas oven, any electrical energy, EIS, for the test of the self-cleaning operation of a conventional oven.
3.3.7 For conventional ovens, record the conventional oven standby mode and off mode test measurements PIA and POM, if applicable. For conventional cooktops, record the conventional cooking top standby mode and off mode test measurements PIA and POM, if applicable. For conventional ranges, record the conventional range standby mode and off mode test measurements PIA and POM, if applicable.
3.3.8 For the surface unit under test, record the electric energy consumption, ECT, or the gas volume consumption, VCT, the final test block temperature, TCT, and the total test time, tCT. For a gas cooking top which uses electrical energy for ignition of the burners, also record EIC.
3.3.9 Record the heating value, Hn, as determined in section 2.2.2.2 of this appendix for the natural gas supply.
3.3.10 Record the heating value, Hp, as determined in section 2.2.2.3 of this appendix for the propane supply.
3.3.11 Record the average standby mode power, PSB, for the microwave oven standby mode, as determined in section 3.2.4 of this appendix for a microwave oven capable of operating in standby mode. Record the average off mode power, POM, for the microwave oven off mode power test, as determined in section 3.2.4 of this appendix for a microwave oven capable of operating in off mode.
4. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements
4.1 Conventional oven.
4.1.1 Test energy consumption. For a conventional oven with a thermostat which operates by cycling on and off, calculate the test energy consumption, EO, expressed in watt-hours (kJ) for electric ovens and in Btus (kJ) for gas ovens, and defined as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.000 for electric ovens, and,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.001 for gas ovens, Where: H = either Hn or Hp, the heating value of the gas
used in the test as specified in section 2.2.2.2 and section
2.2.2.3 of this appendix, expressed in Btus per standard cubic
foot (kJ/L).TO = 234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C) plus the initial test block
temperature.and,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.002 Where: TA = block temperature in [deg]F ( [deg]C) at the end of the
last ``ON'' period of the conventional oven before the test
block reaches TO.TB = block temperature in [deg]F ( [deg]C) at the beginning
of the ``ON'' period following the measurement of
TA.TC = block temperature in [deg]F ( [deg]C) at the end of the
``ON'' period which starts with TB. TD = block temperature in [deg]F ( [deg]C) at the beginning
of the ``ON'' period which follows the measurement of
TC.EA = electric energy consumed in Wh (kJ) at the end of the
last ``ON'' period before the test block reaches
TO.EB = electric energy consumed in Wh (kJ) at the beginning of
the ``ON'' period following the measurement of TA.EC = electric energy consumed in Wh (kJ) at the end of the
``ON'' period which starts with TB.ED = electric energy consumed in Wh (kJ) at the beginning of
the ``ON'' period which follows the measurement of
TC.VA = volume of gas consumed in standard cubic feet (L) at the
end of the last ``ON'' period before the test block reaches
TO.VB = volume of gas consumed in standard cubic feet (L) at the
beginning of the ``ON'' period following the measurement of
TA.VC = volume of gas consumed in standard cubic feet (L) at the
end of the ``ON'' period which starts with TB.VD = volume of gas consumed in standard cubic feet (L) at the
beginning of the ``ON'' period which follows the measurement
of TC.
4.1.1.1 Average test energy consumption. If the conventional oven can be operated with or without forced convection, determine the average test energy consumption, EO and EIO, in watt-hours (kJ) for electric ovens and Btus (kJ) for gas ovens using the following equations:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.003 Where: (EO)1 = test energy consumption using the forced
convection mode in watt-hours (kJ) for electric ovens and in
Btus (kJ) for gas ovens as measured in section 3.2.1.1 of this
appendix.(EO)2 = test energy consumption without using the
forced convection mode in watt-hours (kJ) for electric ovens
and in Btus (kJ) for gas ovens as measured in section 3.2.1.1
of this appendix.(EIO)1 = electrical energy consumption in watt-
hours (kJ) of a gas oven in forced convection mode as measured
in section 3.2.1.1 of this appendix.(EIO)2 = electrical energy consumption in watt-
hours (kJ) of a gas oven without using the forced convection
mode as measured in section 3.2.1.1 of this appendix.
4.1.2 Conventional oven annual energy consumption.
4.1.2.1. Annual cooking energy consumption.
4.1.2.1.1. Annual primary energy consumption. Calculate the annual primary energy consumption for cooking, ECO, expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year for electric ovens and in Btu's (kJ) per year for gas ovens, and defined as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.004 Where: E O = test energy consumption as measured in Section 3.2.1 or
as calculated in Section 4.1.1 or Section 4.1.1.1.K e = 3.412 Btu/Wh (3.6 kJ/Wh,) conversion factor of watt-
hours to Btu's.O O = 29.3 kWh (105,480 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output of conventional electric oven.W 1 = measured weight of test block in pounds (kg).C p = 0.23 Btu/lb-[deg]F (0.96 kJ/kg / [deg]C), specific heat
of test block.T S = 234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C), temperature rise of test
block.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.005
Where: EO = test energy consumption as measured in Section 3.2.1. or
as calculated in Section 4.1.1 or Section 4.1.1.1. OO = 88.8 kBtu (93,684 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output of conventional gas oven.W1, Cp and TS are the same as defined
above.
4.1.2.1.2 Annual secondary energy consumption for cooking of gas ovens. Calculate the annual secondary energy consumption for cooking, ESO, expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.006 Where: EIO = electrical test energy consumption as measured in
Section 3.2.1 or as calculated in Section 4.1.1.1.OO = 29.3 kWh (105,480 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output.Ke, W1, Cp, and TS are as
defined in Section 4.1.2.1.1.
4.1.2.2 Annual conventional oven self-cleaning energy.
4.1.2.2.1 Annual primary energy consumption. Calculate the annual primary energy consumption for conventional oven self-cleaning operations, ESC, expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year for electric ovens and in Btus (kJ) for gas ovens, and defined as: ESC = ES x Se x K, for electric ovens, Where: ES = energy consumption in watt-hours, as measured in section
3.2.1.3 of this appendix.Se = 4, average number of times a self-cleaning operation of
a conventional electric oven is used per year.K = 0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours. or ESC = VS x H x Sg, for gas ovens, Where: VS = gas consumption in standard cubic feet (L), as measured
in section 3.2.1.3 of this appendix.H = Hn or Hp, the heating value of the gas used in
the test as specified in sections 2.2.2.2 and 2.2.2.3 of this
appendix in Btus per standard cubic foot (kJ/L).Sg = 4, average number of times a self-cleaning operation of
a conventional gas oven is used per year.
4.1.2.2.2 Annual secondary energy consumption for self-cleaning operation of gas ovens. Calculate the annual secondary energy consumption for self-cleaning operations of a gas oven, ESS, expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as: ESS = EIS x Sg x K, Where: EIS = electrical energy consumed during the self-cleaning
operation of a conventional gas oven, as measured in section
3.2.1.3 of this appendix.Sg = 4, average number of times a self-cleaning operation of
a conventional gas oven is used per year.K = 0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours.
4.1.2.3 Annual combined low-power mode energy consumption of a single conventional oven. Calculate the annual standby mode and off mode energy consumption for conventional ovens, EOTLP, expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as: EOTLP = [(PIA x SIA) + (POM
x SOM)] x K, Where: PIA = conventional oven inactive mode power, in watts, as
measured in section 3.2.1.4 of this appendix.POM = conventional oven off mode power, in watts, as measured
in section 3.2.1.4 of this appendix.STOT equals the total number of inactive mode and off mode
hours per year;If the conventional oven has fan-only mode, STOT equals
(8,540.1 - (tOF/60)) hours, where tOF is
the conventional oven fan-only mode duration, in minutes, as
measured in section 3.2.1.2 of this appendix, and 60 is the
conversion factor for minutes to hours; otherwise,
STOT is equal to 8,540.1 hours.If the conventional oven has both inactive mode and off mode,
SIA and SOM both equal STOT/
2;If the conventional oven has an inactive mode but no off mode, the
inactive mode annual hours, SIA, is equal to
STOT and the off mode annual hours, SOM,
is equal to 0;If the conventional oven has an off mode but no inactive mode,
SIA is equal to 0 and SOM is equal to
STOT;K = 0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours.
4.1.2.4 Total annual energy consumption of a single conventional oven.
4.1.2.4.1 Conventional electric oven energy consumption. Calculate the total annual energy consumption of a conventional electric oven, EAO, expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as: EAO = ECO + ESC, Where:ECO = annual primary cooking energy consumption as determined
in section 4.1.2.1.1 of this appendix.ESC = annual primary self-cleaning energy consumption as
determined in section 4.1.2.2.1 of this appendix.
4.1.2.4.2 Conventional electric oven integrated energy consumption. Calculate the total integrated annual electrical energy consumption of a conventional electric oven, IEAO, expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as: IEAO = ECO + ESC + EOTLP, +
(EOF x NOE), Where: ECO = annual primary cooking energy consumption as determined
in section 4.1.2.1.1 of this appendix.ESC = annual primary self-cleaning energy consumption as
determined in section 4.1.2.2.1 of this appendix.EOTLP = annual combined low-power mode energy consumption as
determined in section 4.1.2.3 of this appendix.EOF = fan-only mode energy consumption as measured in section
3.2.1.2 of this appendix.NOE = representative number of annual conventional electric
oven cooking cycles per year, which is equal to 219 cycles for
a conventional electric oven without self-clean capability and
204 cycles for a conventional electric oven with self-clean
capability.
4.1.2.4.3 Conventional gas oven energy consumption. Calculate the total annual gas energy consumption of a conventional gas oven, EAOG, expressed in Btus (kJ) per year and defined as: EAOG = ECO + ESC, Where: ECO = annual primary cooking energy consumption as determined
in section 4.1.2.1.1 of this appendix.ESC = annual primary self-cleaning energy consumption as
determined in section 4.1.2.2.1 of this appendix.
If the conventional gas oven uses electrical energy, calculate the total annual electrical energy consumption, EAOE, expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as: EAOE = ESO + ESS, Where:ESO = annual secondary cooking energy consumption as
determined in section 4.1.2.1.2 of this appendix.ESS = annual secondary self-cleaning energy consumption as
determined in section 4.1.2.2.2 of this appendix.
If the conventional gas oven uses electrical energy, also calculate the total integrated annual electrical energy consumption, IEAOE, expressed in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as: IEAOE = ESO + ESS+ EOTLP +
(EOF x NOG), Where:
ESO = annual secondary cooking energy consumption as determined in section 4.1.2.1.2 of this appendix.
ESS = annual secondary self-cleaning energy consumption as determined in section 4.1.2.2.2 of this appendix.
EOTLP = annual combined low-power mode energy consumption as determined in section 4.1.2.3 of this appendix.
EOF = fan-only mode energy consumption as measured in section 3.2.1.2 of this appendix.
NOG = representative number of annual conventional gas oven cooking cycles per year, which is equal to 183 cycles for a conventional gas oven without self-clean capability and 197 cycles for a conventional gas oven with self-clean capability.
4.1.2.5. Total annual energy consumption of multiple conventional ovens. If the cooking appliance includes more than one conventional oven, calculate the total annual energy consumption of the conventional ovens using the following equations:
4.1.2.5.1 Conventional electric oven energy consumption. Calculate the total annual energy consumption, ETO, in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as: ETO = EACO + EASC, Where:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.004 is the average annual primary energy consumption for cooking, and where: n = number of conventional ovens in the basic model.ECO = annual primary energy consumption for cooking as
determined in section 4.1.2.1.1 of this appendix. [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.005 average annual self-cleaning energy consumption, Where: n = number of self-cleaning conventional ovens in the basic model.ESC = annual primary self-cleaning energy consumption as
determined according to section 4.1.2.2.1 of this appendix.
4.1.2.5.2 Conventional electric oven integrated energy consumption. Calculate the total integrated annual energy consumption, IETO, in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as: IETO = EACO + EASC + EOTLP +
(EOF x NOE), Where:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.006 is the average annual primary energy consumption for cooking, and where: n = number of conventional ovens in the basic model.ECO = annual primary energy consumption for cooking as
determined in section 4.1.2.1.1 of this appendix.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.007
average annual self-cleaning energy consumption, Where: n = number of self-cleaning conventional ovens in the basic model.ESC = annual primary self-cleaning energy consumption as
determined according to section 4.1.2.2.1 of this appendix.EOTLP = annual combined low-power mode energy consumption for
the cooking appliance as determined in section 4.1.2.3 of this
appendix.EOF = fan-only mode energy consumption as measured in section
3.2.1.2 of this appendix.NOE = representative number of annual conventional electric
oven cooking cycles per year, which is equal to 219 cycles for
a conventional electric oven without self-clean capability and
204 cycles for a conventional electric oven with self-clean
capability.
4.1.2.5.3 Conventional gas oven energy consumption. Calculate the total annual gas energy consumption, ETOG, in Btus (kJ) per year and defined as: ETOG = EACO + EASC, Where: EACO = average annual primary energy consumption for cooking
in Btus (kJ) per year and is calculated as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.008
Where: n = number of conventional ovens in the basic model.ECO = annual primary energy consumption for cooking as
determined in section 4.1.2.1.1 of this appendix.and,EASC = average annual self-cleaning energy consumption in
Btus (kJ) per year and is calculated as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.009
Where: n = number of self-cleaning conventional ovens in the basic model.ESC = annual primary self-cleaning energy consumption as
determined according to section 4.1.2.2.1 of this appendix.
If the oven also uses electrical energy, calculate the total annual electrical energy consumption, ETOE, in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as: ETOE = EASO + EAAS, Where:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.010 is the average annual secondary energy consumption for cooking, Where: n = number of conventional ovens in the basic model.ESO = annual secondary energy consumption for cooking of gas
ovens as determined in section 4.1.2.1.2 of this appendix.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.011
is the average annual secondary self-cleaning energy consumption,Where: n = number of self-cleaning ovens in the basic model.ESS = annual secondary self-cleaning energy consumption of
gas ovens as determined in section 4.1.2.2.2 of this appendix.
If the oven also uses electrical energy, also calculate the total integrated annual electrical energy consumption, IETOE, in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year and defined as: IETOE = EASO + EAAS + EOTLP
+ (EOF x NOG), Where:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.012 is the average annual secondary energy consumption for cooking, Where: n = number of conventional ovens in the basic model.ESO = annual secondary energy consumption for cooking of gas
ovens as determined in section 4.1.2.1.2 of this appendix.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.013
is the average annual secondary self-cleaning energy consumption, Where: n = number of self-cleaning ovens in the basic model.ESS = annual secondary self-cleaning energy consumption of
gas ovens as determined in section 4.1.2.2.2 of this appendix.EOTLP = annual combined low-power mode energy consumption as
determined in section 4.1.2.3 of this appendix.EOF = fan-only mode energy consumption as measured in section
3.2.1.2 of this appendix.NOG = representative number of annual conventional gas oven
cooking cycles per year, which is equal to 183 cycles for a
conventional gas oven without self-clean capability and 197
cycles for a conventional gas oven with self-clean capability.
4.1.3 Conventional oven cooking efficiency.
4.1.3.1 Single conventional oven. Calculate the conventional oven cooking efficiency, EffAO, using the following equations:
For electric ovens:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.015
and,
For gas ovens:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.016
Where: W1 = measured weight of test block in pounds (kg).Cp = 0.23 Btu/lb-[deg]F (0.96 kJ/kg/ [deg]C), specific heat
of test block.TS = 234 [deg]F (130 [deg]C), temperature rise of test block.EO = test energy consumption as measured in Section 3.2.1 or
calculated in Section 4.1.1 or Section 4.1.1.1.Ke = 3.412 Btu/Wh (3.6 kJ/Wh), conversion factor for watt-
hours to Btu's.EIO = electrical test energy consumption according to Section
3.2.1 or as calculated in Section 4.1.1.1.
4.1.3.2 Multiple conventional ovens. If the cooking appliance includes more than one conventional oven, calculate the cooking efficiency for all of the conventional ovens in the appliance, EffTO, using the following equation:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.017 Where: n = number of conventional ovens in the cooking appliance.EffAO = cooking efficiency of each oven determined according
to Section 4.1.3.1.
4.1.4 Conventional oven energy factor and integrated energy factor.
4.1.4.1 Conventional oven energy factor. Calculate the energy factor, or the ratio of useful cooking energy output to the total energy input, RO, using the following equations:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.014
For electric ovens, Where: OO = 29.3 kWh (105,480 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output.EAO = total annual energy consumption for electric ovens as
determined in section 4.1.2.4.1 of this appendix.
For gas ovens:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.015
Where: OO = 88.8 kBtu (93,684 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output.EAOG = total annual gas energy consumption for conventional
gas ovens as determined in section 4.1.2.4.3 of this appendix.EAOE = total annual electrical energy consumption for
conventional gas ovens as determined in section 4.1.2.4.3 of
this appendix.Ke = 3,412 Btu/kWh (3,600 kJ/kWh), conversion factor for
kilowatt-hours to Btu's.
4.1.4.2 Conventional oven integrated energy factor. Calculate the integrated energy factor, or the ratio of useful cooking energy output to the total integrated energy input, IRO, using the following equations:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.016
For electric ovens, Where: OO = 29.3 kWh (105,480 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output.IEAO = total integrated annual energy consumption for
electric ovens as determined in section 4.1.2.4.2 of this
appendix.
For gas ovens:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.017
Where: OO = 88.8 kBtu (93,684 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output.EAOG = total annual gas energy consumption for conventional
gas ovens as determined in section 4.1.2.4.3 of this appendix.IEAOE = total integrated annual electrical energy consumption
for conventional gas ovens as determined in section 4.1.2.4.3
of this appendix.Ke = 3,412 Btu/kWh (3,600 kJ/kWh), conversion factor for
kilowatt-hours to Btus.
4.2.1.1 Electric surface unit cooking efficiency. Calculate the cooking efficiency, EffSU, of the electric surface unit under test, defined as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.018 Where: W = measured weight of test block, W2 or W3,
expressed in pounds (kg).Cp = 0.23 Btu/lb- [deg]F (0.96 kJ/kg / [deg]C), specific heat
of test block.TSU = temperature rise of the test block: final test block
temperature, TCT, as determined in section 3.2.2 of
this appendix, minus the initial test block temperature,
TI, expressed in [deg]F ( [deg]C) as determined in
section 2.7.5 of this appendix.Ke = 3.412 Btu/Wh (3.6 kJ/Wh), conversion factor of watt-
hours to Btus.ECT = measured energy consumption, as determined according to
section 3.2.2.1 of this appendix, expressed in watt-hours
(kJ).
4.2.1.2 Gas surface unit cooking efficiency. Calculate the cooking efficiency, EffSU, of the gas surface unit under test, defined as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.019 Where: W3 = measured weight of test block as measured in section
3.3.2 of this appendix, expressed in pounds (kg).Cp and TSU are the same as defined in section
4.2.1.1 of this appendix. and, E = VCT + (EIC x Ke), Where: VCT = total gas consumption in standard cubic feet (L) for
the gas surface unit test as measured in section 3.2.2.1 of
this appendix.EIC = electrical energy consumed in watt-hours (kJ) by an
ignition device of a gas surface unit as measured in section
3.2.2.1 of this appendix.Ke = 3.412 Btu/Wh (3.6 kJ/Wh), conversion factor of watt-
hours to Btus.
4.2.1.3 Conventional cooking top cooking efficiency. Calculate the conventional cooking top cooking efficiency, EffCT, using the following equation:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.023 Where: n = number of surface units in the cooking top.EffSU = the efficiency of each of the surface units, as
determined according to Section 4.2.1.1 or Section 4.2.1.2.
4.2.2 Conventional cooking top annual energy consumption.
4.2.2.1 Conventional electric cooking top.
4.2.2.1.1 Annual energy consumption of a conventional electric cooking top. Calculate the annual electrical energy consumption of an electric cooking top, ECA, in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year, defined as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.020 Where: OCT = 173.1 kWh (623,160 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output.EffCT = conventional cooking top cooking efficiency as
defined in section 4.2.1.3 of this appendix.
4.2.2.1.2 Integrated annual energy consumption of a conventional electric cooking top. Calculate the total integrated annual electrical energy consumption of an electric cooking top, IECA, in kilowatt-hours (kJ) per year, defined as: [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.021 Where: OCT = 173.1 kWh (623,160 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output.EffCT = conventional cooking top cooking efficiency as
defined in section 4.2.1.3 of this appendix. ECTLP = conventional cooking top combined low-power mode
energy consumption = [(PIA x SIA) +
(POM x SOM)] x K, Where: PIA = conventional cooking top inactive mode power, in watts,
as measured in section 3.1.2.1.1 of this appendix.POM = conventional cooking top off mode power, in watts, as
measured in section 3.1.2.1.2 of this appendix.If the conventional cooking top has both inactive mode and off mode
annual hours, SIA and SOM both equal
4273.4;If the conventional cooking top has an inactive mode but no off mode,
the inactive mode annual hours, SIA, is equal to
8546.9, and the off mode annual hours, SOM, is
equal to 0;If the conventional cooking top has an off mode but no inactive mode,
SIA is equal to 0, and SOM is equal to
8546.9;K = 0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours.
4.2.2.2 Conventional gas cooking top
4.2.2.2.1 Annual cooking energy consumption. Calculate the annual energy consumption for cooking, ECC, in Btu's (kJ) per year for a gas cooking top, defined as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03OC97.025 Where: OCT = 527.6 kBtu (556,618 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output.EffCT = the gas cooking top efficiency as defined in Section
4.2.1.3.
4.2.2.2.2 Total integrated annual energy consumption of a conventional gas cooking top. Calculate the total integrated annual energy consumption of a conventional gas cooking top, IECA, in Btus (kJ) per year, defined as: IECA = ECC + ECTSO, Where: ECC = energy consumption for cooking as determined in section
4.2.2.2.1 of this appendix.ECTSO = conventional cooking top combined low-power mode
energy consumption = [(PIA x SIA) +
(POM x SOM)] x K, Where: PIA = conventional cooking top inactive mode power, in watts, as measured in section 3.1.2.1.1 of this appendix.POM = conventional cooking top off mode power, in watts, as
measured in section 3.1.2.1.2 of this appendix.If the conventional cooking top has both inactive mode and off mode
annual hours, SIA and SOM both equal
4273.4;If the conventional cooking top has an inactive mode but no off mode,
the inactive mode annual hours, SIA, is equal to
8546.9, and the off mode annual hours, SOM, is
equal to 0;If the conventional cooking top has an off mode but no inactive mode,
SIA is equal to 0, and SOM is equal to
8546.9;K = 0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours.
4.2.3 Conventional cooking top energy factor and integrated energy factor.
4.2.3.1 Conventional cooking top energy factor. Calculate the energy factor or ratio of useful cooking energy output for cooking to the total energy input, RCT, as follows:
For an electric cooking top, the energy factor is the same as the cooking efficiency as determined according to section 4.2.1.3 of this appendix.
For gas cooking tops,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.022
Where: OCT = 527.6 kBtu (556,618 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output of cooking top.ECC = energy consumption for cooking as determined in section
4.2.2.2.1 of this appendix.
4.2.3.2 Conventional cooking top integrated energy factor. Calculate the integrated energy factor or ratio of useful cooking energy output for cooking to the total integrated energy input, IRCT, as follows:
For electric cooking tops,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.023
Where: OCT = 527.6 kBtu (556,618 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output of cooking top.IECA = total annual integrated energy consumption of cooking
top determined according to section 4.2.2.1.2 of this
appendix.
For gas cooking tops,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.024
Where: OCT = 527.6 kBtu (556,618 kJ) per year, annual useful cooking
energy output of cooking top.IECA = total integrated annual energy consumption of cooking
top determined according to section 4.2.2.2.2 of this
appendix.
4.3 Combined components. The annual energy consumption of a kitchen range (e.g., a cooking top and oven combined) shall be the sum of the annual energy consumption of each of its components. The integrated annual energy consumption of a kitchen range shall be the sum of the annual energy consumption of each of its components plus the total annual fan-only mode energy consumption for the oven component, ETOF, defined as: ETOF = EOF x NR, Where: EOF = conventional oven fan-only mode energy consumption, in
kilowatt-hours, as measured in section 3.2.1.2 of this
appendix.NR = representative number of annual conventional oven
cooking cycles per year, which is equal to 219 cycles for a
conventional electric oven without self-clean capability, 204
cycles for a conventional electric oven with self-clean
capability, 183 cycles for a conventional gas oven without
self-clean capability, and 197 cycles for a conventional gas
oven with self-clean capability. plus the conventional range integrated annual combined low-power mode energy consumption, ERTLP, defined as: ERTLP = [(PIA x SIA) + (POM
x SOM)] x K Where: PIA = conventional range inactive mode power, in watts, as
measured in section 3.1.3.1 of this appendix.POM = conventional range off mode power, in watts, as
measured in section 3.1.3.2 of this appendix.STOT equals the total number of inactive mode and off mode
hours per year;If the conventional oven component of the conventional range has fan-
only mode, STOT equals (8,329.2 - (tOF/
60)) hours, where tOF is the conventional oven fan-
only mode duration, in minutes, as measured in section 3.2.1.2
of this appendix, and 60 is the conversion factor for minutes
to hours; otherwise, STOT is equal to 8,329.2
hours.If the conventional range has both inactive mode and off mode,
SIA and SOM both equal STOT/
2;If the conventional range has an inactive mode but no off mode, the
inactive mode annual hours, SIA, is equal to
STOT, and the off mode annual hours,
SOM, is equal to 0; If the conventional range has an off mode but no inactive mode,
SIA is equal to 0, and SOM is equal to
STOT;K = 0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours.
The annual energy consumption for other combinations of ovens and cooktops will also be treated as the sum of the annual energy consumption of each of its components. The energy factor of a combined component is the sum of the annual useful cooking energy output of each component divided by the sum of the total annual energy consumption of each component. The integrated energy factor of other combinations of ovens and cooktops is the sum of the annual useful cooking energy output of each component divided by the sum of the total integrated annual energy consumption of each component. [62 FR 51981, Oct. 3, 1997, as amended at 75 FR 42583, July 22, 2010; 76 FR 12844, Mar. 9, 2011; 77 FR 65987, Oct. 31, 2012; 78 FR 4025, Jan. 18, 2013]
Sec. Appendix J1 to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Automatic and Semi-Automatic Clothes
Washers
Manufacturers may use Appendix J1 to certify compliance with existing DOE energy conservation standards until the compliance date of any amended standards that address standby and off mode power consumption for residential clothes washers. After this date, all residential clothes washers shall be tested using the provisions of Appendix J2.
1. Definitions and Symbols
1.1 Adaptive control system means a clothes washer control system, other than an adaptive water fill control system, which is capable of automatically adjusting washer operation or washing conditions based on characteristics of the clothes load placed in the clothes container, without allowing or requiring consumer intervention or actions. The automatic adjustments may, for example, include automatic selection, modification, or control of any of the following: wash water temperature, agitation or tumble cycle time, number of rinse cycles, and spin speed. The characteristics of the clothes load, which could trigger such adjustments, could, for example, consist of or be indicated by the presence of either soil, soap, suds, or any other additive laundering substitute or complementary product.
Note: Appendix J1 does not provide a means for determining the energy consumption of a clothes washer with an adaptive control system. Therefore, pursuant to 10 CFR 430.27, a waiver must be obtained to establish an acceptable test procedure for each such clothes washer.
1.2 Adaptive water fill control system means a clothes washer water fill control system which is capable of automatically adjusting the water fill level based on the size or weight of the clothes load placed in the clothes container, without allowing or requiring consumer intervention or actions.
1.3 Bone-dry means a condition of a load of test cloth which has been dried in a dryer at maximum temperature for a minimum of 10 minutes, removed and weighed before cool down, and then dried again for 10 minute periods until the final weight change of the load is 1 percent or less.
1.4 Clothes container means the compartment within the clothes washer that holds the clothes during the operation of the machine.
1.5 Compact means a clothes washer which has a clothes container capacity of less than 1.6 ft\3\ (45 L).
1.6 Deep rinse cycle means a rinse cycle in which the clothes container is filled with water to a selected level and the clothes load is rinsed by agitating it or tumbling it through the water.
(A) the cycle recommended by the manufacturer for washing cotton or linen clothes, and includes all wash/rinse temperature selections and water levels offered in that cycle, and (B) for each other wash/rinse temperature selection or water level available on that basic model, the portion(s) of other cycle(s) with that temperature selection or water level that, when tested pursuant to these test procedures, will contribute to an accurate representation of the energy consumption of the basic model as used by consumers. Any cycle under (A) or (B) shall include the agitation/tumble operation, spin speed(s), wash times, and rinse times applicable to that cycle, including water heating time for water heating clothes washers.
1.8 Load use factor means the percentage of the total number of wash loads that a user would wash a particular size (weight) load.
1.9 Manual control system means a clothes washer control system which requires that the consumer make the choices that determine washer operation or washing conditions, such as, for example, wash/rinse temperature selections, and wash time before starting the cycle.
1.10 Manual water fill control system means a clothes washer water fill control system which requires the consumer to determine or select the water fill level.
1.11 Modified energy factor means the quotient of the cubic foot (or liter) capacity of the clothes container divided by the total clothes washer energy consumption per cycle, with such energy consumption expressed as the sum of the machine electrical energy consumption, the hot water energy consumption, and the energy required for removal of the remaining moisture in the wash load.
1.12 Non-water-heating clothes washer means a clothes washer which does not have an internal water heating device to generate hot water.
1.13 Spray rinse cycle means a rinse cycle in which water is sprayed onto the clothes for a period of time without maintaining any specific water level in the clothes container.
1.14 Standard means a clothes washer which has a clothes container capacity of 1.6 ft\3\ (45 L) or greater.
1.15 Temperature use factor means, for a particular wash/rinse temperature setting, the percentage of the total number of wash loads that an average user would wash with that setting.
1.16 Thermostatically controlled water valves means clothes washer controls that have the ability to sense and adjust the hot and cold supply water.
(A) multiple warm wash selections for which the warm wash water temperatures have a linear relationship with all discrete warm wash selections when the water temperatures are plotted against equally spaced consecutive warm wash selections between the hottest warm wash and the coldest warm wash. If the warm wash has infinite selections, the warm wash water temperature has a linear relationship with the distance on the selection device (e.g. dial angle or slide movement) between the hottest warm wash and the coldest warm wash. The criteria for a linear relationship as specified above is that the difference between the actual water temperature at any warm wash selection and the point where that temperature is depicted on the temperature/selection line formed by connecting the warmest and the coldest warm selections is less than 5 percent. In all cases, the mean water temperature of the warmest and the coldest warm selections must coincide with the mean of the ``hot wash'' (maximum wash temperature <=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) and ``cold wash'' (minimum wash temperature) water temperatures within 3.8 [deg]F (2.1 [deg]C); or (B) on a clothes washer with only one warm wash temperature selection, a warm wash temperature selection with a water temperature that coincides with the mean of the ``hot wash'' (maximum wash temperature <=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) and ``cold wash'' (minimum wash temperature) water temperatures within 3.8 [deg]F (2.1 [deg]C).
1.18 Warm wash means all wash temperature selections that are below the hottest hot, less than 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C), and above the coldest cold temperature selection.
1.19 Water factor means the quotient of the total weighted per-cycle water consumption divided by the cubic foot (or liter) capacity of the clothes washer.
1.20 Water-heating clothes washer means a clothes washer where some or all of the hot water for clothes washing is generated by a water heating device internal to the clothes washer.
1.21 Symbol usage. The following identity relationships are provided to help clarify the symbology used throughout this procedure. E--Electrical Energy ConsumptionH--Hot Water ConsumptionC--Cold Water ConsumptionR--Hot Water Consumed by Warm RinseER--Electrical Energy Consumed by Warm RinseTUF--Temperature Use FactorHE--Hot Water Energy ConsumptionF--Load Usage FactorQ--Total Water ConsumptionME--Machine Electrical Energy ConsumptionRMC--Remaining Moisture ContentWI--Initial Weight of Dry Test LoadWC--Weight of Test Load After Extractionm--Extra Hot Wash (maximum wash temp. 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C.))h--Hot Wash (maximum wash temp. <=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C.))w--Warm Washc--Cold Wash (minimum wash temp.)r--Warm Rinse (hottest rinse temp.)x or max--Maximum Test Loada or avg--Average Test Loadn or min--Minimum Test Load
The following examples are provided to show how the above symbols can be used to define variables: Emx = ``Electrical Energy Consumption'' for an ``Extra Hot
Wash'' and ``Maximum Test Load''Ra = ``Hot Water Consumed by Warm Rinse'' for the ``Average
Test Load''TUFm = ``Temperature Use Factor'' for an ``Extra Hot Wash''HEmin = ``Hot Water Energy Consumption'' for the ``Minimum
Test Load''
1.22 Cold rinse means the coldest rinse temperature available on the machine.
1.23 Warm rinse means the hottest rinse temperature available on the machine (and should be the same rinse temperature selection tested in 3.7 of this appendix).
2. Testing Conditions
2.1 Installation. Install the clothes washer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.2 Electrical energy supply. Maintain the electrical supply at the clothes washer terminal block within 2 percent of 120, 120/240, or 120/208Y volts as applicable to the particular terminal block wiring system and within 2 percent of the nameplate frequency as specified by the manufacturer. If the clothes washer has a dual voltage conversion capability, conduct test at the highest voltage specified by the manufacturer.
2.3 Supply Water.
2.3.1 Clothes washers in which electrical energy consumption or water energy consumption are affected by the inlet water temperature. (For example, water heating clothes washers or clothes washers with thermostatically controlled water valves.). The temperature of the hot water supply at the water inlets shall not exceed 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C) and the cold water supply at the water inlets shall not exceed 60 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C). A water meter shall be installed in both the hot and cold water lines to measure water consumption.
2.3.2 Clothes washers in which electrical energy consumption and water energy consumption are not affected by the inlet water temperature. The temperature of the hot water supply shall be maintained at 135 [deg]F5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C) and the cold water supply shall be maintained at 60 [deg]F5 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C). A water meter shall be installed in both the hot and cold water lines to measure water consumption.
2.4 Water pressure. The static water pressure at the hot and cold water inlet connection of the clothes washer shall be maintained at 35 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) 2.5 psig (241.3 kPa17.2 kPa) during the test. The static water pressure for a single water inlet connection shall be maintained at 35 psig2.5 psig (241.3 kPa17.2 kPa) during the test. A water pressure gauge shall be installed in both the hot and cold water lines to measure water pressure.
2.5 Instrumentation. Perform all test measurements using the following instruments, as appropriate:
2.5.1 Weighing scales.
2.5.1.1 Weighing scale for test cloth. The scale shall have a resolution of no larger than 0.2 oz (5.7 g) and a maximum error no greater than 0.3 percent of the measured value.
2.5.1.2 Weighing scale for clothes container capacity measurements. The scale should have a resolution no larger than 0.50 lbs (0.23 kg) and a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value.
2.5.2 Watt-hour meter. The watt-hour meter shall have a resolution no larger than 1 Wh (3.6 kJ) and a maximum error no greater than 2 percent of the measured value for any demand greater than 50 Wh (180.0 kJ).
2.5.3 Temperature measuring device. The device shall have an error no greater than 1 [deg]F (0.6 [deg]C) over the range being measured.
2.5.4 Water meter. The water meter shall have a resolution no larger than 0.1 gallons (0.4 liters) and a maximum error no greater than 2 percent for the water flow rates being measured.
2.5.5 Water pressure gauge. The water pressure gauge shall have a resolution of 1 pound per square inch gauge (psig) (6.9 kPa) and shall have an error no greater than 5 percent of any measured value.
2.6 Test cloths.
2.6.1 Energy Test Cloth. The energy test cloth shall be made from energy test cloth material, as specified in 2.6.4, that is 24 inches by 36 inches (61.0 cm by 91.4 cm) and has been hemmed to 22 inches by 34 inches (55.9 cm by 86.4 cm) before washing. The energy test cloth shall be clean and shall not be used for more than 60 test runs (after preconditioning as specified in 2.6.3 of this appendix). All energy test cloth must be permanently marked identifying the lot number of the material. Mixed lots of material shall not be used for testing the clothes washers.
2.6.2 Energy Stuffer Cloth. The energy stuffer cloth shall be made from energy test cloth material, as specified in 2.6.4, and shall consist of pieces of material that are 12 inches by 12 inches (30.5 cm by 30.5 cm) and have been hemmed to 10 inches by 10 inches (25.4 cm by 25.4 cm) before washing. The energy stuffer cloth shall be clean and shall not be used for more than 60 test runs (after preconditioning as specified in 2.6.3 of this appendix). All energy stuffer cloth must be permanently marked identifying the lot number of the material. Mixed lots of material shall not be used for testing the clothes washers.
2.6.3 Preconditioning of Test Cloths. The new test cloths, including energy test cloths and energy stuffer cloths, shall be pre-conditioned in a clothes washer in the following manner:
2.6.3.1 Perform 5 complete normal wash-rinse-spin cycles, the first two with current AHAM Standard detergent Formula 3 and the last three without detergent. Place the test cloth in a clothes washer set at the maximum water level. Wash the load for ten minutes in soft water (17 ppm hardness or less) using 27.0 grams + 4.0 grams per pound of cloth load of AHAM Standard detergent Formula 3. The wash temperature is to be controlled to 135 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C) and the rinse temperature is to be controlled to 60 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C). Repeat the cycle with detergent and then repeat the cycle three additional times without detergent, bone drying the load between cycles (total of five wash and rinse cycles).
2.6.4 Energy test cloth material. The energy test cloths and energy stuffer cloths shall be made from fabric meeting the following specifications. The material should come from a roll of material with a width of approximately 63 inches and approximately 500 yards per roll, however, other sizes maybe used if they fall within the specifications.
2.6.4.1 Nominal fabric type. Pure finished bleached cloth, made with a momie or granite weave, which is nominally 50 percent cotton and 50 percent polyester.
2.6.4.2 The fabric weight shall be 5.60 ounces per square yard (190.0 g/m\2\), 5 percent.
2.6.4.3 The thread count shall be 65 x 57 per inch (warp x fill), 2 percent.
2.6.4.4 The warp yarn and filling yarn shall each have fiber content of 50 percent 4 percent cotton, with the balance being polyester, and be open end spun, 15/1 5 percent cotton count blended yarn.
2.6.4.5 Water repellent finishes, such as fluoropolymer stain resistant finishes shall not be applied to the test cloth. The absence of such finishes shall be verified by:
2.6.4.5.1 American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC) Test Method 118--1997, Oil Repellency: Hydrocarbon Resistance Test (reaffirmed 1997), of each new lot of test cloth (when purchased from the mill) to confirm the absence of Scotchguard\TM\ or other water repellent finish (required scores of ``D'' across the board).
2.6.4.5.2 American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC) Test Method 79-2000, Absorbency of Bleached Textiles (reaffirmed 2000), of each new lot of test cloth (when purchased from the mill) to confirm the absence of Scotchguard\TM\ or other water repellent finish (time to absorb one drop should be on the order of 1 second).
2.6.4.5.3 The standards listed in 2.6.4.5.1 and 2.6.4.5.2 of this appendix which are not otherwise set forth in this part 430 are incorporated by reference. The material listed in this paragraph has been approved for incorporation by reference by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Any subsequent amendment to a standard by the standard-setting organization will not affect the DOE test procedures unless and until amended by DOE. Material is incorporated as it exists on the date of the approval and notice of any change in the material will be published in the Federal Register. The standards incorporated by reference are the American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists Test Method 118-1997, Oil Repellency: Hydrocarbon Resistance Test (reaffirmed 1997) and Test Method 79-2000, Absorbency of Bleached Textiles (reaffirmed 2000).
(a) The above standards incorporated by reference are available for inspection at:
(i) National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/federal--register/code--of--federal--regulations/ibr--locations.html.
(ii) U.S. Department of Energy, Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy, Hearings and Dockets, ``Energy Conservation Program for Consumer Products: Clothes Washer Energy Conservation Standards,'' Docket No. EE--RM-94-403, Forrestal Building, 1000 Independence Avenue, SW, Washington, DC.
(b) Copies of the above standards incorporated by reference can be obtained from the American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists, P.O. Box 12215, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, telephone (919) 549-3526, fax (919) 549-8933, or email: orders@aatcc.org.
2.6.4.6 The moisture absorption and retention shall be evaluated for each new lot of test cloth by the Standard Extractor Remaining Moisture Content (RMC) Test specified in 2.6.5 of this appendix.
2.6.4.6.1 Repeat the Standard Extractor RMC Test in 2.6.5 of this appendix three times.
2.6.4.6.2 An RMC correction curve shall be calculated as specified in 2.6.6 of this appendix.
2.6.5 Standard Extractor RMC Test Procedure. The following procedure is used to evaluate the moisture absorption and retention characteristics of a lot of test cloth by measuring the RMC in a standard extractor at a specified set of conditions. Table 2.6.5 of this appendix is the matrix of test conditions. The 500g requirement will only be used if a clothes washer design can achieve spin speeds in the 500g range. When this matrix is repeated 3 times, a total of 48 extractor RMC test runs are required. For the purpose of the extractor RMC test, the test cloths may be used for up to 60 test runs (after preconditioning as specified in 2.6.3 of this appendix).
Table 2.6.5--Matrix of Extractor RMC Test Conditions----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Warm soak Cold soak
---------------------------------------------
``g Force'' 15 min. 4 min. 15 min. 4 min.
spin spin spin spin----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------100............................................................... .......... ......... .......... .........200............................................................... .......... ......... .......... .........350............................................................... .......... ......... .......... .........500............................................................... .......... ......... .......... .........----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.6.5.1 The standard extractor RMC tests shall be run in a Bock Model 215 extractor (having a basket diameter of 19.5 inches, length of 12 inches, and volume of 2.1 ft\3\), with a variable speed drive (Bock Engineered Products, P.O. Box 5127, Toledo, OH 43611) or an equivalent extractor with same basket design (i.e. diameter, length, volume, and hole configuration) and variable speed drive.
2.6.5.2 Test Load. Test cloths shall be preconditioned in accordance with 2.6.3 of this appendix. The load size shall be 8.4 lbs., consistent with 3.8.1 of this appendix.
2.6.5.3 Procedure.
2.6.5.3.1 Record the ``bone-dry'' weight of the test load (WI).
2.6.5.3.2 Soak the test load for 20 minutes in 10 gallons of soft (<17 ppm) water. The entire test load shall be submerged. The water temperature shall be 100 [deg]F 5 [deg]F.
2.6.5.3.3 Remove the test load and allow water to gravity drain off of the test cloths. Then manually place the test cloths in the basket of the extractor, distributing them evenly by eye. Spin the load at a fixed speed corresponding to the intended centripetal acceleration level (measured in units of the acceleration of gravity, g) 1 g for the intended time period 5 seconds.
2.6.5.3.4 Record the weight of the test load immediately after the completion of the extractor spin cycle (WC).
2.6.5.3.5 Calculate the RMC as (WC-WI)/WI.
2.6.5.3.6 The RMC of the test load shall be measured at three (3) g levels: 100g; 200g; and 350g, using two different spin times at each g level: 4 minutes; and 15 minutes. If a clothes washer design can achieve spin speeds in the 500g range then the RMC of the test load shall be measured at four (4) g levels: 100g; 200g; 350g; and 500g, using two different spin times at each g level: 4 minutes; and 15 minutes.
2.6.5.4 Repeat 2.6.5.3 of this appendix using soft (<17 ppm) water at 60 [deg]F 5 [deg]F.
2.6.6 Calculation of RMC correction curve.
2.6.6.1 Average the values of 3 test runs and fill in Table 2.6.5 of this appendix. Perform a linear least-squares fit to determine coefficients A and B such that the standard RMC values shown in Table 2.6.6.1 of this appendix (RMCstandard) are linearly related to the RMC values measured in section 2.6.5 of this appendix (RMCcloth): RMCstandard A * RMCcloth + B where A and B are coefficients of the linear least-squares fit.
2.6.6.2 Perform an analysis of variance with replication test using two factors, spin speed and lot, to check the interaction of speed and lot. Use the values from Table 2.6.5 and Table 2.6.6.1 of this Appendix in the calculation. The ``P'' value of the F-statistic for interaction between spin speed and lot in the variance analysis shall be greater than or equal to 0.1. If the ``P'' value is less than 0.1, the test cloth is unacceptable. ``P'' is a theoretically based measure of interaction based on an analysis of variance.
2.6.7 Application of RMC correction curve.
2.6.7.1 Using the coefficients A and B calculated in 2.6.6.1 of this appendix: RMCcorr = A * RMC + B
2.6.7.2 Substitute RMCcorr values in calculations in 3.8 of this appendix.
2.7 Test Load Sizes. Maximum, minimum, and, when required, average test load sizes shall be determined using Table 5.1 and the clothes container capacity as measured in 3.1.1 through 3.1.5. Test loads shall consist of energy test cloths, except that adjustments to the test loads to achieve proper weight can be made by the use of energy stuffer cloths with no more than 5 stuffer clothes per load.
2.8 Use of Test Loads. Table 2.8 defines the test load sizes and corresponding water fill settings which are to be used when measuring water and energy consumptions. Adaptive water fill control system and manual water fill control system are defined in section 1 of this appendix:
Table 2.8--Test Load Sizes and Water Fill Settings Required------------------------------------------------------------------------
Manual water fill control Adaptive water fill control system
system ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Water fill Test load size Water fill settingTest load size setting------------------------------------------------------------------------Max Max Max As determined by theMin Min Avg Clothes Washer.
Min------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.8.1 The test load sizes to be used to measure RMC are specified in section 3.8.1.
2.8.2 Test loads for energy and water consumption measurements shall be bone dry prior to the first cycle of the test, and dried to a maximum of 104 percent of bone dry weight for subsequent testing.
2.8.3 Load the energy test cloths by grasping them in the center, shaking them to hang loosely and then put them into the clothes container prior to activating the clothes washer.
2.9 Pre-conditioning.
2.9.1 Nonwater-heating clothes washer. If the clothes washer has not been filled with water in the preceding 96 hours, pre-condition it by running it through a cold rinse cycle and then draining it to ensure that the hose, pump, and sump are filled with water.
2.9.2 Water-heating clothes washer. If the clothes washer has not been filled with water in the preceding 96 hours, or if it has not been in the test room at the specified ambient conditions for 8 hours, pre-condition it by running it through a cold rinse cycle and then draining it to ensure that the hose, pump, and sump are filled with water.
2.10 Wash time setting. If one wash time is prescribed in the energy test cycle, that shall be the wash time setting; otherwise, the wash time setting shall be the higher of either the minimum or 70 percent of the maximum wash time available in the energy test cycle, regardless of the labeling of suggested dial locations. If the clothes washer is equipped with an electromechanical dial controlling wash time, reset the dial to the minimum wash time and then turn it in the direction of increasing wash time to reach the appropriate setting. If the appropriate setting is passed, return the dial to the minimum wash time and then turn in the direction of increasing wash time until the setting is reached.
2.11 Test room temperature for water-heating clothes washers. Maintain the test room ambient air temperature at 75 [deg]F5 [deg]F (23.9 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C).
3. Test Measurements
3.1 Clothes container capacity. Measure the entire volume which a dry clothes load could occupy within the clothes container during washer operation according to the following procedures:
3.1.1 Place the clothes washer in such a position that the uppermost edge of the clothes container opening is leveled horizontally, so that the container will hold the maximum amount of water.
3.1.2 Line the inside of the clothes container with 2 mil (0.051 mm) plastic sheet. All clothes washer components which occupy space within the clothes container and which are recommended for use with the energy test cycle shall be in place and shall be lined with 2 mil (0.051 mm) plastic sheet to prevent water from entering any void space.
3.1.3 Record the total weight of the machine before adding water.
3.1.4 Fill the clothes container manually with either 60 [deg]F5 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C2.8 [deg]C) or 100 [deg]F10 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C5.5 [deg]C) water to its uppermost edge. Measure and record the weight of water, W, in pounds.
3.1.5 The clothes container capacity is calculated as follows: C=W/d. where: C=Capacity in cubic feet (liters).W=Mass of water in pounds (kilograms).d=Density of water (62.0 lbs/ft\3\ for 100 [deg]F (993 kg/m\3\ for 37.8
[deg]C) or 62.3 lbs/ft\3\ for 60 [deg]F (998 kg/m\3\ for 15.6
[deg]C)).
3.2 Procedure for measuring water and energy consumption values on all automatic and semi-automatic washers. All energy consumption tests shall be performed under the energy test cycle(s), unless otherwise specified. Table 3.2 defines the sections below which govern tests of particular clothes washers, based on the number of wash/rinse temperature selections available on the model, and also, in some instances, method of water heating. The procedures prescribed are applicable regardless of a clothes washer's washing capacity, loading port location, primary axis of rotation of the clothes container, and type of control system.
3.2.1 Inlet water temperature and the wash/rinse temperature settings.
3.2.1.1 For automatic clothes washers set the wash/rinse temperature selection control to obtain the wash water temperature desired (extra hot, hot, warm, or cold) and cold rinse, and open both the hot and cold water faucets.
3.2.1.2 For semi-automatic washers: (1) For hot water temperature, open the hot water faucet completely and close the cold water faucet; (2) for warm inlet water temperature, open both hot and cold water faucets completely; (3) for cold water temperature, close the hot water faucet and open the cold water faucet completely.
3.2.1.3 Determination of warm wash water temperature(s) to decide whether a clothes washer has uniformly distributed warm wash temperature selections. The wash water temperature, Tw, of each warm water wash selection shall be calculated or measured.
For non-water-heating clothes washers, calculate Tw as follows: Tw([deg]F)=((Hwx135 [deg]F)+(Cwx60 [deg]F))/(Hw+Cw)
or Tw([deg]C)=((Hwx57.2 [deg]C)+(Cwx15.6 [deg]C))/(Hw+Cw) where: Hw=Hot water consumption of a warm washCw=Cold water consumption of a warm wash
For water-heating clothes washers, measure and record the temperature of each warm wash selection after fill.
3.2.2 Total water consumption during the energy test cycle shall be measured, including hot and cold water consumption during wash, deep rinse, and spray rinse.
3.2.3 Clothes washers with adaptive water fill/manual water fill control systems
3.2.3.1 Clothes washers with adaptive water fill control system and alternate manual water fill control systems. If a clothes washer with an adaptive water fill control system allows consumer selection of manual controls as an alternative, then both manual and adaptive modes shall be tested and, for each mode, the energy consumption (HET, MET, and DE) and water consumption (QT), values shall be calculated as set forth in section 4. Then the average of the two values (one from each mode, adaptive and manual) for each variable shall be used in section 4 for the clothes washer.
3.2.3.2 Clothes washers with adaptive water fill control system.
3.2.3.2.1. Not user adjustable. The maximum, minimum, and average water levels as defined in the following sections shall be interpreted to mean that amount of water fill which is selected by the control system when the respective test loads are used, as defined in Table 2.8. The load usage factors which shall be used when calculating energy consumption values are defined in Table 4.1.3.
3.2.3.2.2 User adjustable. Four tests shall be conducted on clothes washers with user adjustable adaptive water fill controls which affect the relative wash water levels. The first test shall be conducted with the maximum test load and with the adaptive water fill control system set in the setting that will give the most energy intensive result. The second test shall be conducted with the minimum test load and with the adaptive water fill control system set in the setting that will give the least energy intensive result. The third test shall be conducted with the average test load and with the adaptive water fill control system set in the setting that will give the most energy intensive result for the given test load. The fourth test shall be conducted with the average test load and with the adaptive water fill control system set in the setting that will give the least energy intensive result for the given test load. The energy and water consumption for the average test load and water level, shall be the average of the third and fourth tests.
3.2.3.3 Clothes washers with manual water fill control system. In accordance with Table 2.8, the water fill selector shall be set to the maximum water level available on the clothes washer for the maximum test load size and set to the minimum water level for the minimum test load size. The load usage factors which shall be used when calculating energy consumption values are defined in Table 4.1.3.
Table 3.2--Test Section Reference
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Max. Wash Temp. Available................................ <=135 [deg]F (57.2
[deg]C)
135 [deg]F (57.2
[deg]C) \2\Number of Wash Temp. Selections.......................... 1 2 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) for water heating clothes washers only. Water and electrical energy consumption shall be measured for each water fill level and/or test load size as specified in 3.3.1 through 3.3.3 for the hottest wash setting available.
3.3.1 Maximum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption (Hmx), cold water consumption (Cmx), and electrical energy consumption (Emx) shall be measured for an extra hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the maximum water fill level. The maximum test load size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1.
3.3.2 Minimum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption (Hmn), cold water consumption (Cmn), and electrical energy consumption (Emn) shall be measured for an extra hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the minimum water fill level. The minimum test load size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1.
3.3.3 Average test load and water fill. For clothes washers with an adaptive water fill control system, measure the values for hot water consumption (Hma), cold water consumption (Cma), and electrical energy consumption (Ema) for an extra hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with an average test load size as determined per Table 5.1.
3.4 ``Hot Wash'' (Max Wash Temp<=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)). Water and electrical energy consumption shall be measured for each water fill level or test load size as specified in 3.4.1 through 3.4.3 for a 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) wash, if available, or for the hottest selection less than 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)).
3.4.1 Maximum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption (Hhx), cold water consumption (Chx), and electrical energy consumption (Ehx) shall be measured for a hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the maximum water fill level. The maximum test load size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1.
3.4.2 Minimum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption (Hhn), cold water consumption (Chn), and electrical energy consumption (Ehn) shall be measured for a hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the minimum water fill level. The minimum test load size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1.
3.4.3 Average test load and water fill. For clothes washers with an adaptive water fill control system, measure the values for hot water consumption (Hha), cold water consumption (Cha), and electrical energy consumption (Eha) for a hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with an average test load size as determined per Table 5.1.
3.5 ``Warm Wash.'' Water and electrical energy consumption shall be determined for each water fill level and/or test load size as specified in 3.5.1 through 3.5.2.3 for the applicable warm water wash temperature(s).
3.5.1 Clothes washers with uniformly distributed warm wash temperature selection(s). The reportable values to be used for the warm water wash setting shall be the arithmetic average of the measurements for the hot and cold wash selections. This is a calculation only, no testing is required.
3.5.2 Clothes washers that lack uniformly distributed warm wash temperature selections. For a clothes washer with fewer than four discrete warm wash selections, test all warm wash temperature selections. For a clothes washer that offers four or more warm wash selections, test at all discrete selections, or test at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 75 percent positions of the temperature selection device between the hottest hot (<=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) wash and the coldest cold wash. If a selection is not available at the 25, 50 or 75 percent position, in place of each such unavailable selection use the next warmer setting. Each reportable value to be used for the warm water wash setting shall be the arithmetic average of all tests conducted pursuant to this section.
3.5.2.1 Maximum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption (Hwx), cold water consumption (Cwx), and electrical energy consumption (Ewx) shall be measured with the controls set for the maximum water fill level. The maximum test load size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1.
3.5.2.2 Minimum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption (Hwn), cold water consumption (Cwn), and electrical energy consumption (Ewn) shall be measured with the controls set for the minimum water fill level. The minimum test load size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1.
3.5.2.3 Average test load and water fill. For clothes washers with an adaptive water fill control system, measure the values for hot water consumption (Hwa), cold water consumption (Cwa), and electrical energy consumption (Ewa) with an average test load size as determined per Table 5.1.
3.6 ``Cold Wash'' (Minimum Wash Temperature Selection). Water and electrical energy consumption shall be measured for each water fill level or test load size as specified in sections 3.6.1 through 3.6.3 of this Appendix for the coldest wash temperature selection available. For a clothes washer that offers two or more wash temperature settings labeled as cold, such as ``Cold'' and ``Tap Cold'', the setting with the minimum wash temperature shall be considered the cold wash. If any of the other cold wash temperature settings add hot water to raise the wash temperature above the cold water supply temperature, as defined in section 2.3 of this Appendix, those setting(s) shall be considered warm wash setting(s), as defined in section 1.18 of this Appendix. If none of the cold wash temperature settings add hot water for any of the water fill levels or test load sizes required for the energy test cycle, the wash temperature setting labeled as ``Cold'' shall be considered the cold wash, and the other wash temperature setting(s) labeled as cold shall not be required for testing.
3.7 Warm Rinse. Tests in sections 3.7.1 and 3.7.2 shall be conducted with the hottest rinse temperature available. If multiple wash temperatures are available with the hottest rinse temperature, any ``warm wash'' temperature may be selected to conduct the tests.
3.7.1 For the rinse only, measure the amount of hot water consumed by the clothes washer including all deep and spray rinses, for the maximum (Rx), minimum (Rn), and, if required by section 3.5.2.3, average (Ra) test load sizes or water fill levels.
3.7.2 Measure the amount of electrical energy consumed by the clothes washer to heat the rinse water only, including all deep and spray rinses, for the maximum (ERx), minimum (ERn), and, if required by section 3.5.2.3, average (ERa), test load sizes or water fill levels.
3.8 Remaining Moisture Content:
3.8.1 The wash temperature will be the same as the rinse temperature for all testing. Use the maximum test load as defined in Table 5.1 and section 3.1 for testing.
3.8.2 For clothes washers with cold rinse only:
3.8.2.1 Record the actual `bone dry' weight of the test load (WImax), then place the test load in the clothes washer.
3.8.2.2 Set water level selector to maximum fill.
3.8.2.3 Run the energy test cycle.
3.8.2.4 Record the weight of the test load immediately after completion of the energy test cycle (WCmax).
3.8.2.5 Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load, RMCMAX, expressed as a percentage and defined as: RMCmax = ((WCmax-WImax)/
WImax)x100%
3.8.3 For clothes washers with cold and warm rinse options:
3.8.3.1 Complete steps 3.8.2.1 through 3.8.2.4 for cold rinse. Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load for cold rinse, RMCCOLD, expressed as a percentage and defined as: RMCCOLD = ((WCmax-WImax)/
WImax)x100%
3.8.3.2 Complete steps 3.8.2.1 through 3.8.2.4 for warm rinse. Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load for warm rinse, RMCWARM, expressed as a percentage and defined as: RMCWARM = ((WCmax-WImax)/
WImax)x100%
3.8.3.3 Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load, RMCmax, expressed as a percentage and defined as: RMCmax = RMCCOLDx(1-
TUFr)+RMCWARMx(TUFr). where: TUFr is the temperature use factor for warm rinse as defined
in Table 4.1.1.
3.8.4 Clothes washers which have options that result in different RMC values, such as multiple selection of spin speeds or spin times, that are available in the energy test cycle, shall be tested at the maximum and minimum extremes of the available options, excluding any ``no spin'' (zero spin speed) settings, in accordance with requirements in 3.8.2 or 3.8.3. The calculated RMCmax extraction and RMCmin extraction at the maximum and minimum settings, respectively, shall be combined as follows and the final RMC to be used in section 4.3 shall be: RMC = 0.75 x RMCmax extraction + 0.25 x
RMCmin extraction
4. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements
4.1 Hot water and machine electrical energy consumption of clothes washers.
4.1.1 Per-cycle temperature-weighted hot water consumption for maximum, average, and minimum water fill levels using each appropriate load size as defined in section 2.8 and Table 5.1. Calculate for the cycle under test the per-cycle temperature weighted hot water consumption for the maximum water fill level, Vhx, the average water fill level, Vha, and the minimum water fill level, Vhn, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle) and defined as: (a) Vhx =
[HmxxTUFm]+[HhxxTUFh
]+[Hwx
xTUFw]+[HcxxTUFc]+[Rx
xTUFr](b) Vha =
[HmaxTUFm]+[HhaxTUFh
]+[Hwa
xTUFw]+[HcaxTUFc]+[Ra
xTUFr](c) Vhn =
[HmnxTUFm]+[HhnxTUFh
]+[Hwn
xTUFw]+[HcnxTUFc]+[Rn
xTUFr] where: Hmx, Hma, and Hmn, are reported hot
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per
cycle), at maximum, average, and minimum water fill,
respectively, for the extra-hot wash cycle with the
appropriate test loads as defined in section 2.8.Hhx, Hha, and Hhn, are reported hot
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per
cycle), at maximum, average, and minimum water fill,
respectively, for the hot wash cycle with the appropriate test
loads as defined in section 2.8.Hwx, Hwa, and Hwn, are reported hot
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per
cycle), at maximum, average, and minimum water fill,
respectively, for the warm wash cycle with the appropriate
test loads as defined in section 2.8.Hcx, Hca, and Hcn, are reported hot
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per
cycle), at maximum, average, and minimum water fill,
respectively, for the cold wash cycle with the appropriate
test loads as defined in section 2.8.Rx, Ra, and Rn are the reported hot
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per
cycle), at maximum, average, and minimum water fill,
respectively, for the warm rinse cycle and the appropriate
test loads as defined in section 2.8.TUFm, TUFh, TUFw, TUFc, and
TUFr are temperature use factors for extra hot
wash, hot wash, warm wash, cold wash, and warm rinse
temperature selections, respectively, and are as defined in
Table 4.1.1.
Table 4.1.1--Temperature Use Factors
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Max Wash Temp Available....... <=135 [deg]F <=135 [deg]F <=135 [deg]F 135 135
[deg]F [deg]F
(57.2 [deg]C) (57.2 [deg]C) (57.2 [deg]C) (57.2 [deg]C) (57.2 [deg]C)No. Wash Temp Selections...... Single 2 Temps 2 3 Temps 3
Temps TempsTUFm (extra hot).............. NA NA NA 0.14 0.05TUFh (hot).................... NA 0.63 0.14 NA 0.09TUFw (warm)................... NA NA 0.49 0.49 0.49TUFc (cold)................... 1.00 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37TUFr (warm rinse)............. 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1.2 Total per-cycle hot water energy consumption for all maximum, average, and minimum water fill levels tested. Calculate the total per-cycle hot water energy consumption for the maximum water fill level, HEmax, the minimum water fill level, HEmin, and the average water fill level, HEavg, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: (a) HEmax = [VhxxTxK]=Total energy when a maximum
load is tested.(b) HEavg = [VhaxTxK]=Total energy when an average
load is tested.(c) HEmin = [VhnxTxK]=Total energy when a minimum
load is tested. where: T=Temperature rise=75 [deg]F (41.7 [deg]C).K=Water specific heat in kilowatt-hours per gallon degree F=0.00240
(0.00114 kWh/L-[deg]C).Vhx Vha, and Vhn, are as defined in
4.1.1.
4.1.3 Total weighted per-cycle hot water energy consumption. Calculate the total weighted per cycle hot water energy consumption, HET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: HET =
[HEmaxxFmax]+[HEavgxFavg
]+[HEmnxFmin] where: HEmax, HEavg, and HEmin are as defined
in 4.1.2.Fmax, Favg, and Fmin are the load usage
factors for the maximum, average, and minimum
test loads based on the size and type of control system on the
washer being tested. The values are as shown in table 4.1.3.
Table 4.1.3--Load Usage Factors------------------------------------------------------------------------
Water fill control system Manual Adaptive------------------------------------------------------------------------Fmax =.......................................... 0.72 \1\ 0.12 \2\Favg =.......................................... .......... 0.74 \2\Fmin =.......................................... 0.28 \1\ 0.14 \2\------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ Reference 3.2.3.3.\2\ Reference 3.2.3.2.
4.1.4 Total per-cycle hot water energy consumption using gas-heated or oil-heated water. Calculate for the energy test cycle the per-cycle hot water consumption, HETG, using gas-heated or oil-heated water, expressed in Btu per cycle (or megajoules per cycle) and defined as: HETG = HETx1/ex3412 Btu/kWh or HETG =
HETx1/ex3.6 MJ/kWh Where: e = Nominal gas or oil water heater efficiency=0.75.HET = As defined in 4.1.3.
4.1.5 Per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption for all maximum, average, and minimum test load sizes. Calculate the total per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption for the maximum water fill level, MEmax, the minimum water fill level, MEmin, and the average water fill level, MEavg, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: (a)MEmax = [EmxxTUFm]+
[EhxxTUFh]+
[EwxxTUFw]+
[EcxxTUFc]+
[ERxxTUFr](b) MEavg = [EmaxTUFm]+
[EhaxTUFh]+
[EwaxTUFw]+
[EcaxTUFc]+
[ERaxTUFr](c) MEmin = [EmnxTUFm]+
[EhnxTUFh]+
[EwnxTUFw]+
[EcnxxTUFc]+
[ERnxTUFr] where: Emx, Ema, and Emn, are reported
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per
cycle, at maximum, average, and minimum test loads,
respectively, for the extra-hot wash cycle.Ehx, Eha, and Ehn, are reported
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per
cycle, at maximum, average, and minimum test loads,
respectively, for the hot wash cycle.Ewx, Ewa, and Ewn, are reported
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per
cycle, at maximum, average, and minimum test loads,
respectively, for the warm wash cycle.Ecx, Eca, and Ecn, are reported
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per
cycle, at maximum, average, and minimum test loads,
respectively, for the cold wash cycle.ERx, ERa, ERn, are reported electrical
energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per cycle, at
maximum, average, and minimum test loads, respectively, for
the warm rinse cycle per definitions in 3.7.2 of this
appendix.TUFm, TUFh, TUFw, TUFc, and
TUFr are as defined in Table 4.1.1.
4.1.6 Total weighted per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption. Calculate the total per cycle load size weighted energy consumption, MET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: MET = [MEmaxx Fmax]+[MEavgx
Favg]+[MEminx Fmin] where: MEmax, MEavg, and MEmin are as defined
in 4.1.5.Fmax, Favg, and Fmin are as defined in
Table 4.1.3.
4.1.7 Total per-cycle energy consumption when electrically heated water is used. Calculate for the energy test cycle the total per-cycle energy consumption, ETE, using electrical heated water, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: ETE = HET+MET where: MET = As defined in 4.1.6.HET = As defined in 4.1.3.
4.2 Water consumption of clothes washers.
4.2.1 Per-cycle water consumption. Calculate the maximum, average, and minimum total water consumption, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle), for the cold wash/cold rinse cycle and defined as: Qmax = [Hcx+Ccx]Qavg = [Hca+Cca]Qmin = [Hcn+Ccn] where: Hcx, Ccx, Hca, Cca,
Hcn, and Ccn are as defined in 3.6.
4.2.2 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption. Calculate the total weighted per cycle consumption, QT, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle) and defined as: QT =
[QmaxxFmax]+[QavgxFavg
]+[QminxFmin] where: Qmax, Qavg, and Qmin are as defined in
4.2.1.Fmax, Favg, and Fmin are as defined in
table 4.1.3.
4.2.3 Water factor. Calculate the water factor, WF, expressed in gallons per cycle per cubic foot (or liters per cycle per liter), as: WF = QT/C Where: QT = As defined in section 4.2.2.C = As defined in section 3.1.5.
4.3 Per-cycle energy consumption for removal of moisture from test load. Calculate the per-cycle energy required to remove the moisture of the test load, DE, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as DE = (LAF)x(Maximum test load weight)x(RMC--4%)x(DEF)x(DUF) where: LAF=Load adjustment factor=0.52.Test load weight=As required in 3.8.1, expressed in lbs/cycle.RMC=As defined in 3.8.2.5, 3.8.3.3 or 3.8.4.DEF=nominal energy required for a clothes dryer to remove moisture from
clothes=0.5 kWh/lb (1.1 kWh/kg).DUF=dryer usage factor, percentage of washer loads dried in a clothes
dryer=0.84.
4.4 Modified energy factor. Calculate the modified energy factor, MEF, expressed in cubic feet per kilowatt-hour per cycle (or liters per kilowatt-hour per cycle) and defined as: MEF=C/(ETE + DE) where: C=As defined in 3.1.5.ETE = As defined in 4.1.7.DE = As defined in 4.3.
5. Test Loads
Table 5.1--Test Load Sizes--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Container volume Minimum load Maximum load Average load--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
cu. ft. =< liter =< lb kg lb kg lb kg--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0-0.80..................................... 0-22.7....................... 3.00 1.36 3.00 1.36 3.00 1.360.80-0.90.................................. 22.7-25.5.................... 3.00 1.36 3.50 1.59 3.25 1.470.90-1.00.................................. 25.5-28.3.................... 3.00 1.36 3.90 1.77 3.45 1.561.00-1.10.................................. 28.3-31.1.................... 3.00 1.36 4.30 1.95 3.65 1.661.10-1.20.................................. 31.1-34.0.................... 3.00 1.36 4.70 2.13 3.85 1.751.20-1.30.................................. 34.0-36.8.................... 3.00 1.36 5.10 2.31 4.05 1.841.30-1.40.................................. 36.8-39.6.................... 3.00 1.36 5.50 2.49 4.25 1.931.40-1.50.................................. 39.6-42.5.................... 3.00 1.36 5.90 2.68 4.45 2.021.50-1.60.................................. 42.5-45.3.................... 3.00 1.36 6.40 2.90 4.70 2.131.60-1.70.................................. 45.3-48.1.................... 3.00 1.36 6.80 3.08 4.90 2.221.70-1.80.................................. 48.1-51.0.................... 3.00 1.36 7.20 3.27 5.10 2.311.80-1.90.................................. 51.0-53.8.................... 3.00 1.36 7.60 3.45 5.30 2.401.90-2.00.................................. 53.8-56.6.................... 3.00 1.36 8.00 3.63 5.50 2.492.00-2.10.................................. 56.6-59.5.................... 3.00 1.36 8.40 3.81 5.70 2.592.10-2.20.................................. 59.5-62.3.................... 3.00 1.36 8.80 3.99 5.90 2.682.20-2.30.................................. 62.3-65.1.................... 3.00 1.36 9.20 4.17 6.10 2.772.30-2.40.................................. 65.1-68.0.................... 3.00 1.36 9.60 4.35 6.30 2.862.40-2.50.................................. 68.0-70.8.................... 3.00 1.36 10.00 4.54 6.50 2.952.50-2.60.................................. 70.8-73.6.................... 3.00 1.36 10.50 4.76 6.75 3.062.60-2.70.................................. 73.6-76.5.................... 3.00 1.36 10.90 4.94 6.95 3.152.70-2.80.................................. 76.5-79.3.................... 3.00 1.36 11.30 5.13 7.15 3.242.80-2.90.................................. 79.3-82.1.................... 3.00 1.36 11.70 5.31 7.35 3.332.90-3.00.................................. 82.1-85.0.................... 3.00 1.36 12.10 5.49 7.55 3.423.00-3.10.................................. 85.0-87.8.................... 3.00 1.36 12.50 5.67 7.75 3.523.10-3.20.................................. 87.8-90.6.................... 3.00 1.36 12.90 5.85 7.95 3.613.20-3.30.................................. 90.6-93.4.................... 3.00 1.36 13.30 6.03 8.15 3.703.30-3.40.................................. 93.4-96.3.................... 3.00 1.36 13.70 6.21 8.35 3.793.40-3.50.................................. 96.3-99.1.................... 3.00 1.36 14.10 6.40 8.55 3.883.50-3.60.................................. 99.1-101.9................... 3.00 1.36 14.60 6.62 8.80 3.993.60-3.70.................................. 101.9-104.8.................. 3.00 1.36 15.00 6.80 9.00 4.083.70-3.80.................................. 104.8-107.6.................. 3.00 1.36 15.40 6.99 9.20 4.173.80-3.90.................................. 107.6-110.4.................. 3.00 1.36 15.80 7.16 9.40 4.263.90-4.00.................................. 110.4-113.3.................. 3.00 1.36 16.20 7.34 9.60 4.354.00-4.10.................................. 113.3-116.1.................. 3.00 1.36 16.60 7.53 9.80 4.454.10-4.20.................................. 116.1-118.9.................. 3.00 1.36 17.00 7.72 10.00 4.544.20-4.30.................................. 118.9-121.8.................. 3.00 1.36 17.40 7.90 10.20 4.634.30-4.40.................................. 121.8-124.6.................. 3.00 1.36 17.80 8.09 10.40 4.724.40-4.50.................................. 124.6-127.4.................. 3.00 1.36 18.20 8.27 10.60 4.824.50-4.60.................................. 127.4-130.3.................. 3.00 1.36 18.70 8.46 10.85 4.914.60-4.70.................................. 130.3-133.1.................. 3.00 1.36 19.10 8.65 11.05 5.004.70-4.80.................................. 133.1-135.9.................. 3.00 1.36 19.50 8.83 11.25 5.104.80-4.90.................................. 135.9-138.8.................. 3.00 1.36 19.90 9.02 11.45 5.194.90-5.00.................................. 138.8-141.6.................. 3.00 1.36 20.30 9.20 11.65 5.285.00-5.10.................................. 141.6-144.4.................. 3.00 1.36 20.70 9.39 11.85 5.385.10-5.20.................................. 144.4-147.2.................. 3.00 1.36 21.10 9.58 12.05 5.475.20-5.30.................................. 147.2-150.1.................. 3.00 1.36 21.50 9.76 12.25 5.565.30-5.40.................................. 150.1-152.9.................. 3.00 1.36 21.90 9.95 12.45 5.655.40-5.50.................................. 152.9-155.7.................. 3.00 1.36 22.30 10.13 12.65 5.755.50-5.60.................................. 155.7-158.6.................. 3.00 1.36 22.80 10.32 12.90 5.845.60-5.70.................................. 158.6-161.4.................. 3.00 1.36 23.20 10.51 13.10 5.935.70-5.80.................................. 161.4-164.2.................. 3.00 1.36 23.60 10.69 13.30 6.035.80-5.90.................................. 164.2-167.1.................. 3.00 1.36 24.00 10.88 13.50 6.12
5.90-6.00.................................. 167.1-169.9.................. 3.00 1.36 24.40 11.06 13.70 6.21--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Notes: (1) All test load weights are bone dry weights.(2) Allowable tolerance on the test load weights are 0.10 lbs (0.05 kg).
6. Waivers and Field Testing
6.1 Waivers and Field Testing for Non-conventional Clothes Washers. Manufacturers of nonconventional clothes washers, such as clothes washers with adaptive control systems, must submit a petition for waiver pursuant to 10 CFR 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for that clothes washer. For these and other clothes washers that have controls or systems such that the DOE test procedures yield results that are so unrepresentative of the clothes washer's true energy consumption characteristics as to provide materially inaccurate comparative data, field testing may be appropriate for establishing an acceptable test procedure. The following are guidelines for field testing which may be used by manufacturers in support of petitions for waiver. These guidelines are not mandatory and the Department may determine that they do not apply to a particular model. Depending upon a manufacturer's approach for conducting field testing, additional data may be required. Manufacturers are encouraged to communicate with the Department prior to the commencement of field tests which may be used to support a petition for waiver. Section 6.3 provides an example of field testing for a clothes washer with an adaptive water fill control system. Other features, such as the use of various spin speed selections, could be the subject of field tests.
6.2 Nonconventional Wash System Energy Consumption Test. The field test may consist of a minimum of 10 of the nonconventional clothes washers (``test clothes washers'') and 10 clothes washers already being distributed in commerce (``base clothes washers''). The tests should include a minimum of 50 energy test cycles per clothes washer. The test clothes washers and base clothes washers should be identical in construction except for the controls or systems being tested. Equal numbers of both the test clothes washer and the base clothes washer should be tested simultaneously in comparable settings to minimize seasonal or consumer laundering conditions or variations. The clothes washers should be monitored in such a way as to accurately record the average total energy and water consumption per cycle, including water heating energy when electrically heated water is used, and the energy required to remove the remaining moisture of the test load. The field test results should be used to determine the best method to correlate the rating of the test clothes washer to the rating of the base clothes washer.
6.3 Adaptive water fill control system field test. Section 3.2.3.1 defines the test method for measuring energy consumption for clothes washers which incorporate control systems having both adaptive and alternate cycle selections. Energy consumption calculated by the method defined in section 3.2.3.1 assumes the adaptive cycle will be used 50 percent of the time. This section can be used to develop field test data in support of a petition for waiver when it is believed that the adaptive cycle will be used more than 50 percent of the time. The field test sample size should be a minimum of 10 test clothes washers. The test clothes washers should be totally representative of the design, construction, and control system that will be placed in commerce. The duration of field testing in the user's house should be a minimum of 50 energy test cycles, for each unit. No special instructions as to cycle selection or product usage should be given to the field test participants, other than inclusion of the product literature pack which would be shipped with all units, and instructions regarding filling out data collection forms, use of data collection equipment, or basic procedural methods. Prior to the test clothes washers being installed in the field test locations, baseline data should be developed for all field test units by conducting laboratory tests as defined by section 1 through section 5 of these test procedures to determine the energy consumption, water consumption, and remaining moisture content values. The following data should be measured and recorded for each wash load during the test period: wash cycle selected, the mode of the clothes washer (adaptive or manual), clothes load dry weight (measured after the clothes washer and clothes dryer cycles are completed) in pounds, and type of articles in the clothes load (e.g., cottons, linens, permanent press). The wash loads used in calculating the in-home percentage split between adaptive and manual cycle usage should be only those wash loads which conform to the definition of the energy test cycle.
Calculate: T=The total number of energy test cycles run during the field testTa = The total number of adaptive control energy test cyclesTm = The total number of manual control energy test cycles
The percentage weighting factors: Pa = (Ta/T)x100 (the percentage weighting for adaptive control selection)Pm = (Tm/T)x100 (the percentage weighting for manual control selection)
Energy consumption (HET, MET, and DE) and water consumption (QT), values calculated in section 4 for the manual and adaptive modes, should be combined using Pa and Pm as the weighting factors. [62 FR 45508, Aug. 27, 1997; 63 FR 16669, Apr. 6, 1998, as amended at 66 FR 3330, Jan. 12, 2001; 68 FR 62204, Oct. 31, 2003; 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004; 77 FR 13937, Mar. 7, 2012; 77 FR 20292, Apr. 4, 2012]
Sec. Appendix J2 to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Automatic and Semi-Automatic Clothes
Washers
Manufacturers may use Appendix J1 to certify compliance with existing DOE energy conservation standards until the compliance date of any amended standards that address standby and off mode power consumption for residential clothes washers. After this date, all residential clothes washers shall be tested using the provisions of Appendix J2.
1. Definitions and Symbols
1.1 Active mode means a mode in which the clothes washer is connected to a mains power source, has been activated, and is performing one or more of the main functions of washing, soaking, tumbling, agitating, rinsing, and/or removing water from the clothing, or is involved in functions necessary for these main functions, such as admitting water into the washer or pumping water out of the washer. Active mode also includes delay start and cycle finished modes.
1.2 Active washing mode means a mode in which the clothes washer is performing any of the operations included in a complete cycle intended for washing a clothing load, including the main functions of washing, soaking, tumbling, agitating, rinsing, and/or removing water from the clothing.
1.3 Adaptive control system means a clothes washer control system, other than an adaptive water fill control system, which is capable of automatically adjusting washer operation or washing conditions based on characteristics of the clothes load placed in the clothes container, without allowing or requiring consumer intervention or actions. The automatic adjustments may, for example, include automatic selection, modification, or control of any of the following: Wash water temperature, agitation or tumble cycle time, number of rinse cycles, and spin speed. The characteristics of the clothes load, which could trigger such adjustments, could, for example, consist of or be indicated by the presence of either soil, soap, suds, or any other additive laundering substitute or complementary product.
Note: Appendix J2 does not provide a means for determining the energy consumption of a clothes washer with an adaptive control system. A waiver must be obtained pursuant to 10 CFR 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for each such clothes washer.
1.4 Adaptive water fill control system means a clothes washer water fill control system which is capable of automatically adjusting the water fill level based on the size or weight of the clothes load placed in the clothes container, without allowing or requiring consumer intervention or actions.
1.5 Bone-dry means a condition of a load of test cloth which has been dried in a dryer at maximum temperature for a minimum of 10 minutes, removed and weighed before cool down, and then dried again for 10 minute periods until the final weight change of the load is 1 percent or less.
1.6 Clothes container means the compartment within the clothes washer that holds the clothes during the operation of the machine.
1.7 Cold rinse means the coldest rinse temperature available on the machine.
1.8 Combined low-power mode means the aggregate of available modes other than active washing mode, including inactive mode, off mode, delay start mode, and cycle finished mode.
1.9 Compact means a clothes washer which has a clothes container capacity of less than 1.6 ft\3\ (45 L).
1.10 Cycle finished mode means an active mode which provides continuous status display, intermittent tumbling, or air circulation following operation in active washing mode.
1.11 Deep rinse cycle means a rinse cycle in which the clothes container is filled with water to a selected level and the clothes load is rinsed by agitating it or tumbling it through the water.
1.12 Delay start mode means an active mode in which activation of active washing mode is facilitated by a timer.
1.13 Energy test cycle for a basic model means:
(A) The cycle selection recommended by the manufacturer for washing cotton or linen clothes, and includes all wash/rinse temperature selections for each of the temperature use factors (TUFs) offered in that cycle, and
(B) If the cycle selection described in Part (A) does not include all wash/rinse temperature selections for each of the TUFs available on the clothes washer, the energy test cycle shall include, in addition to Part (A), the alternate cycle selection(s) offering these remaining wash/rinse temperature selection(s), tested only at the wash/rinse temperature selection(s) for each TUF not available on the cycle selection described in Part (A).
Where multiple alternate cycle selections offer a wash/rinse temperature selection for which a TUF has been developed, and that is not available on the cycle selection recommended by the manufacturer for washing cotton or linen clothes described in Part (A), the alternate cycle selection certified by the manufacturer to have the highest energy consumption for that TUF, as measured according to section 2.13, shall be included in the energy test cycle, so that each TUF that is available on the clothes washer has been tested once.
(C) All cycle selections included under Part (A) and all cycle selections included under Part (B) shall be tested using each appropriate load size as defined in section 2.8 and Table 5.1 of this appendix.
(D) For any cycle selection tested under (A) or (B), the manufacturer default settings shall be used, except for the temperature selection, if necessary. This includes wash conditions such as agitation/tumble operation, soil level, spin speed(s), wash times, rinse times, and all other wash parameters or optional features applicable to that cycle, including water heating time for water heating clothes washers.
(E) Each wash cycle included as part of the energy test cycle shall include the entire active washing mode and exclude any delay start or cycle finished modes.
(F) The energy test cycle shall not include any cycle, if available, that is dedicated for cleaning, deodorizing, or sanitizing the clothes washer, and is separate from clothes washing cycles.
1.14 IEC 62301 means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, entitled ``Household electrical appliances-Measurement of standby power,'' Publication 62301, Edition 2.0 2011-01 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.15 Inactive mode means a standby mode that facilitates the activation of active mode by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer, or that provides continuous status display.
1.16 Integrated modified energy factor means the quotient of the cubic foot (or liter) capacity of the clothes container divided by the total clothes washer energy consumption per cycle, with such energy consumption expressed as the sum of:
(a) The machine electrical energy consumption;
(b) The hot water energy consumption;
(c) The energy required for removal of the remaining moisture in the wash load; and
(d) The combined low-power mode energy consumption.
1.17 Integrated water factor means the quotient of the total weighted per-cycle water consumption for all wash cycles in gallons divided by the cubic foot (or liter) capacity of the clothes washer.
1.18 Load usage factor means the percentage of the total number of wash loads that a user would wash a particular size (weight) load.
1.19 Lot means a quantity of cloth that has been manufactured with the same batches of cotton and polyester during one continuous process.
1.20 Manual control system means a clothes washer control system which requires that the consumer make the choices that determine washer operation or washing conditions, such as, for example, wash/rinse temperature selections and wash time, before starting the cycle.
1.21 Manual water fill control system means a clothes washer water fill control system which requires the consumer to determine or select the water fill level.
1.22 Modified energy factor means the quotient of the cubic foot (or liter) capacity of the clothes container divided by the total clothes washer energy consumption per cycle, with such energy consumption expressed as the sum of the machine electrical energy consumption, the hot water energy consumption, and the energy required for removal of the remaining moisture in the wash load.
1.23 Non-water-heating clothes washer means a clothes washer which does not have an internal water heating device to generate hot water.
1.24 Off mode means a mode in which the clothes washer is connected to a mains power source and is not providing any active or standby mode function, and where the mode may persist for an indefinite time. An indicator that only shows the user that the product is in the off position is included within the classification of an off mode.
1.25 Roll means a subset of a lot.
1.26 Spray rinse cycle means a rinse cycle in which water is sprayed onto the clothes for a period of time without maintaining any specific water level in the clothes container.
1.27 Standard means a clothes washer which has a clothes container capacity of 1.6 ft\3\ (45 L) or greater.
1.28 Standby mode means any mode in which the clothes washer is connected to a mains power source and offers one or more of the following user oriented or protective functions that may persist for an indefinite time:
(a) To facilitate the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer;
(b) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that provides regular scheduled tasks (e.g., switching) and that operates on a continuous basis.
1.29 Symbol usage. The following identity relationships are provided to help clarify the symbology used throughout this procedure. C--CapacityC (with subscripts)--Cold Water ConsumptionD--Energy Consumption for Removal of Moisture from Test LoadE--Electrical Energy ConsumptionF--Load Usage FactorH--Hot Water ConsumptionHE--Hot Water Energy ConsumptionME--Machine Electrical Energy ConsumptionP--PowerQ--Water ConsumptionRMC--Remaining Moisture ContentS--Annual HoursTUF--Temperature Use FactorV--Temperature-Weighted Hot Water ConsumptionW--Mass of WaterWC--Weight of Test Load After ExtractionWI--Initial Weight of Dry Test Load
Subscripts: a or avg--Average Test LoadB--Part B of the Energy Test Cyclec--Cold Wash (minimum wash temp.)corr--Corrected (RMC values)h--Hot Wash (maximum wash temp. <=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C))ia--Inactive ModeLP--Combined Low-Power Modem--Extra Hot Wash (maximum wash temp. 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C))n--Minimum Test Loado--Off Modeoi--Combined Off and Inactive ModesT--Totalw--Warm Washww--Warm Wash/Warm Rinsex--Maximum Test Load
The following examples are provided to show how the above symbols can be used to define variables: EmX = ``Electrical Energy Consumption'' for an ``Extra Hot
Wash'' and ``Maximum Test Load''HEmin = ``Hot Water Energy Consumption'' for the ``Minimum
Test Load''Pia = ``Power'' in ``Inactive Mode''Qhmin = ``Water Consumption'' for a ``Hot Wash'' and
``Minimum Test Load''TUFm = ``Temperature Use Factor'' for an ``Extra Hot Wash''
1.30 Temperature use factor means, for a particular wash/rinse temperature setting, the percentage of the total number of wash loads that an average user would wash with that setting.
1.31 Thermostatically controlled water valves means clothes washer controls that have the ability to sense and adjust the hot and cold supply water.
(A) multiple warm wash selections for which the warm wash water temperatures have a linear relationship with all discrete warm wash selections when the water temperatures are plotted against equally spaced consecutive warm wash selections between the hottest warm wash and the coldest warm wash. If the warm wash has infinite selections, the warm wash water temperature has a linear relationship with the distance on the selection device (e.g. dial angle or slide movement) between the hottest warm wash and the coldest warm wash. The criteria for a linear relationship as specified above is that the difference between the actual water temperature at any warm wash selection and the point where that temperature is depicted on the temperature/selection line formed by connecting the warmest and the coldest warm selections is less than 5 percent. In all cases, the mean water temperature of the warmest and the coldest warm selections must coincide with the mean of the ``hot wash'' (maximum wash temperature <=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) and ``cold wash'' (minimum wash temperature) water temperatures within 3.8 [deg]F (2.1 [deg]C); or (B) on a clothes washer with only one warm wash temperature selection, a warm wash temperature selection with a water temperature that coincides with the mean of the ``hot wash'' (maximum wash temperature <=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) and ``cold wash'' (minimum wash temperature) water temperatures within 3.8 [deg]F (2.1 [deg]C).
1.33 Warm rinse means the hottest rinse temperature available on the machine.
1.34 Warm wash means all wash temperature selections that are below the maximum wash temperature <=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C) and above the minimum wash temperature.
1.35 Water factor means the quotient of the total weighted per-cycle water consumption for cold wash divided by the cubic foot (or liter) capacity of the clothes washer.
1.36 Water-heating clothes washer means a clothes washer where some or all of the hot water for clothes washing is generated by a water heating device internal to the clothes washer.
2. Testing Conditions
2.1 Installation. Install the clothes washer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. For combined low-power mode testing, the product shall be installed in accordance with Section 5, Paragraph 5.2 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), disregarding the provisions regarding batteries and the determination, classification, and testing of relevant modes.
2.2 Electrical energy supply.
2.2.1 Supply voltage and frequency. Maintain the electrical supply at the clothes washer terminal block within 2 percent of 120, 120/240, or 120/208Y volts as applicable to the particular terminal block wiring system and within 2 percent of the nameplate frequency as specified by the manufacturer. If the clothes washer has a dual voltage conversion capability, conduct test at the highest voltage specified by the manufacturer.
2.2.2 Supply voltage waveform. For the combined low-power mode testing, maintain the electrical supply voltage waveform indicated in Section 4, Paragraph 4.3.2 of IEC 62301. If the power measuring instrument used for testing is unable to measure and record the total harmonic content during the test measurement period, it is acceptable to measure and record the total harmonic content immediately before and after the test measurement period.
2.3 Supply Water.
2.3.1 Clothes washers in which electrical energy consumption or water energy consumption are affected by the inlet water temperature. (For example, water heating clothes washers or clothes washers with thermostatically controlled water valves.). The temperature of the hot water supply at the water inlets shall not exceed 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C) and the cold water supply at the water inlets shall not exceed 60 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C). A water meter shall be installed in both the hot and cold water lines to measure water consumption.
2.3.2 Clothes washers in which electrical energy consumption and water energy consumption are not affected by the inlet water temperature. The temperature of the hot water supply shall be maintained at 135 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C) and the cold water supply shall be maintained at 60 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C). A water meter shall be installed in both the hot and cold water lines to measure water consumption.
2.4 Water pressure. The static water pressure at the hot and cold water inlet connection of the clothes washer shall be maintained at 35 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) 2.5 psig (241.3 kPa 17.2 kPa) when the water is flowing. The static water pressure for a single water inlet connection shall be maintained at 35 psig 2.5 psig (241.3 kPa 17.2 kPa) when the water is flowing. A water pressure gauge shall be installed in both the hot and cold water lines to measure water pressure.
2.5 Instrumentation. Perform all test measurements using the following instruments, as appropriate:
2.5.1 Weighing scales.
2.5.1.1 Weighing scale for test cloth. The scale shall have a resolution of no larger than 0.2 oz (5.7 g) and a maximum error no greater than 0.3 percent of the measured value.
2.5.1.2 Weighing scale for clothes container capacity measurement. The scale should have a resolution no larger than 0.50 lbs (0.23 kg) and a maximum error no greater than 0.5 percent of the measured value.
2.5.2 Watt-hour meter. The watt-hour meter shall have a resolution no larger than 1 Wh (3.6 kJ) and a maximum error no greater than 2 percent of the measured value for any demand greater than 50 Wh (180.0 kJ).
2.5.3 Watt meter. The watt meter used to measure combined low-power mode power consumption shall comply with the requirements specified in Section 4, Paragraph 4.4 of IEC 62301. If the power measuring instrument used for testing is unable to measure and record the crest factor, power factor, or maximum current ratio during the test measurement period, it is acceptable to measure and record the crest factor, power factor, and maximum current ratio immediately before and after the test measurement period.
2.5.4 Temperature measuring device. The device shall have an error no greater than 1 [deg]F (0.6 [deg]C) over the range being measured.
2.5.5 Water meter. The water meter shall have a resolution no larger than 0.1 gallons (0.4 liters) and a maximum error no greater than 2 percent for the water flow rates being measured.
2.5.6 Water pressure gauge. The water pressure gauge shall have a resolution of 1 pound per square inch gauge (psig) (6.9 kPa) and shall have an error no greater than 5 percent of any measured value.
2.6 Test cloths.
2.6.1 Energy Test Cloth. The energy test cloth shall be made from energy test cloth material, as specified in section 2.6.4 of this Appendix, that is 24 \1/2\ inches by 36 \1/2\ inches (61.0 1.3 cm by 91.4 1.3 cm) and has been hemmed to 22 \1/2\ inches by 34 \1/2\ inches (55.9 1.3 cm by 86.4 1.3 cm) before washing. The energy test cloth shall be clean and shall not be used for more than 60 test runs (after preconditioning as specified in 2.6.3 of this appendix). All energy test cloth must be permanently marked identifying the lot number of the material. Mixed lots of material shall not be used for testing a clothes washer.
2.6.2 Energy Stuffer Cloth. The energy stuffer cloth shall be made from energy test cloth material, as specified in section 2.6.4 of this Appendix, and shall consist of pieces of material that are 12 \1/4\ inches by 12 \1/4\ inches (30.5 0.6 cm by 30.5 0.6 cm) and have been hemmed to 10 \1/4\ inches by 10 \1/4\ inches (25.4 0.6 cm by 25.4 0.6 cm) before washing. The energy stuffer cloth shall be clean and shall not be used for more than 60 test runs (after preconditioning as specified in section 2.6.3 of this Appendix). All energy stuffer cloth must be permanently marked identifying the lot number of the material. Mixed lots of material shall not be used for testing a clothes washer.
2.6.3 Preconditioning of Test Cloths. The new test cloths, including energy test cloths and energy stuffer cloths, shall be pre-conditioned in a clothes washer in the following manner:
2.6.3.1 Perform 5 complete normal wash-rinse-spin cycles, the first two with AHAM Standard detergent Formula 3 and the last three without detergent. Place the test cloth in a clothes washer set at the maximum water level. Wash the load for ten minutes with a minimum fill of 20 gallons of soft water (17 ppm hardness or less) using 27.0 grams + 4.0 grams per pound of cloth load of AHAM Standard detergent Formula 3. The wash temperature is to be controlled to 135 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C) and the rinse temperature is to be controlled to 60 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C). Repeat the cycle with detergent and then repeat the cycle three additional times without detergent, bone drying the load between cycles (total of five wash and rinse cycles).
2.6.4 Energy test cloth material. The energy test cloths and energy stuffer cloths shall be made from fabric meeting the following specifications. The material should come from a roll of material with a width of approximately 63 inches and approximately 500 yards per roll. However, other sizes may be used if they fall within the specifications.
2.6.4.1 Nominal fabric type. Pure finished bleached cloth made with a momie or granite weave, which is nominally 50 percent cotton and 50 percent polyester.
2.6.4.2 The fabric weight specification shall be 5.60 0.25 ounces per square yard (190.0 8.4 g/m\2\).
2.6.4.3 The thread count shall be 65 x 57 per inch (warp x fill), 2 percent.
2.6.4.4 The warp yarn and filling yarn shall each have fiber content of 50 percent 4 percent cotton, with the balance being polyester, and be open end spun, 15/1 5 percent cotton count blended yarn.
2.6.4.5 Water repellent finishes, such as fluoropolymer stain resistant finishes shall not be applied to the test cloth. The absence of such finishes shall be verified by:
2.6.4.5.1 AATCC Test Method 118-2007, (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), for each new lot of test cloth (when purchased from the mill) to confirm the absence of Scotchguard \TM\ or other water repellent finish (required scores of ``D'' across the board).
2.6.4.5.2 AATCC Test Method 79-2010, (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), for each new lot of test cloth (when purchased from the mill) to confirm the absence of Scotchguard\TM\ or other water repellent finish (time to absorb one drop should be on the order of 1 second).
2.6.4.6 The moisture absorption and retention shall be evaluated for each new lot of test cloth by the Standard Extractor Remaining Moisture Content (RMC) Test specified in section 2.6.5 of this Appendix.
2.6.4.6.1 Repeat the Standard Extractor RMC Test in section 2.6.5 of this Appendix three times.
2.6.4.6.2 An RMC correction curve shall be calculated as specified in section 2.6.6 of this Appendix.
2.6.4.7 The maximum shrinkage after preconditioning shall not be more than 5 percent of the length and width. Measure per AATCC Test Method 135-2010, (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
2.6.5 Standard Extractor RMC Test Procedure. The following procedure is used to evaluate the moisture absorption and retention characteristics of a lot of test cloth by measuring the RMC in a standard extractor at a specified set of conditions. Table 2.6.5 of this Appendix is the matrix of test conditions. In the table, ``g Force'' represents units of gravitational acceleration. When this matrix is repeated 3 times, a total of 60 extractor RMC test runs are required. For the purpose of the extractor RMC test, the test cloths may be used for up to 60 test runs (after preconditioning as specified in section 2.6.3 of this Appendix).
Table 2.6.5--Matrix of extractor RMC test conditions----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Warm soak Cold soak
``g Force'' -------------------------------------------------------------------
15 min. spin 4 min. spin 15 min. spin 4 min. spin----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------100200350500650----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.6.5.1 The standard extractor RMC tests shall be run in a North Star Engineered Products Inc. (formerly Bock) Model 215 extractor (having a basket diameter of 20 inches, height of 11.5 inches, and volume of 2.09 ft\3\), with a variable speed drive (North Star Engineered Products, P.O. Box 5127, Toledo, OH 43611) or an equivalent extractor with same basket design (i.e. diameter, height, volume, and hole configuration) and variable speed drive. Table 2.6.5.1 shows the extractor spin speed, in revolutions per minute (RPM), that shall be used to attain each required g-force level.
Table 2.6.5.1--Extractor Spin Speeds for Each Test Condition------------------------------------------------------------------------
``g Force'' RPM------------------------------------------------------------------------100........................................................ 594 5 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C) at all times between the start and end of the soak.
2.6.5.3.4 Remove the test load and allow each of the test cloth bundles to drain over the water bath for a maximum of 5 seconds.
2.6.5.3.5 Manually place the test cloth bundles in the basket of the extractor, distributing them evenly by eye. The draining and loading process shall take no longer than 1 minute. Spin the load at a fixed speed corresponding to the intended centripetal acceleration level (measured in units of the acceleration of gravity, g) 1g for the intended time period 5 seconds. The timer shall begin when the extractor meets the required spin speed for each test.
2.6.5.3.6 Record the weight of the test load immediately after the completion of the extractor spin cycle (WC).
2.6.5.3.7 Calculate the remaining moisture content of the test load as (WC-WI)/WI.
2.6.5.3.8 It is not necessary to drain the soak tub if the water bath is corrected for water level and temperature before the next extraction.
2.6.5.3.9 It is not necessary to dry the test load in between extraction runs. However, the bone dry weight shall be checked after every 12 extraction runs to make sure the bone dry weight is within tolerance (8.4 0.1 lb).
2.6.5.3.10 The test load must be soaked and extracted once following bone drying, before continuing with the remaining extraction runs. This extraction shall be performed at the same spin speed used for the extraction run prior to bone drying, for a time period of 4 minutes. Either warm or cold soak temperature may be used.
2.6.5.3.11 The remaining moisture content of the test load shall be measured at five g levels: 100 g, 200 g, 350 g, 500 g, and 650 g, using two different spin times at each g level: 4 minutes and 15 minutes.
2.6.5.4 Repeat section 2.6.5.3 of this Appendix using soft (<17 ppm) water at 60 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C).
2.6.6 Calculation of RMC correction curve.
2.6.6.1 Average the values of 3 test runs, and fill in Table 2.6.5 of this appendix. Perform a linear least-squares fit to determine coefficients A and B such that the standard RMC values shown in Table 2.6.6.1 of this appendix (RMCstandard) are linearly related to the RMC values measured in section 2.6.5 of this appendix (RMCcloth): RMCstandard A * RMCcloth + B where A and B are coefficients of the linear least-squares fit.
Table 2.6.6.1--Standard RMC Values (RMC Standard)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RMC percentage
---------------------------------------------------
Warm soak Cold soak
``g Force'' ---------------------------------------------------
15 min. 15 min.
spin 4 min. spin spin 4 min. spin
(percent) (percent) (percent) (percent)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------100......................................................... 45.9 49.9 49.7 52.8200......................................................... 35.7 40.4 37.9 43.1350......................................................... 29.6 33.1 30.7 35.8500......................................................... 24.2 28.7 25.5 30.0650......................................................... 23.0 26.4 24.1 28.0----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.6.6.2 Perform an analysis of variance with replication test using two factors, spin speed and lot, to check the interaction of speed and lot. Use the values from Table 2.6.5 and Table 2.6.6.1 of this Appendix in the calculation. The ``P'' value of the F-statistic for interaction between spin speed and lot in the variance analysis shall be greater than or equal to 0.1. If the ``P'' value is less than 0.1, the test cloth is unacceptable. ``P'' is a theoretically based measure of interaction based on an analysis of variance.
2.6.7 Application of the RMC correction curve.
2.6.7.1 Using the coefficients A and B calculated in section 2.6.6.1 of this Appendix: RMCcorr = A x RMC + B
2.6.7.2 Apply this RMC correction curve to measured RMC values in sections 3.8.2.6, 3.8.3.2, and 3.8.3.4 of this Appendix.
2.7 Test Load Sizes. Maximum, minimum, and, when required, average test load sizes shall be determined using Table 5.1 of this Appendix and the clothes container capacity as measured in sections 3.1.1 through 3.1.5 of this Appendix. Test loads shall consist of energy test cloths, except that adjustments to the test loads to achieve proper weight can be made by the use of energy stuffer cloths with no more than 5 stuffer cloths per load.
2.8 Use of Test Loads. Table 2.8 of this Appendix defines the test load sizes and corresponding water fill settings which are to be used when measuring water and energy consumptions. Adaptive water fill control system and manual water fill control system are defined in section 1 of this Appendix:
Table 2.8--Test Load Sizes and Water Fill Settings Required----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Manual water fill control system Adaptive water fill control system----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Test load size Water fill setting Test load size Water fill setting----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Max.................................. Max.................... Max.................... As determined by the
Clothes Washer.Min.................................. Min.................... Avg Min................----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.8.1 The test load sizes to be used to measure RMC are specified in section 3.8.1 of this Appendix.
2.8.2 Test loads for energy and water consumption measurements shall be bone dry prior to the first cycle of the test, and dried to a maximum of 104 percent of bone dry weight for subsequent testing.
2.8.3 Load the energy test cloths by grasping them in the center, shaking them to hang loosely and then put them into the clothes container prior to activating the clothes washer.
2.9 Pre-conditioning of Clothes Washer.
2.9.1 Non-water-heating clothes washer. If the clothes washer has not been filled with water in the preceding 96 hours, pre-condition it by running it through a cold rinse cycle and then draining it to ensure that the hose, pump, and sump are filled with water.
2.9.2 Water-heating clothes washer. If the clothes washer has not been filled with water in the preceding 96 hours, or if it has not been in the test room at the specified ambient conditions for 8 hours, pre-condition it by running it through a cold rinse cycle and then draining it to ensure that the hose, pump, and sump are filled with water.
2.10 Wash time setting. If one wash time is prescribed in the energy test cycle, that shall be the wash time setting; otherwise, the wash time setting shall be the higher of either the minimum or 70 percent of the maximum wash time available in the energy test cycle, regardless of the labeling of suggested dial locations. If the clothes washer is equipped with an electromechanical dial controlling wash time, reset the dial to the minimum wash time and then turn it in the direction of increasing wash time to reach the appropriate setting. If the appropriate setting is passed, return the dial to the minimum wash time and then turn in the direction of increasing wash time until the setting is reached.
2.11 Test room temperature. For all clothes washers, maintain the test room ambient air temperature at 75 5 [deg]F (23.9 2.8 [deg]C) for active mode testing and combined low-power mode testing. Do not use the test room ambient air temperature conditions specified in Section 4, Paragraph 4.2 of IEC 62301 for combined low-power mode testing.
2.12 Bone dryer temperature. The dryer used for bone drying must heat the test cloth and energy stuffer cloths above 210 [deg]F (99 [deg]C).
2.13 Energy consumption for the purpose of certifying the cycle selection(s) to be included in Part (B) of the energy test cycle definition. Where multiple alternate cycle selections offer a wash/rinse temperature selection for which a TUF has been developed, and that is not available on the cycle selection recommended by the manufacturer for washing cotton or linen clothes described in Part (A) of the energy test cycle definition, the alternate cycle selection with the highest energy consumption for that TUF, as measured according to this section, shall be included in the energy test cycle.
2.13.1 For the TUF being considered under this section, establish the testing conditions set forth in section 2 of this test procedure. Select the applicable cycle selection and temperature selection. Use the manufacturer default settings for agitation/tumble operation, soil level, spin speed(s), wash times, rinse times, and all other wash parameters or optional features applicable to that cycle selection, including water heating time for water heating clothes washers.
2.13.2 Use the clothes washer's maximum test load size, determined from Table 5.1, for testing under this section.
2.13.3 For clothes washers with a manual water fill control system, user-adjustable adaptive water fill control system, or adaptive water fill control system with alternate manual water fill control system, use the water fill selector setting resulting in the maximum water level available for each cycle selection for testing under this section.
2.13.4 Each wash cycle tested under this section shall include the entire active washing mode and exclude any delay start or cycle finished modes.
2.13.5 Measure each cycle selection's electrical energy consumption (EB) and hot water consumption (HB). Calculate the total energy consumption for each cycle selection (ETB), as follows: ETB = EB + (HB x T x K) Where: EB is the electrical energy consumption, expressed in
kilowatt-hours per cycle.HB is the hot water consumption, expressed in gallons per
cycle.T = temperature rise = 75 [deg]F (41.7 [deg]C)K = Water specific heat in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree F =
0.00240 kWh/gal- [deg]F (0.00114 kWh/L- [deg]C)
3. Test Measurements
3.1 Clothes container capacity. Measure the entire volume which a clothes load could occupy within the clothes container during active mode washer operation according to the following procedures:
3.1.1 Place the clothes washer in such a position that the uppermost edge of the clothes container opening is leveled horizontally, so that the container will hold the maximum amount of water. For front-loading clothes washers, the shipping bolts and door seal shall remain in place during the capacity measurement.
3.1.2 Line the inside of the clothes container with 2 mil (0.051 mm) plastic sheet. All clothes washer components which occupy space within the clothes container and which are recommended for use with the energy test cycle shall be in place and shall be lined with 2 mil (0.051 mm) plastic sheet to prevent water from entering any void space.
3.1.3 Record the total weight of the machine before adding water.
3.1.4 Fill the clothes container manually with either 60 [deg]F 5 [deg]F (15.6 [deg]C 2.8 [deg]C) or 100 [deg]F 10 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C 5.5 [deg]C) water, with the door open. For a top-loading, vertical-axis clothes washer, fill the clothes container to the uppermost edge of the rotating portion, including any balance ring. For a front-loading, horizontal-axis clothes washer, fill the clothes container to the uppermost edge that is in contact with the door seal. For all clothes washers, any volume which cannot be occupied by the clothing load during operation must be excluded from the measurement. Measure and record the weight of water, W, in pounds.
3.1.5 The clothes container capacity is calculated as follows: C = W/d Where: C = Capacity in cubic feet (liters).W = Mass of water in pounds (kilograms).d = Density of water (62.0 lbs/ft\3\ for 100 [deg]F (993 kg/m\3\ for
37.8 [deg]C) or 62.3 lbs/ft\3\ for 60 [deg]F (998 kg/m\3\ for
15.6 [deg]C)).
3.2 Procedure for measuring water and energy consumption values on all automatic and semi-automatic washers. All energy consumption tests shall be performed under the energy test cycle(s), unless otherwise specified. Table 3.2 of this Appendix defines the sections below which govern tests of particular clothes washers, based on the number of wash/rinse temperature selections available on the model, and also, in some instances, method of water heating. The procedures prescribed are applicable regardless of a clothes washer's washing capacity, loading port location, primary axis of rotation of the clothes container, and type of control system.
3.2.1 Inlet water temperature and the wash/rinse temperature settings.
3.2.1.1 For automatic clothes washers, set the wash/rinse temperature selection control to obtain the wash water temperature selection desired (extra hot, hot, warm, or cold) and cold rinse, and open both the hot and cold water faucets.
3.2.1.2 For semi-automatic washers:
(1) For hot water temperature, open the hot water faucet completely and close the cold water faucet;
(2) For warm inlet water temperature, open both hot and cold water faucets completely;
(3) For cold water temperature, close the hot water faucet and open the cold water faucet completely.
3.2.1.3 Determination of warm wash water temperature(s) to decide whether a clothes washer has uniformly distributed warm wash temperature selections. The wash water temperature, Tw, of each warm water wash selection shall be calculated or measured.
(1) For non-water heating clothes washers, calculate Tw as follows: Tw( [deg]F) = ((Hw x 135 [deg]F)+ (Cw x 60 [deg]F))/(Hw + Cw)
or Tw( [deg]C) = ((Hw x 57.2 [deg]C)+ (Cw x 15.6 [deg]C))/(Hw + Cw) Where:
Hw = Hot water consumption of a warm wash.
Cw = Cold water consumption of a warm wash.
(2) For water-heating clothes washers, measure and record the temperature of each warm wash selection after fill.
3.2.2 Total water consumption during the energy test cycle shall be measured, including hot and cold water consumption during wash, deep rinse, and spray rinse.
3.2.3 Clothes washers with adaptive water fill/manual water fill control systems.
3.2.3.1 Clothes washers with adaptive water fill control system and alternate manual water fill control systems. If a clothes washer with an adaptive water fill control system allows consumer selection of manual controls as an alternative, then both manual and adaptive modes shall be tested and, for each mode, the energy consumption (HET, MET, and DE) and water consumption (QT), values shall be calculated as set forth in section 4 of this Appendix. Then the average of the two values (one from each mode, adaptive and manual) for each variable shall be used in section 4 of this Appendix for the clothes washer.
3.2.3.2 Clothes washers with adaptive water fill control system.
3.2.3.2.1 Not user adjustable. The maximum, minimum, and average water levels as defined in the following sections shall be interpreted to mean that amount of water fill which is selected by the control system when the respective test loads are used, as defined in Table 2.8 of this Appendix. The load usage factors which shall be used when calculating energy consumption values are defined in Table 4.1.3 of this Appendix.
3.2.3.2.2 User adjustable. Four tests shall be conducted on clothes washers with user adjustable adaptive water fill controls which affect the relative wash water levels. The first test shall be conducted with the maximum test load and with the adaptive water fill control system set in the setting that will give the most energy intensive result. The second test shall be conducted with the minimum test load and with the adaptive water fill control system set in the setting that will give the least energy intensive result. The third test shall be conducted with the average test load and with the adaptive water fill control system set in the setting that will give the most energy intensive result for the given test load. The fourth test shall be conducted with the average test load and with the adaptive water fill control system set in the setting that will give the least energy intensive result for the given test load. The energy and water consumption for the average test load and water level shall be the average of the third and fourth tests.
3.2.3.3 Clothes washers with manual water fill control system. In accordance with Table 2.8 of this Appendix, the water fill selector shall be set to the maximum water level available on the clothes washer for the maximum test load size and set to the minimum water level for the minimum test load size. The load usage factors which shall be used when calculating energy consumption values are defined in Table 4.1.3 of this Appendix.
TABLE 3.2--Test Section Reference----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Max. wash temp. available <=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C) 135 [deg]F---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (57.2 [deg]C)\**\
------------------------
Number of wash temp. selections 1 2 2 3 3----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Test sections required to be followed.............. ......... ......... ............ 3.3 3.3
......... 3.4 3.4 ......... 3.4
......... ......... 3.5 3.5 3.5
3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6
......... ......... * 3.7 * 3.7 * 3.7
3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------* Only applicable to machines with warm rinse.** Only applicable to water heating clothes washers on which the maximum wash temperature available exceeds 135
[deg]F (57.2 [deg]C).
3.3 ``Extra Hot Wash'' (Max Wash Temp 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) for water heating clothes washers only. Water and electrical energy consumption shall be measured for each water fill level and/or test load size as specified in sections 3.3.1 through 3.3.3 of this Appendix for the hottest wash setting available.
3.3.1 Maximum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption (HmX), cold water consumption (CmX), and electrical energy consumption (EmX) shall be measured for an extra hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the maximum water fill level. The maximum test load size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1 of this Appendix.
3.3.2 Minimum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption (Hmn), cold water consumption (Cmn), and electrical energy consumption (Emn) shall be measured for an extra hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the minimum water fill level. The minimum test load size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1 of this Appendix.
3.3.3 Average test load and water fill. For clothes washers with an adaptive water fill control system, measure the values for hot water consumption (Hma), cold water consumption (Cma), and electrical energy consumption (Ema) for an extra hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with an average test load size as determined per Table 5.1 of this Appendix.
3.4 ``Hot Wash'' (Max Wash Temp <=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)). Water and electrical energy consumption shall be measured for each water fill level and/or test load size as specified in sections 3.4.1 through 3.4.3 of this Appendix for a 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C) wash, if available, or for the hottest selection less than 135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C).
3.4.1 Maximum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption (HhX), cold water consumption (ChX), and electrical energy consumption (EhX) shall be measured for a hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the maximum water fill level. The maximum test load size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1 of this Appendix.
3.4.2 Minimum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption (Hhn), cold water consumption (Chn), and electrical energy consumption (Ehn) shall be measured for a hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the minimum water fill level. The minimum test load size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1 of this Appendix.
3.4.3 Average test load and water fill. For clothes washers with an adaptive water fill control system, measure the values for hot water consumption (Hha), cold water consumption (Cha), and electrical energy consumption (Eha) for a hot wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with an average test load size as determined per Table 5.1 of this Appendix.
3.5 ``Warm Wash.'' Water and electrical energy consumption shall be determined for each water fill level and/or test load size as specified in sections 3.5.1 through 3.5.2.3 of this Appendix for the applicable warm water wash temperature(s) with a cold rinse.
3.5.1 Clothes washers with uniformly distributed warm wash temperature selection(s). The reportable values to be used for the warm water wash setting shall be the arithmetic average of the measurements for the hot and cold wash selections. This is a calculation only; no testing is required.
3.5.2 Clothes washers that lack uniformly distributed warm wash temperature selections. For a clothes washer with fewer than four discrete warm wash selections, test all warm wash temperature selections. For a clothes washer that offers four or more warm wash selections, test at all discrete selections, or test at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 75 percent positions of the temperature selection device between the hottest hot (<=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) wash and the coldest cold wash. If a selection is not available at the 25, 50 or 75 percent position, in place of each such unavailable selection use the next warmer setting. Each reportable value to be used for the warm water wash setting shall be the arithmetic average of all tests conducted pursuant to this section.
3.5.2.1 Maximum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption (HwX), cold water consumption (CwX), and electrical energy consumption (EwX) shall be measured with the controls set for the maximum water fill level. The maximum test load size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1 of this Appendix.
3.5.2.2 Minimum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption (Hwn), cold water consumption (Cwn), and electrical energy consumption (Ewn) shall be measured with the controls set for the minimum water fill level. The minimum test load size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1 of this Appendix.
3.5.2.3 Average test load and water fill. For clothes washers with an adaptive water fill control system, measure the values for hot water consumption (Hwa), cold water consumption (Cwa), and electrical energy consumption (Ewa) with an average test load size as determined per Table 5.1 of this Appendix.
3.6 ``Cold Wash'' (Minimum Wash Temperature Selection). Water and electrical energy consumption shall be measured for each water fill level and/or test load size as specified in sections 3.6.1 through 3.6.3 of this Appendix for the coldest wash temperature selection available. For a clothes washer that offers two or more wash temperature settings labeled as cold, such as ``Cold'' and ``Tap Cold'', the setting with the minimum wash temperature shall be considered the cold wash. If any of the other cold wash temperature settings add hot water to raise the wash temperature above the cold water supply temperature, as defined in section 2.3 of this Appendix, those setting(s) shall be considered warm wash setting(s), as defined in section 1.34 of this Appendix. If none of the cold wash temperature settings add hot water for any of the water fill levels or test load sizes required for the energy test cycle, the wash temperature setting labeled as ``Cold'' shall be considered the cold wash, and the other wash temperature setting(s) labeled as cold shall not be required for testing.
3.6.1 Maximum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption (HcX), cold water consumption (CcX), and electrical energy consumption (EcX) shall be measured for a cold wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the maximum water fill level. The maximum test load size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1 of this Appendix.
3.6.2 Minimum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption (Hcn), cold water consumption (Ccn), and electrical energy consumption (Ecn) shall be measured for a cold wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with the controls set for the minimum water fill level. The minimum test load size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1 of this Appendix.
3.6.3 Average test load and water fill. For clothes washers with an adaptive water fill control system, measure the values for hot water consumption (Hca), cold water consumption (Cca), and electrical energy consumption (Eca) for a cold wash/cold rinse energy test cycle, with an average test load size as determined per Table 5.1 of this Appendix.
3.7 ``Warm Wash/Warm Rinse.'' Water and electrical energy consumption shall be determined for each water fill level and/or test load size as specified in sections 3.7.2.1 through 3.7.2.3 of this Appendix for the applicable warm wash temperature selection as described in section 3.7.1 or 3.7.2 of this Appendix and the hottest available rinse temperature selection.
3.7.1 Clothes washers with uniformly distributed warm wash temperature selection(s). Test the warm wash/warm rinse cycle at the wash temperature selection with the temperature selection device at the 50 percent position between the hottest hot (<=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) wash and the coldest cold wash.
3.7.2 Clothes washers that lack uniformly distributed warm wash temperature selections. For a clothes washer with fewer than four discrete warm wash selections, test all warm wash temperature selections for which a warm rinse is available. For a clothes washer that offers four or more warm wash selections, test at all discrete selections for which a warm rinse is available, or test at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 75 percent positions of the temperature selection device between the hottest hot (<=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C)) wash and the coldest cold wash. If a selection is not available at the 25, 50, or 75 percent position, in place of each such unavailable selection use the next warmer setting. Each reportable value to be used for the warm wash/warm rinse setting shall be the arithmetic average of all tests conducted pursuant to this section.
3.7.2.1 Maximum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption (HwwX), cold water consumption (CwwX), and electrical energy consumption (EwwX) shall be measured with the controls set for the maximum water fill level. The maximum test load size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1 of this Appendix.
3.7.2.2 Minimum test load and water fill. Hot water consumption (Hwwn), cold water consumption (Cwwn), and electrical energy consumption (Ewwn) shall be measured with the controls set for the minimum water fill level. The minimum test load size is to be used and shall be determined per Table 5.1 of this Appendix.
3.7.2.3 Average test load and water fill. For clothes washers with an adaptive water fill control system, measure the values for hot water consumption (Hwwa), cold water consumption (Cwwa), and electrical energy consumption (Ewwa) with an average test load size as determined per Table 5.1 of this Appendix.
3.8 Remaining Moisture Content:
3.8.1 The wash temperature will be the same as the rinse temperature for all testing. Use the maximum test load as defined in Table 5.1 of this Appendix for testing.
3.8.2 For clothes washers with cold rinse only:
3.8.2.1 Record the actual ``bone dry'' weight of the test load (WIX), then place the test load in the clothes washer.
3.8.2.2 Set water level selector to maximum fill.
3.8.2.3 Run the energy test cycle.
3.8.2.4 Record the weight of the test load immediately after completion of the energy test cycle (WCX).
3.8.2.5 Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load, RMCX, defined as: RMCX = (WCX - WIX)/WIX
3.8.2.6 Apply the RMC correction curve described in section 2.6.7 of this Appendix to calculate the corrected remaining moisture content, RMCcorr, expressed as a percentage, which shall be the final RMC used in section 4.3 of this Appendix: RMCcorr = (A x RMCX + B) x 100% Where: A and B are the coefficients of the RMC correction curve as defined in
section 2.6.6.1 of this Appendix.RMCX = As defined in section 3.8.2.5 of this Appendix.
3.8.3 For clothes washers with cold and warm rinse options:
3.8.3.1 Complete sections 3.8.2.1 through 3.8.2.4 of this Appendix for cold rinse.
Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load for cold rinse, RMCCOLD, defined as: RMCCOLD = (WCX - WIX)/WIX
3.8.3.2 Apply the RMC correction curve described in section 2.6.7 of this Appendix to calculate the corrected remaining moisture content for cold rinse, RMCCOLD,corr, expressed as a percentage, as follows: RMCCOLD,corr = (A x RMCCOLD + B) x 100% Where: A and B are the coefficients of the RMC correction curve as defined in
section 2.6.6.1 of this Appendix.RMCCOLD = As defined in section 3.8.3.1 of this Appendix.
3.8.3.3 Complete sections 3.8.2.1 through 3.8.2.4 of this Appendix for warm rinse. Calculate the remaining moisture content of the maximum test load for warm rinse, RMCWARM, defined as: RMCWARM = (WCX - WIX)/WIX
3.8.3.4 Apply the RMC correction curve described in section 2.6.7 of this Appendix to calculate the corrected remaining moisture content for warm rinse, RMCWARM,corr, expressed as a percentage, as follows: RMCWARM,corr = (A x RMCWARM + B) x 100% Where: A and B are the coefficients of the RMC correction curve as defined in
section 2.6.6.1 of this Appendix.RMCWARM = As defined in section 3.8.3.3 of this Appendix.
3.8.3.5 Calculate the corrected remaining moisture content of the maximum test load, RMCcorr, expressed as a percentage, which shall be the final RMC used in section 4.3 of this Appendix: RMCcorr = RMCCOLD,corr x (1 - TUFww) +
RMCWARM,corr x (TUFww) Where: RMCCOLD,corr = As defined in section 3.8.3.2 of this
Appendix.RMCWARM,corr = As defined in section 3.8.3.4 of this
Appendix. TUFww is the temperature use factor for warm rinse as defined
in Table 4.1.1 of this Appendix.
3.8.4 Clothes washers that have options such as multiple selections of spin speeds or spin times that result in different RMC values and that are available in the energy test cycle, shall be tested at the maximum and minimum extremes of the available options, excluding any ``no spin'' (zero spin speed) settings, in accordance with requirements in section 3.8.2 or 3.8.3 of this Appendix, as applicable. The calculated RMCcorr,max extraction and RMCcorr,min extraction at the maximum and minimum settings, respectively, shall be combined as follows and the final corrected RMC to be used in section 4.3 of this Appendix shall be: RMCcorr = 0.75 x RMCcorr,max extraction + 0.25 x
RMCcorr,min extraction Where: RMCcorr,max extraction is the corrected remaining moisture
content using the maximum spin setting, calculated according
to section 3.8.2 or 3.8.3 of this Appendix, as applicable.RMCcorr,min extraction is the corrected remaining moisture
content using the minimum spin setting, calculated according
to section 3.8.2 or 3.8.3 of this Appendix, as applicable.
3.9 Combined low-power mode power. Connect the clothes washer to a watt meter as specified in section 2.5.3 of this Appendix. Establish the testing conditions set forth in sections 2.1, 2.2 and 2.11 of this Appendix. For clothes washers that take some time to enter a stable state from a higher power state as discussed in Section 5, Paragraph 5.1, note 1 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), allow sufficient time for the clothes washer to reach the lower power state before proceeding with the test measurement. Follow the test procedure for the sampling method specified in Section 5, Paragraph 5.3.2 of IEC 62301 for testing in each possible mode as described in sections 3.9.1 and 3.9.2 of this Appendix.
3.9.1 If a clothes washer has an inactive mode as defined in section 1.15 of this Appendix, measure and record the average inactive mode power of the clothes washer, Pia, in watts.
3.9.2 If a clothes washer has an off mode as defined in section 1.24 of this Appendix, measure and record its average off mode power, Po, in watts.
4. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements
4.1 Hot water and machine electrical energy consumption of clothes washers.
4.1.1 Per-cycle temperature-weighted hot water consumption for maximum, average, and minimum water fill levels using each appropriate load size as defined in section 2.8 and Table 5.1 of this Appendix. Calculate for the cycle under test the per-cycle temperature-weighted hot water consumption for the maximum water fill level, VhX, the average water fill level, Vha, and the minimum water fill level, Vhn, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle) and defined as: (a) VhX = [HmX x TUFm] +
[HhX x TUFh] + [HwX x
TUFw] + [HwwX x TUFww] +
[HcX x TUFc](b) Vha = [Hma x TUFm] +
[Hha x TUFh] + [Hwa x
TUFw] + [Hwwa x TUFww] +
[Hca x TUFc](c) Vhn = [Hmn x TUFm] +
[Hhn x TUFh] + [Hwn x
TUFw] + [Hwwn x TUFww] +
[Hcn x TUFc] Where: HmX, Hma, and Hmn, are reported hot
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per
cycle), at maximum, average, and minimum water fill,
respectively, for the extra hot wash cycle with the
appropriate test loads as defined in section 2.8 of this
Appendix.HhX, Hha, and Hhn, are reported hot
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per
cycle), at maximum, average, and minimum water fill,
respectively, for the hot wash cycle with the appropriate test
loads as defined in section 2.8 of this Appendix.HwX, Hwa, and Hwn, are reported hot
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per
cycle), at maximum, average, and minimum water fill,
respectively, for the warm wash cycle with the appropriate
test loads as defined in section 2.8 of this Appendix.HwwX, Hwwa, and Hwwn, are reported hot
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per
cycle), at maximum, average, and minimum water fill,
respectively, for the warm wash/warm rinse cycle with the
appropriate test loads as defined in section 2.8 of this
Appendix.HcX, Hca, and Hcn, are reported hot
water consumption values, in gallons per-cycle (or liters per
cycle), at maximum, average, and minimum water fill,
respectively, for the cold wash cycle with the appropriate
test loads as defined in section 2.8 of this Appendix.TUFm, TUFh, TUFw, TUFww, and
TUFc are temperature use factors for extra hot
wash, hot wash, warm wash, warm wash/warm rinse, and cold wash
temperature selections, respectively, and are as defined in
Table 4.1.1 of this Appendix.
Table 4.1.1--Temperature Use Factors----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Max wash temp available <=135 [deg]F (57.2 [deg]C) 135 [deg]F-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (57.2 [deg]C)
--------------------------
No. wash temp selections Single 2 Temps 2 3
Temps 3 Temps Temps----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TUFm (extra hot)............................. ........... ........... ............ 0.14 0.05TUFh (hot)................................... ........... 0.63 0.14 ........... 0.09TUFww (warm/warm)............................ ........... ........... * 0.27 * 0.27 * 0.27TUFw (warm).................................. ........... ........... ** 0.22/0.49 ** 0.22/ ** 0.22/0.49
0.49TUFc (cold).................................. 1.00 0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------* Only applicable to machines offering a warm/warm cycle. For machines with no warm/warm cycle, TUFww (warm/
warm) should be zero.** For machines offering a warm/warm cycle, TUFw (warm) should be 0.22. For machines with no warm/warm cycle,
TUFw (warm) should be 0.49.
4.1.2 Total per-cycle hot water energy consumption for all maximum, average, and minimum water fill levels tested. Calculate the total per-cycle hot water energy consumption for the maximum water fill level, HEmax, the minimum water fill level, HEmin, and the average water fill level, HEavg, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: (a) HEmax = [VhX x T x K]=Total energy when a
maximum load is tested.(b) HEavg = [Vha x Tx K]=Total energy when an
average load is tested.(c) HEmin = [Vhn x T x K]=Total energy when a
minimum load is tested. Where: VhX, Vha, and Vhn are as defined in
section 4.1.1 of this Appendix.T = Temperature rise = 75 [deg]F (41.7 [deg]C).K = Water specific heat in kilowatt-hours per gallon per degree F =
0.00240 kWh/gal- [deg]F (0.00114 kWh/L- [deg]C).
4.1.3 Total weighted per-cycle hot water energy consumption. Calculate the total weighted per-cycle hot water energy consumption, HET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: HET = [HEmax x Fmax] +
[HEavg x Favg] + HEmin x
Fmin] Where: HEmax, HEavg, and HEmin are as defined
in section 4.1.2 of this Appendix.Fmax, Favg, and Fmin are the load usage
factors for the maximum, average, and minimum test loads based
on the size and type of the control system on the washer being
tested. The values are as shown in Table 4.1.3 of this
Appendix.
Table 4.1.3--Load Usage Factors------------------------------------------------------------------------
Water fill control system Manual Adaptive------------------------------------------------------------------------Fmax =........................................ \1\ 0.72 \2\ 0.12Favg =........................................ ........... \2\ 0.74Fmin =........................................ \1\ 0.28 \2\ 0.14------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ Reference 3.2.3.3.\2\ Reference 3.2.3.2.
4.1.4 Total per-cycle hot water energy consumption using gas-heated or oil-heated water. Calculate for the energy test cycle the per-cycle hot water consumption, HETG, using gas-heated or oil-heated water, expressed in Btu per cycle (or megajoules per cycle) and defined as: HETG = HET x 1/e x 3412 Btu/kWh or HETG
= HET x 1/e x 3.6 MJ/kWh Where: e = Nominal gas or oil water heater efficiency = 0.75.HET = As defined in section 4.1.3 of this Appendix.
4.1.5 Per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption for all maximum, average, and minimum test load sizes. Calculate the total per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption for the maximum water fill level, MEmax, the average water fill level, MEavg, and the minimum water fill level, MEmin, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: (a) MEmax = [EmXx TUFm] +
[EhX x TUFh] + [EwXx
TUFw] + [EwwXx TUFww] +
[EcXx TUFc](b) MEavg = [Ema x TUFm] +
[Ehax TUFh] + [Ewax
TUFw] + [Ewwax TUFww] +
[Ecax TUFc](c) MEmin = [Emnx TUFm] +
[Ehnx TUFh] + [Ewnx
TUFw] + [Ewwnx TUFww] +
[Ecnx TUFc] Where: EmX, Ema, and Emn, are reported
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per
cycle, at maximum, average, and minimum test loads,
respectively, for the extra hot wash cycle.EhX, Eha, and Ehn, are reported
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per
cycle, at maximum, average, and minimum test loads,
respectively, for the hot wash cycle.EwX, Ewa, and Ewn, are reported
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per
cycle, at maximum, average, and minimum test loads,
respectively, for the warm wash cycle.EwwX, Ewwa, and Ewwn, are reported
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per
cycle, at maximum, average, and minimum test loads,
respectively, for the warm wash/warm rinse cycle.EcX, Eca, and Ecn, are reported
electrical energy consumption values, in kilowatt-hours per
cycle, at maximum, average, and minimum test loads,
respectively, for the cold wash cycle.TUFm, TUFh, TUFw, TUFww, and
TUFc are as defined in Table 4.1.1 of this
Appendix.
4.1.6 Total weighted per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption. Calculate the total weighted per-cycle machine electrical energy consumption, MET, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: MET = [MEmax x Fmax] +
[MEavgx Favg] + [MEminx
Fmin]Where: MEmax, MEavg, and MEmin are as defined
in section 4.1.5 of this Appendix.Fmax, Favg, and Fmin are as defined in
Table 4.1.3 of this Appendix.
4.1.7 Total per-cycle energy consumption when electrically heated water is used. Calculate for the energy test cycle the total per-cycle energy consumption, ETE, using electrically heated water, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: ETE = HET + MET Where: MET = As defined in section 4.1.6 of this Appendix.HET = As defined in section 4.1.3 of this Appendix.
4.2 Water consumption of clothes washers.
4.2.1 Per-cycle water consumption for extra hot wash. Calculate the maximum, average, and minimum total water consumption, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle), for the extra hot wash cycle and defined as: Qmmax = [HmX + CmX]Qmavg = [Hma + Cma]Qmmin = [Hmn + Cmn] Where: HmX, CmX, Hma, Cma,
Hmn, and Cmn are defined in section 3.3
of this Appendix.
4.2.2 Per-cycle water consumption for hot wash. Calculate the maximum, average, and minimum total water consumption, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle), for the hot wash cycle and defined as: Qhmax = [HhX + ChX]Qhavg = [Hha + Cha]Qhmin = [Hhn + Chn] Where: HhX, ChX, Hha, Cha,
Hhn, and Chn are defined in section 3.4
of this Appendix.
4.2.3 Per-cycle water consumption for warm wash with cold rinse. Calculate the maximum, average, and minimum total water consumption, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle), for the warm wash/cold rinse cycle and defined as: Qwmax = [HwX + CwX]Qwavg = [Hwa + Cwa]Qwmin = [Hwn + Cwn] Where: HwX, CwX, Hwa, Cwa,
Hwn, and Cwn are defined in section 3.5
of this Appendix.
4.2.4 Per-cycle water consumption for warm wash with warm rinse. Calculate the maximum, average, and minimum total water consumption, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle), for the warm wash/warm rinse cycle and defined as: Qwwmax = [HwwX + CwwX]Qwwavg = [Hwwa + Cwwa]Qwwmin = [Hwwn + Cwwn] Where: HwwX, CwwX, Hwwa, Cwwa,
Hwwn, and Cwwn are defined in section
3.7 of this Appendix.
4.2.5 Per-cycle water consumption for cold wash. Calculate the maximum, average, and minimum total water consumption, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle), for the cold wash cycle and defined as: Qcmax = [HcX + CcX]Qcavg = [Hca + Cca]Qcmin = [Hcn + Ccn] Where: HcX, CcX, Hca, Cca,
Hcn, and Ccn are defined in section 3.6
of this Appendix.
4.2.6 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption for extra hot wash. Calculate the total weighted per-cycle water consumption for the extra hot wash cycle, QmT, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle) and defined as: QmT =[Qmmax x Fmax] + [Qmavg
x Favg] + [Qmmin x Fmin] Where: Qmmax, Qmavg, Qmmin are defined in
section 4.2.1 of this Appendix.Fmax, Favg, Fmin are defined in Table
4.1.3 of this Appendix.
4.2.7 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption for hot wash. Calculate the total weighted per-cycle water consumption for the hot wash cycle, QhT, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle) and defined as: QhT = [Qhmax x Fmax] +
[Qhavg x Favg] + [Qhmin x
Fmin] Where: Qhmax, Qhavg, Qhmin are defined in
section 4.2.2 of this Appendix.Fmax, Favg, Fmin are defined in Table
4.1.3 of this Appendix.
4.2.8 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption for warm wash with cold rinse. Calculate the total weighted per-cycle water consumption for the warm wash/cold rinse cycle, QwT, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle) and defined as: QwT = [Qwmax x Fmax] +
[Qwavg x Favg] + [Qwmin x
Fmin]Where: Qwmax, Qwavg, Qwmin are defined in
section 4.2.3 of this Appendix.Fmax, Favg, Fmin are defined in Table
4.1.3 of this Appendix.
4.2.9 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption for warm wash with warm rinse. Calculate the total weighted per-cycle water consumption for the warm wash/warm rinse cycle, QwwT, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle) and defined as: QwwT = [Qwwmax x Fmax] +
[Qwwavg x Favg] + [Qwwmin x
Fmin] Where: Qwwmax, Qwwavg, Qwwmin are defined in
section 4.2.4 of this Appendix.Fmax, Favg, Fmin are defined in Table
4.1.3 of this Appendix.
4.2.10 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption for cold wash. Calculate the total weighted per-cycle water consumption for the cold wash cycle, QcT, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle) and defined as: QcT = [Qcmax x Fmax] +
[Qcavg x Favg] + [Qcmin x
Fmin] Where: Qcmax, Qcavg, Qcmin are defined in
section 4.2.5 of this Appendix.Fmax, Favg, Fmin are defined in Table
4.1.3 of this Appendix.
4.2.11 Total weighted per-cycle water consumption for all wash cycles. Calculate the total weighted per-cycle water consumption for all wash cycles, QT, expressed in gallons per cycle (or liters per cycle) and defined as: QT = [QmT x TUFm] + [QhT x
TUFh] + [QwT x TUFw] +
[QwwT x TUFww] + [QcT x
TUFc] Where: QmT, QhT, QwT, QwwT, and
QcT are defined in sections 4.2.6 through 4.2.10 of
this Appendix.TUFm, TUFh, TUFw, TUFww, and
TUFc are defined in Table 4.1.1 of this Appendix.
4.2.12 Water factor. Calculate the water factor, WF, expressed in gallons per cycle per cubic foot (or liters per cycle per liter), as: WF = QcT/C Where: QcT = As defined in section 4.2.10 of this Appendix.C = As defined in section 3.1.5 of this Appendix.
4.2.13 Integrated water factor. Calculate the integrated water factor, IWF, expressed in gallons per cycle per cubic foot (or liter per cycle per liter), as: IWF = QT/C Where: QT = As defined in section 4.2.11 of this Appendix.C = As defined in section 3.1.5 of this Appendix.
4.3 Per-cycle energy consumption for removal of moisture from test load. Calculate the per-cycle energy required to remove the remaining moisture of the test load, DE, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: DE = [(Fmax x Maximum test load weight) +
(Favg x Average test load weight) +
(Fmin x Minimum test load weight)]x
(RMCcorr-4%) x (DEF) x (DUF) Where: Fmax, Favg, and Fmin are as defined in
Table 4.1.3 of this Appendix.Maximum, average, and minimum test load weights are as defined in Table
5.1 of this Appendix.RMCcorr = As defined in section 3.8.2.6, 3.8.3.5, or 3.8.4 of
this Appendix.DEF = Nominal energy required for a clothes dryer to remove moisture
from clothes = 0.5 kWh/lb (1.1 kWh/kg).DUF = Dryer usage factor, percentage of washer loads dried in a clothes
dryer = 0.91.
4.4 Per-cycle combined low-power mode energy consumption. Calculate the per-cycle combined low-power mode energy consumption, ETLP, expressed in kilowatt-hours per cycle and defined as: ETLP = [(Pia x Sia) + (Po x
So)] x Kp/295. Where: Pia = Washer inactive mode power, in watts, as defined in
section 3.9.1 of this Appendix for clothes washers capable of
operating in inactive mode; otherwise, Pia = 0.Po = Washer off mode power, in watts, as defined in section
3.9.2 of this Appendix for clothes washers capable of
operating in off mode; otherwise, Po = 0.Sia = Annual hours in inactive mode as defined as
Soi if no off mode is possible, [Soi/2]
if both inactive mode and off mode are possible, and 0 if no
inactive mode is possible.So = Annual hours in off mode as defined as Soi if
no inactive mode is possible, [Soi/2] if both
inactive mode and off mode are possible, and 0 if no off mode
is possible.Soi = Combined annual hours for off and inactive mode =
8,465.Kp = Conversion factor of watt-hours to kilowatt-hours =
0.001.295 = Representative average number of clothes washer cycles in a year.
4.5 Modified energy factor. Calculate the modified energy factor, MEF, expressed in cubic feet per kilowatt-hour per cycle (or liters per kilowatt-hour per cycle) and defined as: MEF = C/(ETE + DE) Where: C = As defined in section 3.1.5 of this Appendix.ETE = As defined in section 4.1.7 of this Appendix.DE = As defined in section 4.3 of this Appendix.
4.6 Integrated modified energy factor. Calculate the integrated modified energy factor, IMEF, expressed in cubic feet per kilowatt-hour per cycle (or liters per kilowatt-hour per cycle) and defined as: IMEF = C/(ETE + DE + ETLP) Where: C = As defined in section 3.1.5 of this Appendix.ETE = As defined in section 4.1.7 of this Appendix.DE = As defined in section 4.3 of this Appendix.ETLP = As defined in section 4.4 of this Appendix.
5. Test Loads
Table 5.1--Test Load Sizes--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Container volume Minimum load Maximum load Average load--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
cu. ft. =< liter =< lb kg lb kg lb kg--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0-0.80..................................... 0-22.7....................... 3.00 1.36 3.00 1.36 3.00 1.360.80-0.90.................................. 22.7-25.5.................... 3.00 1.36 3.50 1.59 3.25 1.470.90-1.00.................................. 25.5-28.3.................... 3.00 1.36 3.90 1.77 3.45 1.561.00-1.10.................................. 28.3-31.1.................... 3.00 1.36 4.30 1.95 3.65 1.661.10-1.20.................................. 31.1-34.0.................... 3.00 1.36 4.70 2.13 3.85 1.751.20-1.30.................................. 34.0-36.8.................... 3.00 1.36 5.10 2.31 4.05 1.841.30-1.40.................................. 36.8-39.6.................... 3.00 1.36 5.50 2.49 4.25 1.931.40-1.50.................................. 39.6-42.5.................... 3.00 1.36 5.90 2.68 4.45 2.021.50-1.60.................................. 42.5-45.3.................... 3.00 1.36 6.40 2.90 4.70 2.131.60-1.70.................................. 45.3-48.1.................... 3.00 1.36 6.80 3.08 4.90 2.221.70-1.80.................................. 48.1-51.0.................... 3.00 1.36 7.20 3.27 5.10 2.311.80-1.90.................................. 51.0-53.8.................... 3.00 1.36 7.60 3.45 5.30 2.401.90-2.00.................................. 53.8-56.6.................... 3.00 1.36 8.00 3.63 5.50 2.49
2.00-2.10.................................. 56.6-59.5.................... 3.00 1.36 8.40 3.81 5.70 2.592.10-2.20.................................. 59.5-62.3.................... 3.00 1.36 8.80 3.99 5.90 2.682.20-2.30.................................. 62.3-65.1.................... 3.00 1.36 9.20 4.17 6.10 2.772.30-2.40.................................. 65.1-68.0.................... 3.00 1.36 9.60 4.35 6.30 2.862.40-2.50.................................. 68.0-70.8.................... 3.00 1.36 10.00 4.54 6.50 2.952.50-2.60.................................. 70.8-73.6.................... 3.00 1.36 10.50 4.76 6.75 3.062.60-2.70.................................. 73.6-76.5.................... 3.00 1.36 10.90 4.94 6.95 3.152.70-2.80.................................. 76.5-79.3.................... 3.00 1.36 11.30 5.13 7.15 3.242.80-2.90.................................. 79.3-82.1.................... 3.00 1.36 11.70 5.31 7.35 3.332.90-3.00.................................. 82.1-85.0.................... 3.00 1.36 12.10 5.49 7.55 3.423.00-3.10.................................. 85.0-87.8.................... 3.00 1.36 12.50 5.67 7.75 3.523.10-3.20.................................. 87.8-90.6.................... 3.00 1.36 12.90 5.85 7.95 3.613.20-3.30.................................. 90.6-93.4.................... 3.00 1.36 13.30 6.03 8.15 3.703.30-3.40.................................. 93.4-96.3.................... 3.00 1.36 13.70 6.21 8.35 3.793.40-3.50.................................. 96.3-99.1.................... 3.00 1.36 14.10 6.40 8.55 3.883.50-3.60.................................. 99.1-101.9................... 3.00 1.36 14.60 6.62 8.80 3.993.60-3.70.................................. 101.9-104.8.................. 3.00 1.36 15.00 6.80 9.00 4.083.70-3.80.................................. 104.8-107.6.................. 3.00 1.36 15.40 6.99 9.20 4.173.80-3.90.................................. 107.6-110.4.................. 3.00 1.36 15.80 7.16 9.40 4.263.90-4.00.................................. 110.4-113.3.................. 3.00 1.36 16.20 7.34 9.60 4.354.00-4.10.................................. 113.3-116.1.................. 3.00 1.36 16.60 7.53 9.80 4.454.10-4.20.................................. 116.1-118.9.................. 3.00 1.36 17.00 7.72 10.00 4.544.20-4.30.................................. 118.9-121.8.................. 3.00 1.36 17.40 7.90 10.20 4.634.30-4.40.................................. 121.8-124.6.................. 3.00 1.36 17.80 8.09 10.40 4.724.40-4.50.................................. 124.6-127.4.................. 3.00 1.36 18.20 8.27 10.60 4.824.50-4.60.................................. 127.4-130.3.................. 3.00 1.36 18.70 8.46 10.85 4.914.60-4.70.................................. 130.3-133.1.................. 3.00 1.36 19.10 8.65 11.05 5.004.70-4.80.................................. 133.1-135.9.................. 3.00 1.36 19.50 8.83 11.25 5.104.80-4.90.................................. 135.9-138.8.................. 3.00 1.36 19.90 9.02 11.45 5.194.90-5.00.................................. 138.8-141.6.................. 3.00 1.36 20.30 9.20 11.65 5.285.00-5.10.................................. 141.6-144.4.................. 3.00 1.36 20.70 9.39 11.85 5.385.10-5.20.................................. 144.4-147.2.................. 3.00 1.36 21.10 9.58 12.05 5.475.20-5.30.................................. 147.2-150.1.................. 3.00 1.36 21.50 9.76 12.25 5.565.30-5.40.................................. 150.1-152.9.................. 3.00 1.36 21.90 9.95 12.45 5.655.40-5.50.................................. 152.9-155.7.................. 3.00 1.36 22.30 10.13 12.65 5.755.50-5.60.................................. 155.7-158.6.................. 3.00 1.36 22.80 10.32 12.90 5.845.60-5.70.................................. 158.6-161.4.................. 3.00 1.36 23.20 10.51 13.10 5.935.70-5.80.................................. 161.4-164.2.................. 3.00 1.36 23.60 10.69 13.30 6.035.80-5.90.................................. 164.2-167.1.................. 3.00 1.36 24.00 10.88 13.50 6.125.90-6.00.................................. 167.1-169.9.................. 3.00 1.36 24.40 11.06 13.70 6.21--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Notes: (1) All test load weights are bone dry weights.(2) Allowable tolerance on the test load weights are 0.10 lbs (0.05 kg).
6. Waivers and Field Testing
6.1 Waivers and Field Testing for Nonconventional Clothes Washers. Manufacturers of nonconventional clothes washers, such as clothes washers with adaptive control systems, must submit a petition for waiver pursuant to 10 CFR 430.27 to establish an acceptable test procedure for that clothes washer if the washer cannot be tested pursuant to the DOE test procedure or the DOE test procedure yields results that are so unrepresentative of the clothes washer's true energy consumption characteristics as to provide materially inaccurate comparative data. In such cases, field testing may be appropriate for establishing an acceptable test procedure. The following are guidelines for field testing which may be used by manufacturers in support of petitions for waiver. These guidelines are not mandatory and the Department may determine that they do not apply to a particular model. Depending upon a manufacturer's approach for conducting field testing, additional data may be required. Manufacturers are encouraged to communicate with the Department prior to the commencement of field tests which may be used to support a petition for waiver. Section 6.3 of this Appendix provides an example of field testing for a clothes washer with an adaptive water fill control system. Other features, such as the use of various spin speed selections, could be the subject of field tests.
6.2 Nonconventional Wash System Energy Consumption Test. The field test may consist of a minimum of 10 of the nonconventional clothes washers (``test clothes washers'') and 10 clothes washers already being distributed in commerce (``base clothes washers''). The tests should include a minimum of 50 energy test cycles per clothes washer. The test clothes washers and base clothes washers should be identical in construction except for the controls or systems being tested. Equal numbers of both the test clothes washer and the base clothes washer should be tested simultaneously in comparable settings to minimize seasonal or consumer laundering conditions or variations. The clothes washers should be monitored in such a way as to accurately record the average total energy and water consumption per cycle, including water heating energy when electrically heated water is used, and the energy required to remove the remaining moisture of the test load. Standby and off mode energy consumption should be measured according to section 4.4 of this test procedure. The field test results should be used to determine the best method to correlate the rating of the test clothes washer to the rating of the base clothes washer.
(1) Section 3.2.3.1 of this Appendix defines the test method for measuring energy consumption for clothes washers which incorporate both adaptive and alternate manual water fill control systems. Energy consumption calculated by the method defined in section 3.2.3.1 of this Appendix assumes the adaptive cycle will be used 50 percent of the time. This section can be used to develop field test data in support of a petition for waiver when it is believed that the adaptive cycle will be used more than 50 percent of the time. The field test sample size should be a minimum of 10 test clothes washers. The test clothes washers should be representative of the design, construction, and control system that will be placed in commerce. The duration of field testing in the user's house should be a minimum of 50 energy test cycles, for each unit. No special instructions as to cycle selection or product usage should be given to the field test participants, other than inclusion of the product literature pack which would be shipped with all units, and instructions regarding filling out data collection forms, use of data collection equipment, or basic procedural methods. Prior to the test clothes washers being installed in the field test locations, baseline data should be developed for all field test units by conducting laboratory tests as defined by section 1 through section 5 of this Appendix to determine the energy consumption, water consumption, and remaining moisture content values. The following data should be measured and recorded for each wash load during the test period: Wash cycle selected, the mode of the clothes washer (adaptive or manual), clothes load dry weight (measured after the clothes washer and clothes dryer cycles are completed) in pounds, and type of articles in the clothes load (e.g., cottons, linens, permanent press). The wash loads used in calculating the in-home percentage split between adaptive and manual cycle usage should be only those wash loads which conform to the definition of the energy test cycle.
Calculate: T=The total number of energy test cycles run during the field test.Ta = The total number of adaptive control energy test cycles.Tm = The total number of manual control energy test cycles.
The percentage weighting factors: Pa = (Ta/T) x 100% (the percentage weighting for
adaptive control selection)Pm = (Tm/T) x 100% (the percentage weighting for
manual control selection)
(2) Energy consumption (HET, MET, and DE) and water consumption (QT), values calculated in section 4 of this Appendix for the manual and adaptive modes, should be combined using Pa and Pm as the weighting factors. [77 FR 13939, Mar. 7, 2012]
Sec. Appendixes K-L to Subpart B of Part 430 [Reserved]
Sec. Appendix M to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Central Air Conditioners and Heat
Pumps
Note: The procedures and calculations that refer to off mode energy consumption (i.e., sections 3.13 and 4.2.8 of this appendix M) need not be performed to determine compliance with energy conservation standards for central air conditioners and heat pumps at this time. However, any representation related to standby mode and off mode energy consumption of these products made after corresponding revisions to the central air conditioners and heat pumps test procedure must be based upon results generated under this test procedure, consistent with the requirements of 42 U.S.C. 6293(c)(2). For residential central air conditioners and heat pumps manufactured on or after January 1, 2015, compliance with the applicable provisions of this test procedure is required in order to determine compliance with energy conservation standards.
1. DEFINITIONS
2. TESTING CONDITIONS
2.1 Test room requirements.
2.2 Test unit installation requirements.
2.2.1 Defrost control settings.
2.2.2 Special requirements for units having a multiple-speed outdoor fan.
2.2.3 Special requirements for multi-split air conditioners and heat pumps, and systems composed of multiple mini-split units (outdoor units located side-by-side) that would normally operate using two or more indoor thermostats.
2.2.4 Wet-bulb temperature requirements for the air entering the indoor and outdoor coils.
2.2.4.1 Cooling mode tests.
2.2.4.2 Heating mode tests.
2.2.5 Additional refrigerant charging requirements.
2.3 Indoor air volume rates.
2.3.1 Cooling tests.
2.3.2 Heating tests.
2.4 Indoor coil inlet and outlet duct connections.
2.4.1 Outlet plenum for the indoor unit.
2.4.2 Inlet plenum for the indoor unit.
2.5 Indoor coil air property measurements and air damper box applications.
2.5.1 Test set-up on the inlet side of the indoor coil: For cases where the inlet damper box is installed.
2.5.1.1 If the section 2.4.2 inlet plenum is installed.
2.5.1.2 If the section 2.4.2 inlet plenum is not installed.
2.5.2 Test set-up on the inlet side of the indoor unit: For cases where no inlet damper box is installed.
2.5.3 Indoor coil static pressure difference measurement.
2.5.4 Test set-up on the outlet side of the indoor coil.
2.5.4.1 Outlet air damper box placement and requirements.
2.5.4.2 Procedures to minimize temperature maldistribution.
2.5.5 Dry bulb temperature measurement.
2.5.6 Water vapor content measurement.
2.5.7 Air damper box performance requirements.
2.6 Airflow measuring apparatus.
2.7 Electrical voltage supply.
2.8 Electrical power and energy measurements.
2.9 Time measurements.
2.10 Test apparatus for the secondary space conditioning capacity measurement.
2.10.1 Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method.
2.10.2 Compressor Calibration Method.
2.10.3 Refrigerant Enthalpy Method.
2.11 Measurement of test room ambient conditions.
2.12 Measurement of indoor fan speed.
2.13 Measurement of barometric pressure.
3. TESTING PROCEDURES
3.1 General Requirements.
3.1.1 Primary and secondary test methods.
3.1.2 Manufacturer-provided equipment overrides.
3.1.3 Airflow through the outdoor coil.
3.1.4 Airflow through the indoor coil.
3.1.4.1 Cooling Certified Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.1.1 Cooling Certified Air Volume Rate for Ducted Units.
3.1.4.1.2 Cooling Certified Air Volume Rate for Non-ducted Units.
3.1.4.2 Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.3 Cooling Intermediate Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.4 Heating Certified Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.4.1 Ducted heat pumps where the Heating and Cooling Certified Air Volume Rates are the same.
3.1.4.4.2 Ducted heat pumps where the Heating and Cooling Certified Air Volume Rates are different due to indoor fan operation.
3.1.4.4.3 Ducted heating-only heat pumps.
3.1.4.4.4 Non-ducted heat pumps, including non-ducted heating-only heat pumps.
3.1.4.5 Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.6 Heating Intermediate Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.7 Heating Nominal Air Volume Rate.
3.1.5 Indoor test room requirement when the air surrounding the indoor unit is not supplied from the same source as the air entering the indoor unit.
3.1.6 Air volume rate calculations.
3.1.7 Test sequence.
3.1.8 Requirement for the air temperature distribution leaving the indoor coil.
3.1.9 Control of auxiliary resistive heating elements.
3.2 Cooling mode tests for different types of air conditioners and heat pumps.
3.2.1 Tests for a unit having a single-speed compressor that is tested with a fixed-speed indoor fan installed, with a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed.
3.2.2 Tests for a unit having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed.
3.2.2.1 Indoor fan capacity modulation that correlates with the outdoor dry bulb temperature.
3.2.2.2 Indoor fan capacity modulation based on adjusting the sensible to total (S/T) cooling capacity ratio.
3.2.3 Tests for a unit having a two-capacity compressor.
3.2.4 Tests for a unit having a variable-speed compressor.
3.3 Test procedures for steady-state wet coil cooling mode tests (the A, A2, A1, B, B2, B1, EV, and F1 Tests).
3.4 Test procedures for the optional steady-state dry coil cooling mode tests (the C, C1, and G1 Tests).
3.5 Test procedures for the optional cyclic dry coil cooling mode tests (the D, D1, and I1 Tests).
3.5.1 Procedures when testing ducted systems.
3.5.2 Procedures when testing non-ducted systems.
3.5.3 Cooling mode cyclic degradation coefficient calculation.
3.6 Heating mode tests for different types of heat pumps, including heating-only heat pumps.
3.6.1 Tests for a heat pump having a single-speed compressor that is tested with a fixed speed indoor fan installed, with a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed.
3.6.2 Tests for a heat pump having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan: capacity modulation correlates with outdoor dry bulb temperature.
3.6.3 Tests for a heat pump having a two-capacity compressor (see Definition 1.45), including two-capacity, northern heat pumps (see Definition 1.46).
3.6.4 Tests for a heat pump having a variable-speed compressor.
3.6.5 Additional test for a heat pump having a heat comfort controller.
3.7 Test procedures for steady-state Maximum Temperature and High Temperature heating mode tests (the H01, H1, H12, H11, and H1N Tests).
3.8 Test procedures for the optional cyclic heating mode tests (the H0C1, H1C, and H1C1 Tests).
3.8.1 Heating mode cyclic degradation coefficient calculation.
3.9 Test procedures for Frost Accumulation heating mode tests (the H2, H22, H2V, and H21 Tests).
3.9.1 Average space heating capacity and electrical power calculations.
3.9.2 Demand defrost credit.
3.10 Test procedures for steady-state Low Temperature heating mode tests (the H3, H32, and H31 Tests).
3.11 Additional requirements for the secondary test methods.
3.11.1 If using the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method as the secondary test method.
3.11.1.1 If a preliminary test precedes the official test
3.11.1.2 If a preliminary test does not precede the official test.
3.11.1.3 Official test.
3.11.2 If using the Compressor Calibration Method as the secondary test method.
3.11.3 If using the Refrigerant Enthalpy Method as the secondary test method.
3.12 Rounding of space conditioning capacities for reporting purposes.
4. CALCULATIONS OF SEASONAL PERFORMANCE DESCRIPTORS
4.1 Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) Calculations.
4.1.1 SEER calculations for an air conditioner or heat pump having a single-speed compressor that was tested with a fixed-speed indoor fan installed, a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed.
4.1.2 SEER calculations for an air conditioner or heat pump having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan.
4.1.2.1 Units covered by section 3.2.2.1 where indoor fan capacity modulation correlates with the outdoor dry bulb temperature.
4.1.2.2 Units covered by section 3.2.2.2 where indoor fan capacity modulation is used to adjust the sensible to total cooling capacity ratio.
4.1.3 SEER calculations for an air conditioner or heat pump having a two-capacity compressor.
4.1.3.1 Steady-state space cooling capacity at low compressor capacity is greater than or equal to the building cooling load at temperature Tj, QQck=1(Tj) =BL(Tj).
4.1.3.2 Unit alternates between high (k=2) and low (k=1) compressor capacity to satisfy the building cooling load at temperature Tj, QQck=1(Tj) j) ck=2(Tj).
4.1.3.3 Unit only operates at high (k=2) compressor capacity at temperature Tj and its capacity is greater than the building cooling load, BL(Tj) ck=2(Tj).
4.1.3.4 Unit must operate continuously at high (k=2) compressor capacity at temperature Tj, BL(Tj) =QQck=2(Tj).
4.1.4 SEER calculations for an air conditioner or heat pump having a variable-speed compressor.
4.1.4.1 Steady-state space cooling capacity when operating at minimum compressor speed is greater than or equal to the building cooling load at temperature Tj, QQck=1(Tj) =BL(Tj).
4.1.4.2 Unit operates at an intermediate compressor speed (k=i) in order to match the building cooling load at temperature Tj, QQck=1(Tj) j) ck=2(Tj).
4.1.4.3 Unit must operate continuously at maximum (k=2) compressor speed at temperature Tj, BL(Tj) =QQck=2(Tj).
4.2 Heating Seasonal Performance Factor (HSPF) Calculations.
4.2.1 Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a single-speed compressor that was tested with a fixed-speed indoor fan installed, a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed.
4.2.2 Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan.
4.2.3 Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a two-capacity compressor.
4.2.3.1 Steady-state space heating capacity when operating at low compressor capacity is greater than or equal to the building heating load at temperature Tj, QQhk=1(Tj) =BL(Tj).
4.2.3.2 Heat pump alternates between high (k=2) and low (k=1) compressor capacity to satisfy the building heating load at a temperature Tj, QQhk=1(Tj) BL (Tj) hk=2(Tj).
4.2.3.3 Heat pump only operates at high (k=2) compressor capacity at temperature Tj and its capacity is greater than the building heating load, BL(Tj) hk=2(Tj).
4.2.3.4 Heat pump must operate continuously at high (k=2) compressor capacity at temperature Tj, BL(Tj) =QQhk=2(Tj).
4.2.4 Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a variable-speed compressor.
4.2.4.1 Steady-state space heating capacity when operating at minimum compressor speed is greater than or equal to the building heating load at temperature Tj, QQhk=1(Tj) =BL(Tj).
4.2.4.2 Heat pump operates at an intermediate compressor speed (k=i) in order to match the building heating load at a temperature Tj, QQhk=1(Tj) j) hk=2(Tj).
4.2.4.3 Heat pump must operate continuously at maximum (k=2) compressor speed at temperature Tj, BL(Tj) =QQhk=2(Tj).
4.2.5 Heat pumps having a heat comfort controller.
4.2.5.1 Heat pump having a heat comfort controller: Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a single-speed compressor that was tested with a fixed-speed indoor fan installed, a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed.
4.2.5.2 Heat pump having a heat comfort controller: Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan.
4.2.5.3 Heat pumps having a heat comfort controller: Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a two-capacity compressor.
4.2.5.4 Heat pumps having a heat comfort controller: Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a variable-speed compressor. [Reserved]
4.3 Calculations of the Actual and Representative Regional Annual Performance Factors for Heat Pumps.
4.3.1 Calculation of actual regional annual performance factors (APFA) for a particular location and for each standardized design heating requirement.
4.3.2 Calculation of representative regional annual performance factors (APFR) for each generalized climatic region and for each standardized design heating requirement.
4.4 Rounding of SEER, HSPF, and APF for reporting purposes.
1. Definitions
1.1 Annual performance factor means the total heating and cooling done by a heat pump in a particular region in one year divided by the total electric energy used in one year. Paragraph (m)(3)(iii) of Sec. 430.23 of the Code of Federal Regulations states the calculation requirements for this rating descriptor.
1.2 ARI means Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
1.3 ARI Standard 210/240-2006 means the test standard ``Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment'' published in 2006 by ARI.
1.4 ASHRAE means the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
1.5 ASHRAE Standard 23-2005 means the test standard ``Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and Condensing Units'' published in 2005 by ASHRAE.
1.6 ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 means the test standard ``Methods of Testing for Rating Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment'' published in 2005 by ASHRAE.
1.7 ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01) means the test standard ``Standard Method for Temperature Measurement'' published in 1986 and reaffirmed in 2001 by ASHRAE.
1.8 ASHRAE Standard 41.2-87 (RA 92) means the test standard ``Standard Methods for Laboratory Airflow Measurement'' published in 1987 and reaffirmed in 1992 by ASHRAE.
1.9 ASHRAE Standard 41.6-94 (RA 01) means the test standard ``Method for Measurement of Moist Air Properties'' published in 1994 and reaffirmed in 2001 by ASHRAE.
1.10 ASHRAE Standard 41.9-00 means the test standard ``Calorimeter Test Methods for Mass Flow Measurements of Volatile Refrigerants'' published in 2000 by ASHRAE.
1.11 ASHRAE Standard 51-99/AMCA Standard 210-1999 means the test standard ``Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating'' published in 1999 by ASHRAE and the Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
1.12 ASHRAE Standard 116-95 RA(05) means the test standard ``Methods of Testing for Rating for Seasonal Efficiency of Unitary Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps'' published in 1995 and reaffirmed in 2005 by ASHRAE.
1.13 CFR means Code of Federal Regulations.
1.14 Constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan means a fan that varies its operating speed to provide a fixed air-volume-rate from a ducted system.
1.15 Continuously recorded, when referring to a dry bulb measurement, means that the specified temperature must be sampled at regular intervals that are equal to or less than the maximum intervals specified in section 4.3 part ``a'' of ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01). If such dry bulb temperatures are used only for test room control, it means that one samples at regular intervals equal to or less than the maximum intervals specified in section 4.3 part ``b'' of the same ASHRAE Standard. Regarding wet bulb temperature, dew point temperature, or relative humidity measurements, continuously recorded means that the measurements must be made at regular intervals that are equal to or less than 1 minute.
1.16 Cooling load factor (CLF) means the ratio having as its numerator the total cooling delivered during a cyclic operating interval consisting of one ON period and one OFF period. The denominator is the total cooling that would be delivered, given the same ambient conditions, had the unit operated continuously at its steady-state space cooling capacity for the same total time (ON + OFF) interval.
1.17 Coefficient of Performance (COP) means the ratio of the average rate of space heating delivered to the average rate of electrical energy consumed by the heat pump. These rate quantities must be determined from a single test or, if derived via interpolation, must be tied to a single set of operating conditions. COP is a dimensionless quantity. When determined for a ducted unit tested without an indoor fan installed, COP must include the section 3.7, 3.8, and 3.9.1 default values for the heat output and power input of a fan motor.
1.18 Cyclic Test means a test where the unit's compressor is cycled on and off for specific time intervals. A cyclic test provides half the information needed to calculate a degradation coefficient.
1.19 Damper box means a short section of duct having an air damper that meets the performance requirements of section 2.5.7.
1.20 Degradation coefficient (CD) means a parameter used in calculating the part load factor. The degradation coefficient for cooling is denoted by CD\c\. The degradation coefficient for heating is denoted by CD\h\.
1.21 Demand-defrost control system means a system that defrosts the heat pump outdoor coil only when measuring a predetermined degradation of performance. The heat pump's controls monitor one or more parameters that always vary with the amount of frost accumulated on the outdoor coil (e.g., coil to air differential temperature, coil differential air pressure, outdoor fan power or current, optical sensors, etc.) at least once for every ten minutes of compressor ON-time when space heating. One acceptable alternative to the criterion given in the prior sentence is a feedback system that measures the length of the defrost period and adjusts defrost frequency accordingly. \1\ In all cases, when the frost parameter(s) reaches a predetermined value, the system initiates a defrost. In a demand-defrost control system, defrosts are terminated based on monitoring a parameter(s) that indicates that frost has been eliminated from the coil.---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Systems that vary defrost intervals according to outdoor dry-bulb temperature are not demand defrost systems.---------------------------------------------------------------------------
A demand-defrost control system, which otherwise meets the above requirements, may allow time-initiated defrosts if, and only if, such defrosts occur after 6 hours of compressor operating time.
1.22 Design heating requirement (DHR) predicts the space heating load of a residence when subjected to outdoor design conditions. Estimates for the minimum and maximum DHR are provided for six generalized U.S. climatic regions in section 4.2.
1.23 Dry-coil tests are cooling mode tests where the wet-bulb temperature of the air supplied to the indoor coil is maintained low enough that no condensate forms on this coil.
1.24 Ducted system means an air conditioner or heat pump that is designed to be permanently installed equipment and delivers conditioned air to the indoor space through a duct(s). The air conditioner or heat pump may be either a split system or a single-packaged unit.
1.25 Energy efficiency ratio (EER) means the ratio of the average rate of space cooling delivered to the average rate of electrical energy consumed by the air conditioner or heat pump. These rate quantities must be determined from a single test or, if derived via interpolation, must be tied to a single set of operating conditions. EER is expressed in units of[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.001 When determined for a ducted unit tested without an indoor fan installed, EER must include the section 3.3 and 3.5.1 default values for the heat output and power input of a fan motor.
1.26 Heating load factor (HLF) means the ratio having as its numerator the total heating delivered during a cyclic operating interval consisting of one ON period and one OFF period. The denominator is the total heating that would be delivered, given the same ambient conditions, if the unit operated continuously at its steady-state space heating capacity for the same total time (ON plus OFF) interval.
1.27 Heating seasonal performance factor (HSPF) means the total space heating required during the space heating season, expressed in Btu's, divided by the total electrical energy consumed by the heat pump system during the same season, expressed in watt-hours. The HSPF used to evaluate compliance with the Energy Conservation Standards (see 10 CFR 430.32(c), subpart C) is based on Region IV, the minimum standardized design heating requirement, and the sampling plan stated in 10 CFR 430.24(m), subpart B.
1.28 Heat pump having a heat comfort controller means equipment that regulates the operation of the electric resistance elements to assure that the air temperature leaving the indoor section does not fall below a specified temperature. This specified temperature is usually field adjustable. Heat pumps that actively regulate the rate of electric resistance heating when operating below the balance point (as the result of a second stage call from the thermostat) but do not operate to maintain a minimum delivery temperature are not considered as having a heat comfort controller.
1.29 Mini-split air conditioners and heat pumps means systems that have a single outdoor section and one or more indoor sections. The indoor sections cycle on and off in unison in response to a single indoor thermostat.
1.30 Multiple-split air conditioners and heat pumps means systems that have two or more indoor sections. The indoor sections operate independently and can be used to condition multiple zones in response to multiple indoor thermostats.
1.31 Non-ducted system means an air conditioner or heat pump that is designed to be permanently installed equipment and directly heats or cools air within the conditioned space using one or more indoor coils that are mounted on room walls and/or ceilings. The unit may be of a modular design that allows for combining multiple outdoor coils and compressors to create one overall system. Non-ducted systems covered by this test procedure are all split systems.
1.32 Part-load factor (PLF) means the ratio of the cyclic energy efficiency ratio (coefficient of performance) to the steady-state energy efficiency ratio (coefficient of performance). Evaluate both energy efficiency ratios (coefficients of performance) based on operation at the same ambient conditions.
1.33 Seasonal energy efficiency ratio (SEER) means the total heat removed from the conditioned space during the annual cooling season, expressed in Btu's, divided by the total electrical energy consumed by the air conditioner or heat pump during the same season, expressed in watt-hours. The SEER calculation in section 4.1 of this appendix and the sampling plan stated in 10 CFR subpart B, 430.24(m) are used to evaluate compliance with the Energy Conservation Standards. (See 10 CFR 430.32(c), subpart C.)
1.34 Single-packaged unit means any central air conditioner or heat pump that has all major assemblies enclosed in one cabinet.
1.35 Small-duct, high-velocity system means a system that contains a blower and indoor coil combination that is designed for, and produces, at least 1.2 inches (of water) of external static pressure when operated at the full-loadair volume rate of 220-350 cfm per rated ton of cooling. When applied in the field, small-duct products use high-velocity room outlets (i.e., generally greater than 1000 fpm) having less than 6.0 square inches of free area.
1.36 Split system means any air conditioner or heat pump that has one or more of the major assemblies separated from the others.
1.37 Standard Air means dry air having a mass density of 0.075 lb/ft\3\.
1.38 Steady-state test means a test where the test conditions are regulated to remain as constant as possible while the unit operates continuously in the same mode.
1.39 Temperature bin means the 5 [deg]F increments that are used to partition the outdoor dry-bulb temperature ranges of the cooling (=65 [deg]F) and heating (<65 [deg]F) seasons.
1.40 Test condition tolerance means the maximum permissible difference between the average value of the measured test parameter and the specified test condition.
1.41 Test operating tolerance means the maximum permissible range that a measurement may vary over the specified test interval. The difference between the maximum and minimum sampled values must be less than or equal to the specified test operating tolerance.
1.42 Time adaptive defrost control system is a demand-defrost control system (see definition 1.21) that measures the length of the prior defrost period(s) and uses that information to automatically determine when to initiate the next defrost cycle.
1.43 Time-temperature defrost control systems initiate or evaluate initiating a defrost cycle only when a predetermined cumulative compressor ON-time is obtained. This predetermined ON-time is generally a fixed value (e.g., 30, 45, 90 minutes) although it may vary based on the measured outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The ON-time counter accumulates if controller measurements (e.g., outdoor temperature, evaporator temperature) indicate that frost formation conditions are present, and it is reset/remains at zero at all other times. In one application of the control scheme, a defrost is initiated whenever the counter time equals the predetermined ON-time. The counter is reset when the defrost cycle is completed.
In a second application of the control scheme, one or more parameters are measured (e.g., air and/or refrigerant temperatures) at the predetermined, cumulative, compressor ON-time. A defrost is initiated only if the measured parameter(s) falls within a predetermined range. The ON-time counter is reset regardless of whether a defrost is initiated. If systems of this second type use cumulative ON-time intervals of 10 minutes or less, then the heat pump may qualify as having a demand defrost control system (see definition 1.21).
1.44 Triple-split system means an air conditioner or heat pump that is composed of three separate components: An outdoor fan coil section, an indoor fan coil section, and an indoor compressor section.
1.45 Two-capacity (or two-stage) compressor means an air conditioner or heat pump that has one of the following:
(1) A two-speed compressor,
(2) Two compressors where only one compressor ever operates at a time,
(3) Two compressors where one compressor (Compressor 1) operates at low loads and both compressors (Compressors 1 and 2) operate at high loads but Compressor 2 never operates alone, or
(4) A compressor that is capable of cylinder or scroll unloading.
For such systems, low capacity means:
(1) Operating at low compressor speed,
(2) Operating the lower capacity compressor,
(3) Operating Compressor 1, or
(4) Operating with the compressor unloaded (e.g., operating one piston of a two-piston reciprocating compressor, using a fixed fractional volume of the full scroll, etc.).
For such systems, high capacity means:
(1) Operating at high compressor speed,
(2) Operating the higher capacity compressor,
(3) Operating Compressors 1 and 2, or
(4) Operating with the compressor loaded (e.g., operating both pistons of a two-piston reciprocating compressor, using the full volume of the scroll).
1.46 Two-capacity, northern heat pump means a heat pump that has a factory or field-selectable lock-out feature to prevent space cooling at high-capacity. Two-capacity heat pumps having this feature will typically have two sets of ratings, one with the feature disabled and one with the feature enabled. The indoor coil model number should reflect whether the ratings pertain to the lockout enabled option via the inclusion of an extra identifier, such as ``+LO.'' When testing as a two-capacity, northern heat pump, the lockout feature must remain enabled for all tests.
1.47 Wet-coil test means a test conducted at test conditions that typically cause water vapor to condense on the test unit evaporator coil.
2. Testing Conditions
This test procedure covers split-type and single-packaged ducted units and split-type non-ducted units. Except for units having a variable-speed compressor, ducted units tested without an indoor fan installed are covered.
a. Only a subset of the sections listed in this test procedure apply when testing and rating a particular unit. Tables 1-A through 1-C show which sections of the test procedure apply to each type of equipment. In each table, look at all four of the Roman numeral categories to see what test sections apply to the equipment being tested.
1. The first category, Rows I-1 through I-4 of the Tables, pertains to the compressor and indoor fan features of the equipment. After identifying the correct ``I'' row, find the table cells in the same row that list the type of equipment being tested: Air conditioner (AC), heat pump (HP), or heating-only heat pump (HH). Use the test section(s) listed above each noted table cell for testing and rating the unit.
2. The second category, Rows II-1 and II-2, pertains to the presence or absence of ducts. Row II-1 shows the test procedure sections that apply to ducted systems, and Row II-2 shows those that apply to non-ducted systems.
3. The third category is for special features that may be present in the equipment. When testing units that have one or more of the three (special) equipment features described by the Table legend for Category III, use Row III to find test sections that apply.
4. The fourth category is for the secondary test method to be used. If the secondary method for determining the unit's cooling and/or heating capacity is known, use Row IV to find the appropriate test sections. Otherwise, include all of the test sections referenced by Row IV cell entries--i.e., sections 2.10 to 2.10.3 and 3.11 to 3.11.3--among those sections consulted for testing and rating information.
b. Obtain a complete listing of all pertinent test sections by recording those sections identified from the four categories above.
c. The user should note that, for many sections, only part of a section applies to the unit being tested. In a few cases, the entire section may not apply. For example, sections 3.4 to 3.5.3 (which describe optional dry coil tests), are not relevant if the allowed default value for the cooling mode cyclic degradation coefficient is used rather than determining it by testing.
Example for Using Tables 1-A to 1-C
Equipment Description: A ducted air conditioner having a single-speed compressor, a fixed-speed indoor fan, and a multi-speed outdoor fan.
Secondary Test Method: Refrigerant Enthalpy Method
Step 1. Determine which of four listed Row ``I'' options applies ==Row I-2
Table 1-A: ``AC'' in Row I-2 is found in the columns for sections 1.1 to 1.47, 2.1 to 2.2, 2.2.4 to 2.2.4.1, 2.2.5, 2.3 to 2.3.1, 2.4 to 2.4.1, 2.5, 2.5.2 to 2.10, and 2.11 to 2.13.
Table 1-B: ``AC'' is listed in Row I-2 for sections 3 to 3.1.4, 3.1.5 to 3.1.8, 3.2.1, 3.3 to 3.5, 3.5.3, 3.11 and 3.12.
Table 1-C: ``AC'' is listed in Row I-2 for sections 4.1.1 and 4.4.
Step 2. Equipment is ducted ==Row II-1
Table 1-A: ``AC'' is listed in Row II-1 for sections 2.4.2 and 2.5.1 to 2.5.1.2.
Table 1-B: ``AC'' is listed in Row II-1 for sections 3.1.4.1 to 3.1.4.1.1 and 3.5.1.
Table 1-C: no ``AC'' listings in Row II-1.
Step 3. Equipment Special Features include multi-speed outdoor fan ==Row III, M
Table 1-A: ``M'' is listed in Row III for section 2.2.2
Tables 1-B and 1-C: no ``M'' listings in Row III.
Step 4. Secondary Test Method is Refrigerant Enthalpy Method ==Row IV, R
Table 1-A: ``R'' is listed in Row IV for section 2.10.3
Table 1-B: ``R'' is listed in Row IV for section 3.11.3
Table 1-C: no ``R'' listings in Row IV.
Step 5. Cumulative listing of applicable test procedure sections 1.1 to 1.47, 2.1 to 2.2, 2.2.2, 2.2.4 to 2.4.1, 2.2.5, 2.3 to 2.3.1, 2.4 to 2.4.1, 2.4.2, 2.5, 2.5.1 to 2.5.1.2, 2.5.2 to 2.10, 2.10.3, 2.11 to 2.13, 3. to 3.1.4, 3.1.4.1 to 3.1.4.1.1, 3.1.5 to 3.1.8, 3.2.1, 3.3 to 3.5, 3.5.1, 3.5.3, 3.11, 3.11.3, 3.12, 4.1.1, and 4.4. [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.167 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.168 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.169 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.170
2.1 Test room requirements. a. Test using two side-by-side rooms, an indoor test room and an outdoor test room. For multiple-split air conditioners and heat pumps (see Definition 1.30), however, use as many available indoor test rooms as needed to accommodate the total number of indoor units. These rooms must comply with the requirements specified in sections 8.1.2 and 8.1.3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22).
b. Inside these test rooms, use artificial loads during cyclic tests and frost accumulation tests, if needed, to produce stabilized room air temperatures. For one room, select an electric resistance heater(s) having a heating capacity that is approximately equal to the heating capacity of the test unit's condenser. For the second room, select a heater(s) having a capacity that is close to the sensible cooling capacity of the test unit's evaporator. When applied, cycle the heater located in the same room as the test unit evaporator coil ON and OFF when the test unit cycles ON and OFF. Cycle the heater located in the same room as the test unit condensing coil ON and OFF when the test unit cycles OFF and ON.
2.2 Test unit installation requirements. a. Install the unit according to section 8.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). With respect to interconnecting tubing used when testing split systems, however, follow the requirements given in section 6.1.3.5 of ARI Standard 210/240-2006 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). When testing triple-split systems (see Definition 1.44), use the tubing length specified in section 6.1.3.5 of ARI Standard 210/240-2006 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) to connect the outdoor coil, indoor compressor section, and indoor coil while still meeting the requirement of exposing 10 feet of the tubing to outside conditions. When testing split systems having multiple indoor coils, connect each indoor fan-coil to the outdoor unit using: (a) 25 feet of tubing, or (b) tubing furnished by the manufacturer, whichever is longer. If they are needed to make a secondary measurement of capacity, install refrigerant pressure measuring instruments as described in section 8.2.5 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). Refer to section 2.10 of this appendix to learn which secondary methods require refrigerant pressure measurements. At a minimum, insulate the low-pressure line(s) of a split-system with insulation having an inside diameter that matches the refrigerant tubing and a nominal thickness of 0.5 inch.
b. For units designed for both horizontal and vertical installation or for both up-flow and down-flow vertical installations, the manufacturer must specify the orientation used for testing. Conduct testing with the following installed:
(1) the most restrictive filter(s);
(2) supplementary heating coils; and
(3) other equipment specified as part of the unit, including all hardware used by a heat comfort controller if so equipped (see Definition 1.28). For small-duct, high-velocity systems, configure all balance dampers or restrictor devices on or inside the unit to fully open or lowest restriction.
c. Testing a ducted unit without having an indoor air filter installed is permissible as long as the minimum external static pressure requirement is adjusted as stated in Table 2, note 3 (see section 3.1.4). Except as noted in section 3.1.9, prevent the indoor air supplementary heating coils from operating during all tests. For coil-only indoor units that are supplied without an enclosure, create an enclosure using 1 inch fiberglass ductboard having a nominal density of 6 pounds per cubic foot. Or alternatively, use some other insulating material having a thermal resistance (``R'' value) between 4 and 6 hr[middot]ft\2\[middot] [deg]F/Btu. For units where the coil is housed within an enclosure or cabinet, no extra insulating or sealing is allowed.
2.2.1 Defrost control settings. Set heat pump defrost controls at the normal settings which most typify those encountered in generalized climatic region IV. (Refer to Figure 2 and Table 17 of section 4.2 for information on region IV.) For heat pumps that use a time-adaptive defrost control system (see Definition 1.42), the manufacturer must specify the frosting interval to be used during Frost Accumulation tests and provide the procedure for manually initiating the defrost at the specified time. To ease testing of any unit, the manufacturer should provide information and any necessary hardware to manually initiate a defrost cycle.
2.2.2 Special requirements for units having a multiple-speed outdoor fan. Configure the multiple-speed outdoor fan according to the manufacturer's specifications, and thereafter, leave it unchanged for all tests. The controls of the unit must regulate the operation of the outdoor fan during all lab tests except dry coil cooling mode tests. For dry coil cooling mode tests, the outdoor fan must operate at the same speed used during the required wet coil test conducted at the same outdoor test conditions.
2.2.3 Special requirements for multi-split air conditioners and heat pumps, and systems composed of multiple mini-split units (outdoor units located side-by-side) that would normally operate using two or more indoor thermostats. For any test where the system is operated at part load (i.e., one or more compressors ``off'', operating at the intermediate or minimum compressor speed, or at low compressor capacity), the manufacturer shall designate the particular indoor coils that are turned off during the test. For variable-speed systems, the manufacturer must designate at least one indoor unit that is turned off for all tests conducted at minimum compressor speed. For all other part-load tests, the manufacturer shall choose to turn off zero, one, two, or more indoor units. The chosen configuration shall remain unchanged for all tests conducted at the same compressor speed/capacity. For any indoor coil that is turned off during a test, take steps to cease forced airflow through this indoor coil and block its outlet duct. Because these types of systems will have more than one indoor fan and possibly multiple outdoor fans and compressor systems, references in this test procedure to a single indoor fan, outdoor fan, and compressor means all indoor fans, all outdoor fans, and all compressor systems that are turned on during the test.
2.2.4 Wet-bulb temperature requirements for the air entering the indoor and outdoor coils.
2.2.4.1 Cooling mode tests. For wet-coil cooling mode tests, regulate the water vapor content of the air entering the indoor unit to the applicable wet-bulb temperature listed in Tables 3 to 6. As noted in these same tables, achieve a wet-bulb temperature during dry-coil cooling mode tests that results in no condensate forming on the indoor coil. Controlling the water vapor content of the air entering the outdoor side of the unit is not required for cooling mode tests except when testing:
(1) Units that reject condensate to the outdoor coil during wet coil tests. Tables 3-6 list the applicable wet-bulb temperatures.
(2) Single-packaged units where all or part of the indoor section is located in the outdoor test room. The average dew point temperature of the air entering the outdoor coil during wet coil tests must be within 3.0 [deg]F of the average dew point temperature of the air entering the indoor coil over the 30-minute data collection interval described in section 3.3. For dry coil tests on such units, it may be necessary to limit the moisture content of the air entering the outdoor side of the unit to meet the requirements of section 3.4.
2.2.4.2 Heating mode tests. For heating mode tests, regulate the water vapor content of the air entering the outdoor unit to the applicable wet-bulb temperature listed in Tables 9 to 12. The wet-bulb temperature entering the indoor side of the heat pump must not exceed 60 [deg]F. Additionally, if the Outdoor Air Enthalpy test method is used while testing a single-packaged heat pump where all or part of the outdoor section is located in the indoor test room, adjust the wet-bulb temperature for the air entering the indoor side to yield an indoor-side dew point temperature that is as close as reasonably possible to the dew point temperature of the outdoor-side entering air.
2.2.5 Additional refrigerant charging requirements. Charging according to the ``manufacturer's published instructions,'' as stated in section 8.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22), means the manufacturer's installation instructions that come packaged with the unit.If a unit requires charging but the installation instructions do not specify a charging procedure, then evacuate the unit and add the nameplate refrigerant charge. Where the manufacturer's installation instructions contain two sets of refrigerant charging criteria, one for field installations and one for lab testing, use the field installation criteria. For third-party testing, the test laboratory may consult with the manufacturer about the refrigerant charging procedure and make any needed corrections so long as they do not contradict the published installation instructions. The manufacturer may specify an alternative charging criteria to the third-party laboratory so long as the manufacturer thereafter revises the published installation instructions accordingly.
2.3 Indoor air volume rates. If a unit's controls allow for overspeeding the indoor fan (usually on a temporary basis), take the necessary steps to prevent overspeeding during all tests.
2.3.1 Cooling tests. a. Set indoor fan control options (e.g., fan motor pin settings, fan motor speed) according to the published installation instructions that are provided with the equipment while meeting the airflow requirements that are specified in sections 3.1.4.1 to 3.1.4.3.
b. Express the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate, the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate, and the Cooling Intermediate Air Volume Rate in terms of standard air.
2.3.2 Heating tests. a. If needed, set the indoor fan control options (e.g., fan motor pin settings, fan motor speed) according to the published installation instructions that are provided with the equipment. Do this set-up while meeting all applicable airflow requirements specified in sections 3.1.4.4 to 3.1.4.7.
b. Express the Heating Certified Air Volume Rate, the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate, the Heating Intermediate Air Volume Rate, and the Heating Nominal Air Volume Rate in terms of standard air.
2.4 Indoor coil inlet and outlet duct connections. Insulate and/or construct the outlet plenum described in section 2.4.1 and, if installed, the inlet plenum described in section 2.4.2 with thermal insulation having a nominal overall sistance (R-value) of at least 19 hr[middot]ft\2\[middot] [deg]F/Btu.
2.4.1 Outlet plenum for the indoor unit. a. Attach a plenum to the outlet of the indoor coil. (Note: for some packaged systems, the indoor coil may be located in the outdoor test room.)
b. For systems having multiple indoor coils, attach a plenum to each indoor coil outlet. Connect two or more outlet plenums to a single common duct so that each indoor coil ultimately connects to an airflow measuring apparatus (section 2.6). If using more than one indoor test room, do likewise, creating one or more common ducts within each test room that contains multiple indoor coils. At the plane where each plenum enters a common duct, install an adjustable airflow damper and use it to equalize the static pressure in each plenum. Each outlet air temperature grid (section 2.5.4) and airflow measuring apparatus are located downstream of the inlet(s) to the common duct.
c. For small-duct, high-velocity systems, install an outlet plenum that has a diameter that is equal to or less than the value listed below. The limit depends only on the cooling Full-Load Air Volume Rate (see section 3.1.4.1.1) and is effective regardless of the flange dimensions on the outlet of the unit (or an air supply plenum adapter accessory, if installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions).
d. Add a static pressure tap to each face of the (each) outlet plenum, if rectangular, or at four evenly distributed locations along the circumference of an oval or round plenum. Create a manifold that connects the four static pressure taps. Figure 1 shows two of the three options allowed for the manifold configuration; the third option is the broken-ring, four-to-one manifold configuration that is shown in Figure 7a of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). See Figures 7a, 7b, 7c, and 8 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) for the cross-sectional dimensions and minimum length of the (each) plenum and the locations for adding the static pressure taps for units tested with and without an indoor fan installed. ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum diameter* of
Cooling full-load air volume rate (scfm) outlet plenum (inches)------------------------------------------------------------------------<=500.......................................... 6501 to 700..................................... 7701 to 900..................................... 8901 to 1100.................................... 91101 to 1400................................... 101401 to 1750................................... 11------------------------------------------------------------------------*If the outlet plenum is rectangular, calculate its equivalent diameter
using (4A/P,) where A is the area and P is the perimeter of the
rectangular plenum, and compare it to the listed maximum diameter.
2.4.2 Inlet plenum for the indoor unit. Install an inlet plenum when testing a coil-only indoor unit or a packaged system where the indoor coil is located in the outdoor test room. Add static pressure taps at the center of each face of this plenum, if rectangular, or at four evenly distributed locations along the circumference of an oval or round plenum. Make a manifold that connects the four static-pressure taps using one of the three configurations specified in section 2.4.1. See Figures 7b, 7c, and Figure 8 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) for cross-sectional dimensions, the minimum length of the inlet plenum, and the locations of the static-pressure taps. When testing a ducted unit having an indoor fan (and the indoor coil is in the indoor test room), the manufacturer has the option to test with or without an inlet plenum installed. Space limitations within the test room may dictate that the manufacturer choose the latter option. If used, construct the inlet plenum and add the four static-pressure taps as shown in Figure 8 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). Manifold the four static-pressure taps using one of the three configurations specified in section 2.4.1. Never use an inlet plenum when testing a non-ducted system.
2.5 Indoor coil air property measurements and air damper box applications. a. Measure the dry-bulb temperature and water vapor content of the air entering and leaving the indoor coil. If needed, use an air sampling device to divert air to a sensor(s) that measures the water vapor content of the air. See Figure 2 of ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) for guidance on constructing an air sampling device. The sampling device may also divert air to a remotely located sensor(s) that measures dry bulb temperature. The air sampling device and the remotely located temperature sensor(s) may be used to determine the entering air dry bulb temperature during any test. The air sampling device and the remotely located leaving air dry bulb temperature sensor(s) may be used for all tests except:
(1) Cyclic tests; and
(2) Frost accumulation tests.
b. An acceptable alternative in all cases, including the two special cases noted above, is to install a grid of dry bulb temperature sensors within the outlet and inlet ducts. Use a temperature grid to get the average dry bulb temperature at one location, leaving or entering, or when two grids are applied as a thermopile, to directly obtain the temperature difference. A grid of temperature sensors (which may also be used for determining average leaving air dry bulb temperature) is required to measure the temperature distribution within a cross-section of the leaving airstream.
c. Use an inlet and outlet air damper box when testing ducted systems if conducting one or both of the cyclic tests listed in sections 3.2 and 3.6. Otherwise, install an outlet air damper box when testing heat pumps, both ducted and non-ducted, that cycle off the indoor fan during defrost cycles if no other means is available for preventing natural or forced convection through the indoor unit when the indoor fan is off. Never use an inlet damper box when testing a non-ducted system.
2.5.1 Test set-up on the inlet side of the indoor coil: for cases where the inlet damper box is installed. a. Install the inlet side damper box as specified in section 2.5.1.1 or 2.5.1.2, whichever applies. Insulate or construct the ductwork between the point where the air damper is installed and where the connection is made to either the inlet plenum (section 2.5.1.1 units) or the indoor unit (section 2.5.1.2 units) with thermal insulation that has a nominal overall resistance (R-value) of at least 19 hr[middot]ft\2\[middot] [deg]F/Btu.
b. Locate the grid of entering air dry-bulb temperature sensors, if used, at the inlet of the damper box. Locate the air sampling device, or the sensor used to measure the water vapor content of the inlet air, at a location immediately upstream of the damper box inlet.
2.5.1.1 If the section 2.4.2 inlet plenum is installed. Install the inlet damper box upstream of the inlet plenum. The cross-sectional flow area of the damper box must be equal to or greater than the flow area of the inlet plenum. If needed, use an adaptor plate or a transition duct section to connect the damper box with the inlet plenum.
2.5.1.2 If the section 2.4.2 inlet plenum is not installed. Install the damper box immediately upstream of the air inlet of the indoor unit. The cross-sectional dimensions of the damper box must be equal to or greater than the dimensions of the indoor unit inlet. If needed, use an adaptor plate or a short transition duct section to connect the damper box with the unit's air inlet. Add static pressure taps at the center of each face of the damper box, if rectangular, or at four evenly distributed locations along the circumference, if oval or round. Locate the pressure taps between the inlet damper and the inlet of the indoor unit. Make a manifold that connects the four static pressure taps.
2.5.2 Test set-up on the inlet side of the indoor unit: for cases where no inlet damper box is installed. If using the section 2.4.2 inlet plenum and a grid of dry bulb temperature sensors, mount the grid at a location upstream of the static pressure taps described in section 2.4.2, preferably at the entrance plane of the inlet plenum. If the section 2.4.2 inlet plenum is not used, but a grid of dry bulb temperature sensors is used, locate the grid approximately 6 inches upstream from the inlet of the indoor coil. Or, in the case of non-ducted units having multiple indoor coils, locate a grid approximately 6 inches upstream from the inlet of each indoor coil. Position an air sampling device, or the sensor used to measure the water vapor content of the inlet air, immediately upstream of the (each) entering air dry-bulb temperature sensor grid. If a grid of sensors is not used, position the entering air sampling device (or the sensor used to measure the water vapor content of the inlet air) as if the grid were present.
2.5.3 Indoor coil static pressure difference measurement. Section 6.5.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) describes the method for fabricating static-pressure taps. Also refer to Figure 2A of ASHRAE Standard 51-99/AMCA Standard 210-99 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). Use a differential pressure measuring instrument that is accurate to within 0.01 inches of water and has a resolution of at least 0.01 inches of water to measure the static pressure difference between the indoor coil air inlet and outlet. Connect one side of the differential pressure instrument to the manifolded pressure taps installed in the outlet plenum. Connect the other side of the instrument to the manifolded pressure taps located in either the inlet plenum or incorporated within the air damper box. If an inlet plenum or inlet damper box are not used, leave the inlet side of the differential pressure instrument open to the surrounding atmosphere. For non-ducted systems that are tested with multiple outlet plenums, measure the static pressure within each outlet plenum relative to the surrounding atmosphere.
2.5.4 Test set-up on the outlet side of the indoor coil. a. Install an interconnecting duct between the outlet plenum described in section 2.4.1 and the airflow measuring apparatus described below in section 2.6. The cross-sectional flow area of the interconnecting duct must be equal to or greater than the flow area of the outlet plenum or the common duct used when testing non-ducted units having multiple indoor coils. If needed, use adaptor plates or transition duct sections to allow the connections. To minimize leakage, tape joints within the interconnecting duct (and the outlet plenum). Construct or insulate the entire flow section with thermal insulation having a nominal overall resistance (R-value) of at least 19 hr[middot]ft\2\[middot] [deg]F/Btu.
b. Install a grid(s) of dry-bulb temperature sensors inside the interconnecting duct. Also, install an air sampling device, or the sensor(s) used to measure the water vapor content of the outlet air, inside the interconnecting duct. Locate the dry-bulb temperature grid(s) upstream of the air sampling device (or the in-duct sensor(s) used to measure the water vapor content of the outlet air). Air that circulates through an air sampling device and past a remote water-vapor-content sensor(s) must be returned to the interconnecting duct at a point:
(1) Downstream of the air sampling device;
(2) Upstream of the outlet air damper box, if installed; and
(3) Upstream of the section 2.6 airflow measuring apparatus.
2.5.4.1 Outlet air damper box placement and requirements. If using an outlet air damper box (see section 2.5), install it within the interconnecting duct at a location downstream of the location where air from the sampling device is reintroduced or downstream of the in-duct sensor that measures water vapor content of the outlet air. The leakage rate from the combination of the outlet plenum, the closed damper, and the duct section that connects these two components must not exceed 20 cubic feet per minute when a negative pressure of 1 inch of water column is maintained at the plenum's inlet.
2.5.4.2 Procedures to minimize temperature maldistribution. Use these procedures if necessary to correct temperature maldistributions. Install a mixing device(s) upstream of the outlet air, dry-bulb temperature grid (but downstream of the outlet plenum static pressure taps). Use a perforated screen located between the mixing device and the dry-bulb temperature grid, with a maximum open area of 40 percent. One or both items should help to meet the maximum outlet air temperature distribution specified in section 3.1.8. Mixing devices are described in sections 6.3--6.5 of ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) and section 5.2.2 of ASHRAE Standard 41.2-87 (RA 92) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22).
2.5.4.3 Minimizing air leakage. For small-duct, high-velocity systems, install an air damper near the end of the interconnecting duct, just prior to the transition to the airflow measuring apparatus of section 2.6. To minimize air leakage, adjust this damper such that the pressure in the receiving chamber of the airflow measuring apparatus is no more than 0.5 inch of water higher than the surrounding test room ambient. In lieu of installing a separate damper, use the outlet air damper box of sections 2.5 and 2.5.4.1 if it allows variable positioning. Also apply these steps to any conventional indoor blower unit that creates a static pressure within the receiving chamber of the airflow measuring apparatus that exceeds the test room ambient pressure by more than 0.5 inches of water column.
2.5.5 Dry bulb temperature measurement. a. Measure dry bulb temperatures as specified in sections 4, 5, 6.1-6.10, 9, 10, and 11 of ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). The transient testing requirements cited in section 4.3 of ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) apply if conducting a cyclic or frost accumulation test.
b. Distribute the sensors of a dry-bulb temperature grid over the entire flow area. The required minimum is 9 sensors per grid.
2.5.6 Water vapor content measurement. Determine water vapor content by measuring dry-bulb temperature combined with the air wet-bulb temperature, dew point temperature, or relative humidity. If used, construct and apply wet-bulb temperature sensors as specified in sections 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, and 11 of ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). As specified in ASHRAE 41.1-86 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22), the temperature sensor (wick removed) must be accurate to within 0.2 [deg]F. If used, apply dew point hygrometers as specified in sections 5 and 8 of ASHRAE Standard 41.6-94 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). The dew point hygrometers must be accurate to within 0.4 [deg]F when operated at conditions that result in the evaluation of dew points above 35 [deg]F. If used, a relative humidity (RH) meter must be accurate to within 0.7% RH. Other means to determine the psychrometric state of air may be used as long as the measurement accuracy is equivalent to or better than the accuracy achieved from using a wet-bulb temperature sensor that meets the above specifications.
2.5.7 Air damper box performance requirements. If used (see section 2.5), the air damper box(es) must be capable of being completely opened or completely closed within 10 seconds for each action.
2.6 Airflow measuring apparatus. a. Fabricate and operate an Air Flow Measuring Apparatus as specified in section 6.6 of ASHRAE Standard 116-95 (RA05) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). Refer to Figure 12 of ASHRAE Standard 51-99/AMCA Standard 210-99 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) or Figure 14 of ASHRAE Standard 41.2-87 (RA 92) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) for guidance on placing the static pressure taps and positioning the diffusion baffle (settling means) relative to the chamber inlet.
b. Connect the airflow measuring apparatus to the interconnecting duct section described in section 2.5.4. See sections 6.1.1, 6.1.2, and 6.1.4, and Figures 1, 2, and 4 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22), and Figures D1, D2, and D4 of ARI Standard 210/240-2006 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) for illustrative examples of how the test apparatus may be applied within a complete laboratory set-up. Instead of following one of these examples, an alternative set-up may be used to handle the air leaving the airflow measuring apparatus and to supply properly conditioned air to the test unit's inlet. The alternative set-up, however, must not interfere with the prescribed means for measuring airflow rate, inlet and outlet air temperatures, inlet and outlet water vapor contents, and external static pressures, nor create abnormal conditions surrounding the test unit. (Note: Do not use an enclosure as described in section 6.1.3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) when testing triple-split units.)
2.7 Electrical voltage supply. Perform all tests at the voltage specified in section 6.1.3.2 of ARI Standard 210/240-2006 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) for ``Standard Rating Tests.'' Measure the supply voltage at the terminals on the test unit using a volt meter that provides a reading that is accurate to within 1.0 percent of the measured quantity.
2.8 Electrical power and energy measurements. a. Use an integrating power (watt-hour) measuring system to determine the electrical energy or average electrical power supplied to all components of the air conditioner or heat pump (including auxiliary components such as controls, transformers, crankcase heater, integral condensate pump on non-ducted indoor units, etc.). The watt-hour measuring system must give readings that are accurate to within 0.5 percent. For cyclic tests, this accuracy is required during both the ON and OFF cycles. Use either two different scales on the same watt-hour meter or two separate watt-hour meters. Activate the scale or meter having the lower power rating within 15 seconds after beginning an OFF cycle. Activate the scale or meter having the higher power rating active within 15 seconds prior to beginning an ON cycle. For ducted units tested with a fan installed, the ON cycle lasts from compressor ON to indoor fan OFF. For ducted units tested without an indoor fan installed, the ON cycle lasts from compressor ON to compressor OFF. For non-ducted units, the ON cycle lasts from indoor fan ON to indoor fan OFF. When testing air conditioners and heat pumps having a variable-speed compressor, avoid using an induction watt/watt-hour meter.
b. When performing section 3.5 and/or 3.8 cyclic tests on non-ducted units, provide instrumentation to determine the average electrical power consumption of the indoor fan motor to within 1.0 percent. If required according to sections 3.3, 3.4, 3.7, 3.9.1, and/or 3.10, this same instrumentation requirement applies when testing air conditioners and heat pumps having a variable-speed constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan or a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan.
2.9 Time measurements. Make elapsed time measurements using an instrument that yields readings accurate to within 0.2 percent.
2.10 Test apparatus for the secondary space conditioning capacity measurement. For all tests, use the Indoor Air Enthalpy Method to measure the unit's capacity. This method uses the test set-up specified in sections 2.4 to 2.6. In addition, for all steady-state tests, conduct a second, independent measurement of capacity as described in section 3.1.1. For split systems, use one of the following secondary measurement methods: Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method, Compressor Calibration Method, or Refrigerant Enthalpy Method. For single packaged units, use either the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method or the Compressor Calibration Method as the secondary measurement.
2.10.1 Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method. a. To make a secondary measurement of indoor space conditioning capacity using the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method, do the following:
(1) Measure the electrical power consumption of the test unit;
(2) Measure the air-side capacity at the outdoor coil; and
(3) Apply a heat balance on the refrigerant cycle.
b. The test apparatus required for the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method is a subset of the apparatus used for the Indoor Air Enthalpy Method. Required apparatus includes the following:
(1) An outlet plenum containing static pressure taps (sections 2.4, 2.4.1, and 2.5.3),
(2) An airflow measuring apparatus (section 2.6),
(3) A duct section that connects these two components and itself contains the instrumentation for measuring the dry-bulb temperature and water vapor content of the air leaving the outdoor coil (sections 2.5.4, 2.5.5, and 2.5.6), and
(4) On the inlet side, a sampling device and optional temperature grid (sections 2.5 and 2.5.2).
c. During the preliminary tests described in sections 3.11.1 and 3.11.1.1, measure the evaporator and condenser temperatures or pressures. On both the outdoor coil and the indoor coil, solder a thermocouple onto a return bend located at or near the midpoint of each coil or at points not affected by vapor superheat or liquid subcooling. Alternatively, if the test unit is not sensitive to the refrigerant charge, connect pressure gages to the access valves or to ports created from tapping into the suction and discharge lines. Use this alternative approach when testing a unit charged with a zeotropic refrigerant having a temperature glide in excess of 1 [deg]F at the specified test conditions.
2.10.2 Compressor Calibration Method. Measure refrigerant pressures and temperatures to determine the evaporator superheat and the enthalpy of the refrigerant that enters and exits the indoor coil. Determine refrigerant flow rate or, when the superheat of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator is less than 5 [deg]F, total capacity from separate calibration tests conducted under identical operating conditions. When using this method, install instrumentation, measure refrigerant properties, and adjust the refrigerant charge according to section 7.4.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). Use refrigerant temperature and pressure measuring instruments that meet the specifications given in sections 5.1.1 and 5.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22).
2.10.3 Refrigerant Enthalpy Method. For this method, calculate space conditioning capacity by determining the refrigerant enthalpy change for the indoor coil and directly measuring the refrigerant flow rate. Use section 7.5.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) for the requirements for this method, including the additional instrumentation requirements, and information on placing the flow meter and a sight glass. Use refrigerant temperature, pressure, and flow measuring instruments that meet the specifications given in sections 5.1.1, 5.2, and 5.5.1 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22).
2.11 Measurement of test room ambient conditions. a. If using a test set-up where air is ducted directly from the conditioning apparatus to the indoor coil inlet (see Figure 2, Loop Air-Enthalpy Test Method Arrangement, of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22)), add instrumentation to permit measurement of the indoor test room dry-bulb temperature.
b. If the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method is not used, add instrumentation to measure the dry-bulb temperature and the water vapor content of the air entering the outdoor coil. If an air sampling device is used, construct and apply the device as per section 6 of ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). Take steps (e.g., add or re-position a lab circulating fan), as needed, to minimize the magnitude of the temperature distribution non-uniformity. Position any fan in the outdoor test room while trying to keep air velocities in the vicinity of the test unit below 500 feet per minute.
c. Measure dry bulb temperatures as specified in sections 4, 5, 6.1-6.10, 9, 10, and 11 of ASHRAE Standard 41.1-86 (RA 01) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). Measure water vapor content as stated above in section 2.5.6.
2.12 Measurement of indoor fan speed. When required, measure fan speed using a revolution counter, tachometer, or stroboscope that gives readings accurate to within 1.0 percent.
2.13 Measurement of barometric pressure. Determine the average barometric pressure during each test. Use an instrument that meets the requirements specified in section 5.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22).
3. Testing Procedures
3.1 General Requirements. If, during the testing process, an equipment set-up adjustment is made that would alter the performance of the unit when conducting an already completed test, then repeat all tests affected by the adjustment. For cyclic tests, instead of maintaining an air volume rate, for each airflow nozzle, maintain the static pressure difference or velocity pressure during an ON period at the same pressure difference or velocity pressure as measured during the steady-state test conducted at the same test conditions.
3.1.1 Primary and secondary test methods. For all tests, use the Indoor Air Enthalpy Method test apparatus to determine the unit's space conditioning capacity. The procedure and data collected, however, differ slightly depending upon whether the test is a steady-state test, a cyclic test, or a frost accumulation test. The following sections described these differences. For all steady-state tests (i.e., the A, A2, A1, B, B2, B1, C, C1, EV, F1, G1, H01, H1, H12, H11, HIN, H3, H32, and H31 Tests), in addition, use one of the acceptable secondary methods specified in section 2.10 to determine indoor space conditioning capacity. Calculate this secondary check of capacity according to section 3.11. The two capacity measurements must agree to within 6 percent to constitute a valid test. For this capacity comparison, use the Indoor Air Enthalpy Method capacity that is calculated in section 7.3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) (and, if testing a coil-only unit, do not make the after-test fan heat adjustments described in section 3.3, 3.4, 3.7, and 3.10 of this appendix). However, include the appropriate section 3.3 to 3.5 and 3.7 to 3.10 fan heat adjustments within the Indoor Air Enthalpy Method capacities used for the section 4 seasonal calculations.
3.1.2 Manufacturer-provided equipment overrides. Where needed, the manufacturer must provide a means for overriding the controls of the test unit so that the compressor(s) operates at the specified speed or capacity and the indoor fan operates at the specified speed or delivers the specified air volume rate.
3.1.3 Airflow through the outdoor coil. For all tests, meet the requirements given in section 6.1.3.4 of ARI Standard 210/240-2006(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) when obtaining the airflow through the outdoor coil.
3.1.4 Airflow through the indoor coil.
3.1.4.1 Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.1.1 Cooling Full-Load Air Volume Rate for Ducted Units. The manufacturer must specify the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate. Use this value as long as the following two requirements are satisfied. First, when conducting the A or A2 Test (exclusively), the measured air volume rate, when divided by the measured indoor air-side total cooling capacity must not exceed 37.5 cubic feet per minute of standard air (scfm) per 1000 Btu/h. If this ratio is exceeded, reduce the air volume rate until this ratio is equaled. Use this reduced air volume rate for all tests that call for using the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate. The second requirement is as follows:
a. For all ducted units tested with an indoor fan installed, except those having a variable-speed, constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan. The second requirement applies exclusively to the A or A2 Test and is met as follows.
1. Achieve the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate, determined in accordance with the previous paragraph;
2. Measure the external static pressure;
3. If this pressure is equal to or greater than the applicable minimum external static pressure cited in Table 2, this second requirement is satisfied. Use the current air volume rate for all tests that require the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate.
4. If the Table 2 minimum is not equaled or exceeded,
4a. reduce the air volume rate until the applicable Table 2 minimum is equaled or
4b. until the measured air volume rate equals 95 percent of the air volume rate from step 1, whichever occurs first.
5. If the conditions of step 4a occur first, this second requirement is satisfied. Use the step 4a reduced air volume rate for all tests that require the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate.
6. If the conditions of step 4b occur first, make an incremental change to the set-up of the indoor fan (e.g., next highest fan motor pin setting, next highest fan motor speed) and repeat the evaluation process beginning at above step 1. If the indoor fan set-up cannot be further changed, reduce the air volume rate until the applicable Table 2 minimum is equaled. Use this reduced air volume rate for all tests that require the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate.
b. For ducted units that are tested with a variable-speed, constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed.For all tests that specify the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate, obtain an external static pressure as close to (but not less than) the applicable Table 2 value that does not cause instability or an automatic shutdown of the indoor blower.
c. For ducted units that are tested without an indoor fan installed. For the A or A2 Test, (exclusively), the pressure drop across the indoor coil assembly must not exceed 0.30 inches of water. If this pressure drop is exceeded, reduce the air volume rate until the measured pressure drop equals the specified maximum. Use this reduced air volume rate for all tests that require the Cooling Full-loadAir Volume Rate. Table 2--Minimum External Static Pressure for Ducted Systems Tested With
an Indoor Fan Installed------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum external resistance \3\
(Inches of water)
Rated Cooling \1\ or Heating \2\ -----------------------------------
Capacity (Btu/h) Small-duct, high-
All other velocity systems
systems \4 5\------------------------------------------------------------------------Up Thru 28,800...................... 0.10 1.1029,000 to 42,500.................... 0.15 1.1543,000 and Above.................... 0.20 1.20------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ For air conditioners and heat pumps, the value cited by the
manufacturer in published literature for the unit's capacity when
operated at the A or A2 Test conditions.\2\ For heating-only heat pumps, the value the manufacturer cites in
published literature for the unit's capacity when operated at the H1
or H12 Test conditions.\3\ For ducted units tested without an air filter installed, increase
the applicable tabular value by 0.08 inch of water.\4\ See Definition 1.35 to determine if the equipment qualifies as a
small-duct, high-velocity system.\5\ If a closed-loop, air-enthalpy test apparatus is used on the indoor
side, limit the resistance to airflow on the inlet side of the indoor
blower coil to a maximum value of 0.1 inch of water. Impose the
balance of the airflow resistance on the outlet side of the indoor
blower.
3.1.4.1.2 Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate for Non-ducted Units. For non-ducted units, the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate is the air volume rate that results during each test when the unit is operated at an external static pressure of zero inches of water.
3.1.4.2 Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate. a. For ducted units that regulate the speed (as opposed to the cfm) of the indoor fan,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.065 where ``Cooling Minimum Fan Speed'' corresponds to the fan speed used when operating at low compressor capacity (two-capacity system), the fan speed used when operating at the minimum compressor speed (variable-speed system), or the lowest fan speed used when cooling (single-speed compressor and a variable-speed variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan). For such systems, obtain the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate regardless of the external static pressure.
b. For ducted units that regulate the air volume rate provided by the indoor fan, the manufacturer must specify the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate. For such systems, conduct all tests that specify the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate--(i.e., the A1, B1, C1, F1, and G1 Tests)--at an external static pressure that does not cause instability or an automatic shutdown of the indoor blower while being as close to, but not less than,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.066 where [Delta]Pst,A2 is the applicable Table 2 minimum external static pressure that was targeted during the A2 (and B2) Test.
c. For ducted two-capacity units that are tested without an indoor fan installed, the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate is the higher of (1) the rate specified by the manufacturer or (2) 75 percent of the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate. During the laboratory tests on a coil-only (fanless) unit, obtain this Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate regardless of the pressure drop across the indoor coil assembly.
d. For non-ducted units, the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate is the air volume rate that results during each test when the unit operates at an external static pressure of zero inches of water and at the indoor fan setting used at low compressor capacity (two-capacity system) or minimum compressor speed (variable-speed system). For units having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan, use the lowest fan setting allowed for cooling.
3.1.4.3 Cooling Intermediate Air Volume Rate. a. For ducted units that regulate the speed of the indoor fan,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.067 For such units, obtain the Cooling Intermediate Air Volume Rate regardless of the external static pressure.
b. For ducted units that regulate the air volume rate provided by the indoor fan, the manufacturer must specify the Cooling Intermediate Air Volume Rate. For such systems, conduct the EV Test at an external static pressure that does not cause instability or an automatic shutdown of the indoor blower while being as close to, but not less than,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.068 where [Delta]Pst,A2 is the applicable Table 2 minimum external static pressure that was targeted during the A2 (and B2) Test.
c. For non-ducted units, the Cooling Intermediate Air Volume Rate is the air volume rate that results when the unit operates at an external static pressure of zero inches of water and at the fan speed selected by the controls of the unit for the EV Test conditions.
3.1.4.4 Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.4.1 Ducted heat pumps where the Heating and Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rates are the same. a. Use the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate as the Heating Full-loadAir Volume Rate for:
1. Ducted heat pumps that operate at the same indoor fan speed during both the A (or A2) and the H1 (or H12) Tests;
2. Ducted heat pumps that regulate fan speed to deliver the same constant air volume rate during both the A (or A2) and the H1 (or H12) Tests; and
3. Ducted heat pumps that are tested without an indoor fan installed (except two-capacity northern heat pumps that are tested only at low capacity cooling--see 3.1.4.4.2). b. For heat pumps that meet the above criteria ``1'' and ``3,'' no minimum requirements apply to the measured external or internal, respectively, static pressure. For heat pumps that meet the above criterion ``2,'' test at an external static pressure that does not cause instability or an automatic shutdown of the indoor blower while being as close to, but not less than, the same Table 2 minimum external static pressure as was specified for the A (or A2) cooling mode test.
3.1.4.4.2 Ducted heat pumps where the Heating and Cooling Full-loadAir Volume Rates are different due to indoor fan operation. a. For ducted heat pumps that regulate the speed (as opposed to the cfm) of the indoor fan,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.069 For such heat pumps, obtain the Heating Full-loadAir Volume Rate without regard to the external static pressure.
b. For ducted heat pumps that regulate the air volume rate delivered by the indoor fan, the manufacturer must specify the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate. For such heat pumps, conduct all tests that specify the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate at an external static pressure that does not cause instability or an automatic shutdown of the indoor blower while being as close to, but not less than,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.070 where the Cooling Certified [Delta]Pst is the applicable Table 2 minimum external static pressure that was specified for the A or A2 Test.
c. When testing ducted, two-capacity northern heat pumps (see Definition 1.46), use the appropriate approach of the above two cases for units that are tested with an indoor fan installed. For coil-only (fanless) northern heat pumps, the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate is the lesser of the rate specified by the manufacturer or 133 percent of the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate. For this latter case, obtain the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate regardless of the pressure drop across the indoor coil assembly.
3.1.4.4.3 Ducted heating-only heat pumps. The manufacturer must specify the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate.
a. For all ducted heating-only heat pumps tested with an indoor fan installed, except those having a variable-speed, constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan. Conduct the following steps only during the first test, the H1 or H12 Test.
1. Achieve the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate.
2. Measure the external static pressure.
3. If this pressure is equal to or greater than the Table 2 minimum external static pressure that applies given the heating-only heat pump's rated heating capacity, use the current air volume rate for all tests that require the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate.
4. If the Table 2 minimum is not equaled or exceeded,
4a. reduce the air volume rate until the applicable Table 2 minimum is equaled or
4b. until the measured air volume rate equals 95 percent of the manufacturer-specified Full-load Air Volume Rate, whichever occurs first.
5. If the conditions of step 4a occurs first, use the step 4a reduced air volume rate for all tests that require the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate.
6. If the conditions of step 4b occur first, make an incremental change to the set-up of the indoor fan (e.g., next highest fan motor pin setting, next highest fan motor speed) and repeat the evaluation process beginning at above step 1. If the indoor fan set-up cannot be further changed, reduce the air volume rate until the applicable Table 2 minimum is equaled. Use this reduced air volume rate for all tests that require the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate.
b. For ducted heating-only heat pumps that are tested with a variable-speed, constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed. For all tests that specify the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate, obtain an external static pressure that does not cause instability or an automatic shutdown of the indoor blower while being as close to, but not less than, the applicable Table 2 minimum.
c. For ducted heating-only heat pumps that are tested without an indoor fan installed. For the H1 or H12 Test, (exclusively), the pressure drop across the indoor coil assembly must not exceed 0.30 inches of water. If this pressure drop is exceeded, reduce the air volume rate until the measured pressure drop equals the specified maximum. Use this reduced air volume rate for all tests that require the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate.
3.1.4.4.4 Non-ducted heat pumps, including non-ducted heating-only heat pumps. For non-ducted heat pumps, the Heating Full-loadAir Volume Rate is the air volume rate that results during each test when the unit operates at an external static pressure of zero inches of water.
3.1.4.5 Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate. a. For ducted heat pumps that regulate the speed (as opposed to the cfm) of the indoor fan,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.071 where ``Heating Minimum Fan Speed'' corresponds to the fan speed used when operating at low compressor capacity (two-capacity system), the lowest fan speed used at any time when operating at the minimum compressor speed (variable-speed system), or the lowest fan speed used when heating (single-speed compressor and a variable-speed variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan). For such heat pumps, obtain the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate without regard to the external static pressure.
b. For ducted heat pumps that regulate the air volume rate delivered by the indoor fan, the manufacturer must specify the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate. For such heat pumps, conduct all tests that specify the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate--(i.e., the H01, H11, H21, and H31 Tests)--at an external static pressure that does not cause instability or an automatic shutdown of the indoor blower while being as close to, but not less than,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.072 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.161 is the minimum external static pressure that was targeted during the H12 Test.
c. For ducted two-capacity northern heat pumps that are tested with an indoor fan installed, use the appropriate approach of the above two cases.
d. For ducted two-capacity heat pumps that are tested without an indoor fan installed, use the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate as the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate. For ducted two-capacity northern heat pumps that are tested without an indoor fan installed, use the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate as the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate. For ducted two-capacity heating-only heat pumps that are tested without an indoor fan installed, the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate is the higher of the rate specified by the manufacturer or 75 percent of the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate. During the laboratory tests on a coil-only (fanless) unit, obtain the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate without regard to the pressure drop across the indoor coil assembly.
e. For non-ducted heat pumps, the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate is the air volume rate that results during each test when the unit operates at an external static pressure of zero inches of water and at the indoor fan setting used at low compressor capacity (two-capacity system) or minimum compressor speed (variable-speed system). For units having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan, use the lowest fan setting allowed for heating.
3.1.4.6 Heating Intermediate Air Volume Rate. a. For ducted heat pumps that regulate the speed of the indoor fan,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.073
For such heat pumps, obtain the Heating Intermediate Air Volume Rate without regard to the external static pressure.
b. For ducted heat pumps that regulate the air volume rate delivered by the indoor fan, the manufacturer must specify the Heating Intermediate Air Volume Rate. For such heat pumps, conduct the H2V Test at an external static pressure that does not cause instability or an automatic shutdown of the indoor blower while being as close to, but not less than,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.074 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.162 is the minimum external static pressure that was specified for the H12 Test.
c. For non-ducted heat pumps, the Heating Intermediate Air Volume Rate is the air volume rate that results when the heat pump operates at an external static pressure of zero inches of water and at the fan speed selected by the controls of the unit for the H2V Test conditions.
3.1.4.7 Heating Nominal Air Volume Rate. Except for the noted changes, determine the Heating Nominal Air Volume Rate using the approach described in section 3.1.4.6. Required changes include substituting ``H1N Test'' for H2V Test'' within the first section 3.1.4.6 equation, substituting ``H1N Test [Delta]Pst'' for ``H2V Test [Delta]Pst'' in the second section 3.1.4.6 equation, substituting ``H1N Test'' for each ``H2V Test'', and substituting ``Heating Nominal Air Volume Rate'' for each ``Heating Intermediate Air Volume Rate.''[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.075 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.076
3.1.5 Indoor test room requirement when the air surrounding the indoor unit is not supplied from the same source as the air entering the indoor unit. If using a test set-up where air is ducted directly from the air reconditioning apparatus to the indoor coil inlet (see Figure 2, Loop Air-Enthalpy Test Method Arrangement, of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22), maintain the dry bulb temperature within the test room within 5.0 [deg]F of the applicable sections 3.2 and 3.6 dry bulb temperature test condition for the air entering the indoor unit.
3.1.6 Air volume rate calculations. For all steady-state tests and for frost accumulation (H2, H21, H22, H2V) tests, calculate the air volume rate through the indoor coil as specified in sections 7.7.2.1 and 7.7.2.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). When using the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method, follow sections 7.7.2.1 and 7.7.2.2 to calculate the air volume rate through the outdoor coil. To express air volume rates in terms of standard air, use:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.013 where, VVs = air volume rate of standard (dry) air, (ft\3\/
min)daVVmx = air volume rate of the air-water vapor mixture,
(ft\3\/min)mxvn[min] = specific volume of air-water vapor mixture at the
nozzle, ft\3\ per lbm of the air-water vapor mixtureWn = humidity ratio at the nozzle, lbm of water vapor per lbm
of dry air0.075 = the density associated with standard (dry) air, (lbm/ft\3\)vn = specific volume of the dry air portion of the mixture
evaluated at the dry-bulb temperature, vapor content, and
barometric pressure existing at the nozzle, ft\3\ per lbm of
dry air. (Note: In the first printing of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005, the second IP equation for Qmi should read,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.077
3.1.7 Test sequence. When testing a ducted unit (except if a heating-only heat pump), conduct the A or A2 Test first to establish the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate. For ducted heat pumps where the Heating and Cooling Full-loadAir Volume Rates are different, make the first heating mode test one that requires the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate. For ducted heating-only heat pumps, conduct the H1 or H12 Test first to establish the Heating Full-load Air Volume Rate. When conducting an optional cyclic test, always conduct it immediately after the steady-state test that requires the same test conditions. For variable-speed systems, the first test using the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate should precede the EV Test if one expects to adjust the indoor fan control options when preparing for the first Minimum Air Volume Rate test. Under the same circumstances, the first test using the Heating Minimum Air Volume Rate should precede the H2V Test. The test laboratory makes all other decisions on the test sequence.
3.1.8 Requirement for the air temperature distribution leaving the indoor coil. For at least the first cooling mode test and the first heating mode test, monitor the temperature distribution of the air leaving the indoor coil using the grid of individual sensors described in sections 2.5 and 2.5.4. For the 30-minute data collection interval used to determine capacity, the maximum spread among the outlet dry bulb temperatures from any data sampling must not exceed 1.5 [deg]F. Install the mixing devices described in section 2.5.4.2 to minimize the temperature spread.
3.1.9 Control of auxiliary resistive heating elements. Except as noted, disable heat pump resistance elements used for heating indoor air at all times, including during defrost cycles and if they are normally regulated by a heat comfort controller. For heat pumps equipped with a heat comfort controller, enable the heat pump resistance elements only during the below-described, short test. For single-speed heat pumps covered under section 3.6.1, the short test follows the H1 or, if conducted, the H1C Test. For two-capacity heat pumps and heat pumps covered under section 3.6.2, the short test follows the H12 Test. Set the heat comfort controller to provide the maximum supply air temperature. With the heat pump operating and while maintaining the Heating Full-loadAir Volume Rate, measure the temperature of the air leaving the indoor-side beginning 5 minutes after activating the heat comfort controller. Sample the outlet dry-bulb temperature at regular intervals that span 5 minutes or less. Collect data for 10 minutes, obtaining at least 3 samples. Calculate the average outlet temperature over the 10-minute interval, TCC.
3.2 Cooling mode tests for different types of air conditioners and heat pumps.
3.2.1 Tests for a unit having a single-speed compressor that is tested with a fixed-speed indoor fan installed, with a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed. Conduct two steady-state wet coil tests, the A and B Tests. Use the two optional dry-coil tests, the steady-state C Test and the cyclic D Test, to determine the cooling mode cyclic degradation coefficient, CD\c\. If the two optional tests are conducted but yield a tested CD\c\ that exceeds the default CD\c\ or if the two optional tests are not conducted, assign CD\c\ the default value of 0.25. Table 3 specifies test conditions for these four tests. Table 3--Cooling Mode Test Conditions for Units Having a Single-Speed Compressor and a Fixed-Speed Indoor Fan, a
Constant Air Volume Rate Indoor Fan, or No Indoor Fan----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Air entering indoor Air entering outdoor
unit temperature unit temperature
Test description ([deg]F) ([deg]F) Cooling air volume rate
--------------------------------------------
Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------A Test--required (steady, wet coil) 80 67 95 \1\ 75 Cooling full-load \2\B Test--required (steady, wet coil) 80 67 82 \1\ 65 Cooling full-load \2\C Test--optional (steady, dry coil) 80 (\3\) 82 ......... Cooling full-load \2\D Test--optional (cyclic, dry coil) 80 (\3\) 82 ......... (\4\)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ The specified test condition only applies if the unit rejects condensate to the outdoor coil.\2\ Defined in section 3.1.4.1.\3\ The entering air must have a low enough moisture content so no condensate forms on the indoor coil. (It is
recommended that an indoor wet-bulb temperature of 57 [deg]F or less be used.)\4\ Maintain the airflow nozzles static pressure difference or velocity pressure during the ON period at the
same pressure difference or velocity pressure as measured during the C Test.
3.2.2 Tests for a unit having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed.
3.2.2.1 Indoor fan capacity modulation that correlates with the outdoor dry bulb temperature. Conduct four steady-state wet coil tests: The A2, A1 , B2, and B1 Tests. Use the two optional dry-coil tests, the steady-state C1 Test and the cyclic D1 Test, to determine the cooling mode cyclic degradation coefficient, CD\c\. If the two optional tests are conducted but yield a tested CD\c\ that exceeds the default CD\c\ or if the two optional tests are not conducted, assign CD\c\ the default value of 0.25
3.2.2.2 Indoor fan capacity modulation based on adjusting the sensible to total (S/T) cooling capacity ratio. The testing requirements are the same as specified in section 3.2.1 and Table 3. Use a Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate that represents a normal residential installation. If performed, conduct the steady-state C Test and the cyclic D Test with the unit operating in the same S/T capacity control mode as used for the B Test.
Table 4--Cooling Mode Test Conditions for Units Having a Single-Speed Compressor and a Variable Air Volume Rate
Indoor Fan That correlates With the Outdoor Dry Bulb Temperature (Sec. 3.2.2.1)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Air entering indoor Air entering outdoor
unit temperature unit temperature
Test description ([deg]F) ([deg]F) Cooling air volume rate
------------------------------------------------
Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------A2 Test--required (steady, wet 80 67 95 \1\ 75 Cooling full-load \2\
coil).A1 Test--required (steady, wet 80 67 95 \1\ 75 Cooling minimum \3\
coil).B2 Test--required (steady, wet 80 67 82 \1\ 65 Cooling full-load \2\
coil).B1 Test--required (steady, wet 80 67 82 \1\ 65 Cooling minimum \3\
coil).C1 Test \4\--optional (steady, 80 (\4\) 82 .......... Cooling minimum \3\
dry coil).D1 Test \4\--optional (cyclic, 80 (\4\) 82 (\5\)
dry coil).----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ The specified test condition only applies if the unit rejects condensate to the outdoor coil.\2\ Defined in section 3.1.4.1.\3\ Defined in section 3.1.4.2.\4\ The entering air must have a low enough moisture content so no condensate forms on the indoor coil. (It is
recommended that an indoor wet-bulb temperature of 57 [deg]F or less be used.)\5\ Maintain the airflow nozzles static pressure difference or velocity pressure during the ON period at the
same pressure difference or velocity pressure as measured during the C1 Test.
3.2.3 Tests for a unit having a two-capacity compressor. (See Definition 1.45.) a. Conduct four steady-state wet coil tests: the A2, B2, B1, and F1 Tests. Use the two optional dry-coil tests, the steady-state C1 Test and the cyclic D1 Test, to determine the cooling-mode cyclic-degradation coefficient, CD\c\. If the two optional tests are conducted but yield a tested CD\c\ that exceeds the default CD\c\ or if the two optional tests are not conducted, assign CD\c\ the default value of 0.25. Table 5 specifies test conditions for these six tests.
b. For units having a variable speed indoor fan that is modulated to adjust the sensible to total (S/T) cooling capacity ratio, use Cooling Full-load and Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rates that represent a normal residential installation. Additionally, if conducting the optional dry-coil tests, operate the unit in the same S/T capacity control mode as used for the B1 Test.
c. Test two-capacity, northern heat pumps (see Definition 1.46) in the same way as a single speed heat pump with the unit operating exclusively at low compressor capacity (see section 3.2.1 and Table 3).
d. If a two-capacity air conditioner or heat pump locks out low-capacity operation at higher outdoor temperatures, then use the two optional dry-coil tests, the steady-state C2 Test and the cyclic D2 Test, to determine the cooling-mode cyclic-degradation coefficient that only applies to on/off cycling from high capacity, CD\c\(k=2). If the two optional tests are conducted but yield a tested CD\c\(k=2) that exceeds the default CD\c\(k=2) or if the two optional tests are not conducted, assign CD\c\(k=2) the default value. The default CD\c\(k=2) is the same value as determined or assigned for the low-capacity cyclic-degradation coefficient, CD\c\ [or equivalently, CD\c\(k=1)].
Table 5--Cooling Mode Test Conditions for Units Having a Two-Capacity Compressor--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Air entering indoor Air entering outdoor
unit temperature unit temperature
Test description ([deg]F) ([deg]F) Compressor capacity Cooling air volume rate
----------------------------------------------
Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------A2 Test--required...................... 80 67 95 \1\ 75 High........................... Cooling Full-Load. \2\(steady, wet coil).....................B2 Test--required...................... 80 67 82 \1\ 65 High........................... Cooling Full-Load. \2\(steady, wet coil).....................B1 Test--required...................... 80 67 82 \1\ 65 Low............................ Cooling Minimum. \3\(steady, wet coil).....................C2 Test--optional...................... 80 (\4\) 82 High Cooling Full-Load. \2\.........(steady, dry-coil).....................D2 Test--optional...................... 80 (\4\) 82 High (\5\)..........................(cyclic, dry-coil).....................
C1 Test--optional...................... 80 (\4\) 82 Low Cooling Minimum. \3\...........(steady, dry-coil).....................D1 Test--optional...................... 80 (\4\) 82 Low (\6\)..........................(cyclic, dry-coil).....................F1 Test--required...................... 80 67 67 \1\ 53.5 Low............................ Cooling Minimum. \3\(steady, wet coil).....................--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ The specified test condition only applies if the unit rejects condensate to the outdoor coil.\2\ Defined in section 3.1.4.1.\3\ Defined in section 3.1.4.2.\4\ The entering air must have a low enough moisture content so no condensate forms on the indoor coil. DOE recommends using an indoor air wet-bulb
temperature of 57 [deg]F or less.\5\ Maintain the airflow nozzle(s) static pressure difference or velocity pressure during the ON period at the same pressure or velocity as measured
during the C2 Test.\6\ Maintain the airflow nozzle(s) static pressure difference or velocity pressure during the ON period at the same pressure or velocity as measured
during the C1 Test.
3.2.4 Tests for a unit having a variable-speed compressor. a. Conduct five steady-state wet coil tests: The A2, EV, B2, B1, and F1 Tests. Use the two optional dry-coil tests, the steady-state G1 Test and the cyclic I1 Test, to determine the cooling mode cyclic degradation coefficient,CD\c\. If the two optional tests are conducted but yield a tested CD\c\ that exceeds the default CD\c\ or if the two optional tests are not conducted, assign CD\c\ the default value of 0.25.Table 6 specifies test conditions for these seven tests. Determine the intermediate compressor speed cited in Table 6 using:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.014 where a tolerance of plus 5 percent or the next higher inverter frequency step from that calculated is allowed.
b. For units that modulate the indoor fan speed to adjust the sensible to total (S/T) cooling capacity ratio, use Cooling Full-load, Cooling Intermediate, and Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rates that represent a normal residential installation. Additionally, if conducting the optional dry-coil tests, operate the unit in the same S/T capacity control mode as used for the F1 Test.
c. For multiple-split air conditioners and heat pumps (except where noted), the following procedures supersede the above requirements: For all Table 6 tests specified for a minimum compressor speed, at least one indoor unit must be turned off. The manufacturer shall designate the particular indoor unit(s) that is turned off. The manufacturer must also specify the compressor speed used for the Table 6 EV Test, a cooling-mode intermediate compressor speed that falls within \1/4\ and \3/4\ of the difference between the maximum and minimum cooling-mode speeds. The manufacturer should prescribe an intermediate speed that is expected to yield the highest EER for the given EV Test conditions and bracketed compressor speed range. The manufacturer can designate that one or more indoor units are turned off for the EV Test.
Table 6--Cooling Mode Test Condition for Units Having a Variable-Speed Compressor--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Air entering indoor Air entering outdoor
unit temperature unit temperature
Test description ([deg]F) ([deg]F) Compressor speed Cooling air volume rate
----------------------------------------------
Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------A2 Test--required...................... 80 67 95 \1\ 75 Maximum........................ Cooling Full-Load \2\(steady, wet coil).....................B2 Test--required...................... 80 67 82 \1\ 65 Maximum........................ Cooling Full-Load \2\(steady, wet coil).....................EV Test--required...................... 80 67 87 \1\ 69 Intermediate................... Cooling Intermediate \3\(steady, wet coil).....................
B1 Test--required...................... 80 67 82 \1\ 65 Minimum........................ Cooling Minimum \4\(steady, wet coil).....................F1 Test--required...................... 80 67 67 \1\ 53.5 Minimum........................ Cooling Minimum \4\(steady, wet coil).....................G1 Test \5\--optional.................. 80 (\6\) 67 Minimum Cooling Minimum \4\............(steady, dry-coil).....................I1 Test \5\--optional.................. 80 (\6\) 67 Minimum (\6\) .........................(cyclic, dry-coil).....................--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ The specified test condition only applies if the unit rejects condensate to the outdoor coil.\2\ Defined in section 3.1.4.1.\3\ Defined in section 3.1.4.3.\4\ Defined in section 3.1.4.2.\5\ The entering air must have a low enough moisture content so no condensate forms on the indoor coil. DOE recommends using an indoor air wet bulb
temperature of 57 [deg]F or less.\6\ Maintain the airflow nozzle(s) static pressure difference or velocity pressure during the ON period at the same pressure difference or velocity
pressure as measured during the G1 Test.
3.3 Test procedures for steady-state wet coil cooling mode tests (the A, A2, A1, B, B2, B1, EV, and F1 Tests). a. For the pretest interval, operate the test room reconditioning apparatus and the unit to be tested until maintaining equilibrium conditions for at least 30 minutes at the specified section 3.2 test conditions. Use the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus and, if installed, the indoor fan of the test unit to obtain and then maintain the indoor air volume rate and/or external static pressure specified for the particular test. Continuously record (see Definition 1.15):
(1) The dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the indoor coil,
(2) The water vapor content of the air entering the indoor coil,
(3) The dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the outdoor coil, and
(4) For the section 2.2.4 cases where its control is required, the water vapor content of the air entering the outdoor coil.
Refer to section 3.11 for additional requirements that depend on the selected secondary test method.
b. After satisfying the pretest equilibrium requirements, make the measurements specified in Table 3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) for the Indoor Air Enthalpy method and the user-selected secondary method. Except for external static pressure, make the Table 3 measurements at equal intervals that span 10 minutes or less. Measure external static pressure every 5 minutes or less. Continue data sampling until reaching a 30-minute period (e.g., four consecutive 10-minute samples) where the test tolerances specified in Table 7 are satisfied. For those continuously recorded parameters, use the entire data set from the 30-minute interval to evaluate Table 7 compliance. Determine the average electrical power consumption of the air conditioner or heat pump over the same 30-minute interval.
c. Calculate indoor-side total cooling capacity as specified in sections 7.3.3.1 and 7.3.3.3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). Do not adjust the parameters used in calculating capacity for the permitted variations in test conditions. Evaluate air enthalpies based on the measured barometric pressure. Assign the average total space cooling capacity and electrical power consumption over the 30-minute data collection interval to the variables QQc\k\(T) and EEc\k\(T), respectively. For these two variables, replace the ``T'' with the nominal outdoor temperature at which the test was conducted. The superscript k is used only when testing multi-capacity units. Use the superscript k=2 to denote a test with the unit operating at high capacity or maximum speed, k=1 to denote low capacity or minimum speed, and k=v to denote the intermediate speed.
d. For units tested without an indoor fan installed, decrease QQc\k\(T) by[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.015 and increase EEc\k\(T) by,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.016 where VVs is the average measured indoor air volume rate expressed in units of cubic feet per minute of standard air (scfm).
Table 7--Test Operating and Test Condition Tolerances for Section 3.3 Steady-State Wet Coil Cooling Mode Tests
and Section 3.4 Dry Coil Cooling Mode Tests----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Test operating tolerance Test condition tolerance
\1\ \2\----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Indoor dry-bulb, [deg]F
Entering temperature.................................. 2.0 0.5
Leaving temperature................................... 2.0Indoor wet-bulb, [deg]F
Entering temperature.................................. 1.0 \3\ 0.3
Leaving temperature................................... \3\ 1.0Outdoor dry-bulb, [deg]F
Entering temperature.................................. 2.0 0.5
Leaving temperature................................... \4\ 2.0Outdoor wet-bulb, [deg]F
Entering temperature.................................. 1.0 \5\ 0.3
Leaving temperature................................... \4\ 1.0External resistance to airflow, inches of water........... 0.05 \6\ 0.02Electrical voltage, % of rdg.............................. 2.0 1.5Nozzle pressure drop, % of rdg............................ 2.0----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ See Definition 1.41.\2\ See Definition 1.40.\3\ Only applies during wet coil tests; does not apply during steady-state, dry coil cooling mode tests.\4\ Only applies when using the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method.\5\ Only applies during wet coil cooling mode tests where the unit rejects condensate to the outdoor coil.\6\ Only applies when testing non-ducted units.
d. For air conditioners and heat pumps having a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan, the five additional steps listed below are required if the average of the measured external static pressures exceeds the applicable sections 3.1.4 minimum (or target) external static pressure ([Delta]Pmin) by 0.03 inches of water or more.
1. Measure the average power consumption of the indoor fan motor (EEfan,1) and record the corresponding external static pressure ([Delta]P1) during or immediately following the 30-minute interval used for determining capacity.
2. After completing the 30-minute interval and while maintaining the same test conditions, adjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus until the external static pressure increases to approximately [Delta]P1 + ([Delta]P1 - [Delta]Pmin).
3. After re-establishing steady readings of the fan motor power and external static pressure, determine average values for the indoor fan power (EEfan,2) and the external static pressure ([Delta]P2) by making measurements over a 5-minute interval.
4. Approximate the average power consumption of the indoor fan motor at [Delta]Pmin using linear extrapolation:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.017
5. Increase the total space cooling capacity, QQc\k\(T), by the quantity (EEfan,1 - EEfan,min), when expressed on a Btu/h basis. Decrease the total electrical power, EEc\k\(T), by the same fan power difference, now expressed in watts.
3.4 Test procedures for the optional steady-state dry-coil cooling-mode tests (the C, C1, C2, and G1 Tests).
a. Except for the modifications noted in this section, conduct the steady-state dry coil cooling mode tests as specified in section 3.3 for wet coil tests. Prior to recording data during the steady-state dry coil test, operate the unit at least one hour after achieving dry coil conditions. Drain the drain pan and plug the drain opening. Thereafter, the drain pan should remain completely dry.
b. Denote the resulting total space cooling capacity and electrical power derived from the test as QQss,dry and EEss,dry. With regard to a section 3.3 deviation, do not adjust QQss,dry for duct losses (i.e., do not apply section 7.3.3.3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22)). In preparing for the section 3.5 cyclic tests, record the average indoor-side air volume rate, VV, specific heat of the air, Cp,a (expressed on dry air basis), specific volume of the air at the nozzles, v[min]n, humidity ratio at the nozzles, Wn, and either pressure difference or velocity pressure for the flow nozzles. For units having a variable-speed indoor fan (that provides either a constant or variable air volume rate) that will or may be tested during the cyclic dry coil cooling mode test with the indoor fan turned off (see section 3.5), include the electrical power used by the indoor fan motor among the recorded parameters from the 30-minute test.
3.5 Test procedures for the optional cyclic dry-coil cooling-mode tests (the D, D1, D2, and I1 Tests). a. After completing the steady-state dry-coil test, remove the Outdoor Air Enthalpy method test apparatus, if connected, and begin manual OFF/ON cycling of the unit's compressor. The test set-up should otherwise be identical to the set-up used during the steady-state dry coil test. When testing heat pumps, leave the reversing valve during the compressor OFF cycles in the same position as used for the compressor ON cycles, unless automatically changed by the controls of the unit. For units having a variable-speed indoor fan, the manufacturer has the option of electing at the outset whether to conduct the cyclic test with the indoor fan enabled or disabled. Always revert to testing with the indoor fan disabled if cyclic testing with the fan enabled is unsuccessful.
b. For units having a single-speed or two-capacity compressor, cycle the compressor OFF for 24 minutes and then ON for 6 minutes ([Delta][tau]cyc,dry = 0.5 hours). For units having a variable-speed compressor, cycle the compressor OFF for 48 minutes and then ON for 12 minutes ([Delta][tau]cyc,dry = 1.0 hours). Repeat the OFF/ON compressor cycling pattern until the test is completed. Allow the controls of the unit to regulate cycling of the outdoor fan.
c. Sections 3.5.1 and 3.5.2 specify airflow requirements through the indoor coil of ducted and non-ducted systems, respectively. In all cases, use the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus (covered under section 2.6) along with the indoor fan of the unit, if installed and operating, to approximate a step response in the indoor coil airflow. Regulate the exhaust fan to quickly obtain and then maintain the flow nozzle static pressure difference or velocity pressure at the same value as was measured during the steady-state dry coil test. The pressure difference or velocity pressure should be within 2 percent of the value from the steady-state dry coil test within 15 seconds after airflow initiation. For units having a variable-speed indoor fan that ramps when cycling on and/or off, use the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus to impose a step response that begins at the initiation of ramp up and ends at the termination of ramp down.
d. For units having a variable-speed indoor fan, conduct the cyclic dry coil test using the pull-thru approach described below if any of the following occur when testing with the fan operating:
(1) The test unit automatically cycles off;
(2) Its blower motor reverses; or
(3) The unit operates for more than 30 seconds at an external static pressure that is 0.1 inches of water or more higher than the value measured during the prior steady-state test.
For the pull-thru approach, disable the indoor fan and use the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus to generate the specified flow nozzles static pressure difference or velocity pressure. If the exhaust fan cannot deliver the required pressure difference because of resistance created by the unpowered blower, temporarily remove the blower.
e. After completing a minimum of two complete compressor OFF/ON cycles, determine the overall cooling delivered and total electrical energy consumption during any subsequent data collection interval where the test tolerances given in Table 8 are satisfied. If available, use electric resistance heaters (see section 2.1) to minimize the variation in the inlet air temperature.
f. With regard to the Table 8 parameters, continuously record the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the indoor and outdoor coils during periods when air flows through the respective coils. Sample the water vapor content of the indoor coil inlet air at least every 2 minutes during periods when air flows through the coil. Record external static pressure and the air volume rate indicator (either nozzle pressure difference or velocity pressure) at least every minute during the interval that air flows through the indoor coil. (These regular measurements of the airflow rate indicator are in addition to the required measurement at 15 seconds after flow initiation.) Sample the electrical voltage at least every 2 minutes beginning 30 seconds after compressor start-up. Continue until the compressor, the outdoor fan, and the indoor fan (if it is installed and operating) cycle off.
g. For ducted units, continuously record the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering (as noted above) and leaving the indoor coil. Or if using a thermopile, continuously record the difference between these two temperatures during the interval that air flows through the indoor coil. For non-ducted units, make the same dry-bulb temperature measurements beginning when the compressor cycles on and ending when indoor coil airflow ceases.
h. Integrate the electrical power over complete cycles of length [Delta][tau]cyc,dry. For ducted units tested with an indoor fan installed and operating, integrate electrical power from indoor fan OFF to indoor fan OFF. For all other ducted units and for non-ducted units, integrate electrical power from compressor OFF to compressor OFF. (Some cyclic tests will use the same data collection intervals to determine the electrical energy and the total space cooling. For other units, terminate data collection used to determine the electrical energy before terminating data collection used to determine total space cooling.)
Table 8--Test Operating and Test Condition Tolerances for Cyclic Dry
Coil Cooling Mode Tests------------------------------------------------------------------------
Test Test
Operating Condition
Tolerance Tolerance
\1\ \2\------------------------------------------------------------------------Indoor entering dry-bulb temperature \3\, 2.0 0.5
[deg]F.....................................Indoor entering wet-bulb temperature, [deg]F ............ (\4\)Outdoor entering dry-bulb temperature \3\, 2.0 0.5
[deg]F.....................................External resistance to airflow \3\, inches 0.05
of water...................................Airflow nozzle pressure difference or 2.0 \5\ 2.0
velocity pressure \3\, % of reading........Electrical voltage \6\, % of rdg............ 2.0 1.5 ------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ See Definition 1.41.\2\ See Definition 1.40.\3\ Applies during the interval that air flows through the indoor
(outdoor) coil except for the first 30 seconds after flow initiation.
For units having a variable-speed indoor fan that ramps, the
tolerances listed for the external resistance to airflow apply from 30
seconds after achieving full speed until ramp down begins.\4\ Shall at no time exceed a wet-bulb temperature that results in
condensate forming on the indoor coil.\5\ The test condition shall be the average nozzle pressure difference
or velocity pressure measured during the steady-state dry coil test.\6\ Applies during the interval when at least one of the following--the
compressor, the outdoor fan, or, if applicable, the indoor fan--are
operating except for the first 30 seconds after compressor start-up.
i. If the Table 8 tolerances are satisfied over the complete cycle, record the measured electrical energy consumption as ecyc,dry and express it in units of watt-hours. Calculate the total space cooling delivered, qcyc,dry, in units of Btu using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.018 where VV, Cp,a, vn[min] (or vn), and
Wn are the values recorded during the section 3.4
dry coil steady-state test and,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.019
Tal([tau]) = dry bulb temperature of the air entering the
indoor coil at time [tau], [deg]F.Ta2([tau]) = dry bulb temperature of the air leaving the
indoor coil at time [tau], [deg]F.[tau]1 = for ducted units, the elapsed time when airflow is
initiated through the indoor coil; for non-ducted units, the
elapsed time when the compressor is cycled on, hr.[tau]2 = the elapsed time when indoor coil airflow ceases,
hr.
3.5.1 Procedures when testing ducted systems. The automatic controls that are normally installed with the test unit must govern the OFF/ON cycling of the air moving equipment on the indoor side (exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus and, if installed, the indoor fan of the test unit). For example, for ducted units tested without an indoor fan installed but rated based on using a fan time delay relay, control the indoor coil airflow according to the rated ON and/or OFF delays provided by the relay. For ducted units having a variable-speed indoor fan that has been disabled (and possibly removed), start and stop the indoor airflow at the same instances as if the fan were enabled. For all other ducted units tested without an indoor fan installed, cycle the indoor coil airflow in unison with the cycling of the compressor. Close air dampers on the inlet (section 2.5.1) and outlet side (sections 2.5 and 2.5.4) during the OFF period. Airflow through the indoor coil should stop within 3 seconds after the automatic controls of the test unit (act to) de-energize the indoor fan. For ducted units tested without an indoor fan installed (excluding the special case where a variable-speed fan is temporarily removed), increase ecyc,dry by the quantity,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.020 and decrease qcyc,dry by,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.021 where VVs is the average indoor air volume rate from the
section 3.4 dry coil steady-state test and is expressed in
units of cubic feet per minute of standard air (scfm). For
units having a variable-speed indoor fan that is disabled
during the cyclic test, increase ecyc,dry and
decrease qcyc,dry based on:
a. The product of [[tau]2 - [tau]1] and the indoor fan power measured during or following the dry coil steady-state test; or,
b. The following algorithm if the indoor fan ramps its speed when cycling.
1. Measure the electrical power consumed by the variable-speed indoor fan at a minimum of three operating conditions: at the speed/air volume rate/external static pressure that was measured during the steady-state test, at operating conditions associated with the midpoint of the ramp-up interval, and at conditions associated with the midpoint of the ramp-down interval. For these measurements, the tolerances on the airflow volume or the external static pressure are the same as required for the section 3.4 steady-state test.
2. For each case, determine the fan power from measurements made over a minimum of 5 minutes.
3. Approximate the electrical energy consumption of the indoor fan if it had operated during the cyclic test using all three power measurements. Assume a linear profile during the ramp intervals. The manufacturer must provide the durations of the ramp-up and ramp-down intervals. If a manufacturer-supplied ramp interval exceeds 45 seconds, use a 45-second ramp interval nonetheless when estimating the fan energy.
The manufacturer is allowed to choose option a, and forego the extra testing burden of option b, even if the unit ramps indoor fan speed when cycling.
3.5.2 Procedures when testing non-ducted systems. Do not use air dampers when conducting cyclic tests on non-ducted units. Until the last OFF/ON compressor cycle, airflow through the indoor coil must cycle off and on in unison with the compressor. For the last OFF/ON compressor cycle--the one used to determine ecyc,dry and qcyc,dry--use the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus and the indoor fan of the test unit to have indoor airflow start 3 minutes prior to compressor cut-on and end three minutes after compressor cutoff. Subtract the electrical energy used by the indoor fan during the 3 minutes prior to compressor cut-on from the integrated electrical energy, ecyc,dry. Add the electrical energy used by the indoor fan during the 3 minutes after compressor cutoff to the integrated cooling capacity, qcyc,dry. For the case where the non-ducted unit uses a variable-speed indoor fan which is disabled during the cyclic test, correct ecyc,dry and qcyc,dry using the same approach as prescribed in section 3.5.1 for ducted units having a disabled variable-speed indoor fan.
3.5.3 Cooling-mode cyclic-degradation coefficient calculation. Use the two optional dry-coil tests to determine the cooling-mode cyclic-degradation coefficient, CD\c\. Append ``(k=2)'' to the coefficient if it corresponds to a two-capacity unit cycling at high capacity. If the two optional tests are conducted but yield a tested CD\c\ that exceeds the default CD\c\ or if the two optional tests are not conducted, assign CD\c\ the default value of 0.25. The default value for two-capacity units cycling at high capacity, however, is the low-capacity coefficient, i.e., CD\c\(k=2) = CD\c\. Evaluate CD\c\ using the above results and those from the section 3.4 dry-coil steady-state test.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.022 where,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.023 the average energy efficiency ratio during the cyclic dry coil cooling modetest, Btu/W[middot]h[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.024 the average energy efficiency ratio during the steady-state dry coil cooling mode test, Btu/W[middot]h[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.025 the cooling load factor dimensionless.Round the calculated value for CD\c\ to the nearest 0.01. If
CD\c\ is negative, then set it equal to zero.
3.6 Heating mode tests for different types of heat pumps, including heating-only heat pumps.
3.6.1 Tests for a heat pump having a single-speed compressor that is tested with a fixed speed indoor fan installed, with a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed. Conduct the optional High Temperature Cyclic (H1C) Test to determine the heating mode cyclic-degradation coefficient, CD\h\. If this optional test is conducted but yields a tested CD\h\ that exceeds the default CD\h\ or if the optional test is not conducted, assign CD\h\ the default value of 0.25. Test conditions for the four tests are specified in Table 9. Table 9--Heating Mode Test Conditions for Units Having a Single-Speed Compressor and a Fixed-Speed Indoor Fan, a Constant Air Volume Rate Indoor Fan, or
No Indoor Fan--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Air entering indoor unit Air entering outdoor
Temperature ([deg]F) unit Temperature
Test description -------------------------- ([deg]F) Heating air volume rate
--------------------------
Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------H1 Test (required, steady)...................... 70 60(max) 47 43 Heating Full-load \1\H1C Test (optional, cyclic)..................... 70 60(max) 47 43 (\2\)H2 Test (required).............................. 70 60(max) 35 33 Heating Full-load \1\
H3 Test (required, steady)...................... 70 60(max) 17 15 Heating Full-load \1\--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ Defined in section 3.1.4.4.\2\ Maintain the airflow nozzles static pressure difference or velocity pressure during the ON period at the same pressure difference or velocity
pressure as measured during the H1 Test.
3.6.2 Tests for a heat pump having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan: capacity modulation correlates with outdoor dry bulb temperature. Conduct five tests: two High Temperature Tests (H12 and H11), one Frost Accumulation Test (H22), and two Low Temperature Tests (H32 and H31). Conducting an additional Frost Accumulation Test (H21) is optional. Conduct the optional High Temperature Cyclic (H1C1) Test to determine the heating mode cyclic-degradation coefficient, CD\h\. If this optional test is conducted but yields a tested CD\h\ that exceeds the default CD\h\ or if the optional test is not conducted, assign CD\h\ the default value of 0.25. Test conditions for the seven tests are specified in Table 10. If the optional H21 Test is not performed, use the following equations to approximate the capacity and electrical power of the heat pump at the H21 test conditions:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.026 where,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.027 The quantities QQhk=2(47), EEhk=2(47), QQhk=1(47), and EEhk=1(47) are determined from the H12 and H11 Tests and evaluated as specified in section 3.7; the quantities QQhk=2(35) and EEhk=2(35) are determined from the H22 Test and evaluated as specified in section 3.9; and the quantities QQhk=2(17), EEhk=2(17), QQhk=1(17), and EEhk=1(17), are determined from the H32 and H31 Tests and evaluated as specified in section 3.10.
Table 10--Heating Mode Test Conditions for Units Having a Single-Speed Compressor and a Variable Air Volume Rate Indoor Fan--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Air entering indoor unit temperature Air entering outdoor
([deg]F) unit temperature
Test description ---------------------------------------- ([deg]F) Heating air volume rate
--------------------------
Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------H12 Test (required, steady).............. 70 60(max).................. 47 43 Heating Full-load. \1\H11 Test (required, steady).............. 70 60(max).................. 47 43 Heating Minimum. \2\H1C1 Test (optional, cyclic)............. 70 60(max).................. 47 43 (\3\)H22 Test (required)...................... 70 60(max).................. 35 33 Heating Full-load. \1\
H21 Test (optional)...................... 70 60(max).................. 35 33 Heating Minimum. \2\H32 Test (required, steady).............. 70 60(max).................. 17 15 Heating Full-load. \1\H31 Test (required, steady).............. 70 60(max).................. 17 15 Heating Minimum. \2\--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ Defined in section 3.1.4.4.\2\ Defined in section 3.1.4.5.\3\ Maintain the airflow nozzles static pressure difference or velocity pressure during the ON period at the same pressure difference or velocity
pressure as measured during the H11 Test.
3.6.3 Tests for a heat pump having a two-capacity compressor (see Definition 1.45), including two-capacity, northern heat pumps (see Definition 1.46). a. Conduct one Maximum Temperature Test (H01), two High Temperature Tests (H12 and H11), one Frost Accumulation Test (H22), and one Low Temperature Test (H32). Conduct an additional Frost Accumulation Test (H21) and Low Temperature Test (H31) if both of the following conditions exist:
1. Knowledge of the heat pump's capacity and electrical power at low compressor capacity for outdoor temperatures of 37 [deg]F and less is needed to complete the section 4.2.3 seasonal performance calculations; and
2.The heat pump's controls allow low-capacity operation at outdoor temperatures of 37 [deg]F and less.
If the above two conditions are met, an alternative to conducting the H21 Frost Accumulation is to use the following equations to approximate the capacity and electrical power:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.078
Determine the quantities QQhk=1 (47) and EEhk=1 (47) from the H11 Test and evaluate them according to Section 3.7. Determine the quantities QQhk=1 (17) and EEhk=1 (17) from the H31 Test and evaluate them according to Section 3.10.
b. Conduct the optional High Temperature Cyclic Test (H1C1) to determine the heating-mode cyclic-degradation coefficient, CD\h\. If this optional test is conducted but yields a tested CD\h\ that exceeds the default CD\h\ or if the optional test is not conducted, assign CD\h\ the default value of 0.25. If a two-capacity heat pump locks out low capacity operation at lower outdoor temperatures, conduct the optional High Temperature Cyclic Test (H1C2) to determine the high-capacity heating-mode cyclic-degradation coefficient, CD\h\ (k=2). If this optional test at high capacity is conducted but yields a tested CD\h\ (k=2) that exceeds the default CD\h\ (k=2) or if the optional test is not conducted, assign CD\h\ the default value. The default CD\h\ (k=2) is the same value as determined or assigned for the low-capacity cyclic-degradation coefficient, CD\h\ [or equivalently, CD\h\ (k=1)]. Table 11 specifies test conditions for these nine tests.
Table 11--Heating Mode Test Conditions for Units Having a Two-Capacity Compressor--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Air entering indoor Air entering outdoor
unit temperature unit temperature
Test description ([deg]F) ([deg]F) Compressor capacity Heating air volume rate
----------------------------------------------
Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------H01 Test............................... 70 60(max) 62 56.5 Low............................ Heating Minimum. \1\(required, steady).....................H12 Test............................... 70 60(max) 47 43 High........................... Heating Full-Load. \2\(required, steady).....................H1C2 Test.............................. 70 60(max) 47 43 High........................... (\3\)(optional, cyclic).....................H11 Test............................... 70 60(max) 47 43 Low............................ Heating Minimum. \1\(required).............................
H1C1 Test.............................. 70 60(max) 47 43 Low............................ (\4\)(optional, cyclic).....................H22 Test............................... 70 60(max) 35 33 High........................... Heating Full-Load. \2\(required).............................H21 Test5 6............................ 70 60(max) 35 33 Low............................ Heating Minimum. \1\(required).............................H32 Test............................... 70 60(max) 17 15 High........................... Heating Full-Load. \2\(required, steady).....................H31 Test \5\........................... 70 60(max) 17 15 Low............................ Heating Minimum. \1\(required, steady).....................--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ Defined in section 3.1.4.5.\2\ Defined in section 3.1.4.4.\3\ Maintain the airflow nozzle(s) static pressure difference or velocity pressure during the ON period at the same pressure or velocity as measured
during the H12 Test.\4\ Maintain the airflow nozzle(s) static pressure difference or velocity pressure during the ON period at the same pressure or velocity as measured
during the H11 Test.\5\ Required only if the heat pump's performance when operating at low compressor capacity and outdoor temperatures less than 37 [deg]F is needed to
complete the section 4.2.3 HSPF calculations.\6\ If table note 5 applies, the section 3.6.3 equations for Qhk=1 (35) and Ehk=1 (17) may be used in lieu of conducting the H21 Test.
3.6.4 Tests for a heat pump having a variable-speed compressor. a. Conduct one Maximum Temperature Test (H01), two High Temperature Tests (H12 and H11), one Frost Accumulation Test (H2V), and one Low Temperature Test (H32). Conducting one or both of the following tests is optional: An additional High Temperature Test (H1N) and an additional Frost Accumulation Test (H22). Conduct the optional Maximum Temperature Cyclic (H0C1) Test to determine the heating mode cyclic-degradation coefficient, CD\h\. If this optional test is conducted but yields a tested CD\h\ that exceeds the default CD\h\ or if the optional test is not conducted, assign CD\h\ the default value of 0.25. Test conditions for the eight tests are specified in Table 12. Determine the intermediate compressor speed cited in Table 12 using the heating mode maximum and minimum compressors speeds and:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.028 where a tolerance of plus 5 percent or the next higher inverter frequency step from that calculated is allowed. If the H22 Test is not done, use the following equations to approximate the capacity and electrical power at the H22 test conditions:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.029
b. Determine the quantities QQhk=2(47) and from EEhk=2(47) from the H12 Test and evaluate them according to section 3.7. Determine the quantities QQhk=2(17) and EEhk=2(17) from the H32 Test and evaluate them according to section 3.10. For heat pumps where the heating mode maximum compressor speed exceeds its cooling mode maximum compressor speed, conduct the H1N Test if the manufacturer requests it. If the H1N Test is done, operate the heat pump's compressor at the same speed as the speed used for the cooling mode A2 Test. Refer to the last sentence of section 4.2 to see how the results of the H1N Test may be used in calculating the heating seasonal performance factor.
Table 12--Heating Mode Test Conditions for Units Having a Variable-Speed Compressor--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Air entering indoor Air entering outdoor
unit temperature unit temperature
Test description ([deg]F) ([deg]F) Compressor speed Heating air volume rate
----------------------------------------------
Dry bulb Wet bulb Dry bulb Wet bulb--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------H01 Test............................... 70 60(max) 62 56.5 Minimum........................ Heating Minimum. \1\(required, steady).....................H0C1 Test.............................. 70 60(max) 62 56.5 Minimum........................ (\2\)(optional, steady).....................H12 Test............................... 70 60(max) 47 43 Maximum........................ Heating Full-Load. \3\(required, steady).....................H11 Test............................... 70 60(max) 47 43 Minimum........................ Heating Minimum. \1\(required, steady).....................H1N Test............................... 70 60(max) 47 43 Cooling Mode Maximum........... Heating Nominal. \4\(optional, steady).....................H22 Test............................... 70 60(max) 35 33 Maximum........................ Heating Full-Load. \3\(optional).............................H2V Test............................... 70 60(max) 35 33 Intermediate................... Heating Intermediate. \5\(required).............................H32 Test............................... 70 60(max) 17 15 Maximum........................ Heating Full-Load. \3\(required, steady).....................--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ Defined in section 3.1.4.5.\2\ Maintain the airflow nozzle(s) static pressure difference or velocity pressure during an ON period at the same pressure or velocity as measured
during the H01 Test.\3\ Defined in section 3.1.4.4.\4\ Defined in section 3.1.4.7.\5\ Defined in section 3.1.4.6.
c. For multiple-split heat pumps (only), the following procedures supersede the above requirements. For all Table 12 tests specified for a minimum compressor speed, at least one indoor unit must be turned off. The manufacturer shall designate the particular indoor unit(s) that is turned off. The manufacturer must also specify the compressor speed used for the Table 12 H2V Test, a heating-mode intermediate compressor speed that falls within \1/4\ and \3/4\ of the difference between the maximum and minimum heating-mode speeds. The manufacturer should prescribe an intermediate speed that is expected to yield the highest COP for the given H2V Test conditions and bracketed compressor speed range. The manufacturer can designate that one or more specific indoor units are turned off for the H2V Test.
3.6.5 Additional test for a heat pump having a heat comfort controller. Test any heat pump that has a heat comfort controller (see Definition 1.28) according to section 3.6.1, 3.6.2, or 3.6.3, whichever applies, with the heat comfort controller disabled. Additionally, conduct the abbreviated test described in section 3.1.9 with the heat comfort controller active to determine the system's maximum supply air temperature. (Note: heat pumps having a variable speed compressor and a heat comfort controller are not covered in the test procedure at this time.)
3.7 Test procedures for steady-state Maximum Temperature and High Temperature heating mode tests (the H01, H1, H12, H11, and H1N Tests). a. For the pretest interval, operate the test room reconditioning apparatus and the heat pump until equilibrium conditions are maintained for at least 30 minutes at the specified section 3.6 test conditions. Use the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus and, if installed, the indoor fan of the heat pump to obtain and then maintain the indoor air volume rate and/or the external static pressure specified for the particular test. Continuously record the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the indoor coil, and the dry-bulb temperature and water vapor content of the air entering the outdoor coil. Refer to section 3.11 for additional requirements that depend on the selected secondary test method. After satisfying the pretest equilibrium requirements, make the measurements specified in Table 3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) for the Indoor Air Enthalpy method and the user-selected secondary method. Except for external static pressure, make the Table 3 measurements at equal intervals that span 10 minutes or less. Measure external static pressure every 5 minutes or less. Continue data sampling until a 30-minute period (e.g., four consecutive 10-minute samples) is reached where the test tolerances specified in Table 13 are satisfied. For those continuously recorded parameters, use the entire data set for the 30-minute interval when evaluating Table 13 compliance. Determine the average electrical power consumption of the heat pump over the same 30-minute interval.
Table 13--Test Operating and Test Condition Tolerances for Section 3.7
and Section 3.10 Steady-State Heating Mode Tests------------------------------------------------------------------------
Test Test
operating condition
tolerance tolerance
\1\ \2\------------------------------------------------------------------------Indoor dry-bulb, [deg]F:
Entering temperature.......................... 2.0 0.5
Leaving temperature........................... 2.0Indoor wet-bulb, [deg]F:
Entering temperature.......................... 1.0
Leaving temperature........................... 1.0Outdoor dry-bulb, [deg]F:
Entering temperature.......................... 2.0 0.5
Leaving temperature........................... \2\ 2.0Outdoor wet-bulb, [deg]F:
Entering temperature.......................... 1.0 0.3
Leaving temperature........................... \3\ 1.0External resistance to airflow, inches of water. 0.05 \4\ 0.02Electrical voltage, % of rdg.................... 2.0 1.5Nozzle pressure drop, % of rdg.................. 2.0------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ See Definition 1.41.\2\ See Definition 1.40.\3\ Only applies when the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method is used.\4\ Only applies when testing non-ducted units.
b. Calculate indoor-side total heating capacity as specified in sections 7.3.4.1 and 7.3.4.3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). Do not adjust the parameters used in calculating capacity for the permitted variations in test conditions. Assign the average space heating capacity and electrical power over the 30-minute data collection interval to the variables QQh\k\ and EEh\k\(T) respectively. The ``T'' and superscripted ``k'' are the same as described in section 3.3. Additionally, for the heating mode, use the superscript to denote results from the optional H1N Test, if conducted.
c. For heat pumps tested without an indoor fan installed, increase QQh\k\(T) by[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.030 and increase EEh\k\(T) by,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.031 where VVs is the average measured indoor air volume rate expressed in units of cubic feet per minute of standard air (scfm). During the 30-minute data collection interval of a High Temperature Test, pay attention to preventing a defrost cycle. Prior to this time, allow the heat pump to perform a defrost cycle if automatically initiated by its own controls. As in all cases, wait for the heat pump's defrost controls to automatically terminate the defrost cycle. Heat pumps that undergo a defrost should operate in the heating mode for at least 10 minutes after defrost termination prior to beginning the 30-minute data collection interval. For some heat pumps, frost may accumulate on the outdoor coil during a High Temperature test. If the indoor coil leaving air temperature or the difference between the leaving and entering air temperatures decreases by more than 1.5 [deg]F over the 30-minute data collection interval, then do not use the collected data to determine capacity. Instead, initiate a defrost cycle. Begin collecting data no sooner than 10 minutes after defrost termination. Collect 30 minutes of new data during which the Table 13 test tolerances are satisfied. In this case, use only the results from the second 30-minute data collection interval to evaluate QQh\k\(47) and EEh\k\(47).
d. If conducting the optional cyclic heating mode test, which is described in section 3.8, record the average indoor-side air volume rate, VV, specific heat of the air, Cp,a (expressed on dry air basis), specific volume of the air at the nozzles, vn[min] (or vn), humidity ratio at the nozzles, Wn, and either pressure difference or velocity pressure for the flow nozzles. If either or both of the below criteria apply, determine the average, steady-state, electrical power consumption of the indoor fan motor (EEfan,1):
1. The section 3.8 cyclic test will be conducted and the heat pump has a variable-speed indoor fan that is expected to be disabled during the cyclic test; or
2. The heat pump has a (variable-speed) constant-air volume-rate indoor fan and during the steady-state test the average external static pressure ([Delta]P1) exceeds the applicable section 3.1.4.4 minimum (or targeted) external static pressure ([Delta]Pmin) by 0.03 inches of water or more.
Determine EEfan,1 by making measurements during the 30-minute data collection interval, or immediately following the test and prior to changing the test conditions. When the above ``2'' criteria applies, conduct the following four steps after determining EEfan,1 (which corresponds to [Delta]P1):
i. While maintaining the same test conditions, adjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus until the external static pressure increases to approximately [Delta]P1 + ([Delta]P1 - [Delta]Pmin).
ii. After re-establishing steady readings for fan motor power and external static pressure, determine average values for the indoor fan power (EEfan,2) and the external static pressure ([Delta]P2) by making measurements over a 5-minute interval.
iii. Approximate the average power consumption of the indoor fan motor if the 30-minute test had been conducted at [Delta]Pmin using linear extrapolation:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.032
iv. Decrease the total space heating capacity, QQh\k\(T), by the quantity (EEfan,1 - EEfan,min), when expressed on a Btu/h basis. Decrease the total electrical power, EEh\k\(T) by the same fan power difference, now expressed in watts.
3.8 Test procedures for the optional cyclic heating mode tests (the H0C1, H1C, H1C1 and H1C2 Tests). a. Except as noted below, conduct the cyclic heating mode test as specified in section 3.5. As adapted to the heating mode, replace section 3.5 references to ``the steady-state dry coil test'' with ``the heating mode steady-state test conducted at the same test conditions as the cyclic heating mode test.'' Use the test tolerances in Table 14 rather than Table 8. Record the outdoor coil entering wet-bulb temperature according to the requirements given in section 3.5 for the outdoor coil entering dry-bulb temperature. Drop the subscript ``dry'' used in variables cited in section 3.5 when referring to quantities from the cyclic heating mode test. Determine the total space heating delivered during the cyclic heating test, qcyc, as specified in section 3.5 except for making the following changes:
(1) When evaluating Equation 3.5-1, use the values of VV, Cp,a,vn', (or vn), and Wn that were recorded during the section 3.7 steady-state test conducted at the same test conditions.
(2) Calculate [Gamma] using,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.033
b. For ducted heat pumps tested without an indoor fan installed (excluding the special case where a variable-speed fan is temporarily removed), increase qcyc by the amount calculated using Equation 3.5-3. Additionally, increase ecyc by the amount calculated using Equation 3.5-2. In making these calculations, use the average indoor air volume rate (VVs) determined from the section 3.7 steady-state heating mode test conducted at the same test conditions.
c. For non-ducted heat pumps, subtract the electrical energy used by the indoor fan during the 3 minutes after compressor cutoff from the non-ducted heat pump's integrated heating capacity, qcyc.
d. If a heat pump defrost cycle is manually or automatically initiated immediately prior to or during the OFF/ON cycling, operate the heat pump continuously until 10 minutes after defrost termination. After that, begin cycling the heat pump immediately or delay until the specified test conditions have been re-established. Pay attention to preventing defrosts after beginning the cycling process. For heat pumps that cycle off the indoor fan during a defrost cycle, make no effort here to restrict the air movement through the indoor coil while the fan is off. Resume the OFF/ON cycling while conducting a minimum of two complete compressor OFF/ON cycles before determining qcyc and ecyc.
3.8.1 Heating mode cyclic-degradation coefficient calculation. Use the results from the optional cyclic test and the required steady-state test that were conducted at the same test conditions to determine the heating-mode cyclic-degradation coefficient CD\h\. Add ``(k=2)'' to the coefficient if it corresponds to a two-capacity unit cycling at high capacity. For the below calculation of the heating mode cyclic degradation coefficient, do not include the duct loss correction from section 7.3.3.3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) in determining QQh\k\(Tcyc) (or qcyc). If the optional cyclic test is conducted but yields a tested CD\h\ that exceeds the default CD\h\ or if the optional test is not conducted, assign CD\h\ the default value of 0.25. The default value for two-capacity units cycling at high capacity, however, is the low-capacity coefficient, i.e., CD\h\ (k=2) = CD\h\. The tested CD\h\ is calculated as follows:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.096 where,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.035 the average coefficient of performance during the cyclic heating mode test, dimensionless.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.036 the average coefficient of performance during the steady-state heating mode test conducted at the same test conditions--i.e., same outdoor dry bulb temperature, Tcyc, and speed/capacity, k, if applicable--as specified for the cyclic heating mode test, dimensionless.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.037 the heating load factor, dimensionless. Tcyc = the nominal outdoor temperature at which the cyclic heating mode test is conducted, 62 or 47 [deg]F.[Delta][tau]cyc = the duration of the OFF/ON intervals; 0.5 hours when testing a heat pump having a single-speed or two-capacity compressor and 1.0 hour when testing a heat pump having a variable-speed compressor.
Round the calculated value for CD\h\ to the nearest 0.01. If CD\h\ is negative, then set it equal to zero.
Table 14--Test operating and test condition tolerances for cyclic
heating mode tests.------------------------------------------------------------------------
Test Test
operating condition
tolerance tolerance
\1\ \2\------------------------------------------------------------------------Indoor entering dry-bulb temperature, \3\ 2.0 0.5
[deg]F.......................................Indoor entering wet-bulb temperature, \3\ 1.0
[deg]F.......................................Outdoor entering dry-bulb temperature, \3\ 2.0 0.5
[deg]F.......................................Outdoor entering wet-bulb temperature, \3\ 2.0 1.0
[deg]F.......................................External resistance to air-flow, \3\ inches of 0.05
water........................................Airflow nozzle pressure difference or velocity 2.0 \4\ 2.0
pressure,\3\ % of reading....................Electrical voltage, \5\ % of rdg.............. 2.0 1.5------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ See Definition 1.41.\2\ See Definition 1.40.\3\ Applies during the interval that air flows through the indoor
(outdoor) coil except for the first 30 seconds after flow initiation.
For units having a variable-speed indoor fan that ramps, the
tolerances listed for the external resistance to airflow shall apply
from 30 seconds after achieving full speed until ramp down begins.\4\ The test condition shall be the average nozzle pressure difference
or velocity pressure measured during the steady-state test conducted
at the same test conditions.\5\ Applies during the interval that at least one of the following--the
compressor, the outdoor fan, or, if applicable, the indoor fan--are
operating, except for the first 30 seconds after compressor start-up.
3.9 Test procedures for Frost Accumulation heating mode tests (the H2, H22, H2V, and H21 Tests). a. Confirm that the defrost controls of the heat pump are set as specified in section 2.2.1. Operate the test room reconditioning apparatus and the heat pump for at least 30 minutes at the specified section 3.6 test conditions before starting the ``preliminary'' test period. The preliminary test period must immediately precede the ``official'' test period, which is the heating and defrost interval over which data are collected for evaluating average space heating capacity and average electrical power consumption.
b. For heat pumps containing defrost controls which are likely to cause defrosts at intervals less than one hour, the preliminary test period starts at the termination of an automatic defrost cycle and ends at the termination of the next occurring automatic defrost cycle. For heat pumps containing defrost controls which are likely to cause defrosts at intervals exceeding one hour, the preliminary test period must consist of a heating interval lasting at least one hour followed by a defrost cycle that is either manually or automatically initiated. In all cases, the heat pump's own controls must govern when a defrost cycle terminates.
c. The official test period begins when the preliminary test period ends, at defrost termination. The official test period ends at the termination of the next occurring automatic defrost cycle. When testing a heat pump that uses a time-adaptive defrost control system (see Definition 1.42), however, manually initiate the defrost cycle that ends the official test period at the instant indicated by instructions provided by the manufacturer. If the heat pump has not undergone a defrost after 6 hours, immediately conclude the test and use the results from the full 6-hour period to calculate the average space heating capacity and average electrical power consumption.
For heat pumps that turn the indoor fan off during the defrost cycle, take steps to cease forced airflow through the indoor coil and block the outlet duct whenever the heat pump's controls cycle off the indoor fan. If it is installed, use the outlet damper box described in section 2.5.4.1 to affect the blocked outlet duct.
d. Defrost termination occurs when the controls of the heat pump actuate the first change in converting from defrost operation to normal heating operation. Defrost initiation occurs when the controls of the heat pump first alter its normal heating operation in order to eliminate possible accumulations of frost on the outdoor coil.
e. To constitute a valid Frost Accumulation test, satisfy the test tolerances specified in Table 15 during both the preliminary and official test periods. As noted in Table 15, test operating tolerances are specified for two sub-intervals: (1) When heating, except for the first 10 minutes after the termination of a defrost cycle (Sub-interval H, as described in Table 15) and (2) when defrosting, plus these same first 10 minutes after defrost termination (Sub-interval D, as described in Table 15). Evaluate compliance with Table 15 test condition tolerances and the majority of the test operating tolerances using the averages from measurements recorded only during Sub-interval H. Continuously record the dry bulb temperature of the air entering the indoor coil, and the dry bulb temperature and water vapor content of the air entering the outdoor coil. Sample the remaining parameters listed in Table 15 at equal intervals that span 10 minutes or less.
f. For the official test period, collect and use the following data to calculate average space heating capacity and electrical power. During heating and defrosting intervals when the controls of the heat pump have the indoor fan on, continuously record the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering (as noted above) and leaving the indoor coil. If using a thermopile, continuously record the difference between the leaving and entering dry-bulb temperatures during the interval(s) that air flows through the indoor coil. For heat pumps tested without an indoor fan installed, determine the corresponding cumulative time (in hours) of indoor coil airflow, [Delta][tau]a. Sample measurements used in calculating the air volume rate (refer to sections 7.7.2.1 and 7.7.2.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22)) at equal intervals that span 10 minutes or less. (Note: In the first printing of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005, the second IP equation for Qmi should read: .) Record the electrical energy consumed, expressed in watt-hours, from defrost termination to defrost termination, eDEF\k\(35), as well as the corresponding elapsed time in hours, [Delta][tau]FR.
Table 15--Test Operating and Test Condition Tolerances for Frost Accumulation Heating Mode Tests.----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Test operating tolerance \1\
-------------------------------------- Test condition
Sub-interval H Sub-interval D tolerance \2\ Sub-
\3\ \4\ interval H \3\----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Indoor entering dry-bulb temperature, [deg]F........... 2.0 \5\ 4.0 0.5Indoor entering wet-bulb temperature, [deg]F........... 1.0 .................Outdoor entering dry-bulb temperature, [deg]F.......... 2.0 10.0 1.0Outdoor entering wet-bulb temperature, [deg]F.......... 1.5 ................. 0.5External resistance to airflow, inches of water........ 0.05 ................. 0.02 \6\Electrical voltage, % of rdg........................... 2.0 ................. 1.5----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ See Definition 1.41.\2\ See Definition 1.40.\3\ Applies when the heat pump is in the heating mode, except for the first 10 minutes after termination of a
defrost cycle.\4\ Applies during a defrost cycle and during the first 10 minutes after the termination of a defrost cycle when
the heat pump is operating in the heating mode.\5\ For heat pumps that turn off the indoor fan during the defrost cycle, the noted tolerance only applies
during the 10 minute interval that follows defrost termination.\6\ Only applies when testing non-ducted heat pumps.
3.9.1 Average space heating capacity and electrical power calculations. a. Evaluate average space heating capacity, QQh\k\(35), when expressed in units of Btu per hour, using:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.038 where, VV = the average indoor air volume rate measured during Sub-interval H,
cfm.Cp,a = 0.24 + 0.444 [middot] Wn, the constant
pressure specific heat of the air-water vapor mixture that
flows through the indoor coil and is expressed on a dry air
basis, Btu / lbmda [middot] [deg]F.vn[min] = specific volume of the air-water vapor mixture at
the nozzle, ft\3\ / lbmmx.Wn = humidity ratio of the air-water vapor mixture at the
nozzle, lbm of water vapor per lbm of dry air.[Delta][tau]FR = [tau]2 - [tau]1, the
elapsed time from defrost termination to defrost termination,
hr.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.039
Tal([tau]) = dry bulb temperature of the air entering the
indoor coil at elapsed time [tau], [deg]F; only recorded when
indoor coil airflow occurs; assigned the value of zero during
periods (if any) where the indoor fan cycles off.Ta2([tau]) = dry bulb temperature of the air leaving the
indoor coil at elapsed time [tau], [deg]F; only recorded when
indoor coil airflow occurs; assigned the value of zero during
periods (if any) where the indoor fan cycles off.[tau]1 = the elapsed time when the defrost termination occurs
that begins the official test period, hr.[tau]2 = the elapsed time when the next automatically
occurring defrost termination occurs, thus ending the official
test period, hr.vn = specific volume of the dry air portion of the mixture
evaluated at the dry-bulb temperature, vapor content, and
barometric pressure existing at the nozzle, ft\3\ per lbm of
dry air.
To account for the effect of duct losses between the outlet of the indoor unit and the section 2.5.4 dry-bulb temperature grid, adjust QQh\k\(35) in accordance with section 7.3.4.3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22).
b. Evaluate average electrical power, EEh\k\(35), when expressed in units of watts, using: [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.040
For heat pumps tested without an indoor fan installed, increase QQh\k\(35) by,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.041 and increase EEh\k\(35) by,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.042 where VVs is the average indoor air volume rate measured during the Frost Accumulation heating mode test and is expressed in units of cubic feet per minute of standard air (scfm).
c. For heat pumps having a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan, the five additional steps listed below are required if the average of the external static pressures measured during sub-Interval H exceeds the applicable section 3.1.4.4, 3.1.4.5, or 3.1.4.6 minimum (or targeted) external static pressure ([Delta]Pmin) by 0.03 inches of water or more:
1. Measure the average power consumption of the indoor fan motor (EEfan,1) and record the corresponding external static pressure ([Delta]P1) during or immediately following the Frost Accumulation heating mode test. Make the measurement at a time when the heat pump is heating, except for the first 10 minutes after the termination of a defrost cycle.
2. After the Frost Accumulation heating mode test is completed and while maintaining the same test conditions, adjust the exhaust fan of the airflow measuring apparatus until the external static pressure increases to approximately [Delta]P1 + ([Delta]P1 - [Delta]Pmin).
3. After re-establishing steady readings for the fan motor power and external static pressure, determine average values for the indoor fan power (EEfan,2) and the external static pressure ([Delta]P2) by making measurements over a 5-minute interval.
4. Approximate the average power consumption of the indoor fan motor had the Frost Accumulation heating mode test been conducted at [Delta]Pmin using linear extrapolation:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.043
5. Decrease the total heating capacity, QQh\k\(35), by the quantity [(EEfan,1 - EEfan,min)[middot] ([Delta][tau] a/[Delta][tau] FR], when expressed on a Btu/h basis. Decrease the total electrical power, Eh\k\(35), by the same quantity, now expressed in watts.
3.9.2 Demand defrost credit. a. Assign the demand defrost credit, Fdef, that is used in section 4.2 to the value of 1 in all cases except for heat pumps having a demand-defrost control system (Definition 1.21). For such qualifying heat pumps, evaluate Fdef using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.044 where,[Delta][tau]def = the time between defrost terminations (in
hours) or 1.5, whichever is greater.[Delta][tau]max = maximum time between defrosts as allowed by
the controls (in hours) or 12, whichever is less.
b. For two-capacity heat pumps and for section 3.6.2 units, evaluate the above equation using the [Delta][tau]def that applies based on the Frost Accumulation Test conducted at high capacity and/or at the Heating Full-loadAir Volume Rate. For variable-speed heat pumps, evaluate [Delta][tau]def based on the required Frost Accumulation Test conducted at the intermediate compressor speed.
3.10 Test procedures for steady-state Low Temperature heating mode tests (the H3, H32, and H31 Tests). Except for the modifications noted in this section, conduct the Low Temperature heating mode test using the same approach as specified in section 3.7 for the Maximum and High Temperature tests. After satisfying the section 3.7 requirements for the pretest interval but before beginning to collect data to determine QQh\k\(17) and EEh\k\(17), conduct a defrost cycle. This defrost cycle may be manually or automatically initiated. The defrost sequence must be terminated by the action of the heat pump's defrost controls. Begin the 30-minute data collection interval described in section 3.7, from which QQh\k\(17) and EEh\k\(17) are determined, no sooner than 10 minutes after defrost termination. Defrosts should be prevented over the 30-minute data collection interval.
3.11 Additional requirements for the secondary test methods.
3.11.1 If using the Outdoor Air Enthalpy Method as the secondary test method. During the ``official'' test, the outdoor air-side test apparatus described in section 2.10.1 is connected to the outdoor unit. To help compensate for any effect that the addition of this test apparatus may have on the unit's performance, conduct a ``preliminary'' test where the outdoor air-side test apparatus is disconnected. Conduct a preliminary test prior to the first section 3.2 steady-state cooling mode test and prior to the first section 3.6 steady-state heating mode test. No other preliminary tests are required so long as the unit operates the outdoor fan during all cooling mode steady-state tests at the same speed and all heating mode steady-state tests at the same speed. If using more than one outdoor fan speed for the cooling mode steady-state tests, however, conduct a preliminary test prior to each cooling mode test where a different fan speed is first used. This same requirement applies for the heating mode tests.
3.11.1.1 If a preliminary test precedes the official test. a. The test conditions for the preliminary test are the same as specified for the official test. Connect the indoor air-side test apparatus to the indoor coil; disconnect the outdoor air-side test apparatus. Allow the test room reconditioning apparatus and the unit being tested to operate for at least one hour. After attaining equilibrium conditions, measure the following quantities at equal intervals that span 10 minutes or less:
1. The section 2.10.1 evaporator and condenser temperatures or pressures;
2. Parameters required according to the Indoor Air Enthalpy Method.
Continue these measurements until a 30-minute period (e.g., four consecutive 10-minute samples) is obtained where the Table 7 or Table 13, whichever applies, test tolerances are satisfied.
b. After collecting 30 minutes of steady-state data, reconnect the outdoor air-side test apparatus to the unit. Adjust the exhaust fan of the outdoor airflow measuring apparatus until averages for the evaporator and condenser temperatures, or the saturated temperatures corresponding to the measured pressures, agree within 0.5 [deg]F of the averages achieved when the outdoor air-side test apparatus was disconnected. Calculate the averages for the reconnected case using five or more consecutive readings taken at one minute intervals. Make these consecutive readings after re-establishing equilibrium conditions and before initiating the official test.
3.11.1.2 If a preliminary test does not precede the official test. Connect the outdoor-side test apparatus to the unit. Adjust the exhaust fan of the outdoor airflow measuring apparatus to achieve the same external static pressure as measured during the prior preliminary test conducted with the unit operating in the same cooling or heating mode at the same outdoor fan speed.
3.11.1.3 Official test. a. Continue (preliminary test was conducted) or begin (no preliminary test) the official test by making measurements for both the Indoor and Outdoor Air Enthalpy Methods at equal intervals that span 10 minutes or less. Discontinue these measurement only after obtaining a 30-minute period where the specified test condition and test operating tolerances are satisfied. To constitute a valid official test:
(1) Achieve the energy balance specified in section 3.1.1; and,
(2) For cases where a preliminary test is conducted, the capacities determined using the Indoor Air Enthalpy Method from the official and preliminary test periods must agree within 2.0 percent.
b. For space cooling tests, calculate capacity from the outdoor air-enthalpy measurements as specified in sections 7.3.3.2 and 7.3.3.3 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). Calculate heating capacity based on outdoor air-enthalpy measurements as specified in sections 7.3.4.2 and 7.3.3.4.3 of the same ASHRAE Standard. Adjust the outdoor-side capacity according to section 7.3.3.4 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22) to account for line losses when testing split systems. Use the outdoor unit fan power as measured during the official test and not the value measured during the preliminary test, as described in section 8.6.2 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22), when calculating the capacity.
3.11.2 If using the Compressor Calibration Method as the secondary test method.
a. Conduct separate calibration tests using a calorimeter to determine the refrigerant flow rate. Or for cases where the superheat of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator is less than 5 [deg]F, use the calorimeter to measure total capacity rather than refrigerant flow rate. Conduct these calibration tests at the same test conditions as specified for the tests in this appendix. Operate the unit for at least one hour or until obtaining equilibrium conditions before collecting data that will be used in determining the average refrigerant flow rate or total capacity. Sample the data at equal intervals that span 10 minutes or less. Determine average flow rate or average capacity from data sampled over a 30-minute period where the Table 7 (cooling) or the Table 13 (heating) tolerances are satisfied. Otherwise, conduct the calibration tests according to ASHRAE Standard 23-05 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22), ASHRAE Standard 41.9-2000 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22), and section 7.4 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22).
b. Calculate space cooling and space heating capacities using the compressor calibration method measurements as specified in section 7.4.5 and 7.4.6 respectively, of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22).
b. Calculate space cooling and space heating capacities using the compressor calibration method measurements as specified in section 7.4.5 and 7.4.6 respectively, of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22).
3.11.3 If using the Refrigerant-Enthalpy Method as the secondary test method. Conduct this secondary method according to section 7.5 of ASHRAE Standard 37-2005 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). Calculate space cooling and heating capacities using the refrigerant-enthalpy method measurements as specified in sections 7.5.4 and 7.5.5, respectively, of the same ASHRAE Standard.
3.12 Rounding of space conditioning capacities for reporting purposes.
a. When reporting rated capacities, round them off as follows:
1. For capacities less than 20,000 Btu/h, round to the nearest 100 Btu/h.
2. For capacities between 20,000 and 37,999 Btu/h, round to the nearest 200 Btu/h.
3. For capacities between 38,000 and 64,999 Btu/h, round to the nearest 500 Btu/h.
b. For the capacities used to perform the section 4 calculations, however, round only to the nearest integer.
4. CALCULATIONS OF SEASONAL PERFORMANCE DESCRIPTORS
4.1 Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) Calculations. SEER must be calculated as follows: For equipment covered under sections 4.1.2, 4.1.3, and 4.1.4, evaluate the seasonal energy efficiency ratio,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.045 where,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.046 the ratio of the total space cooling provided during periods of the space cooling season when the outdoor temperature fell within the range represented by bin temperature Tj to the total number of hours in the cooling season (N), Btu/h.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.047 the electrical energy consumed by the test unit during periods of the space cooling season when the outdoor temperature fell within the range represented by bin temperature Tj to the total number of hours in the cooling season (N), W.
Tj = the outdoor bin temperature, [deg]F. Outdoor temperatures are grouped or ``binned.'' Use bins of 5 [deg]F with the 8 cooling season bin temperatures being 67, 72, 77, 82, 87, 92, 97, and 102 [deg]F.
j = the bin number. For cooling season calculations, j ranges from 1 to 8.
Additionally, for sections 4.1.2, 4.1.3, and 4.1.4, use a building cooling load, BL(Tj). When referenced, evaluate BL(Tj) for cooling using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.049 where,QQck=2(95) = the space cooling capacity determined
from the A2 Test and calculated as specified in
section 3.3, Btu/h.1.1 = sizing factor, dimensionless.
The temperatures 95 [deg]F and 65 [deg]F in the building load equation represent the selected outdoor design temperature and the zero-load base temperature, respectively.
4.1.1 SEER calculations for an air conditioner or heat pump having a single-speed compressor that was tested with a fixed-speed indoor fan installed, a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed. a. Evaluate the seasonal energy efficiency ratio, expressed in units of Btu/watt-hour, using: SEER = PLF(0.5) [middot] EERBwhere,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.050 the energy efficiency ratio determined from the B Test described in sections 3.2.1, 3.1.4.1, and 3.3, Btu/h per watt.
PLF(0.5) = 1 - 0.5 [middot] CD\c\, the part-load performance factor evaluated at a cooling load factor of 0.5, dimensionless.
b. Refer to section 3.3 regarding the definition and calculation of QQc(82) and EEc(82). If the optional tests described in section 3.2.1 are not conducted, set the cooling mode cyclic degradation coefficient, CD\c\, to the default value specified in section 3.5.3. If these optional tests are conducted, set CD\c\ to the lower of:
1. The value calculated as per section 3.5.3; or
2. The section 3.5.3 default value of 0.25.
4.1.2 SEER calculations for an air conditioner or heat pump having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan.
4.1.2.1 Units covered by section 3.2.2.1 where indoor fan capacity modulation correlates with the outdoor dry bulb temperature. The manufacturer must provide information on how the indoor air volume rate or the indoor fan speed varies over the outdoor temperature range of 67 [deg]F to 102 [deg]F. Calculate SEER using Equation 4.1-1. Evaluate the quantity qc(Tj)/N in Equation 4.1-1 using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.052 where,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.053 whichever is less; the cooling mode load factor for temperature bin j, dimensionless.QQc(Tj) = the space cooling capacity of the test unit when operating at outdoor temperature, Tj, Btu/h. nj/N = fractional bin hours for the cooling season; the ratio of the number of hours during the cooling season when the outdoor temperature fell within the range represented by bin temperature Tj to the total number of hours in the cooling season, dimensionless.
a. For the space cooling season, assign nj/N as specified in Table 16. Use Equation 4.1-2 to calculate the building load, BL(Tj). Evaluate QQc(Tj) using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.056 where,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.057 the space cooling capacity of the test unit at outdoor temperature Tj if operated at the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate, Btu/h. [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.058 the space cooling capacity of the test unit at outdoor temperature Tj if operated at the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate, Btu/h.
b. For units where indoor fan speed is the primary control variable, FPck=1 denotes the fan speed used during the required A1 and B1 Tests (see section 3.2.2.1), FPck=2 denotes the fan speed used during the required A2 and B2 Tests, and FPc(Tj) denotes the fan speed used by the unit when the outdoor temperature equals Tj. For units where indoor air volume rate is the primary control variable, the three FPc's are similarly defined only now being expressed in terms of air volume rates rather than fan speeds. Refer to sections 3.2.2.1, 3.1.4 to 3.1.4.2, and 3.3 regarding the definitions and calculations of QQck=1(82), QQck=1(95),QQc k=2(82), and QQck=2(95). Calculate ec(Tj)/N in Equation 4.1-1 using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.059 where, PLFj = 1 - CD\c\ [middot] [1 - X(Tj)],
the part load factor, dimensionless.EEc(Tj) = the electrical power consumption of the
test unit when operating at outdoor temperature Tj,
W.
c. The quantities X(Tj) and nj /N are the same quantities as used in Equation 4.1.2-1. If the optional tests described in section 3.2.2.1 and Table 4 are not conducted, set the cooling mode cyclic degradation coefficient, CD\c\, to the default value specified in section 3.5.3. If these optional tests are conducted, set CD\c\ to the lower of:
1. The value calculated as per section 3.5.3; or
2 .The section 3.5.3 default value of 0.25.
d. Evaluate EEc(Tj) using,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.060
where[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.061 the electrical power consumption of the test unit at outdoor temperature Tj if operated at the Cooling Minimum Air Volume Rate, W.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.062 the electrical power consumption of the test unit at outdoor temperature Tj if operated at the Cooling Full-load Air Volume Rate, W.
e. The parameters FPck=1, and FPck=2, and FPc(Tj) are the same quantities that are used when evaluating Equation 4.1.2-2. Refer to sections 3.2.2.1, 3.1.4 to 3.1.4.2, and 3.3 regarding the definitions and calculations of EEck=1(82), EEck=1(95), EEck=2(82), and EEck=2(95).
4.1.2.2 Units covered by section 3.2.2.2 where indoor fan capacity modulation is used to adjust the sensible to total cooling capacity ratio. Calculate SEER as specified in section 4.1.1.
4.1.3 SEER calculations for an air conditioner or heat pump having a two-capacity compressor. Calculate SEER using Equation 4.1-1. Evaluate the space cooling capacity, QQck=1 (Tj), and electrical power consumption, EEck=1 (Tj), of the test unit when operating at low compressor capacity and outdoor temperature Tj using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.079 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.080 where QQck=1 (82) and EEck=1 (82) are determined from the B1 Test, QQck=1 (67) and EEck=1 (67) are determined from the F1 Test, and all four quantities are calculated as specified in section 3.3. Evaluate the space cooling capacity, QQck=2 (Tj), and electrical power consumption, EEck=2 (Tj), of the test unit when operating at high compressor capacity and outdoor temperature Tj using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.081 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.066 where QQck=2(95) and
EEck=2(95) are determined from the
A2 Test, QQck=2(82), and
EEck=2(82), are determined from the
B2 Test, and all are calculated as specified in
section 3.3.
The calculation of Equation 4.1-1 quantities qc(Tj)/N and ec(Tj)/N differs depending on whether the test unit would operate at low capacity (section 4.1.3.1), cycle between low and high capacity (section 4.1.3.2), or operate at high capacity (sections 4.1.3.3 and 4.1.3.4) in responding to the building load. For units that lock out low capacity operation at higher outdoor temperatures, the manufacturer must supply information regarding this temperature so that the appropriate equations are used. Use Equation 4.1-2 to calculate the building load, BL(Tj), for each temperature bin.
4.1.3.1 Steady-state space cooling capacity at low compressor capacity is greater than or equal to the building cooling load at temperature Tj, QQck=1(Tj) =BL(Tj).[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.067 where,Xk=1(Tj) = BL(Tj)/
QQck=1(Tj), the cooling mode
low capacity load factor for temperature bin j, dimensionless.PLFj = 1 - CD\c\ [middot] [1 -
Xk=1(Tj)], the part load factor,
dimensionless.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.068
fractional bin hours for the cooling season; the ratio of the number of hours during the cooling season when the outdoor temperature fell within the range represented by bin temperature Tj to the total number of hours in the cooling season, dimensionless.
Obtain the fractional bin hours for the cooling season, nj/N, from Table 16. Use Equations 4.1.3-1 and 4.1.3-2, respectively, to evaluate QQck=1(Tj) and EEck=1(Tj). If the optional tests described in section 3.2.3 and Table 5 are not conducted, set the cooling mode cyclic degradation coefficient, CD\c\, to the default value specified in section 3.5.3. If these optional tests are conducted, set CD\c\ to the lower of:
a. The value calculated according to section 3.5.3; or
b. The section 3.5.3 default value of 0.25.
Table 16--Distribution of Fractional Hours Within Cooling Season Temperature Bins----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Representative
Bin number, j Bin temperature temperature for Fraction of of total
range [deg]F bin [deg]F temperature bin hours, nj/N----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1........................................... 65-69 67 0.2142........................................... 70-74 72 0.2313........................................... 75-79 77 0.2164........................................... 80-84 82 0.1615........................................... 85-89 87 0.1046........................................... 90-94 92 0.0527........................................... 95-99 97 0.0188........................................... 100-104 102 0.004----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1.3.2 Unit alternates between high (k=2) and low (k=1) compressor capacity to satisfy the building cooling load at temperature Tj, QQck=1(Tj) j) ck=2(Tj).[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.069 where,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.070 the cooling mode, low capacity load factor for temperature bin j, dimensionless. Xk=2(Tj) = 1 - Xk=1(Tj), the
cooling mode, high capacity load factor for temperature bin j,
dimensionless.
Obtain the fractional bin hours for the cooling season, nj/N, from Table 16. Use Equations 4.1.3-1 and 4.1.3-2, respectively, to evaluate QQck=1(Tj) and EEck=1(Tj). Use Equations 4.1.3-3 and 4.1.3-4, respectively, to evaluate QQck=2(Tj) and EEck=2(Tj).
4.1.3.3 Unit only operates at high (k=2) compressor capacity at temperature Tj and its capacity is greater than the building cooling load, BL(Tj) ck=2(Tj). This section applies to units that lock out low compressor capacity operation at higher outdoor temperatures.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.072 where,Xk=2(Tj) = BL(Tj)/
QQck=2(Tj), the cooling mode
high capacity load factor for temperature bin j,
dimensionless.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.082
the part load factor, dimensionless.
Obtain the fraction bin hours for the cooling season,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.097
from Table 16. Use Equations 4.1.3-3 and 4.1.3-4, respectively, to evaluate QQck=2 (Tj) and EEck=2 (Tj). If the optional C2 and D2 Tests described in section 3.2.3 and Table 5 are not conducted, set CD\c\ (k=2) equal to the default value specified in section 3.5.3. If these optional tests are conducted, set CD\c\ (k=2) to the lower of:
a. the CD\c\ (k=2) value calculated as per section 3.5.3; or
b. the section 3.5.3 default value for CD\c\ (k=2) .
4.1.3.4 Unit must operate continuously at high (k=2) compressor capacity at temperature Tj, BL(Tj) =QQck=2(Tj).[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.074
Obtain the fractional bin hours for the cooling season, nj/N, from Table 16. Use Equations 4.1.3-3 and 4.1.3-4, respectively, to evaluate QQck=2(Tj) and EEck=2(Tj).
4.1.4 SEER calculations for an air conditioner or heat pump having a variable-speed compressor. Calculate SEER using Equation 4.1-1. Evaluate the space cooling capacity, QQck=1(Tj), and electrical power consumption, EEck=1(Tj), of the test unit when operating at minimum compressor speed and outdoor temperature Tj. Use,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.076 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.077 where QQck=1(82) and EEck=1(82) are determined from the B1 Test, QQck=1(67) and EEck=1(67) are determined from the F1 Test, and all four quantities are calculated as specified in section 3.3. Evaluate the space cooling capacity, QQck=2(Tj), and electrical power consumption, EEck=2(Tj), of the test unit when operating at maximum compressor speed and outdoor temperature Tj. Use Equations 4.1.3-3 and 4.1.3-4, respectively, where QQck=2(95) and EEck=2(95) are determined from the A2 Test, QQck=2(82) and EEck=2(82) are determined from the B2 Test, and all four quantities are calculated as specified in section 3.3. Calculate the space cooling capacity, QQck=v(Tj), and electrical power consumption, EEck=v(Tj), of the test unit when operating at outdoor temperature Tj and the intermediate compressor speed used during the section 3.2.4 (and Table 6) EV Test using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.080
4.1.4.1 Steady-state space cooling capacity when operating at minimum compressor speed is greater than or equal to the building cooling load at temperature Tj, QQck=1(Tj) =BL(Tj).[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.083 where, Xk=1(Tj) = BL(Tj) /
QQck=1(Tj), the cooling mode
minimum speed load factor for temperature bin j,
dimensionless.PLFj = 1 - CD\c\ [middot] [1 -
Xk=1(Tj)], the part load factor,
dimensionless.nj/N = fractional bin hours for the cooling season; the ratio
of the number of hours during the cooling season when the
outdoor temperature fell within the range represented by bin
temperature Tj to the total number of hours in the
cooling season, dimensionless.
Obtain the fractional bin hours for the cooling season, nj/N, from Table 16. Use Equations 4.1.3-1 and 4.1.3-2, respectively, to evaluate QQck=l (Tj) and EEck=l (Tj). If the optional tests described in section 3.2.4 and Table 6 are not conducted, set the cooling mode cyclic degradation coefficient, CD\c\, to the default value specified in section 3.5.3. If these optional tests are conducted, set CD\c\ to the lower of:
a. The value calculated according to section 3.5.3; or
b. The section 3.5.3 default value of 0.25.
4.1.4.2 Unit operates at an intermediate compressor speed (k=i) in order to match the building cooling load at temperature Tj,QQck=1(Tj) j) ck=2(Tj).[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.085 where, QQck=i(Tj) = BL(Tj), the
space cooling capacity delivered by the unit in matching the
building load at temperature Tj, Btu/h. The
matching occurs with the unit operating at compressor speed k
= i.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.086
the electrical power input required by the test unit when operating at a compressor speed of k = i and temperature Tj, W. EER k=i(Tj) = the steady-state energy efficiency
ratio of the test unit when operating at a compressor speed of
k = i and temperature Tj, Btu/h per W.
Obtain the fractional bin hours for the cooling season, nj/N, from Table 16. For each temperature bin where the unit operates at an intermediate compressor speed, determine the energy efficiency ratio EER k=i(Tj) using, EER k=i(Tj) = A + B [middot] Tj + C
[middot] Tj\2\.
For each unit, determine the coefficients A, B, and C by conducting the following calculations once:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.088 where, T1 = the outdoor temperature at which the unit, when operating at minimum compressor speed, provides a space cooling capacity that is equal to the building load (QQck=l (Tl) = BL(T1)), [deg]F. Determine T1 by equating Equations 4.1.3-1 and 4.1-2 and solving for outdoor temperature. Tv = the outdoor temperature at which the unit, when operating at the intermediate compressor speed used during the section 3.2.4 EV Test, provides a space cooling capacity that is equal to the building load (QQck=v (Tv) = BL(Tv)), [deg]F. Determine Tv by equating Equations 4.1.4-1 and 4.1-2 and solving for outdoor temperature.T2 = the outdoor temperature at which the unit, when
operating at maximum compressor speed, provides a space
cooling capacity that is equal to the building load
(QQck=2 (T2) =
BL(T2)), [deg]F. Determine
T2 by equating Equations 4.1.3-3 and 4.1-2 and
solving for outdoor temperature.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.089
4.1.4.3 Unit must operate continuously at maximum (k=2) compressor speed at temperature Tj, BL(Tj) =QQck=2(Tj). Evaluate the Equation 4.1-1 quantities[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.090 as specified in section 4.1.3.4 with the understanding that QQck=2(Tj) and EEck=2(Tj) correspond to maximum compressor speed operation and are derived from the results of the tests specified in section 3.2.4.
4.2 Heating Seasonal Performance Factor (HSPF) Calculations. Unless an approved alternative rating method is used, as set forth in 10 CFR 430.24(m), subpart B, HSPF must be calculated as follows: Six generalized climatic regions are depicted in Figure 2 and otherwise defined in Table 17. For each of these regions and for each applicable standardized design heating requirement, evaluate the heating seasonal performance factor using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.091 where, eh(Tj) / N = The ratio of the electrical energy consumed by the heat pump during periods of the space heating season when the outdoor temperature fell within the range represented by bin temperature Tj to the total number of hours in the heating season (N), W. For heat pumps having a heat comfort controller, this ratio may also include electrical energy used by resistive elements to maintain a minimum air delivery temperature (see 4.2.5). RH(Tj) / N= The ratio of the electrical energy used for resistive space heating during periods when the outdoor temperature fell within the range represented by bin temperature Tj to the total number of hours in the heating season (N), W. Except as noted in section 4.2.5, resistive space heating is modeled as being used to meet that portion of the building load that the heat pump does not meet because of insufficient capacity or because the heat pump automatically turns off at the lowest outdoor temperatures. For heat pumps having a heat comfort controller, all or part of the electrical energy used by resistive heaters at a particular bin temperature may be reflected in eh(Tj) / N (see 4.2.5). Tj = the outdoor bin temperature, [deg]F. Outdoor
temperatures are ``binned'' such that calculations are only
performed based one temperature within the bin. Bins of 5
[deg]F are used. nj / N= Fractional bin hours for the heating season; the ratio of the number of hours during the heating season when the outdoor temperature fell within the range represented by bin temperature Tj to the total number of hours in the heating season, dimensionless. Obtain nj/N values from Table 17. j = the bin number, dimensionless.J = for each generalized climatic region, the total number of
temperature bins, dimensionless. Referring to Table 17, J is
the highest bin number (j) having a nonzero entry for the
fractional bin hours for the generalized climatic region of
interest.Fdef = the demand defrost credit described in section 3.9.2,
dimensionless.BL(Tj) = the building space conditioning load corresponding
to an outdoor temperature of Tj; the heating season
building load also depends on the generalized climatic
region's outdoor design temperature and the design heating
requirement, Btu/h.
Table 17--Generalized Climatic Region Information----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Region Number................................. I II III IV V VIHeating Load Hours, HLH....................... 750 1250 1750 2250 2750 *2750Outdoor Design Temperature, TOD............... 37 27 17 5 -10 30
-----------------------------------------------------------------
j Tj ([deg]F)................................ Fractional Bin Hours, nj/N
-----------------------------------------------------------------
1 62......................................... .291 .215 .153 .132 .106 .113
2 57......................................... .239 .189 .142 .111 .092 .206
3 52......................................... .194 .163 .138 .103 .086 .215
4 47......................................... .129 .143 .137 .093 .076 .204
5 42......................................... .081 .112 .135 .100 .078 .141
6 37......................................... .041 .088 .118 .109 .087 .076
7 32......................................... .019 .056 .092 .126 .102 .034
8 27......................................... .005 .024 .047 .087 .094 .008
9 22......................................... .001 .008 .021 .055 .074 .00310 17......................................... 0 .002 .009 .036 .055 011 12......................................... 0 0 .005 .026 .047 012 7.......................................... 0 0 .002 .013 .038 013 2.......................................... 0 0 .001 .006 .029 014 -3......................................... 0 0 0 .002 .018 015 -8......................................... 0 0 0 .001 .010 016 -13........................................ 0 0 0 0 .005 017 -18........................................ 0 0 0 0 .002 018 -23........................................ 0 0 0 0 .001 0----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------* Pacific Coast Region.
Evaluate the building heating load using
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.096
where, TOD = the outdoor design temperature, [deg]F. An outdoor
design temperature is specified for each generalized climatic
region in Table 17.C = 0.77, a correction factor which tends to improve the agreement
between calculated and measured building loads, dimensionless.DHR = the design heating requirement (see Definition 1.22), Btu/h.
Calculate the minimum and maximum design heating requirements for each generalized climatic region as follows:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.097 and[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.098 where QQh\k\(47) is expressed in units of Btu/h and otherwise defined as follows:
1. For a single-speed heat pump tested as per section 3.6.1, QQh\k\(47) = QQh(47), the space heating capacity determined from the H1 Test.
2. For a variable-speed heat pump, a section 3.6.2 single-speed heat pump, or a two-capacity heat pump not covered by item 3, QQn\k\(47) = QQnk=2(47), the space heating capacity determined from the H12 Test.
3. For two-capacity, northern heat pumps (see Definition 1.46), QQ\k\h(47) = QQk=1h(47), the space heating capacity determined from the H11 Test.
If the optional H1N Test is conducted on a variable-speed heat pump, the manufacturer has the option of defining QQ\k\h(47) as specified above in item 2 or as QQ\k\h(47)=QQk=Nh(47), the space heating capacity determined from the H1N Test.
For all heat pumps, HSPF accounts for the heating delivered and the energy consumed by auxiliary resistive elements when operating below the balance point. This condition occurs when the building load exceeds the space heating capacity of the heat pump condenser. For HSPF calculations for all heat pumps, see either section 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, or 4.2.4, whichever applies.
For heat pumps with heat comfort controllers (see Definition 1.28), HSPF also accounts for resistive heating contributed when operating above the heat-pump-plus-comfort-controller balance point as a result of maintaining a minimum supply temperature. For heat pumps having a heat comfort controller, see section 4.2.5 for the additional steps required for calculating the HSPF.
Table 18--Standardized Design Heating Requirements (Btu/h)------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------5,000.................................. 25,000 50,000 90,00010,000................................. 30,000 60,000 100,00015,000................................. 35,000 70,000 110,00020,000................................. 40,000 80,000 130,000------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.2.1 Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a single-speed compressor that was tested with a fixed-speed indoor fan installed, a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.099 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.100 where, [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.101 whichever is less; the heating mode load factor for temperature bin j, dimensionless.QQh(Tj) = the space heating capacity of the heat
pump when operating at outdoor temperature Tj, Btu/
h.EEh(Tj) = the electrical power consumption of the
heat pump when operating at outdoor temperature Tj,
W. [delta](Tj) = the heat pump low temperature cut-out factor,
dimensionless.PLFj = 1 - CCD\h\ [middot] [1 -X(Tj)]
the part load factor, dimensionless.
Use Equation 4.2-2 to determine BL(Tj). Obtain fractional bin hours for the heating season, nj/N, from Table 17. If the optional H1C Test described in section 3.6.1 is not conducted, set the heating mode cyclic degradation coefficient, CD\h\, to the default value specified in section 3.8.1. If this optional test is conducted, set CCD\h\ to the lower of:
a. The value calculated according to section 3.8.1 or
b. The section 3.8.1 default value of 0.25.
Determine the low temperature cut-out factor using
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.102
where, Toff = the outdoor temperature when the compressor is
automatically shut off, [deg]F. (If no such temperature
exists, Tj is always greater than Toff
and Ton).Ton = the outdoor temperature when the compressor is
automatically turned back on, if applicable, following an
automatic shut-off, [deg]F.
Calculate QQh(Tj) and EEh(Tj) using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.103 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.104 where QQh(47) and EEh(47) are determined from the H1 Test and calculated as specified in section 3.7; QQh(35) and EEh(35) are determined from the H2 Test and calculated as specified in section 3.9.1; and QQh(17) and EEh(17) are determined from the H3 Test and calculated as specified in section 3.10.
4.2.2 Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan. The manufacturer must provide information about how the indoor air volume rate or the indoor fan speed varies over the outdoor temperature range of 65 [deg]F to -23 [deg]F. Calculate the quantities [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.105 in Equation 4.2-1 as specified in section 4.2.1 with the exception of replacing references to the H1C Test and section 3.6.1 with the H1C1 Test and section 3.6.2. In addition, evaluate the space heating capacity and electrical power consumption of the heat pump QQh(Tj) and EEh(Tj) using[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.106 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.107 where the space heating capacity and electrical power consumption at both low capacity (k=1) and high capacity (k=2) at outdoor temperature Tj are determined using [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.108 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.109 For units where indoor fan speed is the primary control variable, FPhk=1 denotes the fan speed used during the required H11 and H31 Tests (see Table 10), FPhk=2 denotes the fan speed used during the required H12, H22, and H32 Tests, and FPh(Tj) denotes the fan speed used by the unit when the outdoor temperature equals Tj. For units where indoor air volume rate is the primary control variable, the three FPh's are similarly defined only now being expressed in terms of air volume rates rather than fan speeds. Determine QQhk=1(47) and EEhk=1(47) from the H11 Test, and QQhk=2(47) and EEhk=2(47) from the H12 Test. Calculate all four quantities as specified in section 3.7. Determine QQhk=1(35) and EEhk=1(35) as specified in section 3.6.2; determine QQhk=2(35) and EEhk=2(35) and from the H22 Test and the calculation specified in section 3.9. Determine QQhk=1(17) and EEhk=1(17 from the H31 Test, and QQhk=2(17) and EEhk=2(17) from the H32 Test. Calculate all four quantities as specified in section 3.10.
4.2.3 Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a two-capacity compressor. The calculation of the Equation 4.2-1 quantities[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.110 differs depending upon whether the heat pump would operate at low capacity (section 4.2.3.1), cycle between low and high capacity (Section 4.2.3.2), or operate at high capacity (sections 4.2.3.3 and 4.2.3.4) in responding to the building load. For heat pumps that lock out low capacity operation at low outdoor temperatures, the manufacturer must supply information regarding the cutoff temperature(s) so that the appropriate equations can be selected.
a. Evaluate the space heating capacity and electrical power consumption of the heat pump when operating at low compressor capacity and outdoor temperature Tj using[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.111 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.112 b. Evaluate the space heating capacity and electrical power consumption (QQhk=2(Tj) and EEhk=2 (Tj)) of the heat pump when operating at high compressor capacity and outdoor temperature Tj by solving Equations 4.2.2-3 and 4.2.2-4, respectively, for k=2. Determine QQhk=1(62) and EEhk=1(62) from the H01 Test, QQhk=1(47) and EEhk=1(47) from the H11 Test, and QQhk=2(47) and EEhk=2(47) from the H12 Test. Calculate all six quantities as specified in section 3.7. Determine QQhk=2(35) and EEhk=2(35) from the H22 Test and, if required as described in section 3.6.3, determine QQhk=1(35) and EEhk=1(35) from the H21 Test. Calculate the required 35 [deg]F quantities as specified in section 3.9. Determine QQhk=2(17) and EEhk=2(17) from the H32 Test and, if required as described in section 3.6.3, determine QQhk=1(17) and EEhk=1(17) from the H31 Test. Calculate the required 17 [deg]F quantities as specified in section 3.10.
4.2.3.1 Steady-state space heating capacity when operating at low compressor capacity is greater than or equal to the building heating load at temperature Tj, QQhk=1(Tj) [gteqt]BL(Tj).[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.113 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.114 where, Xk=1(Tj) = BL(Tj) /
QQhk=1(Tj), the heating mode
low capacity load factor for temperature bin j, dimensionless. PLFj = 1 - CD\h\ [middot] [ 1 -
Xk=1(Tj) ], the part load factor,
dimensionless.[delta][min](Tj) = the low temperature cutoff factor,
dimensionless.
If the optional H0C1 Test described in section 3.6.3 is not conducted, set the heating mode cyclic degradation coefficient, CD\h\, to the default value specified in section 3.8.1. If this optional test is conducted, set CD\h\ to the lower of:
a. The value calculated according to section 3.8.1; or
b. The section 3.8.1 default value of 0.25.
Determine the low temperature cut-out factor using
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.115
where Toff and Ton are defined in section 4.2.1. Use the calculations given in section 4.2.3.3, and not the above, if:
(a) The heat pump locks out low capacity operation at low outdoor temperatures and
(b) Tj is below this lockout threshold temperature.
4.2.3.2 Heat pump alternates between high (k=2) and low (k=1) compressor capacity to satisfy the building heating load at a temperature Tj, QQhk=1(Tj) j) hk=2(Tj).Calculate[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.116 using Equation 4.2.3-2. Evaluate[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.117 using[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.118 where,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.119 Xk=2(Tj) = 1 - Xk=1(Tj) the heating mode, high capacity load factor for temperature bin j, dimensionless.
Determine the low temperature cut-out factor, [delta][min](Tj), using Equation 4.2.3-3.
4.2.3.3 Heat pump only operates at high (k=2) compressor capacity at temperature Tj and its capacity is greater than the building heating load, BL(Tj) hk=2(Tj). This section applies to units that lock out low compressor capacity operation at low outdoor temperatures. Calculate[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.120 using Equation 4.2.3-2. Evaluate[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.121 using[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.122 where, Xk=2(Tj)= BL(Tj)/
QQhk=2(Tj). [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.091 If the optional H1C2 Test described in section 3.6.3 and Table 11 is not conducted, set CD\h\ (k=2) equal to the default value specified in section 3.8.1. If this optional test is conducted, set CD\h\ (k=2) to the lower of:
a. the CD\h\ (k=2) value calculated as per section 3.8.1; or
b. the section 3.8.1 default value for CD\h\ (k=2).
Determine the low temperature cut-out factor, [delta] (Tj), using Equation 4.2.3-3.
4.2.3.4 Heat pump must operate continuously at high (k=2) compressor capacity at temperature Tj, BL(Tj) =QQhk=2(Tj).[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.123 Where[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.124
4.2.4 Additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a variable-speed compressor. Calculate HSPF using Equation 4.2-1. Evaluate the space heating capacity, QQhk=1(Tj), and electrical power consumption, EEhk=1(Tj), of the heat pump when operating at minimum compressor speed and outdoor temperature Tj using[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.125 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.126 where QQhk=1(62) and EEhk=1(62) are determined from the H01 Test, QQhk=1(47) and EEhk=1(47) are determined from the H11 Test, and all four quantities are calculated as specified in section 3.7. Evaluate the space heating capacity, QQhk=2(Tj), and electrical power consumption, EEhk=2(Tj), of the heat pump when operating at maximum compressor speed and outdoor temperature Tj by solving Equations 4.2.2-3 and 4.2.2-4, respectively, for k=2. Determine the Equation 4.2.2-3 and 4.2.2-4 quantities QQhk=2(47) and EEhk=2(47) from the H12 Test and the calculations specified in section 3.7. Determine QQhk=2(35) and EEhk=2(35) from the H22 Test and the calculations specified in section 3.9 or, if the H22 Test is not conducted, by conducting the calculations specified in section 3.6.4. Determine QQhk=2(17) and EEhk=2(17) from the H32 Test and the calculations specified in section 3.10. Calculate the space heating capacity, QQhk=v(Tj), and electrical power consumption, EEhk=v(Tj), of the heat pump when operating at outdoor temperature Tj and the intermediate compressor speed used during the section 3.6.4 H2V Test using [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.127 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.128 where QQhk=v(35) and EEhk=v(35) are determined from the H2V Test and calculated as specified in section 3.9. Approximate the slopes of the k=v intermediate speed heating capacity and electrical power input curves, MQ and ME, as follows:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.092 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.093 where,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.130 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.131
Use Equations 4.2.4-1 and 4.2.4-2, respectively, to calculate QQhk=1(35) and EEhk=1(35).
The calculation of Equation 4.2-1 quantities
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.132
differs depending upon whether the heat pump would operate at minimum speed (section 4.2.4.1), operate at an intermediate speed (section 4.2.4.2), or operate at maximum speed (section 4.2.4.3) in responding to the building load.
4.2.4.1 Steady-state space heating capacity when operating at minimum compressor speed is greater than or equal to the building heating load at temperature Tj, QQhk=1(Tj=BL(Tj). Evaluate the Equation 4.2-1 quantities[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.133 as specified in section 4.2.3.1. Except now use Equations 4.2.4-1 and 4.2.4-2 to evaluate QQhk=1(Tj) and EEhk=1(Tj), respectively, and replace section 4.2.3.1 references to ``low capacity'' and section 3.6.3 with ``minimum speed'' and section 3.6.4. Also, the last sentence of section 4.2.3.1 does not apply.
4.2.4.2 Heat pump operates at an intermediate compressor speed (k=i) in order to match the building heating load at a temperature Tj, QQhk=1(Tj) j) hk=2(Tj). Calculate[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.134 using Equation 4.2.3-2 while evaluating[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.135 using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.136 where,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.137 and [delta](Tj) is evaluated using Equation 4.2.3-3 while, QQhk=i(Tj) = BL(Tj), the
space heating capacity delivered by the unit in matching the
building load at temperature (Tj), Btu/h. The
matching occurs with the heat pump operating at compressor
speed k=i. COPk=i(Tj) = the steady-state coefficient of
performance of the heat pump when operating at compressor
speed k=i and temperature Tj, dimensionless.
For each temperature bin where the heat pump operates at an intermediate compressor speed, determine COPk=i(Tj) using, COPk=i(Tj) = A + B . Tj + C .
Tj\2\.
For each heat pump, determine the coefficients A, B, and C by conducting the following calculations once:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.138 where, T3 = the outdoor temperature at which the heat pump, when
operating at minimum compressor speed, provides a space
heating capacity that is equal to the building load
(QQhk=1(T3) =
BL(T3)), [deg]F. Determine T3 by
equating Equations 4.2.4-1 and 4.2-2 and solving for:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.139
outdoor temperature. Tvh = the outdoor temperature at which the heat pump, when
operating at the intermediate compressor speed used during the
section 3.6.4 H2V Test, provides a space heating
capacity that is equal to the building load
(QQhk=v(Tvh) =
BL(Tvh)), [deg]F. Determine Tvh by
equating Equations 4.2.4-3 and 4.2-2 and solving for outdoor
temperature.T4 = the outdoor temperature at which the heat pump, when
operating at maximum compressor speed, provides a space
heating capacity that is equal to the building load
(QQhk=2(T4) =
BL(T4)), [deg]F. Determine T4 by
equating Equations 4.2.2-3 (k=2) and 4.2-2 and solving for
outdoor temperature.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.140
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.141 For multiple-split heat pumps (only), the following procedures supersede the above requirements for calculating COPhk=i (Tj). For each temperature bin where T3Tj Tvh,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.094 For each temperature bin where Tvh =TjT4,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC07.095
4.2.4.3 Heat pump must operate continuously at maximum (k=2) compressor speed at temperature Tj, BL(Tj) =QQhk=2(Tj). Evaluate the Equation 4.2-1 quantities[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.142 as specified in section 4.2.3.4 with the understanding that QQhk=2(Tj) and EEhk=2(Tj) correspond to maximum compressor speed operation and are derived from the results of the specified section 3.6.4 tests.
4.2.5 Heat pumps having a heat comfort controller. Heat pumps having heat comfort controllers, when set to maintain a typical minimum air delivery temperature, will cause the heat pump condenser to operate less because of a greater contribution from the resistive elements. With a conventional heat pump, resistive heating is only initiated if the heat pump condenser cannot meet the building load (i.e., is delayed until a second stage call from the indoor thermostat). With a heat comfort controller, resistive heating can occur even though the heat pump condenser has adequate capacity to meet the building load (i.e., both on during a first stage call from the indoor thermostat). As a result, the outdoor temperature where the heat pump compressor no longer cycles (i.e., starts to run continuously), will be lower than if the heat pump did not have the heat comfort controller.
4.2.5.1 Heat pump having a heat comfort controller: additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a single-speed compressor that was tested with a fixed-speed indoor fan installed, a constant-air-volume-rate indoor fan installed, or with no indoor fan installed. Calculate the space heating capacity and electrical power of the heat pump without the heat comfort controller being active as specified in section 4.2.1 (Equations 4.2.1-4 and 4.2.1-5) for each outdoor bin temperature, Tj, that is listed in Table 17. Denote these capacities and electrical powers by using the subscript ``hp'' instead of ``h.'' Calculate the mass flow rate (expressed in pounds-mass of dry air per hour) and the specific heat of the indoor air (expressed in Btu/lbmda [middot] [deg]F) from the results of the H1 Test using: [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.143 where VVs, VVmx, v[min]n (or vn), and Wn are defined following Equation 3-1. For each outdoor bin temperature listed in Table 17, calculate the nominal temperature of the air leaving the heat pump condenser coil using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.144
Evaluate eh(Tj/N), RH(Tj)/N, X(Tj), PLFj, and [delta](Tj) as specified in section 4.2.1. For each bin calculation, use the space heating capacity and electrical power from Case 1 or Case 2, whichever applies.
Case 1. For outdoor bin temperatures where To(Tj) is equal to or greater than TCC (the maximum supply temperature determined according to section 3.1.9), determine QQh(Tj) and EEh(Tj) as specified in section 4.2.1 (i.e., QQh(Tj) = QQhp(Tj) and EEhp(Tj) = EEhp(Tj)). Note: Even though To(Tj) =Tcc, resistive heating may be required; evaluate Equation 4.2.1-2 for all bins.
Case 2. For outdoor bin temperatures where To(Tj) Tcc, determine QQh(Tj) and EEh(Tj) using, [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.145 where, [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.146 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.147
Note: Even though To(Tj) cc, additional resistive heating may be required; evaluate Equation 4.2.1-2 for all bins.
4.2.5.2 Heat pump having a heat comfort controller: additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a single-speed compressor and a variable-speed, variable-air-volume-rate indoor fan. Calculate the space heating capacity and electrical power of the heat pump without the heat comfort controller being active as specified in section 4.2.2 (Equations 4.2.2-1 and 4.2.2-2) for each outdoor bin temperature, Tj, that is listed in Table 17. Denote these capacities and electrical powers by using the subscript ``hp'' instead of ``h.'' Calculate the mass flow rate (expressed in pounds-mass of dry air per hour) and the specific heat of the indoor air (expressed in Btu/lbmda [middot] [deg]F) from the results of the H12 Test using:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.148 where VVS, VVmx, v[min]n (or vn), and Wn are defined following Equation 3-1. For each outdoor bin temperature listed in Table 17, calculate the nominal temperature of the air leaving the heat pump condenser coil using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.149
Evaluate eh(Tj)/N , RH(Tj)/N, X(Tj), PLFj, and [delta](Tj) as specified in section 4.2.1 with the exception of replacing references to the H1C Test and section 3.6.1 with the H1C1 Test and section 3.6.2. For each bin calculation, use the space heating capacity and electrical power from Case 1 or Case 2, whichever applies.
Case 1. For outdoor bin temperatures where To(Tj) is equal to or greater than TCC (the maximum supply temperature determined according to section 3.1.9), determine QQh(Tj) and EEh(Tj) as specified in section 4.2.2 (i.e. QQh(Tj) = QQhp(Tj) and EEh(Tj) = EEhp(Tj)). Note: Even though To(Tj) =TCC, resistive heating may be required; evaluate Equation 4.2.1-2 for all bins.
Case 2. For outdoor bin temperatures where To(Tj) CC, determine QQh(Tj) and EEh(Tj) using, QQh(Tj) = QQhp(Tj) +
QQCC(Tj) EEh(Tj) = EEhp(Tj) +
EECC(Tj) where, QQCC(Tj) = mmda [middot]
Cp,da [middot] [TCC -
To(Tj)]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.150
Note: Even though To(Tj) cc, additional resistive heating may be required; evaluate Equation4.2.1-2 for all bins.
4.2.5.3 Heat pumps having a heat comfort controller: additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a two-capacity compressor. Calculate the space heating capacity and electrical power of the heat pump without the heat comfort controller being active as specified in section 4.2.3 for both high and low capacity and at each outdoor bin temperature, Tj, that is listed in Table 17. Denote these capacities and electrical powers by using the subscript ``hp'' instead of ``h.'' For the low capacity case, calculate the mass flow rate (expressed in pounds-mass of dry air per hour) and the specific heat of the indoor air (expressed in Btu/lbmda [middot] [deg]F) from the results of the H11 Test using:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.151 where VVs, VVmx, v[min]n (or vn), and Wn are defined following Equation 3-1. For each outdoor bin temperature listed in Table 17, calculate the nominal temperature of the air leaving the heat pump condenser coil when operating at low capacity using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.152
Repeat the above calculations to determine the mass flow rate (mmdak=2) and the specific heat of the indoor air (Cp,dak=2) when operating at high capacity by using the results of the H12 Test. For each outdoor bin temperature listed in Table 17, calculate the nominal temperature of the air leaving the heat pump condenser coil when operating at high capacity using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.153
Evaluate eh(Tj)/N, RH(Tj)/N, Xk=1(Tj), and/or Xk=2(Tj), PLFj, and [delta][min](Tj) or [delta][sec](Tj) as specified in section 4.2.3.1. 4.2.3.2, 4.2.3.3, or 4.2.3.4, whichever applies, for each temperature bin. To evaluate these quantities, use the low-capacity space heating capacity and the low-capacity electrical power from Case 1 or Case 2, whichever applies; use the high-capacity space heating capacity and the high-capacity electrical power from Case 3 or Case 4, whichever applies.
Case 1. For outdoor bin temperatures where Tok=1(Tj) is equal to or greater than TCC (the maximum supply temperature determined according to section 3.1.9), determine QQhk=1(Tj) and EEhk=1(Tj) as specified in section 4.2.3 (i.e., QQhk=1(Tj) = QQhpk=1(Tj) and EEhk=1(Tj) = EEhpk=1(Tj).
Note: Even though Tok=1(Tj) =TCC, resistive heating may be required; evaluate RH(Tj)/N for all bins.
Case 2. For outdoor bin temperatures where Tok=1(Tj) CC, determine QQhk=1(Tj) and EEhk=1(Tj) using, QQhk=1(Tj) =
QQhpk=1(Tj) +
QQCCk=1(Tj) EEhk=1(Tj) =
EEhpk=1(Tj) +
EECCk=1(Tj) where, [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.154
Note: Even though Tok=1(Tj) =Tcc, additional resistive heating may be required; evaluate RH(Tj)/N for all bins.
Case 3. For outdoor bin temperatures where Tok=2(Tj) is equal to or greater than TCC, determine QQhk=2(Tj) and EEhk=2(Tj) as specified in section 4.2.3 (i.e., QQhk=2(Tj) = QQhpk=2(Tj) and EEhk=2(Tj) = EEhpk=2(Tj)).
Note: Even though Tok=2(Tj) CC, resistive heating may be required; evaluate RH(Tj)/N for all bins.
Case 4. For outdoor bin temperatures where Tok=2(Tj) CC, determine QQhk=2(Tj) and EEhk=2(Tj) using,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.155 where,[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.156
Note: Even though Tok=2(Tj) cc, additional resistive heating may be required; evaluate RH(Tj)/N for all bins.
4.2.5.4 Heat pumps having a heat comfort controller: additional steps for calculating the HSPF of a heat pump having a variable-speed compressor. [Reserved]
4.3 Calculations of the Actual and Representative Regional Annual Performance Factors for Heat Pumps.
4.3.1 Calculation of actual regional annual performance factors (APFA) for a particular location and for each standardized design heating requirement.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.157 where, CLHA = the actual cooling hours for a particular location as
determined using the map given in Figure 3, hr.QQc\k\(95) = the space cooling capacity of the unit as
determined from the A or A2 Test, whichever
applies, Btu/h.HLHA = the actual heating hours for a particular location as
determined using the map given in Figure 2, hr.DHR = the design heating requirement used in determining the HSPF; refer
to section 4.2 and Definition 1.22, Btu/h.C = defined in section 4.2 following Equation 4.2-2, dimensionless.SEER = the seasonal energy efficiency ratio calculated as specified in
section 4.1, Btu/W[middot]h.HSPF = the heating seasonal performance factor calculated as specified
in section 4.2 for the generalized climatic region that
includes the particular location of interest (see Figure 2),
Btu/W[middot]h. The HSPF should correspond to the actual
design heating requirement (DHR), if known. If it does not, it
may correspond to one of the standardized design heating
requirements referenced in section 4.2.
4.3.2 Calculation of representative regional annual performance factors (APFR) for each generalized climatic region and for each standardized design heating requirement.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.158 where, CLHR = the representative cooling hours for each generalized
climatic region, Table 19, hr.HLHR = the representative heating hours for each generalized
climatic region, Table 19, hr.HSPF = the heating seasonal performance factor calculated as specified
in section 4.2 for the each generalized climatic region and
for each standardized design heating requirement within each
region, Btu/W.h.
The SEER, QQc\k\(95), DHR, and C are the same quantities as defined in section 4.3.1. Figure 2 shows the generalized climatic regions. Table 18 lists standardized design heating requirements.
Table 19--Representative Cooling and Heating Load Hours for Each
Generalized Climatic Region------------------------------------------------------------------------
Region CLHR HLHR------------------------------------------------------------------------I................................................. 2400 750II................................................ 1800 1250III............................................... 1200 1750IV................................................ 800 2250V................................................. 400 2750VI................................................ 200 2750------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.4. Rounding of SEER, HSPF, and APF for reporting purposes. After calculating SEER according to section 4.1, round it off as specified in subpart B 430.23(m)(3)(i) of Title 10 of the Code of Federal Regulations. Round section 4.2 HSPF values and section 4.3 APF values as per Sec. 430.23(m)(3)(ii) and (iii) of Title 10 of the Code of Federal Regulations. [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.172 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR11OC05.173 [70 FR 59135, Oct. 11, 2005, as amended at 72 FR 59922, Oct. 22, 2007; 76 FR 37546, June 27, 2011]
Editorial Note: At 72 FR 59922, Oct. 22, 2007, appendix M to subpart B of part 430 was amended; however, portions of the amendment could not be incorporated due to inaccurate amendatory instruction.
Sec. Appendix N to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers
Note: The procedures and calculations that refer to off mode energy consumption (i.e., sections 8.6 and 10.11 of this appendix N) need not be performed to determine compliance with energy conservation standards for furnaces and boilers at this time. However, any representation related to standby mode and off mode energy consumption of these products made after July 1, 2013 must be based upon results generated under this test procedure, consistent with the requirements of 42 U.S.C. 6293(c)(2). For furnaces manufactured on or after May 1, 2013, compliance with the applicable provisions of this test procedure is required in order to determine compliance with energy conservation standards. For boilers, the statute requires that after July 1, 2010, any adopted energy conservation standard shall address standby mode and off mode energy consumption for these products, and upon the compliance date for such standards, compliance with the applicable provisions of this test procedure will be required.
1.0 Scope. The scope of this appendix is as specified in section 2.0 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.
2.0 Definitions. Definitions include the definitions specified in section 3 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 and the following additional and modified definitions:
2.1 Active mode means the condition during the heating season in which the furnace or boiler is connected to the power source, and either the burner, electric resistance elements, or any electrical auxiliaries such as blowers or pumps, are activated.
2.2 ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 means the test standard published in 1993 by ASHRAE, approved by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) on October 4, 1993, and entitled ``Method of Testing for Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency of Residential Central Furnaces and Boilers'' (with errata of October 24, 1996).
2.3 ASHRAE means the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
2.4 IEC 62301 means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), titled ``Household electrical appliances--Measurement of standby power,'' Publication 62301 (Edition 2.0 2011-01). (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3)
2.5 Isolated combustion system. The definition of isolation combustion system in section 3 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 is incorporated with the addition of the following: ``The unit is installed in an un-conditioned indoor space isolated from the heated space.''
2.6 Off mode means the condition during the non-heating season in which the furnace or boiler is connected to the power source, and neither the burner, electric resistance elements, nor any electrical auxiliaries such as blowers or pumps, are activated.
2.7 Seasonal off switch means the switch on the furnace or boiler that, when activated, results in a measurable change in energy consumption between the standby and off modes.
2.8 Standby mode means the condition during the heating season in which the furnace or boiler is connected to the power source, and neither the burner, electric resistance elements, nor any electrical auxiliaries such as blowers or pumps, are activated.
2.9 Thermal stack damper means a type of stack damper which is dependent for operation exclusively upon the direct conversion of thermal energy of the stack gases to open the damper.
3.0 Classifications. Classifications are as specified in section 4 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.
4.0 Requirements. Requirements are as specified in section 5 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.
5.0 Instruments. Instruments must be as specified in section 6 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.
6.0 Apparatus. The apparatus used in conjunction with the furnace or boiler during the testing shall be as specified in section 7 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 except for the second paragraph of section 7.2.2.2 and except for section 7.2.2.5, and as specified in section 6.1 of this appendix.
6.1 Downflow furnaces. Install the internal section of vent pipe the same size as the flue collar for connecting the flue collar to the top of the unit, if not supplied by the manufacturer. Do not insulate the internal vent pipe during the jacket loss test (if conducted) described in section 8.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 or the steady-state test described in section 9.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993. Do not insulate the internal vent pipe before the cool-down and heat-up tests described in sections 9.5 and 9.6, respectively, of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993. If the vent pipe is surrounded by a metal jacket, do not insulate the metal jacket. Install a 5-ft test stack of the same cross sectional area or perimeter as the vent pipe above the top of the furnace. Tape or seal around the junction connecting the vent pipe and the 5-ft test stack. Insulate the 5-ft test stack with insulation having an R-value not less than 7 and an outer layer of aluminum foil. (See Figure 3-E of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.)
7.0 Testing conditions. The testing conditions shall be as specified in section 8 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 with errata of October 24, 1996, except for section 8.6.1.1; and as specified in section 7.1 of this appendix.
7.1 Measurement of jacket surface temperature. The jacket of the furnace or boiler shall be subdivided into 6-inch squares when practical, and otherwise into 36-square-inch regions comprising 4 in. x 9 in. or 3 in. x 12 in. sections, and the surface temperature at the center of each square or section shall be determined with a surface thermocouple. The 36-square-inch areas shall be recorded in groups where the temperature differential of the 36-square-inch area is less than 10 [deg]F for temperature up to 100 [deg]F above room temperature and less than 20 [deg]F for temperature more than 100 [deg]F above room temperature. For forced air central furnaces, the circulating air blower compartment is considered as part of the duct system and no surface temperature measurement of the blower compartment needs to be recorded for the purpose of this test. For downflow furnaces, measure all cabinet surface temperatures of the heat exchanger and combustion section, including the bottom around the outlet duct, and the burner door, using the 36 square-inch thermocouple grid. The cabinet surface temperatures around the blower section do not need to be measured (See figure 3-E of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993.)
8.0 Test procedure. Testing and measurements shall be as specified in section 9 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 except for sections 9.5.1.1, 9.5.1.2.1, 9.5.1.2.2, 9.5.2.1, and section 9.7.1. ; and as specified in sections 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, and 8.5, of this appendix.
8.1 Input to interrupted ignition device. For burners equipped with an interrupted ignition device, record the nameplate electric power used by the ignition device, PEIG, or use PEIG = 0.4 kW if no nameplate power input is provided. Record the nameplate ignition device on-time interval, tIG, or measure the on-time period at the beginning of the test at the time the burner is turned on with a stop watch, if no nameplate value is given. Set tIG = 0 and PEIG = 0 if the device on-time is less than or equal to 5 seconds after the burner is on.
8.2 Gas- and oil-fueled gravity and forced air central furnaces without stack dampers cool-down test. Turn off the main burner after steady-state testing is completed, and measure the flue gas temperature by means of the thermocouple grid described in section 7.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE 103-1993 at 1.5 minutes (TF,OFF(t3)) and 9 minutes (TF,OFF(t4)) after the burner shuts off. An integral draft diverter shall remain blocked and insulated, and the stack restriction shall remain in place. On atmospheric systems with an integral draft diverter or draft hood, equipped with either an electromechanical inlet damper or an electro-mechanical flue damper that closes within 10 seconds after the burner shuts off to restrict the flow through the heat exchanger in the off-cycle, bypass or adjust the control for the electromechanical damper so that the damper remains open during the cool-down test. For furnaces that employ post purge, measure the length of the post-purge period with a stopwatch. The time from burner OFF to combustion blower OFF (electrically de-energized) shall be recorded as tp. For the case where tp is intended to be greater than 180 seconds, stop the combustion blower at 180 seconds and use that value for tp. Measure the flue gas temperature by means of the thermocouple grid described in section 7.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE 103-1993 at the end of post-purge period, tp (TF,OFF(tp)), and at the time (1.5 + tp) minutes (TF,OFF(t3)) and (9.0 + tp) minutes (TF,OFF(t4)) after the main burner shuts off. For the case where the measured tp is less than or equal to 30 seconds, it shall be tested as if there is no post purge and tp shall be set equal to 0.
8.3 Gas- and oil-fueled gravity and forced air central furnaces without stack dampers with adjustable fan control--cool-down test. For a furnace with adjustable fan control, this time delay will be 3.0 minutes for non-condensing furnaces or 1.5 minutes for condensing furnaces or until the supply air temperature drops to a value of 40 [deg]F above the inlet air temperature, whichever results in the longest fan on-time. For a furnace without adjustable fan control or with the type of adjustable fan control whose range of adjustment does not allow for the delay time specified above, the control shall be bypassed and the fan manually controlled to give the delay times specified above. For a furnace which employs a single motor to drive the power burner and the indoor air circulating blower, the power burner and indoor air circulating blower shall be stopped together.
8.4 Gas-and oil-fueled boilers without stack dampers cool-down test. After steady-state testing has been completed, turn the main burner(s) OFF and measure the flue gas temperature at 3.75 (TF,OFF(t3)) and 22.5 (TF,OFF(t4)) minutes after the burner shut off, using the thermocouple grid described in section 7.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE 103-1993. During this off-period, for units that do not have pump delay after shutoff, no water shall be allowed to circulate through the hot water boilers. For units that have pump delay on shutoff, except those having pump controls sensing water temperature, the pump shall be stopped by the unit control and the time t\+\, between burner shutoff and pump shutoff shall be measured within one-second accuracy. For units having pump delay controls that sense water temperature, the pump shall be operated for 15 minutes and t\+\ shall be 15 minutes. While the pump is operating, the inlet water temperature and flow rate shall be maintained at the same values as used during the steady-state test as specified in sections 9.1 and 8.4.2.3 of ANSI/ASHRAE 103-1993.
For boilers that employ post purge, measure the length of the post-purge period with a stopwatch. The time from burner OFF to combustion blower OFF (electrically de-energized) shall be recorded as tP. For the case where tP is intended to be greater than 180 seconds, stop the combustion blower at 180 seconds and use that value for tP. Measure the flue gas temperature by means of the thermocouple grid described in section 7.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE 103-1993 at the end of the post purge period tP(TF,OFF(tP)) and at the time (3.75 + tP) minutes (TF,OFF(t3)) and (22.5 + tP) minutes (TF,OFF(t4)) after the main burner shuts off. For the case where the measured tP is less or equal to 30 seconds, it shall be tested as if there is no post purge and tP shall be set to equal 0.
8.5 Direct measurement of off-cycle losses testing method. [Reserved.]
8.6 Measurement of electrical standby and off mode power.
8.6.1 Standby power measurement. With all electrical auxiliaries of the furnace or boiler not activated, measure the standby power (PW,SB) in accordance with the procedures in IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3), except that section 8.5 Room Ambient Temperature of ASHRAE 103--1993 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) and the voltage provision of section 8.2.1.4 Electrical Supply of ASHRAE 103--1993 shall apply in lieu of the corresponding provisions of IEC 62301 at section 4.2 Test room and the voltage specification of section 4.3 Power supply. Frequency shall be 60Hz. Clarifying further, IEC 62301 section 4.4 Power measurement instruments and section 5 Measurements shall apply in lieu of section 6.10 Energy Flow Rate of ASHRAE 103--1993. Measure the wattage so that all possible standby mode wattage for the entire appliance is recorded, not just the standby mode wattage of a single auxiliary. The recorded standby power (PW,SB) shall be rounded to the second decimal place, and for loads greater than or equal to 10W, at least three significant figures shall be reported.
8.6.2 Off mode power measurement. If the unit is equipped with a seasonal off switch or there is an expected difference between off mode power and standby mode power, measure off mode power (PW,OFF) in accordance with the standby power procedures in IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3), except that section 8.5 Room Ambient Temperature of ASHRAE 103--1993 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) and the voltage provision of section 8.2.1.4 Electrical Supply of ASHRAE 103--1993 shall apply in lieu of the corresponding provisions of IEC 62301 at section 4.2 Test room and the voltage specification of section 4.3 Power supply. Frequency shall be 60Hz. Clarifying further, IEC 62301 section 4.4 Power measurement instruments and section 5 Measurements shall apply for this measurement in lieu of section 6.10 Energy Flow Rate of ASHRAE 103--1993. Measure the wattage so that all possible off mode wattage for the entire appliance is recorded, not just the off mode wattage of a single auxiliary. If there is no expected difference in off mode power and standby mode power, let PW,OFF = PW,SB, in which case no separate measurement of off mode power is necessary. The recorded off mode power (PW,OFF) shall be rounded to the second decimal place, and for loads greater than or equal to 10W, at least three significant figures shall be reported.
9.0 Nomenclature. Nomenclature shall include the nomenclature specified in section 10 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 and the following additional variables: Effmotor = Efficiency of power burner motorPEIG = Electrical power to the interrupted ignition device,
kWRT,a = RT,F if flue gas is measured
= RT,S if stack gas is measuredRT,F = Ratio of combustion air mass flow rate to
stoichiometric air mass flow rateRT,S = Ratio of the sum of combustion air and relief air mass
flow rate to stoichiometric air mass flow ratetIG = Electrical interrupted ignition device on-time, min.Ta,SS,X = TF,SS,X if flue gas temperature is
measured, [deg]F
= TS,SS,X if stack gas temperature is measured, [deg]FyIG = ratio of electrical interrupted ignition device on-time
to average burner on-timeyP = ratio of power burner combustion blower on-time to
average burner on-timeESO = Average annual electric standby mode and off mode
energy consumption, in kilowatt-hoursPW,OFF = Furnace or boiler off mode power, in wattsPW,SB = Furnace or boiler standby mode power, in watts
10.0 Calculation of derived results from test measurements. Calculations shall be as specified in section 11 of ANSI/ASHRAE 103-1993 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) and the October 24, 1996, Errata Sheet for ASHRAE 103-1993, except for sections 11.5.11.1, 11.5.11.2, and appendices B and C; and as specified in sections 10.1 through 10.11 and Figure 1 of this appendix.
10.1 Annual fuel utilization efficiency. The annual fuel utilization efficiency (AFUE) is as defined in sections 11.2.12 (non-condensing systems), 11.3.12 (condensing systems), 11.4.12 (non-condensing modulating systems), and 11.5.12 (condensing modulating systems) of ANSI/ASHRAE 103-1993 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3), except for the definition for the term EffyHS in the defining equation for AFUE. EffyHS is defined as:
EffyHS = heating seasonal efficiency as defined in sections 11.2.11 (non-condensing systems), 11.3.11 (condensing systems), 11.4.11 (non-condensing modulating systems), and 11.5.11 (condensing modulating systems) of ANSI/ASHRAE 103-1993, except that for condensing modulating systems sections 11.5.11.1 and 11.5.11.2 are replaced by sections 10.2 and 10.3 of this appendix. EffyHS is based on the assumptions that all weatherized warm air furnaces or boilers are located outdoors, that warm air furnaces which are not weatherized are installed as isolated combustion systems, and that boilers which are not weatherized are installed indoors.
10.2 Part-Load Efficiency at Reduced Fuel Input Rate. Calculate the part-load efficiency at the reduced fuel input rate, EffyU,R, for condensing furnaces and boilers equipped with either step modulating or two-stage controls, expressed as a percent and defined as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR30AU13.000 Where: LL,A = value as defined in section 11.2.7 of ASHRAE 103-1993,LG = value as defined in section 11.3.11.1 of ASHRAE 103-1993
at reduced input rate,LC = value as defined in section 11.3.11.2 of ASHRAE 103-1993
at reduced input rate,LJ = value as defined in section 11.4.8.1.1 of ASHRAE 103-
1993 at maximum input rate,tON = value as defined in section 11.4.9.11 of ASHRAE 103-
1993,QP = pilot flame fuel input rate determined in accordance
with section 9.2 of ASHRAE 103-1993 in Btu/h,QIN = value as defined in section 11.4.8.1.1 of ASHRAE 103-
1993,tOFF = value as defined in section 11.4.9.12 of ASHRAE 103-
1993 at reduced input rate,LS,ON = value as defined in section 11.4.10.5 of ASHRAE 103-
1993 at reduced input rate,LS,OFF = value as defined in section 11.4.10.6 of ASHRAE 103-
1993 at reduced input rate,LI,ON = value as defined in section 11.4.10.7 of ASHRAE 103-
1993 at reduced input rate,LI,OFF = value as defined in section 11.4.10.8 of ASHRAE 103-
1993 at reduced input rate,CJ = jacket loss factor and equal to:
= 0.0 for furnaces or boilers intended to be installed indoors
= 1.7 for furnaces intended to be installed as isolated combustion
systems
= 2.4 for boilers (other than finned-tube boilers) intended to be
installed as isolated combustion systems
= 3.3 for furnaces intended to be installed outdoors
= 4.7 for boilers (other than finned-tube boilers) intended to be
installed outdoors
= 1.0 for finned-tube boilers intended to be installed outdoors
= 0.5 for finned-tube boilers intended to be installed in internal
combustion system applicationsLS,SS = value as defined in section 11.5.6 of ASHRAE 103-1993
at reduced input rate,CS = value as defined in section 11.5.10.1 of ASHRAE 103-1993
at reduced input rate.
10.3 Part-Load Efficiency at Maximum Fuel Input Rate. Calculate the part-load efficiency at maximum fuel input rate, EffyU,H, for condensing furnaces and boilers equipped with two-stage controls, expressed as a percent and defined as: [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR30AU13.001 Where: LL,A = value as defined in section 11.2.7 of ASHRAE 103-1993,LG = value as defined in section 11.3.11.1 of ASHRAE 103-1993
at maximum input rate,LC = value as defined in section 11.3.11.2 of ASHRAE 103-1993
at maximum input rate,LJ = value as defined in section 11.4.8.1.1 of ASHRAE 103-
1993 at maximum input rate,tON = value as defined in section 11.4.9.11 of ASHRAE 103-
1993,QP = pilot flame fuel input rate determined in accordance
with section 9.2 of ASHRAE 103-1993 in Btu/h,QIN = value as defined in section 11.4.8.1.1 of ASHRAE 103-
1993,tOFF = value as defined in section 11.4.9.12 of ASHRAE 103-
1993 at maximum input rate,LS,ON = value as defined in section 11.4.10.5 of ASHRAE 103-
1993 at maximum input rate,LS,OFF = value as defined in section 11.4.10.6 of ASHRAE 103-
1993 at maximum input rate,LI,ON = value as defined in section 11.4.10.7 of ASHRAE 103-
1993 at maximum input rate,LI,OFF = value as defined in section 11.4.10.8 of ASHRAE 103-
1993 at maximum input rate,CJ = value as defined in section 10.2 of this appendix,LS,SS = value as defined in section 11.5.6 of ASHRAE 103-1993
at maximum input rate,CS = value as defined in section 11.5.10.1 of ASHRAE 103-1993
at maximum input rate.
10.4 National average burner operating hours, average annual fuel energy consumption, and average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for gas or oil furnaces and boilers.
10.4.1 National average number of burner operating hours. For furnaces and boilers equipped with single stage controls, the national average number of burner operating hours is defined as: BOHSS = 2,080 (0.77) A DHR-2,080 B Where: 2,080 = national average heating load hours0.77 = adjustment factor to adjust the calculated design heating
requirement and heating load hours to the actual heating load
experienced by the heating systemDHR = typical design heating requirements as listed in Table 8 (in unit
of kBtu/h) of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, using the proper
value of QOUT defined in 11.2.8.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 103-1993A = 100,000/[341,300(yP PE + yIG PEIG +
yBE) + (QIN -QP)EffyHS ], for
forced draft unit, indoors
= 100,000/[341,300(yP PE Effmotor +
yIG PEIG + y BE) + (QIN -
QP)EffyHS ], for forced draft unit, ICS,
= 100,000/[341,300(yP PE(1 - Effmotor) +
yIG PEIG + y BE) + (QIN -
QP)EffyHS ], for induced draft unit,
indoors, and
= 100,000/[341,300(yIG PEIG + yBE) +
(QIN -QP)EffyHS ], for
induced draft unit, ICSB = 2 QP (EffyHS)(A)/100,000 Where: Effmotor = Power burner motor efficiency provided by
manufacturer,
= 0.50, an assumed default power burner efficiency if not provided by
manufacturer.100,000 = factor that accounts for percent and kBtuPE = burner electrical power input at full-load steady-state operation,
including electrical ignition device if energized, as defined
in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993yP = ratio of induced or forced draft blower on-time to
average burner on-time, as follows:
1 for units without post purge;
1 + (tP/3.87) for single-stage furnaces with post purge;
1 + (tP/10) for two-stage and step modulating furnaces with
post purge;
1 + (tP/9.68) for single-stage boilers with post purge; or
1 + (tP/15) for two-stage and step modulating boilers with
post purge.PEIG = electrical input rate to the interrupted ignition
device on burner (if employed), as defined in 8.1 of this
appendixyIG = ratio of burner interrupted ignition device on-time to
average burner on-time, as follows:
0 for burners not equipped with interrupted ignition device;
(tIG/3.87) for single-stage furnaces;
(tIG/10) for two-stage and step modulating furnaces;
(tIG/9.68) for single-stage boilers; or
(tIG/15) for two-stage and step modulating boilers.tIG = on-time of the burner interrupted ignition device, as
defined in 8.1 of this appendixtP = post purge time as defined in 8.2 (furnace) or 8.4
(boiler) of this appendix
= 0 if tP is equal to or less than 30 seconds.y = ratio of blower or pump on-time to average burner on-time, as
follows:
1 for furnaces without fan delay;
1 for boilers without a pump delay;
1 + (t\+\ - t-)/3.87 for single-stage furnaces with fan
delay;
1 + (t\+\ - t-)/10 for two-stage and step modulating
furnaces with fan delay;
1 + (t\+\/9.68) for single-stage boilers with pump delay; or
1 + (t\+\/15) for two-stage and step modulating boilers with pump
delay.BE = circulating air fan or water pump electrical energy input rate at
full-load steady-state operation, as defined in ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 103-1993QIN = as defined in 11.2.8.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993QP = as defined in 11.2.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993EffyHS = as defined in 11.2.11 (non-condensing systems) or
11.3.11.3 (condensing systems) of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-
1993, percent, and calculated on the basis of:
ICS installation, for non-weatherized warm air furnaces;
indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers; or
outdoor installation, for furnaces and boilers that are weatherized.2 = ratio of the average length of the heating season in hours to the
average heating load hourst\+\ = as defined in 9.5.1.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 or 8.4 of
this appendixt- = as defined in 9.6.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
10.4.1.1 For furnaces and boilers equipped with two-stage or step modulating controls, the average annual energy used during the heating season, EM, is defined as: EM = (QIN -QP) BOHSS +
(8,760-4,600)QP Where: QIN = as defined in 11.4.8.1.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-
1993QP = as defined in 11.4.12 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993BOHSS = as defined in section 10.4.1 of this appendix, in
which the weighted EffyHS as defined in 11.4.11.3
or 11.5.11.3 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 is used for
calculating the values of A and B, the term DHR is based on
the value of QOUT defined in 11.4.8.1.1 or
11.5.8.1.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, and the term
(yP PE + yIGPEIG + yBE) in
the factor A is increased by the factor R, which is defined
as:R = 2.3 for two-stage controls
= 2.3 for step modulating controls when the ratio of minimum-to-maximum
output is greater than or equal to 0.5
= 3.0 for step modulating controls when the ratio of minimum-to-maximum
output is less than 0.5A = 100,000/[341,300(yP PE + yIG PEIG +
y BE) R + (QIN -QP) EffyHS ],
for forced draft unit, indoors
= 100,000/[341,300(yP PE Effmotor +
yIG PEIG + y BE) R + (QIN -
QP)EffyHS ], for forced draft unit, ICS,
= 100,000/[341,300(yP PE(1-Effmotor) +
yIG PEIG + y BE) R + (QIN -
QP) EffyHS ], for induced draft unit,
indoors, and
= 100,000/[341,300(yIG PEIG + y BE) R +
(QIN -QP) EffyHS ], for
induced draft unit, ICS Where: Effmotor = Power burner motor efficiency provided by
manufacturer,
= 0.50, an assumed default power burner efficiency if none provided by
manufacturer.EffyHS = as defined in 11.4.11.3 or 11.5.11.3 of ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 103-1993, and calculated on the basis of:
--ICS installation, for non-weatherized warm air furnaces
--indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers
--outdoor installation, for furnaces and boilers that are weatherized 8,760 = total number of hours per year4,600 = as specified in 11.4.12 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
10.4.1.2 For furnaces and boilers equipped with two-stage or step modulating controls, the national average number of burner operating hours at the reduced operating mode is defined as: BOHR = XR EM/QIN,R Where: XR = as defined in 11.4.8.7 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
EM = as defined in section 10.4.1.1 of this appendix
QIN,R = as defined in 11.4.8.1.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
10.4.1.3 For furnaces and boilers equipped with two-stage controls, the national average number of burner operating hours at the maximum operating mode (BOHH) is defined as:BOHH = XH EM/QIN Where: XH = as defined in 11.4.8.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993EM = as defined in section 10.4.1.1 of this appendixQIN = as defined in 11.4.8.1.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-
1993
10.4.1.4 For furnaces and boilers equipped with step modulating controls, the national average number of burner operating hours at the modulating operating mode (BOHM) is defined as: BOHM = XH EM/QIN,M Where: XH = as defined in 11.4.8.6 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993EM = as defined in section 10.4.1.1 of this appendixQIN,M = QOUT,M/(EffySS,M/100)QOUT,M = as defined in 11.4.8.10 or 11.5.8.10 of ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 103-1993, as appropriateEffySS,M = as defined in 11.4.8.8 or 11.5.8.8 of ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 103-1993, as appropriate, in percent100 = factor that accounts for percent
10.4.2 Average annual fuel energy consumption for gas or oil fueled furnaces or boilers. For furnaces or boilers equipped with single-stage controls, the average annual fuel energy consumption (EF) is expressed in Btu per year and defined as: EF = BOHSS (QIN -QP)+8,760
QP Where: BOHSS = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendixQIN = as defined in 11.2.8.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993QP = as defined in 11.2.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-19938,760 = as specified in 10.4.1.1 of this appendix
10.4.2.1 For furnaces or boilers equipped with either two-stage or step modulating controls, EF is defined as: EF = EM + 4,600QP Where: EM = as defined in 10.4.1.1 of this appendix4,600 = as specified in 11.4.12 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993QP = as defined in 11.2.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993
10.4.3 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for gas or oil-fueled furnaces or boilers. For furnaces and boilers equipped with single-stage controls, the average annual auxiliary electrical consumption (EAE) is expressed in kilowatt-hours and defined as: EAE = BOHSS (yP PE + yIG
PEIG + yBE) + ESO Where: BOHSS = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendixPE = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendixyP = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendixyIG = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendixPEIG = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendixy = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendixBE = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendixESO = as defined in 10.11 of this appendix.
10.4.3.1 For furnaces or boilers equipped with two-stage controls, EAE is defined as: EAE = BOHR (yP PER +
yIG PEIG + yBER) +
BOHH (yP PEH + yIG
PEIG + y BEH) + ESO Where: BOHR = as defined in 10.4.1.2 of this appendixyP = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendixPER = as defined in 9.1.2.2 and measured at the reduced fuel
input rate of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993, (incorporated by
reference, see Sec. 430.3)yIG = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendixPEIG = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendixy = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendixBER = as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993,
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) measured at the
reduced fuel input rateBOHH = as defined in 10.4.1.3 of this appendixPEH = as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993,
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) measured at the
maximum fuel input rateBEH = as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993,
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) measured at the
maximum fuel input rateESO = as defined in 10.11 of this appendix.
10.4.3.2 For furnaces or boilers equipped with step-modulating controls, EAE is defined as: EAE = BOHR (yP PER +
yIG PEIG + yBER) +
BOHM (yP PEH + yIG
PEIG + y BEH) + ESO Where: BOHR = as defined in 10.4.1.2 of this appendixyP = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendix PER = as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993,
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3), measured at the
reduced fuel input rateyIG = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendixPEIG = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendixy = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendixBER = as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993,
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) measured at the
reduced fuel input rateBOHM = as defined in 10.4.1.4 of this appendixPEH = as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993,
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) measured at the
maximum fuel input rateBEH = as defined in 9.1.2.2 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993,
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) measured at the
maximum fuel input rateESO = as defined in 10.11 of this appendix.
10.5 Average annual electric energy consumption for electric furnaces or boilers. EE = 100(2,080)(0.77)DHR/(3.412 AFUE) + ESO Where: 100 = to express a percent as a decimal2,080 = as specified in 10.4.1 of this appendix0.77 = as specified in 10.4.1 of this appendixDHR = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendix3.412 = conversion to express energy in terms of watt-hours instead of
BtuAFUE = as defined in 11.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 (incorporated
by reference, see Sec. 430.3), in percent, and calculated on
the basis of: ICS installation, for non-weatherized warm air
furnaces; indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers; or
outdoor installation, for furnaces and boilers that are
weatherized.ESO = as defined in 10.11 of this appendix.
10.6 Energy factor.
10.6.1 Energy factor for gas or oil furnaces and boilers. Calculate the energy factor, EF, for gas or oil furnaces and boilers defined as, in percent:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR30AU13.002 Where: EF = average annual fuel consumption as defined in 10.4.2 of
this appendix.EAE = as defined in 10.4.3 of this appendix.EffyHS = Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency as defined in
11.2.11, 11.3.11, 11.4.11 or 11.5.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard
103-1993, in percent, and calculated on the basis of:
ICS installation, for non-weatherized warm air furnaces;
indoor installation, for non-weatherized boilers; or
outdoor installation, for furnaces and boilers that are weatherized.3,412 = conversion factor from kilowatt to Btu/h
10.6.2 Energy factor for electric furnaces and boilers. The energy factor, EF, for electric furnaces and boilers is defined as: EF = AFUE Where: AFUE = Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency as defined in section 10.5 of
this appendix, in percent
10.7 Average annual energy consumption for furnaces and boilers located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements.
10.7.1 Average annual fuel energy consumption for gas or oil-fueled furnaces and boilers located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements. For gas or oil-fueled furnaces and boilers, the average annual fuel energy consumption for a specific geographic region and a specific typical design heating requirement (EFR) is expressed in Btu per year and defined as: EFR = (EF -8,760 QP)(HLH/2,080) + 8,760
QP Where: EF = as defined in 10.4.2 of this appendix8,760 = as specified in 10.4.1.1 of this appendixQP = as defined in 11.2.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993HLH = heating load hours for a specific geographic region determined
from the heating load hour map in Figure 1 of this appendix2,080 = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendix
10.7.2 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for gas or oil-fueled furnaces and boilers located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements. For gas or oil-fueled furnaces and boilers, the average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for a specific geographic region and a specific typical design heating requirement (EAER) is expressed in kilowatt-hours and defined as: EAER = (EAE - ESO) (HLH/2080) +
ESOR Where: EAE = as defined in 10.4.3 of this appendixESO = as defined in 10.11 of this appendixHLH = as defined in 10.7.1 of this appendix 2,080 = as specified in 10.4.1 of this appendixESOR = as specified in 10.7.3 of this appendix.
10.7.3 Average annual electric energy consumption for electric furnaces and boilers located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements. For electric furnaces and boilers, the average annual electric energy consumption for a specific geographic region and a specific typical design heating requirement (EER) is expressed in kilowatt-hours and defined as: EER = 100(0.77) DHR HLH/(3.412 AFUE) + ESOR Where: 100 = as specified in 10.5 of this appendix0.77 = as specified in 10.4.1 of this appendixDHR = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendixHLH = as defined in 10.7.1 of this appendix3.412 = as specified in 10.5 of this appendixAFUE = as defined in 10.5 of this appendixESOR = ESO as defined in 10.11 of this appendix,
except that in the equation for ESO, the term BOH
is multiplied by the expression (HLH/2080) to get the
appropriate regional accounting of standby mode and off mode
loss.
10.8 Annual energy consumption for mobile home furnaces.
10.8.1 National average number of burner operating hours for mobile home furnaces (BOHSS). BOHSS is the same as in 10.4.1 of this appendix, except that the value of EffyHS in the calculation of the burner operating hours, BOHSS, is calculated on the basis of a direct vent unit with system number 9 or 10.
10.8.2 Average annual fuel energy for mobile home furnaces (EF). EF is same as in 10.4.2 of this appendix except that the burner operating hours, BOHSS, is calculated as specified in 10.8.1 of this appendix.
10.8.3 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for mobile home furnaces (EAE). EAE is the same as in 10.4.3 of this appendix, except that the burner operating hours, BOHSS, is calculated as specified in 10.8.1 of this appendix.
10.9 Calculation of sales weighted average annual energy consumption for mobile home furnaces. In order to reflect the distribution of mobile homes to geographical regions with average HLHMHF value different from 2,080, adjust the annual fossil fuel and auxiliary electrical energy consumption values for mobile home furnaces using the following adjustment calculations.
10.9.1 For mobile home furnaces, the sales weighted average annual fossil fuel energy consumption is expressed in Btu per year and defined as: EF,MHF = (EF - 8,760
QP)HLHMHF/2,080+8,760 QP Where: EF = as defined in 10.8.2 of this appendix8,760 = as specified in 10.4.1.1 of this appendixQP = as defined in 11.2.11 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993HLHMHF = 1880, sales weighted average heating load hours for
mobile home furnaces2,080 = as specified in 10.4.1 of this appendix
10.9.2 For mobile home furnaces, the sales weighted average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption is expressed in kilowatt-hours and defined as: EAE,MHF = EAE HLHMHF/2,080 Where: EAE = as defined in 10.8.3 of this appendixHLHMHF = as defined in 10.9.1 of this appendix2,080 = as specified in 10.4.1 of this appendix
10.10 Direct determination of off-cycle losses for furnaces and boilers equipped with thermal stack dampers. [Reserved] [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR30AU13.003
10.11 Average annual electrical standby mode and off mode energy consumption. Calculate the annual electrical standby mode and off mode energy consumption (ESO) in kilowatt-hours, defined as: ESO = ((PW,SB * (4160 - BOH)) + (PW,OFF
* 4600)) * K Where: PW,SB = furnace or boiler standby mode power, in watts, as
measured in section 8.6 of this appendix4,160 = average heating season hours per yearPW,OFF = furnace or boiler off mode power, in watts, as
measured in section 8.6 of this appendix4,600 = average non-heating season hours per yearK = 0.001 kWh/Wh, conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hoursBOH = total burner operating hours as calculated in section 10.4 for gas
or oil-fueled furnaces or boilers. Where for gas or oil-fueled
furnaces and boilers equipped with single-stage controls, BOH
= BOHSS ; for gas or oil-fueled furnaces and
boilers equipped with two-stage controls, BOH =
(BOHR + BOHH); and for gas or oil-fueled
furnaces and boilers equipped with step-modulating controls,
BOH = (BOHR + BOHM). For electric
furnaces and boilers, BOH = 100(2080)(0.77)DHR/(Ein
3.412)(AFUE)) Where: 100 = to express a percent as a decimal2,080 = as specified in 10.4.1 of this appendix0.77 = as specified in 10.4.1 of this appendixDHR = as defined in 10.4.1 of this appendix3.412 = conversion to express energy in terms of KBtu instead of
kilowatt-hoursAFUE = as defined in 11.1 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 (incorporated
by reference, see Sec. 430.3) in percentEin = Steady-state electric rated power, in kilowatts, from
section 9.3 of ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-1993 (incorporated by
reference, see Sec. 430.3). [62 FR 26157, May 12, 1997, as amended at 62 FR 53510, Oct. 14, 1997; 75 FR 64631, Oct. 20, 2010; 76 FR 37546, June 27, 2011; 77 FR 76839, Dec. 31, 2012; 78 FR 41272, July 10, 2013; 78 FR 53625, Aug. 30, 2013]
Sec. Appendix O to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Vented Home Heating Equipment
NOTE: The procedures and calculations that refer to standby mode and off mode energy consumption, (i.e., sections 3.7 and 4.7 of this appendix) need not be performed to determine compliance with energy conservation standards for vented heaters at this time. However, on or after June 17, 2013, any representation related to standby mode and off mode energy consumption of these products must be based upon results generated under this test procedure, consistent with the requirements of 42 U.S.C. 6293(c)(2). For vented home heating equipment, the statute requires that after July 1, 2010, any adopted energy conservation standard shall incorporate standby mode and off mode energy consumption, and upon the compliance date for such standards, compliance with the applicable provisions of this test procedure will also be required.
1.0 Definitions
1.1 ``Active mode'' means the condition during the heating season in which the vented heater is connected to the power source, and either the burner or any electrical auxiliary is activated.
1.2 ``Air shutter'' means an adjustable device for varying the size of the primary air inlet(s) to the combustion chamber power burner.
1.3 ``Air tube'' means a tube which carries combustion air from the burner fan to the burner nozzle for combustion.
1.4 ``Barometic draft regulator or barometric damper'' means a mechanical device designed to maintain a constant draft in a vented heater.
1.5 ``Draft hood'' means an external device which performs the same function as an integral draft diverter, as defined in section 1.17 of this appendix.
1.6 ``Electro-mechanical stack damper'' means a type of stack damper which is operated by electrical and/or mechanical means.
1.7 ``Excess air'' means air which passes through the combustion chamber and the vented heater flues in excess of that which is theoretically required for complete combustion.
1.8 ``Flue'' means a conduit between the flue outlet of a vented heater and the integral draft diverter, draft hood, barometric damper or vent terminal through which the flue gases pass prior to the point of draft relief.
1.9 ``Flue damper'' means a device installed between the furnace and the integral draft diverter, draft hood, barometric draft regulator, or vent terminal which is not equipped with a draft control device, designed to open the venting system when the appliance is in operation and to close the venting system when the appliance is in a standby condition.
1.10 ``Flue gases'' means reaction products resulting from the combustion of a fuel with the oxygen of the air, including the inerts and any excess air.
1.11 ``Flue losses'' means the sum of sensible and latent heat losses above room temperature of the flue gases leaving a vented heater.
1.12 ``Flue outlet'' means the opening provided in a vented heater for the exhaust of the flue gases from the combustion chamber.
1.13 ``Heat input'' (Qin) means the rate of energy supplied in a fuel to a vented heater operating under steady-state conditions, expressed in Btu's per hour. It includes any input energy to the pilot light and is obtained by multiplying the measured rate of fuel consumption by the measured higher heating value of the fuel.
1.14 ``Heating capacity'' (Qout) means the rate of useful heat output from a vented heater, operating under steady-state conditions, expressed in Btu's per hour. For room and wall heaters, it is obtained by multiplying the ``heat input'' (Qin) by the steady-state efficency ([eta]ss) divided by 100. For floor furnaces, it is obtained by multiplying (A) the ``heat input'' (Qin) by (B) the steady-state efficiency divided by 100, minus the quantity (2.8) (Lj) divided by 100, where Lj is the jacket loss as determined in section 3.2 of this appendix.
1.15 ``Higher heating value'' (HHV) means the heat produced per unit of fuel when complete combustion takes place at constant pressure and the products of combustion are cooled to the initial temperature of the fuel and air and when the water vapor formed during combustion is condensed. The higher heating value is usually expressed in Btu's per pound, Btu's per cubic foot for gaseous fuel, or Btu's per gallon for liquid fuel.
1.16 ``IEC 62301 (Second Edition)'' means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, titled ``Household electrical appliances--Measurement of standby power,'' Publication 62301 Edition 2.0 2011-01 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.17 ``Induced draft'' means a method of drawing air into the combustion chamber by mechanical means.
1.18 ``Infiltration parameter'' means that portion of unconditioned outside air drawn into the heated space as a consequence of loss of conditioned air through the exhaust system of a vented heater.
1.19 ``Integral draft diverter'' means a device which is an integral part of a vented heater, designed to: (1) Provide for the exhaust of the products of combustion in the event of no draft, back draft, or stoppage beyond the draft diverter, (2) prevent a back draft from entering the vented heater, and (3) neutralize the stack action of the chimney or gas vent upon the operation of the vented heater.
1.20 ``Manually controlled vented heaters'' means either gas or oil fueled vented heaters equipped without thermostats.
1.21 ``Modulating control'' means either a step-modulating or two-stage control.
1.22 ``Off mode'' means the condition during the non-heating season in which the vented heater is connected to the power source, and neither the burner nor any electrical auxiliary is activated.
1.23 ``Power burner'' means a vented heater burner which supplies air for combustion at a pressure exceeding atmospheric pressure, or a burner which depends on the draft induced by a fan incorporated in the furnace for proper operation.
1.24 ``Reduced heat input rate'' means the factory adjusted lowest reduced heat input rate for vented home heating equipment equipped with either two stage thermostats or step-modulating thermostats.
1.25 ``Seasonal off switch'' means the control device, such as a lever or toggle, on the vented heater that affects a difference in off mode energy consumption as compared to standby mode consumption.
1.26 ``Single stage thermostat'' means a thermostat that cycles a burner at the maximum heat input rate and off.
1.27 ``Stack'' means the portion of the exhaust system downstream of the integral draft diverter, draft hood or barometric draft regulator.
1.28 ``Stack damper'' means a device installed downstream of the integral draft diverter, draft hood, or barometric draft regulator, designed to open the venting system when the appliance is in operation and to close off the venting system when the appliance is in the standby condition.
1.29 ``Stack gases'' means the flue gases combined with dilution air that enters at the integral draft diverter, draft hood or barometric draft regulator.
1.30 ``Standby mode'' means the condition during the heating season in which the vented heater is connected to the power source, and neither the burner nor any electrical auxiliary is activated.
1.31 ``Steady-state conditions for vented home heating equipment'' means equilibrium conditions as indicated by temperature variations of not more than 5 [deg]F (2.8C) in the flue gas temperature for units equipped with draft hoods, barometric draft regulators or direct vent systems, in three successive readings taken 15 minutes apart or not more than 3 [deg]F (1.7C) in the stack gas temperature for units equipped with integral draft diverters in three successive readings taken 15 minutes apart.
1.32 ``Step-modulating control'' means a control that either cycles off and on at the low input if the heating load is light, or gradually, increases the heat input to meet any higher heating load that cannot be met with the low firing rate.
1.33 ``Thermal stack damper'' means a type of stack damper which is dependent for operation exclusively upon the direct conversion of thermal energy of the stack gases into movement of the damper plate.
1.34 ``Two stage control'' means a control that either cycles a burner at the reduced heat input rate and off or cycles a burner at the maximum heat input rate and off.
1.35 ``Vaporizing-type oil burner'' means a device with an oil vaporizing bowl or other receptacle designed to operate by vaporizing liquid fuel oil by the heat of combustion and mixing the vaporized fuel with air.
1.36 ``Vent/air intake terminal'' means a device which is located on the outside of a building and is connected to a vented heater by a system of conduits. It is composed of an air intake terminal through which the air for combustion is taken from the outside atmosphere and a vent terminal from which flue gases are discharged.
1.37 ``Vent limiter'' means a device which limits the flow of air from the atmospheric diaphragm chamber of a gas pressure regulator to the atmosphere. A vent limiter may be a limiting orifice or other limiting device.
1.33 ``Vent pipe'' means the passages and conduits in a direct vent system through which gases pass from the combustion chamber to the outdoor air.
2.0 Testing conditions.
2.1 Installation of test unit.
2.1.1 Vented wall furnaces (including direct vent systems). Install gas fueled vented wall furnaces for test as specified in sections 2.1.3 and 2.1.4 of ANSI Z21.49-1975. Install gas fueled wall furnaces with direct vent systems for test as described in sections 2.1.3 and 2.1.4 of ANSI Z21.44-1973. Install oil fueled vented wall furnaces as specified in UL-730-1974, section 33. Install oil fueled vented wall furnaces with direct vent systems as specified in UL-730-1974, section 34.
2.1.2 Vented floor furnaces. Install vented floor furnaces for test as specified in sections 35.1 through 35.5 of UL-729-1976.
2.1.3 Vented room heaters. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.2 Flue and stack requirements.
2.2.1 Gas fueled vented home heating equipment employing integral draft diverters and draft hoods (excluding direct vent systems). Attach to, and vertically above the outlet of gas fueled vented home heating equipment employing draft diverters or draft hoods with vertically discharging outlets, a five (5) foot long test stack having a cross sectional area the same size as the draft diverter outlet.
Attach to the outlet of vented heaters having a horizontally discharging draft diverter or draft hood outlet a 90 degree elbow, and a five (5) foot long vertical test stack. A horizontal section of pipe may be used on the floor furnace between the diverter and the elbow if necessary to clear any framing used in the installation. Use the minimum length of pipe possible for this section. Use stack, elbow, and horizontal section with same cross sectional area as the diverter outlet.
2.2.2 Oil fueled vented home heating equipment (excluding direct vent systems). Use flue connections for oil fueled vented floor furnaces as specified in section 35 of UL 729-1976, sections 34.10 through 34.18 of UL 730-1974 for oil fueled vented wall furnaces and sections 36.2 and 36.3 of UL 896-1973 for oil fueled vented room heaters.
2.2.3 Direct vent systems. Have the exhaust/air intake system supplied by the manufacturer in place during all tests. Test units intended for installation with a variety of vent pipe lengths with the minimum length recommended by the manufacturer. Do not connect a heater employing a direct vent system to a chimney or induced draft source. Vent the gas solely on the provision for venting incorporated in the heater and the vent/air intake system supplied with it.
2.3 Fuel supply.
2.3.1 Natural gas. For a vented heater utilizing natural gas, maintain the gas supply to the unit under test at a normal inlet test pressure immediately ahead of all controls at 7 to 10 inches water column. Maintain the regulator outlet pressure at normal test pressure approximately at that recommended by the manufacturer. Use natural gas having a specific gravity of approximately 0.65 and a higher heating value within 5 percent of 1,025 Btu's per standard cubic foot. Determine the actual higher heating value in Btu's per standard cubic foot for the natural gas to be used in the test with an error no greater than one percent.
2.3.2 Propane gas. For a vented heater utilizing propane gas, maintain the gas supply to the unit under test at a normal inlet pressure of 11 to 13 inches water column and a specific gravity of approximately 1.53. Maintain the regulator outlet pressure, on units so equipped, approximately at that recommended by the manufacturer. Use propane having a specific gravity of approximately 1.53 and a higher heating value within 5 percent of 2,500 Btu's per standard cubic foot. Determine the actual higher heating value in Btu's per standard cubic foot for the propane to be used in the test with an error no greater than one percent.
2.3.3 Other test gas. Use other test gases with characteristics as described in section 2.2, table VII, of ANSI Standard Z21.11.1-1974. Use gases with a measured higher heating value within 5 percent of the values specified in the above ANSI standard. Determine the actual higher heating value of the gas used in the test with an error no greater than one percent.
2.3.4 Oil supply. For a vented heater utilizing fuel oil, use No. 1, fuel oil (kerosene) for vaporizing-type burners and either No. 1 or No. 2 fuel oil, as specified by the manufacturer, for mechanical atomizing type burners. Use No. 1 fuel oil with a viscosity meeting the specifications as specified in UL-730-1974, section 36.9. Use test fuel conforming to the specifications given in tables 2 and 3 of ANSI Standard Z91.1-1972for No. 1 and No. 2 fuel oil. Measure the higher heating value of the test fuel with an error no greater than one percent.
2.3.5 Electrical supply. For auxiliary electric components of a vented heater, maintain the electrical supply to the test unit within one percent of the nameplate voltage for the entire test cycle. If a voltage range is used for nameplate voltage, maintain the electrical supply within one percent of the mid-point of the nameplate voltage range.
2.4 Burner adjustments.
2.4.1 Gas burner adjustments. Adjust the burners of gas fueled vented heaters to their maximum Btu ratings at the test pressure specified in section 2.3 of this appendix. Correct the burner volumetric flow rate to 60 [deg]F (15.6C) and 30 inches of mercury barometric pressure, set the fuel flow rate to obtain a heat rate of within 2 percent of the hourly Btu rating specified by the manufacturer as measured after 15 minutes of operation starting with all parts of the vented heater at room temperature. Set the primary air shutters in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to give a good flame at this adjustment. Do not allow the deposit of carbon during any test specified herein.
If a vent limiting means is provided on a gas pressure regulator, have it in place during all tests.
For gas fueled heaters with modulating controls adjust the controls to operate the heater at the maximum fuel input rate. Set the thermostat control to the maximum setting. Start the heater by turning the safety control valve to the ``on'' position. In order to prevent modulation of the burner at maximum input, place the thermostat sensing element in a temperature control bath which is held at a temperature below the maximum set point temperature of the control.
For gas fueled heaters with modulating controls adjust the controls to operate the heater at the reduced fuel input rate. Set the thermostat control to the minimum setting. Start the heater by turning the safety control valve to the ``on'' position. If ambient test room temperature is above the lowest control set point temperature, initiate burner operation by placing the thermostat sensing element in a temperature control bath that is held at a temperature below the minimum set point temperature of the control.
2.4.2 Oil burner adjustments. Adjust the burners of oil fueled vented heaters to give the CO2 reading recommended by the manufacturer and an hourly Btu input, during the steady-state performance test described below, which is within 2 percent of the heater manufacturer's specified normal hourly Btu input rating. On units employing a power burner do not allow smoke in the flue to exceed a No. 1 smoke during the steady-state performance test as measured by the procedure in ANSI Standard Z11.182-1965 (R1971) (ASTM D 2156-65 (1970)). If, on units employing a power burner, the smoke in the flue exceeds a No. 1 smoke during the steady-state test, readjust the burner to give a lower smoke reading, and, if necessary a lower CO2 reading, and start all tests over. Maintain the average draft over the fire and in the flue during the steady-state performance test at that recommended by the manufacturer within 0.005 inches of water gauge. Do not make additional adjustments to the burner during the required series of performance tests. The instruments and measuring apparatus for this test are described in section 6.3 of ANSI standard Z91.1-1972.
2.5 Circulating air adjustments.
2.5.1 Forced air vented wall furnaces (including direct vent systems). During tests maintain the air flow through the heater as specified by the manufacturer and operate the vented heater with the outlet air temperature between 80 [deg]F and 130 [deg]F above room temperature. If adjustable air discharge registers are provided, adjust them so as to provide the maximum possible air restriction. Measure air discharge temperature as specified in section 2.14 of ANSI Z21.49-1975.
2.5.2 Fan type vented room heaters and floor furnaces. During tests on fan type furnaces and heaters, adjust the air flow through the heater as specified by the manufacturer. If adjustable air discharge registers are provided, adjust them to provide the maximum possible air restriction.
2.6 Location of temperature measuring instrumentation.
2.6.1 Gas fueled vented home heating equipment (including direct vent systems). For units employing an integral draft diverter, install nine thermocouples, wired in parallel, in a horizontal plane in the five foot test stack located one foot from the test stack inlet. Equalize the length of all thermocouple leads before paralleling. Locate one thermocouple in the center of the stack. Locate eight thermocouples along imaginary lines intersecting at right angles in this horizontal plane at points one third and two thirds of the distance between the center of the stack and the stack wall.
For units which employ a direct vent system, locate at least one thermocouple at the center of each flue way exiting the heat exchanger. Provide radiation shields if the thermocouples are exposed to burner radiation.
For units which employ a draft hood or units which employ a direct vent system which does not significantly preheat the incoming combustion air, install nine thermocouples, wired in parallel, in a horizontal plane located within 12 inches (304.8 mm) of the heater outlet and upstream of the draft hood on units so equipped. Locate one thermocouple in the center of the pipe and eight thermocouples along imaginary lines intersecting at right angles in this horizontal plane at points one third and two thirds of the distance between the center of the pipe and the pipe wall.
For units which employ direct vent systems that significantly preheat the incoming combustion air, install nine thermocouples, wired in parallel, in a plane parallel to and located within 6 inches (152.4 mm) of the vent/air intake terminal. Equalize the length of all thermocouple leads before paralleling. Locate one thermocouple in the center of the vent pipe and eight thermocouples along imaginary lines intersecting at right angles in this plane at points one third and two thirds of the distance between the center of the flue pipe and the pipe wall.
Use bead-type thermocouples having wire size not greater than No. 24 American Wire Gauge (AWG). If there is a possibility that the thermocouples could receive direct radiation from the fire, install radiation shields on the fire side of the thermocouples only and position the shields so that they do not touch the thermocouple junctions.
Install thermocouples for measuring conditioned warm air temperature as described in ANSI Z21.49-1975, section 2.14. Establish the temperature of the inlet air by means of single No. 24 AWG bead-type thermocouple, suitably shielded from direct radiation and located in the center of the plane of each inlet air opening.
2.6.2 Oil fueled vented home heating equipment (including direct vent systems). Install nine thermocouples, wired in parallel and having equal length leads, in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the flue pipe. Locate this plane at the position shown in Figure 34.4 of UL 730-1974, or Figures 35.1 and 35.2 of UL 729-1976 for a single thermocouple, except that on direct vent systems which significantly preheat the incoming combustion air, it shall be located within 6 inches (152.5 mm) of the outlet of the vent/air intake terminal. Locate one thermocouple in the center of the flue pipe and eight thermocouples along imaginary lines intersecting at right angles in this plane at points one third and two thirds of the distance between the center of the pipe and pipe wall.
Use bead-type thermocouples having a wire size not greater than No. 24 AWG. If there is a possibility that the thermocouples could receive direct radiation from the fire, install radiation shields on the fire side of the thermocouples only and position the shields so that they do not touch the thermocouple junctions.
Install thermocouples for measuring the conditioned warm air temperature as described in sections 35.12 through 35.17 of UL 730-1974. Establish the temperature of the inlet air by means of a single No. 24 AWG bead-type thermocouple, suitably shielded from direct radiation and located in the center of the plane of each inlet air opening.
2.7 Combustion measurement instrumentation. Analyze the samples of stack and flue gases for vented heaters to determine the concentration by volume of carbon dioxide present in the dry gas with instrumentation which will result in a reading having an accuracy of 0.1 percentage points.
2.8 Energy flow instrumentation. Install one or more instruments, which measure the rate of gas flow or fuel oil supplied to the vented heater, and if appropriate, the electrical energy with an error no greater than one percent.
2.9 Room ambient temperature. During the time period required to perform all the testing and measurement procedures specified in section 3.0 of this appendix, maintain the room temperature within 5 [deg]F (2.8C) of the value TRA measured during the steady-state performance test. At no time during these tests shall the room temperature exceed 100 [deg]F (37.8C) or fall below 65 [deg]F (18.3C).
Temperature (TRA) shall be the arithmetic average temperature of the test area, determined by measurement with four No. 24 AWG bead-type thermocouples with junctions shielded against radiation, located approximately at 90-degree positions on a circle circumscribing the heater or heaterenclosure under test, in a horizontal plane approximately at the vertical midpoint of the appliance or test enclosure, and with the junctions approximately 24 inches from sides of the heater or test enclosure and located so as not to be affected by other than room air. Locate a thermocouple at each elevation of draft relief inlet opening and combustion air inlet opening at a distance of approximately 24 inches from the inlet openings. The temperature of the air for combustion and the air for draft relief shall not differ more than 5 [deg]F from room temperature as measured above.
2.10 Equipment used to measure mass flow rate in flue and stack. The tracer gas chosen for this task should have a density which is less than or approximately equal to the density of air. Use a gas unreactive with the environment to be encountered. Using instrumentation of either the batch or continuous type, measure the concentration of tracer gas with an error no greater than 2 percent of the value of the concentration measured.
3.0 Testing and measurements.
3.1 Steady-state testing.
3.1.1 Gas fueled vented home heating equipment (including direct vent systems). Set up the vented heater as specified in sections 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3 of this appendix. The draft diverter shall be in the normal open condition and the stack shall not be insulated. (Insulation of the stack is no longer required for the vented heater test.) Begin the steady-state performance test by operating the burner and the circulating air blower, on units so equipped, with the adjustments specified by sections 2.4.1 and 2.5 of this appendix, until steady-state conditions are attained as indicated by a temperature variation of not more than 3 [deg]F (1.7 C) in the stack gas temperature for vented heaters equipped with draft diverters or 5 [deg]F (2.8 C) in the flue gas temperature for vented heaters equipped with either draft hoods or direct vent systems; in three successive readings taken 15 minutes apart.
On units employing draft diverters, measure the room temperature (TRA) as described in section 2.9 of this appendix and measure the steady-state stack gas temperature (TS,SS) using the nine thermocouples located in the 5 foot test stack as specified in section 2.6.1 of this appendix. Secure a sample of the stack gases in the plane where TS,SS is measured or within 3.5 feet downstream of this plane. Determine the concentration by volume of carbon dioxide (XCO2S) present in the dry stack gas. If the location of the gas sampling differs from the temperature measurement plane, there shall be no air leaks through the stack between these two locations.
On units employing draft hoods or direct vent systems, measure the room temperature (TRA) as described in section 2.9 of this appendix and measure the steady-state flue gas temperature (TF,SS), using the nine thermocouples located in the flue pipe as described in section 2.6.1 of this appendix. Secure a sample of the flue gas in the plane of temperature measurement and determine the concentration by volume of CO2 (XCO2F) present in dry flue gas. In addition, for units employing draft hoods, secure a sample of the stack gas in a horizontal plane in the five foot test stack located one foot from the test stack inlet; and determine the concentration by volume of CO2 (XCO2S) present in dry stack gas.
Determine the steady-state heat input rate (Qin) including pilot gas by multiplying the measured higher heating value of the test gas by the steady-state gas input rate corrected to standard conditions of 60 [deg]F and 30 inches of mercury. Use measured values of gas temperature and pressure at the meter and the barometric pressure to correct the metered gas flow rate to standard conditions.
After the above test measurements have been completed on units employing draft diverters, secure a sample of the flue gases at the exit of the heat exchanger(s) and determine the concentration of CO2 (XCO2F) present. In obtaining this sample of flue gas, move the sampling probe around or use a sample probe with multiple sampling ports in order to assure that an average value is obtained for the CO2 concentration. For units with multiple heat exchanger outlets, measure the CO2 concentration in a sample from each outlet to obtain the average CO2 concentration for the unit. A manifold (parallel connected sampling tubes) may be used to obtain this sample.
For heaters with single stage thermostat control (wall mounted electric thermostats), determine the steady-state efficiency at the maximum fuel input rate as specified in section 2.4 of this appendix.
For gas fueled vented heaters equipped with either two stage thermostats or step-modulating thermostats, determine the steady-state efficiency at the maximum fuel input rate, as specified in section 2.4.1 of this appendix, and at the reduced fuel input rate, as specified in section 2.4.1 of this appendix.
For manually controlled gas fueled vented heaters, with various input rates determine the steady-state efficiency at a fuel input rate that is within 5 percent of 50 percent of the maximum fuel input rate. If the heater is designed to use a control that precludes operation at other than maximum output (single firing rate) determine the steady state efficiency at the maximum input rate only.
3.1.2 Oil fueled vented home heating equipment (including direct vent systems). Set up and adjust the vented heater as specified in sections 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3.4 of this appendix. Begin the steady-state performance test by operating the burner and the circulating air blower, on units so equipped, with the adjustments specified by sections 2.4.2 and 2.5 of this appendix until steady-state conditions are attained as indicated by a temperature variation of not more than 5 [deg]F (2.8 C) in the flue gas temperature in three successive readings taken 15 minutes apart.
Do not allow smoke in the flue, for units equipped with power burners, to exceed a No. 1 smoke during the steady-state performance test as measured by the procedure described in ANSI standard Z11.182-1965 (R1971) (ASTM D 2156-65 (1970)). Maintain the average draft over the fire and in the breeching during the steady-state performance test at that recommended by the manufacturer 0.005 inches of water gauge.
Measure the room temperature (TRA) as described in section 2.9 of this appendix and measure the steady-state flue gas temperature (TF,SS) using nine thermocouples located in the flue pipe as described in section 2.6.2 of this appendix. Secure a sample of the flue gas in the plane of temperature measurement and determine the concentration by volume of CO2(XCO2F) present in dry flue gas. Measure and record the steady-state heat input rate (Qin).
For manually controlled oil fueled vented heaters, determine the steady-state efficiency at a fuel input rate that is within 5 percent of 50 percent of the maximum fuel input rate.
3.1.3 Auxiliary Electric Power Measurement. Allow the auxiliary electrical system of a gas or oil vented heater to operate for at least five minutes before recording the maximum auxiliary electric power measurement from the wattmeter. Record the maximum electric power (PE) expressed in kilowatts. For vented heaters with modulating controls, the recorded (PE) shall be maximum measured electric power multiplied by the following factor (R). For two stage controls, R=1.3. For step modulating controls, R=1.4 when the ratio of minimum-to-maximum fuel input is greater than or equal to 0.7, R=1.7 when the ratio of minimum-to-maximum fuel input is less than 0.7 and greater than or equal to 0.5, and R=2.2 when the ratio of minimum-to-maximum fuel input is less than 0.5.
3.2 Jacket loss measurement. Conduct a jacket loss test for vented floor furnaces. Measure the jacket loss (Lj) in accordance with the ANSI standard Z21.48-1976 section 2.12.
3.3 Measurement of the off-cycle losses for vented heaters equipped with thermal stack dampers. Install the thermal stack damper according to the manufacturer's instructions. Unless specified otherwise, the thermal stack damper should be at the draft diverter exit collar. Attach a five foot length of bare stack to the outlet of the damper. Install thermocouples as specified in section 2.6.1 of this appendix.
For vented heaters equipped with single stage thermostats, measure the off-cycle losses at the maximum fuel input rate. For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, measure the off-cycle losses at the maximum fuel input rate and at the reduced fuel input rate. For vented heaters equipped with step-modulating thermostats, measure the off-cycle losses at the reduced fuel input rate.
Let the vented heater heat up to a steady-state condition. Feed a tracer gas at a constant metered rate into the stack directly above and within one foot above the stack damper. Record tracer gas flow rate and temperature. Measure the tracer gas concentration in the stack at several locations in a horizontal plane through a cross section of the stack at a point sufficiently above the stack damper to ensure that the tracer gas is well mixed in the stack.
Continuously measure the tracer gas concentration and temperature during a 10 minute cool down period. Shut the burner off and immediately begin measuring tracer gas concentration in the stack, stack temperature, room temperature, and barometric pressure. Record these values as the midpoint of each one-minute interval between burner shut down and ten minutes after burner shut down. Meter response time and sampling delay time shall be considered in timing these measurements.
3.4 Measurement of the effectiveness of electro-mechanical stack dampers. For vented heaters equipped with electro-mechanical stack dampers, measure the cross sectional area of the stack (As), the net area of the damper plate (Ao), and the angle that the damper plate makes when closed with a plane perpendicular to the axis of the stack ([Omega]). The net area of the damper plate means the area of the damper plate minus the area of any holes through the damper plate.
3.5 Pilot light measurement.
3.5.1 Measure the energy input rate to the pilot light (QP) with an error no greater than 3 percent for vented heaters so equipped.
3.5.2 For manually controlled heaters where the pilot light is designed to be turned off by the user when the heater is not in use, that is, turning the control to the OFF position will shut off the gas supply to the burner(s) and to the pilot light, the measurement of QP is not needed. This provision applies only if an instruction to turn off the unit is provided on the heater near the gas control valve (e.g. by label) by the manufacturer.
3.6 Optional procedure for determining Dp' DF' and Ds for systems for all types of vented heaters. For all types of vented heaters, Dp' DF' and DS can be measured by the following optional cool down test.
Conduct a cool down test by letting the unit heat up until steady-state conditions are reached, as indicated by temperature variation of not more than 5 [deg]F (2.8 [deg]C) in the flue gas temperature in three successive readings taken 15 minutes apart, and then shutting the unit off with the stack or flue damper controls by-passed or adjusted so that the stack or flue damper remains open during the resulting cool down period. If a draft was maintained on oil fueled units in the flue pipe during the steady-state performance test described in section 3.1 of this appendix, maintain the same draft (within a range of -.001 to +.005 inches of water gauge of the average steady-state draft) during this cool down period.
Measure the flue gas mass flow rate (mF,OFF) during the cool down test described above at a specific off-period flue gas temperature and corrected to obtain its value at the steady-state flue gas temperature (TF,SS), using the procedure described below.
Within one minute after the unit is shut off to start the cool down test for determining DF, begin feeding a tracer gas into the combustion chamber at a constant flow rate of VT, and at a point which will allow for the best possible mixing with the air flowing through the chamber. (On units equipped with an oil fired power burner, the best location for injecting this tracer gas appears to be through a hole drilled in the air tube.) Periodically measure the value of VT with an instantaneously reading flow meter having an accuracy of 3 percent of the quantity measured. Maintain VT at less than 1 percent of the air flow rate through the furnace. If a combustible tracer gas is used, there should be a delay period between the time the burner gas is shut off and the time the tracer gas is first injected to prevent ignition of the tracer gas.
Between 5 and 6 minutes after the unit is shut off to start the cool down test, measure at the exit of the heat exchanger the average flue gas temperature, T*F,Off. At the same instant the flue gas temperature is measured, also measure the percent volumetric concentration of tracer gas CT in the flue gas in the same plane where T*F,Off is determined. Obtain the concentration of tracer gas using an instrument which will result in an accuracy of 2 percent in the value of CT measured. If use of a continuous reading type instrument results in a delay time between drawing of a sample and its analysis, this delay should be taken into account so that the temperature measurement and the measurement of tracer gas concentration coincide. In addition, determine the temperature of the tracer gas entering the flow meter (TT) and the barometric pressure (PB).
The rate of the flue gas mass flow through the vented heater and the factors DP, DF, and DS are calculated by the equations in sections 4.5.1 through 4.5.3 of this appendix.
3.7 Measurement of electrical standby mode and off mode power.
3.7.1 Standby power measurements. With all electrical auxiliaries of the vented heater not activated, measure the standby power (PW,SB) in accordance with the procedures in IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3), except that section 2.9, Room ambient temperature, and the voltage provision of section 2.3.5, Electrical supply, of this appendix shall apply in lieu of the IEC 62301 (Second Edition) corresponding sections 4.2, Test room, and 4.3, Power supply. Clarifying further, the IEC 62301 (Second Edition) sections 4.4, Power measuring instruments, and section 5, Measurements, shall apply in lieu of section 2.8, Energy flow instrumentation, of this appendix. Measure the wattage so that all possible standby mode wattage for the entire appliance is recorded, not just the standby mode wattage of a single auxiliary. The recorded standby power (PW,SB) shall be rounded to the second decimal place, and for loads greater than or equal to 10W, at least three significant figures shall be reported.
3.7.2 Off mode power measurement. If the unit is equipped with a seasonal off switch or there is an expected difference between off mode power and standby mode power, measure off mode power (PW,OFF) in accordance with the standby power procedures in IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3), except that section 2.9, Room ambient temperature, and the voltage provision of section 2.3.5, Electrical supply, of this appendix shall apply in lieu of the IEC 62301 (Second Edition) corresponding sections 4.2, Test room, and 4.3, Power supply. Clarifying further, the IEC 62301 (Second Edition) sections 4.4, Power measuring instruments, and section 5, Measurements, shall apply in lieu of section 2.8, Energy flow instrumentation, of this appendix. Measure the wattage so that all possible off mode wattage for the entire appliance is recorded, not just the off mode wattage of a single auxiliary. If there is no expected difference in off mode power and standby mode power, let PW,OFF = PW,SB, in which case no separate measurement of off mode power is necessary. The recorded off mode power (PW,OFF) shall be rounded to the second decimal place, and for loads greater than or equal to 10W, at least three significant figures shall be reported.
4.0 Calculations.
4.1 Annual fuel utilization efficiency for gas or oil fueled vented home heating equipment equipped without manual controls and without thermal stack dampers. The following procedure determines the annual fuel utilization efficiency for gas or oil fueled vented home heating equipment equipped without manual controls and without thermal stack dampers.
4.1.1 System number. Obtain the system number from Table 1 of this appendix.
4.1.2 Off-cycle flue gas draft factor. Based on the system number, determine the off-cycle flue gas draft factor (DF) from Table 1 of this appendix.
4.1.3 Off-cycle stack gas draft factor. Based on the system number, determine the off-cycle stack gas draft factor (Ds) from Table 1 of this appendix.
4.1.4 Pilot fraction. Calculate the pilot fraction (PF) expressed as a decimal and defined as: PF = QP/Qin where: QP = as defined in 3.5 of this appendixQin = as defined in 3.1 of this appendix at the maximum fuel
input rate
4.1.5 Jacket loss for floor furnaces. Determine the jacket loss (Lj) expressed as a percent and measured in accordance with section 3.2 of this appendix. For other vented heaters Lj = 0.0.
4.1.6 Latent heat loss. Based on the fuel, obtain the latent heat loss (LL,A) from Table 2 of this appendix.
4.1.7 Ratio of combustion air mass flow rate to stoichiometric air mass flow rate. Determine the ratio of combustion air mass flow rate to stoichiometric air mass flow rate (RT,F), and defined as: RT,F = A+B/XCO2F where: A=as determined from Table 2 of this appendixB=as determined from Table 2 of this appendixXCO2F = as defined in 3.1 of this appendix
4.1.8 Ratio of combustion and relief air mass flow rate to stoichiometric air mass flow rate. For vented heaters equipped with either an integral draft diverter or a drafthood, determine the ratio of combustion and relief air mass flow rate to stoichiometric air mass flow rate (RT,S), and defined as: RT,S = A+[B/XCO2S] where: A=as determined from Table 2 of this appendixB=as determined from Table 2 of this appendixXCO2S = as defined in 3.1 of this appendix
4.1.9 Sensible heat loss at steady-state operation. For vented heaters equipped with either an integral draft diverter or a draft hood, determine the sensible heat loss at steady-state operation (LS,SS,A) expressed as a percent and defined as: where: LS,SS,A = C(RT,S+D)(TS,SS-TRA)C=as determined from Table 2 of this appendixRT,S = as defined in 4.1.8 of this appendixD=as determined from Table 2 of this appendixTS,SS = as defined in 3.1 of this appendixTRA = as defined in 2.9 of this appendix
For vented heaters equipped without an integral draft diverter, determine (LS,SS,A) expressed as a percent and defined as: LS,SS,A = C(RT,F+D)(TF,SS-
TRA) where: C=as determined from Table 2 of this appendixRT,F = as defined in 4.1.7 of this appendixD=as determined from Table 2 of this appendixTF,SS = as defined in 3.1 of this appendixTRA = as defined in 2.9 of this appendix
4.1.10 Steady-state efficiency. For vented heaters equipped with single stage thermostats, calculate the steady-state efficiency (excluding jacket loss, [eta]SS, expressed in percent and defined as: [eta]SS = 100-LL,A-LS,SS,A where: LL,A = as defined in 4.1.6 of this appendixLS,SS,A = as defined in 4.1.9 of this appendix
For vented heaters equipped with either two stage thermostats or with step-modulating thermostats, calculate the steady-state efficiency at the reduced fuel input rate, [eta]SS, L, expressed in percent and defined as: [eta]SS-L = 100-LL,A-LS,SS,A where: LL,A = as defined in 4.1.6 of this appendixLS,SS,A = as defined in 4.1.9 of this appendix in which
LS,SS,A is determined at the reduced fuel input
rate
For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, calculate the steady- state efficiency at the maximum fuel input rate,[eta]SS-H, expressed in percent and defined as: [eta]SS-H = 100-LL,A-LS,SS,A where: LL,A = as defined in 4.1.6 of this appendixLS,SS,A = as defined in 4.1.9 of this appendix in which
LS,SS,A is measured at the maximum fuel input rate
For vented heaters equipped with step-modulating thermostats, calculate the weighted-average steady-state efficiency in the modulating mode, [eta]SS-MOD, expressed in percent and defined as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.060 where: [eta]SS-H = as defined in 4.1.10 of this appendix[eta]SS-L = as defined in 4.1.10 of this appendixTOA* = average outdoor temperature for vented heaters with
step-modulating thermostats operating in the modulating mode
and is obtained from Table 3 or Figure 1 of this appendixTC = balance point temperature which represents a temperature
used to apportion the annual heating load between the reduced
input cycling mode and either the modulating mode or maximum
input cycling mode and is obtained either from Table 3 of this
appendix or calculated by the following equation: TC = 65-[(65-15)R] where: 65=average outdoor temperature at which a vented heater starts operating15=national average outdoor design temperature for vented heatersR=ratio of reduced to maximum heat output rates, as defined in 4.1.13 of
this appendix
4.1.11 Reduced heat output rate. For vented heaters equipped with either two stage thermostats or step-modulating thermostats, calculate the reduced heat output rate(Qred-out) defined as: Qred-out = [eta]SS-L Qred-in where: [eta]SS-L = as defined in 4.1.10 of this appendixQred-in = the reduced fuel input rate
4.1.12 Maximum heat output rate. For vented heaters equipped with either two stage thermostats or step-modulating thermostas, calculate the maximum heat output rate (Qmax-out) defined as: Qmax,out = hSS,H Qmax,in where: [eta]SS-H = as defined in 4.1.10 of this appendixQmax-in = the maximum fuel input rate
4.1.13 Ratio of reduced to maximum heat output rates. For vented heaters equipped with either two stage thermostats or step-modulating thermostats, calculate the ratio of reduced to maximum heat output rates (R) expressed as a decimal and defined as: R=Qred-out/Qmax-out where: Qred-out = as defined in 4.1.11 of this appendixQmax-out = as defined in 4.1.12 of this appendix
4.1.14 Fraction of heating load at reduced operating mode. For vented heaters equipped with either two stage thermostats or step-modulating thermostats, determine the fraction of heating load at the reduced operating mode (X1) expressed as a decimal and listed in Table 3 of this appendix or obtained from Figure 2 of this appendix.
4.1.15 Fraction of heating load at maximum operating mode or noncycling mode. For vented heaters equFipped with either two stage thermostats or step-modulating therostats, determine the fraction of heating load at the maximum operating mode or noncycling mode (X2) expressed as a decimal and listed in Table 3 of this appendix or obtained from Figure 2 of this appendix.
4.1.16 Weighted-average steady-state efficiency. For vented heaters equipped with single stage thermostats, the weighted-average steady-state efficiency ([eta]SS-WT) is equal to [eta]SS, as defined in section 4.1.10 of this appendix. For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, [eta]SS-WT is defined as: [eta]SS-WT =
X1[eta]SS-L+X2[eta]SS-H where: X1 = as defined in 4.1.14 of this appendix[eta]SS-L = as defined in 4.1.10 of this appendixX2 = as defined in 4.1.15 of this appendix[eta]SS-H = as defined in 4.1.10 of this appendix
For vented heaters equipped with step-modulating thermostats, [eta]SS-WT is defined as: [eta]SS-WT =
X1[eta]SS-L+X2[eta]SS-MOD where: X1 = as defined in 4.1.14 of this appendix[eta]SS-L = as defined in 4.1.10 of this appendixX2 = as defined in 4.1.15 of this appendix[eta]SS-MOD = as defined in 4.1.10 of this appendix
4.1.17 Annual fuel utilization efficiency. Calculate the annual fuel utilization efficiency (AFUE) expressed as percent and defined as: AFUE=[0.968[eta]SS - WT] - 1.78DF -
1.89DS - 129PF - 2.8 LJ +
1.81 where: [eta]SS-WT = as defined in 4.1.16 of this appendixDF = as defined in 4.1.2 of this appendixDS = as defined in 4.1.3 of this appendixPF = as defined in 4.1.4 of this appendixLJ = as defined in 4.1.5 of this appendix
4.2 Annual fuel utilization efficiency for gas or oil fueled vented home heating equipment equipped with manual controls. The following procedure determines the annual fuel utilization efficiency for gas or oil fueled vented home heating equipment equipped with manual controls.
4.2.1 Average ratio of stack gas mass flow rate to flue gas mass flow rate at steady-state operation. For vented heaters equipped with either direct vents or direct exhaust or are outdoor units, the average ratio of stack gas mass flow rate to flue gas mass flow rate at steady-state operation (S/F) shall be equal to unity. (S/F=1.) For all other types of vented heaters, calculate (S/F) defined as: S/F=1.3RT,S/RT,F where:RT,S = as defined in 4.1.8 of this appendix with
XCO2s measured at 50% fuel input rateRT,F = as defined in 4.1.7 of this appendix with
XCO2F measured at 50% fuel input rate
4.2.2 Multiplication factor for infiltration loss during burner on-cycle. Calculate the multiplication factor for infiltration loss during burner on-cycle (KI,ON) defined as: KI,ON = 100(0.24) (S/F) (0.7) [1+RT,F(A/F)]/HHVA where: 100=converts a decimal fraction into a percent0.24=specific heat of airA/F=stoichiometric air/fuel ratio, determined in accordance with Table 2
of this appendixS/F=as defined in 4.2.1 of this appendix at 50 percent of rated maximum
fuel input0.7=infiltration parameterRT,F = as defined in 4.1.7 of this appendixHHVA = average higher heating value of the test fuel,
determined in accordance with Table 2 of this appendix
4.2.3 On-cycle infiltration heat loss. Calculate the on-cycle infiltration heat loss (LI,ON) expressed as a percent and defined as: LI,ON = KI,ON (70-45) where: KI,ON = as defined in 4.2.2 of this appendix70=average indoor temperature45=average outdoor temperature
4.2.4 Weighted-average steady-state efficiency.
4.2.4.1 For manually controlled heaters with various input rates the weighted average steady-state efficiency ([eta]SS-WT), is determined as follows:
(1) at 50 percent of the maximum fuel input rate as measured in either section 3.1.1 of this appendix for manually controlled gas vented heaters or section 3.1.2 of this appendix for manually controlled oil vented heaters, or
(2) at the minimum fuel input rate as measured in either section 3.1.1 to this appendix for manually controlled gas vented heaters or section 3.1.2 to this appendix for manually controlled oil vented heaters if the design of the heater is such that the 5 percent of 50 percent of the maximum fuel input rate cannot be set, provided this minimum rate is no greater than \2/3\ of maximum input rate of the heater.
4.2.4.2 For manually controlled heater with one single firing rate the weighted average steady-state efficiency is the steady-state efficiency measured at the single firing rate.
4.2.5 Part-load fuel utilization efficiency. Calculate the part-load fuel utilization efficiency ([eta]u) expressed as a percent and defined as: [eta]u = [eta]SS-WT-LI,ON where: [eta]SS-WT = as defined in 4.2.4 of this appendixLI,ON = as defined in 4.2.3 of this appendix
4.2.6 Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency.
4.2.6.1 For manually controlled vented heaters, calculate the AFUE expressed as a percent and defined as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MY97.040 where: 2,950=average number of heating degree days[eta]SS = as defined as [eta]SS-WT in 4.2.4 of
this appendix [eta]u = as defined in 4.2.5 of this appendixQin-max = as defined as Qin at the maximum fuel
input rate, as defined in 3.1 of this appendix4,600=average number of non-heating season hours per yearQP = as defined in 3.5 of this appendix2.083=(65-15)/24=50/2465=degree day base temperature, [deg]F15=national average outdoor design temperature for vented heaters as
defined in section 4.1.10 of this appendix24=number of hours in a day
4.2.6.2 For manually controlled vented heaters where the pilot light can be turned off by the user when the heater is not in use as described in section 3.5.2, calculate the AFUE expressed as a percent and defined as: AFUE=[eta]u where: [eta]u = as defined in section 4.2.5 of this appendix
4.3 Annual fuel utilization efficiency by the tracer gas method. The annual fuel utilization efficiency shall be determined by the following tracer gas method for all vented heaters equipped with thermal stack dampers. All other types of vented heaters can elect to use the following tracer gas method, as an optional procedure.
4.3.1 On-cycle sensible heat loss. For vented heaters equipped with single stage thermostats, calculate the on-cycle sensible heat loss (LS,ON) expressed as a percent and defined as: LS,ON = LS,SS,A where: LS,SS,A = as defined in 4.1.9 of this appendix
For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, calculate LS,ON defined as: LS,ON = X1 LS,SS,A-red+X2
LS,SS,A-max where: X1 = as defined in 4.1.14 of this appendixLS,SS,A-red = as defined as LS,SS,A in 4.1.9 of
this appendix at the reduced fuel input rateX2 = as defined in 4.1.15 of this appendixLS,SS,A-max = as defined as LS,SS,A in 4.1.9 of
this appendix at the maximum fuel input rate
For vented heaters with step-modulating thermostats, calculate LS,ON defined as: LS,ON = X1 LS,SS,A-red+X2
LS,SS,A-avg where: X=1-as defined in 4.1.14 of this appendixLLS,SS,A-red = as defined in 4.3.1 of this appendixX2 = as defined in 4.1.15 of this appendixLS,SS,A-avg = average sensible heat loss for step-modulating
vented heaters operating in the modulating mode
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.062
where: LS,SS,A-avg = as defined in 4.3.1 of this appendixTC = as defined in 4.1.10 of this appendixTOA* = as defined in 4.1.10 of this appendix15=as defined in 4.1.10 of this appendix
4.3.2 On-cycle infiltration heat loss. For vented heaters equipped with single stage thermostats, calculate the on-cycle infiltration heat loss (LI,ON) expressed as a percent and defined as: LI,ON = KI,ON(70-45) where: KI,ON = as defined in 4.2.2 of this appendix70=as defined in 4.2.3 of this appendix45=as defined in 4.2.3 of this appendix
For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, calculate LI,ON defined as: LI,ON = X1KI,ON-Max(70-
TOA*)+X2KI,ON,red(7
0-TOA) where: X1 = as defined in 4.1.14 of this appendixKI,ON-max = as defined as KI,ON in 4.2.2 of this
appendix at the maximum heat input rate70=as defined in 4.2.3 of this appendixTOA* = as defined in 4.3.4 of this appendixKI,ON,red = as defined as KI,ON in
4.2.2 of this appendix at the minimum heat input rateTOA = as defined in 4.3.4 of this appendixX2 = as defined in 4.1.15 of this appendix
For vented heaters equipped with step-modulating thermostats, calculate LI,ON defined as: LI,ON = X1 KI,ON-avg(70-
TOA*)+X2
KI,ON-red(70-TOA) where: X1 = as defined in 4.1.14 of this appendix [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC14NO91.051 70=as defined in 4.2.3 of this appendixTOA* = as defined in 4.3.4 of this appendixX2 = as defined in 4.1.15 of this appendixTOA = as defined in 4.3.4 of this appendix
4.3.3 Off-cycle sensible heat loss. For vented heaters equipped with single stage thermostats, calculate the off-cycle sensible heat loss (LS,OFF) at the maximum fuel input rate. For vented heaters equipped with step-modulating thermostats, calculate LS,OFF defined as: LS,OFF = X1 LS,OFF,red where: X1 = as defined in 4.1.14 of this appendixLS,OFF,red = as defined as LS,OFF in 4.3.3 of this
appendix at the reduced fuel input rate
For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, calculate LS,OFF defined as: LS,OFF = X1 LS,OFF,red+X2
LS,OFF,Max where: X1 = as defined in 4.1.14 of this appendixLS,OFF,red = as defined as LS,OFF in 4.3.3 of this
appendix at the reduced fuel input rateX2 = as defined in 4.1.15 of this appendixLS,OFF,Max = as defined as LS,OFF in 4.3.3 of this
appendix at the maximum fuel input rate
Calculate the off-cycle sensible heat loss (LS,OFF) expressed as a percent and defined as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.063 where: 100=conversion factor for percent0.24=specific heat of air in Btu per pound-[deg]FQin = fuel input rate, as defined in 3.1 of this appendix in
Btu per minute (as appropriate for the firing rate)ton = average burner on-time per cycle and is 20 minutes[Sigma] mS,OFF(TS,OFF-TRA)=summation of
the twenty values of the quantity,
mS,OFF(TS,OFF-TRA), measured
in accordance with 3.3 of this appendixmS,OFF = stack gas mass flow rate pounds per minute[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.064 TS,OFF = stack gas temperature measured in accordance with
3.3 of this appendixTRA = average room temperature measured in accordance with
3.3 of this appendixPB = barometric pressure in inches of mercuryVT = flow rate of the tracer gas through the stack in cubic
feet per minuteCT* = concentration by volume of the active tracer
gas in the mixture in percent and is 100 when the tracer gas
is a single component gasCT = concentration by volume of the active tracer gas in the
diluted stack gas in percentTT = temperature of the tracer gas entering the flow meter in
degrees Fahrenheit(TT+460)=absolute temperature of the tracer gas entering the
flow meter in degrees Rankine
4.3.4 Average outdoor temperature. For vented heaters equipped with single stage thermostats, the average outdoor temperature (TOA) is 45 [deg]F. For vented heaters equipped with either two stage thermostats or step-modulating thermostats, TOA during the reduced operating mode is obtained from Table 3 or Figure 1 of this appendix. For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, TOA* during the maximum operating mode is obtained from Table 3 or Figure 1 of this appendix.4.3.5 Off-cycle infiltration heat loss. For vented heaters equipped with
single stage thermostats, calculate the off-cycle infiltration
heat loss (LI,OFF) at the maximum fuel input rate.
For vented heaters equipped with step-modulating thermostats,
calculate LI,OFF defined as: LI,OFF = X1 LI,OFF,red where: X1 = as defined in 4.1.14 of this appendixLI,OFF,red = as defined in LI,OFF in 4.3.3 of this
appendix at the reduced fuel input rate
For vented heaters equipped with two stage thermostats, calculate LI,OFF defined as: LI,OFF = X1 LI,OFF,red+ X2
LI,OFF,max where: X1 = as defined in 4.1.14 of this appendixLI,OFF,red = as defined as LI,OFF in 4.3.3 of this
appendix at the reduced fuel input rateX2 = as defined in 4.1.15 of this appendixLI,OFF,Max = as defined as LI,OFF in 4.3.3 of this
appendix at the maximum fuel input rate
Calculate the off-cycle infiltration heat loss (LI,OFF) expressed as a percent and defined as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.065 where: 100=conversion factor for percent0.24=specific heat of air in Btu per pound-[deg]F1.3=dimensionless factor for converting laboratory measured stack flow
to typical field conditions0.7=infiltration parameter70=assumed average indoor air temperature, [deg]FTOA = average outdoor temperature as defined in 4.3.4 of this
appendixQin = fuel input rate, as defined in 3.1 of this appendix in
Btu per minute (as appropriate for the firing rate)ton = average burner on-time per cycle and is 20 minutes[Sigma] mS,OFF = summation of the twenty values of the
quantity, mS,OFF, measured in accordance with 3.3
of this appendixmS,OFF = as defined in 4.3.3 of this appendix
4.3.6 Part-load fuel utilization efficiency. Calculate the part-load fuel utilization efficiency ([eta]u) expressed as a percent and defined as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC14NO91.052 where:Cj = 2.8, adjustment factorLj = jacket loss as defined in 4.1.5LL,A = as defined in 4.1.6 of this appendixton = as defined in 4.3.3 of this appendixLS,ON = as defined in 4.3.1 of this appendixLS,OFF = as defined in 4.3.3 of this appendixLI,ON = as defined in 4.3.2 of this appendixLI,OFF = as defined in 4.1.4 of this appendixPF = as defined in 4.1.4 of this appendixtOFF = average burner off-time per cycle and is 20 minutes
4.3.7 Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency.
Calculate the AFUE expressed as a percent and defined as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MY97.041
where: 2,950=average number of heating degree days[eta]SS-WT = as defined in 4.1.16 of this appendix[eta]u = as defined in 4.3.6 of this appendixQin-max = as defined in 4.2.6 of this appendix4,600=as specified in 4.2.6 of this appendixQP = as defined in 3.5 of this appendix2.083=as specified in 4.2.6 of this appendix
4.4 Stack damper effectiveness for vented heaters equipped with electro-mechanical stack dampers. Determine the stack damper effectiveness for vented heaters equipped with electro-mechanical stack dampers (Do), defined as: Do = 1.62 [1--AD cos [Omega]/AS] where: AD = as defined in 3.4 of this appendix[Omega]=as defined in 3.4 of this appendixAS = as defined in 3.4 of this appendix
4.5 Addition requirements for vented home heating equipment using indoor air for combustion and draft control. For vented home heating equipment using indoor air for combustion and draft control, DF, as described in section 4.1.2 of this appendix, and DS, as described in section 4.1.3 of this appendix, shall be determined from Table 1 of this appendix.
4.5.1 Optional procedure for determining DP for vented home heating equipment. Calculate the ratio (DP) of the rate of flue gas mass through the vented heater during the off-period, MF,OFF(TF,SS), to the rate of flue gas mass flow during the on-period, MF,SS(TF,SS), and defined as: DP = MF,OFF(TF,SS)/
MF,SS(TF,SS)
For vented heaters in which no draft is maintained during the steady-state or cool down tests, MF,OFF(TF,SS) is defined as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.067
For oil fueled vented heaters in which an imposed draft is maintained, as described in section 3.6 of this appendix, MF,OFF(TF,SS) is defined as: MF,OFF(TF,SS)=MF,OFF(T*F,SS) where: TF,SS = as defined in 3.1.1 of this appendixT*F,OFF = flue gas temperature during the off-period measured
in accordance with 3.6 of this appendix in degrees FahrenheitTRA = as defined in 2.9 of this appendix[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.068 pB = barometric pressure measured in accordance with 3.6 of
this appendix in inches of mercuryVT = flow rate of tracer gas through the vented heater
measured in accordance with 3.6 of this appendix in cubic feet
per minuteCT = concentration by volume of tracer gas present in the
flue gas sample measured in accordance with 3.6 of this
appendix in percentCT*=concentration by volume of the active tracer gas in the
mixture in percent and is 100 when the tracer gas is a single
component gasTT = the temperature of the tracer gas entering the flow
meter measured in accordance with 3.6 of this appendix in
degrees Fahrenheit(TT+460)=absolute temperature of the tracer gas entering the
flow meter in degrees RankineMF,SS(TF,SS)=Qin[RT,F(A/
F)+1]/[60HHVA]Qin = as defined in 3.1 of this appendixRT,F = as defined in 4.1.7 of this appendixA/F=as defined in 4.2.2 of this appendixHHVA = as defined in 4.2.2 of this appendix
4.5.2 Optional procedure for determining off-cycle draft factor for flue gas flow for vented heaters. For systems numbered 1 thru 10, calculate the off-cycle draft factor for flue gas flow (DF) defined as: DF = DP
For systems numbered 11 or 12: DF = DP DO where: Dp = as defined in 4.5.1. of this appendixDO = as defined in 4.4 of this appendix
4.5.3 Optional procedure for determining off-cycle draft factor for stack gas flow for vented heaters. Calculate the off-cycle draft factor for stack gas flow (DS) defined as: For systems numbered 1 or 2: DS = 1.0For systems numbered 3 or 4: DS = (DP+0.79)/1.4For systems numbered 5 or 6: DS = DOFor systems numbered 7 or 8 and if DO(S/F)<1:DS =
DO DPFor systems numbered 7 or 8 and if DO(S/F)1: DS = DO DP+[0.85-DO
DP] [DO(S/F)-1]/[S/F-1] where: DP = as defined in 4.5.1 of this appendixDO = as defined in 4.4 of this appendix
4.6 Annual energy consumption.
4.6.1 National average number of burner operating hours. For vented heaters equipped with single stage controls or manual controls, the national average number of burner operating hours (BOH) is defined as: BOHSS = 1,416AFA DHR-1,416 B where: 1,416=national average heating load hours for vented heaters based on
2,950 degree days and 15 [deg]F outdoor design temperatureAF = 0.7067, adjustment factor to adjust the calculated
design heating requirement and heating load hours to the
actual
heating load experienced by the heating systemDHR=typical design heating requirements based on QOUT, from
Table 4 of this appendix.QOUT = [([eta]SS/100)-Cj
(Lj/100)] QinLj = jacket loss as defined in 4.1.5 of this appendixCj = 2.8, adjustment factor as defined in 4.3.6 of this
appendix[eta]SS = steady-state efficiency as defined in 4.1.10 of
this appendix, percentQin = as defined in 3.1 of this appendix at the maximum fuel
input rateA=100,000/[341,300PE+(Qin-
QP)[eta]u]B=2.938(QP) [eta]u A/100,000100,000=factor that accounts for percent and kBtuPE = as defined in 3.1.3 of this appendixQP = as defined in 3.5 of this appendix[eta]u = as defined in 4.3.6 of this appendix for vented
heaters using the tracer gas method, percent
= as defined in 4.2.5 of this appendix for manually controlled vented heaters, percent
= 2,950 AFUE[eta]SS Qin/[2,950 [eta]SS Qin--AFUE(2.083)(4,600)QP], for vented heaters equipped without manual controls and without thermal stack dampers and not using the optional tracer gas method, where:AFUE=as defined in 4.1.17 of this appendix, percent2,950=average number of heating degree days as defined in 4.2.6 of this
appendix4,600=average number of non-heating season hours per year as defined in
4.2.6 of this appendix2.938=(4,160/1,416)=ratio of the average length of the heating season in
hours to the average heating load hours2.083=as specified in 4.2.6 of this appendix
4.6.1.1 For vented heaters equipped with two stage or step modulating controls the national average number of burner operating hours at the reduced operating mode is defined as: BOHR = X1EM/Qred-in where: X1 = as defined in 4.1.14 of this appendixQred-in = as defined in 4.1.11 of this appendixEM = average annual energy used during the heating season
= (Qin-QP)BOHSS+(8,760-4,600)QPQin = as defined in 3.1 of this appendix at the maximum fuel
input rateQP = as defined in 3.5 of this appendixBOHSS = as defined in 4.6.1 of this appendix, in which the
term PE in the factor A is increased by the factor
R, which is defined in 3.1.3 of this appendix as:R=1.3 for two stage controls
= 1.4 for step modulating controls when the ratio of minimum-to-maximum fuel input is greater than or equal to 0.7
= 1.7 for step modulating controls when the ratio of minimum-to-maximum fuel input is less than 0.7 and greater than or equal to 0.5
= 2.2 for step modulating controls when the ratio of minimum-to-maximum fuel input is less than 0.5A=100,000/[341,300 PE R+(Qin-QP)[eta]u]8,760=total number of hours per year4,600=as specified in 4.2.6 of this appendix
4.6.1.2 For vented heaters equipped with two stage or step modulating controls the national average number of burner operating hours at the maximum operating mode (BOHH) is defined as: BOHH = X2EM/Qin where: X2 = as defined in 4.1.15 of this appendixEM = average annual energy used during the heating season
= (Qin-QP)BOHSS+(8,760-4,600)QPQin = as defined in 3.1 of this appendix at the maximum fuel
input rate
4.6.2 Average annual fuel energy for gas or oil fueled vented heaters. For vented heaters equipped with single stage controls or manual controls, the average annual fuel energy consumption (EF) is expressed in Btu per year and defined as: EF = BOHSS (Qin-QP)+8,760
QP where: BOHSS = as defined in 4.6.1 of this appendixQin = as defined in 3.1 of this appendixQP = as defined in 3.5 of this appendix8,760=as specified in 4.6.1 of this appendix
4.6.2.1 For vented heaters equipped with either two stage or step modulating controls EF is defined as: EF = EM+4,600QP where: EM = as defined in 4.6.1.2 of this appendix4,600=as specified 4.2.6 of this appendixQP = as defined in 3.5 of this appendix
4.6.3 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for vented heaters. For vented heaters with single-stage controls or manual controls, the average annual auxiliary electrical consumption (EAE) is expressed in kilowatt-hours and defined as: EAE = BOHSSPE + ESO Where: BOHSS = as defined in 4.6.1 of this appendixPE = as defined in 3.1.3 of this appendixESO = as defined in 4.7 of this appendix
4.6.3.1 For vented heaters with two-stage or modulating controls, EAE is defined as: EAE = (BOHR + BOHH)PE +
ESO Where: BOHR = as defined in 4.6.1 of this appendixBOHH = as defined in 4.6.1 of this appendixPE = as defined in 3.1.3 of this appendixESO = as defined in 4.7 of this appendix
4.6.4 Average annual energy consumption for vented heaters located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements.
4.6.4.1 Average annual fuel energy consumption for gas or oil fueled vented home heaters located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements. For gas or oil fueled vented heaters the average annual fuel energy consumption for a specific geographic region and a specific typical design heating requirement (EFR) is expressed in Btu per year and defined as: EFR = (EF-8,760 QP)(HLH/
1,416)+8,760QP where: EF = as defined in 4.6.2 of this appendix8,760=as specified in 4.6.1 of this appendixQP = as defined in 3.5 of this appendixHLH=heating load hours for a specific geographic region determined from
the heating load hour map in Figure 3 of this appendix1,416=as specified in 4.6.1 of this appendix
4.6.4.2 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for gas or oil fueled vented home heaters located in a different geographic region of the United States and in buildings with different design heating requirements. For gas or oil fueled vented home heaters the average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for a specific geographic region and a specific typical design heating requirement (EAER) is expressed in kilowatt-hours and defined as: EAER = EAE HLH/1,416 where: EAE = as defined in 4.6.3 of this appendixHLH=as defined in 4.6.4.1 of this appendix1,416=as specified in 4.6.1 of this appendix
Table 1--Off-Cycle Draft Factors for Flue Gas Flow (DF) and for Stack Gas Flow (DS) for Vented Home Heating
Equipment Equipped Without Thermal Stack Dampers----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
System number (DF) (DS) Burner type Venting system type \1\----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1...................................... 1.0 1.0 Atmospheric............... Draft hood or diverter.2...................................... 0.4 1.0 Power..................... Draft hood or diverter.3...................................... 1.0 1.0 Atmospheric............... Barometric draft
regulator.4...................................... 0.4 0.85 Power..................... Barometric draft
regulator.5...................................... 1.0 Do Atmospheric............... Draft hood or diverter
with damper.6...................................... 0.4 Do Power..................... Draft hood or diverter
with damper.7...................................... 1.0 Do Atmospheric............... Barometric draft
regulator with damper.8...................................... 0.4 Do Dp Power..................... Barometric draft
regulator with damper.9...................................... 1.0 ....... Atmospheric............... Direct vent.10..................................... 0.4 ....... Power..................... Direct vent.11..................................... Do ....... Atmospheric............... Direct vent with damper.12..................................... 0.4 Do ....... Power..................... Direct vent with damper.----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------\1\ Venting systems listed with dampers means electro-mechanical dampers only. Table 2--Values of Higher Heating Value (HHV(A), Stoichiometric Air/Fuel (A/F), Latent Heat Loss (LL,A) and Fuel-
Specified Parameters (A, B, C, and D) for Typical Fuels----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HHVA
Fuels (Btu/lb) A/F LL,A A B C D----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------No. 1 oil........................................ 19,800 14.56 6.55 0.0679 14.22 0.0179 0.167No. 2 oil........................................ 19,500 14.49 6.50 0.0667 14.34 0.0181 0.167Natural gas...................................... 20,120 14.45 9.55 0.0919 10.96 0.0175 0.171Manufactured gas................................. 18,500 11.81 10.14 0.0965 10.10 0.0155 0.235Propane.......................................... 21,500 15.58 7.99 0.0841 12.60 0.0177 0.151Butane........................................... 20,000 15.36 7.79 0.0808 12.93 0.0180 0.143----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table 3--Fraction of Heating Load at Reduced Operating Mode (X1) and at
Maximum Operating Mode (X2), Average Outdoor Temperatures (TOA and
TOA*), and Balance Point Temperature (TC) for Vented Heaters Equipped
With Either Two-Stage Thermostats or Step-Modulating Thermostats------------------------------------------------------------------------
Heat output ratio \a\ X1 X2 TOA TOA* TC------------------------------------------------------------------------0.20 to 0.24......................... .12 .88 57 40 530.25 to 0.29......................... .16 .84 56 39 510.30 to 0.34......................... .20 .80 54 38 490.35 to 0.39......................... .30 .70 53 36 460.40 to 0.44......................... .36 .64 52 35 440.45 to 0.49......................... .43 .57 51 34 420.50 to 0.54......................... .52 .48 50 32 390.55 to 0.59......................... .60 .40 49 30 370.60 to 0.64......................... .70 .30 48 29 340.65 to 0.69......................... .76 .24 47 27 320.70 to 0.74......................... .84 .16 46 25 290.75 to 0.79......................... .88 .12 46 22 270.80 to 0.84......................... .94 .06 45 20 230.85 to 0.89......................... .96 .04 45 18 210.90 to 0.94......................... .98 .02 44 16 190.95 to 0.99......................... .99 .01 44 13 17------------------------------------------------------------------------\a\ The heat output ratio means the ratio of minimum to maximum heat
output rates as defined in 4.1.13.
Table 4--Average Design Heating Requirements for Vented Heaters With
Different Output Capacities------------------------------------------------------------------------
Average
design
Vented heaters output capacity Qout--(Btu/hr) heating
requirements
(kBtu/hr)------------------------------------------------------------------------5,000-7,499............................................... 5.07,500-10,499.............................................. 7.510,500-13,499............................................. 10.013,500-16,499............................................. 12.516,500-19,499............................................. 15.019,500-22,499............................................. 17.522,500-26,499............................................. 20.526,500-30,499............................................. 23.530,500-34,499............................................. 26.534,500-38,499............................................. 30.038,500-42,499............................................. 33.542,500-46,499............................................. 36.546,500-51,499............................................. 40.051,500-56,499............................................. 44.056,500-61,499............................................. 48.061,500-66,499............................................. 52.066,500-71,499............................................. 56.071,500-76,500............................................. 60.0------------------------------------------------------------------------ [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.069 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC04OC91.070 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR12MY97.042
4.7 Average annual electric standby mode and off mode energy consumption.
Calculate the annual electric standby mode and off mode energy consumption, ESO, defined as, in kilowatt-hours: ESO = ((PW,SB * (4160--BOH)) + (PW,OFF
* 4600)) * K Where: PW,SB = vented heater standby mode power, in watts, as measured in section 3.7 of this appendix4160 = average heating season hours per yearPW,OFF = vented heater off mode power, in watts, as measured
in section 3.7 of this appendix 4600 = average non-heating season hours per yearK = 0.001 kWh/Wh, conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hoursBOH = burner operating hours as calculated in section 4.6.1 of this
appendix where for single-stage controls or manual controls
vented heaters BOH = BOHSS and for vented heaters
equipped with two-stage or modulating controls BOH =
(BOHR + BOHH). [49 FR 12169, Mar. 28, 1984, as amended at 62 FR 26162, May 12, 1997; 77 FR 74571, Dec. 17, 2012]
Sec. Appendix P to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Pool Heaters
Note: The procedures and calculations that refer to standby mode and off mode energy consumption (i.e., sections 2.2, 2.3, 3.2, 4.2, 4.3, 5.3 equation (3), and 5.4 of this appendix P) need not be performed to determine compliance with energy conservation standards for pool heaters at this time. However, on or after June 17, 2013, any representations related to standby mode and off mode energy consumption of these products must be based upon results generated under this test procedure, consistent with the requirements of 42 U.S.C. 6293(c)(2). For pool heaters, the statute requires that after July 1, 2010, any adopted energy conservation standard shall incorporate standby mode and off mode energy consumption, and upon the compliance date for such standards, compliance with the applicable provisions of this test procedure will also be required.
1. Definitions.
1.1 Active mode means the condition during the pool heating season in which the pool heater is connected to the power source, and the main burner, electric resistance element, or heat pump is activated to heat pool water.
1.2 IEC 62301 (Second Edition) means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, titled ``Household electrical appliances--Measurement of standby power,'' Publication 62301, Edition 2.0 2011-01. (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3)
1.3 Off mode means the condition during the pool non-heating season in which the pool heater is connected to the power source, and neither the main burner, electric resistance elements, nor heat pump is activated.
1.4 Seasonal off switch means a switch present on the pool heater that effects a difference in off mode energy consumption as compared to standby mode energy consumption.
1.5 Standby mode means the condition during the pool heating season in which the pool heater is connected to the power source, and neither the main burner, electric resistance elements, nor heat pump is activated.
2. Test Method.
2.1 Active mode. The test method for testing pool heaters in active mode is as specified in section 2.10 of ANSI Z21.56 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
2.2 Standby mode. The test method for testing the energy consumption of pool heaters in standby mode is as described in sections 3 through 5 of this appendix.
2.3 Off mode.
2.3.1 Pool heaters with a seasonal off switch.
For pool heaters with a seasonal off switch, no off-mode test is required.
2.3.2 Pool heaters without a seasonal off switch.
For pool heaters without a seasonal off switch, the test method for testing the energy consumption of the pool heater is as described in sections 3 through 5 of this appendix.
3. Test conditions.
3.1 Active mode. Establish the test conditions specified in section 2.10 of ANSI Z21.56 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
3.2 Standby mode and off mode. Following the conclusion of the 30-minute active mode test described in section 2.10 of ANSI Z21.56 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), reduce the thermostat setting to a low enough temperature to put the pool heater into standby mode. Operate the pool heater in standby mode for 60 minutes.
4. Measurements.
4.1 Active mode. Measure the quantities delineated in section 2.10 of ANSI Z21.56 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). The measurement of energy consumption for oil-fired pool heaters in Btu is to be carried out in appropriate units (e.g., gallons).
4.2 Standby mode. Record the average electric power consumption during the standby mode test, PW,SB, in W, in accordance with section 5 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and the fossil fuel energy consumption during the standby test, Qp, in Btu. Ambient temperature and voltage specifications of ANSI Z21.56 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) shall apply to this standby mode testing. The recorded standby power (PW,SB) shall be rounded to the second decimal place, and for loads greater than or equal to 10W, at least three significant figures shall be reported.
4.3 Off mode.
4.3.1 Pool heaters with a seasonal off switch. For pool heaters with a seasonal off switch, the average electric power consumption during the off mode, PW,OFF = 0, and the fossil fuel energy consumed during the off mode, Qoff = 0.
4.3.2 Pool heaters without a seasonal off switch. Record the average electric power consumption during the standby/off mode test, PW,OFF (= PW,SB), in W, in accordance with section 5 of IEC 62301 (Second Edition) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), and the fossil fuel energy consumption during the off mode test, Qoff (= Qp), in Btu. Ambient temperature and voltage specifications of ANSI Z21.56 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) shall apply to this off mode testing. The recorded off mode power (PW,OFF) shall be rounded to the second decimal place, and for loads greater than or equal to 10W, at least three significant figures shall be reported.
5. Calculations.
5.1 Thermal efficiency. Calculate the thermal efficiency, Et (expressed as a percent), as specified in section 2.10 of ANSI Z21.56 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). The expression of fuel consumption for oil-fired pool heaters shall be in Btu.
5.2 Average annual fossil fuel energy for pool heaters. The average annual fuel energy for pool heaters, EF, is defined as: EF = BOH QIN + (POH - BOH)QPR + (8760 -
POH) Qoff,R Where: BOH = average number of burner operating hours = 104 hPOH = average number of pool operating hours = 4464 hQIN = rated fuel energy input as defined according to section
2.10.1 or section 2.10.2 of ANSI Z21.56, as appropriate.QPR = average energy consumption rate of continuously
operating pilot light, if employed, = (QP/1 h)QP = energy consumption of continuously operating pilot
light, if employed, as measured in section 4.2 of this
appendix, in Btu8760 = number of hours in one yearQoff,R = average off mode fossil fuel energy consumption rate
= Qoff/(1 h)Qoff = off mode energy consumption as defined in section 4.3
of this appendix
5.3 Average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for pool heaters. The average annual auxiliary electrical energy consumption for pool heaters, EAE, is expressed in Btu and defined as: (1) EAE = EAE,active + EAE,standby,off(2) EAE,active = BOH * PE(3) EAE,standby,off = (POH - BOH) PW,SB(Btu/h) +
(8760 - POH) PW,OFF(Btu/h) Where: EAE,active = auxiliary electrical consumption in the active
modeEAE,standby,off = auxiliary electrical consumption in the
standby mode and off modePE = 2Ec, if heater is tested according to section 2.10.1 of
ANSI Z21.56, in Btu/h = 3.412 PErated, if heater is
tested according to section 2.10.2 of ANSI Z21.56, in Btu/hEc = electrical consumption of the heater (converted to
equivalent unit of Btu), including the electrical energy to
the recirculating pump if used, during the 30-minute thermal
efficiency test, as defined in section 2.10.1 of ANSI Z21.56,
in Btu per 30 min.2 = conversion factor to convert unit from per 30 min. to per h.PErated = nameplate rating of auxiliary electrical equipment
of heater, in WattsBOH = as defined in 5.2 of this appendixPOH = as defined in 5.2 of this appendixPW,SB (Btu/h) = electrical energy consumption rate during
standby mode expressed in Btu/h = 3.412 PW,SB, Btu/
hPW,SB = as defined in 4.2 of this appendixPW,OFF (Btu/h) = electrical energy consumption rate during
off mode expressed in Btu/h = 3.412 PW,OFF, Btu/hPW,OFF = as defined in 4.3 of this appendix
5.4 Integrated thermal efficiency.
5.4.1 Calculate the seasonal useful output of the pool heater as:
EOUT = BOH[(Et/100)(QIN + PE)] Where: BOH = as defined in 5.2 of this appendixEt = thermal efficiency as defined in 5.1 of this appendixQIN = as defined in 5.2 of this appendixPE = as defined in 5.3 of this appendix100 = conversion factor, from percent to fraction
5.4.2 Calculate the annual input to the pool heater as: EIN = EF + EAE Where: EF = as defined in 5.2 of this appendixEAE = as defined in 5.3 of this appendix
5.4.3 Calculate the pool heater integrated thermal efficiency (TEI) (in percent). TEI = 100(EOUT/EIN) Where: EOUT = as defined in 5.4.1 of this appendixEIN = as defined in 5.4.2 of this appendix100 = conversion factor, from fraction to percent [77 FR 74572, Dec. 17, 2012]
Sec. Appendix Q to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts
Comply with Appendix Q until November 14, 2014. After this date, all fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be tested using the provisions of Appendix Q1.
1. Definitions
1.1 AC control signal means an alternating current (AC) signal that is supplied to the ballast using additional wiring for the purpose of controlling the ballast and putting the ballast in standby mode.
1.2 ANSI Standard means a standard developed by a committee accredited by the American National Standards Institute.
1.3 Ballast input voltage means the rated input voltage of a fluorescent lamp ballast.
1.4 DC control signal means a direct current (DC) signal that is supplied to the ballast using additional wiring for the purpose of controlling the ballast and putting the ballast in standby mode.
1.5 F40T12 lamp means a nominal 40 watt tubular fluorescent lamp which is 48 inches in length and one and a half inches in diameter, and conforms to ANSI C78.81 (Data Sheet 7881-ANSI-1010-1) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.6 F96T12 lamp means a nominal 75 watt tubular fluorescent lamp which is 96 inches in length and one and a half inches in diameter, and conforms to ANSI C78.81 (Data Sheet 7881-ANSI-3007-1) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.7 F96T12HO lamp means a nominal 110 watt tubular fluorescent lamp that is 96 inches in length and one and a half inches in diameter, and conforms to ANSI C78.81 (Data Sheet 7881-ANSI-1019-1) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.8 F34T12 lamp (also known as a ``F40T12/ES lamp'') means a nominal 34 watt tubular fluorescent lamp that is 48 inches in length and one and a half inches in diameter, and conforms to ANSI C78.81 (Data Sheet 7881-ANSI-1006-1) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.9 F96T12/ES lamp means a nominal 60 watt tubular fluorescent lamp that is 96 inches in length and one and a half inches in diameter, and conforms to ANSI C78.81 (Data Sheet 7881-ANSI-3006-1) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.10 F96T12HO/ES lamp means a nominal 95 watt tubular fluorescent lamp that is 96 inches in length and one and a half inches in diameter, and conforms to ANSI C78.81 (Data Sheet 7881-ANSI-1017-1) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.11 Input current means the root-mean-square (RMS) current in amperes delivered to a fluorescent lamp ballast.
1.12 Luminaire means a complete lighting unit consisting of a fluorescent lamp or lamps, together with parts designed to distribute the light, to position and protect such lamps, and to connect such lamps to the power supply through the ballast.
1.13 Nominal lamp watts means the wattage at which a fluorescent lamp is designed to operate.
1.14 PLC control signal means a power line carrier (PLC) signal that is supplied to the ballast using the input ballast wiring for the purpose of controlling the ballast and putting the ballast in standby mode.
1.15 Power Factor means the power input divided by the product of ballast input voltage and input current of a fluorescent lamp ballast, as measured under test conditions specified in ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.16 Power input means the power consumption in watts of a ballast a fluorescent lamp or lamps, as determined in accordance with the test procedures specified in ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.17 Relative light output means the light output delivered through the use of a ballast divided by the light output of a reference ballast, expressed as a percent, as determined in accordance with the test procedures specified in ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.18 Residential building means a structure or portion of a structure which provides facilities or shelter for human residency, except that such term does not include any multifamily residential structure of more than three stores above grade.
1.19 Standby mode means the condition in which an energy-using product--
(a) Is connected to a main power source; and
(b) Offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions:
(i) To facilitate the activation or deactivation of other functions (including active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer.
(ii) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions.
1.20 Wireless control signal means a wireless signal that is radiated to and received by the ballast for the purpose of controlling the ballast and putting the ballast in standby mode.
2. Test Conditions.
2.1 Measurement of Active Mode Energy Consumption, BEF. The test conditions for testing fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be done in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). Any subsequent amendment to this standard by the standard setting organization will not affect the DOE test procedures unless and until amended by DOE. The test conditions for measuring active mode energy consumption are described in sections 4, 5, and 6 of ANSI C82.2. The test conditions described in this section (2.1) are applicable to section 3.1 of section 3, Test Method and Measurements. For section 2.1 and 3, ANSI C78.81 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), ANSI C82.1 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), ANSI C82.11 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), and ANSI C82.13 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) shall be used when applying ANSI C82.2 instead of the versions listed as normative references in ANSI C82.2.
2.2 Measurement of Standby Mode Power. The measurement of standby mode power need not be performed to determine compliance with energy conservation standards for fluorescent lamp ballasts at this time. This and the previous statement will be removed as part of a rulemaking to amend the energy conservation standards for fluorescent lamp ballasts to account for standby mode energy consumption, and the following shall apply on the compliance date for any such requirements.
The test conditions for testing fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be done in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). Any subsequent amendment to this standard by the standard setting organization will not affect the DOE test procedures unless and until amended by DOE. The test conditions for measuring standby power are described in sections 5, 7, and 8 of ANSI C82.2. Fluorescent lamp ballasts that are capable of connections to control devices shall be tested with all commercially available compatible control devices connected in all possible configurations. For each configuration, a separate measurement of standby power shall be made in accordance with section 3.2 of the test procedure.
3. Test Method and Measurements
3.1 Active Mode Energy Efficiency Measurement
3.1.1 The test method for testing the active mode energy efficiency of fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be done in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). Where ANSI C82.2 references ANSI C82.1-1997, the operator shall use ANSI C82.1 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) for testing low-frequency ballasts and ANSI C82.11 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) for high-frequency ballasts.
3.1.2 Instrumentation. The instrumentation shall be as specified by sections 5, 7, 8, and 15 of ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
3.1.3 Electric Supply.
3.1.3.1 Input Power. Measure the input power (watts) to the ballast in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), section 4.
3.1.3.2 Input Voltage. Measure the input voltage (volts) (RMS) to the ballast in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), section 3.2.1 and section 4.
3.1.3.3 Input Current. Measure the input current (amps) (RMS) to the ballast in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), section 3.2.1 and section 4.
3.l.4 Light Output.
3.1.4.1 Measure the light output of the reference lamp with the reference ballast in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), section 12.
3.1.4.2 Measure the light output of the reference lamp with the test ballast in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), section 12.
3.2 Standby Mode Power Measurement
3.2.1 The test for measuring standby mode energy consumption of fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be done in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
3.2.2. Send a signal to the ballast instructing it to have zero light output using the appropriate ballast communication protocol or system for the ballast being tested.
3.2.3 Input Power. Measure the input power (watts) to the ballast in accordance with ANSI C82.2-2002, section 13, (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
3.2.4 Control Signal Power. The power from the control signal path will be measured using all applicable methods described below.
3.2.4.1 AC Control Signal. Measure the AC control signal power (watts), using a wattmeter (W), connected to the ballast in accordance with the circuit shown in Figure 1.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC09.001
3.2.4.2 DC Control Signal. Measure the DC control signal voltage, using a voltmeter (V), and current, using an ammeter (A), connected to the ballast in accordance with the circuit shown in Figure 2. The DC control signal power is calculated by multiplying the DC control signal voltage and the DC control signal current.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC09.002
3.2.4.3 Power Line Carrier (PLC) Control Signal. Measure the PLC control signal power (watts), using a wattmeter (W), connected to the ballast in accordance with the circuit shown in Figure 3. The wattmeter must have a frequency response that is at least 10 times higher than the PLC being measured in order to measure the PLC signal correctly. The wattmeter must also be high-pass filtered to filter out power at 60 Hertz.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22OC09.003
3.2.4.4 Wireless Control Signal. The power supplied to a ballast using a wireless signal is not easily measured, but is estimated to be well below 1.0 watt. Therefore, the wireless control signal power is not measured as part of this test procedure.
4. Calculations.
4.1 Calculate relative light output:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04MY11.012
Where: photocell output of lamp on test ballast is determined in accordance with section 3.1.4.2, expressed in watts, and photocell output of lamp on ref. ballast is determined in accordance with section 3.1.4.1, expressed in watts.
4.2. Determine the Ballast Efficacy Factor (BEF) using the following equations:
(a) Single lamp ballast [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04MY11.013
(b) Multiple lamp ballast
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04MY11.014
Where:Input power is determined in accordance with section 3.1.3.1, relative
light output as defined in section 4.1, and average relative
light output is the relative light output, as defined in
section 4.1, for all lamps, divided by the total number of
lamps.
4.3 Determine Ballast Power Factor (PF):
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04MY11.015
Where:Input power is as defined in section 3.1.3.1, Input voltage is
determined in accordance with section 3.1.3.2, expressed in
volts, and Input current is determined in accordance with
section 3.1.3.3, expressed in amps. [54 FR 6076, Feb. 7, 1989, as amended at 56 FR 18682, Apr. 24, 1991; 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004; 70 FR 60412, Oct. 18, 2005; 74 FR 54455, Oct. 22, 2009; 76 FR 25223, May 4, 2011; 76 FR 70628, Nov. 14, 2011; 77 FR 4216, Jan. 27, 2012]
Sec. Appendix Q1 to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts
Comply with Appendix Q1 beginning November 14, 2014. Prior to this date, all fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be tested using the provisions of Appendix Q.
1. Definitions
1.1. AC control signal means an alternating current (AC) signal that is supplied to the ballast using additional wiring for the purpose of controlling the ballast and putting the ballast in standby mode.
1.2. Active Mode means the condition in which an energy-using product--
(a) Is connected to a main power source;
(b) Has been activated; and
(c) Provides 1 or more main functions.
1.3. Cathode heating refers to power delivered to the lamp by the ballast for the purpose of raising the temperature of the lamp electrode or filament.
1.4. Commercial ballast is a fluorescent lamp ballast that is not a residential ballast as defined in section 1.13 and meets technical standards for non-consumer radio frequency lighting devices as specified in subpart C of 47 CFR part 18.
1.5. DC control signal means a direct current (DC) signal that is supplied to the ballast using additional wiring for the purpose of controlling the ballast and putting the ballast in standby mode.
1.6. High-frequency ballast is as defined in ANSI C82.13 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.7. Instant-start is the starting method used instant-start systems as defined in ANSI C82.13 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.8. Low-frequency ballast is a fluorescent lamp ballast that operates at a supply frequency of 50 to 60 Hz and operates the lamp at the same frequency as the supply.
1.9. PLC control signal means a power line carrier (PLC) signal that is supplied to the ballast using the input ballast wiring for the purpose of controlling the ballast and putting the ballast in standby mode.
1.10. Programmed-start is the starting method used in programmed-start systems as defined in ANSI C82.13 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.11. Rapid-start is the starting method used in rapid-start type systems as defined in ANSI C82.13 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.12. Reference lamp is a fluorescent lamp that meets certain operating conditions as defined by ANSI C82.13 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
1.13. Residential ballast is a fluorescent lamp ballast designed and labeled for use in residential applications. Residential ballasts must meet the technical standards for consumer RF lighting devices as specified in subpart C of 47 CFR part 18.
1.14. RMS is the root mean square of a varying quantity.
1.15. Standby mode means the condition in which an energy-using product--
(a) Is connected to a main power source; and
(b) Offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions:
(i) To facilitate the activation or deactivation of other functions (including active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer.
(ii) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions.
1.16. Wireless control signal means a wireless signal that is radiated to and received by the ballast for the purpose of controlling the ballast and putting the ballast in standby mode.
2. Active Mode Procedure
2.1. Where ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) references ANSI C82.1-1997, the operator shall use ANSI C82.1 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) for testing low-frequency ballasts and shall use ANSI C82.11 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) for testing high-frequency ballasts. In addition when applying ANSI C82.2, ANSI C78.81 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), ANSI C82.1, ANSI C82.11, and ANSI C82.13 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) shall be used instead of the versions listed as normative references in ANSI C82.2.
2.2. Instruments
2.2.1. All instruments shall be as specified by ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
2.2.2. Power Analyzer. In addition to the specifications in ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), the power analyzer shall have a maximum 100 pF capacitance to ground and frequency response between 40 Hz and 1 MHz.
2.2.3. Current Probe. In addition to the specifications in ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), the current probe shall be galvanically isolated and have frequency response between 40 Hz and 20 MHz.
2.3. Test Setup
2.3.1. The ballast shall be connected to a main power source and to the fluorescent lamp load according to the manufacturer's wiring instructions and ANSI C82.1 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and ANSI C78.81 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
2.3.1.1.1. Wire lengths between the ballast and fluorescent lamp shall be the length provided by the ballast manufacturer. Wires shall be kept loose and not shortened or bundled.
2.3.1.1.1.1. If the wire lengths supplied with the ballast are of insufficient length to reach both ends of lamp, additional wire may be added. The minimal additional wire length necessary shall be added, and the additional wire shall be the same wire gauge as the wire supplied with the ballast. If no wiring is provided with the ballast, 18 gauge or thicker wire shall be used. The wires shall be separated from each other and ground to prevent parasitic capacitance for all wires used in the apparatus, including those wires from the ballast to the lamps and from the lamps to the measuring devices.
2.3.1.1.2. The fluorescent lamp shall meet the specifications of a reference lamp as defined by ANSI C82.13 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and be seasoned at least 12 hours.
2.3.1.2. The ballast shall be connected to the number of lamps equal to the maximum number of lamps the ballast is designed to operate.
2.3.1.3. The ballast shall be tested with a reference lamp of the nominal wattage listed in Table A of this section.
2.3.1.4. For ballasts that operate rapid-start lamps (commonly referred to as 8-foot high output lamps) with recessed double contact bases, a nominal overall length of 96 inches, and that operate at ambient temperatures of 20 [deg]F or less and are used in outdoor signs (sign ballasts):
2.3.1.4.1. A T8 lamp in accordance with Table A of this section shall be used for sign ballasts that only operate T8 lamps.
2.3.1.4.2. A T12 lamp in accordance with Table A of this section shall be used for sign ballasts that only operate T12 lamps.
2.3.1.4.3. A T12 lamp in accordance with Table A of this section shall be used for sign ballasts that are capable of operating both T8 and T12 lamps.
Table A--Lamp-and-Ballast Pairings and Frequency Adjustment Factors----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Frequency adjustment
Nominal factor ([beta])
Ballast type lamp Lamp diameter and base -----------------------
wattage Low- High-
frequency frequency----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ballasts that operate straight-shaped lamps 32 T8 MBP.......................... 0.94 1.0
(commonly referred to as 4-foot medium 34 T12 MBP......................... 0.93 1.0
bipin lamps) with medium bipin bases and a
nominal overall length of 48 inches.Ballasts that operate U-shaped lamps 32 T8 MBP.......................... 0.94 1.0
(commonly referred to as 2-foot U-shaped 34 T12 MBP......................... 0.93 1.0
lamps) with medium bipin bases and a
nominal overall length between 22 and 25
inches.Ballasts that operate rapid-start lamps 86 T8 HO RDC....................... 0.92 1.0
(commonly referred to as 8-foot-high output 95 T12 HO RDC...................... 0.94 1.0
lamps) with recessed double contact bases
and a nominal overall length of 96 inches.Ballasts that operate instant-start lamps 59 T8 slimline SP.................. 0.95 1.0
(commonly referred to as 8-foot slimline 60 T12 slimline SP................. 0.94 1.0
lamps) with single pin bases and a nominal
overall length of 96 inches.Ballasts that operate straight-shaped lamps 28 T5 SO Mini-BP................... 0.95 1.0
(commonly referred to as 4-foot miniature
bipin standard output lamps) with miniature
bipin bases and a nominal length between 45
and 48 inches.Ballasts that operate straight-shaped lamps 54 T5 HO Mini-BP................... 0.95 1.0
(commonly referred to as 4-foot miniature
bipin high output lamps) with miniature
bipin bases and a nominal length between 45
and 48 inches.Ballasts that operate rapid-start lamps 86 T8 HO RDC....................... 0.92 1.0
(commonly referred to as 8-foot high output 110 T12 HO RDC...................... 0.94 1.0
lamps) with recessed double contact bases,
a nominal overall length of 96 inches, and
that operate at ambient temperatures of 20
[deg]F or less and are used in outdoor
signs.
-------------------------------------------------------------------MBP, Mini-BP, RDC, and SP represent medium bipin, miniature bipin, recessed double contact, and single pin,
respectively.----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.3.2. Power Analyzer
2.3.2.1. The power analyzer shall have n+1 channels where n is the number of lamps a ballast operates.
2.3.2.2. Lamp Arc Voltage. Leads from the power analyzer should attach to each fluorescent lamp according to Figure 1 of this section for rapid- and programmed-start ballasts, Figure 2 of this section for instant-start ballasts operating single pin (SP) lamps, and Figure 3 of this section for instant-start ballasts operating medium bipin (MBP), miniature bipin (mini-BP), or recessed double contact (RDC) lamps. The programmed- and rapid-start ballast test setup includes two 1000 ohm resistors placed in parallel with the lamp pins to create a midpoint from which to measure lamp arc voltage.
2.3.2.3. Lamp Arc Current. A current probe shall be positioned on each fluorescent lamp according to Figure 1 for rapid- and programmed-start ballasts, Figure 2 of this section for instant-start ballasts operating SP lamps, and Figure 3 of this section for instant-start ballasts operating MBP, mini-BP, and RDC lamps.
2.3.2.3.1. For the lamp arc current measurement, the full transducer ratio shall be set in the power analyzer to match the current probe to the power analyzer.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04MY11.016 Where: Iin Current through the current transducerVout Voltage out of the transducerRin Power analyzer impedanceRs Current probe output impedance [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04MY11.017 [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04MY11.018
2.4. Test Conditions
2.4.1. The test conditions for testing fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be done in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). DOE further specifies that the following revisions of the normative references indicated in ANSI C82.2 should be used in place of the references directly specified in ANSI C82.2: ANSI C78.81 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), ANSI C82.1 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), ANSI C82.3 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), ANSI C82.11 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), and ANSI C82.13 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). All other normative references shall be as specified in ANSI C82.2.
2.4.2. Room Temperature and Air Circulation. The test facility shall be held at 25 2 [deg]C, with minimal air movement as defined in ANSI C78.375 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
2.4.3. Input Voltage. The directions in ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) section 4.1 should be ignored with the following directions for input voltage used instead. For commercial ballasts capable of operating at multiple voltages, the ballast shall be tested 277V 0.1%. For ballasts designed and labeled for residential applications and capable of operating at multiple voltages, the ballast shall be tested at 120V 0.1%. For ballasts designed and labeled as cold-temperature outdoor sign ballasts and capable of operating at multiple voltages, the ballast shall be tested at 120V 0.1%. Ballasts capable of operating at only one input voltage shall be tested at that specified voltage.
2.5. Test Method
2.5.1. Ballast Luminous Efficiency.
2.5.1.1. The ballast shall be connected to the appropriate fluorescent lamps and to measurement instrumentation as indicated by the Test Setup in section 2.3.
2.5.1.2. The ballast shall be operated at full output for at least 15 minutes but no longer than 1 hour until stable operating conditions are reached. After this condition is reached, concurrently measure the parameters described in sections 2.5.1.3 through 2.5.1.9.
2.5.1.2.1. Stable operating conditions are determined by measuring lamp arc voltage, current, and power once per second in accordance with the setup described in section 2.3. Once the difference between the maximum and minimum values for lamp arc voltage, current, and power do not exceed one percent over a four minute moving window, the system shall be considered stable.
2.5.1.3. Lamp Arc Voltage. Measure lamp arc voltage (volts) using the setup described in section 2.3.2.2.
2.5.1.4. Lamp Arc Current. Measure lamp arc current (amps) using the setup described in section 2.3.2.3.
2.5.1.5. Lamp Arc Power. The power analyzer shall calculate output power by using the measurements described in sections 2.5.1.3 and 2.5.1.4.
2.5.1.6. Input Power. Measure the input power (watts) to the ballast in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), section 7.
2.5.1.7. Input Voltage. Measure the input voltage (volts) (RMS) to the ballast in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), section 3.2.1 and section 4.
2.5.1.8. Input Current. Measure the input current (amps) (RMS) to the ballast in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), section 3.2.1 and section 4.
2.5.1.9. Lamp Operating Frequency. Measure the frequency of the waveform delivered from the ballast to any lamp in accordance with the setup in section 2.3.
2.6. Calculations
2.6.1. Calculate ballast luminous efficiency (BLE).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04MY11.019
Where: Total Lamp Arc Power is the sum of the lamp arc powers for all lamps operated by the ballast as determined by section 2.5.1.5, ballast input power is as determined by section 2.5.1.6, and [beta] is equal to the frequency adjustment factor in Table A.
2.6.2. Calculate Power Factor (PF).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04MY11.020
Where: Ballast input power is determined in accordance with section 2.5.1.6, input voltage is determined in accordance with section 2.5.1.7, and input current in determined in accordance with section 2.5.1.8.
3. Standby Mode Procedure
3.1. The measurement of standby mode power need not be performed to determine compliance with energy conservation standards for fluorescent lamp ballasts at this time. The above statement will be removed as part of a rulemaking to amend the energy conservation standards for fluorescent lamp ballasts to account for standby mode energy consumption, and the following shall apply on the compliance date for such requirements.
3.2. Test Conditions
3.2.1. The test conditions for testing fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be done in accordance with the American National Standard Institute ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). Any subsequent amendment to this standard by the standard-setting organization will not affect the DOE test procedures unless and until amended by DOE. The test conditions for measuring standby power are described in sections 5, 7, and 8 of ANSI C82.2. Fluorescent lamp ballasts that are capable of connections to control devices shall be tested with all commercially available compatible control devices connected in all possible configurations. For each configuration, a separate measurement of standby power shall be made in accordance with section 3.3 of the test procedure.
3.3. Test Method and Measurements
3.3.1. The test for measuring standby mode energy consumption of fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be done in accordance with ANSI C82.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
3.3.2. Send a signal to the ballast instructing it to have zero light output using the appropriate ballast communication protocol or system for the ballast being tested.
3.3.3. Input Power. Measure the input power (watts) to the ballast in accordance with ANSI C82.2, section 13, (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
3.3.4. Control Signal Power. The power from the control signal path will be measured using all applicable methods described below.
3.3.4.1. AC Control Signal. Measure the AC control signal power (watts), using a wattmeter (W), connected to the ballast in accordance with the circuit shown in Figure 4 of this section.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04MY11.021
3.3.4.2. DC Control Signal. Measure the DC control signal voltage, using a voltmeter (V), and current, using an ammeter (A), connected to the ballast in accordance with the circuit shown in Figure 5 of this section. The DC control signal power is calculated by multiplying the DC control signal voltage and the DC control signal current.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04MY11.022
3.3.4.3. Power Line Carrier (PLC) Control Signal. Measure the PLC control signal power (watts), using a wattmeter (W), connected to the ballast in accordance with the circuit shown in Figure 6 of this section. The wattmeter must have a frequency response that is at least 10 times higher than the PLC being measured in order to measure the PLC signal correctly. The wattmeter must also be high-pass filtered to filter out power at 60 Hertz.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04MY11.023
3.3.4.4. Wireless Control Signal. The power supplied to a ballast using a wireless signal is not easily measured, but is estimated to be well below 1.0 watt. Therefore, the wireless control signal power is not measured as part of this test procedure. [76 FR 25224, May 4, 2011, as amended at 76 FR 70628, Nov. 14, 2011; 77 FR 4217, Jan. 27, 2012]
Sec. Appendix R to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring Average Lamp Efficacy (LE), Color Rendering Index (CRI), and
Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) of Electric Lamps
1. Scope: This appendix applies to the measurement of lamp lumens, electrical characteristics, CRI, and CCT for general service fluorescent lamps, and to the measurement of lamp lumens, electrical characteristics for general service incandescent lamps and incandescent reflector lamps.
2. Definitions
2.1 To the extent that definitions in the referenced IESNA and CIE standards do not conflict with the DOE definitions, the definitions specified in section 3.0 of IES LM-9 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), section 3.0 of IESNA LM-20 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), section 3.0 and the Glossary of IES LM-45 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), section 2 of IESNA LM-58 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), and Appendix 1 of CIE 13.3 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) shall be included.2.2 ANSI Standard means a standard developed by a committee accredited by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
2.3 CIE means the International Commission on Illumination.
2.4 CRI means Color Rendering Index as defined in Sec. 430.2.
2.5 IESNA means the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.
2.6 Lamp efficacy means the ratio of measured lamp lumen output in lumens to the measured lamp electrical power input in watts, rounded to the nearest tenth, in units of lumens per watt.
2.7 Lamp lumen output means the total luminous flux produced by the lamp, at the reference condition, in units of lumens.
2.8 Lamp electrical power input means the total electrical power input to the lamp, including both arc and cathode power where appropriate, at the reference condition, in units of watts.
2.9 Reference condition means the test condition specified in IES LM-9 for general service fluorescent lamps, in IESNA LM-20 for incandescent reflector lamps, and in IES LM-45 for general service incandescent lamps.
3. Test Conditions
3.1 General Service Fluorescent Lamps: For general service fluorescent lamps, the ambient conditions of the test and the electrical circuits, reference ballasts, stabilization requirements, instruments, detectors, and photometric test procedure and test report shall be as described in the relevant sections of IES LM-9 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
3.2 General Service Incandescent Lamps: For general service incandescent lamps, the selection and seasoning (initial burn-in) of the test lamps, the equipment and instrumentation, and the test conditions shall be as described in IES LM-45 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
3.3 Incandescent Reflector Lamps: For incandescent reflector lamps, the selection and seasoning (initial burn-in) of the test lamps, the equipment and instrumentation, and the test conditions shall conform to sections 4.2 and 5.0 of IESNA LM-20 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
4. Test Methods and Measurements
All lumen measurements made with instruments calibrated to the devalued NIST lumen after January 1, 1996, shall be multiplied by 1.011.
4.1 General Service Fluorescent Lamps
4.1.1 The measurement procedure shall be as described in IES LM-9 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), except that lamps shall be operated at the appropriate voltage and current conditions as described in ANSI C78.375 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and in ANSI C78.81 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) or ANSI C78.901 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), and lamps shall be operated using the appropriate reference ballast at input voltage specified by the reference circuit as described in ANSI C82.3 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). If, for a lamp, both low-frequency and high-frequency reference ballast settings are included in ANSI C78.81 or ANSI C78.901, the lamp shall be operated using the low-frequency reference ballast.
4.1.2 For lamps not listed in ANSI C78.81 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) nor in ANSI C78.901 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), the lamp shall be operated using the following reference ballast settings:
4.1.2.1 4-Foot medium bi-pin lamps shall be operated using the following reference ballast settings: T10 or T12 lamps are to use 236 volts, 0.43 amps, and 439 ohms; T8 lamps are to use 300 volts, 0.265 amps, and 910 ohms.
4.1.2.2 2-Foot U-shaped lamps shall be operated using the following reference ballast settings: T12 lamps are to use 236 volts, 0.430 amps, and 439 ohms; T8 lamps are to use 300 volts, 0.265 amps, and 910 ohms.
4.1.2.3 8-foot slimline lamps shall be operated using the following reference ballast settings:
(a) T12 lamps: 625 volts, 0.425 amps, and 1280 ohms.
(b) T8 lamps: 625 volts, 0.260 amps, and 1960 ohms.
4.1.2.4 8-foot high output lamps shall be operated using the following reference ballast settings:
(a) T12 lamps: 400 volts, 0.800 amps, and 415 ohms.
(b) T8 lamps: 450 volts, 0.395 amps, and 595 ohms.
4.1.2.5 4-foot miniature bipin standard output or high output lamps shall be operated using the following reference ballast settings:
(a) Standard Output: 329 volts, 0.170 amps, and 950 ohms.
(b) High Output: 235 volts, 0.460 amps, and 255 ohms.
4.1.3 Lamp lumen output (lumens) and lamp electrical power input (watts), at the reference condition, shall be measured and recorded. Lamp efficacy shall be determined by computing the ratio of the measured lamp lumen output and lamp electrical power input at equilibrium for the reference condition.
4.2 General Service Incandescent Lamps
4.2.1 The measurement procedure shall be as described in IES LM-45 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). Lamps shall be operated at the rated voltage as defined in Sec. 430.2.
4.2.2 The test procedure shall conform to sections 6 and 7 of IES LM-45, and the lumen output of the lamp shall be determined in accordance with section 7 of IES LM-45. Lamp electrical power input in watts shall be measured and recorded. Lamp efficacy shall be determined by computing the ratio of the measured lamp lumen output and lamp electrical power input at equilibrium for the reference condition. The test report shall conform to section 8 of IES LM-45.
4.2.3 The measurement procedure for testing the lifetime of general service incandescent lamps shall be as described in IESNA LM-49 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3). The lifetime measurement shall be taken by measuring the operating time of a lamp, expressed in hours, not including any off time. The percentage of the sample size that meets the minimum rated lifetime shall be recorded. The lamp shall be deemed to meet minimum rated lifetime standards if greater than 50 percent of the sample size specified in Sec. 429.27 meets the minimum rated lifetime.
4.2.3.1 Accelerated lifetime testing is not allowed. The second paragraph of section 6.1 of IESNA LM-49 is to be disregarded.
4.3 Incandescent Reflector Lamps
4.3.1 The measurement procedure shall be as described in IESNA LM-20 (see 10 CFR 430.22). Lamps shall be operated at the rated voltage as defined in Sec. 430.2.
4.3.2. Lamp lumen output shall be determined as total forward lumens, and may be measured in an integrating sphere at the reference condition in accordance with Sec. 7.2 of IESNA LM-20 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) or from an average intensity distribution curve measured at the reference condition specified in Sec. 6.0 of IESNA LM-20. Lamp electrical power input in watts shall be measured and recorded.
4.3.3 Lamp efficacy shall be determined by computing the ratio of the measured lamp lumen output and lamp electrical power input at equilibrium for the reference condition. The test report shall conform to section 10.0 of IES LM-20 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
4.4 Determination of Color Rendering Index and Correlated Color Temperature
4.4.1 The CRI shall be determined in accordance with the method specified in CIE 13.3 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) for general service fluorescent lamps. The CCT shall be determined in accordance with the method specified in IES LM-9 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) and rounded to the nearest 10 kelvin for general service fluorescent lamps. The CCT shall be determined in accordance with the CIE 15 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) for incandescent lamps. The required spectroradiometric measurement and characterization shall be conducted in accordance with the methods set forth in IESNA LM-58 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
4.4.2 The test report shall include a description of the test conditions, equipment, measured lamps, spectroradiometric measurement results, and CRI and CCT determinations. [62 FR 29240, May 29, 1997, as amended at 74 FR 34177, July 14, 2009; 77 FR 4217, Jan. 27, 2012]
Sec. Appendix S to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Water Consumption of Faucets and Showerheads
Note: After April 21, 2014, any representations made with respect to the water consumption of showerheads or faucets must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix.
Manufacturers conducting tests of showerheads or faucets November 22, 2013 and prior to April 21, 2014, must conduct such test in accordance with either this appendix or appendix S as it appeared at 10 CFR part 430, subpart B, appendix S, in the 10 CFR parts 200 to 499 edition revised as of January 1, 2013. Any representations made with respect to the water consumption of such showerheads or faucets must be in accordance with whichever version is selected. Given that after April 21, 2014 representations with respect to the water consumption of showerheads and faucets must be made in accordance with tests conducted pursuant to this appendix, manufacturers may wish to begin using this test procedure as soon as possible.
1. Scope: This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure the hydraulic performance of faucets and showerheads.
2. Flow Capacity Requirements
a. Faucets--The test procedures to measure the water flow rate for faucets, expressed in gallons per minute (gpm) and liters per minute (L/min), or gallons per cycle (gal/cycle) and liters per cycle (L/cycle), shall be conducted in accordance with the test requirements specified in section 5.4, Flow Rate, of ASME A112.18.1-2012 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). Measurements shall be recorded at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Calculations shall be rounded off to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. The final water consumption value shall be rounded to one decimal place for non-metered faucets, or two decimal places for metered faucets.
b. Showerheads--The test procedures to measure the water flow rate for showerheads, expressed in gallons per minute (gpm) and liters per minute (L/min), shall be conducted in accordance with the test requirements specified in section 5.4, Flow Rate, of the ASME A112.18.1-2012 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). Measurements shall be recorded at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Calculations shall be rounded off to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. The final water consumption value shall be rounded to one decimal place. If the time/volume method of section 5.4.2.2(d) is used, the container must be positioned as to collect all water flowing from the showerhead, including any leakage from the ball joint. [63 FR 13316, Mar. 18, 1998, as amended at 78 FR 62986, Oct. 23, 2013]
Sec. Appendix T to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Water Consumption of Water Closets and Urinals
Note: After April 21, 2014, any representations made with respect to the water consumption of water closets or urinals must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix.
Manufacturers conducting tests of water closets or urinals after November 22, 2013 and prior to April 21, 2014, must conduct such test in accordance with either this appendix or appendix T as it appeared at 10 CFR part 430, subpart B, appendix S, in the 10 CFR parts 200 to 499 edition revised as of January 1, 2013. Any representations made with respect to the water consumption of such water closets or urinals must be in accordance with whichever version is selected. Given that after April 21, 2014 representations with respect to the water consumption of water closets and urinals must be made in accordance with tests conducted pursuant to this appendix, manufacturers may wish to begin using this test procedure as soon as possible.
1. Scope: This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure the hydraulic performances of water closets and urinals.
2. Test Apparatus and General Instructions
a. The test apparatus and instructions for testing water closets shall conform to the requirements specified in section 7.1, General, subsections 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.1.4, and 7.1.5 of ASME A112.19.2-2008 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). The flushometer valve used in the water consumption test shall represent the maximum design flush volume of the water closet. Measurements shall be recorded at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Calculations of water consumption for each tested unit shall be rounded off to the same number of significant digits as the previous step.
b. The test apparatus and instructions for testing urinals shall conform to the requirements specified in section 8.2, Test Apparatus and General Instructions, subsections 8.2.1, 8.2.2, and 8.2.3 of ASME A112.19.2-2008 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). The flushometer valve used in the water consumption test shall represent the maximum design flush volume of the urinal. Measurements shall be recorded at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Calculations of water consumption for each tested unit shall be rounded off to the same number of significant digits as the previous step.
3. Test Measurement
a. Water closets:
(i) The measurement of the water flush volume for water closets, expressed in gallons per flush (gpf) and liters per flush (Lpf), shall be conducted in accordance with the test requirements specified in section 7.4, Water Consumption Test, of ASME A112.19.2-2008 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). For dual-flush water closets, the measurement of the water flush volume shall be conducted separately for the full-flush and reduced-flush modes and in accordance with the test requirements specified section 7.4, Water Consumption Test, of ASME A112.19.2-2008.
(ii) Static pressure requirements: The water consumption tests of siphonic and blowout water closets shall be conducted at two static pressures. For flushometer valve water closets with a siphonic bowl, the test pressures shall be 80 psi and 35 psi. For flushometer valve water closets with a blowout bowl, the test pressures shall be 80 psi and 45 psi. The test shall be run three times at each pressure as specified in section 7.4.3 ``Procedure,'' of ASME A112.19.2-2008 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). The final measured flush volume for each tested unit shall be the average of the total flush volumes recorded at each test pressure as specified in section 7.4.5 ``Performance,'' of ASME A112.19.2-2008.
(iii) Flush volume and tank trim component adjustments: For gravity flush tank water closets, trim components that can be adjusted to cause an increase in flush volume, including (but not limited to) the flapper valve, fill valve, and tank water level, shall be set in accordance with the printed installation instructions supplied by the manufacturer. If the installation instructions for the model to be tested do not specify trim setting adjustments, these trim components shall be adjusted to the maximum water use setting so that the maximum flush volume is produced without causing the water closet to malfunction or leak. The water level in the tank shall be set to the maximum water line designated in the printed installation instructions supplied by the manufacturer or the designated water line on the tank itself, whichever is higher. If the printed installation instructions or the water closet tank do not indicate a water level, the water level shall be adjusted to 10.1 inches below the top of the overflow tube or 1 0.1 inches below the top rim of the water-containing vessel (for gravity flush tank water closets that do not contain an overflow tube) for each designated pressure specified in Table 5 of ASME A112.19.2-2008 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3).
b. Urinals--The measurement of water flush volume for urinals, expressed in gallons per flush (gpf) and liters per flush (Lpf), shall be conducted in accordance with the test requirements specified in section 8.6, Water Consumption Test, of ASME A112.19.2-2008 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). The final measured flush volume for each tested unit shall be the average of the total flush volumes recorded at each test pressure as specified in section 8.6.4 ``Performance,'' of ASME A112.19.2-2008. [63 FR 13317, Mar. 18, 1998, as amended at 78 FR 62987, Oct. 23, 2013]
Sec. Appendix U to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Ceiling Fans
1. Scope. This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure the energy performance of ceiling fans.
2. Definitions:
a. Airflow means the rate of air movement at a specific fan-speed setting expressed in cubic feet per minute (CFM).
b. Airflow efficiency means the ratio of airflow divided by power at a specific ceiling fan-speed setting expressed in CFM per watt (CFM/watt).
3. Test Apparatus and General Instructions: The test apparatus and instructions for testing ceiling fans shall conform to the requirements specified in Chapter 3, ``Air-Delivery Room Construction and Preparation,'' Chapter 4, ``Equipment Set-up and Test Procedure,'' and Chapter 6, ``Definitions and Acronyms,'' of the EPA's ``ENERGY STAR Testing Facility Guidance Manual: Building a Testing Facility and Performing the Solid State Test Method for ENERGY STAR Qualified Ceiling Fans,'' Version 1.1, December 9, 2002 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). Record measurements at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Round off calculations to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. Round the final energy consumption value to the nearest whole number as follows:
(i) A fractional number at or above the midpoint between the two consecutive whole numbers shall be rounded up to the higher of the two whole numbers; or
(ii) A fractional number below the midpoint between the two consecutive whole numbers shall be rounded down to the lower of the two whole numbers.
4. Test Measurement: Measure the airflow and airflow efficiency for ceiling fans, expressed in cubic feet per minute (CFM) and CFM per watt (CFM/watt), in accordance with the test requirements specified in Chapter 4, ``Equipment Setup and Test Procedure,'' of the EPA's ``ENERGY STAR Testing Facility Guidance Manual: Building a Testing Facility and Performing the Solid State Test Method for ENERGY STAR Qualified Ceiling Fans,'' Version 1.1, December 9, 2002 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). In performing the airflow test, measure ceiling fan power using a RMS sensor capable of measuring power with an accuracy of 1 %. Prior to using the sensor and sensor software it has selected, the test laboratory shall verify performance of the sensor and sensor software. Measure power input at a point that includes all power consuming components of the ceiling fan (but without any attached light kit energized). Measure power at the rated voltage that represents normal operation continuously over the time period for which the airflow test is conducted, and report the average value of the power measurement in watts (W). Use the average value of power input to calculate the airflow efficiency in CFM/W. [71 FR 71366, Dec. 8, 2006]
Sec. Appendix V to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Ceiling Fan Light Kits
1. Scope: This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure the energy performance of ceiling fan light kits.
2. Definitions:
a. Input power means the actual total power used by all lamp(s) and ballast(s) of the light kit during operation, expressed in watts (W) and measured using the lamp and ballast packaged with the kit.
b. Lamp ballast platform means a pairing of one ballast with one or more lamps that can operate simultaneously on that ballast. A unique platform is defined by the manufacturer and model number of the ballast and lamp(s) and the quantity of lamps that operate on the ballast.
c. Lamp lumens means a measurement of luminous flux expressed in lumens and measured using the lamp and ballast shipped with the fixture.
d. System efficacy per lamp ballast platform means the ratio of measured lamp lumens expressed in lumens and measured input power expressed in watts (W).
3. Test Apparatus and General Instructions:
(a) The test apparatus and instruction for testing screw base lamps packaged with ceiling fan light kits that have medium screw base sockets shall conform to the requirements specified in section 2, ``Definitions,'' section 3, ``Referenced Standards,'' and section 4, ``CFL Requirements for Testing'' of DOE's ``ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for [Compact Fluorescent Lamps] CFLs,'' Version 3.0, (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). Record measurements at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Round off calculations to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. Round off the final energy consumption value to a whole number as follows:
(i) A fractional number at or above the midpoint between the two consecutive whole numbers shall be rounded up to the higher of the two whole numbers; or
(ii) A fractional number below the midpoint between the two consecutive whole numbers shall be rounded down to the lower of the two whole numbers.
(b) The test apparatus and instruction for testing pin-based fluorescent lamps packaged with ceiling fan light kits that have pin-based sockets shall conform to the requirements specified in section 1, ``Definitions,'' and section 3, ``Energy Efficiency Specifications for Qualifying Products'' of the EPA's ``ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Residential Light Fixtures,'' Version 4.0, (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). Record measurements at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Round off calculations to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. The final energy consumption value shall be rounded to a whole number as follows:
(i) A fractional number at or above the midpoint between the two consecutive whole numbers shall be rounded up to the higher of the two whole numbers; or
(ii) A fractional number below the midpoint between the two consecutive whole numbers shall be rounded down to the lower of the two whole numbers.
4. Test Measurement:
(a) For screw base compact fluorescent lamps packaged with ceiling fan light kits that have medium screw base sockets, measure the efficacy, expressed in lumens per watt, in accordance with the test requirements specified in section 4, ``CFL Requirements for Testing,'' of the ``ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Compact Fluorescent Lamps,'' Version 3.0 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22).
(b) For pin-based compact fluorescent lamps packaged with ceiling fan light kits that have pin-based sockets, measure the efficacy, expressed in lumens per watt, in accordance with the test requirements specified in section 3, ``Energy-Efficiency Specifications for Qualifying Products'' and Table 3 in section 4, ``Qualification Process, Testing Facilities, Standards, and Documentation,'' of the ``ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Residential Light Fixtures,'' Version 4.0 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). [71 FR 71366, Dec. 8, 2006]
Sec. Appendix W to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Medium Base Compact Fluorescent
Lamps
1. Scope: This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure the initial efficacy, lumen maintenance at 1,000 hours, lumen maintenance at 40 percent of rated life, rapid cycle stress, and lamp life of medium base compact fluorescent lamps.
2. Definitions:
a. Average rated life means the length of time declared by the manufacturer at which 50 percent of any large number of units of a lamp reaches the end of their individual lives.
b. Initial performance values means the photometric and electrical characteristics of the lamp at the end of 100 hours of operation. Such values include the initial efficacy, the rated luminous flux and the rated lumen output.
c. Lumen maintenance means the luminous flux or lumen output at a given time in the life of the lamp and expressed as a percentage of the rated luminous flux or rated lumen output, respectively.
d. Rated luminous flux or rated lumen output means the initial lumen rating (100 hour) declared by the manufacturer, which consists of the lumen rating of a lamp at the end of 100 hours of operation.
e. Rated supply frequency means the frequency marked on the lamp.
f. Rated voltage means the voltage marked on the lamp.
g. Rated wattage means the wattage marked on the lamp.
h. Self-ballasted compact fluorescent lamp means a compact fluorescent lamp unit that incorporates, permanently enclosed, all elements that are necessary for the starting and stable operation of the lamp, and does not include any replaceable or interchangeable parts.
3. Test Apparatus and General Instructions: The test apparatus and instructions for testing medium base compact fluorescent lamps shall conform to the requirements specified in section 2, ``Definitions,'' section 3, ``Referenced Standards,'' and section 4, ``CFL Requirements for Testing,'' of DOE's ``ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for [Compact Fluorescent Lamps] CFLs,'' Version dated August 9, 2001, (commonly referred to as Version 2.0), (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). Record measurements at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Round off calculations to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. Round the final energy consumption value, as applicable, to the nearest decimal place or whole number as follows:
(i) A fractional number at or above the midpoint between two consecutive decimal places or whole numbers shall be rounded up to the higher of the two decimal places or whole numbers; or
(ii) A fractional number below the midpoint between two consecutive decimal places or whole numbers shall be rounded down to the lower of the two decimal places or whole numbers. Round the final initial efficacy to one decimal place. Round the final lumen maintenance at 1,000 hours to a whole number. Round the final lumen maintenance at 40 percent of rated life, the final rapid cycle stress, and the final lamp life for medium base compact fluorescent lamps to whole numbers.
4. Test Measurement: Measure the initial efficacy expressed in lumens per watt; lumen maintenance at 1,000 hours expressed in lumens; lumen maintenance at 40 percent of rated life expressed in lumens; rapid cycle stress expressed in the number of lamps that meet or exceed the minimum number of cycles; and lamp life expressed in hours in accordance with the test requirements specified in section 4, ``CFL Requirements for Testing'' of DOE's ``ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for [Compact Fluorescent Lamps] CFLs,'' Version dated August 9, 2001 (Incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.22). [71 FR 71366, Dec. 8, 2006]
Sec. Appendix X to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Dehumidifiers
Note: After August 6, 2014, any representations made with respect to the energy use or efficiency of dehumidifiers must be made in accordance with the results of testing pursuant to this appendix. After this date, if a manufacturer elects to make representations with regard to standby mode and off mode energy consumption, then testing must also include the provisions of this appendix related to standby mode and off mode energy consumption.
After the compliance date for any amended energy conservation standards that incorporate standby mode and off mode energy consumption, all dehumidifiers shall be tested using the provisions of Appendix X1 to certify compliance with amended energy conservation standards and to make any representations related to energy consumption, with the following exception. If the compliance date is before April 29, 2013, manufacturers may use Appendix X for any representations until April 29, 2013 of energy consumption of these products, consistent with the requirements of 42 U.S.C. 6293(c)(2).
1. Scope
This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure the energy performance of dehumidifiers.
2. Definitions
2.1 ANSI/AHAM DH-1 means the test standard published by the American National Standards Institute and the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers, titled ``Dehumidifiers,'' ANSI/AHAM DH-1-2008, (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
2.2 Active mode means a mode in which a dehumidifier is connected to a mains power source, has been activated, and is performing the main functions of removing moisture from air by drawing moist air over a refrigerated coil using a fan, or circulating air through activation of the fan without activation of the refrigeration system.
2.3 Combined low-power mode means the aggregate of available modes other than active mode.
2.4 Energy factor for dehumidifiers means a measure of energy efficiency of a dehumidifier calculated by dividing the water removed from the air by the energy consumed, measured in liters per kilowatt-hour (L/kWh).
2.5 IEC 62301 means the test standard published by the International Electrotechnical Commission, titled ``Household electrical appliances--Measurement of standby power,'' Publication 62301 (Edition 2.0 2011-01) (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
2.6 Inactive mode means a standby mode that facilitates the activation of active mode by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer, or that provides continuous status display.
2.7 Off mode means a mode in which the dehumidifier is connected to a mains power source and is not providing any active mode or standby mode function, and where the mode may persist for an indefinite time. An indicator that only shows the user that the dehumidifier is in the off position is included within the classification of an off mode.
2.8 Off-cycle mode means a standby mode in which the dehumidifier:
(1) Has cycled off its main function by humidistat or humidity sensor;
(2) Does not have its fan or blower operating; and
(3) Will reactivate the main function according to the humidistat or humidity sensor signal.
2.9 Product capacity for dehumidifiers means a measure of the ability of the dehumidifier to remove moisture from its surrounding atmosphere, measured in pints collected per 24 hours of continuous operation.
2.10 Standby mode means any modes where the dehumidifier is connected to a mains power source and offers one or more of the following user-oriented or protective functions which may persist for an indefinite time:
(1) To facilitate the activation of other modes (including activation or deactivation of active mode) by remote switch (including remote control), internal sensor, or timer;
(2) Continuous functions, including information or status displays (including clocks) or sensor-based functions. A timer is a continuous clock function (which may or may not be associated with a display) that provides regular scheduled tasks (e.g., switching) and that operates on a continuous basis.
3. Test Apparatus and General Instructions
3.1 Active mode. The test apparatus and instructions for testing dehumidifiers shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 3, ``Definitions,'' Section 4, ``Instrumentation,'' and Section 5, ``Test Procedure,'' of ANSI/AHAM DH-1 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). Record measurements at the resolution of the test instrumentation. Round off calculations to the same number of significant digits as the previous step. Round the final minimum energy factor value to two decimal places as follows:
(i) A fractional number at or above the midpoint between two consecutive decimal places shall be rounded up to the higher of the two decimal places; or
(ii) A fractional number below the midpoint between two consecutive decimal places shall be rounded down to the lower of the two decimal places.
3.2 Standby mode and off mode.
3.2.1 Installation requirements. For the standby mode and off mode testing, the dehumidifier shall be installed in accordance with Section 5, Paragraph 5.2 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3), disregarding the provisions regarding batteries and the determination, classification, and testing of relevant modes.
3.2.2 Electrical energy supply.
3.2.2.1 Electrical supply. For the standby mode and off mode testing, maintain the electrical supply voltage and frequency indicated in Section 7.1.3, ``Standard Test Voltage,'' of ANSI/AHAM DH-1, (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). The electrical supply frequency shall be maintained 1 percent.
3.2.2.2 Supply voltage waveform. For the standby mode and off mode testing, maintain the electrical supply voltage waveform indicated in Section 4, Paragraph 4.3.2 of IEC 62301, (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
3.2.3 Standby mode and off mode watt meter. The watt meter used to measure standby mode and off mode power consumption shall meet the requirements specified in Section 4, Paragraph 4.4 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3).
3.2.4 Standby mode and off mode ambient temperature. For standby mode and off mode testing, maintain room ambient air temperature conditions as specified in Section 4, Paragraph 4.2 of IEC 62301 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
4. Test Measurement
4.1 Active mode. Measure the energy factor for dehumidifiers, expressed in liters per kilowatt hour (L/kWh) and product capacity in pints per day (pints/day), in accordance with the test requirements specified in Section 7, ``Capacity Test and Energy Consumption Test,'' of ANSI/AHAM DH-1 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3).
4.2 Standby mode and off mode. Establish the testing conditions set forth in section 3.2 of this appendix, ensuring that the dehumidifier does not enter active mode during the test. For dehumidifiers that take some time to enter a stable state from a higher power state as discussed in Section 5, Paragraph 5.1, Note 1 of IEC 62301, (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3), allow sufficient time for the dehumidifier to reach the lower power state before proceeding with the test measurement. Follow the test procedure specified in Section 5, Paragraph 5.3.2 of IEC 62301 for testing in each possible mode as described in sections 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 of this appendix.
4.2.1 If the dehumidifier has an inactive mode, as defined in section 2.6 of this appendix, but not an off mode, as defined in section 2.7 of this appendix, measure and record the average inactive mode power of the dehumidifier, PIA, in watts. Otherwise, if the dehumidifier has an off mode, as defined in section 2.7 of this appendix, measure and record the average off mode power of the dehumidifier, POM, in watts.
4.2.2 If the dehumidifier has an off-cycle mode, as defined in section 2.8 of this appendix, measure and record the average off-cycle mode power of the dehumidifier, POC, in watts.
5. Calculation of Derived Results From Test Measurements
5.1 Annual combined low-power mode energy consumption. Calculate the annual combined low-power mode energy consumption for dehumidifiers, ETLP, expressed in kilowatt-hours per year, according to the following: ETLP = [(PIO x SIO) + (POC x
SOC)] x K Where: PIO = PIA, dehumidifier inactive mode power, or
POM, dehumidifier off mode power, in watts, as
measured in section 4.2.1 of this appendix.POC = dehumidifier off-cycle mode power, in watts, as
measured in section 4.2.2 of this appendix.SIO = 1840,5 dehumidifier inactive mode or off mode annual
hours.SOC = 1840,5 dehumidifier off-cycle mode annual hours.K = 0.001 kWh/Wh conversion factor for watt-hours to kilowatt-hours.
5.2 Integrated energy factor. Calculate the integrated energy factor, IEF, expressed in liters per kilowatt-hour, rounded to two decimal places, according to the following: IEF = LW/(Eactive + ((ETLP x 24)/
Sactive)) Where: LW = water removed from the air during dehumidifier energy
factor test, in liters, as measured in section 4.1 of this
appendix.Eactive = dehumidifier energy factor test energy consumption,
in kilowatt-hours, as measured in section 4.1 of this
appendix.ETLP = standby mode and off mode annual energy consumption,
in kilowatt-hours per year, as calculated in section 5.1 of
this appendix.24 = hours per day.Sactive = 1,095, dehumidifier active mode annual hours. [77 FR 65995, Oct. 31, 2012, redesignated and amended at 79 FR 7370, Feb. 7, 2014]
Sec. Appendix Y to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Battery Chargers
The provisions of this appendix are effective on the compliance date of any energy conservation standard for battery chargers.
1. Scope
This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure battery charger energy consumption for battery chargers operating at either DC or United States AC line voltage (115V at 60Hz).
2. Definitions
The following definitions are for the purposes of explaining the terminology associated with the test method for measuring battery charger energy consumption.\1\---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ For clarity on any other terminology used in the test method, please refer to IEEE Standard 1515-2000.---------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.1. Active mode or charge mode is the state in which the battery charger system is connected to the main electricity supply, and the battery charger is delivering current, equalizing the cells, and performing other one-time or limited-time functions in order to bring the battery to a fully charged state.
2.2. Active power or real power (P) means the average power consumed by a unit. For a two terminal device with current and voltage waveforms i(t) and v(t), which are periodic with period T, the real or active power P is:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN11.020
2.3. Ambient temperature is the temperature of the ambient air immediately surrounding the unit under test.
2.4. Apparent power (S) is the product of root-mean-square (RMS) voltage and RMS current in volt-amperes (VA).
2.5. Batch charger is a battery charger that charges two or more identical batteries simultaneously in a series, parallel, series-parallel, or parallel-series configuration. A batch charger does not have separate voltage or current regulation, nor does it have any separate indicators for each battery in the batch. When testing a batch charger, the term ``battery'' is understood to mean, collectively, all the batteries in the batch that are charged together. A charger can be both a batch charger and a multi-port charger or multi-voltage charger.
2.6. Battery or battery pack is an assembly of one or more rechargeable cells and any integral protective circuitry intended to provide electrical energy to a consumer product, and may be in one of the following forms: (a) Detachable battery (a battery that is contained in a separate enclosure from the consumer product and is intended to be removed or disconnected from the consumer product for recharging); or (b) integral battery (a battery that is contained within the consumer product and is not removed from the consumer product for charging purposes). The word ``intended'' in this context refers to the whether a battery has been designed in such a way as to permit its removal or disconnection from its associated consumer product.
2.7. Battery energy is the energy, in watt-hours, delivered by the battery under the specified discharge conditions in the test procedure.
2.8. Battery maintenance mode or maintenance mode is the mode of operation when the battery charger is connected to the main electricity supply and the battery is fully charged, but is still connected to the charger.
2.9. Battery rest period is a period of time between discharge and charge or between charge and discharge, during which the battery is resting in an open-circuit state in ambient air.
2.10. C-rate is the rate of charge or discharge, calculated by dividing the charge or discharge current by the rated charge capacity of the battery.
2.11. Cradle is an electrical interface between an integral battery product and the rest of the battery charger designed to hold the product between uses.
2.12. Equalization is a process whereby a battery is overcharged, beyond what would be considered ``normal'' charge return, so that cells can be balanced, electrolyte mixed, and plate sulfation removed.
2.13. Instructions or manufacturer's instructions means the documentation packaged with a product in printed or electronic form and any information about the product listed on a Web site maintained by the manufacturer and accessible by the general public at the time of the test. It also includes any information on the packaging or on the product itself. ``Instructions'' also includes any service manuals or data sheets that the manufacturer offers to independent service technicians, whether printed or in electronic form.
2.14. Measured charge capacity of a battery is the product of the discharge current in amperes and the time in decimal hours required to reach the specified end-of-discharge voltage.
2.15. Manual on-off switch is a switch activated by the user to control power reaching the battery charger. This term does not apply to any mechanical, optical, or electronic switches that automatically disconnect mains power from the battery charger when a battery is removed from a cradle or charging base, or for products with non-detachable batteries that control power to the product itself.
2.16. Multi-port charger means a battery charger that charges two or more batteries (which may be identical or different) simultaneously. The batteries are not connected in series or in parallel but with each port having separate voltage and/or current regulation. If the charger has status indicators, each port has its own indicator(s). A charger can be both a batch charger and a multi-port charger if it is capable of charging two or more batches of batteries simultaneously and each batch has separate regulation and/or indicator(s).
2.17. Multi-voltage charger is a battery charger that, by design, can charge a variety of batteries (or batches of batteries, if also a batch charger) that are of different rated battery voltages. A multi-voltage charger can also be a multi-port charger if it can charge two or more batteries simultaneously with independent voltage and/or current regulation.
2.18. Off mode is the condition, applicable only to units with manual on-off switches, in which the battery charger:
(1) Is connected to the main electricity supply;
(2) Is not connected to the battery; and
(3) All manual on-off switches are turned off.
2.19. Rated battery voltage is specified by the manufacturer and typically printed on the label of the battery itself. If there are multiple batteries that are connected in series, the rated battery voltage of the batteries is the total voltage of the series configuration--that is, the rated voltage of each battery multiplied by the number of batteries connected in series. Connecting multiple batteries in parallel does not affect the rated battery voltage.
2.20. Rated charge capacity is the capacity claimed by a manufacturer, on a label or in instructions, the battery can store under specified test conditions, usually given in ampere-hours (Ah) or milliampere-hours (mAh) and typically printed on the label of the battery itself. If there are multiple batteries that are connected in parallel, the rated charge capacity of the batteries is the total charge capacity of the parallel configuration, that is, the rated charge capacity of each battery multiplied by the number of batteries connected in parallel. Connecting multiple batteries in series does not affect the rated charge capacity.
2.21. Rated energy capacity means the product (in watt-hours) of the rated battery voltage and the rated charge capacity.
2.22. Standby mode or no-battery mode means the condition in which:
(1) The battery charger is connected to the main electricity supply;
(2) The battery is not connected to the charger; and
(3) For battery chargers with manual on-off switches, all such switches are turned on.
2.23. Total harmonic distortion (THD), expressed as a percent, is the root mean square (RMS) value of an AC signal after the fundamental component is removed and interharmonic components are ignored, divided by the RMS value of the fundamental component.
2.24. Unit under test (UUT) in this appendix refers to the combination of the battery charger and battery being tested.
3. Standard Test Conditions
3.1. General
The values that may be measured or calculated during the conduct of this test procedure have been summarized for easy reference in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1-- List of Measured or Calculated Values------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name of measured or calculated value Reference Value------------------------------------------------------------------------1. Duration of the charge and maintenance mode Section 5.2
test............................................2. Battery Discharge Energy...................... Section 4.63. Initial time and power (W) of the input Section 5.8
current of connected battery....................4. Active and Maintenance Mode Energy Consumption Section 5.85. Maintenance Mode Power........................ Section 5.96. 24 Hour Energy Consumption.................... Section 5.107. Standby Mode Power............................ Section 5.118. Off Mode Power................................ Section 5.12------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2. Verifying Accuracy and Precision of Measuring Equipment
a. Measurements of active power of 0.5 W or greater shall be made with an uncertainty of <=2 percent at the 95 percent confidence level. Measurements of active power of less than 0.5 W shall be made with an uncertainty of <=0.01 W at the 95 percent confidence level. The power measurement instrument shall, as applicable, have a resolution of:
(1) 0.01 W or better for measurements up to 10 W;
(2) 0.1 W or better for measurements of 10 to 100 W; or
(3) 1 W or better for measurements over 100 W.
b. Measurements of energy (Wh) shall be made with an uncertainty of <=2 percent at the 95 percent confidence level. Measurements of voltage and current shall be made with an uncertainty of <=1 percent at the 95 percent confidence level. Measurements of temperature shall be made with an uncertainty of <=2 [deg]C at the 95 percent confidence level.
c. All equipment used to conduct the tests must be selected and calibrated to ensure that measurements will meet the above uncertainty requirements. For suggestions on measuring low power levels, see IEC 62301, (Reference for guidance only, see Sec. 430.4) especially Section 5.3.2 and Annexes B and D.
3.3. Setting Up the Test Room
All tests, battery conditioning, and battery rest periods shall be carried out in a room with an air speed immediately surrounding the UUT of <=0.5 m/s. The ambient temperature shall be maintained at 20 [deg]C 5 [deg]C throughout the test. There shall be no intentional cooling of the UUT such as by use of separately powered fans, air conditioners, or heat sinks. The UUT shall be conditioned, rested, and tested on a thermally non-conductive surface. When not undergoing active testing, batteries shall be stored at 20 [deg]C 5 [deg]C.
3.4. Verifying the UUT's Input Voltage and Input Frequency
a. If the UUT is intended for operation on AC line-voltage input in the United States, it shall be tested at 115 V at 60 Hz. If the UUT is intended for operation on AC line-voltage input but cannot be operated at 115 V at 60 Hz, it shall not be tested.
b. If a charger is powered by a low-voltage DC or AC input, and the manufacturer packages the charger with a wall adapter, sells, or recommends an optional wall adapter capable of providing that low voltage input, then the charger shall be tested using that wall adapter and the input reference source shall be 115 V at 60 Hz. If the wall adapter cannot be operated with AC input voltage at 115 V at 60 Hz, the charger shall not be tested.
c. If the UUT is designed for operation only on DC input voltage and the provisions of paragraph 3.4 (b) above do not apply, it shall be tested with one of the following input voltages: 5.0 V DC for products drawing power from a computer USB port or the midpoint of the rated input voltage range for all other products. The input voltage shall be within 1 percent of the above specified voltage.
d. If the input voltage is AC, the input frequency shall be within 1 percent of the specified frequency. The THD of the input voltage shall be <=2 percent, up to and including the 13th harmonic. The crest factor of the input voltage shall be between 1.34 and 1.49.
e. If the input voltage is DC, the AC ripple voltage (RMS) shall be:
(1) <=0.2 V for DC voltages up to 10 V; or
(2) <=2 percent of the DC voltage for DC voltages over 10 V.
Unit Under Test Setup Requirements
4.1. General Setup
a. The battery charger system shall be prepared and set up in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, except where those instructions conflict with the requirements of this test procedure. If no instructions are given, then factory or ``default'' settings shall be used, or where there are no indications of such settings, the UUT shall be tested in the condition as it would be supplied to an end user.
b. If the battery charger has user controls to select from two or more charge rates (such as regular or fast charge) or different charge currents, the test shall be conducted at the fastest charge rate that is recommended by the manufacturer for everyday use, or, failing any explicit recommendation, the factory-default charge rate. If the charger has user controls for selecting special charge cycles that are recommended only for occasional use to preserve battery health, such as equalization charge, removing memory, or battery conditioning, these modes are not required to be tested. The settings of the controls shall be listed in the report for each test.
4.2. Selection and Treatment of the Battery Charger
The UUT, including the battery charger and its associated battery, shall be new products of the type and condition that would be sold to a customer. If the battery is lead-acid chemistry and the battery is to be stored for more than 24 hours between its initial acquisition and testing, the battery shall be charged before such storage.
4.3. Selection of Batteries To Use for Testing
a. For chargers with integral batteries, the battery packaged with the charger shall be used for testing. For chargers with detachable batteries, the battery or batteries to be used for testing will vary depending on whether there are any batteries packaged with the battery charger.
(1) If batteries are packaged with the charger, batteries for testing shall be selected from the batteries packaged with the battery charger, according to the procedure in section 4.3.b.
(2) If no batteries are packaged with the charger, but the instructions specify or recommend batteries for use with the charger, batteries for testing shall be selected from those recommended or specified in the instructions, according to the procedure in section 4.3.b.
(3) If no batteries are packaged with the charger and the instructions do not specify or recommend batteries for use with the charger, batteries for testing shall be selected from any that are suitable for use with the charger, according to the procedure in section 4.3.b.
b. From the detachable batteries specified above, the technician shall use Table 4.1 to select the batteries to be used for testing depending on the type of charger being tested. Each row in the table represents a mutually exclusive charger type. The technician shall find the single applicable row for the UUT, and test according to those requirements.
c. A charger is considered as:
(1) Single-capacity if all associated batteries have the same rated charge capacity (see definition) and, if it is a batch charger, all configurations of the batteries have the same rated charge capacity.
(2) Multi-capacity if there are associated batteries or configurations of batteries that have different rated charge capacities.
d. The selected battery or batteries will be referred to as the ``test battery'' and will be used through the remainder of this test procedure.
Table 4.1--Battery Selection for Testing------------------------------------------------------------------------
Type of charger Tests to perform------------------------------------------------------------------------
Battery
selection (from
all
Multi-voltage Multi-port Multi- Number of configurations
capacity tests of all
associated
batteries)------------------------------------------------------------------------No............ No.......... No.......... 1......... Any associated
battery.No............ No.......... Yes......... 2......... Lowest charge
capacity
battery.
Highest charge
capacity
battery.No............ Yes......... Yes or No... 2......... Use only one
port and use
the minimum
number of
batteries with
the lowest
rated charge
capacity that
the charger can
charge.
Use all ports
and use the
maximum number
of identical
batteries of
the highest
rated charge
capacity the
charger can
accommodate.Yes........... No.......... No.......... 2......... Lowest voltage
battery.
Highest voltage
battery.
----------------------------Yes........... Yes to either or both 3......... Of the batteries
with the lowest
voltage, use
the one with
the lowest
charge
capacity. Use
only one port.
Of the batteries
with the
highest
voltage, use
the one with
the lowest
charge
capacity. Use
only one port.
Use all ports
and use the
battery or the
configuration
of batteries
with the
highest total
rated energy
capacity.------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.4. Limiting Other Non-Battery-Charger Functions
a. If the battery charger or product containing the battery charger does not have any additional functions unrelated to battery charging, this subsection may be skipped.
b. Any optional functions controlled by the user and not associated with the battery charging process (e.g., the answering machine in a cordless telephone charging base) shall be switched off. If it is not possible to switch such functions off, they shall be set to their lowest power-consuming mode during the test.
c. If the battery charger takes any physically separate connectors or cables not required for battery charging but associated with its other functionality (such as phone lines, serial or USB connections, Ethernet, cable TV lines, etc.), these connectors or cables shall be left disconnected during the testing.
d. Any manual on-off switches specifically associated with the battery charging process shall be switched on for the duration of the charge, maintenance, and no-battery mode tests, and switched off for the off mode test.
4.5. Accessing the Battery for the Test
a. The technician may need to disassemble the end-use product or battery charger to gain access to the battery terminals for the Battery Discharge Energy Test in section 5.6. If the battery terminals are not clearly labeled, the technician shall use a voltmeter to identify the positive and negative terminals. These terminals will be the ones that give the largest voltage difference and are able to deliver significant current (0.2 C or 1/hr) into a load.
b. All conductors used for contacting the battery must be cleaned and burnished prior to connecting in order to decrease voltage drops and achieve consistent results.
c. Manufacturer's instructions for disassembly shall be followed, except those instructions that:
(1) Lead to any permanent alteration of the battery charger circuitry or function;
(2) Could alter the energy consumption of the battery charger compared to that experienced by a user during typical use, e.g., due to changes in the airflow through the enclosure of the UUT; or
(3) Conflict requirements of this test procedure.
d. Care shall be taken by the technician during disassembly to follow appropriate safety precautions. If the functionality of the device or its safety features is compromised, the product shall be discarded after testing.
e. Some products may include protective circuitry between the battery cells and the remainder of the device. If the manufacturer provides a description for accessing the connections at the output of the protective circuitry, these connections shall be used to discharge the battery and measure the discharge energy. The energy consumed by the protective circuitry during discharge shall not be measured or credited as battery energy.
f. If the technician, despite diligent effort and use of the manufacturer's instructions, encounters any of the following conditions noted immediately below, the Battery Discharge Energy and the Charging and Maintenance Mode Energy shall be reported as ``Not Applicable'':
(1) Inability to access the battery terminals;
(2) Access to the battery terminals destroys charger functionality; or
(3) Inability to draw current from the test battery.
4.6. Determining Charge Capacity for Batteries With No Rating
If there is no rating for the battery charge capacity on the battery or in the instructions, then the technician shall determine a discharge current that meets the following requirements. The battery shall be fully charged and then discharged at this constant-current rate until it reaches the end-of-discharge voltage specified in Table 5.2. The discharge time must be not less than 4.5 hours nor more than 5 hours. In addition, the discharge test (Section 5.6) (which may not be starting with a fully-charged battery) shall reach the end-of-discharge voltage within 5 hours. The same discharge current shall be used for both the preparations step (Section 5.4) and the discharge test (Section 5.6). The test report shall include the discharge current used and the resulting discharge times for both a fully-charged battery and for the discharge test.
For this section, the battery is considered as ``fully charged'' when either (a) it has been charged by the UUT until an indicator on the UUT shows that the charge is complete, or (b) it has been charged by a battery analyzer at a current not greater than the discharge current until the battery analyzer indicates that the battery is fully charged.
When there is no capacity rating, a suitable discharge current must generally be determined by trial and error. Since the conditioning step does not require constant-current discharges, the trials themselves may also be counted as part of battery conditioning.
5. Test Measurement
The test sequence to measure the battery charger energy consumption is summarized in Table 5.1, and explained in detail below. Measurements shall be made under test conditions and with the equipment specified in Sections 3 and 4.
Table 5.1--Test Sequence----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Equipment needed
--------------------------------------------------------------
Battery Thermometer
Step Description Data taken? analyzer or (for flooded
Test Charger constant- AC power lead-acid
battery current meter battery
load chargers only)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1..... Record general data on Yes............. X X ........... .......... ...............
UUT; Section 5.1.2..... Determine test No.............. ........ ......... ........... .......... ...............
duration; Section 5.2.3..... Battery conditioning; No.............. X X X .......... ...............
Section 5.3.4..... Prepare battery for No.............. X X ........... .......... ...............
charge test; Section
5.4.5..... Battery rest period; No.............. X ......... ........... .......... X
Section 5.5.6..... Conduct Charge Mode and Yes............. X X ........... X ...............
Battery Maintenance
Mode Test; Section 5.6.7..... Battery Rest Period; No.............. X ......... ........... .......... X
Section 5.7.8..... Battery Discharge Yes............. X ......... X .......... ...............
Energy Test; Section
5.8.9..... Determining the Yes............. X X ........... X ...............
Maintenance Mode
Power; Section 5.9.10.... Calculating the 24-Hour No.............. ........ ......... ........... .......... ...............
Energy Consumption;
Section 5.10.11.... Standby Mode Test; Yes............. ........ X ........... X ...............
Section 5.11.12.... Off Mode Test; Section Yes............. ........ X ........... X ...............
5.12.----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.1. Recording General Data on the UUT
The technician shall record:
(1) The manufacturer and model of the battery charger;
(2) The presence and status of any additional functions unrelated to battery charging;
(3) The manufacturer, model, and number of batteries in the test battery;
(4) The rated battery voltage of the test battery;
(5) The rated charge capacity of the test battery; and
(6) The rated charge energy of the test battery.
(7) The settings of the controls, if battery charger has user controls to select from two or more charge rates
5.2. Determining the Duration of the Charge and Maintenance Mode Test
a. The charging and maintenance mode test, described in detail in section 5.8, shall be 24 hours in length or longer, as determined by the items below. Proceed in order until a test duration is determined.
(1) If the battery charger has an indicator to show that the battery is fully charged, that indicator shall be used as follows: If the indicator shows that the battery is charged after 19 hours of charging, the test shall be terminated at 24 hours. Conversely, if the full-charge indication is not yet present after 19 hours of charging, the test shall continue until 5 hours after the indication is present.
(2) If there is no indicator, but the manufacturer's instructions indicate that charging this battery or this capacity of battery should be complete within 19 hours, the test shall be for 24 hours. If the instructions indicate that charging may take longer than 19 hours, the test shall be run for the longest estimated charge time plus 5 hours.
(3) If there is no indicator and no time estimate in the instructions, but the charging current is stated on the charger or in the instructions, calculate the test duration as the longer of 24 hours or:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN11.021
b. If none of the above applies, the duration of the test shall be 24 hours.
5.3. Battery Conditioning
a. No conditioning is to be done on lead-acid or lithium-ion batteries. The test technician shall proceed directly to battery preparation, section 5.4, when testing chargers for these batteries.
b. Products with integral batteries will have to be disassembled per the instructions in section 4.5, and the battery disconnected from the charger for discharging.
c. Batteries of other chemistries that have not been previously cycled are to be conditioned by performing two charges and two discharges, followed by a charge, as below. No data need be recorded during battery conditioning.
(1) The test battery shall be fully charged for the duration specified in section 5.2 or longer using the UUT.
(2) The test battery shall then be fully discharged using either:
(i) A battery analyzer at a rate not to exceed 1 C, until its average cell voltage under load reaches the end-of-discharge voltage specified in Table 5.2 for the relevant battery chemistry; or
(ii) The UUT, until the UUT ceases operation due to low battery voltage.
(3) The test battery shall again be fully charged as in step c.(1) of this section.
(4) The test battery shall again be fully discharged as per step c.(2) of this section.
(5) The test battery shall be again fully charged as in step c.(1) of this section.
d. Batteries of chemistries other than lead-acid or lithium-ion that are known to have been through at least two previous full charge/discharge cycles shall only be charged once per step c.(5), of this section.
5.4. Preparing the Battery for Charge Testing
Following any conditioning prior to beginning the battery charge test (section 5.6), the test battery shall be fully discharged for the duration specified in section 5.2 or longer using a battery analyzer.
5.5. Resting the Battery
The test battery shall be rested between preparation and the battery charge test. The rest period shall be at least one hour and not exceed 24 hours. For batteries with flooded cells, the electrolyte temperature shall be less than 30 [deg]C before charging, even if the rest period must be extended longer than 24 hours.
5.6. Testing Charge Mode and Battery Maintenance Mode
a. The Charge and Battery Maintenance Mode test measures the energy consumed during charge mode and some time spent in the maintenance mode of the UUT. Functions required for battery conditioning that happen only with some user-selected switch or other control shall not be included in this measurement. (The technician shall manually turn off any battery conditioning cycle or setting.) Regularly occurring battery conditioning or maintenance functions that are not controlled by the user will, by default, be incorporated into this measurement.
b. During the measurement period, input power values to the UUT shall be recorded at least once every minute.
(1) If possible, the technician shall set the data logging system to record the average power during the sample interval. The total energy is computed as the sum of power samples (in watts) multiplied by the sample interval (in hours).
(2) If this setting is not possible, then the power analyzer shall be set to integrate or accumulate the input power over the measurement period and this result shall be used as the total energy.
c. The technician shall follow these steps:
(1) Ensure that the user-controllable device functionality not associated with battery charging and any battery conditioning cycle or setting are turned off, as instructed in section 4.4;
(2) Ensure that the test battery used in this test has been conditioned, prepared, discharged, and rested as described in sections 5.3 through 5.7;
(3) Connect the data logging equipment to the battery charger;
(4) Record the start time of the measurement period, and begin logging the input power;
(5) Connect the test battery to the battery charger within 3 minutes of beginning logging. For integral battery products, connect the product to a cradle or wall adapter within 3 minutes of beginning logging;
(6) After the test battery is connected, record the initial time and power (W) of the input current to the UUT. These measurements shall be taken within the first 10 minutes of active charging;
(7) Record the input power for the duration of the ``Charging and Maintenance Mode Test'' period, as determined by section 5.2. The actual time that power is connected to the UUT shall be within 5 minutes of the specified period; and
(8) Disconnect power to the UUT, terminate data logging, and record the final time.
5.7. Resting the Battery
The test battery shall be rested between charging and discharging. The rest period shall be at least 1 hour and not more than 4 hours, with an exception for flooded cells. For batteries with flooded cells, the electrolyte temperature shall be less than 30 [deg]C before charging, even if the rest period must be extended beyond 4 hours.
5.8. Battery Discharge Energy Test
a. If multiple batteries were charged simultaneously, the discharge energy is the sum of the discharge energies of all the batteries.
(1) For a multi-port charger, batteries that were charged in separate ports shall be discharged independently.
(2) For a batch charger, batteries that were charged as a group may be discharged individually, as a group, or in sub-groups connected in series and/or parallel. The position of each battery with respect to the other batteries need not be maintained.
b. During discharge, the battery voltage and discharge current shall be sampled and recorded at least once per minute. The values recorded may be average or instantaneous values.
c. For this test, the technician shall follow these steps:
(1) Ensure that the test battery has been charged by the UUT and rested according to the procedures above.
(2) Set the battery analyzer for a constant discharge current of 0.2 [deg]C and the end-of-discharge voltage in Table 5.2 for the relevant battery chemistry.
(3) Connect the test battery to the analyzer and begin recording the voltage, current, and wattage, if available from the battery analyzer. When the end-of-discharge voltage is reached or the UUT circuitry terminates the discharge, the test battery shall be returned to an open-circuit condition. If current continues to be drawn from the test battery after the end-of-discharge condition is first reached, this additional energy is not to be counted in the battery discharge energy.
d. If not available from the battery analyzer, the battery discharge energy (in watt-hours) is calculated by multiplying the voltage (in volts), current (in amperes), and sample period (in hours) for each sample, and then summing over all sample periods until the end-of-discharge voltage is reached.
5.9. Determining the Maintenance Mode Power
After the measurement period is complete, the technician shall determine the average maintenance mode power consumption by examining the power-versus-time data from the charge and maintenance test and:
(1) If the maintenance mode power is cyclic or shows periodic pulses, compute the average power over a time period that spans a whole number of cycles and includes at least the last 4 hours.
(2) Otherwise, calculate the average power value over the last 4 hours.
5.10. Determining the 24-Hour Energy Consumption
The accumulated energy or the average input power, integrated over the test period from the charge and maintenance mode test, shall be used to calculate 24-hour energy consumption. Table 5.2--Required Battery Discharge Rates and End-of-Discharge Battery
Voltages------------------------------------------------------------------------
End-of-
discharge
Battery chemistry Discharge voltage
rate C volts per
cell------------------------------------------------------------------------Valve-Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA)............... 0.2 1.75Flooded Lead Acid.............................. 0.2 1.70Nickel Cadmium (NiCd).......................... 0.2 1.0Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH).................... 0.2 1.0Lithium Ion (Li-Ion)........................... 0.2 2.5Lithium Polymer................................ 0.2 2.5Rechargeable Alkaline.......................... 0.2 0.9Nanophosphate Lithium Ion...................... 0.2 2.0
Silver Zinc.................................... 0.2 1.2------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.11. Standby Mode Energy Consumption Measurement
The standby mode measurement depends on the configuration of the battery charger, as follows.
a. Conduct a measurement of standby power consumption while the battery charger is connected to the power source. Disconnect the battery from the charger, allow the charger to operate for at least 30 minutes, and record the power (i.e., watts) consumed as the time series integral of the power consumed over a 10-minute test period, divided by the period of measurement. If the battery charger has manual on-off switches, all must be turned on for the duration of the standby mode test.
b. Standby mode may also apply to products with integral batteries. If the product uses a cradle and/or adapter for power conversion and charging, then ``disconnecting the battery from the charger'' will require disconnection of the end-use product, which contains the batteries. The other enclosures of the battery charging system will remain connected to the main electricity supply, and standby mode power consumption will equal that of the cradle and/or adapter alone.
c. If the product is powered through a detachable AC power cord and contains integrated power conversion and charging circuitry, then only the cord will remain connected to mains, and standby mode power consumption will equal that of the AC power cord (i.e., zero watts).
d. Finally, if the product contains integrated power conversion and charging circuitry but is powered through a non-detachable AC power cord or plug blades, then no part of the system will remain connected to mains, and standby mode measurement is not applicable.
5.12. Off Mode Energy Consumption Measurement
The off mode measurement depends on the configuration of the battery charger, as follows.
a. If the battery charger has manual on-off switches, record a measurement of off mode energy consumption while the battery charger is connected to the power source. Remove the battery from the charger, allow the charger to operate for at least 30 minutes, and record the power (i.e., watts) consumed as the time series integral of the power consumed over a 10-minute test period, divided by the period of measurement, with all manual on-off switches turned off. If the battery charger does not have manual on-off switches, record that the off mode measurement is not applicable to this product.
b. Off mode may also apply to products with integral batteries. If the product uses a cradle and/or adapter for power conversion and charging, then ``disconnecting the battery from the charger'' will require disconnection of the end-use product, which contains the batteries. The other enclosures of the battery charging system will remain connected to the main electricity supply, and off mode power consumption will equal that of the cradle and/or adapter alone.
c. If the product is powered through a detachable AC power cord and contains integrated power conversion and charging circuitry, then only the cord will remain connected to mains, and off mode power consumption will equal that of the AC power cord (i.e., zero watts).
d. Finally, if the product contains integrated power conversion and charging circuitry but is powered through a non-detachable AC power cord or plug blades, then no part of the system will remain connected to mains, and off mode measurement is not applicable. [76 FR 31776, June 1, 2011]
Sec. Appendix Z to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of External Power Supplies
1. Scope: This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure energy consumption of external power supplies.
2. Definitions: The following definitions are for the purposes of understanding terminology associated with the test method for measuring external power supply energy consumption. For clarity on any other terminology used in the test method, please refer to IEC Standard 60050 or IEEE Standard 100. (Reference for guidance only, see Sec. 430.4.)
a. Active mode means the mode of operation when the external power supply is connected to the main electricity supply and the output is (or ``all outputs are'' for a multiple-voltage external power supply) connected to a load (or ``loads'' for a multiple-voltage external power supply).
b. Active mode efficiency is the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the total real output power produced by a power supply to the real input power required to produce it. (Reference for guidance only, see IEEE Standard 1515-2000, 4.3.1.1, Sec. 430.4.)
c. Active power (P) (also real power) means the average power consumed by a unit. For a two terminal device with current and voltage waveforms i(t) and v(t) which are periodic with period T, the real or active power P is:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN11.022
d. Ambient temperature means the temperature of the ambient air immediately surrounding the unit under test.
e. Apparent power (S) is the product of RMS voltage and RMS current (VA).
f. Instantaneous power means the product of the instantaneous voltage and instantaneous current at a port (the terminal pair of a load).
g. Manual on-off switch is a switch activated by the user to control power reaching the device. This term does not apply to any mechanical, optical, or electronic switches that automatically disconnect mains power from the device when a load is disconnected from the device, or that control power to the load itself.
h. Minimum output current means the minimum current that must be drawn from an output bus for an external power supply to operate within its specifications.
i. Multiple-voltage external power supply means an external power supply that is designed to convert line voltage AC input into more than one simultaneous lower-voltage output.
j. Nameplate input frequency means the AC input frequency of the power supply as specified on the manufacturer's label on the power supply housing.
k. Nameplate input voltage means the AC input voltage of the power supply as specified on the manufacturer's label on the power supply housing.
l. Nameplate output current means the current output of the power supply as specified on the manufacturer's label on the power supply housing (either DC or AC) or, if absent from the housing, as provided by the manufacturer.
m. Nameplate output power means the power output of the power supply as specified on the manufacturer's label on the power supply housing or, if absent from the housing, as specified in documentation provided by the manufacturer.
n. Nameplate output voltage means the voltage output of the power supply as specified on the manufacturer's label on the power supply housing (either DC or AC).
o. No-load mode means the mode of operation when an external power supply is connected to the main electricity supply and the output is (or ``all outputs are'' for a multiple-voltage external power supply) not connected to a load (or ``loads'' for a multiple-voltage external power supply).
p. Off mode is the condition, applicable only to units with manual on-off switches, in which the external power supply is (1) connected to the main electricity supply; (2) the output is not connected to any load; and (3) all manual on-off switches are turned off.
q. Output bus means any of the outputs of the power supply to which loads can be connected and from which power can be drawn, as opposed to signal connections used for communication.
r. Single-voltage external AC-AC power supply means an external power supply that is designed to convert line voltage AC input into lower voltage AC output and is able to convert to only one AC output voltage at a time.
s. Single-voltage external AC-DC power supply means an external power supply that is designed to convert line voltage AC input into lower-voltage DC output and is able to convert to only one DC output voltage at a time.
t. Standby mode means the condition in which the external power supply is in no-load mode and, for external power supplies with manual on-off switches, all such switches are turned on.
u. Switch-selectable single voltage external power supply means a single-voltage AC-AC or AC-DC power supply that allows users to choose from more than one output voltage.
v. Total harmonic distortion, expressed as a percentage, is the RMS value of an AC signal after the fundamental component is removed and interharmonic components are ignored, divided by the RMS value of the fundamental component. THD of current is defined as:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27MR09.409 where In is the RMS value of the nth harmonic of the current signal.
w. True power factor (PF) is the ratio of the active power (P) consumed in watts to the apparent power (S), drawn in volt-amperes.[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR27MR09.410 This definition of power factor includes the effect of both distortion and displacement.
x. Unit under test is the external power supply being tested.
3. Test Apparatus and General Instructions:
(a) Single-Voltage External Power Supply. The test apparatus, standard testing conditions, and instructions for testing external power supplies shall conform to the requirements specified in section 4, ``General Conditions for Measurement,'' of the CEC's ``Test Method for Calculating the Energy Efficiency of Single-Voltage External AC-DC and AC-AC Power Supplies,'' August 11, 2004. The test voltage specified in section 4.d, ``Test Voltage,'' shall only be 115 volts, 60 Hz.
(b) Multiple-Voltage External Power Supply. Unless otherwise specified, measurements shall be made under test conditions and with equipment specified below.
(i) Verifying Accuracy and Precision of Measuring Equipment
(A) Measurements of power 0.5 W or greater shall be made with an uncertainty of <=2 percent at the 95 percent confidence level. Measurements of power less than 0.5 W shall be made with an uncertainty of <=0.01 W at the 95 percent confidence level. The power measurement instrument shall have a resolution of:
(1) 0.01 W or better for measurements up to 10 W;
(2) 0.1 W or better for measurements of 10 to 100 W; or
(3) 1 W or better for measurements over 100 W.
(B) Measurements of energy (Wh) shall be made with an uncertainty of <=2 percent at the 95 percent confidence level. Measurements of voltage and current shall be made with an uncertainty of <=1 percent at the 95 percent confidence level. Measurements of temperature shall be made with an uncertainty of <=2 [deg]C at the 95 percent confidence level.
(C) All equipment used to conduct the tests must be selected and calibrated to ensure that measurements will meet the above uncertainty requirements. For guidance on measuring low power levels, see IEC 62301, Section 5.3.2 and Annexes B and D (Reference for guidance only, see Sec. 430.4).
(ii) Setting Up the Test Room
All tests shall be carried out in a room with an air speed immediately surrounding the UUT of <=0.5 m/s. The ambient temperature shall be maintained at 20 [deg]C 5 [deg]C throughout the test. There shall be no intentional cooling of the UUT such as by use of separately powered fans, air conditioners, or heat sinks. The UUT shall be conditioned, rested, and tested on a thermally non-conductive surface. A readily available material such as Styrofoam will be sufficient.
(iii) Verifying the UUT's Input Voltage and Input Frequency
(A) If the UUT is intended for operation on AC line-voltage input in the United States, it shall be tested at 115 V at 60 Hz. If the UUT is intended for operation on AC line-voltage input but cannot be operated at 115 V at 60 Hz, it shall not be tested. The input voltage shall be within 1 percent of the above specified voltage.
(B) If the input voltage is AC, the input frequency shall be within 1 percent of the specified frequency. The THD of the input voltage shall be <=2 percent, up to and including the 13th harmonic. The crest factor of the input voltage shall be between 1.34 and 1.49.
4. Test Measurement:
(a) Single-Voltage External Power Supply
(i) Standby Mode and Active Mode Measurement--The measurement of standby mode (also no-load mode) energy consumption and active mode efficiency shall conform to the requirements specified in section 5, ``Measurement Approach'' of the CEC's ``Test Method for Calculating the Energy Efficiency of Single-Voltage External Ac-Dc and Ac-Ac Power Supplies,'' August 11, 2004, (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). Switch-selectable single-voltage external power supplies shall be tested twice--once at the highest nameplate output voltage and once at the lowest.
(A) If the product has more than two output wires, including those that are necessary for controlling the product, the manufacturer shall supply a connection diagram or test fixture that will allow the testing laboratory to put the unit under test into active mode.
(B) For those external power supplies that cannot sustain output at 100 percent loading condition, this efficiency metric shall not be included. For these external power supplies, the average efficiency is the average of the efficiencies measured at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 75 percent of maximum load.
(C) In the case where the external power supply lists both an instantaneous and continuous output current, it shall be tested at the continuous condition only.
(ii) Off-Mode Measurement--If the external power supply unit under test incorporates manual on-off switches, the unit under test shall be placed in off mode, and its power consumption in off mode measured and recorded. The measurement of the off mode energy consumption shall conform to the requirements specified in section 5, ``Measurement Approach,'' of the CEC's ``Test Method for Calculating the Energy Efficiency of Single-Voltage External Ac-Dc and Ac-Ac Power Supplies,'' August 11, 2004 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3), with two exceptions. In section 5.a, ``Preparing UUT [Unit Under Test] for Test,'' all manual on-off switches shall be placed in the ``off'' position for the measurement. In section 5.d, ``Testing Sequence,'' the technician shall consider the UUT stable if, over 5 minutes with samples taken at least once every second, the AC input power does not drift from the maximum value observed by more than 1 percent or 50 milliwatts, whichever is greater. The only loading condition that will be measured for off mode is ``Load Condition 5'' in Table 1 of the CEC's test procedure. Switch-selectable single-voltage external power supplies shall have their off mode power consumption measured twice-- once at the highest nameplate output voltage and once at the lowest.
(b) Multiple-Voltage External Power Supply--Power supplies must be tested with the output cord packaged with the unit for sale to the consumer, as it is considered part of the unit under test. There are two options for connecting metering equipment to the output of this type of power supply: cut the cord immediately adjacent to the output connector or attach leads and measure the efficiency from the output connector itself. If the power supply is attached directly to the product that it is powering, cut the cord immediately adjacent to the powered product and connect output measurement probes at that point. The tests should be conducted on the sets of output wires that constitute the output busses. If the product has additional wires, these should be left electrically disconnected unless they are necessary for controlling the product. In this case, the manufacturer shall supply a connection diagram or test fixture that will allow the testing laboratory to put the unit under test into active mode.
(i) Standby-Mode and Active-Mode Measurement--The measurement of the multiple-voltage external power supply standby mode (also no-load-mode) energy consumption and active-mode efficiency shall be as follows:
(A) Loading conditions and testing sequence. (1) If the unit under test has on-off switches, all switches shall be placed in the ``on'' position. Loading criteria for multiple-voltage external power supplies shall be based on nameplate output current and not on nameplate output power because output voltage might not remain constant.
(2) The unit under test shall operate at 100 percent of nameplate current output for at least 30 minutes immediately before conducting efficiency measurements.
(3) After this warm-up period, the technician shall monitor AC input power for a period of 5 minutes to assess the stability of the unit under test. If the power level does not drift by more than 1 percent from the maximum value observed, the unit under test can be considered stable and measurements can be recorded at the end of the 5-minute period. Measurements at subsequent loading conditions, listed in Table 1, can then be conducted under the same 5-minute stability guidelines. Only one warm-up period of 30 minutes is required for each unit under test at the beginning of the test procedure.
(4) If AC input power is not stable over a 5-minute period, the technician shall follow the guidelines established by IEC Standard 62301 for measuring average power or accumulated energy over time for both input and output. (Reference for guidance only, see Sec. 430.4).
(5) The unit under test shall be tested at the loading conditions listed in Table 1, derated per the proportional allocation method presented in the following section.
Table 1--Loading Conditions for Unit Under Test------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------Loading Condition 1....................... 100% of Derated Nameplate
Output Current 2%.Loading Condition 2....................... 75% of Derated Nameplate
Output Current 2%.Loading Condition 3....................... 50% of Derated Nameplate
Output Current 2%.Loading Condition 4....................... 25% of Derated Nameplate
Output Current 2%.Loading Condition 5....................... 0%.------------------------------------------------------------------------
(6) Input and output power measurements shall be conducted in sequence from Loading Condition 1 to Loading Condition 4, as indicated in Table 1. For Loading Condition 5, the unit under test shall be placed in no-load mode, any additional signal connections to the unit under test shall be disconnected, and input power shall be measured.
(B) Proportional allocation method for loading multiple-voltage external power supplies. For power supplies with multiple voltage busses, defining consistent loading criteria is difficult because each bus has its own nameplate output current. The sum of the power dissipated by each bus loaded to its nameplate output current may exceed the overall nameplate output power of the power supply. The following proportional allocation method must be used to provide consistent loading conditions for multiple-voltage external power supplies. For additional explanation, please refer to section 6.1.1 of the California Energy Commission's ``Proposed Test Protocol for Calculating the Energy Efficiency of Internal Ac-Dc Power Supplies Revision 6.2,'' November 2007.
(1) Consider a multiple-voltage power supply with N output busses, and nameplate output voltages V1, * * *, VN, corresponding output current ratings I1, * * *, IN, and a nameplate output power P. Calculate the derating factor D by dividing the power supply nameplate output power P by the sum of the nameplate output powers of the individual output busses, equal to the product of bus nameplate output voltage and current IiVi, as follows:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01JN11.023
(2) If D =1, then loading every bus to its nameplate output current does not exceed the overall nameplate output power for the power supply. In this case, each output bus will simply be loaded to the percentages of its nameplate output current listed in Table 1. However, if D <1, it is an indication that loading each bus to its nameplate output current will exceed the overall nameplate output power for the power supply. In this case, and at each loading condition, each output bus will be loaded to the appropriate percentage of its nameplate output current listed in Table 1, multiplied by the derating factor D.
(C) Minimum output current requirements. Depending on their application, some multiple-voltage power supplies may require a minimum output current for each output bus of the power supply for correct operation. In these cases, ensure that the load current for each output at Loading Condition 4 in Table 1 is greater than the minimum output current requirement. Thus, if the test method's calculated load current for a given voltage bus is smaller than the minimum output current requirement, the minimum output current must be used to load the bus. This load current shall be properly recorded in any test report.
(D) Test loads. Active loads such as electronic loads or passive loads such as rheostats used for efficiency testing of the unit under test shall be able to maintain the required current loading set point for each output voltage within an accuracy of 0.5 percent. If electronic load banks are used, their settings should be adjusted such that they provide a constant current load to the unit under test.
(E) Efficiency calculation. Efficiency shall be calculated by dividing the measured active output power of the unit under test at a given loading condition by the active AC input power measured at that loading condition. Efficiency shall be calculated at each Loading Condition (1, 2, 3, and 4, in Table 1) and be recorded separately.
(F) Power consumption calculation. Power consumption of the unit under test at Loading Conditions 1, 2, 3, and 4 is the difference between the active output power at that Loading Condition and the active AC input power at that Loading Condition. The power consumption of Loading Condition 5 (no-load) is equal to the AC active input power at that Loading Condition.
(ii) Off Mode Measurement--If the multiple-voltage external power supply unit under test incorporates any on-off switches, the unit under test shall be placed in off mode and its power consumption in off mode measured and recorded. The measurement of the off mode energy consumption shall conform to the requirements specified in paragraph (4)(b)(i) of this appendix. Note that the only loading condition that will be measured for off mode is ``Loading Condition 5'' in paragraph (A), ``Loading conditions and testing sequence'', except that all manual on-off switches shall be placed in the off position for the measurement. [71 FR 71366, Dec. 8, 2006, as amended at 74 FR 12066, Mar. 23, 2009; 74 FR 13334, Mar. 27, 2009; 76 FR 31782, June 1, 2011]
Sec. Appendix AA to Subpart B of Part 430--Uniform Test Method for
Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnace Fans
Note: Any representation made after July 2, 2014 for energy consumption of furnace fans must be based upon results generated under this test procedure. Upon the compliance date(s) of any energy conservation standard(s) for furnace fans, use of the applicable provisions of this test procedure to demonstrate compliance with the energy conservation standard will also be required.
1. Scope. This appendix covers the test requirements used to measure the energy consumption of fans used in weatherized and non-weatherized gas furnaces, oil furnaces, electric furnaces, and modular blowers.
2. Definitions. Definitions include the definitions as specified in section 3 of ASHRAE 103-2007 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) and the following additional definitions, some of which supersede definitions found in ASHRAE 103-2007:
2.1. Active mode means the condition in which the product in which the furnace fan is integrated is connected to a power source and circulating air through ductwork.
2.2. Airflow-control settings are programmed or wired control system configurations that control a fan to achieve discrete, differing ranges of airflow--often designated for performing a specific function (e.g., cooling, heating, or constant circulation)--without manual adjustment other than interaction with a user-operable control such as a thermostat that meets the manufacturer specifications for installed-use. For the purposes of this appendix, manufacturer specifications for installed-use shall be found in the product literature shipped with the unit.
2.3. ASHRAE 103-2007 means ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 103-2007, published in 2007 by ASHRAE, approved by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) on March 25, 2008, and entitled ``Method of Testing for Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency of Residential Central Furnaces and Boilers''. Only those sections of ASHRAE 103-2007 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3) specifically referenced in this test procedure are part of this test procedure. In cases where there is a conflict, the language of the test procedure in this appendix takes precedence over ASHRAE 103-2007.
2.4. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 41.1-1986 (RA 2006) means the test standard published in 1986, approved by ANSI on February 18, 1987, reaffirmed in 2006, and entitled ``Standard Method for Temperature Measurement'' (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
2.5. ASHRAE Standard 37-2009 means the test standard published in 2009 by ASHRAE entitled ``Methods of Testing for Rating Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment'' (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 430.3).
2.6. Default airflow-control settings are the airflow-control settings specified for installed-use by the manufacturer. For the purposes of this appendix, manufacturer specifications for installed-use are those specifications provided for typical consumer installations in the product literature shipped with the product in which the furnace fan is installed. In instances where a manufacturer specifies multiple airflow-control settings for a given function to account for varying installation scenarios, the highest airflow-control setting specified for the given function shall be used for the procedures specified in this appendix.
2.7. External static pressure (ESP) means the difference between static pressures measured in the outlet duct and return air opening (or return air duct when used for testing) of the product in which the furnace fan is integrated.
2.8. Furnace fan means an electrically-powered device used in a consumer product for the purpose of circulating air through ductwork.
2.9. Modular blower means a product which only uses single-phase electric current, and which:
(a) Is designed to be the principal air circulation source for the living space of a residence;
(b) Is not contained within the same cabinet as a furnace or central air conditioner; and
(c) Is designed to be paired with HVAC products that have a heat input rate of less than 225,000 Btu per hour and cooling capacity less than 65,000 Btu per hour.
2.10. Off mode means the condition in which the product in which the furnace fan is integrated either is not connected to the power source or is connected to the power source but not energized.
2.11. Seasonal off switch means a switch on the product in which the furnace fan is integrated that, when activated, results in a measurable change in energy consumption between the standby and off modes.
2.12. Standby mode means the condition in which the product in which the furnace fan is integrated is connected to the power source, energized, but the furnace fan is not circulating air.
2.13. Thermal stack damper means a type of stack damper that opens only during the direct conversion of thermal energy of the stack gases.
3. Classifications. Classifications are as specified in section 4 of ASHRAE 103-2007 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3).
4. Requirements. Requirements are as specified in section 5 of ASHRAE 103-2007 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). In addition, Fan Energy Rating (FER) of furnace fans shall be determined using test data and estimated national average operating hours pursuant to section 10.10 of this appendix.
5. Instruments. Instruments must be as specified in section 6, not including section 6.2, of ASHRAE 103-2007 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3); and as specified in section 5.1 and 5.2 of this appendix.
5.1. Temperature. Temperature measuring instruments shall meet the provisions specified in section 5.1 of ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) and shall be accurate to within 0.75 degree Fahrenheit (within 0.4 degrees Celsius).
5.1.1. Outlet Air Temperature Thermocouple Grid. Outlet air temperature shall be measured as described in section 8.2.1.5.5 of ASHRAE 103-2007 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) and illustrated in Figure 2 of ASHRAE 103-2007. Thermocouples shall be placed downstream of pressure taps used for external static pressure measurement.
5.2. Humidity. Air humidity shall be measured with a relative humidity sensor that is accurate to within 5% relative humidity. Air humidity shall be measured as close as possible to the inlet of the product in which the furnace fan is installed.
6. Apparatus. The apparatus used in conjunction with the furnace during the testing shall be as specified in section 7 of ASHRAE 103-2007 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) except for section 7.1, the second paragraph of section 7.2.2.2, section 7.2.2.5, and section 7.7, and as specified in sections 6.1, 6.2, 6.3,6.4, 6.5 and 6.6 of this appendix.
6.1. General. The product in which the furnace fan is integrated shall be installed in the test room in accordance with the product manufacturer's written instructions that are shipped with the product unless required otherwise by a specific provision of this appendix. The apparatus described in this section is used in conjunction with the product in which the furnace fan is integrated. Each piece of the apparatus shall conform to material and construction specifications and the reference standard cited. Test rooms containing equipment shall have suitable facilities for providing the utilities necessary for performance of the test and be able to maintain conditions within the limits specified.
6.2. Downflow furnaces. Install the internal section of vent pipe the same size as the flue collar for connecting the flue collar to the top of the unit, if not supplied by the manufacturer. Do not insulate the internal vent pipe during the jacket loss test (if conducted) described in section 8.6 of ASHRAE 103-2007 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) or the steady-state test described in section 9.1 of ASHRAE 103-2007. Do not insulate the internal vent pipe before the cool-down and heat-up tests described in sections 9.5 and 9.6, respectively, of ASHRAE 103-2007. If the vent pipe is surrounded by a metal jacket, do not insulate the metal jacket. Install a 5-ft test stack of the same cross sectional area or perimeter as the vent pipe above the top of the furnace. Tape or seal around the junction connecting the vent pipe and the 5-ft test stack. Insulate the 5-ft test stack with insulation having a minimum R-value of 7 and an outer layer of aluminum foil. (See Figure 3-E of ASHRAE 103-2007.)
6.3. Modular Blowers. A modular blower shall be equipped with the electric heat resistance kit that is likely to have the largest volume of retail sales with that particular basic model of modular blower.
6.4. Ducts and Plenums. Ducts and plenums shall be built to the geometrical specifications in section 7 of ASHRAE 103-2007. An apparatus for measuring external static pressure shall be integrated in the plenum and test duct as specified in sections 6.4, excluding specifications regarding the minimum length of the ducting and minimum distance between the external static pressure taps and product inlet and outlet, and 6.5 of ASHRAE 37-2009 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). External static pressure measuring instruments shall be placed between the furnace openings and any restrictions or elbows in the test plenums or ducts. For all test configurations, external static pressure taps shall be placed 18 inches from the outlet.
6.4.1. For tests conducted using a return air duct. Additional external static pressure taps shall be placed 12 inches from the product inlet. Pressure shall be directly measured as a differential pressure as depicted in Figure 8 of ASHRAE 37-2009 rather than determined by separately measuring inlet and outlet static pressure and subtracting the results.
6.4.2. For tests conducted without a return air duct. External static pressure shall be directly measured as the differential pressure between the outlet duct static pressure and the ambient static pressure as depicted in Figure 7a of ASHRAE 37-2009.
6.5. Air Filters. Air filters shall be removed.
6.6. Electrical Measurement. Only electrical input power to the furnace fan (and electric resistance heat kit for electric furnaces and modular blowers) shall be measured for the purposes of this appendix. Electrical input power to the furnace fan and electric resistance hate kit shall be sub-metered separately. Electrical input power to all other electricity-consuming components of the product in which the furnace fan is integrated shall not be included in the electrical input power measurements used in the FER calculation. If the procedures of this appendix are being conducted at the same time as another test that requires metering of components other than the furnace fan and electric resistance heat kit, the electrical input power to the furnace fan and electric resistance heat kit shall be sub-metered separately from one another and separately from other electrical input power measurements.
7. Test Conditions. The testing conditions shall be as specified in section 8, not including section 8.6.1.1, of ASHRAE 103-2007 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3); and as specified in section 7.1 of this appendix.
7.1. Measurement of Jacket Surface Temperature (optional). The jacket of the furnace or boiler shall be subdivided into 6-inch squares when practical, and otherwise into 36-square-inch regions comprising 4 in. x 9 in. or 3 in. x 12 in. sections, and the surface temperature at the center of each square or section shall be determined with a surface thermocouple. The 36-square-inch areas shall be recorded in groups where the temperature differential of the 36-square-inch area is less than 10 [deg]F for temperature up to 100 [deg]F above room temperature and less than 20 [deg]F for temperature more than 100 [deg]F above room temperature. For forced air central furnaces, the circulating air blower compartment is considered as part of the duct system and no surface temperature measurement of the blower compartment needs to be recorded for the purpose of this test. For downflow furnaces, measure all cabinet surface temperatures of the heat exchanger and combustion section, including the bottom around the outlet duct, and the burner door, using the 36 square-inch thermocouple grid. The cabinet surface temperatures around the blower section do not need to be measured (see figure 3-E of ASHRAE 103-2007.)
8. Test Procedure. Testing and measurements shall be as specified in section 9 of ASHRAE 103-2007 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) except for sections 9.1.2.1, 9.3, 9.5.1.1, 9.5.1.2.1, 9.5.1.2.2, 9.5.2.1, and section 9.7.1; and as specified in sections 8.1 through 8.6 of this appendix.
8.1. Direct Measurement of Off-Cycle Losses Testing Method. [Reserved]
8.2. Measurement of Electrical Standby and Off Mode Power. [Reserved]
8.3. Steady-State Conditions for Gas and Oil Furnaces. Steady-state conditions are indicated by an external static pressure within the range shown in Table 1 and a temperature variation in three successive readings, taken 15 minutes apart, of not more than any of the following:
(a) 3 [deg]F in the stack gas temperature for furnaces equipped with draft diverters;
(b) 5 [deg]F in the stack gas temperature for furnaces equipped with either draft hoods, direct exhaust, or direct vent systems; and
(c) 1 [deg]F in the flue gas temperature for condensing furnaces.
8.4. Steady-state Conditions for Electric Furnaces and Modular Blowers. Steady-state conditions are indicated by an external static pressure within the range shown in Table 1 and a temperature variation of not more than 5 [deg]F in the outlet air temperature in four successive temperature readings taken 15 minutes apart.
8.5. Steady-State Conditions for Cold Flow Tests. For tests during which the burner or electric heating elements are turned off (i.e., cold flow tests), steady-state conditions are indicated by an external static pressure within the range shown in Table 1 and a variation in the difference between outlet temperature and ambient temperature of not more than 3 [deg]F in three successive temperature readings taken 15 minutes apart.
8.6. Fan Energy Rating (FER) Test.
8.6.1. Initial FER test conditions and maximum airflow-control setting measurements. Measure the relative humidity (W) and dry bulb temperature (Tdb) of the test room.
8.6.1.1. Furnace fans for which the maximum airflow-control setting is not a default heating airflow-control setting. The main burner or electric heating elements shall be turned off. Adjust the external static pressure to within the range shown in Table 1 by symmetrically restricting the outlet of the test duct. Maintain these settings until steady-state conditions are attained as specified in section 8.3, 8.4, and 8.5 of this appendix. Measure furnace fan electrical input power (EMax), external static pressure (ESPMax), and outlet air temperature (TMax,Out).
8.6.1.2. Furnace fans for which the maximum airflow-control setting is a default heating airflow-control setting. Adjust the main burner or electric heating element controls to the default heat setting designated for the maximum airflow-control setting. Burner adjustments shall be made as specified by section 8.4.1 of ASHRAE 103-2007 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). Adjust the furnace fan controls to the maximum airflow-control setting. Adjust the external static to within the range shown in Table 1 by symmetrically restricting the outlet of the test duct. Maintain these settings until steady-state conditions are attained as specified in section 8.3, 8.4, and 8.5 of this appendix and the temperature rise ([Delta]TMax) is at least 18 [deg]F. Measure furnace fan electrical input power (EMax), fuel or electric resistance heat kit input energy (QIN, Max), external static pressure (ESPMax), steady-state efficiency for this setting (EffySS, Max) as specified in sections 11.2 and 11.3 of ASHRAE 103-2007, outlet air temperature (TMax,Out), and temperature rise ([Delta]TMax)
Table 1--Required Minimum External Static Pressure in the Maximum
Airflow-Control Setting by Installation Type------------------------------------------------------------------------
ESP (in. wc.)
Installation type *------------------------------------------------------------------------Units with an internal, factory-installed evaporator 0.50-0.55
coil...................................................Units designed to be paired with an evaporator coil, but 0.65-0.70
without one installed..................................Mobile home............................................. 0.30-0.35------------------------------------------------------------------------
Once the specified ESP has been achieved, the same outlet duct restrictions shall be used for the remainder of the furnace fan test.
8.6.2. Constant circulation airflow-control setting measurements. The main burner or electric heating elements shall be turned off. The furnace fan controls shall be adjusted to the default constant circulation airflow-control setting. If the manufacturer does not specify a constant circulation airflow-control setting, the lowest airflow-control setting shall be used. Maintain these settings until steady-state conditions are attained as specified in section 8.3, 8.4, and 8.5 of this appendix. Measure furnace fan electrical input power (ECirc) and external static pressure (ESPCirc).
8.6.3. Heating airflow-control setting measurements. For single-stage gas and oil furnaces, the burner shall be fired at the maximum heat input rate. For single-stage electric furnaces, the electric heating elements shall be energized at the maximum heat input rate. For multi-stage and modulating furnaces the reduced heat input rate settings shall be used. Burner adjustments shall be made as specified by section 8.4.1 of ASHRAE 103-2007 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3). After the burner is activated and adjusted or the electric heating elements are energized, the furnace fan controls shall be adjusted to operate the fan in the default heat airflow-control setting. In instances where a manufacturer specifies multiple airflow-control settings for a given function to account for varying installation scenarios, the highest airflow-control setting specified for the given function shall be used. High heat and reduced heat shall be considered different functions for multi-stage heating units. Maintain these settings until steady-state conditions are attained as specified in section 8.3, 8.4, and 8.5 of this appendix and the temperature rise ([Delta]THeat) is at least 18 [deg]F. Measure furnace fan electrical input power (EHeat), external static pressure (ESPHeat), steady-state efficiency for this setting (EffySS) as specified in sections 11.2 and 11.3 of ASHRAE 103-2007, outlet air temperature (THeat, Out) and temperature rise ([Delta]THeat).
9. Nomenclature. Nomenclature shall include the nomenclature specified in section 10 of ASHRAE 103-2007 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3) and the following additional variables: CH = annual furnace fan cooling hoursCCH = annual furnace fan constant-circulation hoursECirc = furnace fan electrical consumption at the default constant-circulation airflow-control setting (or minimum airflow-control setting operating point if a default constant-circulation airflow-control setting is not specified), in wattsEHeat = furnace fan electrical consumption in the default heat airflow-control setting for single-stage heating products or the default low-heat setting for multi-stage heating products, in wattsEMax = furnace fan electrical consumption in the maximum airflow-control setting, in watts ESPi = external static pressure, in inches water column, at time of the electrical power measurement in airflow-control setting i, where i can be ``Circ'' to represent constant-circulation (or minimum airflow) mode, ``Heat'' to represent heating mode, or ``Max'' to represent cooling (or maximum airflow) mode.FER = fan energy rating, in watts/1000 cfmHH = annual furnace fan heating operating hoursHCR = heating capacity ratio (nameplate reduced heat input capacity divided by nameplate maximum input heat capacity)kref = physical descriptor characterizing the reference systemTdb = dry bulb temperature of the test room, in [deg]FTi, In = inlet air temperature at time of the electrical power measurement, in [deg]F, in airflow-control setting i, where i can be ``Circ'' to represent constant-circulation (or minimum airflow) mode, ``Heat'' to represent heating mode, or ``Max'' to represent maximum airflow (typically designated for cooling) modeTi, Out = average outlet air temperature as measured by the outlet thermocouple grid at time of the electrical power measurement, in [deg]F, in airflow-control setting i, where i can be ``Circ'' to represent constant-circulation (or minimum airflow) mode, ``Heat'' to represent heating mode, or ``Max'' to represent maximum airflow (typically designated for cooling) mode[Delta]Ti = Ti, Out minus Ti, In, which is the air throughput temperature rise in setting i, in [deg]FQi = airflow in airflow-control setting i, in cubic feet per minute (CFM)QIN,i = for electric furnaces and modular blowers, the measured electrical input power to the electric resistance heat kit at specified operating conditions i in kW. For gas and oil furnaces, measured fuel energy input rate, in Btu/h, at specified operating conditions i based on the fuel's high heating value determined as required in section 8.2.1.3 or 8.2.2.3 of ASHRAE 103-2007, where i can be ``Max'' for the maximum heat setting or ``R'' for the reduced heat setting.W = humidity ratio in pounds water vapor per pounds dry airvair = specific volume of dry air at specified operating conditions per the equations in the psychrometric chapter in 2001 ASHRAE Handbook--Fundamentals in lb/ft\3\
10. Calculation of derived results from test measurements for a single unit. Calculations shall be as specified in section 11 of ASHRAE 103-2007 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 430.3), except for appendices B and C; and as specified in sections 10.1 through 10.10 and Figure 1 of this appendix.
10.1. Fan Energy Rating (FER)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03JA14.007
Where: Qmax = Qheat for products for which the maximum airflow-control setting
is a default heat setting, or
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03JA14.008
for products for which the maximum airflow control setting is only designated for cooling; and[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03JA14.009
The estimated national average operating hours presented in Table IV.2 shall be used to calculate FER.
Table IV.2--Estimated National Average Operating Hour Values for Calculating FER----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Single-stage Multi-stage or modulating
Operating mode Variable (hours) (hours)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Heating............................... HH....................... 830 830/HCR.Cooling............................... CH....................... 640 640.Constant Circulation.................. CCH...................... 400 400.---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Where:[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR03JA14.010 [79 FR 521, Jan. 3, 2014]